3741_Maintenance_Library_May75 3741 Maintenance Library May75
3741_Maintenance_Library_May75 3741_Maintenance_Library_May75
User Manual: 3741_Maintenance_Library_May75
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 599
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
-
--
=:
--- -- .- -
=
-====----
Maintenance Library
------- - -- --- - --
- -= - --= E Data Station
Theory-Maintenance
EC 823146
10/30/74
825853
825979
825958
826065
11/15/74
12/20/74
3/21/75
5/16/75
PN 1607500
3741 ML
0-1
EC
PREFACE
This is the only manual you need to maintain the
IBM 3741 Data Station. The manual contains
theory, operation procedures, MAPs, and removereplace-and-adjust procedures. It also contains part
numbers for the field replaceable units (FRUs).
All the information is in an easy-to-use graphic
format.
Display Viewer
Keyboard
The starting point for each call is on page 1-1.
Page 1-1 directs you to the Symptom Index. The
Symptom Index in turn, based on the symptom,
directs you to a MAP section. If the MAP does not
lead you to the cause of the trouble, go back to
the Symptom Index to look for another MAP, or
use the Basic Machine Checkout Procedure, MAP
7-1. If the symptom changes during machine warmup, use the last symptom to start the call. If there
are no specific symptoms to guide you, use MAP
7-1.
Each MAP section contains step-by-step procedures to locate the failing part, and the removereplace-and-adjust procedures to correct machine
error.
iBM 3741 Data Station
Check the manual to see how it is organized and
the information it contains.
CLEANING
CAUTION
Do not use sprays on the keys or near the keyboard. Do not use IBM cleaning fluid (methyl
chloroform) or isopropyl alcohol for cleaning.
Use a cloth dampened with mild soap water on
covers, CRT face, CRT filter, CRT mirror, and
keyboard.
Sixth Edition (August 1975)
Changes are continually made to the specifications herein.
This manual is under EC control and will be updated with
each Engineering Change applied to the machine this
manual accompanies.
Do not use this manual to service other machines as
they can have features not included in this manual, or
they can be at a different EC level.
© Copyright International
1973,1974,1975
Business Machines Corporation
825853
825958
826065
Date 9/15174
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607501
0-2
SAFETY
To ensure personal safety and the safety of coworkers, each CE should make it a practice to
observe safety precautions at all times. The CE
Safety Practices Card is reproduced below for
your reference.
CE SAFETY PRACTICES
All Customer Engineers are expected to take every safety pre·
caution possible. and observe the following safety practices
while maintaining IBM equipment:
1. Yeu should not work alone under hazardous conditions or
around equipment with dangerous voltage. Always advise
your manager if you MUST work olone.
2. Remove all power AC and DC when removing or assem·
bling major components, working in immediate area of
power supplies, performing mechanical inspection of power
supplies and installing changes in machine circuitry.
3. Wall box power switch when turned off should be locked
or tagged in off position. "00 not Operate" tags, form
229-1266, affixed when applicable. Pull power supply cord
whenever possible.
4. When it is absolutely necessary to work on equipment having exposed operating mechanical parts or exposed live
electrical circuitry anywhere in the machine, the following
precautions must be followed:
a. Another person familiar with power off controls must
be in immediate vicinity.
b. Rings, wrist watches, chains, bracelets, metal cuff links,
shall not be worn.
c. Only insulated pliers and screwdrivers shall be used.
d. Keep one hand in pocket.
e. When using test instruments be certain controls are set
correctly and proper capacity, insulated probes are used.
f. Avoid contacting g round potential (metal floor strips,
machine frames, etc. - use suitable rubber mats pur·
chased locally if necessary).
5. Safety Glasses must be worn when:
o. Using a hammer to drive pins, riveting, staking, etc.
b. Power hand drilling, reaming, grinding, etc.
c. Using spring hooks, attaching springs.
d. Soldering, wire cutting, removing steel bonds.
e. Parts cleaning, using solvents, sprays, cleaners, chemicals,
etc.
f. All other conditions that may be hazardous to your
eyes. REMEMBER, THEY ARE YOUR EYES.
6. Special safety instructions such as handling Cathode Ray
Tubes and extreme high voltages, must be followed as
outlined in CEM's and Safety Section of the Maintenance
Manuals.
7. Do not use solvents, chemicals, greases or oils that have
not been approved by IBM.
8. Avoid using tools or test equipment that have not been
approved by IBM.
9. Replace worn or broken tools and test equipment.
10. Lift by standing or pushing up with stronger leg musclesthis tokes strain off back muscles. Do not lift any equipment or parts weighing over 60 pounds.
11. All safety devices such as guards, shields, signs, ground
wires, etc. shall be restored after maintenance.
KNOWING SAFETY RULES IS NOT ENOUGH
AN UNSAFE ACT WILL INEVITABLY LEAD TO
AN ACCIDENT
USE GOOD JUDGMENT - ELIMINATE
UNSAFE ACTS
12. Each Customer Engineer is responsible to be certain that
no action on his part renders product unsafe or exposes
hazards to customer personnel.
13. Place removed machine covers in a safe out-of.the·way
place where no one can trip over them.
14. All machine cavers must be in place before machine is returned to customer.
15. Alwuys place CE tool kit away from walk areas where no
one can trip over it (i.e., under desk or table).
16. Avoid touching mechanical moving parts (i.e., when lubri·
cating, checking for play, etc.).
17. When using stroboscope - do not touch ANYTHING - it
may be moving.
18. Avoid wearing loose clothing that may be caught in machin·
ery. Shirt sleeves must be left buttoned or rolled above the
elbow.
19. Ties must be tucked in shirt or have a tie clasp (preferably
nonconductive) approximately 3 inches from end. Tie chains
are not recommended.
20. Before starting equipment, make certain fellow CE's and
customer personnel are not in a hazardous position.
21. Maintain good housekeeping in area of machines while performing and after completing maintenance.
CRT SAFETY
Storage
You must be especially aware of the dangerous
voltages present in a 3741 and the potential
hazard presented by an unprotected cathode ray
tube (CRT). Thus, the following DANGER notice
appears here.
1.
Tubes must be kept in the carton or unit
except when exposure is required for inspection or test.
2.
Adequate storage area must be provided for
all CRTs. Tubes should be stacked in such
a manner that they cannot easily be tipped
over and will not be a problem to handle
when removed from the stack. It is recommended that the storage area be away from
the normal flow of internal trucking and
pedestrian traffic.
DANGER
Voltages of 12,000,400, +12 and -12 in the
3741. Be careful when working in the area of
the high voltage power supply and CRTs. Do
not remove the high voltage lead from the CRT
following power off until the high voltage lead
and anode have been grounded.
All CEs should become familiar with the general
safety practices and procedures for performing
artificial respiration that are outlined in CE
Safety Practices (form 229-1264). In addition,
each CE should review general safety CEM #45 on
CRT safety.
Testing
Personnel who test CRTs must be instructed in
the dangers and precautions to be observed.
Protective Equipment
Cathode Ray Tubes - Safe Handling
Cathode ray tubes contain a high vacuum and are
subject to implosion. Such an implosion can propel
flying glass, thus presenting a source of personal
injury. Therefore, when handling CRTs, be careful.
Transportation Handling
1.
Cathode ray tubes must be enclosed when
received, transported, or otherwise moved
from area to area. If they are shipped in a
carton, they must be in the original carton
or one of equivalent strength and securely
sealed to prevent accidental opening. Also,
original or equivalent packing materials and/
or forms must be placed inside the carton
to properly support and protect the tube.
If tubes are transported in a unit or piece
of equipment, the equipment must be able
to contain the glass fragments if an implosion occurs.
2.
Each CRT carton must be identified with a
"DANGER Cathode Ray Tube Implosion
Hazard" label.
3.
All persons handling tubes or in the vicinity
of exposed CRTs under vacuum must wear
safety glasses.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
Persons handling or working with or near unprotected CRTs must wear safety glasses.
Defective CRT Disposition
No attempt should be made to repair defective
CRTs in the field. A defective CRT should be
properly packed and disposed of in accordance
with CRT disposition procedures.
PN 1607502
3741 ML
0-3
EC
CE'S QUICK REFERENCE TO FEATURE INFORMATION
825853
825958
826065
11/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607503
0-4
Information to complete the following is available from customer engineering field
management or the account salesman.
At machine installation time, indicate the presence of factory installed features by filling in Install Date
Fill in others when you install the field bills.
Machine type _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Model _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Serial number _ _ _ _ _ __
I nstall Date
Feature
Model 1
Model 2
BSCA
Not available
Standard
CPU identification of line, or multipoint polling address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Type of service (switched, non-switched, 2w/4w,
Optional
privat€'~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Feature group A
Production statistics
Verify
Self-check (modulus 10
and modulus 11)
Field totals (online)
Field totals (offline)
Disk initialization
Optional
Expansion feature (feature E)
Printer adapter (3713, 3715,3717)
Second disk adapter
Optional
Optional
Customer contact at remote location _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Second disk
Optional
Optional
Communications facility contacts responsible for this system:
Printer (3713, 3715, 3717)
Optional
Optional
Synchronous clock
Not available
Optional
Terminal identification
Not available
Optional
Keylock
Not available
Optional
Operator ID card reader
Not available
Optional
1200 bps line adapter
(non-switched, switched)
Not available
Optional
Expanded BSCA
Not available
Optional
Multipoint data-link control
Not available
Optional
Record insert
Optional
Optional
Proof keyboard
Optional
Optional
Katakana (five added program
storage areas)
Optional
Optional
Data recorder attachment
Optional
Optional
I/O adapter
Optional
Optional
Modem type _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Line speed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ BPS
Common carrier line idehtification _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Remote machine type _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Location _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone number
RPQs
Note: Refer to Chapter 16 for information about printer and communications jumpering_
Name
Modem
line
Telephone
NORMAL SERVICE FLOW IN USE OF THE MLM
r
~--Customer
Reported Problem
Branch Qlile, Sp,elalist
r---~-~--~
1. Start of Call
Symptom Index
Error codes
Display
Keyboard
Miscellaneous
-
I _______
No Symptom -1L
-
MAP Section
2. Disk
3. Display
4. Keyboard
5. MPU-Features
6. Power
-7:-BaSicChecko~-
Service Sections
200 Disk
300 Display
400 Keyboard
500 MPU-Features
600 Power
700 Basic Checkout
I
I
I
I
I
I
Part Numbers
IR Codes
Test Points
Remove/Replace
Adjustments
t
8. Diagnositc Aids
i+----OR
9. Operating Procedures
1
Theory Sections
10. Introduction
11. Disk
12. Display
13. Keyboard
14. MPU-Features
15. Power
CE - when MAPs fail
Branch Office Specialist
Region-designated Specialist
I
-
16.
17.
18.
31.
Installation Procedures
Glossary
Index
RPQ's
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619556
3741 ML
0-5
\
lEe 826066
8/1n5
MAP RULES SUMMARY
•
POWER UP - turn power switch ON.
Always wait at least five seconds after a power
down before powering up to allow for proper
power-on reset (PO R).
• Start of Call, page 1-1, ensu res that the highest
priority symptom index group is used.
•
PROBE - use IBM universal logic probe, PN
453212.
•
Use the most consistent symptom after power
up. Use the last error code to be displayed.
•
RECONNECT - physically/electrically put
back together.
•
The MAPs are designed to locate a F R U that
has a single mechanical or electrical failure. If
the symptom changes after an adjustment or
F R U replacement, use Start df Call, page 1-1,
with the new symptom.
•
REMOVE a diskette - take the diskette out
of the disk drive.
•
REPLACE - put new part in place of original
part.
•
REINSTALL - put original part back in place
of new part.
•
RESEAT - remove, unplug, unfasten, or detach
an object from its position or mounting and
put the same object back in its place again.
•
UN LOAD a diskette - open the disk drive
cover (does not mean remove).
For other information, see How to Use This Manual,
page 10-5.
•
If you cannot decide which MAP to use, use
MAP 7-1, the Basic Machine Checkout Procedure. MAP 7-1 guides you to the correct
MAP.
• When asked to probe or measure multiple points
in a table, probe or measure only until a failure
is indicated.
•
If.a probe is connected to its machine power
source, the UP and DOWN lights momentarily
flash on during power up. Please ignore this
situation.
Definitions
•
DISCONN ECT - physically/electrically take
apart.
•
LOAD a diskette - close the disk drive cover
(with a diskette in the drive). Usually at the
faulty station.
•
MEASURE - use IBM CE multimeter, PN
452796.
•
ORIGINAL keyboard or disk d'rive - the keyboard or disk drive located at the station with
reported fault.
•
OTHER keyboard or disk drive - the opposite
of original keyboard or disk drive.
•
POWER DOWN - turn power switch OFF.
PN .1619557
0-6
START OF CALL
Is there an RPO installed? Y
- A checkmark in the Y or N box indicates the
MAP path to follow. If neither box is checkmarked,
determine if an RPQ is installed by looking at the
machine history card and for an RPQ Section 31
in this ML. Check mark the appropriate Y, N box
and continue down that MAP path.
N
D 0
Is there a valid error code displayed
mreported?- - - - - - - - - - - - ~
Y
N
Power down.
Remove any diskettes.
I....
Power up.
- Wait for warm up (about 25 seconds).
Can you see tbe failure on the display before
a diskette is loaded or a key is pressed? lEI
Y
N
- Load a diskette at the failing data station.
Can you see the failure on the display
before pressing a key?
After Power Up,
No Diskette Loaded
An error code as shown in the symptom index. No
hex characters or additional characters are allowed
in the blank positions shown in the error code
descriptions of symptom index.
Display:
Normal
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control:
Normal
1m
Y
I
Error code
(use last one)?
Y
N
N
e
Is the reported failure a result of
a keying operation?
YI
N
Error code
Do you have any other symptom?
(uselastone)?Y
N
Y
N
- Use MAP 7-1.
II
Diskette Loaded
Display:
Normal
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control:
Normal
\
The data set labels
could have different
information (except the cursor).
lin is I
nijlij~
~Gge
at eel
eJ eO'l
~'lesp
Gl
MPU-FEATURES
•
eeeee
POWER
MACHINE CHECKOUT
700 MACHINE CHECKOUT
OPERATING PROCEDURES
•
INTRODUCTION
DISK THEORY
•
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
GLOSSARY
RPQs
Parts Catalog
S131-0585
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
11111111111
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607504
3741 ML
1-1
EC
SYMPTOM INDEX
INDEX OF VALID ERROR CODES
See page 9-2 for error code locations on the display.
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1607505
1-2
All Models
Code Display
Position
Page
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
? ?
0
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Code Display
Position
456 7 8 9 10
1-2
B
C
0
0
D
D
E
? ?
? ?
? ?
7 ? ?
A
A 4
B
P
Q
R
R
R
R
R
S
T
U
U
U
U
U
U
V
W
1-5
1-6
K
L
M
N
N
Page
456 7 8 9 10
1-4
0
3
5
J
? ?
Code Display
Position
4
F
G
H
I
? ?
7
I
Page
1-7
? ?
Code Display
Position
Page
456 7 8 9 10
W 0
W 5
W 6
X
1-8
0
1
2
4
Code Display
Position
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-10
Y
Z 5
Z 6
,
+
=
1-9
0
1
2
3
4
*>
(
&
A 1
A 2
A 3
Page
1-11
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
A
A
A
A
A
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Code Display
Position
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
5
6
8
9
o
0
1
2
3
4
5
9
9
9
9
Page
x
2
x
x
x
x
x
x ? ?
1
2
5
6
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
1-12.1
1-12.2
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
9 7
9 8
9 9
A x
B x
C 1
E x
V x
Wx
X x
1-12.3
Z
8
8
8
8
8
8
z
z
z
z
1
2
4
6
7
8
0
1-3
Models 3 and 4 Mode
Code Display
Position
Page
456 7 8 9 10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
x
x
x
1
2
3
4
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
0
2
3
Code Display
Position
Page
456 7 8 9 10
1-1.7
1-1.8
1-1.9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
9
9
9
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
4
5
7
8
9
B
C
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
Code Display
Position
Page
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-1.10
1-1.11
1-1.12
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 6
0 7
5 3
5 5
x 0
x 1
x 2
x 3
x 4
x 5
x 6
x 7
x 8
x 9
x ?
x A
x 0
x 3
Code Display
Position
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-1.13
1-1.14
1-1.15
1-1.16
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
8
8
8
8
8
Page
34 35
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
y
y
y
y
y
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
1 y
S
0
0
0
4
5
8
9
1-1.17
0
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
B
C
D
1-1.18
1-1.19
E
1
2
4
6
7
Code Display
Position
z
z
z
z
z
1-12.5
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
y
8
9
0
2
3
B
C
E
F
G
W
0
1
2
3
Page
34 35
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
Page
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Code Display
Position
1-12.6
1-1.20
4
5
6
y
1-1.21
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
4
4
5
5
8
8
9
9
1 0
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 9
_. H in column 1
I I I I I I
1-1.22
1-1.23
1-5
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display Position
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
?
?
0
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
Unload and load the diskette.
2·6
Early diskette removal
-
-
Printer attachment error
- Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted to print.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Use the
correct record length.
-
Hold down N UM SH I FT and press RESET.
7·19
Load a diskette. Press RESET.
1
2·2
Length
-
2
2·2
No record found
- The disk read ERP failed because the ID field was not found.
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
2-9
Seek (record insert)
- Seek error. An auto return to the index track is performed with
the EOD being updated. Duplicate records can exist in the data
set. The hold buffer is not blanked.
7-19
Printer attachment error
-
2-9
Seek
- Seek ERP failed because a track match did not occur.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
2-2
Read
-
-
2-4
Write test
- Write
2-4
Write
-
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
-
2-2
Deleted record
(D in position 001)
-
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Press
7-19
Printer attachment error
-
2·4
Write test
- Write gate error.
-
2·2
Address
- A newly developed disk address is out of the current extent for a
data set or is off the disk.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Use a
2
?
?
3
3
?
?
4
4
?
?
5
5
?
?
6
6
?
?
7
7
A
A
Removed the diskette while disk operations were in process.
Removed the diskette while not on the index track.
4
?
?
Record length was incorrect for this disk operation.
Unload and load the diskette.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted to print.
Disk ERP failed with a read error. The first record written on the
disk after the read error can be incorrect.
gat~
error.
Disk write and write check ERP failed.
Last record read has a control address mark (such as is required for
a deleted record).
Unload and load the diskette.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Unload and load the diskette.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Unload and load the diskette.
REC ADV. If the error occurred on the index track,
change positi~n 1 to an H, press FUNCT SEL lower,
M, and REC ADV.
Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted to print.
Unload and load the diskette.
correct address.
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
- Unload and load the diskette.
2-1
Data set non-accessible
- The data set accessibility code field in the data set label or in the
volume label has a non-blank character.
-
Remove the diskette.
Read error I D
-
-
Remove the diskette.
No MAP
Read error on the index track followed by the detection of a source
data set label.
1
EC 826065
I
811n5
PN 1619558
3741 ML
1-2.1
lEe 826065
8/1/75
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619559
I
1-2.2
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
56789
B
10
Diagnostic
MAP
2-1
Description
Cause
Bad data set label
- One of the following conditions existed when you attempted to
select a mode from track 00:
1. The last record read and currently displayed is from track 00,
records 01 through 07.
2. Position 4 of the header field in the data set label does not
contain a 1.
3. The data set label is flagged with a control address mark (such
as is requ ired for a deleted record).
C
D
Press RESET and REC ADV.
-
Press RESET and enter a 1 in position 4, press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
Enter H in position 1, press FUNCT SEL lower, M.,
and REC ADV.
-
BOE is less than track 01, record 01.
-
-
EOE is greater than track 74, record 26.
-
-
EOE is less than BOE. EOE and/or BOE are incorrect.
-
BOE, EOE, or EOO is zero.
-
EOD is less than BOE. EOD and/or BOE are incorrect.
-
BOE, EOE, or EOD record is greater than 26.
-
EOD is greater than EOE plus 1.
-
EOD is greater than track 75, record 01.
Record length (positions 23 through 27) is greater than 128 or
equal to zero.
- Non-numeric characters are in positions where numeric characters
are required in the data set.
- Head specification is not zero.
4
-
-
-
B
Operating Procedure
Press RESET and enter the correct BO E. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
Press RESET and enter the correct EO E. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Then
press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Then
press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Then
press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct EOD. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
Press RESET and enter the correct EOD. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter L1L1128 in positions 23 through
27. Then press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and re-enter, press FUNCT SEL lower,
M, and REC ADV.
Press RESET and re-enter head 0, press FUNCT
SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
-
-
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
-
Unload and load the diskette.
4-2
Self-check
- The self-check digit does not compare properly.
- The self-check field is blank in verify (V) mode.
-
Press RESET, FIELD BKSP, and re-enter the field.
Press RESET and enter the self-check digit.
-
7-7
Communications line check
- There is no activity on the communications line for 20 seconds or
no initial linkup can be established with the remote end.
-
Note the displayed address. Call the remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point on the
disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
7-7
Communications disk full
-
-
Press RESET. Load a new diskette. Enter communications (C) mode. Call the remote end to re-establish linkup.
-
Press RESET. Wait until disk 2 is ready, then continue processing. If the disk 2 feature is not installed,
use a machine that has disk 2.
-
2-6
Disk 2 not ready
Disk overflows in receive mode.
Disk index track overflows.
No valid index.
No disk 2.
- A disk 2 record advance was attempted with one of the following
conditions existing:
1. Disk 2 unit is not installed.
2. Disk 2 is not ready.
EC 825979
II
12/20/74
825958
826065
~/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607506
3741 ML
'-3
EC
825853
825958
826065
11/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607507
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5
6
7
8
D
0
D
D
E
F
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
2-6
Diskette removed
-
-
Load a diskette. Hold down NUM SHI FT and press
RESET.
3
2-9
Seek
- Seek ERP failed because a track match did not occur.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
5
2-4
Write error
- The record at the currently displayed disk address was written
in error. The record was one of the deleted records being inserted.
- Press RESET.
2-2
End of extent
- Attempted to read from disk 2 beyond the last record in the
-
4-2
No MAP
7-5
data set.
- Attempted to write to disk 1 beyond EOE.
- The last non-deleted record is verified. (This is not an error.)
Press RESET and continue the job on another data
set or diskette.
- Press RESET and change EOE in the disk 1 data set label.
- Press RESET and continue.
Function not available
- The key pressed after FUNCT SEL is not valid.
- The selected function is not installed
-
Invalid condition
- The key pressed following FUNCT SEL lower and M is not
REC ADV or DELETE REC.
- Press RESET and REC ADV to write the label on the
disk or press DELETE REC to delete the label.
- The selected function is not installed.
-
- Move the job to another machine where the feature
is installed.
Printer function not available
3713
7-19
3715
- The selected function is not installed or the machine failed.
Use 3717 MLM
3717
-
The printer jumpers are incorrectly installed.
Press RESET and the valid key.
Move the job to another machine where the function
is installed.
Move the job to another machine where the function
is installed.
-
Install the jumpers correctly.
Move the job to another machine where the function
is installed.
5-40
Data recorder function
not available
- The selected function is not installed or the machine failed.
-
7-7
Communications function
not available
- BSCA or EBSCA function not installed.
- Keying error.
- Press RESET, FUNCT SEL upper, and COMM.
7-21
G
Removed the diskette while waiting for a disk error to be
cleared on record insert mode. The EOD in the data set label
is not updated. Duplicate records can exist in the data set.
The hold buffer is not blanked.
4-2
7-7
I/O adapter function
not available
Write protect
Communications write protect
Machine failure.
Press RESET and rekey.
- The selected function is not installed.
Keying error.
-
- Enter (E) or verify(V) mode is selected and the data set is protected.
- Press RESET and select update (U) mode.
- Press RESET and either change the label or press
REC ADV to a proper label.
- Press RESET and either change the data set label
or use a different data set.
-
Attempted to write to the disk with the data set protected.
-
At EOD minus 1 of a data set in update (U) mode, and using
R EC ADV when the data set is protected.
- The first data set label available for receive is write-protected.
- Press RESET, and change the data set label or use
a different diskette for receive.
1-4
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
4
Code
Display Position
56789
H
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
4-2
Copy Setup
- After pressing COPY:
1. The disk 2 address is less than track 00, sector 08.
2. After loading a diskette in disk 2, you must press DISK 2 REC
ADV to display the first data set label (00008). This error occurs
if you do not press DISK 2 REC ADV to display a data set label
prior to copy setup.
3. COpy was not pressed with any shift key.
-
Disk 1 is on track 00 but disk 2 is not on track 00.
- SEARCH SEQ CONTENT was pressed in copy setup.
I
Operating Procedure
- Press RESET and advance to the proper disk 2 address.
- Press RESET, FUNCT SEL upper, and DISK 2 REC
ADV.
-
Press RESET and ALPHA SHIFT or NUM SHIFT
with COPY.
- Press RESET, FUNCT SEL upper, and DISK 2
RET TO INDEX.
- Press RESET and the correct key.
7-7
Communications setup error
- Machine is not in X or U mode before C mode.
- Cursor is past position 16 when entering C mode.
- Machine is at bad index when entering C mode.
- Keylock is not turned on.
- A transmit mode (T, P, or J) was selected after print unattended.
- Inquiry mode was selected and the record length of the data set
was not 128.
- Receive mode or inquiry mode was selected and the first data set
EOE was greater than 73026.
- Communications was entered from update (U) mode and current
disk address is greater than 73026.
- Inquiry mode was selected from update (U) mode and EOD is
greater than 73026.
- An invalid CE test mode was selected.
- Print unattended function is selected and AUTO REC ADV is OFF.
- Receive data and insert constants program is not the same length as the
record length on the data set selected from update (U) mode.
-
Press RESET. Use the correct setup procedure.
7-21
I/O adapter
setup error
-
-
Press RESET. Use the correct setup procedure.
4-2
Search address
- Search address contains a non-decimal character.
- Search address is not valid.
- Search address is not within the extents of the data set.
-
Press RESET. Use a valid search address.
7-7
Communications data set
not ready
-
Modem 'data set ready' line has gone off prematurely.
-
Note the displayed address. Call remote end to setup the Iine connection again. Determine the start
point on disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
4-2
Number of records
-
Number of records specified is not 01 through 99 (00 gives an
I error or above, 99 reads the first 2 columns only).
Press RESET, then press N UM SH I FT and enter
the number of records to be inserted. Press FUNCT
SEL lower and RIGHT ADJ.
- Press RESET. Check data set.
Invalid mode selected.
- Insufficient room is in the data set to insert the number of
-
records specified. The number of records to be inserted must be
equal to or less than EOE minus EOD plus 1.
7-19
Printer attachment error
-
Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted a print
operation.
EC 823146
II
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1607508
3741 ML
1-5
EC 823146
825853
826065
9/15/74
11/15/75
8/1/75
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5
6
789
Diagnostic
MAP
10
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
-
Press RESET. Remove the diskette. Load the next
diskette. Press FUNCT SEL upper. Hold down
NUM SHIFT and press PRINT TO EOD.
J
7-5
Print to EOD
-
K
4-2
Keying
-
Numeric shift A or Z key was pressed.
PROG NUM SHIFT switch is set to the NUMBERS ONLY position
and the character keyed is not 0 through 9, -, space, +, any alpha
shifted characters, or while in a program numeric field.
- The data key pressed following the H EX key is not a valid hex digit.
- An invalid key code (a World Trade key code was detected in a
United States machine).
- KANA SYMB and a non-Katakana key were pressed together on a
Katakana machine.
-
Press RESET. Press only valid keys.
L
4-2
Incorrect function
-
CHAR ADV was pressed in verify (V) mode.
DISPLAY PROD STAT was pressed when not in read index (X) or
enter (E) mode.
- FIELD ADV was pressed in verity (V) mode.
- REC BKSP was pressed in field c~rrect (C) mode.
- REC ADV is not valid in field correct (C) mode.
-
Press RESET. Press only valid keys.
M
4-2
Mode select:on
- ·Selected COpy mode from update (U), verify (V), or field correct
(C) mode.
- Selected enter (E) mode from other than index (X) mode.
- Selected field correct (C) mode while in an auto field with the AUTO
DUP/SKIP switch on or currently at the end of the record.
- Attempted the modify index function (FUNCT SEL lower, M) while
not on track 00.
- Selected search (S) mode from verify (V) or field correct (C) mode.
- Selected SEARCH CONTENT or SEARCH SEQ CONTENT from verify (V)
or field correct (C), or selected SEARCH CONTENT from enter (E) mode.
- Selected update (U) mode from ent~r (E) mode or from search (8) mode
when search was selected from enter (E) mode.
- Selected verify (V) mode from enter (E) or search (8) mode.
- Selected offline field totals from verify (V) mode or field correct (C) mode.
- Selected communications mode from verify (V), enter (E), or search
(S) mode.
- Selected PROG LOAD in verify (V) or field correct (C) mode.
- Selected PRI NT TO EOD in verify (V) or field correct (C) mode.
- FI ELD COR pressed when not in verify (V) mode.
- Disk initialization selected when 3741 was not in index (X) mode.
- Pressed 0 ISPLA Y PROG with either shift key while in verify (V) or field
correct (C) mode.
- Pressed SEL PROG while in field correct (C) mode.
- Selected SEARCH CONTENT when on the last record in the data set.
\
This error occurs when the printer has printed the last record of
the current disk of a continued data set.
Press RESET. Perform proper mode selection.
PN 1607509
1-6
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
N
0
?
?
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
4-2
Keyboard overrun
-
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
4-2
Operation
-
Operating Procedure
Keying rate exceeded machine capacity.
Pressed DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS when notat the first
position of a field.
- While in"a right-adjust field, pressed DUP when not at the first
position of the field.
- Pressed SEL PROG when the current program is not on a field
boundary.
- While in enter (E) mode, right-adjust field, pressed R EC ADV while
not at the first position of the field.
- Pressed REC ADV after pressing any search key with NUM SHIFT.
-
Pressed RIGHT ADJ while not in a right-adjust field except when
at end of the record.
- Pressed SKI P DUP, R EC ADV, or in a right-adjust field and not at the
first position of the right-adjust field.
- Pressed DISPLAY PROD STAT in enter (E) mode:
1. While not in program level O.
2. With the cursor not in position 1.
- SKIP, DUP, or REC ADV pressed in a self-check field and not at
start of the self-check field.
P
4-2
Program
Press RESET and continue.
-
Press RESET and select program level O.
Press RESET and move the cursor to position 1.
Press RESET and move the cursor to the start of
self-check field.
-
Press RESET and enter a valid program number.
Unload and load the diskette.
Press RESET and move the cursor to the first
position of the field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first
position of the field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first
position on the field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first
position of the field.
- Press RESET, FUNCT SEL upper, and DISK 2
REC ADV.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to right-adjust
field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to th e first
position of the right-adjust field.
- The key pressed following SEL PROG or PROG LOAD is not a
valid program number.
- Selected a new program while not at a field boundary.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to a field
-
-
Invalid begin field character.
- The first position of a program buffer is a continue field character.
Q
-
boundary.
Press RESET and enter a valid begin field character in the program.
- Press RESET and enter a begin field character in
the first position.
7-19
Printer attachment error
-
4-2
Field totals
- No . (period) or digit follows the format character.
- The position number is greater than 128.
- No N or W follows the position number.
- An invalid character follows the mask.
- Format 1 to 9 or A not specified in the mask statement.
- No sign found at the beginning of the format statement.
-
Press RESET. Rewrite the control statement.
-
-
Note the displayed address. Call the remote end to
re-establish linkup. Establish the start point on the
disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted a print operation.
<
7-7
Communications message
aborted
Received 4 consecutive negative responses to the same data record.
EC 823146
I
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
811175
PN 1607510
3741 ML 1-7
EC 823146
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
6
5
7
8
R
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
7-7
Communications remote end
abort
-
-
4-2
Right-adjust
- Entered a data key after the right-adjust field was full, except in
Remote end terminates communications prematurely by sending'
EOT or disconnect (D LE EOT).
verify (V) mode.
- Entered a data key after all non-fill characters were verified.
A mismatch occurred on a fill character for a right-adjust field.
- Pressed - (dash) or RIGHT ADJ at the start of a field that is not
all fill characters. The error occurs when the first non-fill character
is encountered.
- Pressed key other than RIGHT ADJ to exit the field.
- Pressed RIGHT ADJ, or NUM SHIFT and - (dash) when not
at the start of an all fill character field or not at the end of the rightadjust field.
R
0
2·6
Diskette removed
- Removed the diskette while waiting for a disk error to be cleared
- Press RESET and RIGHT ADJ.
-
Press RESET and RIGHT ADJ.
Press RESET and correct the fill character.
- Press RESET and if the dash and right-adjust are
correct, press FIELD COR.
-
-
-
1
2-2
Length error
- Length error in record read. The record is written with a record
Press RESET and RIGHT ADJ.
Press RESET and key correctly.
- Load a diskette. Hold down NUM SHIFT and
press RESET.
on record insert mode. The EOD in the data set label is not updated.
Duplicate records can exist in the data set. The hold buffer is not
blanked.
R
Note the displayed address. Call the remote end to
set up the line connection again. Determine the
start point on the disk. Enter communications (C)
mode.
-
Press RESET.
length corresponding to the record length in the data set label.
The disk address of the record written is determined as described
in the R2 error.
R
2
2-2
No record found
- The record at the displayed disk address could not be found. A
blank record is written to disk at an address determined by the
displayed address plus the number of records to be inserted.
-
Press RESET.
R
4
2-2
Read error
- The record read is in error. The record is written to disk at an
address determined by the displayed address plus the number of
records to be inserted.
-
Press RESET.
7-7
Operator initiated termination
during communications
operation
-
-
Press RESET and continue.
4-SF
Search
- The search mask did not match any record.
- A disk error occurred that failed the disk ERP. The disk error is
displayed in position S on the status line.
-
Press RESET. If there is not a numeric error displayed, attempt a different search mask. If a numeric error is displayed, use that verification
procedure.
4-2
Operational error
-
- Press RESET. Usually caused when AUTO REC
S
T
Pressed RESETwhile the machine was transmitting a status message.
Attempted to enter data beyond the logical record length.
ADV is OFF. Press REC ADV.
- Pressed DISPLAY PROD STAT in enter (E) mode and the record
(continued)
I
- Press RESET. Change the record length to 21.
length is less than 21.
- Pressed RIGHT ADJ at the end of the record.
-
Press RESET. Press REC ADV.
PN 1607511
1-8
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
4
5
Code
Display Position
6
7
8
9
T (continued)
10
Diagnostic
MAP
7·7
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
Communications transparency
error
-
-
Detected a data link control character in the data to transmit.
- SYN, EOT, DLE, NAK, END, ETS, ETX, ITS, STX, or
SOH in T, S, J, or K mode.
- IRS, or IFS in J or K mode.
U
7·19
Printer attachment error
- Feature half planar ROS failed when you attempted a print operation.
7·7
Communications received
data block
-
7·5
5-19
7·19
Use 3717 MLM
I
Printer
3713
Received a data block when in transmit mode.
Note the displayed address. Press RESET. Correct
the data on the diskette. Establish the start point
on the disk. Enter communications (C) mode. Call
the remote end to set up the line connection again.
- Or use transparent mode of transmission (P or D
mode).
- Press RESET. Place the machine in receive mode if
the remote end intends to transmit data.
- The printer has run out of forms.
- The printer has failed.
- The printer left margin was changed.
-
Press RESET. Check/load forms.
-
Power down. Wait 5 seconds. Power up.
3715 status;:: 15
(line 6 position 1)
- The printer is out of forms.
- The printer power switch is off.
- Printer has failed.
3715 status;:: 163
(line 6 position 1)
-
Illegal character in data.
-
Press RESET. Correct illegal character or move the
PROG NUM SHIFT switch to the ALL CHAR position to print blanks for illegal characters.
Press RESET. Check/load forms.
- Press RESET. Turn printer power switch on.
3717
U
0
2-6
Diskette removed
-
Removed a diskette while waiting for a printer error to be cleared.
-
Load a diskette. Hold down NUM SH IFT and press
RESET.
U
1
2·2
Length error
Disk length error and printer error occurred during a print operation.
2
2·2
No record found
-
Press RESET twice.
U
-
U
3
2·9
Seek
-
A diskette seek error and a printer error occurred during a print
operation.
-
Press RESET twice.
U
4
2-2
Read error
-
A diskette read error and a printer error occurred during a print
operation.
-
Press RESET twice.
4-2
Verify mismatch
-
A mismatch occurs between the current data keystroke and the
data character in the record.
A character in an auto skip field is not blank.
A mismatch occurs between the characters of an auto dup field in the
record and corresponding characters of the previous record.
-
Press RESET. Enter in the correct character.
Remote end re-established communications (sent END) when local
end posts complete or incomplete status.
-
Note the displayed address. Call the remote end to
set up the line connection again_ Establish the start
point on the disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
V
-
7·7
Communications received
line bid
-
A no-record-found error and a printer error occurred during a print
operation.
Press RESET twice.
EC 823146
I
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1607512
3741 ML
1-9
EC 823146
825853
826065
9/15/74
11/15/74
8/1/75
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
4
Code
Display Position
5"
6
7
8
W
W
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
7-7
0
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
Communications length
error
-
Remote end sends record length with zero characters or greater than
128 charactres or a length different from the previous record sent.
- The length of the first received record is not equal to the number of
greater-than symbols (» in the receive-data and insert-constants
program.
- Continuation of the data set on the second disk does not have the
same record length as the initial portion of the data set on disk 1
(tra nsm it).
- Note the displayed address. Call the remote end to
set up the line connection again. Establish the start
point on the disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
!
7-5
Printer format
-
An invalid printer format was used.
An invalid data stream control character was used.
-
Press RESET. Use the correct printer format.
Press RESET. Use the correct data stream control
character.
2-6
Diskette removed
-
Removed the diskette while waiting for a disk error to be cleared
on record insert mode. The EOD in the data set label is not updated.
Duplicate records can exist in the data set. The hold buffer is not
blanked.
Removed the diskette while waiting for a printer format error to be
cleared.
-
Load a diskette. Hold down NUM SH IFT and press
RESET.
Press RESET.
W
5
2-4
Write error
- The record at the currently displayed disk address was written
in error. Either the sector at the currently displayed disk address
could not be found or the record was written in error.
-
W
6
2-4
Write error
- The record at the currently displayed disk address was written with
- Press RESET.
a special address mark and was not read with a special address mark.
X
4-2
7-7
y
Z
5
Right-adjust sign
-
A 5ign mismatch occurred at the end of a right-adjust field in
verify (V) mode.
- Press RESET. Use the correct sign in the right-adjust
Remote end responds with NAK or DISC (OLE EOT) to line bid.
- Note the displayed address. Call the remote end to
Communications negative
line bid response
-
2-1
Empty data set
Attempted verify (V) mode selection and the data set was empty.
Attempted update (U) mode selection and the data set was empty.
Attempted search (S) mode selection and the data set was empty.
-
Press RESET. Enter data into the data set or choose
a different data set.
2-4
Last record write error
-
In enter (E) or update (U) mode, the write error occurred at EOE.
-
Press RESET.
Error occurred while the disk was being initialized or disk checked.
-
Remove the diskette; press RESET. Load a different diskette.
6
set up the line connection again. Determine the start
point on the disk. Enter communications (C) mode.
In verify (V) mode, the write error occurred on the last non-deleted
record.
{
2-4
Write check error
-
+
7-7
Communications FE test
badge
- The FE test badge read correctly.
Delete record error
- Error encountered while attempting to delete records 9 through
&
field.
2-2
I
- Remove the FE test badge. Press R EC ADV or
insert the customer's badge.
26 on track 00.
-
Remove the diskette; press RESET. Load a different diskette.
PN 1607513
1-10
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5
.6
7
*
,
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
2-2
Bad track specification
exceeded
-
More than 2 bad tracks specified on the diskette.
-
Remove the diskette; press RESET. Load a
different diskette.
7-7
Communications 10 reader
-
The 10 reader data is all 1 bits in TB mode.
The 10 reader attachment is functioning properly.
Uninitialized diskette
-
New diskette not initialized.
Invalid input specifications
- Characters not valid or an odd number of characters specified.
-
2-2
- Track 00 is in a bad track list.
Sequence value is greater than 13.
- Tracks 78 through 99 are specified as bad.
See page 9-52 for procedure.
Remove the diskette; press RESET. Load a
different diskette.
-
A
>
7-7
Communications ID reader
- The ID reader data is all 0 bits in TB mode.
-
=
2-1
Non-ascending bad
track specification
- Bad tracks are not specified in ascending sequence.
- Remove the diskette; press RESET. Load a
Data recorder unit error
-
1
5-32
different diskette.
Data recorder attachment cable not installed.
- Check the switches on the data recorder for correct
- Data recorder is not ready.
- Data recorder switches not set to correct positions.
A
2
5-33
Data recorder unit jam
-
Hopper empty.
Stacker full.
- Transport jam.
- Hopper jam (feed jam).
- 129 data recorder powered up in online mode.
- 129 data recorder powered up with cards in the read station.
position; press RESET.
-
-
A
3
5-35
Data recorder data error
- Read/punch data miscompare.
-
-
Character outside 256 EBCDIC characters was read.
A
4
5-40
Data recorder ACL programming sequence error
-
Program error.
II
5
7-20
Data recorder format error
A
6
7-20
Data recorder EOE error
A
8
7-20
Data recorder abnormal
termination
A
9
2-1
Data recorder no valid
label on disk
Place cards in the hopper; press RESET (129 needs
two cards fed; press FEED).
Remove cards from the stacker; press RESET.
Clear jammed card; IBM 129-feed two cards and
press VER REC; 5496-set TERMINAL switch to
MANUAL, press REL, set the TERMINAL switch
to TERMINAL, press 3741 RESET.
Feed two cards, press VER RES; press 3741 RESET.
Clear transport, feed two cards, and press VER RES;
press 3741 RESET.
Read operation - place last card read in the hopper,
press 3741 RESET.
Punch operation - press 3741 RESET.
- Press NUM SH 1FT with RESET to skip the Data
A
The 10 reader attachment is functioning properly.
Recorder operation.
Press ALPHASHIFTor NUM SHIFT with RESET
to cancel entire operation.
-
Format syntax error.
Format length exceeded (128 characters).
- Press RESET; correct the format program.
Reached EOE without an end of file card read.
- Press RESET; correct deck or disk.
-
Ended operation other than reset or normal job termination.
-
Press RESET.
-
Disk is out of space du ring a read to EO F.
All labels are deleted.
-
Press RESET; load a new disk.
Press RESET; correct deleted label.
-
EC 823146
825853
826065
9/15174
11/15/74
811175
PN 1607514
3741 ML
1-11
EC
825958
Date 3/21/75
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Cause
Descri pti on
Operating Procedure
Introduction to 3741 Models 1 and 2 I/O Adapter
Errors
Tt:le y in position 5 shows the condition of the
attachment.
y=O
Attachment is offline
Attachment is online
y=l
Attachment is online and busy
y=2
The following display is typical of an I/O adapter
error. Note that the error code is not 1 DE 1 but is
an E error on drive 1 with the attachment online
and command or service request not active.
!
Command or service
request not active
Attachment \
online
~
~\
/
10E1
Extent
error
Error on
drive 1
Label address or
full data set
2
Input
/
"
00008
HRD1 DATA
Mode
128 01001 01026
02001
o
/
Number
of disk
ERPs
0"
xxxxxx
"'-
...
.
,
Bad spots written
on disk 2
Bad spots written
on disk 1
Hex content of registers 1, 2, and 3
(not displayed with this error)
Display positions 5 and 6 are used to monitor the
3741 I/O adapter-attachment status. Although
characters in these positions are not error codes,
they can aid in diagnosing problems.
The x in position 8 shows the disk drive involved
in the error (1 = drive 1, 2 = drive 2).
Ready
for
reset
The z in position 6 shows the condition of the
I/O adapter-attachment interface lines.
z= 0
Command or 'service request' not active
z= 1
Command is active
z= 2
'Service request' line is active
z= 3
'End of record' is active
z= 4
'End of data set out' is active
z= 5
'End of job out' is active
z= 6
'3741 attention required' is active
z= 7
'Bus in parity error' is active
z=8
'Attachment reset' has been issued and
the 3741 is waiting" for the attachment
to go online
z= A
'Sense response' received after a read
or write command was issued
z= B
'Sense response' received after 'service
request' was issued
'Sense response' received after an 'end
z= C
of record' was issued
'Sense response' received after an 'end
z= D
of data set out' was issued
'Sense response' received after an 'end
z= E
of job out' was issued
z= F
'Sense response' received after a '3741
attention required' was issued
'Sense response' received after a 'bus
z= G
in parity error' was issued
z= H
'Response' was on before a read or
write command was issued
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1607515
- 1-12
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
4
Code
Display Position
5*
6*
7
8*
Diagnostic
9
10
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
y
z
0
X
2-6
Early diskette removal
(also see next error if
x = 2) (I/O adapter)
-
Diskette removed during file processing, overlapped extent scan,
or update of data set labels.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
y
z
0
2
2-6
Early diskette removal
from drive 2 (recal)
(I/O adapter)
-
Diskette removed during drive 2 recalibration.
-
y
z
1
x
2-2
Length error (I/O
adapter)
- The record length read from the disk didn't match the record
length in the data set label.
- Press NUM SH IFT with RESET to try the next
record.
- Hold down NUM SH IFT and ALPHA SH IFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
y
z
2
x
2-2
No record found
(I/O adapter)
-
-
y
z
3
x
2-9
Seek error (also see
next error if x = 2)
(I/O adapter)
- No track with the current disk address could be found.
- Hold down NUM SH IFT and ALPHA SH IFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
y
z
3
2
2-9
Seek error during
drive 2 recalibration
(I/O adapter)
- Track zero could not be found on drive 2.
- Press NUM SHIFT with RESET
to continue on drive 1
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
Z
4
x
2-2
Read error (I/O
adapter)
- The record at the current disk address could not be read.
- To bypass the record, hold down NUM SH IFT and
press RESET .
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
2-4
Write error (I/O
adapter)
- The record could not be written at the current disk address.
- To bypass the record, hold down NUM SH IFT and
press RESET.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
Ii
1
\1\'i\1
y
\
.
.
y
Z
No record corresponding to the current disk address could
be found.
I
\
5
x
Press RESET to continue on drive 1.
Press NUM SH 1FT with RESET
to continue operation
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
* See page 1-12 for explanation of x, y, and z.
I
EC 825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607981
3741 ML
1-12.1
EC 825958
3/21/75
826065
8/1/75
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5*
6*
y
z
y
z
7
8*
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
x
?
?
Cause
2-4
Write gate test (I/O
adapter)
- Write gate failed.
- To continue (data will not be written and no error
is posted), press RESET.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
7-21
EOJ terminate (I/O
adapter)
-
3741 requested a record but received 'end of job in'
in single read mode.
- Press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
EOO terminate (I/O
adapter)
-
3741 requested a record but received 'end of data
set in' in single read mode.
- Press RESET to return to 3741 mode that was
Format (I/O adapter)
- Error detected while processing a format.
I
9
z
y
y
9
9
Z
1
2
5
. Operating Procedure
Description
7-21
7-21
I/O adapter offline.
active when the channel operation was requested.
- Press RESET to return to XR mode.
~
- Correct the format program.
y
9
Z
6
7-21
7
7-21
End of extent (I/O
adapter)
-
End of extent reached prior to receiving 'EOD in' or
'EOJ in'.
- To continue, press RESET. The label will be updated and marked continued. Processing will con·
tinue with the next valid label.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to update the label, return to XR
mode, and take the I/O adapter offline.
Invalid mode for Par
-
A Par Q instruction was issued while on the index track
or in enter mode.
- Press RESET to return to X R mode.
I,
!
I
I,
y
I
y
9
ZI
II I~\'"
Q format (I/O adapter)
,-
"Zl'
9·
8
7-21
Abnormal termination
(I/O adapter)
-
3741 search routine terminated abnormally.
-
I
Press RESET to return to X R mode with the I/O
adapter online, or
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to XR mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
y
Z
9
9
7-21
No label (I/O adapter)
-
No valid label after the data set for the initial label.
-
y
z
A
x
2-1
Secure label (I/O
adapter)
-
The volume label or any data set label is marked secure.
- Replace the secure diskette.
Label error (I/O
adapter)
-
y
z
B
x
2-1
Press RESET to return to XR mode with the I/O
adapter online, or
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to X R mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
- Correct the diskette labels.
-
-
No HDR1 label.
Bypass data set label.
Improper extents.
* See page 1-12 for explanations of x, y, and z.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to terminate.
Mode 1 or 2, press RESET to return to the HDR
label in 3741, mode with the I/O adapter online.
- If not mode 1 or 2, hold down NUM SH IFT and
press RESET to continue with the next valid label.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and
press RESET to return to X R mode and take the
I/O adapter offline.
PN 1607982
1-12.2
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Code
Display Position
4
5*
6*
7
8*
y
z
C
1
y
z
E
X
y
Z
V
y
z
W
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
2·6
Drive not ready
-
Operator failed to load new diskette when required.
-
2·2
End of extent
-
Data set extent has overflowed.
-
Press RESET to return to XR mode with the I/O
adapter online, or
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
X
2·1
Volume label
-
Positions 1-4 of the volume label do not contain 'vol 1'.
Mode 1 or 2, press RESET to return to the volume
label in 3741 mode with the I/O adapter online.
- To bypass the volume label check, hold down ALPHA
SHIFT and press RESET.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
offline.
X
2·2
End of extent (all
data received)
- There are records in the buffer that cannot be written
2·2
Overlapped extent
-
2·2
Bad spots
- Special address marks were written on the disk.
-
Press RESET to return to XR mode with the I/O
adapter offline.
/
-
-
because EOE was reached.
Data sets overlap; label incorrect.
Replace the diskette and press RESET, or
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offl ine.
-
Mode 1 or 2, press RESET to return to the volume
label in 3741" mode with the I/O adapter online.
- If not mode 1 or 2, hold down NUM SHIFT and
press RESET to continue with the first valid label.
- To ignore this error, hold down ALPHA SH I FT and
press RESET.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
y
Z
X
y
Z
Z
y
Z
8
1
7·21
Parity check, write
to attachment
-
Attachment received invalid data.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
y
Z
8
2
7·21
Parity check, read
from attachment
-
3741 received invalid data.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
y
z
8
4
7·21
Record length
-
Attachment record length does not equal 3741
record length.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
X
-
y
z
8
6
7·21
Attachment
-
Attachment is unable to send data.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press RESET
to retry operation.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
y
z
8
7
7·21
Attachment issued
'EOD in' during mode
4 read from attachment.
-
'EOD in' is not a valid means of terminating mode 4.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
y
Z
8
8
7-21
Attachment issued
'EOJ in' during mode
4 read from attachment.
-
'EOJ in' is not a valid means of terminating mode 4.
-
Hold down NUM SHIFT and ALPHA SHIFT, and press
RESET to return to XR mode and take the I/O
adapter offline.
----* See page 1-12 for explanations of x, y, and z.
825958
826065
Date 3/21/75
8/1/75
EC
I
PN 1607983
..
3741 ML
1-12.3
This page intentionally left blank.
EC 825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607984
1
HOW TO USE THE DISPLAY UNIT
SYMPTOMS
DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
-
If you are aware of the display unit symptom
terms and the directions on this page, continue
with the next command. Otherwise, review the
information contained in the adjacent columns
and then continue here.
- The diskette can be either unloaded or loaded.
(Loaded is preferred.)
- Remove the viewer.
- Turn up the brightness control (observe the
caution).
Look for a correct raster as shown. For this
decision, disregard any characters that might
also be evident within the raster.
The following 7 pages contain descriptions and
pictures of symptoms to direct you to the correct
MAP to use for diagnosis.
CRT:
Cathode ray tube (display).
Blank CRT:
The display looks like power is off.
Blooms:
The entire display appears to glow
or the raster is excessively bright.
Brightness:
The amount of light emitted from
the raster.
The symptoms are numbered to indicate the priority sequence and to allow referencing.
Read the symptom description with each picture
to understand the illustration and any variations
that could be applicable.
Character:
All letters, numbers, special symbols, and the cursor, formed by a
series of small dots.
Deflection:
The vertical, horizontal, and wiggle
sweeps needed to form the 6 lines,
the line lengths and the line height.
For some symptoms, it could be necessary to turn
the brightness control up to observe the symptoms.
CAUTION
Never make CRT tube face glow or bloom. Return
brightness control to normal before proceeding
into the MAPs.
(-
ee ee e
DISPLAY UNIT GLOSSARY
x "'
Symptoms of display trouble are not readily illustrated exactly; each display symptom is an individual. Therefore, when using the following
index, attempt to locate a picture or descriptive
symptom that is similar to (not necessarily the
same as) what you saw displayed.
Raster:
The bright area of six lines, each
about 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) high by
from 3.5 to 5.5 inches (88.9 to
139.7 mm) long, caused by the
deflection ci rcuits. (A raster
might not be displayed, except
with the CE pins jumpered, on
some CRTs because of normal
gain variation between CRTs.)
Retrace:
The return trace for the deflection
sweeps.
Video:
Pulses, which are intensified dots,
that result in characters.
/
If any of more than 1 picture might be the right
one, see if they all use the same MAP. If so, no
need to choose; just go to that MAP.
Is the raster (relative size, position, and number of
lines) as shown; and does the brightness remain
stable?
Y N
Review the symptoms, starting with 1 on the
next page, until the most similar symptom is
found. Use the MAP indicated.
Return the brightness control to normal.
Data may be entered, but is not required.
Are characters displayed and are they free of
distortion?
Y N
Review the symptoms, starting with 14,
until the most similar symptom is found. Use
the MAP indicated.
Review the symptoms, starting with 23, until
the most similar symptom is found. Use the
MAP indicated.
The correct MAP or procedure to use follows each
picture.
Regardless of the starting point, it is necessary to
compare all succeeding display symtoms uptothe
one that is similar to one you have_ If no similar
display can be found, use the Display General
MAP following the last picture.
All display symptoms are shown with the viewer
removed, and viewed from the operator side of
the machine.
Most of the symptoms are shown with a diskette
loaded. However, the symptom may be used as
you first found it (unloaded, loaded, or with data),
while being aware of the difference this makes
on the display.
Cur~~r
position
t,LD~~j
,
Error
codes
Program
number
EC
D
Begin
field
code
Program
shift
code
823146
825853
Date 9/15/74
11/15/74
Disk 1
address
Disk 2
address
Machine
mode
PN 1607516
Machine
stat, us
.
Alternate
record
advance
3741 ML
1-13
lEe
823146
PN 1607517
1-14
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT
SYMPTOMS
1
Symptom: Blank CRT or brightness fades
to blank.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
3
Symptom: Vertical bar - can be in any
location on display.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
5
Symptom: Multiple vertical bars.
Brightness control:
Turned up (caution)
I
I
I
j
I
MAP 3-2
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
2
4
6
Symptom: Spot - can be in any location
on display.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: Multiple vertical spots.
Brightness control:
Turned up (caution)
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
Brightness control:
Normal
•
•
•
•
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-.5
MAP 3-5
.-
7
9
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
Brightness control:
Normal
11
Symptom: Lines too close together.
Brightness control:
Symptom: Lines on top of each other.
(Some raster lines missing.)
Normal
Brightness control:
Normal
\
\
t~Q
HDlSt Dl-Jll-J
eet
_- ..
----- ---- .. _---
OtOOt
OOeOQ
e
8J88~
X is
..
............ --.....
HD~J Dl-Jll-J
10
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
,
OOOOB .
x~
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
8
0
eOJ
-.
oee OJ OOJ rna.e
12
Symptom: I ncorrect line location.
Brightness control:
Symptom: Lines on top of each other.,
(Some raster lines missing.)
Normal
Brightness control:
\
Normal
,
1-
y
. eee
~
\
e~ee~
eH~eJ
11eSp
/~
/
~
MAP 3-5
e~eeJ
~
e8ee8~eeJ 12e1P~
I
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
lEe
II
823146
PN 1607518
3741 ML
1-15
I
EC
823146
PN 1607519
1-16
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
13
15
Symptom: Excessive line length.
Brightness control:
Brightness control:
Normal
17
Symptom: Lines compressed to right.
Normal
,
Symptom: Skewed.
Brightness control:
\
\
\
•
\.
I
X IS
\
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
14
16
18
Symptom: Character height compressed.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: Lines compressed to left.
Brightness control:
Symptom: Distorted.
Brightness control:
Normal
;:.:;
HX
.....
-.
,-
...
.' .. .....
"
30000
A A
e
I
teete teete &~t
~eere
"
.
\
MAP 3-5
Normal
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
Normal
19
21
Symptom: Overall enlarged display.
Brightness control:
Brightness control: . Normal
23
Symptom: Display rotated and incomplete.
Symptom: Display not centered for the
operator.
Normal
Brightness control:
Normal
Display not centered on mirror or
operator fails to see upper or lower
lines while seated in a normal position
(for full display; no lines on top of
each other).
The raster and characters are expanded
or off the display in all directi"ons.
\
OJOO~
JS~
o
OOJ
OJOOJ
~10SP
OOOOg
Adjustment procedure 311
Adjustment procedure 311
·22
24
MAP 3-7
20
Symptom: Lower right corner missing.
Symptom: Display rotated and incomplete; characters small.
I
Brightness control:
Brightness control:
Normal
Symptom: CRT blooms bright (on-offon-off)
Normal
Brightness control:
Normal
An excessively bright, but correct display,
alternates with a blank display.
\
a~aa~
JS9 aJ00J aJae'
e
Adjustment procedure 311
MAP 3-6
Adjustment procedu re 311
EC
I
823146
Date 9115n4
826065
8/1d5
PN 1607520
3741 ML
1-17
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1607521
1-18
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
25
27
Symptom: Unsteady display.
Brightness control:
Normal
Symptom: No video (raster only).
29
Symptom: Failure to blank on wiggle
sweep.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
The data is correct but a problem to read
because of the motion of the characters
and/or the lines.
MAP 3-4
MAP 3-3
MAP 3-1
26
28
30
Symptom: Fuzzy characters (raster size
and brightness normal).
Symptom: Brightness increases slowly or
unadjustable or interm ittent.
Brightness· control:
Brightness control: Normal
Normal
Symptom: Failure to blank horizontal
retrace.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
w--, .....
r- - - .....Horizontal retraces
\
F-
IrlIal _W
0100~
JSQ 01001
OOl
MAP 3-3
0
00009
-
~10SP
IRer -
X ~
........
"'\
._-', ... " , .....'.....
Vertical retrace
MAP 3·1
MAP 3-1
--
XI
31
33
Symptom: Machine status missing or
incorrect.
Brightness control:
Brightness control:
35
Symptom: Disk address incorrect.
Normal
Brightness control:
Normal
Status conditions'
N = Not ready - diskette unloaded.
W = Wait - diskette loaded.
R = Ready - diskette loaded.
(A correct status condition is shown.) - - - - - - . . . , .
IS9 01001
o
IS9 01001
00009
OO~
MAP 2-6
MAP 2-2
32
34
Brightness control:
Normal
OIOO~
OIOO~
~)OSP
Symptom: Disk address missing.
o
IS9 01001
~)OSP
36
Normal
Brightness control:
O'OOS
RDIU Dtfltf
'~8 0'00' 0.00.
~)OSP
0
tf
tf
OOOOi
'I.
ts
X~
MAP 5-1
MAP 5-1
lEe
D
Normal
A missing row of dots will appear as missing
and/or broken lines in the characters. The
characters shown here contain the correct
number of dots.
00'
MAP 2·6
00009
Symptom: Dots missing from characters.
OIOO~
00009
~
~)OSP
MAP 5-1
The correct location for Disk 1 address
is shown.
001
o .~
001
00009
Symptom: No characters except cursor.
Brightness control:
IS9 01001
Normal
The cursor is correctly in position DOl, as shown,
prior to data entry.
The correct address for disk 1 when first loaded
is shown.
OIOO~
oo~
Symptom: Cursor missing or incorrect
position.
823146
PN 1607522
3741 ML
1-19
EC
823146
Date 9/15/14
825853
825958
11/15/74
3/21/75
PN 1607523
1-20
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
37
39
Symptom: Added, missing, or incorrect
characters.
Brightness control:
Symptom: Hex characters.
DISPLAY GENERAL MAP
Brightness control:
If none of the previous symptoms are similar to
what you see on the display:
- Power down.
- Disconnect the keyboard signal cable at 2-P.
- Power up ..
- Wait 25 seconds.
Normal
Normal
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111
00000
x lot
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111
II111I1111111111111111111111111111111111
e
aaaoa
I1I1111111111111111111111111111111111111
111I111111111111111111111111111111111111
xw
MAP 5-1
MAP 5-1
38
40
Symptom: Hex characters (only the status line may be
displayed).
Symptom: Lines and hex characters.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Normal
~JHI~':lal!Bd)AH~.~(M.~IM HIHH(~IOiH~'.1
"Ba~~;Mb'~~ ~ ~.I.BBM.H~MIM.:C~H~~a~HMOa
IHHlc<'IM' •• H.M'I"'I".·'~'\.'2~H.'-.MI.
MMUUI*MB-IUI
II/WMMI~(-HM'K '~I~MIII~"'.
Hln'~I"HM/'U"i)'III"HM ... waM.~U'I\M~"ai
MAP 5-1
MAP 6-1
Does
Y N
-
the machine still fail?
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard cable at 2-P.
Use MAP 4-4.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard cable at 2-P.
Use MAP 5-1.
KEYBOARD AND OPERATIONAL SYMPTOMS
Communications
Display Data
Alphabetic Shift
7·7
7·7
7·7
Fails communication mode
Fails to receive
Fails to transmit
4·4
4·2
7·7
7·7
7·7
Communication terminates prematurely
Communications set·up problems
Fails to establish communications with
remote end.
Display Field Name
4·2
4·2
4·2
Fails to override program control
Program fails
Does not alpha shift from keyboard
4·4
4·2
Displays incorrect data
Fails to display data
Displays incorrect field name
Fails to display field name
Audio Feedback Device
4·6
4·6
4·6
4·6
Always a tone
No audio feedback from any key
No tone at end of function
Tone or click at incorrect time
Compute Field Totals
Display Field Program
4·5
4·2
Computes field totals incorrect
Fails to compute field totals
4·4
4-2
Displays incorrect field program
Fails to display field program
Copy
Auto RecAdv
Display Field Totals
4·3
4·2
4·3
4·2
Always auto record advancing
Continual record advance
Fails to auto record advance
Fails to manual record advance
4·5
4·4
4·2
4·8C
Auto Dup/Skip
Dash (-)
4·3
4·3
4·3
4·3
4·3
4·3
4·2
4·2
Always auto dup/skip
Dups incorrect data
Dups/skips a shift failure
Dups/skips incorrect fields
Dups/skips too far
Fails to auto dup/skip
Display Production Statistics
4-4
4-2
Fails to display
Fails to enter hex D
4·2
2·12
Altered/missing data
Dead keyboard
No data entered and no click from 1 or more keys
No data entered with or without an audio response
Slow machine
4-2
4-4
4-2
4·4
4·5
4-2
4-5
Character backspace beyond column 1
Continual character backspace
Fails to character backspace
Multiple character backspace
4-5
4-2
4-4
4·4
Deletes too many/incorrect records
Fails to delete record
4-3
4-2
Delete Record
4-5
4-2
Dups incorrect data
Dups too slow/fast
Fails to auto dup
Fails to manual dup
Enter
Deletes too many records or the wrong records
Fails to display data
4-2
4-2
2·4
EC
II
Always displays program
Displays incorrect program
Fails to display program
Duplicate
Delete Index
Character Backspace
Displays incorrect production statistics
Displays production statistics always
Fails to display production statistics
Display Program
4·4
Continual character advance
Fails to character advance
Multiple character advance
Always displays field totals
Displays incorrect field totals
Fails to display field totals
Data
4·6
4·5
4·2
4-5
4·2
4·4
4-2
4-2
4·8E
Character Advance
Continual copy
Copies incorrect data
Fails to copy
Missing/extra records
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
Always in enter mode
Fails to go into enter mode
Fails to write on disk
PN 1607524
3741 ML
1-21
EC
823146
825958
826065
Date 9/15n4
3/21175
811175
PN 1607525
1-22
KEYBOARD AND OPERATIONAL SYMPTOMS
Field Advance
4-5
4-2
4-4
Continual field advance
Fails to field advance
Field advances too far
Katakana Shift
Print EOO
4-3
4-5
4-3
7-5
7-5
5-1
Field Backspace
4-5
4-2
4-4
Continual field backspace
Fails to field backspace
Field backspaces too far
Field Correct
4-2
Fails to field correct
Always enters Katakana characters
KANA SHI FT key fails
KATAKANA SHIFT switch fails
Programmed KATAKANA SHIFT
fails
Katakana Symbol Sh1ft
4-5
4-5
4-5
Always enters Katakana symbols
Fails to enter Katakana symbols
KANA SYMB fails
Print Record
7-5
7-5
7-5
4-80
4-2
4-4
Field Totals
4-2
4-2
4-7
4-8B
Always displays field totals
Fails to display field totals
Incorrect field totals
Field totals function fails
4·5
4-2
4-4
Always function select
Fails to function select
Selects incorrect function
Partial index modified
Program
New Line Function
7·5
Fails to advance to new line
4-2
4-2
4-4
Always enters hex
Fails to enter hex
Fails to transfer data
Parity error
Fails to enter adapter mode
Display positions 5 and 6 show I/O
adapter problem
2·1
Program Load
4·5
4-2
4-2
4-2
Extra advances to new lines
Fails to advance to new line
4-5
4·2
4-2
Always numeric shift
Fails to numeric shift
Always/extra program loads
Fails to program load
Loaded incorrect program
Program Numeric Shift
4-5
4-3
4-2
4-2
4-2
Fails to initialize when in initialize mode
Does not enter initialize mode
/ (slash) does not replace data (backspace)
Data does not replace / (slash)
Fails to display operator guidance
Print Characters
7-5
Initialize
4-2
New Line Key
Always in numeric shift
Fails to numeric shift
Operator Guidance
I/O Adapter
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-21
Fails to program chain
F ails to sh ift
Incorrect program
Incorrect program number
Numeric Shift
Hex
4-5
4-2
Always displays production statistics
Fails to display production statistics
Incorrect record cou nt
Does not modify index
4-4
Function Select Upper or Lower
Extra records printed
Fails to print record
Incorrect records printed
Production Statistics
4-2
4-2
Modify Index
Fails to print to EOD
Prints past EOD
Incorrect characters
Proof Keyboard Feature
4-2
Numeric keys enter incorrect data
Punch to EOD
7-20
7-20
Skip
Right-Adjust
Fails to punch to EOD
Fails to punch correctly
4-5
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-3
4-2
4-2
4-4
Continual right-adjust
Fails to right-adjust
Incorrect right-adjust
Read Index
Fails to alpha/num skip
Fails to auto skip
Fails to program skip
Fails to skip
Skips short/too far
Search Address
4-4
2-2
Displays incorrect data
Fails to read the index track
4-4
4-2
4-4
Spacebar or SP Key
Cannot enter search address
Fails to search
Goes to incorrect/no address
4-2
4-2
4-5
Read to EOF
7-20
7-20
Fails to read to EOF
Fails to read correctly
Record Advance 1 or 2
4-5
4-2
4-5
Continual record advances
Fails to record advance
Multi pie record advances
Record Backspace 1 or 2
4-5
4-2
4-5
Continual record backspaces
Fails to record backspace
Multiple record backspaces
Search Content
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-4
Tab Function
Cannot enter search content
Fails to locate record Fails to search
Stops on incorrect record
5-5
Tab Key
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-2
Fails to locate EOD
Fails to search
Locates incorrect record
Stops on no EOD
4-SF
Repeat
4-5
4-5
Continual repeat
Fails to repeat
4-5
4-2
2-4
Continual reset
Fails to reset
4-2
4-SA
4-5
4-2
Verify
4-2
4-4
4-2
Fails to select program
Selects incorrect program
False errors
Incorrect modulus
No self-check error (modulus 10)
Always returns to index track
Fails to return to index track
EC
II
Fails to verify
False errors
Verified incorrect record
Self-Check
4-4
Return to Index 1 or 2
Cannot enter content
Fails to locate record
Fails to search sequentially
Fails to start search
S errors
Always updates
Fails to update
Fails to write on disk
Select Program
4-2
4-4
Reset
4-5
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-2
Extra tabs
Fails to tab
Update
Record Insert
Fails to record insert
Fails to tab
Search EOD
Search Sequential Content
4-2
Fails to space
Cursor remains stationary
Spaces too far
823146
Date 9115n4
825853
825958
11/15/74
3/21n5
PN 1607526
3741 ML
1-23
EC 825853
825958
826065
Date 11/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1607527
1-24
MISCELLANEOUS SYMPTOMS
Communications
7-7
7-7
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
Communication terminates
prematurely
BSCA
EBSCA
Fails in print-unattended mode
EBSCA only
Fails to go into communications
mode
BSCA
EBSCA
Multipoint alarm fails to sound
EBSCA
Set-up problems
BSCA
EBSCA
CRT
4-6
5-1
Flashing screen with no error code
Hex characters during power up
Data Recorder Attachment
5-3S
5-39
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
Card jam or misfeed but no A-2 error
Card feed problem on power up
Card jam
Flashing screen with no error code
No response from data recorder
No response from data recorder
and no error code displayed.
Setup problems
Feature Checkout Procedures
Keyboard
7-6
4-2
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-3
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-20
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-9
7-3
7-4
7-21
14-31
7-5
7-5
7-19
7-17
7-S
BSCA
BSCA subfeatures
ID reader
Keylock
Synchronous clock
TerminallD
1200 bps (line adapter)
(line adapter)
Data recorder attachment (129/5496)
EBSCA (expanded communications)
EBSCA subfeatures
ID reader
Keylock
Multipoint
Synchronous clock
TerminallD
1200 bps (line adapter)
Feature A
Feature E (expanded)
I/O adapter
Inquiry mode operation (theory)
Printer
3713
3717 (also use MAP 5 in the 3717
MLM)
3715
Proof keyboard
Record insert
4-1
4-4
4-4
4-6
4-5
4-6
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-4
4-6
2-12
4-2
Disk Drive Unit
4-SE
2-6
2-1
2-6
''-,
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-2
2-9
2-12
2-4
Altered/missing data
Disk address 1 or 2 incorrect
Diskette problems
Diskette written in 1 disk drive
unit gives trouble in other disk
drive units
Machine status incorrect
Machine status or disk address
missing
Not ready
Read check
Seek errors (no data errors)
Slow machine operation
Write check
Power Supply
Binding key
Buzzing
Click only from reset
Dead keyboard
Does not perform function selected
by toggl e switches
Error code - audi 0 feedback
device works also
Incorrect data entered with or
without audio response
Incorrect functions performed
with or without audio response
Keyboard locked up
Multiple characters entered for
1 keystroke
No click from any key
No data entered and no click
from 1 or more keys
No data entered with or without
an audio response
No function performed and no
cI ick from 1 or more keys
No function performed with or
without an audio response
No tone at end of function
Slow machine operati9n
Sticking key
6-2
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-9
6-2
Burned smell
Incorrect voltage at I/O unit
Intermittent operation
Machine inoperative
Service circuit breaker tripped
Smoke
3713 Printer (Head Motion)
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
4-SG
Head crash stops at left margin
Head crash stops at right margin
Head does not move
Incorrect head speed
Double spacing
3715 Printer
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
4-SG
Head crash stops at left or right
margin
Head does not move
Printed characters misaligned
Forms do not move
Forms space too far
Printer does not print
Dots missing from characters
Extra dots in characters
Head motion noisy
Characters missi ng
Paper tears
Ribbon will not feed
Double spacing
3717 Printer
Use the Symptom Index in the 3717 MLM.
\
\
201
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IRCode
Fan 50 Hz (100115V)
2455819
820-25
Fan 50 Hz (200235V)
2455820
820-25
File control
card (FC)
See Parts
Catalog
820-04
2305670
820-07
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Ac line filter
2192519
600-07
Blade, fan
2455814
820-25
CE test disk
2455026
Collet-disk clamp
assembly
See Parts
Catalog
820-05
Cross connector
2731026
300-02
Disk ac cable
disk 2 (115V)
2456480
100-01
Head and carriage
assembly (with
pressure pad
arm and leadscrew)
Disk ac cable disk
2 (208/230V)
2456386
100-01
Head load actuator assembly
2305609
820-08
Disk cover latch
2305650
820-06
Disk drive cover
2305648
820-06
I nterlock assembly
Spring
Switch
Wire jumper
2305532
2305534
2305533
820-24
820-24
820-24
Disk drive hub
and shaft
2305619
820-13
Leadscrew wheel
2305544
820-12
Disk drive pulley
2305621
820-13
Leadscrew bearing
Upper
Lower
233355
155749
820-09
820-09
Limit stop
Upper
Lower
2305618
2305528
820-09
820-09
LED assembly
2305656
820-10
Disk drive shaft
bearing
5344991
Cause Codes
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01 Dirty
07 Grounded
20 Loose
21 Open
22
28
34
42
Short
Worn
Other
46
70
00
820-09
Disk file cable
and connectors
2305599
820-03
Disk idler
assembly
See Parts
Catalog
820-15
Drive belt
2305616
820-02
Phototransistor
assembly
2305604
820-10
Drive motor (50
Hz 115 Vac)
2305706
820-11
Power supply ac
cable (115V)
2456462
100-01
Drive motor (50
Hz 200/235 Vac)
2305707
820':11
Power supply ac
cable (208/230V)
2456385
100-01
Drive motor (60
Hz 115 Vac)
2305672
820-11
Signal cables
01
02
2456402
2456403
100-04
100-04
Drive motor (60
Hz 208/230 Vac)
2305633
820-11
Spring washer
2305663
820-07
Drive motor pulley
(50 Hz)
2305451
820-11
Stepper motor with
stand and wheel
2305545
820-12
Drive motor pulley
(60 Hz)
VFO card
Page 502
300-07
2305597
820-11
202 not used
203 not used
EC
823146
Date 9/15/7 4
201·203
826065
.. 8/1/75
PN 1618881
3741 ML
201
204-1
. 825853
EC 823146
11/15174
Date 9/15/74
20,4
PN 1618882
8/1175
File Control Card
10 0: 0
1
\
\
-,,'
826065
11
1
1
II
II
I
•
TP740
fTP23
o! :l :::
I
I
\
\
\
\
Test pin
location
'1'N c::::J
\
I
I
TP~
13- - •I
..J TP 12 :
:
TP 11-=-___
I
1c::::J
--.1
1
TP 10
I c::::J
l
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
I1
-.
TP
\
\
~P 2
T~ 9
\
\
I
I
,~
I
\
1
I
10
IDI
•I
I
~2:
0 0:
1
,I
,
TTP 21
1
JTP 20
1 TP 19/... _ ....
TP 18
'
:OD';-::~7
~ iDi bC/ 00
0
,.
\
\
I
,
I
I
'. D q IT]
[J
\
\
II
I I
tt"\
'V
•
TP 1
path ............. lIl· 1I
\
\
\
II
I I
0
I
\
\
\
\
\, - '
"TP 5
TP 3 ... - -
TP 4
TP 141
I
I
I
:
: ~rTP 17
JI_____
TP 15
I
:
I
1
FC Card
Test Point Test Pin Name
Signal
Cable
TP ~1
TP 2
TP 3
TP 4
TP 5
TP 6
TP 7
TP 8
TP 9
TP10
TP 11
TP12
None
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP 17
TP 18
TP19
TP 20
TP 21
Tp·22
TP 23
TP 24
None
None
810
D13
D07
D04
811
D05
D03
+24 volts
+ Index
+ File data
+ Access 2
-5 volts
+ Access 3
+ Access 1
Phototransistor
+ Write data
+ Head engage
+ Low current
+ Write~ate
+ Erase gate
Preamp TP 2
Preamp TP 1
+ Access 0
LED current
Ground
-MC-O
-MC-3
-MC-2
-MC-1
- Head load
+5 volts
Erase current
Head A
Head 8
File Cable
804, 805
D08
802
Dl0
806
805
804
D02
807
806, 808, 809, D09
D03
D02
D04
802
D05
808
803
Dl0
D12 81ack
D13 White
TP 16
--,
-l
I
I
I
. 0
~~~~.WQ.,I.....w..r._ _ _
I
1
1
1_ _ -,
I
I I
~~~~
13
II Signal cable
1
II File cable
To Ac Distribution
204
File Control Card (Continued)
File Control Card
D02
D03
D04
D05
+ Access 0
+ Access 1
+ Access 2
+ Access 3
TP15
TP7 __
Phase 0
A
TP4~
TP 6
~
~
(White)
Phase 1
(Red)
Phase 2
Yellow
(Yellow)
Phase 3
-
(Black)
TP 19
D02 Black
B05 Blue
Bl0~~~~+~2-4-V-d-C~~~~~~~H-e-a-d-L-oa-d~~~~T-P-l~~-1~~B~0_4~Y_el~lo~w~~~:~:~::}
---------1 Magnet
+ Head Engage TP 10_
Dl0t--.......-~~~~~~~__
Bll ~......--- -5V - -..... TP 5
*B03
.... TP 23
MPU
TP 22
Driver
TP 16
YellowB07
LED
+5 Vdc..JJ'l.V""V,,AV----e.-....~~--.....,~:o:__~~
,....-_~~...-l.....~--.:..lI~~_"I""""~'"'"a_..c.._.k____
BO__!§J"'1..~_--...,.....J
~- - - - - - -
.---~_l--.,
2-J
or
2-K
+ Index Pulse TP 2
~
D05 Black
_
D13~+---------~-""---i
~
U
r- _ _ _ _
Interlock Switch
- Write Data
TP 9
+ Low Current__ TP 11
B06r-+---~~--~~~~
+ Write Gate
TP 12
B02~+-~~-~~~~~~
TP 24
D12 Black
I
I
D13 White
c:
D13 White
1
t=
TP 13 1
II"
".1
+ F"lle Data TP--3 Limit
D07
Dlfferentlatorl
Preamp
J.--+---~--~ Amplifier l----.J-~-;:1
TP 14----........
J
1-B
j j j
I I I
I I I
Bll B13 B12 D03 B02 B05 B03 B08
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
+ Std Data _.J
I
I
I
I
\V
-
~
~-----tr---" ~ ~
Dl0Red
~
Write
Driver
I
-I5"J
~
ReadlWrite
Head
B05r-~~~~~~-~~--~
IIII!
3
lL--~~_~. . . ..:::.B.;.;:la_ck~~B-0--:g9_i'''''' p~t~tr~n~s~r_1'4' t
I ndex
11-_ _--4.-....:..T..;...P....::8_~_.......Y_e_ll_ow__t-D-0...
8~
AmplifierJ
+ Erase Gate
Erase
B04~+-~~~~~~~~~
Driver
cb
D09
g
~
Read/
Write
Select
----
D12 Black
H---------~
CE Test Points TP 13 and TP 14
20-400 mV (all O's)
10-300 mV (all 1 's)
+ Std Clock- - ..J
I I I
+4F Clock----...J
I I
I
+4F Phase 2 - - - - - - J
I I
I
+VFODataSync------.J
I I
+ Ignore Window High Gain---- J
I I
+ File Data (Disk Drive 1 ) - - - - - _ _ oJ
I
+ File Data (Disk Drive 2 ) - - - - - - - __ .J
I
I
VFO Card
205 not used
EC·
8~3J46
Date 9/15n4
204-205
826065
PN 1618883
3741 ML
8/1n5
204-2
I
EC 823146
206,
206
PN 1618884
207
Disk Drive Service Position
Head Load Actuator
Service Check
Turn power off.
Open door.
Loosen (turn one revolution) two screws
holding door to disk drive cover. ----------------'-1
Remove screw holding disk drive frame to
machine base.
Tip disk unit (bottom first) out of base and
hang on brackets.
Check for a visual clearance here
at all track positions.
,Diskette-
;"
.,,/
Make sure diskette clears pressure pad when coil
is not energized. (Power down.)
Adjustment
Energize by jumpering TP22 to TP17 on
the FC card with a disk in the unit.
Adjust for visual clearance here
for tracks 0 through 77
and contact here
on all tracks.
Adjustment screw,
insert tool through
hole in cover.
When coil is not energized,
the pressure pad should be
completely away from the disk.
CAUTION
Before closing
208
-
209
Head Adjustment Service Check
Place disk drive in service position (206).
Perform head load actuator service check (207).
Remove disk drive cover (221).
Use stepper motor wheel. to access head
down until stopped by lower
carriage
limit stop
Rotate disk drive hub so white sticker on outside diameter of hub is up. If white sticker is
not present, rotate hub so indented mark is up.
Loosen the phototransistor assembly
Install CE tool
it should contact carriage
surface
Do not force.
Rotate stepper motor wheelmabout 900 into
phase 0 alignment with leadscrew wheel
as shown:
CAUTION
Use only the materials listed below to clean
head and pressure pad.
IB,
II.
-
-
II.
iii;
Head and Pressure Pad Cleaning
Procedure
- With cover open, manually rotate stepper
motor wheel until carriage assembly is at
the upper limit stop.
a.
CAUTION
Do not allow pressure pad arm to snap against
head.
II
-
Pivot pressure pad arm away from head and
check pad for contamination. If contaminated,
use dry brush (PIN 2200106) to remove caked
deposits and to fluff pad.
CAUTION
Fluid treated cloth should not contact pressure
pad.
Top
View
Front
- While holding pressure pad arm out, clean
polished head surface with isopropyl alcohol
(PIN 2200200) applied to a clean cloth
(PIN 2108930).
Perform head load actuator service check (207).
II '
- Check clearance
for GO with feeler gage
of thickness in thousandths shown on carriage
Check NO GO for number shown atm,
+0.001" (0.0254 mm).
Do Head Adjustment (231) if anyone of the
above steps gives trouble.
- If head adjustment was OK, position and
fasten phototransistor holder with mounting
screw so the raised edge is contacting but not
pressing against the CE tool.
- Remove the CE tool.
- Reinstall the disk drive cover (221) and test
the disk drive by using the disk alignment
tracks on the CE test diskette (PIN 2455026).
Use MAP 2-11.
m.
EC
823146
826863
826066
9/16/74
11/16/74
8/1/76
PN 1618885
3741 ML
208
211
211
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1618886
214
VFO Card Location
Cross Connector
VFO Card
(Component Side)
}h
212
213
MPU
A
B
C
J
PN-EC
)
Disk Drive Pulley and Belt
Removal
Power down.
Unplug motor cable (217F).
Remove fan guard assembly (217M) by loosen. ing screws at opposite corners (top screw must
'be loosened through grillwork of fan guard
assembly.
Loosen screw, mark, and remove fan blade
(217L) (note blade curvature).
Remove drive belt (217K).
Loosen setscrew (217G) and remove pulley.
D
K
M
G
N
H
P
Replacement
Align setscrew with flat surface of shaft and
tighten.
Replace belt.
Check belt tracking (215).
Replace fan belt and guard (note bladecurvature) .
Drive Motor
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Unplug motor cable (217F).
Remove fan guard assembly (217M) by loosening screws at opposite corners (top screw must
be loosened through grillwork of fan guard
assembly).
Loosen screw, mark, and remove fan blade
(217L) (note blade curvature).
Remove drive belt (217K).
Loosen screws and remove guard plate (217J).
Remove motor clips by loosening screws (217H).
Remove motor through bottom of frame.
Loosen setscrew and remove drive pu lIey
(217G).
- To replace, reverse procedure and check for
belt tracking (215).
215
Idler Assembly
Removal
- Remove belt (217K).
- Remove idler assembly (217E).
- To replace, reverse procedure and check belt
tracking.
Belt Tracking
Belt must run in center of drive pulley and
hub pulley when drive pulley is rotated counterclockwise and viewed from pulley side.
Adjustment
CAUTION
Drive pulley set screw must be aligned with
flat on motor shaft.
Adjust drive pulley and idler position so belt
runs in center of drive pulley and hub pulley.
Forming of the idler pulley arm may be
required.
Note: Late level disk drives have an idler pulley
with a narrow groove. To adjust belt tracking,
loosen screw and slide idler until belt runs in
center of drive pulley and hub pulley.
216
Hub and Shaft Assembly
Removal and Replacement
Remove cover.
Remove drive belt (217K).
Remove screw (2170) and pulley ..
Remove shaft assembly (217A).
Remove bearing retaining screws ·and bearing
(217B).
Remove bearing and spacer (217C).
CAUTION
The'front bearing must be flush with frontsurface
of baseplate. To do this, tighten front bearing retaining screws first. Seal on bearing should face
outside.
,
Legend
Shaft assembly
II Bearing retaining screw
Spacer
Pulley
II Idler assembly
II Motor cable
DJ Drive pulley
~ .~.
Motor clip
Guard plate
II Drive belt
Fan blade ~_--
Fan guard
a
m
- To replace, reverse procedure and check belt
tracking (215).
m
217
Disk Drive Locations
m
II
D
m
.D----------------------11---------------------------------------------1
218 not used
219 not used
lEe 823146 I
PN 1618887
3741 ML
Date 9/15/74
211-219
216
lEe 823146
220
Disk Cover Interlock
Adjustment
Close the disk cover until it latches.
Loosen spring mounting screws.
Adjust the spring (upward) to activate the
switch. The switch may be overadjusted up
to 0.050" (1.27 mm).
Tighten spring mounting screws.
221
Disk Drive Cover
Removal and Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damage to the two twisted pairs of wires.
Remove the two pivot pins (224E).
Remove cover carefully.
Remove wires from head load actuator (224D)
and LED assembly (224C).
Release cable clamp holding wires to cover.
To replace, reverse procedure.
Yellow wire goes to LED terminal marked Y.
CAUTION
Before closing
CAUTION
Make sure that correct wires are connected to
the LED.
222
Collet Assembly
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Remove disk drive cover.
Remove collet assembly mounting screw (2248).
To replace, reverse procedure.
223
LED Assembly
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Remove disk drive cover.
Remove LED assembly mounting screws
(224A).
To replace, reverse procedure.
220
PN 1618888
224
Disk Cover Locations
Legend
bly mounting screws
m
LED assem
. screw
iii Collet assembly mounting
a---~\
II
m
11----
II
LED assembly
Head load actuator
Cover pivot
m----,u
~
E~C~82~3~14~6--+1__II_~_
Date 9115n4
220-224
.
I
PN 1618889
I
3741 ML
224
225
225
Leadscrew and Head Carriage
Assembly Removal and
Replacement
Removal
Center head carriage assembly (226G) on
leadscrew by moving stepper motor wheel
(226M).
Loosen limit stop clamping screws (226C and
226.1).
Remove stepper motor and bracket assembly
by removing screws (226N) holding stepper
motor bracket to baseplate.
Loosen clamping screw in leadscrew wheel
(226L) and remove wheel.
Remove bearing holding screws (226K).
Note location of wires to head before removing
cable. Press down with small screwdriver to
release terminals.
- Slide leadscrew down until top is free; tip and
remove upward.
- Remove the following from the leadscrew.
Spring washer retainer
(2260)
Spring washer
(226R)
Upper bearing
(226S)
Upper stop
(226C)
Lower stop
(226J)
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
Replacement
Check for 0.020" ± 0.015" (0.508 mm ± 0.381
mm). Adjust by rethreading if necessary (226T).
Center head carriage assembly (226G) on
leadscrew.
Install limit stops (226C and J) on each end of
leadscrew with limit stop projections pointing
toward head assembly as shown above.
Install top bearing on leadscrew (226S).
Install spring washer, concave side up (226R).
Install retainer (2260).
Install total assembly. Put bottom of leadscrew
in place first.
Install lower bearing with holding screws
(226K). Check for about 0.030" (0.762 mm)
up and down movement of leadscrew against
spring washer force.
Slip leadscrew wheel (226L) on leadscrew.
Install head wires into connector.
Install stepper motor and bracket with screws
(226N).
Do the Stepper Motor Adjustment (230).
PN 1618890
226
Head Locations
Legend
Phototransistor
CE tool
Upper limit stop
Leadscrew
Carriage surface
Clearance (head-to-CE tool)
Head carriage assembly
Clearance number
Lower limit stop
Bearing holding screws
Leadscrew wheel
Stepper motor wheel
III Stepper motor bracket screws
Clearance
(stepper-to-Ieadscrew wheels)
Spring washer retainer
Spring washer
Upper bearing
Clearance
B
II
Ii
m
II
II
1iI-----~
m-----F-~
m
m
I--~
m------c::~
D
m
iii
Ia----------~--I~
m
II~ _ _ _~
I
m-----+-~~
11------.
13-----...
II
13
D,----II------c:=;::,l
227 not used
228 not used
lEe 823146
225-228
PN 1618891
3741 ML
226
229
229
230
Stepper Motor
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Remove wires by pressing down with small
screwdriver to release terminals.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1175
PN 1618892
Stepper Motor Adjustment
(Perform with disk drive unit in upright position)
lmD
Loosen the two screws
holding stepper
motor bracket to baseplate.
Move stepper motor away from the leadscrew
Iil.
B-------+~
II
Loosen screw in leadscrew wheel
and slide
wheel up on leadscrew so wheels can rotate
without touching.
Rotate wheels to obtain this relationship.
Pull leadscrew wheel down until pins on
stepper motor wheel fit into notches on leadscrew wheel.
g-----~
II--------~~~
61----------~-~~
1---+-+-
Black
~l~--White
Yellow
Red
D---~
Blue
II---~
Top View, Front
Remove stepper motor and bracket assembly
by removing screws (230N) holding stepper
motor bracket to baseplate.
To replace, reverse procedure and do stepper
motor adjustment. Use the Stepper Motor
Adjustment procedure (230).
- Slide stepper motor bracket toward leadscrew
until pins contact notches.
- Tighten two screws that mount stepper motor
bracket to baseplate.
- Push leadscrew wheel up until wheels rotate
without touching.
- Engage drive pins with wheels in this position.
Phase 0
Top View, Front
Rotate the stepper motor wheel by hand four
revolutions. If any binding of the wheel is
felt, repeat the stepper motor adjustment.
Do the Head Adjustment (231).
231
Head Adjustment (for track 00)
CAUTION
Test diskette before adjusting.
Note: If leadscrew wheel has been replaced,
the slot should be 25-40% full with IBM #23
grease.
Position the stepper motor and leadscrew
wheels to Phase 0 relationship by rotating the
stepper motor wheel.
Place disk drive in service position (206).
Remove disk drive cover (221).
Loosen clamping screw in lower limit stop
(230J).
Using stepper motor wheel (230M), access head
carriage assembly (230G) down by hand until
the lower limit stop (230J) is pressed against
the frame and the head carriage is against the
lower limit stop.
Loosen mounting screw and move phototransistor holder (230A) to the left so it will
not interfere with CE tool.
Loosen clamp on leadscrew wheel (230L).
Note: Arrow molded into bottom of the·
stepper wheel.
CAUTION
Avoid any contact of CE tool with face (highly
polished front surface) of head.
2.
Correct relationship between the stepper
motor and leadscrew wheels.
~3.
Note: This clearance is marked on the front
of the head assembly (230H). The number
represents the clearance in thousandths of an
inch. On late level heads, this number is molded
into the plastic carriage and is always 3. Make
.adjustment for a slight drag using a clean, undamaged feeler gauge.
Correct clearance between the stepper motor
and leadscrew wheels.
Determine type of stepper assembly (below)
and check/adjust for the specified clearance
(230P) between the stepper motor and leadscrew wheels for the type used.
m
J..
~
White("U
n
l 'Leads~~ew Wh~~1
U_ .025 ± .005
~-
(0.635±0.127 mm)
,..-_ _ _......"""" Stepper motor
Black ~
whe:!
"
Steel pin
[l U - .020 ± .005
White~ ~-(0.508±0.127mm)
229-231
m
Using upper limit stop (230C), rotate leadscrew
(2300) to obtain correct clearance (230F),
between head and CE tool.
To properly make the head adjustment, you must
obtain three simultaneous conditions:
Correct head-to-CE tool clearance.
Position and fasten phototransistor holder with
mounting screw so raised edge is contacting
but not pressing against CE tool.
Remove CE tool.
Rotate stepper wheel four revolutions and check
for binding. If binding occurs and clearance
(230P) is correct, replace leadscrew wheel and
stepper motor assembly.
Do the lower limit stop and upper limit stop
adjustments, (232 and 234).
Reinstall disk drive cover (221) and test disk
drive by using the disk alignment tracks on the
CE test diskette PN 2455026. See Display Data
Head Alignment Service Check (page 8-1).
Phase 0
Top View, Front
Install CE tool (230B).
Rotate tool until it contacts surface (230E).
Rotate disk drive hub so white sticker on outside diameter of hub is up. If white sticker is
not present, rotate hub so indented mark is up.
1.
If all three conditions are correct, securely tighten
the leadscrew clamping wheel. (Use the short end
of an allen wrench in the screw). If all three conditions are not correct, repeat this procedure
(231) starting after 'Install CE tool'.
Make sure CE tool is touching surface (230E)
of head carriage (230G) while obtaining
clearance (230F).
You should now have the following simultaneous
conditions:
1.
Correct head-to-CE tool clearance.
2.
Phase 0 relationship between the stepper
motor and leadscrew wheels.
3.
Specified clearance between stepper motor
and leadscrew wheels.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1/75
PN 1618893
3741 ML
231
232
232
Lower Limit Stop Adjustment
Be sure that head is adjusted for track 00 and
that leadscrew and stepper motor wheels (234L)
and (234M), are in this position for track 00.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
(Two corner projections and the arrow on the
stepper motor wheel (234M), should point toward
the front of the disk drive.)
Position lower limit stop so that its projection
is in front of and contacts the head carriage
assembly stop projection as shown below.
- Tighten lower limit stop clamping screw while
maintaining 0.012" ± 0.001" (0.305 mm ±
0.025 mm) between lower limit stop projection
and bottom of head carriage assembly.
- There must be
clearance between stop and
frame.
Top View, Front
Make sure lower limit stop clamping screw is
loose.
Move the head carriage assembly down by rotating stepper motor wheel about 90 0 until the
wheels are in this position.
Top View, Front
\~====..::;::=
I
Front View
PN 1618894
234
Upper Limit Stop Adjustment
a------------~~~
- Start this procedure from rear of disk drive.
- Loosen clamping screw in upper limit stop
- Move head carriage assemblyliJup by turning
continue until upper
stepper motor wheel;
limit stop body is pressed against disk drive
frame by head carriage assembly. (Make sure
limit stop projection is clear of top surface of
head carriage assembly.)
- Move head carriage assembly down by turning
stepper motor wheel to the first phase O.
Ii.
II
1lI---------fP.I
I:I--------I-~~~
m-------+--E~
'\I~=====t==r~:HH_
m---------+~~~~l1
11------11------.
Top View, Front
- Position upper limit stop so its projection is
behind the head carriage assembly, and clamping screw faces directly back as shown below.
- Tighten clamping screw while maintaining
0.030" ± 0.005" (0.762 mm ± 0.127 mm) between stop body and top of head carriage
assembly. - - - - - - - - . . . . ,
Rear View
Install cover.
Install disk drive.
233 not used
235 not used
236 not used
lEe 823146
Date 9/1Sn4
232-236
I
PN 1618895
3741 ML
234
237
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618896
Disk Top Cover Vertical Alignment Checks
II :
If the machine has eccentric bolts
Loosen the eccentric-bolt locking nuts.
- Loosen the clamping screw
- Make required adjustment by turning the
eccentric bolts.
- Tighten the clamping screw
- Tighten the eccentric-bolt locking nuts.
- Perform 238 if necessary.
a.
a.
Door
m
If the machine has a bar-type bracket
instead
of the eccentric bolts'
- Loosen two screws in, the bar_II .
- Loosen the clamping screw
- Make the required adjustment by moving the
drive unit about. When it is in position,
tighten the clamping screw.
- Raise the bar to seat against the base of the
drive unit and tighten the two screws in the
bar.
- Perform 238 if necessary.
III :
a.
238
-
Top Cover
-nr---~
I ------"------,In
~~=======================----==~'~
Good
__----------------------~~--I Door
~r:J
Topcover----(ll
.
Bad
1~==-========'--I~Door
Topcover-C_~~==~==m===================~=====c~_
Bad
Disk Door Lateral Adjustment
Ii
Loosen the four bracket mounting screws
Move the lower bracket right or left to center·
the door
- Tighten the four bracket mounting screws.
- Perform 237 if necessary.
II .
Lower
Bracket Mounting
Screws (4)
239
Data Set Label Format
(Fields in heavy lines are required by the 3740
system.)
- Any operation may be selected from read index mode.
Record advance or record backspace to read
and display any label on the index track (00).
Data set labels are 08 through 26 on the index
track.
- To select a data set, record advance, or record
backspace to the label (00 08 through 00 26)
containing the desired data set, then select a
machine mode.
All operations must be performed within the
boundaries of the selected data set.
Error
Code
B
Type
Mode
1
4
13
6
J
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
HDR1
Data Set Name
27
29
1 1 1 1
Record
Length
33
35
39
1 1 1 1
End
of Extent
1 1 1 1
Beginning
of Extent
1731 ~5
1 1
1411421431 1451
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
79
1
End of Data
'-- Multivolume Indicator
File Protect
Accessibility
Byp ass Data Set
Causes
~
Verify Mark
What You Do
Note: You must press FUNCT SEL lower, M and REC
Incorrect Data
Set Label
ADV after making correction to the label.
X
BOE is greater than EOE or EOD.
Reset and correct the BOE, EOE, and/or EOD.
X
BOE is less than track 01, sector 01.
Reset and correct the BOE.
X
EOE is greater than track 74, sector 26.
Reset and correct the EOE.
X
EOD is greater than EOE + 1.
Reset and correct the EOD and/or the EOE.
X
EOD is greater than track 75, sector 01.
Reset and correct the EOD.
X
Record length is 00 or greater than 128.
Reset and enter the correct record length.
X
BOE, EOE, or EOD sector number is 00 or is
greater than 26.
Reset and enter the correct sector number.
X
The third position in the BOE, EOE, or EOD is
not a zero.
Reset and insert a zero in the third position.
X
Data is entered in positions 23 and/or 24.
Delete data entered in these positions.
X
One of the following conditions existed when
you tried to select a mode from the Index track:
- The current sector address displayed in the
status line is either: 01, 02, 03, 04, OS, 06, or 07.
- Position 4 in the label doesn't contain a 1.
- The data set label has been deleted.
R
A card read function was selected in a data set
that had a label containing a B in position 41
(bypass indicator).
Reset and press R EC ADV to locate the desired label.
Reset, enter a 1 in position 4 of the label.
Change to another label or enter an undeleted label.
Advance to a data set with a valid label and reinitiate the
card read function.
Remove the bypass indicator. If a card read was initiated
while in the enter or update modes, the EOD was not updated to reflect the new records. To recover the data,
change the EOD to equal the EOE. Search the data set
for the last record written, press R EC ADV, note the current disk address from the status line, return to the index
track, and change the EOD to the correct address.
240 not used
241 not used
826065
8/1/75
237-241
23
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PN 1619554
3741 ML
239
I
I
EC 823146
242
PN 1618898
Date 9/1Sn4
242
Leadscrew Service Check
Spring washer
Spring washer service check. Check for about
0.030" (0,762 mm) up and down movement
of leadscrew against spring washer.
Leadscrew bind
service checks:
Leadscrew nut
service CheCkl
0.020" ± 0.015"
-=::t==;1;1
(0.508 mm ± 0.381 mm)1
~ __
White
Leadscrew wheel
/~-0.025" ± 0.005"
-(0.635 mm ± 0.127 mm)
"-
_I
Black-
Leadscrew wheel and stepper motor service
check.
~'--- Stepper motor wheel
~
Steel pin
0.020" ± 0.015"
=to.508 mm ± 0.381 mm)
Determine type of stepper assembly (below)
and check for the specified clearance for type
used.
White ---
·243
244
Phototransistor Assembly
Adjustment
Access to track O.
Remove cover, if necessary.
Loosen mounting screw, and move phototransistor assembly to left.
Install CE tool as shown at right.
Adjust phototransistor assembly so that raised
edge is in contact with, not pressing against,
tool.-----------------Tighten mounting screw.
Remove CE tool.
Replace cover.
Removal and Replacement
Remove cover, if necessary.
- Remove two mounting screws.
Remove leads. (Yellow wire goes to
terminal marked Y.)
To replace, reverse procedure.
--9---_0_-
Install CE tool by
screwing thumbscrew
into drive hub.
l-':"---~~_:-'"
......=-=----J
Machine Locations
Rotate CE tool
so it contacts
this surface.
Legend
Terminal board (TB1)
II Ac line filter
Power supply ac cable
B
iii
245
Disk Operations Timings
Operation
Number of
Records
Normal Sector
Sequence (01)
Disk 1
The following chart provides approximate timing
information for search, copy, and initialization
operations on the 3741. Timings are shown for
the normal sector sequence (1, 2, 3, .... 25, 26)
and for the alternate sector sequence (1, 3, 5 ....
25, 2, 4, .... 24, 26). The timings provided in the
chart should serve as a useful guide when relative
job timing must be considered.
The timings a1re based on 80 character records.
Timing can be affected by such things as disk
speed, length and location of search masks, and
the location of data sets on the disk.
Disk 2
Disk 1
Disk 2
1898 (Assume
EOD is 74001)
5 sec
5 sec
5 sec
5 sec
949 (assume
EOD is 37014)
3 sec
3 sec
3 sec
3 sec
400 (assume
EOD is 16001)
2 sec
2 sec
2 sec
2 sec
1898
30 sec
8 sec
30 sec
8 sec
949
15 sec
8 sec
15 sec
8 sec
400
8 sec
8 sec
7 sec
7 sec
1898
5 min
30 sec
5min
30 sec
2 min
50 sec
2min
50 sec
949
2min
45 sec
2min
45 sec
1 min
30 sec
1 min
30 sec
400 .
1 min
10 sec
1 min
10 sec
40 sec
40 sec
------
1 min
50 sec
-----
1 min
50 sec
-----
Image copy
1898 plus
index track
3min
30 sec
-----
10 min
-----
Data set
copy
949
10 min
-----
9min
-----
Data set
copy
400
4min
30 sec
-----
3min
50 sec
-----
Search end
of data
Search on
sequential
content
Search on
content
Disk
initialization
242-245
Alternate Sector Sequence (02)
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618899
3741 ML
245-1
lEe 823146
Date 9115/74
r
This page intentionally left blank.
245·2
PN 1618900
)
301
-
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Ac line filter
2192519
600-07
Brightness control
2455605
200-04
Chassis and CRT
assembly
2455625
200-02
Converter
2455603
200-03
CRT socket
assembly
2455699
200-06
See Parts
Catalog
200-05
Display signal
cable
2456372
100-05
Power supply
cable
2456361
100-08
Power supply
PC board
See Parts
Catalog
600-04
Yoke assembly
2455601
200-07
Display PC board
,
I'
Cause Codes
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01
07
20
21
Dirty
Grounded
Loose
Open
22
28
34
42
Short
Worn
Other
46
70
00
302 not used
303 not used
301-303
EC 823146
826066
Date 9/15n4
8/1n6
PN 1618901
3741 ML
301
I
304
EC 823146
PN 1618902
304 CRT Locations
Legend
I
II CRT high voltage anode
Ii!
"
DJ
II
II
Display signal cable
Display PC board
Yoke cable connector
Chassis and CRT assembly
Yoke assembly
Converter
CRT socket assembly
Brightness control
Centering rings
Power down.
- Ground both the CRT high voltage anode and
the anode wire to the frame.
Display unit is safely grounded only if the
mounting screws are tight.
If the anode wire is disconnected from the
CRT, touch the shorting tool against the
anode wire connector to ground it again.
m
m
II
II
DANGER:
12.000 Vdc
Blu------,
To MPU-2-N
Plant--Date--PN------
.,
I
~
GRAY
:BR
l
I
I
I
BLK
BLU
I
EC--(Back side)
I
I
J
Character Yoke
Brightness Control
Converter
Save the clamping ring; it is
not part of the yoke assembly
CRT Socket
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire
Color
Brown
Black
Red
Orange
Unused
Unused
Yellow
Brown
PC Board
Terminal
16
pr 18
14
8
15
17
18 or 16
,Il
Note: Disconnect Wires'\J,
9, 10, 11 before removing
'~~~~_________~
display unit.
305 Circuit Diagram
Display PC board
Converter
High
voltage
oscillator 1 - 5 r - - - - - + - - - - -
High voltage
ground
I
~----
-D12
6t------"
-D13
Signal gnd
_
D06 ----,
D07--+I __J - ~ -
-
--D08~
{7
400 Vdc
-
8.---------.
+12 Vdc
_._ B08----..J
~B.rightness
9
--B09---~ 1~------10~
f-4
-~-,
control
1-5 -
Feedback
~ (oscillator)
-0<
11'-
of-- - - -
-;~~---12~+12Vdc--------------_+-----
Wiggle control
Character
(wiggle
13 I- Wiggle sweep pulses
sweep)
control
--B05------1
Horizontal
master
-----------.LHorizontal
slave
~---14r-----------------
~---15r-----------------L1-
Character
yoke
~---16r-------------------------~
L.roooo"\J
t
~-----
-
Video
--B07----I
Video (dot)
amplifier 17 - V·d
I eo--------------!-..J
I
1 :
~
~rg
~
1------
CRT
""\
Vertical
yoke
6.3 Vdc
B1 2 - - - . - - - J - - - - -18 I-Heater +6.3 Vdc _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---1
-B13
- - B02 --------I~ Vertical--BCl3
Vertical line
--B04
control
A
1------Horizontal B
Horizont~I---B10----I
sweep
I- Vertical
f-
deflection-------------.-..J
.
HOrIZontal
deflection ------------------1-
C
.
~ (deflector)
- - - - - HOrIZontal deflection -----------------l--LJ
---D09----4~
r-D~+12VdC-------------------1-~
+12 Vdc
§?2~
L13
( ] B Pins
--D10
D Pins -12 Vdc
---D02------1
I
IE 1-+12 Vdc
L F 1-+ 12 Vdc
-_================================J!----.1
9/15n~
lEe 823146 I
Date
304-305
PN 1618903
3741 ML
305
306
306 Cable Extender (PN 5998763)
EC 823146
826065
Date 9115n4
8/1n5
308
PN 1618904
Machine Locations
13
Loosen the cable clamp to permit connecting
the cable to the extender without strain.
Legend
AC line filter
Power supply PC board
Power supply dc cable
B
m
a
309
MPU Locations
~HingeEnd
B
2
•
TPrO
iOl"!Oi,"!Di
01I
I'
I
Test pin
location
path~"
II
I'
, ,
fTP 23
0
,
tI"'\
Y
I
,
,
•
TP 1
r::-'
:
TP"-3--
i il
L
~~..JTP12'"
:
TP
I
11~ __ ...
13
:0:
;
~
TPFll
~:
....
....
::
~
..... ..... ""
0 0:, ,
-"4'
TP 1 0 ,
I"
1 '0
f TP 21
TP 9
JTP 20
q"
,C=:J
', D IT]'
0:ODTP::~7; :0: i
I
,~
, L-----J
TP 2
'
I
TP 19/... _
\
\
I
I
,T~141
I
I
\
\
~
•
TP 3
0
(TP 5
~
- - TP 4
~
Signal cable
' ",
I
;'P18
,
0
0
I' TP 17
'b
J__ .!. _2.~
1P-.;15
TP 16
PN·EC
File cable
~
I
Cross connectors
311
Yoke Adjustment
The objective is to align and center the display in
.the viewing mirror.
I
DANGER
Due to high voltage (12,000 Vdc and 400 Vdc)
in the display unit, use caution.
Alternate adjustment methods (power on and
power off) are described below. (The power on
method is recommended.):
Power On Method
1.
Power down.
1.
Power down.
2.
Ground CRT anode.
2.
Ground CRT anode.
3.
Loosen the clamping screw
and slide the
yoke into contact with the fat part of the
CRT
3.
Loosen the clamping screw and slide the
yoke into contact with the fat part of the
CRT.
4.
Orient the yoke with the wires away from
the PC board
4.
Orient the yoke with the wires away from
the PC board.
5.
Using just your fingertips on the screwdriver
handle, tighten the clamping screw. Then
tighten the screw 118 of a turn more. The
yoke can now be rotated about the CRT
neck, but stays in any desired position.
5.
Using just your fingertips on the screwdriver
handle, tighten the clamping screw. Then
tight~n the screw 1/8 of a turn more. The
yoke can now be rotated about the CRT
neck, but stays in any desired position.
6.
Power up. After warming up, the display
status line should show XN.
6.
Power up. After warming up, the display
status line should show XN.
7.
Adjust the brightness control to get a raster
which is clearly visible but is not too bright
and is not enlarged.
7.
Adjust the brightness control to get a raster
which is clearly visible but is not too bright
and is not enlarged ..
8.
Rotate the yoke to make the display
straight on the viewing mirror.
8.
If adjustment is needed, power down and
ground the CRT high voltage anode to discharge the high voltage power supply.
9.
Rotate the yoke and/or centering rings (on
the end of the yoke) to correct the position
of the raster on the viewing mirror.
10.
Power up. After warming up, the display
line status should show XN.
11.
Repeat steps 7 through 9 until the adjustment is satisfactory.
B
'I
rJ.
CRT
Anode and anode wi re
12,000 Vdc
Power Off Method
II.
Note: The voltage on the yoke is 12 Vdc.
9.
Clamping
screw
' - - - - - 400 V dc
Rotate the centering rings (304K) on the
end of the yoke to center the, display on the
viewing mirror such that the operator can
view both the upper and lower lines in a
normal seated position.
Note: Sit in the operator's chair to observe
the display. The center of the viewing mirror
can be judged only when viewed from the
operator's viewpoint.
310 not used
lEe 823146
306-311
PN 1618905
3741 ML
311-1
I
EC' 823146
I
Oat. 9/15174
(
,
I.
I
This page intentionally left blank.
311-2
PN 1618906
401
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Ac line filter
2192519
600-07
Audio feedback
device
1611403
040-02
Cover, bottom
2455127
040-00
Cover, top
See Parts
Catalog
040-04
KBD PC
board
KBD signal
cable
Key module
See Parts
Catalog
040-07
2456460
100-06
See Parts
Catalog
040-08
Space bar
module
See Parts
Catalog
040-09
Toggle switch
1620065
040-03
Toggle switch
cable
3sw
4sw
2455148
2456292
040-01
040-01
\'
\
\ Ca~se Codes
\
I
'Adjustment 01 Dirty
22
, Bent
07 Grounded 28
Damaged
20 Loose
34
Defective
21 Open
42
Short
Worn
46
70
402 not used
403 not used
lEe
401·403
823146
826065
Date 9115/74
8/1/75
PN 1618907
3741 ML
) 401
EC
407
Keyboard Disassembly/Assembly
and Locations
Important! Work cleanly. The keyboard assembly MUST be kept free of dirt.
Lay the keyboard down on its key tops and remove 6 screws from the bottom.
CAUTION
Do not disassel1lble the unit yet. If a key
happens to be pressed, the flyplate will jump
out of the key module.
Hold the keyboard in a way to keep all components in place, and turn it over so that the
key tops are up.
CAUTION
Be sure no keys are pressed. Lift the all keys
unit and lay it on a smooth, clean surface. If
the all keys unit is lifted and a key has been
pressed, the flyplate of the pressed key will
jump out of its module.
407
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
Space Bar Removal
Lift one edge of the all keys unit about 0.5
in (12.7 mm) and push and wiggle the failing
key modules down until they snap free. If
the keyboard has a contamination sh ield, note
that the module retaining ears must clear the
chassis as shown, but they are not visible.
Hold the ends of the space bar and pull up to
slide the bar off the key stems.
- If pivots need to be removed, insert a screwdriver tip in the slot in the side of the frame and
twist the screwdriver slightly until the pivot
is removed.
-
ti)
Space Bar Installation
- Press the pivots into place in the frame.
- . Place the space bar in position over its key
modules.
- Guide the stabilizer into the slots in the pivots.
- Press the space bar down onto the key stems.
' " /11
-
I'~ l' "i
Cha~sis
Lift the all keys unit, leaving the loosened
modules.
Key Module Installation
1----- Frame
~l-----
Space Bar
- - - - - - Stabilizer
----Pivot
- To reassemble the keyboard, follow the above
instructions in reverse order.
Key Module Removal
CAUTION
The keyboard baseplate (407N) has a projection
that should fit through holes in insulation (407M)
and contact the PC board (407G). Be sure the
base plate is assembled correct side up. Incorrect
assembly might result in a ground circuit failure
that intermittently causes extra characters.
PN 1618909
Disassemble the keyboard.
Use the key top pulling tool to lift the key top
buttons from the key positions to be removed.
CAUTION
Be sure that no keys are pressed.
- Set the key module upright and place the all
keys unit in position over it. Align the slot in
the module with the orientation lug in the
mounting hole.
Press down on the ends of the all keys unit to
snap the module into place.
Position the contamination shield if required.
- Reassemble the keyboard.
407
Legend
All-keys assembly
Key top
Key module
Flyplate
Toggle switch
Toggle switch cable
Keyboard PC board
Keyboard signal cable
Audio feedback device
Pad area
Probe points
Insulator
Base plate
Keyboard Disassembly/Assembly and Locations (Continued)
m
m
B
m
II
Contamination
Shield
II
DJ
m
IJ
13
D
>--------a
m
III
--B
ID--------------~
'1~'1-----(J
Projections on
these, plates provide continuity
for ground.
r
CAUTION
Square pins misaligned
may damage connector.
----PNS
;----SS
:---GNO
I _ --KSW
-- CV
,... ..... CO
I
... .
GND
SS
CD
CV
,
ISA CLOSED
THRSHLD
•
LD INPUl
.:.Z ••••• Z..... : .... Z••
I
{
••••••••••••••••••••• i ••
Keyboard Cable Chart
D B
2
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
0
0
0
[J
[J
[J
[J
Cl
13
404 not used
405 not used
406 not used
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
[J
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
Bl0
Bll
B12
B13
SPEED SELECT switch
PROG NUM SHI FT switch
AUTO OUP/SKIP switch
AUTO R EC AOV switch
- Bit 2
- Bit4
- Bit 6
+ 5V Power
+ 5V 7 - IlS Osc
- Power on Reset
+ 10.8 Hz 5V Osc
- Error
002
D03
004
005
006
007
D08
009
010
Dll
- BitO
+8.5V Power
- Bit 1
- Bit 3
- 5V Power
- Bit 7
Ground
- R Time
+ Busy Tone
+ Keyboard Data
Gate Out
012 Katakana Shift Bie
013 -Bit5
*Present only on Katakana machines.
PN 1619560
404·407
3741 ML
407-1
41Q
826065
PN 1619561
8/1/75
4 10
CI icker Service Check
See 407J for location.
0.005" + 0.001"
(0.127 + 0.025 mm)
New Style
Service check; not for adjustment.
411
0.010" +0.000"
-0.010"
(0.25 - 0.25 mm)
Keyboard Switch Circuits
Toggle
switch
cable
PC Board
Band D
Signal
cable
AUTO RECADV
AUTO DUP/SKIP
PROG NUM SHIFT
*SPEED SELECT
(World Trade only)
. ON
•
* KATAKANA SH I FT ~-"'___- - 7 )--'1--1
(Katakana machines
only)
012
~)--II--I-""""~-Katakana
OFF
shift bit
D08
>--I--II--~~ GN D
Keyboard PC Board
MPU
Note: The up position is open circuit on the SPEED SELECT and KATAKANA
SHIFT switches only, all others are shown in the down position.
412
- Tape the keystem in the down position.
Flyplate Replacement
Replacing a dislodged flyplate in a key module
is not recommended. However, if replacement
is necessary because a new key module is not
available, inspect the flyplate to make sure the
joint between the spring and flyplate is not loose
or the flyplate is not cracked or damaged.
- Form the spring on the flyplate so that there
is 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) between the ends of the
spring.
Holding the key module and flyplate as
shown, line up the ends of the flyplate
spring
with the tips of the· flat spring
II attached to the keystem.
a
/
Remove the keybutton from the key module
and remove the module frorn the keyboard.
Insert a small stylus or straightened paper
clip through one of the accessholes in the
key moduleR
Push the tip of the flat spring up on the inside
of the flyplate spring.
Ease the flat spring down until· the tab drops
into the slot of the flyplate spring.
Attach the other end of the spring in the same
way.
Carefully remove the tape holding the keystem.
Check the keystem ears for tap'erin the center
slot and f~rm the ears if necessary.
Right
Wrong
A
A
A
A
Install the key module in the keyboard (407).
408 not used
409 not used
413 not used
414 not used
EC
408-414
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1618911
3741 ML
412
415·1
823146
EC
825853
415
CE Mode
See note 1
Key Codes
See note 3
02
01
2E
38
copy
CDMM
ENTER
UPDATE
03
OE
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
DISK 2
REC
ADV
SEARCH
VERIFY
CDNTENT
05
06
SEARCH
SED
DNTEN
r See note 2
-\
DISK 2
RET TD
INDEX
I'
READ
TO
EOF
PRINT
REC
PRINT
TD
EDD
RETURN
TO
INDEX
PRDG
LDAD
DELETE
REC
2D
20
OA
PUNCH
TO
EOD
SEARCH SEARCH
ADDRESS
EDD
07
PN 1618912
11/15n4
Date 9/15n4
08
09
CDMPUTE DISPLAY
FIELD
.IELD
TDTALS TDTALS
DISPLAY DISPLAY
FIELD
PRDG
~~~~~
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PRDD
PRDG
STAT
2C
.
DISPLAY
DATA
OC
Proof keyboard
key layout
OD
20
36
~
~
Example: For the M
key, 27 is the character code
for no shift key pressed. The
first character of the CE mode
code is a 2. The second char·
acter is a 7. Bit lines B07,
002, 004 , an d 005 shau Id
be up (+), and bit lines B06,
B08, 007, and D13 should be
do wn (-). See note 3
First Character of
CE Mode Code
.....
.
Key Code Display
i
1
/2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Bit Line Levels
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
Res~Key _l-=- _+_ -=- _-_
__
Note: A bit
Ii~e
off is up (+).
A bit line on is down (-).
CEW
00008
00 07 00 00 00 00
66 00
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
08 50 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00
B06 002 004 005
3
1
0
2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
0
A A
001
Second Character of
CE Mode Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
~7
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
B07
4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
B08 007 013
6
7
5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
A
B
C
0
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
-
+
+
E
-
-
+
8
9
F
---- -
l~
-
-
+
-
-
Notes:
1
,
- +
+
----
1. For 1/0 Adapter, this label is I NPUT TO 3741.
2. For 1/0 Adapter, this label is OUTPUT
FR01Vl3741.
3. For alpha and numeric keyboard interface
decode, see pa~e 13·8.
Katakana CE Mode
415 (Continued)
See note 1 --.,\
Key Codes
See note 3
01
2E
38
DISK 2
REC
ADV
UPDATE
VERIFY
~tRCH
NTEN
COMM
ENTER
02
COpy
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
18
19
.- See note 2
I
PUNCH
READ
TO
EOF
DISK 2
RET TO
INDEX
TO
EOD
PRINT
REC
RETURN
SEARCH
SEARCH SEARCH
TO
SEa
EOD
INDEX
CONTENT ADDRESS
3C
38
lA
27
18
PRINT
TO
EOD
COMPUTE DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
NAME
TOTALS TOTALS
PROG
PROG
LOAD
DELETE
REC
28
29
DISPLAY DISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
IE
DISPLAY
DATA
34
IF
~
~
Example: For a failing M
key, 27 is the character code
for no shift key pressed. The
first character of the CE mode
code is a 2. The second character is a 7. Bit lines B07,
002, 004, and 005 should
be up (+), and bit lines B06,
B08, 007, and 013 should be
down (-). See note 3
First Character of
CE Mode Code
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
Key Code Display
66 00
08 50 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
Bit Line Levels
Up (+) and Down
Second Character of
CE Mode Code
(-) Bit Lines
B06 002 004 005
3
1
0
2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
B07
4
+
+
B08 007 013
7
5
6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
--
----
823146
Date 9/15174
825853
11/15/74
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
;.:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
C
0
E
F
+
EC
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
9
+
E
F
Reset Key
+
Note: A bitTineoff is up (+f. A bit Ii'ne on is down (-).
415
001~7{00 07 00 00 00 00
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
---
PN 1618913
3741 ML
415-2
416
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
EC
416
Test pin
EBCDIC Collating Sequence
Order
in the
Sequence
•
I
, ,
:Jath~1I1
i'N
c:::J
,
TP 11
Ir-J
, ,
0
.JTP 12
: ~
I
" D qT~
[D
\
,'0, D 6
I
,
\
TP 3 \,.. - -
4
Signal Cable
I
,
I
'
0
9 :
JTP 20
I TP 19'_
--.JP
:
TP J15 -
18
I
TP':'.,4'
6 TP 7 ,I II
TP.14 I
I
I
(TP 5
I
:
-tp
TP 22 I
hp 21
TP8)
'
lO:
0 01: :
TP10
~p 2
23
0
1
II
:
1
TP
:
I
.......... ,
, c:::J
f
,
TP~3--'
~...
0
TPf4
iOHO! rli
0: :: :lU:
TP 1
ocation
418
Disk FC Card
1"./
b
PN 1618914
Group A -
0
0
I V
I
I
'1TP 17
- - - ~p 16
PN- EC
File Cable
1
(lowest)
2
3
4
5·
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Character
Blank
IZ
Corresponding
Hexadecimal
Number
40
-
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
6B
6C
60
>
?
6E
6F
:
7A
7B
7C
70
<
(
+
I
€
I
$
*
)
;
I
- (minus)
/
%
(U nderscore)
#
@
(apostrophe)
417
Machine Locations
Disk 2 se arch
sequenti al
content will
work wit h
either Gr OUp
A or Gro up
B but no t
both gro ups
before
ECA022
After EC A
022, disk 2
search is
like disk 1.
-
Group B
26
27
=
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
(highest)
A
"
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
p
Q
R
\
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7E
7F
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
D1
D2
03
D4
D5
06
07
08
D9
EO
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
I
Disk 1 search
sequential content .
will work with
this group of
characters.
419
MPU Locations
Hinge end
MPU cables
2-J Disk 1
2-K Disk 2 (feature)
2-L
2-M Power supply
2-N Display
2-P Keyboard
2-0
2-R
Attachment half
planar (Data Recorder)
AA\---cc
•
Feature cables
BB
1-N BSCA
1-P Printer
1-0
1-R Printer
DD
FF
2
Hinge end
Note: On memory, sync clock, ID reader, and terminal
ID cards, the part number and EC level are on the connector block.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
416-419
825853
826065
11/15/74
811/75
PN 1618915
3741 ML
419-1
lEe
823146
Date 9115/74
I
This page is intentionally left blank.
419-2
PN 1618916
501
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Part Number
IR Code
Cause Codes
AC line filter
2192519
600-07
BSCA cable
2455893
100-03
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
Communication line cable
2455119
100-03
I D reader motor
60 Hz 115V
60 Hz 100V
50 Hz 123.5V
2252233
2252234
2252235
ID reader
60Hz 115V
60 Hz 100V
50 Hz 123.5V
2144255
2144256
2144257
I nterposer card
2731011
Jumper (memory/feature)
1794401
Keylock
2455097
990-02
Line coupler cable
2455894
100-03
Line plate cable
1611380
100-02
Telephone /PD cable
2469321
100-02
Modem cable
2455573
100-02
MPU cross connector
2731026
MPU cross connector (wide) 2732453
300-02
300-02
Multipoint audible alarm
2197244
990-02
Optional 40' modem cable
1611341
100-02
Data recorder cable
1610677
100-02
I/O adapter cable
20'
40'
1620318
1620319
100-02
100-02
01
07
20
21
Dirty
Grounded
Loose
Open
22
28
34
42
Short
Worn
Other
46
70
00
990-01
990-01
300-08
502 Lists MPU Planar, Half Planars,
Line Adapter, and Cards
EC
823146
Date9/15n4
501
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 16189'7
3741 ML
501
502-1
EC
502
825853
826065
Date 9/15n4
11/15n4
811n5
PN
PN
PN 1618918
Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 1 of 6)
Cards
VFO
Memory 2K
ROS Feature
Feature group A
Feature group A (Katakana)
Feature group A and record insert
Feature group A and record insert
(Katakana)
Record insert
Proof keyboard
Proof keyboard and record insert
Proof keyboard, record insert and
feature group A
Proof keyboard, record insert and
feature group A (Katakana)
Proof keyboard and feature group A
Proof keyboard and feature
group A (Katakana)
EBSCA ROS
ASCII ROS
Katakana ROS
Sync clock
TerminallD
ID reader
Autoanswer basic
IR Code
300-07
300-05
300-06
PN
PN
8523120
*8230516
8527646
8238725
2455111
2455544
2455490
2456220
2456221
1620160
2455491
2455494
1610661
1610662
1620159
1620160
1610663
1620163
1610666
1610664
1620166
1620164
300-06
300-06
1610665
1620270
1611361
1620165
2469421
300-06
300-01
300-01
300-01
584-81
2455544
5863575
8521286
8521326
5861862
584-81
Autoanswer interface
584-87
Receive
584-89
Transmit
Multipoint feature
584-81
WTC PSN
584-81
WTC equalizer
584-81
WTC cable card
* Some memory cards may have a B/M number 8234646
Disregard the B/M number 8234646 when ordering.
Note:
823146
5862829
5862859
5862858 5863763
8523689
5864233
5863123
5863944
5864174
above the card number 8230516 on the shroud.
Part numbers are in ascending sequence, the latest levels are shown on the right. When replacing
a planar, check the PIN of the removed planar. Use this PIN or a later level PIN. The PIN is located on the connector shroud of the B, D, F or H connectors on the module side of the planar
(504). The PIN and EC may be scratched out at one location and an update PIN and EC etched
on the next location.
PN
PN
502
Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 2 of 6)
\
MPU Planars
~
IR Code
300-03
"
Country
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY),
and Germany (QWE RTY)
Denmark
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
Norway
2456950
2456954
2455311
2456955
2455300
2455498
2456210
2455602
2455607
2455608
1610600
1610602
1610603
1610604
1610605
1620259
1620260
1620261
1620262
1620263
2469185
2469186
2469187
2469188
2469189
United Kingdom
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France (AZERTY)
2456951
2456950
2456956
2456957
2456958
2455610
2455615
2455619
2455620
2455621
1610606
1610607
1610608
1610609
1610610
1620264
1620265
1620266
1620268
2469190
2469191
2469192
2469193
2469194
Latin America
Katakana
ASCII
Brazil
2456959
1610670
1611329
2469306
2455622
2455671
1610611
2469198
1620269
2469195
Feature Half Planars
IR Code
1~20267
PN
2469312
300-04
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
2455839
1611327
2455075
2455263
2456027
1610616
1611442
2468702
2468726
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY),
and Germany (QWERTY)
Denmark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
United Kingdom
2455073
2455090
2455088
2455092
2455086
2456127
2456145
2456143
2456146
2456142
2455989
2455996
2455995
2455997
2455994
1611432
1611439
1611438
1611440
1611437
2469230
2469237
2469236
2469238
2469235
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France (AZERTY)
Latin America
2455094
2455081
2455082
2455084
2455076
2456148
2456129
2456139
2456140
2466128
2455998
2455991
2455992
2455993
2455990
1611441
1611434
1611435
1611436
1611433
2469239
2469232
2469233
2469234
2469231
Katakana
ASCII·
Brazil
2455674
1611323
2469328
2469240
Country
With BSCA only
Same all countries
ASCII
With 3713 Printer and second disk
EC
823146
Date 9/15174
502
2469315
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618919
3741 ML
502-2
502·3
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
502
825853
826065
11/15/14
8/1/15
PN 1618920
Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 3 of 6)
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
US, Canada, Italy, France
(QWERTY), and Germany
(QWERTY)
Den mark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany
United Kingdom
2455074
2455089
2455087
2455091
2455085
2455262
2455279
2455278
2455280
2455276
2456026
2456035
2456034
2456036
2456032
2455964
2455984
2455983
2455985
2455969
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium
Latin America
2455093
2455078
2455079
2455080
2455077
2455281
2455265
2455274
2455275
2455264
2456037
2456029
2456030
2456031
2456028
2455986
2455966
2455967
2455968
2455965
Katakana
ASCII
Brazil
2455673
1611325
2469329
2468736
2456753
1620244
2469881
US, Canada, Italy, France
(QWE RTY), and Germany
(QWERTY)
Den mark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
United Kingdom
2456978
2456979
2456980
2456981
2456982
1620245
1609265
1609266
1609267
1609268
2469244
2469245
2469246
2469247
2469248
2469894
2469901
2469900
2469902
2469899
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France (AZERTY)
Latin America
2456983
2456984
2456985
2456986
2456987
1609269
1609270
1609271
1609272
1609273
2469249
2469250
2469251
2469252
2469253
2469903
2469896
2469897
2469898
2469895
Katakana
Brazil
2456988
2469330
2469242
2469904
2469905
Country
PN
PN
PN
PN
1610615
1610629
1610627
1610631
1610625
1611421
1611428
1611427
1611429
1611426
1620016
1620023
1620022
1620024
1620021
2468703
2468710
2468709
2468711
2468708
2468727
2468734
2468733
2468735
2468732
1610633
1610619
1610620
1610621
1610618
1611430
1611423
1611424
1611425
1611422
1620025
1620018
1620019
1620020
1620017
2468712
2468705
2468706
2468707
2468704
2468736
2468729
2469320
2468731
2468728
With BSCA, 3713 Printer
and second disk
With EBSCA only
Same all countries
With EBSCA, 3713 Printer,
and second disk
2469319
502 Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 4 of 6)
With 3715 Printer and second disk
PN
PN
PN
PN
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY),
and Germany (QWERTY)
Denmark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
United Kingdom
1620305
1620307
1620308
1620309
1620315
2469218
2469220
2469221
2469222
2469228
2469492
2469494
2469495
2469496
2469502
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France (AZERTY)
Latin America
1620314
1620311
1620313
1620306
1620310
2469227
2469224
2469226
2469219
2469223
Katakana
Brazil
1620312
2469322
2469728
2469701
PN
PN
PN
2469260
2469262
2469263
2469264
2469270
2469693
2469696
2469697
2469698
2469703
2469733
2469735
2469736
2469737
2469743
2469778
2469780
2469781
2469782
2469788
2469501
2469498
2469500
2469493
2469497
2469269
2469266
2469268
2469261
2469265
2469702
2469700
2469704
2469695
2469699
2469742
2469739
2469744
2469734
2469738
2469787
2469784
2469786
2469779
2469783
2469740
2469741
2469785
2469789
PN
2469318
/
825853
826065
Date 11115/14
8/1/15
EC
502
r
PN
1618921
3741 ML
502-4
502·5
825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
8/1/75
EC
PN 1619380
502 Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 5 of 6)
PN
PN
PN
PN
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY),
and Germany (QWERTY)
Den mark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
United Kingdom
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium
Latin America
1620283
1620285
1620286
1620287
1620293
1620292
1620289
1620291
1620283
1620288
246.8738
2468740
2468741
2468742
2468747
2468746
2468744
2468745
2468739
2468743
2469471
2469473
2469474
2469475
2469480
2469479
2469477
2469478
2469472
2469476
2469282
2469284
2469285
2469286
2469292
2469291
2469288
2469290
2469283
2469287
Katakana
Brazil
1620290
2469323
2469729
2469712
2469752
2469753
2469797
2469801
2456753
1620244
2469881
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY),
and Germany (QWE RTY)
Den mark/Norway
Finland and Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
United Kingdom
1620294
1620296
1620297
1620298
1620304
2469207
2469209
2469210
2469211
2469217
2469481
2469483
2469484
2469485
2469491
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France (AZERTY)
Latin America
1620303
1620300
1620302
1620295
1620299
2469216
2469213
2469215
2469208
2469212
Katakana
Brazil
1620301
2469324
2469723
2469727
Country
PN
PN
PN
PN
2469694
2469707
2469708
2469709
2469714
2469713
2469711
2469715
2469706
2469710
2469745
2469747
2469748
2469749
2469755
2469754
2469751
2469756
2469746
2469750
2469790
2469792
2469793
2469794
2469800
2469799
2469796
2469798
2469791
2469795
2469271
2469273
2469274
2469275
2469281
2469716
2469718
2469719
2469720
2469726
2469757
2469759
2469760
2469761
2469767
2469802
2469804
2469805
2469806
2469812
2469882
2469884
2469885
2469886
2469892
2469490
2469487
2469489
2469482
2469486
2469280
2469277
2469279
2469272
2469276
2469317
2469725
2469722
2469724
2469717
2469721
2469766
2469763
2469765
2469758
2469762
2469811
2469808
2469813
2469803
2469807
2469891
2469888
2469890
2469883
2469887
2469764
2469768
2469809
2469810
2469889
2469893
PN
With BSCA, 3715 Printer and
second disk
2469316
With EBSCA only
Same all countries
With EBSCA, 3715 Printer, and
second disk
502 Cards, Planars, and Half Planars (Part 6 of 6)
With BSCA, 3717 Printer,
and second disk
Same all countries
1607406
1607457
1607459
1607404
1607456
1607460
1607407
1607458
1607461
With 3717 Printer and
second disk
Same all countries
With EBSCA, 3717 Printer,
and second disk
Same all countries
Half Planar in 3717 Printer
Same all countries (except Katakana)
Katakana
1607438
1607439
Attachment Half Planars
IR Code
300-11
PN
PN
2468902
2469336
County
Data Recorder (129/5496)
Same all countries
I/O Adapter on 3741 Models
1 and 2
Same all countries
Line Adapter Boards
County
1620188
IR Code
584-00
PN
PN
2455072
2455892
1611373
2469520
2469518
2469516
Same all countries
Non-switched
Switched line
Public switched network, WTC
Line Plate
Line plate assembly, WTC
1780955
EC
502
823146
Date 9115/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619381
3741 ML
502-6
826065
8/1/75
This page intentionally left blank.
502-7
PN 1619562
503
3715 Printer Cables and Jumpers - Feature Half Planar (Part 1 of 3)
1 1 - _. . . .
Cable Connector
(Interposer)
Legend
mVFD card
II RDS feature card
B Cross connector
II Memory card (MPU planar)
II Memory card (feature half planar)
II Sync clock card
iii I D reader card
N
p.
/ To 3715 rmter
P
Q
.
. / To 3715 Printer
R
m
Terminal ID card
II Feature half planar
II Field update RDS
II Cable connector (Interposer)
Ii Sync Clock Card
m
ID Reader Card - -.....
III TerminallD Card-----'
III 3715 cable pin numbering
113715 printer jumpers (503-2)
&13715 printer signal cable (503-4)
113715 printer ac power cable (503-2)
EC
503
825853
Date '1/15174
826065
8/1/75
PN
1619382
3741 ML
503-1
503-2
EC
503
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619383
3715 Printer Cables and Jumpers - Feature Half Planar (Part 2 of 3)
N
Jumper for 40 Characters/Second
P
«_1 §
Jr:r for 80 Characters/Second
3715 Printer Jumper Field,
Q
E
R
Feature Half Planar
F
H
D
-r--
~
.~
oE
-
c
>
'"
B
3
*
'0u.
>
(Example: Model 4
with EBSCA and ROS
Feature Card)
3
*
'0u.
r:
(Example: Model 3
with ROS Feature Card,
2nd Disk, and Printer)
H
4
2
3
H
4
2
3
2
2
Gate Latch
End View
D
-E-r--+-~r--r~
II
_F_r__+-~~~~
H
4
2
3
2
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
.~
a:
U
C2
02
•
19
7 to 8
10 to 11
.~
a:
Line Adapter Board
Jumpered
With
Clear to
Send (CTS)
Jumpered
Delay
130 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 23
200 ms
17 to 19
50 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 24
75 ms
17 to 18
22 to 23
25 ms
17 to 16
Oms
CAUTION
The short delay combinations might cause intermittent echo problems.
PN 1618934
530
Line Plate Cable an~ Jumpers
Card Base
Card End
\
.!J
B
EJEJ
EJEJ
~
I
I
Line Plate End
,.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
n
..,
I
I
~
~
Line Plate Cable
Ringing Jumpers
A -
Mandatory.
B -
'" for two-ring delay in autoanswer.
Remove
Card
Base
Card
End
Signal
Line
Plate
D08
D13
B12
D05
B13
B04
B05
D08
B06
807
B05
B10
B04
B11
B09
B08
Current Detect 2
Data Indicator
Data Ring
Data Tip
Current Detect 1
+12 Vdc
Transfer Relay
Ground
A2
A4
A6
A8
B1
B3
B5
B7
PSN Card Jumpers
o
u o
n-
o
u
o o
u
o
Remove for two-ring delay in autoanswer.
529 not used
EC
528-530
825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619390
530
531
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
531
825853
PN 1618935
11/15114
Feature Half Planar to Line Plate Cables
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
BSCA Cable
1200 bps
Line Adapter
Line Plate
Line Plate
Cable
WI"
Switched
Telephone
cable
532
Line Adapter Board
A1
C
C
B1
C1
D1
E1
CI.l
...
.....
CI.l
°e
o!:::!
ro:l
en
C
...eo
c::r
w
I-
CI.l
>
°cu(.J
CI.l
a:
:ceo
u
e9
«U
CJ)
co
e7
e6
0
A2
B2
C2
E2
D2
Equalizer Card Jumpers
e5
...
CI.l
e4
0.
:l
...
0
CI.l
o~
o!:::!
E
en
c
ro
:l
c::r
w
Z
CJ)
c..
...eo
I-
Line Adapter Board
U
CI.l
>
°cu(.J
CI.l
a:
E
CI.l
CI.l
-00..0
~8
533 .Line Plate Coupler
3741
.
-- ..,
g
U11 •
U10 •
U9
U8
U7
U6
U5
U4
I
I
I
•
•
•
•
•
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
U1 U2 U3
I
I
,---,-,
,
Non-Japan
.~
/
I
I
~
2
.
t.
TB1
.
- - -_ _-r--
1
~
I
Red
To Frame
J=>-::>L-+-_ Wh ite
I
I
I
I
8.•
To Telephone
To Protect Device
(Japan only)
To Modem E2
531-533
EC 823146
825853
Date 9/15n4
11/15/74
PN 1618936
3741 ML
533
534-1
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
534
826185
5/23/75
PN 1619391
WT PSN Line Plate and Cab Ie Connections
TP2 (Capacitor)
TP1 (Diode)
Line Plate (PSN Coupler)
Bulk Cable
(Part 2546635)
EJ
•
•
B
-I
0
l-
•
••
••
••
••
•• ••
¢¢¢
IT]
•
•
••
• • •• ••
••
•• ••
;-----r-fl~--- L 1
-t-----t---t:...r-;---- L2
5
4
3
2
France Only
L1
L2
Telephone Cable
Line
, Plate
TB1-5
TB1-6
TB1-7
TB1-8
TB1-9
Cable
Telephone
Plug
Shield
Handset 2 (T2)
Handset 1 (T1)
Telephone 1 (L 1)
Telephone 2 (L2)
Black
Yellow
White
Red
534
WT PSN Line Plate and Cable
Connections (Continued)
Line Plate
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
Line
Plate
Cable
Connector
Pins
U11
810 ohms
C
U10
660 ohms
U09
330 ohms
U08
480 ohms
U07
150 ohms
U06
660 ohms
U05
Oohms
U04
W W/O Handset
U1
IU2 \ U3
U
T81 -
0
8
1
t
y
2
W
3
0-0
Non-Japan
Wire Color:
R
8
Y
4
5
7
6
0
0
0
T81
W
8
0
R
9
0
J
EC
534
825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619392
3741 ML
534-2
lEe
Date
534-3
8258531
11/15n4: .
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619393
5351200 bps Line Adapter for WT PSN
Feature
Connector
E2 to line
plate
•
I
L
!~a.!!.z~ c~d.!!...
I
Filter
(LF delay)
____________ _
1
Ground
0090008
1
1
Amplifier
(HF)
012
JOg
I
I
I
l
I
I Connector E1
I
) JOa- - ()- J07 - -- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
to socket 1-N
(Feature half planar)
I
G09
G12
-
Amplifier
+12V
B040
Filter
Limiter
I-
Discriminator
r-
Shaping
I
~~edata
-.
_ D04
I
I
,
•
Threshold
-43 dBm
Data ring
B120-----.
D02
Delay
I
1
L
Receiver card 01
Tr;s-;i;;e;-ca-;d
C1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -(
005
B09
D04
Dl;- - - - - - - - - ( J02 - - - - -
Data Tip
005O----+-.
-12V
Bl00Bl
- - - - --,
+12V
1
I
,
I
Clear to send
delay 200 ms
I
-
B13
,011
9
-Current
detect
2 __ I
B08 0 _
__
012
I
Ring
detector
•
I
D04;.
T
1
I
I
I
D131
T
'----------------
- - 007- 1
D080D09
+ Request to send
1"0.
D02
+ Clear to send
D05
+ Ring indicate
~----------------------------------------------------~~B04
,
I
DSR latch
or
I B12
Ground
1
I B03
I DOS
I
.- PSN-cB;d 82-
B120Bl 3
Modulator
Echo
clamp
130ms
-Current detect 1
I
•
Cable card
In E2
B07
+ Carrier detect
B05
I
I
I
I
Filter
Ring
sequence
detector
1
-I
40ms
or
1---------1 S
B09 I
+ Data set ready
B03
~------------------~~r_----~
B13o------C~~---e-----------~
+Transfer relay
R
•
•
1 B07
535
+ Connect data
set to line
~------------------------~----------------------------O_______O B08
I
B08 I
B05O---------~~~------------------------------------~
EC 825853
825958
826065
Date 11/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1618937
3741 ML
535
536
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
536
/
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618938
WT PSN Line Plate Functional Schematic
/
+12Vdc
B03~----------~------------------------------------------~.-~--------------
Data ring
A06~
1: 1
TB1-1,4
Data tip
A08~
40ma
+ Transfer relay
B05u---------------------~
Signal ground
B07~
Frame ground
1/ln TB1 -5
All resistance in ohms
All capacitance in microfarads
Telephone
lines
537
Manual Answer Sequence for WT PSN
Phone rings
Answer phone
Auto
disconnect
T mode
C mode
+12V
- Current detect 1 or 2
0
CD
+12V
- Current detect 2 or 1
0
+12V
+ Ring indicate
-12V
+12V
+ Data set ready
-12V
+12V
+ CDSTL
-12V
+ Transfer relay
+.2V
+.BV
+12V
+ Request to send
-12V
+12V
+ Clear to send
-12V
+12V
+ Send data
-12V
+12V
+ Receive data
+ Carrier detect
-12V
+12V
-12V
6
Q)
0
0
1& 2
1
6J
11 & 2
2&
3r
I5
5&2
CD
0
110
1
5
Cannot be probed
51
0)
0
7
10
51
71
7
1
Answertone
15
10
7
7
ACK DATA EDT
1IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUII~IIIIIII~lllIl
CD
®
®
1111
IIII
ENQ
ACK
10
10
The time scale is not linear.
Manual Answer Sequence
The ringing causes 'ring indicate' to come on; lifting
In order to perform a manual answer operation, the
the handset causes 'ring indicate' to go off and 'data
3741 should not be in transmit or receive mode but
set
ready' to come on. After answering the phone,
may be in communications (C) mode. If the 3741
and
when ready to transmit, the operator keys 'FSU',
is set up for communications (T or R mode) before
a call is received, autoanswer sequence will take place. 'COMM', (if he or she has not already done so), and
then selects the appropriate mode (T in the example).
If the 3741 is set up for communications (FSU,
The remainder of the sequence is similar to manual
COMM) while the phone is ringing, the line will be
call.
disconnected due to the internal BSCA test which
pulses 'connect data set to line' (CDSTL).
536,537
EC 823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15/74
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618939
3741 ML
537
538
823146
EC
Date 9/15/74
538
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1175
PN 1618940
Manual Call Sequence for WT PSN
C mode
Auto
disconnect
Tmode
Lift handset
+12V
- Current detect 1 or 2
0
.l,.'....".'
-/
'" .....
..... .....
~"'ll""'/:::
l..-t:/
I
Current
Original Power Supply With Diode Board
Fl
IGI
II
I
Part No.
Type
*For power supplies at EC 825737 or later.
**For power supplies prior to EC 825737.
Power Supply Locations
Revised Power Supply
I1(:'t:'
. . . '\.\\-............ l¥~
*Not installed on all machines.
Type
Part No.
604
(Continued)
r-:t Notes 1 and 2
~
1:1 Attachment
"'Cord
TB 1-1 Common
TB 1-2
TB1·3
TBl-4
TB1·5
TB1·6
r------4---~t-"
(100) 115/208
(115) 230
(200)
(208)
(230)
AC Line Filter
IDR
~~ader
lID I : I~::~~
I--=tlli~
~12
D
TB1-12
TB1·l0
Disk 1
Drive
Motor
-4 1
- 52
TB1·8
_6 3
TB1·9
3713
Ac
TB1·11
-50",
TB1-l Common
TBl-21.10
&1 Disk
2
Drive
-4
_5
Motor
TB1·l0
1
2
-6
TB1·ll
3713
Dc
TB1·8
3
r. - - - - - - - - - - - - I
+24
I WTC Only
GND
I
I
TB'.9 I
Disk
Drive
~I
TB1·7 :
Fan 1
TB1· 12 1
I
~Bl'9:
c
c
:.:-:-~:.:-:-~---i~}
TBl-14200
Japan
0
+5
GND
TB1·7 I
Fan 2
TB1·4220
·12
I
Disk
Drive
TB1·3123.5
+24
GND
·TB1.12 I
1
L -_ _ _
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -'I
SHIELD GND
r - - - - -------,
I WTCOnly
I ~TBl-9
10
I
: (TBl-2for 115/200/208/
~'
:
Reader I
TBl-12 I
:
:
L _________ .J
Power Supply PC Board
(8.0 to 9.4) +8.5 Vdc---+-+-..
(4.7 to 5.5) +5 Vdc
POR--++-..
(5.7 to 9.4) +6.3 Vdc--++-..
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc --++-....
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc--++-....
(11.0 to 13.2) +12 Vdc
Ground
+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
+8.5 Vdc (8.0 to 9.4)
........++--+5 Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
Ground
Test
-
- - - ---
Diode Board
~
-+6-~ c-stM-e te-r ~-T~2- ~I t
..
fiID]
Points
m
--Ground--t-t--t-41
Dc
230V 60 Hz Japan
TBl-3forall50Hz
TBl-7 for 100V 60 Hz Japan
.--0_+.....
6V
F4
[
]
24Vdc
]
8.5Vdc
J]
-12 Vdc
F3
[
~
_-~-o
-
-
TP13
+6.3
EC PIN DATE PLANT
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses apply to WTC 60 Hz
only.
2. Various transformers are used; check part
number (601) before changing taps.
*Not installed on all machines
602 not used
603 not used
823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15/74
11/15/74
811/75
EC
601 - 604
PN 1618957
3741 ML
604-1
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
604
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
604-2
PN 1618958
(Continued)
Revised Power Supply, No Diode Board
These locations are for the revised power supply
having no diode board. See graphic 604 on the
preceding pages for locations in the original
power supply.
l1
m
m
m
II
II
--m
.........
/
,//
k,
I I
I I
/
I I
//././
II
,/
mg
13
0
BIll
II
II
B
/::,/
II
//,/
/ ~ -;.. /
/ / ,/
",::;//
/./,/ ,/
,/
legend
n
W
Capacitor
II
Attachment cord
m
Power-on switch
II
II
Terminal Board (TB 1 )
II
Power supply ac cable
II
Transformer
AC line filter
miD reader ac cable
D
Primary ac fuse holder
13
Printer ac cable
D
m
II
iii
m
II
g
o
m
Printer de cable
DC fuses
Power supply de cable
Power supply pc board
Disk 2 ac cable
Disk ac cable
Disk 1 ac cable
Disk drive motor
CB 1.. 5V circuit breaker
* Not installed on all machines
..
*
604
(Continued)
Notes 1 and 3
TB1·1 Common
15
16
17
18
TB1·2 (100) 115/208
TB1·3 (115) 230
TB1·4 (200)
TB1·5 (208)
TB1·6 (230)
m
Ac
Li~e
Filter
Ac
a
Capacitor
o
Disk 1
Drive
Motor
Disk 2
mDrive
Motor
ID
~TB1-9
Reader
TB1-7
TB1-1:?
TB1·l0
- 4 1
- 52
_6 3
-4 1
TB1·ll
2
-6
3
Note 2
3715
TB1·l0
rn
rn
_5
m
TB1·8
TB1·ll
Ac
TB1·8
Power
13
r Wrc OniY- - -- - ---,
Disk
Drive
Fan 1
Disk
Drive
Fan 2
G348
TB1.12!
Note 2
3713
F
2
GND·Frame
Neutral.PC Board H
-50"'"
TB1·1 Common
TB1·9
Ac
TB1·21.10
Transformer
TB1·3123.5
TB1·4220
+5
+24
II
1
B1 9
. :
TB1·7 I
TB1.12 I
80"d
3
Note 2
3715
Dc
Power
B
,.9:
TB1·7 I
v,,·PC
TB1·5235
GND
GND
T.B_l_.1.3_'_00_ _ _0(
}
Japan
TB1·14200
1
I
·12
------------~
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses apply to WTC 60 Hz
only.
2. See 3717 MLM for ac and dc power pin assignments on 3717 cables.
3. Various transformers are used; check part
numbers (601) before changing taps.
r----------,I
I WTCOnly
I ~TB1'9
ID:
Reader I
I {TB1.2for 115/200/208/
I ~ 230V 60 Hz Japan
TB1·3 for all 50 Hz
TB1'~
lL _________
.... J: { TB1·7 for 100V 60 Hz Japan
Ac
Test
Points
H---t-~=__----....
-6 Vdc
Meter Test
r.tI
Power Supply PC Board . .
CD
( + ) - - + - - -...
--- - - G ro u n d---f-f-f-4
(8.0 to 9.4) +8.5 Vdc--++-...
(4.7 to 5.5) +5 VdC--HH
POR--+i-"
(5.7 to 9.4) +6.3 Vdc--++-__
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc --+-t--..
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc--+-+--"
(11.0 to 13.2) +12 Vdc---+-IH
TP1;-=--~~~ I
- -5 Vdc
~-H--Ground
24 Vdc
-- --
.....-H--+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
.....+t--+8.5 Vdc (8.0 to 9.4)
[IJ
~
--
[QJ
IT]
13
o::J
. POR
----:
C[J
[IJ
::
e+5Vdc ::
Ground
]
02
ID ..
--+++--+5 Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
[EJ
IT]
]-12Vdc
IT]
CO
e Gnd
*Not installed on all machines
605 not used
606 not used
823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15174
11/15/74
8/1175
EC
604 - 606
PN 1618959
3741 ML
604-3
607
607
609
CRT Locations
Keyboard Locations.
Part number and
EC level loca ted here
on back side of PC
board
"t strain.
connecting
"
clamp towperml
ithout
Loosen
the extender
the
cablethe
to cable
608
. ns
Disk Drive Locatio
File Control Card
•
/
/
I
/
/
II
II
::
0:
/
II
/
. 'ocat'on
.
TP;240
'D~:Di:D:
/
I.
:.
II
4TP 23
•
I
o
1-
S
..... .....
No Shift/Kana Shift--........l~~ lB
HUM
SHIFT
,
J
No Shift/Kana
I of
E '1
Z
'--
j
l.
......
X '1
•
$
T
C ')
Alternate Keyboard Layout Used with Katakana Machines
-~
"1
I
1J
17
;
.,
F 1\
G 'f
r ,
-
1
1
22
•
I
2
(
25
-.-
•
r
4
J ~
•3
7
M f;
t.
P
SEL
AnV"
PGM
-
31
T
I
t?
.
.
°lC
38
35
-j
SKIP
'1
II
29
-f
9
.
AI
r"1
-.-
-f
8
L !J
L
FLD
10
&
-f
8 '
00
r
..01
28
~
I
14
I
2B
I
1
OC
I
AnV
l...
~ 71
_1
.
2C
REC
CHR."
ADV?
23
I
5
t
.... IN - ...
I
K ,)
27
1
OA
=
I
24
.-
I
B J
21
lB
3B
I
lA
v t
,r
H?
j
•
•
0
I
- 1
1
U 1
Y:J
Shift---------·~lF
§
DUPto
13
I
.-
""-
T
"
18
•
3C
•
•
., ... 7 ., .
.,
•
r
r
D :J
18
12
I
3F
-.-
20
I
;f
11
¢
r:
t-
~~;t
I
R A
3D
15
'f
•
A
•
7
31.
<
20
I
I
o x
3E
•
LW
~
\...Q
RESET
....
10
•
.,
08
08
•
.¥ .,
"'1
21.
30
I
•
p
J
07
08
I
#
)t
~
~t""""':::=:::..,:7F;~::;jI
05
I
HEX
FUNCT
SEL
No Shift/Kana Shift..- 2•E
OE
03
0.1
Alternate keyboard layout used with proof
keyboard.
lE
-.-
.
:J.
KANA
SHIFT
1
RT J 1
AOJ 6.
1
1
34
I
CHR
BKS 0
1
ALPHA
SHIFT
708
71 0
Track Addresses
3713 Printer Index Selector Lever
Index Selecto,
Example
2
Example
3
XX001
XX014
XX020
~
~
46
-26
XX020
+32
52
Example
1
Starting record address -
33
-26
Next track-ending record address- XX007
(Do not enter a record at this address)
Ive,
-26
XX026
Note: If you stop short of the next track
ending address when using the repeat key,
additional records may be entered by pressing the U key twice for each record.
Printer - Right End
709
BSCA Error Logout
Mode determined by operation
,
BSCA Error Logout
When in R, T, P, B, or D mode, the bottom line
on the display shows the following :
Position
4
7
**14
**19
**24
**29
* 10
16
21
26
31
001
0
A
A
0100\
Meaning
Data terminal ready.
Data set ready
Request to se nd.
Clear to send.
CRC checks in receive.
NAKs received in transmit.
,Two second ti me-outs.
Th ree second time-outs.
1
'1 0
I
J
0
001 004
(XX)
001
j
I
*Note: 1 indicates on; 0 indicates off.
* *Note: Three position decimal counter.
707-710
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15114
8/1/75
PN
1618967~
3741 ML
708
711
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
711
BSCA Display Mode Indicator
712
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618968
Data Recorder/I/O Adapter/Printer
Cable Replace/Remove Procedure
BSCA. Display Mode Indicators
SAFETY:
A mode indicator is displayed in positions 37 and
38 of the status line. The following shows the key
required to select the mode, the mode displayed,
and the meaning:
Key Display Meaning
C
T
T
T
p
C
T
TI
TT
P
P
R
R
R
B
B
B
B
B
PI
PT
R
RC
RJ
B
BT
BI
BJ
BC
D
DI
DT
DJ
DC
%
%C
%T
W
WI
BB
DB
PB
TB
%J
%1
0
D
D
0
D
P
Communication
Transmit
Transmit incomplete
Transmit complete
Transmit transparent text
Transmit transparent incomplete
Transmit transparent complete
Receive mode
Receive complete
Receive incomplete
Transmit/receive (T/R)
Transmit portion of T/R complete
Transmit portion of T/R incomplete
Receive portion of T /R incomplete
T /R complete
Transmit transparent/receive (TT /R)
Transmit portion of TT /R incomplete
Transmit portion of TT /R complete
Receive portion of TT /R incomplete
TT /R complete
Online test mode
Online test complete
Online test (transmit)
Wrap test
Wrap test incomplete
Read operator ID (T /R)
Read operator ID (TT/R)
Read operator ID (transmit transparent)
Read operator ID (transmit)
Online test incomplete (receive portion)
Online test incomplete (transmit portion)
Remove all electrical power from the machine by
unplugging the mainline cord.
1.
Remove the back cover of the 3741 and open
the gate.
2.
Remove the safety shield from the power
supply and unplug cable connector from
power supply.
3.
Loosen the two screws holding the power
supply and disconnect the power supply
ground strap. Then move the power
supply as far as the cables will allow.
4.
If a printer has not been attached, skip
to step 7.
5.
Remove the screw (19944) and nut
(257198) from the clamp(2456297)B
and remove tha printer attachment cable
ground straps
12.
II .
13.
7.
Pull all of the gray covered portion of
the printer attachment cables out of the
machine.
Route the data recorder/I/O adapter cable,
one paddle at a time, through the hole
and to the right of the printer cables
if installed. This is a tight fit with the
printer cables inserted.
m
II
8.
Pull the data recorder/I/O adapter cable
through the hole until the gray portion is
about 12-inches (30cm) inside the machine.
9.
If a printer has not been attached, skip
to step 11.
10.
If possible, pull the gray portion of the
printer cables about 12 inches (30cm)
inside the machine.
11.
Loosely assemble the cable clamp rJ to
the cable or cables; just get the two screws
started. The data recorder/I/O adapter
cable
goes to the right of the printer
cables.
If the mode indicates an incomplete operation, check the error indicator in position 7.
See Symptom Index; Error Indicators, 1-2.
B
m
Slide the cable clamp over the flanged
bracket and secure it by tightening the
two screws
m.
14.
Screw the ground straps to the machine
base
15.
Route the cable or cables behind the power
supply (toward the machine front) and up
to 1/2 planar sockets. Secure cable to gate
with plastic straps in 2 places.
II .
16.
Refasten the power supply in its original
position.
17.
Screw the power supply ground strap on
the base.
18.
Mount the power supply safety shield and
cable connector removed in step 2.
19.
To remove the cable, reverse the above
procedure.
II .
6.
Pull the cables back out of the machine
until the cable clamp rests on the flanged
bracket
712
(Continued)
Printer
Attachment
Cables
II
Flanged Bracket
II
Hole for printer and data
recorder or I/O adapter
cables.
II
Cable Clamp
Ii1
Holes for BSCA or
modem cables.
~...:----, Screws
e
'~Holes
for screwing
Ii
II
down ground straps.
Data Recorder or
I/O Adapter
Attachment Cable
round Straps
D1
m
Point in cables where gray portion ends.
And where ground straps are attached.
Printer
-!.--'k:--:::::;::::::::::"--- Cables
II
Screws
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
711-712
826065
m
PN 1619394
3741 ML
8/1/75
712
EC 825853
713-1
825979
PN 1619395
Date 11/15/74 12/20/74
713 Data Recorder Attachment Cards
129 Data Recorder
en
N
I\)
o~
»:0
toe
__
'mo
ONLINE XLATE PREPARE
TO XLATE TO EBCDIC
(A1A4)
ONLINE XLATE EBCDIC
TO HOLLERITH
(A1B4)
ONLINE XLATE HOLLERITH
TO EBCDIC TO CPU
(A1C4)
ONLINE XLATE WITH SERLZR
EBCDIC TO HOLLERITH
(A1D4)
SKIPIVER READ AND
DOUBLE SPEED CARD 2
(A1E4)
BUFFER A+B SM
(A1B2)
I/O REG OSERLZR 0
0
ONLINE CTRL BITS
(A1C2)
ONLINE XPORT CHECKING
e
AND READ COMPARE
(A1D2)
SKIPIVER READ AND
m
DOUBLE SPEED CARD 1
(A1E2)
BUFFER I/O SM
(A1F4)
PROG SEL CTRL SM
(A1F2)
PROG DATA LOAD SM
(A1G4)
BUFFER A+B SM
(A1G2)
PRINT SUPPRESS SM
(A1H4)
LZ SM
(A1H2)
SKIP DUP SM
(A1J4)
PWRD CLOCK BIT
TIMING SM
(A1K4)
ENTRY COMPLETE SCAN
(A1J2)
END OF CARD SM
ONLINE PUNCH CTRL
»
(A1A2)
ONLINE READ CTRL
to
-n
C)
N
(,.)
::I:
t..
o
0»
»:0
,_
toe
me
(A1L4)
OUTPUT CTR L SM
(A1K2)
FIELD ERASE FIELD BKSP
"
,
_ (A1L2)
CTRL LTS SM
3:
(A1M4)
PAND CF SM
(A1M2)
OUTPUT LT SM
(A1N4)
KYBD L T RESTORE
(A1N2)
POR OSC SM
(A1P4)
COLUMN CTR & COLUMN
RING SM
(Al04)
MP COUNT UP SM
(A1P2)
COIL DRIVERS SM
(A1R4)
COL IND DR LED SM
(A1R2)
z
"'tI
N
en
0
(Al02)
COIL DRIVERS EM
:0
en
N
a>
(A1S4)
NUMERIC ENCODE
-<
en
VLCD FEATURE
~
(A1T4)
ALPHA ENCODE
(A1T2)
c
(A1U4)
<
713 (Continued)
5496 Data Recorder
U1
COL IND DECODE
:t>
(")
or
2
o
(A1A4)
DELAY TIMING
(A1A2)
WORDCTR
ro
-m
2r
m:t>
-<
OJ
(A1B2)
B REG
(A1B4)
PROG CTRL
-m"1J
(")
(A1C4)
PROG LATCHES
(A1C2)
OSE
(A1D4)
RESET & RECYCLE
(A1D2)
CHAR LINE CTR CTRL
(A1E4)
FIELD ERASE
(A1E2)
BIT TIME READ ASN
2:0::0
0::00
oC)
:Of'O
0
N
I,,)
:0
m
~@
00
:0
m
~A
-<
f',J
m
:O"1J
On
~
FE SWITCH
:0
m
:t>
0
"T1
(A1F4)
VER ERROR & DATA CTRL
(A1F2)
AREG
(A1G4)
VER RA & REVER
(A1G2)
ENT REG (KATAKANA)
C)
N
W
-<
w
::r:
"1J
C
2
(A1H4)
VER READ & REC UPDATE
(A1H2)
READ CTRL
A
(")
::r:
OJ
o
'-
(A1J4)
XPT CTRL
(A1J2)
PUNCH CTRL
(A1K4)
PU REG 1 AND 2
(A1K2)
~BD CTRL
(A1L4)
PU REG 2 AND 3
(A1L2)
KBD SERV
(A1M4)
KATAKANA FEATURE
(A1M2)
PRT CTRL
(A1N4)
IDLE CTRL
(A1N2)
SC ACC & PU CTRL
(A1P4)
VER CTRL
(A1P2)
SC ARITH CTRL
(A1Q4)
PRT REG
(A1Q2)
SC SETUP
(A1R4)
PRT RELEASE
(A1R2)
KATAKANA
(A1S4)
PRT REG
(A1S2)
SEE NOTE
A
N
~
AA
:t>:t>
2-1
:t>~
r
s:
2<
om
-1:0
2
(")
::r:
A
OJ
o
"1J
N
(11
"1J
:0
2
-I
-<
U1
p
:0
tf)
N
en
-<
m
-I
(A1T4)
(A1T2)
SEE NOTE
(A1U2)
CARD I/O
CABLE
m
S:"1J
_c
-I
I
CARD liD
CABLE
c
m
s:"1J
_::0
<
-I
Note: This card on attachment feature only.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825979
12/20n4
PN 1619396
3741 ML
71~2
lEe
825853
Date 11/15/74
714
I
714
PN 1619397
Communications Configurations
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
Modem Cable
Modem
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
BSCA Cable
1200 bps
line Adapter
line Coupler
line Coupler
Cable
Lines
Switched
I
3741 Model 2
I
Feature
Half Planar
BSCA Cable
-,
r
.--J
L...
1200 bps
line Adapter
I
Communication line Cable
'" "
L
~
--I
Non-switched lines
Non-switched
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
I
t---t
Modem Cable
System/3
LCA
-.r.J
t---'
""-
715
Feature Board Jumpers
Printer (3713 only)
No = Printer is not installed.
Yes = Printer is installed.
Note: Jumper position 1 is only on
feature half planars made for the 3713
Printer. Jumper positions 2 through 6
are only on feature half planars made
for BSCA.
Feature Half Planar
0
NO
0
YES
0
0
A
0
B
0
0
YES
0
NO
0
0
C
0
D
0
0
YES
0
NO
0
0
E
0
F
0
BSCA speed select
A
Low speed (600 bps).
B
High speed (1200 bps) or baud
select switch (WT) or modem clocking (1200,2000,2400 bps).
0
0
Keylock
Yes
Keylock is installed.
No = Keylock is not installed.
BSCA or
3717 Printer/2nd Disk/BSCA or
3715 Printer/2nd Disk/BSCA
Note: Depending on features installed all
jumper positions may not be present.
Note: Refer to 503P for description
Planar
Board
of 3715 printer jumper locations.
716
BSCA line control
C = Connect data set to line (CDSTL).
Plug for non-switched lines (except
some WTC switch line modems). Plugging this position will hold the 'data
terminal ready' (DTR) line off until
'data set ready' (DSR) or 'ring indicator' is on.
D
I BM Modem Cross- Reference
Modem
Jumper
IBM 3976-111
IBM 3976-111
IBM 3872
IBM 3872
1200 bps
line adapter
1200 bps
line adapter
WTC PSN
line adapter
System/3
LCA
Non-switched!
Switched
CDSTL/
DTR
4
Send
Answertone
Speed
Select
Sync Clock
Required
2
High
High
High
High
Yes
Yes
No
No
Send answertone
Yes = Data terminal must send answertone (WT only, where data terminal is required to send answertone).
No
Data terminal does not send answertone, modem does.
-
6
Switched
Non-switched
Switched
Non-switched
DTR
CDSTL
DTR
CDSTL
5
No
No
No
No
Non-switched
CDSTL
No
High
Yes
Switched
DTR
No
High
Yes
Switched
CDSTL
Yes
High
Yes
Non-switched
CDSTL
No
High
No
BSCA line facility
E = Switched lines. For time out and auto
disconnect if no line bids are received
and provides auto recovery from time
outs in unattended operation (autoanswer).
F
Note:
Data terminal ready (DTR). Plug for
switched lines (except some WTC
modems). Plugging this position causes
the 3741 to check DSR to see if it is
off before it will turn DTR on.
Non-switched line. Continuous line
bids on transmit. Continuous wait
for line bids in receive.
I D reader test pins.
No jumper required.
DTR - Data terminal ready
CDSTL - Connect data set to line
717 not used
714-717
EC 823146
825853
Date 9/15174
11/15174
PN 1618969
3741 ML
715
718
718
Socket
1-N
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
012
011
010
008
007
006
002
004
013
009
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
Modem Cable/BSCA Cable
Line Name
Request to Send
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Clear to Send
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Receive
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Ring Indicator
Carrier Detect
Rate selector
Data Terminal Ready
SCTE
Frame Ground
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
Test Mode
Test Clock
Modem Cable
Feature Half
Modem
Planar End
End
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
B03
B04
B05
B07
B08
B09
Frame
813
B11
B02
806
4
2
3
5
15
17
7
6
22
8
23
20
24
1
-
18
25
BSCA Cable
Feature Half
Planar End
1200 bps Line
Adapter End
002
003
004
005
002
003
004
005
-
-
-
008
B03
B04
008
B03
B04
-
-
B08
B08
-
-
-
B13
B11
B13
B11
-
-
PN 1618970
720
BSCA Operation
Records/Minute
Characters
Per Record
2400 bps
Non-switched*
Transmit
20
40
60
80
100
120
128
*
**
345
260
200
160
135
115
110
Receive
2000 bps
Switched**
Switched
Transmit or
Receive
Transmit or
Receive
175
175
175
115
115
115
100
110
100
90
80
75
70
65
105
90
80
70
65
60
55
Transmit Mode
Normal Data Set Label:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Has HDR 1 in positions 1 through 4
Is accessible
Has valid extents
and record length
Is not deleted
Has a B (bypass)
in position 41
Deleted Data Set Label or
Invalid Data Set Label:
•
•
•
•
Receive
170
115
85
75
65
55
180
130
100
80
65
55
55
5~
Transmit or
Receive
85
70
60
55
45
40
40
Does not have HDR 1
in positions 1 through
4
Has invalid extents or
tecord length
Is not accessible
Is deleted
Note: The write protect byte of a data set label is
checked only for the first data set to be received
on either disk. Subsequent data set labels are not
checked. Therefore, caution should be used to ensure write protected data is not written over during
receive operations. On early shipments of the 3741
with binary synchronous communciations, the
write protect byte status of the first used label
was not used. Your 3741 can be field upgraded
so that the write protect byte can be used. Contact your IBM representative for more information.
On Disk 2
Transmitting
Receiving
Transmitting
Receiving
Data set will be
transmitted.
Label will be
used in reo
ceiving data
Data set will
be transmitted
Not used
because
label
identifies
data set
that was
transmitted
Data set will
be trans·
mitted it:
1. it is the
first data
set (00008)
2. it is a con·
tinuation
of the
last data
set transmitted on
disk 1.
Label will
be used in
receiving
data
Data set will
not be
transmitted
Label will be
used in
receiving data
Data set will
not be
transmitted
Labels beyond the
last transmitted data
set will be
used in
receiving
data
Data set will
not be
transmitted
Label will
be used in
receiving
data
Data set will
not be
transmitted
Label will not
be used in
receiving
data
Data set will
·not be
transmitted
Label will
not be used
in receiving
data
Data set will
not be
transmitted
Label will
not be
used in
receiving
data
Has HDR 1 in positions 1 through 4
Has valid extent
and record length
Is accessible
Is not deleted
Is not a bypassed
data set (B in
position 41)
Bypassed Data Set Label:
•
Transmit
Switched**
Transmit/Receive Mode
Receive Mode
On Disk 1
•
Non-switched *
Full duplex facility or four wire switched network
Two wire switched or non-switched half-duplex facility
Disk Data Set Label
•
1200 bps
719 not used
721 not used
722 not used
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
EC
718-722
PN 1618971
3741 ML
720
723-1
723
EC
823146
826065
Date
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618972
Operati ng Procedu res
Operating Procedures
,
This section shows the actual operating procedures
and also flowcharts showing how data and the
data set labels are handled in BSCA (for both Disk
1 and Disk 2).
.
,
Was R mode selected?
2
NO
2
YES
I
I
Procedure complete
Operator I D reader feature installed?
•
•
:
YES
NO
I
I
Operator I D reader feature to be used?
Procedure complete
Start
I
I
YES
Press REC ADV
I
Procedure complete
Insert I D reader card
•
Load diskette(s)
I
Position to first data set label
I
•
•I
Press FUNCT SEL upper and COMM
Switched or
I
o
Switched
•
•
Procedure complete
4)
Turn keylock on if installed
Key remote I D if remote I D being used
I
NO
.'---_IBM
NO
If dialing, key M
•
3872 or IBM 1200 bps line adapter? .......
YES
•
non~switched?
,
Manual answer?
I
I
Non-switched
•
YES
NO
selecttode
Select mode
(T, P, B, D, R
except for WT
(T, P, B, D, R)
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSN)
•
Answer phone when it rings
and raise exclusion key, if
so equipped_
~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
I
Was R mode selected?
•
,.-
I
i
NO
,
YES
Operator I D reader feature installed?
i
. YES
NO
,
•,
.
Operator ID reader feature to be used?
NO
I
Press R EC ADV
YES
I
Insert I D reader card
723
(Continued)
............................
IBM 3872 or IBM 1200 bps line adapter?
'
~
U
NO
,
YES
U
Autoanswer?
"
'i
NO
• bps line adapter?
IBM 3872 or IBM 1200
•
•
YES
I
Procedure
complete
r¥#
Dial
I
**'
Push talk
button on
modem,
then dial
I
When remote
is ready,
answer tone
is on.
I
Push data
button on
modem
I
Procedure
complete
I
I
Manual answer
I
Push talk
button on
modem and
wait for
call
I
Answer phone
when it rings
I
i
Dial
•
Raise
L,
IBM 3872
I
Dial or answer?
Dial
:
•
Dial or answer?
I
Set TALK DATA
switch to TAL K,
then dial.
I
Answer
When remote is ready,
raise data key and
set TALK DATA
switch to DATA
I
IfWT PSN,
select mode.
exclusion key
if so equipped,
Manual answer or autoanswer
then dial
I
I
When remote
is ready,
answer tone
will be on.
I
If WT PSN,
When remote
is ready,
push data
button on
modem
select mode.
Procedure
complete
Procedure
complete
I
I
IBM 1200 bps line adapter
Push auto answer
button on modem
Manual answer or dial?
•
i
I
Hang up
hand set
i
I
Hang up
Manual
I
A't
Procedure
complete
,
hand set
I
Procedure
complete
I
•
Do not hang up
hand set
i
I
Procedure
complete
Answer
I
I
AUTO
Manual answer or autoanswer
Manual
I
Note:
TALK DATA
switch must be set
to DATA
Set TALK DATA
switch to TALK, and
wait for call
I
I
Answer phone when
it rings. When ready,
raise data key and
TALK DATA switch
to DATA
Procedure
complete
I
Do not hang up
hand set
I
Procedure
complete
723
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1618973
3741 ML
723-2
lEe 823146
724-1
I
PN 1618974
Date 9/15n4
724
Communication (Functional Flowcharts)
Transmit
Transmit mode selected (T or P model
Transmit mode was selected from update mode.
Operator positions drive
to desired record.
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
Yes
When a data set is continued
from disk 1 to disk 2. there
will be a C in position 45 of
the data set label on disk 1
and an L in position 45 of
the first data set label used
on disk 2
Machine goes to disk 2 and
finishes transmitting data
set. Then transmits any
other valid data sets on
disk 2.
Machine goes to disk 2
and transmits all valid
data sets.
"
......
Transmission complete
Machine will display T
status and mode it transmitted in T or P.
If position 45 of data set
label contains a C and the
second disk feature is not
installed. or the second
disk is not ready. transmission will terminate and
a D error is posted.
724
(Continued)
Transmit/Receive
Transm it/receive (T /R)
mode, or transmit·
transparent/receive
(TT/R) mode selected
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
T /R mode was sel·
lected from update mode.
Op~rator positions drive
to desired record.
Yes
Yes
When a data set is continued
from disk 1 to disk 2, there
will be a C in position 45 of
the data set label on disk 1
and an L in position 45 of
the first data set label used
on disk 2.
If position 45 of data set
label contains a C and the
second disk feature is not
installed, or the second
disk is not ready, trans·
mission will terminate and
a D error is posted.
Yes
Go to disk 2 and
finish transmitting
that data set.
,/'
,/
No
/"
Reception incomplete.
Machine will display J
status, D error, and
mode it was in; R, T/R,
or TT/R.
/"
lEe
823146
Date 9115n4
724
I
PN 1618975
3741 ML
724-2
lEe
823146
Date 911Sn4
725
725
I
PN 1618976 ]
Communication (Functional Flowchart)
Receive - - - - - ,
Receive mode selected
(R Mode)
Receive mode was selected from update mode.
Operator positions drive
to desired record.
No
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
Update data set label by
putting an L in position
45. (data from another
diskette ended on this
diskette).
Update data set label:
EOD=CDA(current disk
address).
EOE-EOD - 1
Character length = the
length of first record
received. Update BOE
by number of records
received.
Reception complete.
Machine will display:
C status and reception
mode it was in;R,T/R,
orn/R.
Update data set label by
putting C in position 45
(data set is continued
on another diskette)
Locate next valid data
set label. Update its BOE
to the EOE + 1 of the
data set previously received.(The data received will be written in
the first record following the EOE of the last
data set received).
No
Reception incomplete
Machine will display J
status, 0 error, and
mode it was in;R,T/R,
or TT/R.
726 Machine Characteristics (Service Hints)
Due to file (write) protect, it is possible for the
3741 to give an indication that it has written
data to disk when in fact nothing has changed.
Be aware that the machine characteristics de- .
scribed below may cause problems. You can either
circumvent them with changes in the customer's
routine, or if that's not satisfactory, field bills
of material are available to correct the conditions.
The following machine characteristics cause
problems only in conjunction with improper
operating procedures.
Machine characteristics:
In receive mode, if a data set ends exactly at
73026 and a null record is received, a D error is
displayed even though all data is received correctly.
Invalid ACK, after a 3-second time-out, does
not result in resending the previous record.
If communications starts on a data set, a redial
(after a remote abort) will proceed from one
record beyond the original starting position.
This is intermittent and one record may be
lost.
If receive mode overflows Disk 2, no C will be
put in position 45 (multivolume indicator) of
the data set label.
During any receive mode, the 3741 can write
over protected data. This will occur if the extents for the receive data set overlaps a protected data set. F or example:
(Receive data set)
(Protected data set)
BOE
01001
08001
01 001 -------------------------Receive
data set
08001 --------------------------
If receive mode detects a read index error, the
error is displayed and an EOT is sent even
though no more data is sent.
--------------------------- 10026
T/R mode. If the last data set transmitted is
file-protected, then all receive data is fileprotected and will not be written on the diskette
even though it appears to function normally.
15001 --------------------------
In transmit mode, if an A error or a read index
error occurs, the null record to end the last
data set is not transmitted, thus giving the remote end the impression that not all data was
transmitted in the last data set.
725-726
EOE
10026
15026
Protected
data set
Clear-to-send and echo-clamp delays of less
than 200 ms and 130 ms, respectively, might
cause echo problems.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9115/74
8/1/75
PN 1618977
3741 ML
726
727-1
727
Facilities
728
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
811115
Feature Mix
The 3741 is designed to operate satisfactorily
at 600, 1200, 2000, or 2400 bps.
The synchronous clock must not be installed in
the 3741 if attached to System/3 LCA.
Modems being used must be end-to-end compatible, running at the same speed with the
correct options. The modem options generally required are:
The synchronous clock must not be installed
when using 2000 or 2400 bps modems.
EIA voltage interface.
Half duplex.
Carrier controlled by request to send.
- Without new sync.
- Internal clocking {on the modem} must be
specified if sync clock is not used in the
3741.
The IBM 3872 and the IBM 1200 bps Line
Adapter features are not end-to-end compatible.
When the CBS Data Access Arrangement (DAA)
using the 1001 A coupler or equivalent is used
with the switched 1200 bps line adapter feature,
it must be ordered:
- With series 5 or later connected to Type II
local loop.
- With DAA controlling the line (you must raise
the exclusion key to hear the dial tone).
- With ringer connected on the line side of
the exclusion key.
- With DAA supplying its own power so that
the hook switch transfers when receiver is
lifted from, or set on, the cradle.
- With a handset type 502A, or equivalent.
For more information see Service Aids-3741
with 1200 bps Line Adapter/CBS Coupler
(page 8-1).
The synchronous clock must be installed if 1200
bps line adapter is installed.
PN 1618978
729
System/3 LeA
Pin plugging on the System/3 LCA to the 3741
or 3747:
5410 gate B, card W5A4 jumpers:
New sync .
Rate select.
DTR.
SCTE
B
.
. C
D
B
The above data is from page HE660 in the
System/3 MAPs.
Page A6009 lists 5410 BSCA tie-downs. 'Last
board on channel' or 'not last board on channel'
must be tied down. Other tie-downs listed must
not be tied down for LCA.
The 3741 MLM specifies a CPU with RFT capability. The System/3 with diagnostic aOA provides this capability.
The synchronous clock should not be installed
in a 3741 to be used with System/3 LCA.
This page is intentionally left blank.
1EC 8231461
727-729
Dat. 9/15/74
PN 1618979
3741 ML
727-2
730-1
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
730Common Communications Error
Codes and Causes
See Symptom Index for error codes not covered
here.
Error
Code
Description
Cause
C
Line Check
No activity on communication line (the 3741 has
not decoded character
sync) for 20 seconds. On
initial linkup, it can occur:
Description
Cause
Error
Code
D
Disk Full
In receive mode:
Description
Cause
R
Remote
Abort
The remote device has
terminated communications prematurely by
sending an EOT or disconnect (DLE EOT) prior
to sending ETX (end of
text). Call remote end
to determine what error
caused it to terminate
communications.
T
Transparency
Error
Hex data was detected in
the record to be transmitted in T, B, J, or K
mode. The characters
SOH ('01'), STX ('02'),
NAK ('3D'), ETB ('26'),
ETX ('03'), SYN ('32'),
IUS ('1 F'), DLE ('10'),
ENO ('2D'), IRS ('1 E'),
IFS ('1C'), or EOT ('37')
cannot be sent in T, B, J,
or K mode. They could
be sent in P or D mode.
Often a transparency
check occurs when data
set extents overlap or a
data set is transmitted
which is not intended to
be transmitted.
U
Received
Data
Block
The 3741 received a data
block starting with SOH
or STX when in transmit
mode. This error can
occur if the receiving
station has an error before transmission begins
and attempts to send
status to the transmit~
ting station, or both
stations are in transmit
mode.
1. Not enough physical
space to write all
records remote end
is attempting to send.
2. There are not enough
valid labels to receive
all the data sets the
remote end is attempting to send.
In transmit or transmit/
receive mode:
1. Continued data set was
indicated on disk 1 but
disk 2 was not available
or there were no valid
labels on disk 2.
2. If terminal ID and remote ID compare functions are being used
and the IDs do not
compare.
2. Continued data set was
indicated on disk 2.
3. If there is a modem or
communication line
problem that prevents
end-to-end
communication.
Data Set
Ready Has
Dropped
Line checks occurring during data transfer can be
caused by:
The 'data set ready' interface line (from the modem)
has dropped unexpectedly
(while 'data terminal ready'
was still on). This can be
caused by:
1. The remote end dropping the connection on
a switched line unexpectedly.
1. Modem or communication line problems.
Note: Error recovery
problems on early 3741
base BSCA machines
caused an abnormal
number of calls to end in
a line check error. This
problem was corrected
with ECA 14 and/or
ECA22.
PN 1618980
8/1/75
Error
Code
1. If both ends are bidding
(sending ENO) or waiting for a line bid caused
by improper use of the
M key. (See 731).
2. Remote end programming or malfunction
that prevents a normal
termination (EOT or
Disconnect, DLE EOT).
826065
2. Modem powering off or
malfunction.
0
Message
Aborted
The transmitting 3741 has
received four consecutive
negative acknowledgements
(NAKs) to the same record.
The receiving station has
experienced CRC checks
due to line or modem
problems or receive malfunction in calculati'ng
CRCs.
730
7313741 -
(Continued) ,
732 Service Aids for Modem and Line
Use of the M Key
Problems
Error
Code
W
Description
Cause
Wrong
Length
In receive mode:
1. Two consecutive records
of different length were
received.
2. First record received
was a different length
than record length of
data set (if receive began in update mode).
-In EBSCA:
1. Length of fi rst received
record is not equal to
the number of greater
than signs (» in the
receive data and insert
constants program.
2. In transmit mode the
continuation of a data
set on disk 2 has a
different record length
than the data set on
disk 1.
V
X
Received
Line Bid
Negative
Bid
Response
The remote end sent a
line bid (ENO) after the
3741 has posted complete or incomplete
status.
When the 3741 is set up to operate on switched
lines, the M key determines whether or not the
3741 will send the initial line bid (ENO). The
M key has no function on the non-switched line.
Line Bids (Sending and Receiving ENOs)
Proper use of the M key can be verified by:
According to convention, the station placing
the call (calling station) should bid the line (ENO).
If the 3741 is the station placing the call, the
operator setup should be:
1.
Calling the bidding station from a convenient
telephone. After the answertone, you should
hear the line bids (on a one- or three-second
interval).
Press FUNC SEL upper
COMM
M
T, P, B, 0 or R
2.
Calling the station that is to receive the
line bid. After the answertone, there
should be a 20-second period of silence
on the line. (After 20 seconds, the station
may bid the line to send a status message.)
3.
If the station that receives the line bid
turns on request to send (within the 20
seconds), it indicates that it has received
the line bid and has responded.
The M key tells the 3741 to bid the line (ENO),
independent of the mode selected or the
following key strikes. If a CPU is the remote
end receiving the call, it should be programmed
to look for a line bid (receive ENO).
Also, according to convention, the station receiving the call (called station) should wait
for a line bid (receive ENO). If the 3741 is
the station receiving the call, the operator setup
should be:
Press FUNC SEL upper
COMM
T, P, B, 0 or R
The absence of the M key indicates to the 3741
that it should wait for a line bid for 20 seconds.
If the CPU is the remote station placing the
call, it should be programmed to send the initial
line bid (ENO).
The remote end responded NAK or disconnect (OLE EOT) to a
line bid. This can
occur if the 3741 has a
disk error, attempts to
send a bid for status,
and receives a NAK
from the remote device.
The disk error is the significant error in this
case.
Use the following to diagnose modem and communication line problems:
1.
CBS coupler service aids (page 8-38).
2.
1200 bps line adapter transmit level and
receive level check (page 8-36.5).
3.
. TDAT is modem eliminator (TOAT test
procedures 8-26.10).
4.
Expanded communications feature diagnostic aids (8-33).
5.
Probe transmit data and receive data interface lines to verify that data is being transmitted and received (764).
6.
Attempt to communicate with another
system with each device to prove the
communication capability of each.
7.
When attempting to diagnose linkup
problems on switched lines, changing
jumper 6 to non-switched will eliminate
the 20-second time-out and disconnect
. (for diagnosis only). See page 16-4 for
information on jumper 6.
733-739 not used
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
730-739
826065
8/1/75
PN 1618981
3741 ML
730-2
740
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
PN 1618982
8/1/75
740Communication Throughput Rates for the 3741 Modef2 with the Expanded Communications Features
Per Record Per Block
24
12
8
6
5
4
3
Switched**
Non-switched*
Transmit
20
40
60
80
100
120
128
Records Per Minute
2000 bps
2400 bps
Characters Records
Rece~ve
310
310
264
199
160
133
123
Transmit
160
160
163
160
160
133
123
Switched
Receive Transmit
299
310
224
169
137
113
100
151
154
163
160
137
113
100
1200 bps
321
287
192
145
117
97
87
Non-switched *
Receive Transmit
157
166
163
145
117
97
87
321
200
134
101
81
67
62
163
166
134
101
81
67
62
* Full duplex facility or four-wire switched network
* * Non-switched half-duplex facility or two-wire switched
741 Throughput Considerations
720 and 740 show typical throughput rates for
the 3741 Model 2 with and without the expanded communications feature or with the expanded
communications/multipoint feature, respectively.
The figures show throughput rates in terms of
the number of records per minute processed as a
function of record size, line facility, and modem
speed. The rates listed are for information only.
•
Propagation delay and CPU delay are
negligible.
• Speed of remote device is equal to or faster
than the 3741.
•
For two-wire lines, the 1200,2000 and 2400
bps modems have 200, 175, and 180 millisecond clear-to-send delays, respectively.
•
For four-wire lines, the 12~Oand 2400 bps
modems have 25- and 85- millisecond clearto-senp delays, respectively.
e Setup and line initialization sequences are not
included in determining the throughput rates.
•
For 720 a transmit selected records program
was not used.
•
Non-transparent data is transmitted or
received.
•
•
Disk sequence is 01.
No retransmissions. (Modem and line problems can cause a large number of retransmissions as indicated by a large number of
th ree-second ti me-outs.)
•
No deleted records or disk errors are encountered. (Excessive number of retries on
disk operations, as indicated by a large number of two-second time-outs, can degrade
throughput.)
The assumptions made in determining the
throughput rates are:
Switched**
Receive Transmit
321
182
122
92
74
61
56
Receive
157
166
122
92
74
61
56
750 Voltage Checkout Procedures
Measures the following dc voltages, at the indicated MPU planar pins, with reference to frame
ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
-5.0
F-009
F-B07
B-B07
F-B08
F-B06
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
4.6 to 5.4
Hinge end - - -
_ Measure the following dc voltages, at indicated
BSCA board pins, with references to frame
ground:
002
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
1-N-002
1-N-004
1-N-B07
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
If all voltages are present and within limits,
voltage check is OK.
- Return to MAP.
B13
Hinge end
/
J
K
Feature
Cables
L
M
1-N
1-P
N
BSCA
Printer
1-Q
1-R
P
Printer
Q
---
--
0
2
...
\
\ \
0
\ \ B
,,
...
\ 2\
13
\
\
\
\
\
13 \
742-749 not used
740-750
EC 823146
826065
9115/74
8/1/75
PN 1618983
3741 ML
750
lEe
755
823146
PN 1618992
755 Expanded Communications Modes
BSCA Mode
Communications
Transmit
Transmit-transparent
Receive
Transmit-receive
Transmit-transparent/receive
Transmit buffered
Transmit buffered/receive
Inquiry
Request for test (RFT)
E test mode
Col 37
Col 38
C
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
t
Print unattended -.--J
Status Indicators
Col 39
..-....
",.,-
B
B
T
R
T
K
T
T
%
T
t
Mode--------------------------~
-......
T
B
0
J
w
Col 39*
T
C
C
C
J
J
J
C
C
C
J
J
J
T
I
I
II
B
B
B
B
B
C
Transmission complete -------------------------'
Transmission incomplete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -......
Reception complete ------------------------------------'
Reception incomplete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
*Read ID-------------------------------------~
*Read 10 card when column 39 contains B
757 Expanded Communications Modes, Hexadecimal
8
4
When hex data is keyed or displayed, not all
of the data represents display characters such as
an ABC ... or 0 1 2 3 ... When the hex data
keyed is not a displayable character, a hexadecimal display is provided that represents the
8-bit code for the data. The basic display (no
bits on) looks like this: .
H
The first hex digit is 8+4+1 = D and the second
hex digit is 8+4+2 = E. The hexadecimal value
is hex DE.
Other lines are added to the display for each
bit that is on in the EBCDIC code.
Bit Position
8
4
2
Example: Assume the display looks like this:
Hex Value of
Bit Position
2
0- - - - -8
1- - - - -4
2- ----2
3- - - - -1
Add these values together
to get the first hex digit.
Only add those values
together for the lines
displayed.
4567-
Add these values together
to get the second hex digit.
Only add those values together for the lines displayed.
- - - -8
----4
----2
----1
2
The first hex digit is 2+1 = 3 and the second
hex digit is a 2. The hexadecimal value is hex
32 (SYN). Assume another display looks like
this:
Example: Assume the display looks like this:
2
8
4
8
4
The first hex digit is 2. And the second hex
digit is 8+4+1 = D. The hexadecimal value is
hex 2D (ENQ).
The first hex digit is 8+4+1 = D and the second
hex digit is a O. The hexadecimal value is hex
DO. Assume another display looks like this:
751
752
753
754
756
not
not
not
not
not
used
used
used
used
used
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
751-757
826065
8/1/75
PN
1618993
3741 ML
757
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
-
758
826065
PN 1618994
8/1/75
758TerminaiiD and Feature Half Planar
Sockets Y and Z
Display (Refer to 757 to decode the hex characters.)
10 Character Jumper Placement
o
001
w
A 00008
A
0 1 2
3 4 5
• Q
Q
• •0
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
Q
• 0••"
6 7
o•
• 0
• 0
o 0 : ~ ~ ~ Q=
o• 0• 0 o• 0• 0• ~ ~
o• 0••0 o
· 0, ::• o• e•
"
0
84
e
85
f
86
9
87
88
o ::
~
cOO
Q , •
o• 0•
d
, 0
tl •
:
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
a
Byte .~ a a
1 )0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
a
o
o -m:c::Jo
0
0
0
0
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
fa
2 ,0
-iIII::fa
Byte
Byte
)0
3 ,0
to
0
0
0
0
DD
c:::J
~
}~
5
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
7
a
a
a
0
0
0
~~
a
a
a
a
0
0
0
0
a
a
0
Each Bit Position
c:::J
J
c
• 0
:l •
:J
3 4 5
6 7
o• ::••Q o• Q• c•
Q •
Q tl
e' ~
p
97
q
98
• Q 0
CI
o• Q 0• o 0
o• 0• 0, ii o 0• o 0
0
o
0
Q •
..
99
::• 0 0
s
A2
:: • 0
t
A3
• 0
o
u
A4
• 0 •
o• 0• e, ::• 0.
0 ~ ~ o
• 0,
~ ~ ~ o0
o , :: o• 0.,0• ~ ~
•
':l " o 0 • o
Q• 0
0 , 0
0
<
0
• tl·
o • , o• 0••" o '
o, 0 0• o 0
o• 0, " e 0
x
A7
y
A8
o' 0• Q•
l
A9
:l • 0
• (l
0
o
r
(l
tl
tl •
o
Q
•
A5
C; ~
• 0
, 0
• ::••Q
Q
A6
',0
Q•
96
0
v
• QQ
'0
<
0
0 1 2
95
w
o· ::• 0
Bit--... 0
o e 0 o 0•
o0
• • 0 o0
o•
He<
0
o
d
n
•
0
o• tl• :: o 0 :J o 0•
~ Q
o' 0• Q o Q
o
0
•
' 0 •
0
0
Q • Q
c
Q •
~ ~
o• 0• 0• :: .
• 0
759 Multipoint' Address and Feature Half
Multipoint Addressing
Planar Sockets Y and Z
For a given polling character, the corresponding
select character is defined.
O'ISP Iay (R ef er t 0 757 t o deeod e th e hex eharaet ers.
001
A
0
W
A 00008
AS
/"
-
Poll
Char
---~
-
-....", """-
-
flJB
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Each Bit Position
0"'1'--"0"
~
0$1+-"1"
o ... J
J
K
L
Bit-. 0
1
2
3
'0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Byte
,~O
0
1
)0
0
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M
N
0
P
Q
R
Poll
Hex
Sel
Hex
CO
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DO
D1
02
03
D4
05
06
07
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DO
DE
DF
80
1
!
~
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
Poll
Char
Binary
1100 0000
1100 0001
11000010
1100 0011
1100 0100
1100 0101
1100 0110
1100 0111
1100 1000
1100 1001
1100 1010
11001011
1100 1100
1100 1101
1100 1110
1100 1111
1101 0000
1101 0001
1101 0010
1101 0011
1101 0100
1101 0101
11010110
11010111
1101 1000
1101 1001
1101 1010
11011011
1101 1100
11011101
11011110
11011111
Poll
Hex
Sel
Hex
Binary
EO
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
AO
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BO
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
1110 0000
1110 0001
1110 0010
1110 0011
1110 0100
11100101
11100110
11100111
1110 1000
1110 1001
11101010
11101011
1110 1100
11101101
11101110
11101111
1111 0000
1111 0001
1111 0010
1111 0011
11110100
1111 0101
1111 0110
11110111
1111 1000
1111 1001
1111 1010
11111011
1111 1100
11111101
1111 1110
11111111
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
t. ~
Select character in HEX
~
jumpered on card
Poll character in HEX
Poll character
1EC 8231461
758-759
PN 1618995
3741 ML
759-1
r
c
823146
Date 9/15n4
I
This page intentionally left blank.
759-2
PN 1618996
760 Feature Half Planar Socket and Card
ID Reader Cable P o s i t i o n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
Keylock Cable Position--------------,
Locations
Multipoint Audible Alarm Cable Position-----.
Socket
1-N
1-P
1-0
1-R
1-E
1-F
1-G
1-H
1-S
1-T
1-U
-
Jumper F i e l d - - - - - - - - - - Modem cable
Primer signal cable (from printer)
Cross connector to MPU planar
Printer signal cable (to printer)
Cross connector to MPU planar
Cross connector to MPU planar
Cross connector to MPU planar (memory)
Cross connector to MPU planar (memory)
Card socket - memory card
Card socket - memory card
Test socket
00 000
N
000 00
E
p
F
Q
G
R
H
EBSCA Feature Cards
1-V
1-W
1-X
l-Y
1-Z
-
Card socket Card socket Card socket Card socket card
- Card socket card
sync clock card
I D reader card
ID reader card
terminal ID or multipoint
Feature Half Planar Socket Location
terminallD or multipoint
J
K
L
M
EBSCA Feature Cards
N
Sync clock
ID reader
Terminal ID or
Multipoint
Note: Terminal ID and multipoint are mutually
P exclusive features.
Q
.. -.... - ....
D
,R
", " ,
D
2
" ",
13
13
EC
Date
760
823146
9/15174
826065
8/1175
PN 1618997
3741 ML
760
762
826065
EC 823146
8/1/75
9/15/74
762 EBSCA Error Logout
When in R, T, P, B, 0, J, K, %, or I mode after
pressing FUNCT SEL upper and S or when in
W mode in tests 1,2,3, or 4, the bottom line
on the display shows the following:
Error Code Position
Mode depends on operation "\
\
Position
**14
**19
**24
**29
*
* 4
* 7
* 10
- 16
- 21
- 26
- 31
001 \
a
1
a a
A
A
001
004
01001 \
Meaning
Data termina I ready.
Data set ready
Request to se nd.
***Clear to send.
CRe checks in receive.
NAKs receive d in transmit.
Two-second t ime-outs.
Three-second time-outs.
1
*Note: 1 indicates on; 0 indicates off.
**Note: Three position decimal counts.
***Note: When short records are transmitted in blocked
(J or K) mode, 'clear to send' may not be logged on or may
be on only a short time. This is because the controller is
busy reading and buffering records. The actual operation
of 'clear to send' can be checked at the modem cable interface (1-N-B1 0).
I
J
000
001
PN 1619001
764
III
Cable
Connectors
Modem Cable/BSCA Cable
Socket
1-N
Line Name
Request to Send
Transm it Data
Receive Data
Clear to Send
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Receive
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Ring Indicator
Carrier Detect
Rate selector
Data Terminal Ready
SCTE
Frame Ground
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
Test Mode
Test Clock
813
812
811
810
809
808
807
012
011
010
008
007
006
002
004
013
009
Modem Cable
Half Planar
Modem
End
End
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
803
804
805
807
808
809
Frame
B13
B 11
B02
B06
BSCA Cable
Half Planar
End
1200 bps Line
Adapter End
4
2
3
5
15
17
7
6
22
8
23
20
24
1
002
003
004
005
002
003
004
005
-
-
008
803
804
008
803
804
-
-
808
808
18
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
B13
B 11
B13
B11
-
-
-
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
3741 Model 2
Modem Cable
Modem
~
~
Feature
Half Planar
1200 ops
Line Adapter
BSCA Cable
Line Coupler
Line Coupler
'" i '
Cable
Lines
Switched
I
-
-
3741 Model 2
I
Feature
Half Planar
i---I
r-'
3741 Model 2
Modem Cable
.-
I
System/3
LCA
Feature
Half Planar
I
BSCA Cable
IL
f--'
~
~
1200 bps
Line Adapter
L-
Communication Line Cable
h
I-'
"""
Non-switched Lines
""-
Non-switched
763 not used
EC 823146
9/15/74
762-764
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619004
3741 ML
764
765
EC 823146
9/15/74
826065
PN 1619005
8/1/75
765 EBSCA ROS Card Location
---- --mJ
-
....... .. ...
.
766
Wrap Adapter
8SCA Cable
(1200 bps Line Adapter End)
External Modem Cable
(Modem End)
\
\.
\.
\.
\.
\.
\.
\
Modem Cable
Wrap Adapter (PN 2456702)
8SCA Cable
Wrap Adapter (PN 7365241)
Modem Cable Wrap Adapter (External Modem)
From
Pin
To
Pin
Transmit data
Request to send
Data terminal ready
Test clock
Test clock
2
4
20
25
25
Received data
Clear to send
Data set ready
Serial clock transmit
Serial clock receive
3
5
6
15
17
BSCA Cable Wrap Adapter (1200 bps Line Adapter)
From
Pin
To
Pin
Transmit data
Request to send
Data terminal ready
D03
D02
808
Receive data
Clear to send
Data set ready
D04
D05
803
Feature Half Planar Wrap Adapter
From
Pin
To
Pin
Transmit data
Request to send
Data terminal ready
Test clock
Test clock
D03
D02
808
806
806
Receive data
Clear to send
Data set ready
Serial clock transmit
Serial clock receive
D04
D05
803
D06
D07
Feature Half Planar
Wrap Adapter
(PN 1620152)
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
765-766
825958
826065
3/21n5
8/1n5
PN 1619007
3741 ML
766·1,
766-2
EC 825853
Date 11/15/74
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 16,19008
DIAGNOSTIC AI DS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CE Display Mode
Diagnostic Programs
Display Disk Speed
Display Disk Track IDs.
Display Registers. . .
Read/Write Storage Test for
Models 1 and 2
CE Pins for Raster Display
CE Head-Adjusting Tool
CE Voltmeter Accuracy Check .
CE General Logic Probe
CE Diskettes . . . . .
Handling Precautions
CE Diagnostics Diskette
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Diskette
Models 3 and 4 Diagnostics
Diskette
. . . . .
Alignment Check Diagnostic
.. . . .
Diskette
Head Alignment Service Check
Tracks . . . . . . .
Display Data Head Alignment
Service Check. . . .
3713 Printer Test Programs*. .
3715 Printer Diagnostic Programs* .
3715 Printer Test Programs*. . .
3715 Printer Line Control Exerciser
Program
. . . . .
RFT Procedures and TDAT
(BSCA/EBSCA) . . .
Start of R FT and TDAT
Procedures. . . .
RFT (Request for Test)
Procedure 1
R FT (Request for Test)
Procedure 2
R FT (Request for Test)
Procedure 3
R FT ( Request for Test)
Procedure 4
Diagnostic Aids, Expanded Communications (EBSCA) Test
Procedu res. . . . . . .
Online 1200 bps Line Adapter Cable
Test . ... . . . . . . .
1200 bps Line Adapter/TDAT
Test Procedure . . . .
1200 bps Line Adapter Receive
Level Check Procedures
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-9
8-10.2
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-26
8-26.2
8-26.9
8-26.10
8-26.10
8-26.12
8-26.14
8·26.16
8-28
8-33
Service Aids - 3741 with 1200
bps Line Adapter/CBS
Coupler. . . . . . .
CE Tools . . . . . . . .
Data Recorder Diagnostic Diskette
Programs . . . . . . .
Data Recorder Attachment Test
Program
. . . . . . .
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Diskette
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Wrap
Error Code Chart. .
I/O Adapter Cable Wrap
Diagram
. . . .
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Wrap
Program Flowchart . . .
FUNCT SEL lower
NUM SHI FT (or ALPHA SHI FT) and the C
key.
8-36.12
8-39
The characters CER, indicating CE display mode
ready will appear at the right end of the status
line. (The status line is the first line of the display.) The remainder of the display will not
change.
8-40
8-43
8-45
8-47
The diagnostic program desired can now be
selected.
8·48
Terminating CE Display Mode
8-50
Pressing RESET terminates CE display mode. The
machine automatically causes a seek to the index
track (track 00) of the disk; and mode/status will
go to X R, or X N if the diskette has been removed.
* See 3717 MLM for 3717 CE diagnostic and
test programs.
CE DISPLAY MODE
Selecting a Diagnostic Program
The diagnostic programs for CE display mode use
a special section of ROS that can be used independently of the machine functional ROS. These
diagnostic programs can be used separately to
cause the display of:
Disk speed
Disk track IDs
Display registers contents
Note: When selecting a diagnostic program for
disk 2, the NUM SH I FT must be pressed with
the proper program select key.
Selecting the CE display mode cancels the previous
operator mode and all data in memory, such as
stored programs, production statistics, field totals,
and duplication data. CE display mode can be
selected from the following machine modes:
Read index
Update
Enter
Search
Verify and field correct
Diagnostic Program
Program Select Key
Display disk speed
Display disk track IDs
Display registers
0
J
U
Terminating a Diagnostic Program
To terminate a diagnostic program, press
RESET
A diskette must be installed in the disk drive to
be selected for CE display mode. If disk drive
2 is the drive selected, then a diskette must also
be installed in disk drive 1, but the opposite is
not necessary.
Note: RESET may have to be pressed more than
once to terminate the display registers diagnostic,
because the reset key code can be accepted in the
KBDATA register only at times other than when
that register is being periodically set to zero.
8-36.2
8-36.3
Selecting CE Display Mode
8-36.5
To select CE display mode, use the following
keying sequence:
EC
Select CE display mode (CER is displayed on the
status line); then press one of the keys shown in
the table below to select the desired diagnostic
program. CER mode and status changes to CEW,
and the results of the diagnostic are displayed.
825853
Date 11/15/74
Termination of a diagnostic program is indicated
by a mode/status change from CEW to CE R.
Now another diagnostic can be selected or CE
display mode can be terminated.
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1619009
3741 ML
8·1
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS
Display Disk Speed
The display disk speed diagnostic can be used to:
-
Locate a failing machine.
Determine causes of changing or out-of-tolerance disk speed.
Verify display-to-cursor operation.
Adjust actuator bail.
Cause a repeated read.
This diagnostic causes a line of digits to be displayed which can be used to calculate disk speed
in terms of milliseconds per revolution. The diagnostic can be selected while at any track on the
disk as long as the first record of that track is
good (it can be a deleted record).
The display to cursor operation of the display
attachment is used, which means that no digits
are displayed at or beyond the cursor position.
The cursor moves as the disk speed varies. It
is normal that other data may appear lightly, at
short intervals, on the display.
To use the display disk speed diagnostic, select
CE display mode, and press the letter a key.
(For disk drive 2, hold down NUM SH I FT and
press the letter 0 key.) The display will look
similar to this:
EC .823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15/74
11/15/74
811/75
To terminate the display disk speed diagnostic,
press RESET once to return to CER mode.
Another diagnostic can now be selected, or an
exit from CE display mode can be made by
pressing RESET a second time.
PN 1619010
A missing or unstable record one I D results in a
blank or unstable disk speed display. In this case,
press the space bar (or any key except RESET,
SHIFT, or REP) to advance to the next
track up on the disk and observe the IDs. If
record one I D looks OK, use this track to display
disk speed by pressing RESET to get to CER
mode, then press the O' ke'y. If record one does
not look good on this track, either try a different
diskette or, if there is a problem with all diskettes, go to disk diagnostic MAPs.
Note: This diagnostic depends on the disk drive
being able to read the first record of any track on
a disk. A write check to record one command is
sent repeatedly. Write check causes the record
to be read each revolution. Rotational disk
speed computation is based on the frequency
at which record one is read.
If, after selection of this mode, disk speed is
not displayed, or disk speed displayed is unstable,
try the following:
Press RESET to terminate disk speed diagnostic.
Press J key to select display disk track IDs
diagnostic.
Look at the first three sets of four double
binary characters to determine if record one
10 (identifier) is present and stable. (The
first set of four double binary characters
should be the record one I D. Its characters may
have to be compared to the next two IDs in
order to identify it as record one.) The first
three I Ds should look like this:
1st 10
2nd 10
3rd 10
~,
CEW
Status Line
t4HHH~H8H~H8H
o
012345678901234567_
1 ............ 0
~
Always Zero
Speed_._......I_. Limits-t--Speed
Too
Too
Fast
Normal
Slow
0
2 ........ 0
~
Always Zero
I
The first digit (O) displayed on the data line represents 150 milliseconds. Each digit in order to
the right represents an increase of one millisecond.
To. calculate disk rotational speed, cOl;lnt the digits
to the right of the first 0, up to the cursor, and
add 150. The example display shows 17 digits to
the right of the firstO (1 through 0 = 10, 1 through
7 = 7). 150 + 17 =' 167 milliseconds. This represents normal disk speed, which should be 167 ± 4
milliseconds.
Track Number
The track number is the first double binary
character of each group of four. There should be
26 alike for each track. (See the description of
Display Disk Track IDs for explanation of how to
decode the double binary characters.)
8-2
o
3
7
~
0
Always zero
Record number
Service Applications
Display Disk Track IDs
Locate Failing Machine
This diagnostic causes the track and record IDs
(identifiers) to be displayed for the track in use
at the time the diagnostic is selected. The diagnostic can be selected while at any track on the
disk and does not depend on any of the IDs
either being present or good. This 'diagnostic can
also be used to cause the disk drive to seek up
or down one track at a time to cause display of
the lOs of any track on the disk.
This could be a machine which has a disk drive
running at a disk speed either higher or lower
than the normal limits. Disks written on or initialized by the out-of-spec machine will work well
in that machine, and may work OK in some machines of the group. But, the out-of-spec disk may
not work well in other machines of the group
that are running in-spec at a speed (high or low)
opposite the out-of-spec machine.
Disk Speed
Too high
- Ac power out of specification.
- Wrong drive motor pUlley.
Display to Cursor Operation
Digits should be displayed only up to the cursor
position. A fault in the display-to-cursor operation would allow all 40 digits to appear on the
first data line with the cursor under one of the
digits.
Repetitious Read
Repeated reading record one of a particular track
allows the CE to look at the read amplifier or the
file data line with an oscilloscope.
The head load magnet stays energized for continuous read mode while the display IDs diagnostic is operating.
To use the display track IDs diagnostic, install
an initialized diskette, select CE display mode, and
press the J key. The display will look similar
to this:
Record One
ID
a
001
Too Low
- Ac power out of specification.
Wrong drive motor pulley.
Drive motor bearings binding.
Oisk drive hub shaft bearings binding.
Disk drive belt slipping.
Oisk drive belt idler pulley binding or sticking.
Collet not clamping disk to drive hu b tightly
enough.
. - Pad on the bail of the head load actuator
assembly puts too much pressure on the
diskette.
Pressure pad arm loads disk to head too tightly.
Disk sticks in diskette.
The total display length increases if more lOs
are read during a disk revolution than were read
on any previous revolution, but the length does
not decrease due to a lesser number of IDs read
on a subsequent revolution. Individual double
binary characters will look unstable if all track
IDs do not read correctly for each revolution of
the disk due to an ID shift to the left to replace
missing lOs. The total display will not shorten.
A
A
00008
CEW
1st 10 IDs -----+2nd1010s------+-
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Last 6 IDs----I-
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
26 IDs
The cursor will show on the display in position
three. Its position is determined by the contents
of the sense register. (See page 8-5, Sense/Command Register Operation.)
Each record I D displayed contains tour double
binary characters. Each track has 26 record locations, thus 104 (26 X 4) of the double binary
characters should be displayed. If an I D is
missing in a track, or cannot be read, the next
ID read will be displayed in its place, followed
by the rest of the IDs read. The result will be
a shortened total display length. For example,
if six I Ds are missing in a track, only two lines
of double binary characters are displayed. To
determine the order in which the IDs were
placed on the track during disk initialization
one can decode the individual record lOs. Since
all tracks on a particular disk will have their
IDs in the same order, it is possible to compare
a good track (one that displays all 26 IDs) to
the faulty track as a means of determining which
IDs are missing on the faulty track.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
The display can be blanked and refreshed by
pressing the RESET key followed by the J key.
A new display length will be shown for the disk
revolution following the J key.
Disk I Ds may be displayed track by track while
this CE diagnostic mode is in control. To advance
up, away from the index track, press the space
bar (or any other key except RESET, SHI FT, or
REP). To step down one track, press
ALPHA SH I FT and the space bar (or any other
key except RESET or REP). The display
is blanked and refreshed each time a new track
is selected.
Note: When using disk drive 2, NUM SH IFT must
be used with the keys specified above to step up
or down.
PN 1619011
3741 ML
8-3
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1/75
EC
The Q. character should occupy one half of the char-
One 10 is represented by four double binary
characters in a row. The basic frame of each
double binary character looks something like
an H with the crossbar extended. It alone
represents a double binary character of zero
over zero. O.
o
acter positions (all even numbered positions) in
the 10 display. Its presence in the display lines
help to locate the cross bar for decoding multiple line characters like the ~ example above.
11
o
One 10
HHHH
L
I
Always Zero
(~)
Record Number (T)toCo)
Track Number
~~~o t~2) *
* (142) is displayed as «
EXAMPLES:
l
8
4
2
t
)
).
The rest of Table 2 (page 8-8) shows the other
record sequences that can occur in a track depending on the digits written in positions 77 and
78 of record 07 of track 00 during initialization
of a disk. All tracks on any particular disk will
have the same record sequence.
1
{
Lower binary
decimal value
line locations
} 0
.(period),
(.
For track numbers, this
decimal value can be 0,
1, 2, 3, or 4. For record
number, this decimal value
will be either 0 or 1 .
Upper binary
decimal value
line locations
})~
t,
T
Each character has a binary decimal value above
the cross bar and a binary decimal value below
the cross bar, therefore, the name double binary
character. Each binary decimal value can be determined by observing the location of lines parallel
to the cross bar as shown here:
8
4
2
note that the 10 for track 64
The top line of Table 2 shows the double decimal
10 notation for the 26 records in a track, arranged
serially 1 through 26. The notation goes from 0
for record 01 through 1..for record 26.
10
~~)
Always Zero
For track or record number,
this decimal value can be
any number 0 through 15.
~>3
~
Double
Decimal
11 Notation
To terminate the display disk track IDs, press
RESET once to return to CER mode. Another
diagnostic can now be selected, or' an exit from
CE display mode can be made by prTssing RESET
a second time.
the machine to seek to track 00 of disk 1. If disk
2 has been selected and it is desired to return' to
track 00 of disk 2, first terminate CE displCilY mode
by pressing RESET, then press FUNCTSEL upper
and disk 2 RET TO INDEX.
9
for track 73, also
is a blank, 74 is a
75 is a
76 is a
8-4
Note: Terminating CE display mode will cause
Table 1 (page 8-7) shows the double decimal
notation for all 77 track numbers that will appear in IDs. Note that the double decimal 10
notation goes from 0 for track 00 through ~
=
l
PN 1619012
Service Applications (continued)
The display disk track I Ds diagnostic can be used
to:
Determine disk track record order.
Verify head location.
Determine missing IDs.
Qetermine or verify faulty tracks.
Check actuator bail.
Cause a continuous read.
Verify operation of sense register.
Discover intermittent problems in the disk
drive attachment.
Locate disk problems.
Check track accessing.
Record order on the disk will be transparent to
the operator of the machine: One of the 13 record
order sequences other than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., may
provide best disk access times for a specific job.
Head Location
This diagnostic verifies actual head location by
reading the track number found in the IDs
displayed after a track selection has been made
from the index track, or a search has been keyed.
Table 1 (page 8-7) shows track numbers. All track
numbers in a particular track must be identical.
Actuator Bail Adjustment
This diagnostic will keep the disk drive head load
actuator magnet energized while making an adjustment of the actuator bail. (Display disk
speed CE mode can also be used for the same
purpose.)
Continuous Read
A continuous read of a particular track on a disk
allows the CE to look at the read amplifier or the
'file data' line with an oscilloscope.
001
Missing IDs
o
AA
00008
CEW
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Disk Track Record Order
All tracks on anyone disk, including the index
track (track 00), should have their records arranged in the same order. The order is determined
at the time of disk initialization by control digits
that are keyed by the operator in positions 7
and 8 of track 00. If positions 7 and 8 of the record are left blank, or if 01 is entered in those
positions, all records in each track on that disk are
arranged in sequence 1, 2, 3, 4, through 26, as
shown by line 1 of Table 2 (page 8-8). If 02 is entered in positions 7 and 8, then all records in each
track on that disk are arranged, at time of initialization, in the sequence shown by line two of Table
2 (page 8-8); 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15,17,19,21,
23,2~~4,6,8, 10, 12,14, 16, 18,20,2~24,
26.
If the display of IDs shows a lesser number than
26 (as shown to the right), the missing IDs can
be due to:
During disk initialization, the machine writes
the sequence digits in positions 77 and 78 of
sector 07, track 00. Display of sector 07, track
00, will show the sequence digits in 77 and 78.
HHHHHHHH
22 IDs, 88 characters
Improper track 0 stop adjustment.
Accidental erasure.
Faulty track on the disk.
Un initialized disk.
Weak read amplifier (faulty FC card).
Faulty VFO card.
Misadjusted actuator bail (207).
Accidental erase and faulty tracks can be resolved
by reinitialization of the disk. If at the end of
initialization, the number of bad tracks identified exceeds two, the disk should be discarded.
An uninitialized disk would display no IDs, or
all tracks would contain 'FF' IDs. Initialize that
disk for use in the machine.
Note that:
All record sequences start with record 01.
There are 13 different sequences possible.
When the next number in a sequence will
exceed 26 if the sequence is allowed to continue naturally, the machine will choose the
next unused number after 1 for that record
number and then continue the sequence
naturally. Example, line 07 of Table 2 (page 8-8);
1, 8, 15, 22, 2, 9, 16, 23, 3, 10, etc.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Faulty Tracks
I Dsthat are present in the display of a faulty
track (fault has developed since last disk initialization), or IDs of an adjacent good track, can
be decoded for their track number double decimal value. The double decimal value can then
be found in Table 1 (page 8-7) with its corresponding track number. If the machine finds a faulty
track during disk initialization, it will identify that
track by writing 'bad-track' IDs 15 in all 10
15
positions that will accept the writing.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
Sense/Command Register Operation
The CE can verify the operation of the sense register part of the sense/command register by noting
the position of the cursor in the 10 display. During
the display IDs diagnostic, the binary value of sense
information stored in the sense register each disk
revolution controls the position of the cursor in the
display. For example, if the track is good (no 15
15
double decimal
10 characters on it) and all
IDs present are proper length and have correct
CRC (cyclic redundancy check) bytes, the cursor
will display steadily under the third character
position. This is the normal cursor position for
the display 10 diagnostic. If the track being read
has no IDs, the cursor will display under the first
position; or if a wrong CRC byte is present in the
track for any 10, the cursor will display under the
seventh position.
Ii
An intermittent condition of reading no IDs or a
wrong CRC would cause the cursor to shift from
the third position in the display to the first or
seventh position intermittently.
PN 1619013
3741 ML
8-5
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619014
The position of the cursor is determi~ed by the
sum of the binary values of the sense bits set in
the sense register each disk revolution, according
to the table.
Disk Dri,!-e Attachment Troubleshooting
Intermittent Problems
The disk drive attachment control electronics
are exercised continuously during display disk
track I Ds diagnostic mode. A read I D command has
to be issued every 6.41 milliseconds to read each
of the 26 IDs on the track every revolution of the
disk. Intermittently missing read ID commands
would cause some of the displayed double binary
characters to look unstable in the same manner as
described for missing I Ds, page 8·5.
The possible cursor positions are as follows:
Display
Position
Binary Value
Sum Location
1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2
The illustration shows the normal cursor position for '1 D matched sense bit' and no errors;
binary value 2, display position 3. It is normal
for the cursor to flash faintly once each disk revolution in the binary value sum location 66.
16
14
10
8
6
-
97
,etc.
through
H t-t H -H H H H H H H H H H tiHHHHHHtt
0
18
H
96
A 'special address mark sense bit' (binary
value 16) is set if such mark is read. The
special address mark is used to indicate a
deleted record.
If I Ds are still read intermittently after performing
the following measurements, adjustments, and
replacements, then the attachment circuitry on
the MPU planar board is at fault and the MPU
planar board must be replaced.
A 'bad track sense bit' (binary value 32)
is set if one or more I D double binary characters are read which have a double decimal
ID notation of.!§: During disk initialization,
15
if the machine finds a track that produces unacceptable output of read back (write check or
read check error) it tries to write all 26 IDs
with the bad track double binary character.
The sense bits on in relation to cursor position
are shown in the following table:
Sense Bit Definitions
An '1 D matched sense bit' (binary value 2)
is set each disk revolution that one or more
double binary I D characters is read from a
track. The I D character may be any double
deci mal value notation from Q.through 15.
o
15
- Try more than one diskette in this machine;
diskettes that read I Ds OK in another machine.
Reinitialize one of the disks in another machine
and try it again in this machine.
Check voltages at the MPU and at the disk
drive FC card.
-
An 'index sense bit' (binary value 64) is set
if the index pulse does not follow before the
first I D is read on any revolution.
- Try a different VFO card.
Check read/write head adjustment.
A 'length error sense bit' (binary val~e 8)
is set if the number of double binary characters in an I D exceeds 4.
Binary Value (read down)
Make sure the disk drive signal cable is well
seated in its socket at both ends.
- Try a different FC card.
A 'CRC error sense bit' (binary value 4) is
set if the CRC read in an I D field does not
match the CRC computed for that I D field.
Cursor Position(read down)
8-6
Replace head and carriage assembly.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 333 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 667 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 889 9 9 990 0 0 001 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
1 3 5 7 9 1 357 9 1 3 5 791 3 5 791 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 i 357 9 1 3 5 791 3 5 791 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 791 357
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 233 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 777 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 990 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 222
024 6 8 0 246 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 246 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 680 246 8 o 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 o 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 o 2 4 6
Sense Bits On
10 Matched
CRC Error
Length Error
Special Adr. Mark
Bad Track
Index
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
To use the table, find the cursor position on the display and in the table; then read down from the cursor position and left from the Xs.
Locate Disk Problems
DOUBLE DECIMAL NOTATION FOR TRACK NUMBERS IN ID5*
TABLE 1
The display disk track IDs diagnostic can show
the frequency of failure of the IDs in each track
of disk, and thus provide a relative guide to the
number of soft error machine retries to expect
for any given track. Reinitialize a suspect disk
and then display track I Ds again. Do not forget
to try other diskettes in the same disk drive as a
comparison. Try the suspect disk in another
machine if available. The object here is to establish whether the machine or the disk is the
marginal or faulty one.
Track
Number
ID
Track
Number
ID
a
See Display Disk Track IDs (page 8-3) for how to
move the head up or down. Access to the upper
or lower stop can be caused by this method.
-
While accessing, mechanical action of the
stepper motor and leadscrew wheels can
be observed.
- Track IDs can be observed to determine if the
head is being accessed the proper amount each
time.
Nf'te: During accessing, the display is blanked.
Therefore, a new display is provided for each
track and also for the above and below limit
stop positions. This allows a new length to be
displayed shorter than the previous if not all IDs
are read for the new location. See length explanation under Display Disk Track IDs, page 8-3.
*One ID
Record Number
Always
Track Number
(period), and
(~ )
to
«).
(:)
64
(Blank)
3
-a1
-11
33
1
49
-31
65
4
1
0
17
02
2"
18
-2
34
2
2
50
-32
66
-42
r
2
3
-33
67
-43
.J
51
a
1-
1
03
3
19
-31
35
04
-4a
20
1
4
36
-42
52
3
4
68
4
4
,
05
-a5
21
1
5
37
2
5
53
3
5
69
4
5
•
i
?
-
06
6
22
1
6
38
2
6
54
3
6
70
6
07
-7a
23
-71
39
-72
55
-73
71
-47
?
l'
a
08
8
24
1
8
40
2
8
56
-83
72
4
8
09
-a9
25
1
9
41
-92
57
-93
73
-94
10
-a10
26
-110
42
-210
58
-310
74
11
-a11
27
-111
43
-211
59
-311
75
12
-a12
28
12
44
-212
60
-312
76
29
1
13
45
-213
61
-313
30
-114
46
-214
62
-314
31
1
15
47
-215
63
-315
14
15
to
0
01
-1
13
-a
14
a
a (~)
(g)
(,~)
ID**
32
13
(~)
48
2
Track
Number
"0
a
AlwaysO
ID
16
=
H H H H
'0
1
Track
Number
0"
a
- Test points on the FC card can be probed during accessing.
ID
00
a
Check Track Accessing
Track
Number
15
.,
e
<
,(e),(.)
**Characters in right-hand column are for Katakana machines only.
EC
-823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619015
3741 ML
8-7
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619016
8-8
TABLE 2
-
Selected Sequence
*Displayed in Pos.
77 and 78, Record
07, Track 00.
Blank or 01
,-,-
---+ --
,-
RECORD NUMBERS** - PHYSICAL SEQUENCE OF RECORDS IN A TRACK
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
0
1
0
2
0
3
.Q
Q
0
Q
Q..
Q..
Q..
Q..
.1
.l
!
1
1
!
1
!
.1
1
L
6
8
9
10
11
0
12
Q..
5
0
7
0
4
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I
I
RECORD NUMBERS** - SELECTED SEQUENCES FROM COLUMNS 77 AND 78
0
4
0
0
"6
"8
10
0
11
0
1
1
1
1
14
4" "7
1
1
0
"6
10 "3
T
0
T1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
5
-17
0
1
3
1
9
0
2
-05
8
1
1
1
5
1
0
0
0
0
1
9
"2
"6
10
14 "2
1
5
1
10
0
2
-70
0
12
-11
1
6
0
8
0
13
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
4"
10 '3
9
0
15
1
8"
0
14
1
"2
'5
'4
To "0
6"
"5
11
T
7
"6
12
'2
1f
1
0
1
7
0
"3
0
10
1
1
8
0
4
0
11
1
2
1
9
-05
-012 -31
-110
0
6
0
13
-41
-07
0
14
-51
1
2
1
10
0
3
-011
1
3
0
4
-012 -4
1
-05
-013
-51
0
6
-014
1
6
-07
-015 -71
0
-01
8
-012 -51
-40
-013
1
6
0
5
0
14
-7
1
0
- 15
1
0
7
1
0
1
0
8
9
""8
0
3
-013 -71
-40
-014
1
-05
-015
1
9
0
6
1
0
-110
0
7
-11
0
8
8
-21 -90 -31
0
3
0
14
1
9
0
4
0
15
1
10
0
5
1
0
0
6
-11
0
7
1
2
-80
-31 -90
1
3
.Q.
1
4
.Q...
1
9
5
10
0
1
1
7
1
"6
0
10
0
9
11
8
0
3
-05
0
7
9
-011
03
0
1
0
4
-07
0
10
0
13
04
-01
-
0
5
-90
0
13
05
0
1
0
6
0
11
1
0
-01
-07
0
13
1
1
06
"3
9
0
1
0
0
0
8"
0
15
1
07
6"
"2
9
0
0
1
1
08
1"
"9
T
9
0
2
-10
09
0
1
0
10
1
3
-02
-011 -41
-03
10
0
1
01
11
1
5
2"
1
6
0
1
0
12
1-
1
7
0
2
.Q.
11
..Q.
0
0
2
0
9
-013 -015
-01
0
02
-012
13
.Q.
1.
.Q..
.Q..
12
1
13
9
2
14
-01
0
14
0
2
0
15
0
13
"3
1
0
8
1
6
0
0
3
1
"2 "7 4"
.Q..
.L ..Q..
1...
Q.
l
.Q
3
15
4
0
5
1
6
2
7
1
0
1
0
"5 2
1
3
-
0
7
1
4
0
"4
,-1
0
0
1.. .Q.. .Q..
10
* The sequence numbers that are entered by the operator
in positions 7 and 8 of the current buffer, prior to disk
initialization, are machine written in positions 77 and 78
of record 7 track 00 during initialization.
'(3
**Track Number
(~)
(')(periodl,and «)
Always 0
to
0
8
(:)
6
1
5
Note: Full disk image copy from diskette 2 to diskette 1 may copy the sequence number to record 07 as well.
0
-2
-4
-6
0
0
a
0
1
6"
9
12 15 2
-
8
-10
1
1
5" "8
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
T
"4
"8
12
"0
"4
8"
1
1
"3'
8"
-05
0
10
0
15
1
4
g-
0
0
9
8
I
0
-14
15 "3
0
,(t)'H
12
10 "3
1
(%)
This may cause positions 77 and 78 to indicate incorrect sequence number values.
1
-
0
14
H H H
I
~
1
1
8
1
1
1
0
1
10
9
2
0
19
1
4
1
4
-010 -51
l..
0
11
1
7
0
12
8
0
12
1
9
-013
1
10
6
.
LA,wayso
-011 -61
1
(~)
Record Number
(~)
to
(1~)
Use CHAR AOV to move the cursor out to
position 17 as shown by the position indicator.
Display Registers
The diagnostic causes the contents of 30
of the 8-bit registers to be displayed. Each
register will be represented by two alphameric
characters out of the group: 0, 1, 2,3,4,5,6,
7,8,9, A, B, C, 0, E, and F. If all keyboard
toggle switches are in a down (off) position
and the machine is in the XR mode (initialized
diskette installed) when the CE mode is selected, then when the display register diagnostic is
selected, the display should look similar to
Figure 1.
Press FUNCT SEL lower (the right-most
FUNCT SEL key).
Hold down the NUM SHIFT key and press the
C key. The machine mode and status should
change to CE R.
Press the U key. The machine mode and status
should change to CEW and the display should
look similar to Figure 1 (except that the cursor is in position 017). (The six highlighted
registers should initially be 00 for a properly
operating machine. The other registers will
show their contents when the U key is pressed
and may be different than shown in Figure 1.)
(The six highlighted registers should initially be 00
for a properly operating machine. The other
registers will show their contents when the U key
is pressed and may be different than shown in
Figure 1.)
Observe the character displayed directly
above the cursor. It should be a O. If it is
not a 0, then a reason could be, (see below);
Status Line
o
~001
.5.6
A A
00008
CEW
\1/
\1/
\1/
\11
11\
11\
11\
11\
Register
(groups)
One or more keyboard toggle switches were on
when the CE display mode was selected.
Press the RESET key two or more times
until XR mode is displayed again and start
the test over.
- One or more switches are stuck on
electrically or are wired backwards.
- Switch wiring is shorted or PC board
land pattern lines are shorted.
00 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 00-- 1-10
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00-- ·11-20
08 50 00 00 00 01
\11
\11
/1\
/1\
01 00 00 00--1 '21-30
FIGURE 1
The cursor will be displayed in the same position
that it was in when the CE display mode was
selected-CER mode.
The six highlighted registers in Figure 1 will
always be 00 at first selection of the di agnostic
if the machi ne is operating properly.
The display registers diagnostic can be used to:
- Test keyboard switches.
- Test keyboara keys.
- Test shift keys.
Test repeat keys.
- Test system error indicator.
Keyboard Switch Test
Flip all keyboard toggle switches down (off).
Insert an initialized diskette in the disk drive
and close the drive cover. The machine should
go from XN to XR mode and display record
08 of track 00.
-
The register has one or more bits that cannot
be reset.
TABLE 3
2
4
8
6
A
C
E
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates
AUTO REC AOV (ARA) is on
PROG NUM SHI FT (PNS) is on
AUTO OUP/SKIP (AO/S) is on
ARA and PNS are on
AO/S and ARA are on
AO/S and PNS are on
that all three switches are on
If the character in position 17 above the cursor
is a 0, proceed with the switch test. Each
switch has a value of 2,4, or 8 as shown in
Table 3. As the switches are turned on in sequence, their-values will be additive in the
register and the display character will change
accordingly (for each good switch).
Note: The character A is the numeric equivalent
of 10. C is the numeric equivalent of 12. E is
the numeric equivalent of 14.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
The switches may be turned on in any sequence.
Turning a switch off while in the CEW or CER
modes should have no effect on the display
once the register has been set.
An easy sequence to follow is to turn the
switches on (flip up) one at a time from left
to right. The character above the cursor in
position 17 should change from 0 to 8 to
A to E as each good switch is turned on.
For a sequence from right to left, the character
above the cursor in position 17 should change
from 0 to 4 to 6 to E.
Anyone switch can be tested repeatedly by
terminating the CE display mode and then
starting the test over again. (Use Table 3 as
a reference.) The cursor doesn't have to be
moved to position 17 each time, but it does
help to spot the active register position.
RESET may have to be pressed more than
once to change from CEW to CE R mode because the keyboard data register is periodically reset by the diagnostic program and may
not accept the first RESET input.
Note: If the keyboard switch test indicates a bad
switch position the problem could be:
Switch fails to make or break. Check with
the CE ohmmeter.
Open or shorted wiring connections to the
keyboard PC board.
Broken, shorted, or open pin or land pattern on the keyboard PC board.
Keyboard Fourth Switch Test-Katakana
Machines
The KATAKANA SHIFT switch can be tested
by following the procedure outlined for keyboard switch test, with these differences.
- The indication characters will be displayed
in register group 24 (fourth group from
the left in the bottom line for the 3741).
The switch OFF characters should be 00.
- The switch ON characters should be 20.
- The data key must be pressed several times
to test the switch shift function.
PN 1619017
3741 ML
8-9
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
EC
Keyboard Key Test
Insert an initialized diskette in the\~isk drive
and cI ose the drive cover. The mach i rie should
\
\
go from XN to XR mode and display record
08 of track 00.
-
-
Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor out to
position 14 as shown by the position indicator.
Both register positions 13 and 14 will be used
in this test.
-
Hold down NUM SHI FT and press the C key.
The machine mode and status should change
to CER.
-
Press the U key. The machine mode and
status should change to CEW and the display
appear similar to the one below. (The six
highlighted registers should initially be 00
for a properly operating machine. The other
registers will show their contents when the
U key is pressed and may be different than
shown below.)
Status Line
001
0
AA
00008
CEW
\1/
\11
\II
\1/
11\
1'1\
/1\
11\
1-10
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
11-20
\ II
\11
11\
11\
08 50 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00
TABLE 4
Observe the two characters that are displayed
for a particular key depression. They should
agree with the codes shown for that key in
the Key Codes Chart. If not, some possible
problems are:
No shift
NUM SHIFT
ALPHA SHIFT
KANASYMB
Shift Key Test
The left-hand character of the two characters
displayed for key codes (position 13 in the dis~
play) should always be a 0, 1,2, or 3 as shown in
the Key Codes Chart.
-
First (left hand) ,
digit of key code
(position 13)
C
D
1
2
6
A
E
3
7
B
F
Repeat Key Test
The repeat (REP) key by itself will cause no
change in the display of registers and will not produce a keyboard click. REP, held down with another key, should cause the other key to be repetitively sampled to the register. The register will
accept the input at a time when it is not being
reset as previously explained. The display will
change once when the register accepts the input.
The keyboard should click repetitively while
the two keys are held down.
Hold NUM SHIFT down and press the same
key as in the previous steps. The left-hand
character should increase by 4. See Table 4.
The object of this test is to try to set the error
bit in the proper register and see if the bit sets
and also if the error alarm conditions are implemented by the machine.
-
Hold ALPHA SH I FT down and press the
same keys as in the two previous steps. The
left-hand character should again increase by
4. In effect, ALPHA SH I FT causes an increase
of 8. See Table 4.
-
Hold KANA SYMB down and press the same
key as in the previous steps. The left-hand
character should increase by 12 over the no
shift character. See Table 4.
-
Hold KANA SHIFT down and press the
same key as in the previous steps. The
indication characters will be displayed in
register group 24 (fourth group from the
left in the bottom line). The no Katakana
shift condition is 00. The Katakana shift
is 20.
Start in XR mode.
Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor out to
position 18.
-
- Test any key on the keyboard by pressing
it alone. Do not press RESET.
5
9
-
Observe the two characters displayed above
and to the left of the cursor. They should
be zero, (00). If they are not both 0, then
the reason could be:
A stuck key (flyplate, dirt on PC board,
etc.).
- A faulty PC board.
- The register has one or more stuck bits.
0
4
8
System Error Indication Test
21-30
-
8-10
Press a key and check that the characters
displayed agree with the key code shown in
the Key Codes Chart for that key.
Register
(groups)
66 00 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 00
A key may have to be pressed more than
once because the keyboard data register is
periodically reset by the diagnostic program
and may not accept the first key depression.
Faulty key module.
Faulty keyboard PC board.
Faulty keyboard register.
Press FUNCT SEL lower (the right hand function select key).
PN 1619018
Select CER mode as described for the previous
test.
Press the U key to select display registers
program.
Observe the character above the cursor in
position 18; it should be a zero (0).
-
Use the heel of your hand and press down
several keys on the keyboard to cause an
overrun error.
- The display should start flashing.
The shift keys and the repeat keys cannot be
tested alone.
- The keyboard should go dead - no more clicks.
- There should a one (1) displayed above the
cursor'in position 18.
See note 1·
KEY CODES CHART
COMM
ENTER
Nil Shill - - - - - . . 02
UPDATE
01
41
Bl
NUll1 Shill ------.. 42
Alphd Shd,--... 82
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
DISK 2
REC
ADV
VERIFY
SEARCH
CONTEN
OE
4E
BE
05
45
85
COPY
03
43
B3
Alternate layout used with
proof keyboard.
- See note 2
DISK 2
RETTO
INDEX
SEARCH
SEQ
READ
TO
PUNCH
EOF
EOD
RETURN
SEARCH SEARCH
ADDRESS
EOD
07
47
87
06
46
86
OB
4B
88
PROG
LOAD
TO
INDEX
09
49
89
COMPUTE DISPLAY
FIELD
FIELD
TOTALS TOTALS
PRINT
TO
EOD
PRINT
REC
TO
DELETE
REC
20
60
AO
20
• 60
AD
DISPLAY DISPLAY
FIELD
FIELD
PROG
NAME
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
OA
4A
8A
2C
6C
AC
20
60
AO
DISPLAY
DATA
rJ
00
40
80
OC
4C
8C
21
61
Al
N,)Shlf,~2E
2A
6A
AA
30
70
80
38
78
BB
NUI11Sh,fl---" 6E
AE
AlphdShdl~
10
50
90
11
51
91
3E
7E
8E
13
53
93
12
52
92
21
61
Al
22
62
A2
14
54
94
23
63
A3
10
50
90
35
75
85
[):l1]
U
I
24
..
m
LINE
..,
No Shift
Num Shdl
Alphd Shill
0
A4
25
65
A5
26
66
A6
J
K
L
64
or:rn
36
76
__ 86
No Shdl
NIHil Shill
Alphd Shill
23
63
A3
22
62
A2
18
58
9B
19
59
99
lA
5A
9A
3C
7C
BC
38
78
88
27
67
A7
18
58
98
28
68
AB
29
fi9
A9
27
67
A7
IE
5E
9E
..
,
No Shdl
§
IF
5F
9F
I
29
fi9
A9
ttrl:J
~
Num Shift
I\lphcl Shltl
28
68
A8
.
.
fij
Notes:
1. For I/O Adapter, this label is I NPUT TO 3741.
2. For I/O Adapter, this label is OUTPUT FROM 3741.
Alternate Keyboard Layout Used with Katakana Machines
No Shift! Kana
Shih.
02
C2
01
41
81
Cl
No Shlftl Kana Shift ... 2 E
38
Num Shift - - . . . . . . 42
Alpha Shlft~ 82
Kana
Symb~
NumShlft~6E
Alpha Shift - - - . . . . A E
Kana
Symb~
EE
78
88
F8
No Shift/Kana 5hlfl----... 36
76
86
F6
Num Shift
Alpha Shift
Kana Symb
OE
4E
8E
CE
03
43
83
C3
30
70
80
FO
2A
5A
AA
EA
Do not
press
thiS
key
10
50
90
DO
3A
7A
SA
FA
,
No Shift/Kana Shltt - - . . 18
58
98
D8
Num Shift
Alpha Shift
Kana Symb
05
45
85
C5
19
59
99
D9
D2
3C
7C
8C
FC
16
56
96
D6
21
51
Al
E1
24
64
A4
E4
17
57
97
D7
lA
SA
9A
DA
38
78
88
F8
18
58
98
D8
20
50
AO
EO
20
5D
AD
ED
09
49
89
C9
13
53
93
D3
92
3F
7F
SF
FF
3D
7D
SO
FD
08
48
88
C8
12
52
11
51
91
Dl
3E
7E
8E
FE
15
55
95
D5
07
47
87
C7
05
45
85
C5
22
23
62
A2
E2
63
A3
E3
26
66
A6
E6
25
65
AS
E5
27
67
A7
E7
14
54
94
D4
28
68
A8
E8
lC
5C
9C
DC
29
69
A9
E9
00
4D
8D
CD
OC
4C
8C
CC
2C
5C
AC
EC
OA
4A
8A
CA
10
31
5D
9D
DD
81
Fl
71
39
79
89
F9
IE
5E
9E
DE
35
75
S5
F5
34
74
84
F4
No S~itt/Kana Shott - - - - - - - - - - _ IF
Num Shift
5F
AJphaShift
Kana Symb
I
9F
OF
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619568
3741 ML
8-10.1
826065
~~I,''
Read/Write Storage Test for Models 1 and 2
1
,
'
,I
Test Pin
Active
Level
(+ or-)
1-G-D02
1-H-D04
1-G-D13
1-G-005
1-H-009
2-H-B02
2-G-B03
1-H-Dl0
l-G-D09
2-H-B06
-
-
SAR 1
SAR 2
SAR 3
SAR 4
SAR 5
SAR 6
SAR 7
SAR 8
SAR 9
SARlO
2-G-B07
+
CSY 1
2-G-B13
+
CSY2
• The memory card can be accessed by the MPU.
2-H-B07
l-H-B08
2-H-Bl0
1-H-D13
+
+
+
+
CSX
CSX
CSX
CSX
1.
Power-up (loads buffers 0 through 15 with
known data).
2-H-B11
+
Data strobe
2.
Load a diskette to X R mode.
The power on sequence chart, in Chapter 14, shows
that the first 2K bytes of R/W storage are tested
by MPU ROS routines. After a successful test,
buffers 0 through 15 are initialized (loaded) with
known data. If the power-up sequence is successfully completed, it can be assumed that: .
• The '+read/-write' line, sent to the memory
card from the MPU address register, worked
correctly.
-
1-H-Dl1
3.
Select CE mode 1 as follows:
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Hold NUM SHIFT and press C
Press letter I
The machine now displays buffer 0 of R/W
storage. Use the space key to display the
contents of each buffer. Then compare
the contents to the R/W Storage Diagram
1 for Models 1 and 2 (you must count keystrokes, after entering CE mode 1, to know
the number of the buffer being displayed.)
The buffer address wraps around to
buffer 0 after 16 keystrokes.
If the buffer contents are not as shown in
Diagram 1, a planar, cross connector, or
memory card might be defective.
4.
Press RESET several times to return to
X R mode.
8·10.2
R/W !MEMORV CARD (INPUT, OUTPUT, ADDRESS CONTROL, AND VOLTAGE LINES)
For Models 3 and 4 see page 8-38.1.
CE mode 1 is used in this procedure to determine
if R/W storage can be accessed by the MPU, disk,
and display attachment ..
PN 1619569
8/1/75
Line
Name
Line Function
1\
il
I~
}
1
2
3
4
Selects
Selects
Selects
Selects
,
2-H-B13
+
Card select
2-G-B04
2-G-B09
l-H-012
2-H-B04
1-H-D07
l-G-D07
2-G-B06
2-G-B05
2-G-Bl0
2-G-B08
2-G-B12
2-G-Bl1
2-H-B05
2-H-B03
2-H-B08
1-G-004
1-G-D03
l-G-008
l-G-D06
1-G-Dl1
1-G-Ol0
1-H-D03
l-H-002
1-H-D06
+
\
8.5 volts
5 volts
5 volts
)
8.5 volts
Ground
t
Ground
~
Bit 1
Bit 2
J
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9 (parity)
\
Bit 1
Bit 2
J
Bit 3
Bit 4
)
Bit 5
Bit 6
I
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9 (parity) I
+
+
-
These lines select one buffer (128 bytes) within
a 1 K block of storage. (1 K of storage contains
8 buffers.)
Selects the first, third, fifth, seventh, and ninth 1 K blocks
of storage.
Selects the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth 1 K blocks of
storage.
+Write/-read
-
These lines forma single byte address to select
one byte within a 128-byte buffer.
,
(
the
the
the
the
first 2K byte block of storage (bytes 0000-2047).
second 2K byte block of storage (bytes 2048-4095).
third 2K byte block of storage (bytes 4096-6143).
fourth 2K byte block of storage (bytes 6144-8191).
A timing pulse from the MPU which allows reading or writing
in storage.
A line from the MPU which selects either a read or write function in storage.
A line from the MPU which activates the memory card.
Input voltages
Data bits to R/W storage. (Data bus in)
)
)
Data bits from R/W storage. (Data bus out)
R/W Storage Diagram 1
Buffer
Number
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Buffer Address
Buffer Name
Present buffer
Search mask buffer
Previous buffer
Status line
Program buffer
Control totals
Format buffer 2
1
4
3
6
Buffer Contents*
CSX
432
Dat~
should be the data read from data set label 8 of diagnostic disk.
Blank.
Data should be the data read from data set label 3 of diagnostic disk.
Same data as that being displayed on status line 1.
Hex characters.
Hex characters.
NNN
~N
NNN---------------------------------------------N
CSY
2 1
SAR
10 9 8
-----------r~--~~
5
12
13
14
15
8
7
A
9
16
C
17
B
18
E
19
20
21
22
23
24
Format buffer D
Format buffer F
* The 3741 Models 1 and 2 use only 2
of storage.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
8K
For 3741 Models 3 and 4 the Ns do not appear until ACL T 1 is
loaded.
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
NNN---------------------------------------------N
EC 823146
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619019
3741 ML
8-11
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
825853
826065
11/15174
8/1175
CE PINS FOR RASTER DISPLAY
CE VOLTMETER ACCURACY CHECK
(15 Vdc Range) (PN 452796)
The CE pins for raster display are located adjacent to the left side of the signal cable connector on the display PC board. One of the CE
pins is connected to the PC board ground. The
other CE pin is connected to the 'video signal'
line.
To check the accuracy of the 15 volt dc range of
your voltmeter, measure the voltage drop across
the zener diode on the power supply PC board.
The zener diode has a closely controlled voltage
drop of 6 volts dc with power on.
When the CE pins are connected together with
a jumper wire, the 'video signal' line is grounded,
thus preventing the display of characters on the
CRT.
_6~
~
i• I• 2-
• I. I·13
~
Power Suppy
PC Board
".--- 'AC
•
de
"OC
VOlts(@
Display PC Board
It may be difficult to see the raster retrace pattern on some display units when the brightness
control is turned all the way clockwise and characters are being displayed. For these cases, the
characters can be removed from the display by
connecting the CE pins together with a jumper
wire. The absence of the brilliant characters
will allow the raster retrace lines to be more visible.
··· ...
L-... _ _ _ _ _ _---'-_ _ _ _ _ _ _
CE HEAD-ADJUSTING TOOL (PN 2200698)
--ii--;--
In'stall CE tool by
screwing thumbscrew
into drive hub.
8-12
Set the meter selector switch to the 15 volt
range and connect as shown in the diagram. The
meter should indicate 6 volts dc.
B D
CE pins
PN 1619020
Original Power Supply
(with diode board)
~---'
Power· Su ppy
PC Board
Pos Com
(6 vdc)
+
Revised Power Supply
(no diode board)
l--,r---;-ii---i--
~o:::::II:..---I
Rotate CE tool
so it contacts
this surface.
.+5 Vdc
• POR
•
Gnd
CE GENERAL LOGIC PROBE (PIN 453212)
The universal logic probe provides a visual indication of a line level. The probe can also be used
to detect pulses and as a babysitter. (Refer to
handbook that comes with probe.)
~ Test Terminal
___
..:/~_
.
The line being probed is connected to this terminal. (Various probes may be attached, other
than the one shown, to aid in probing.)
~----~ff-----_ Ground Lead
Probe UP and DOWN lights will momentarily
flash on during power on if the probe is connected to its machine power source. Please
ignore.
Connect this lead to any signal ground near the
probe point. Do not use frame ground.
CAUTION
Improper indications result if this lead is not connected to signal ground. A maximum length of 4
inches (101.6 mm) can be used.
Indicator Lights
TECHNOLOGY
UP indicates an up level (+).
DOWN indicates a down level (-).
A pulsing line is indicated by
both lights being on.
Both lights are off if the line level
is from +1.0 to +2.0 Vdc for MULTI
logic setting.
MULTI"~
Logic Selector (TECHNOLOGY)
MST 2/4 MST 1
Selects the type of logic to be probed. Circuits
probed in the 3741 require the MULTI setting.
LATCH
UP~
LA TCH Switch
NONE DOWN
Allows the probe to be used as a babysitter.
The up position allows latching the UP light on
a positive pulse. The down position allows
latching the DOWN light on a negative pulse.
NON E position resets the lights and prevents any
latching action. This position is used for most
probing in the 3741.
Safe Operating Ranges:
Logic
selector
MULTI
MST 2/4
MST 1
+60.0V
+14.0V
+14.0V
GATE REF
Voltages greater than the above ranges
will damage the probe.
GATE REF Volts Switch
GATING
+@
PowerLeads----------------------~
The use of this switch is not required for probing in the 3741. It affects only the gating terminals.
-@)
Connect the black (-) lead to 2-M-D13 (gnd). Connect the other (+) lead to 2-M-B05 (+8.5V) (or connect the black [-J lead to ground and the other
lead to +5 Vdc on the power supply PC board, see
page 8-12). A voltage difference of 4 to 12 volts is
needed to power the probe, with the black lead always the most negative.
GATING Terminals
The use of these terminals is not required for
probing in the 3741.
Note: Do not use the -5 Vdc supply to power the
Do not probe FET signals with gate inputs.
Gate input limits are ±14 volts.
probe. The power required by the probe will overload the -5 Vdc supply.
CAUTION
Improper connection of power lead may cause
the probe to malfunction.
EC
823146
Date 9/15114
825853
826065
11/15114
8/1115
PN 1619021
3741 ML
8-13
EC
823146
825853
826065
9/15174
11/1~174
8/1175
CE DISKETTES
CE Diagnostics Diskette
The following diskettes are available to aid in
servicing the 3741 :
This diskette contains programs and data for most
of the other base machine tests (such as printer
and data recorder attachment tests).
o Alignment check (PN 2455026)
Head Alignment Service Check Tracks
o CE diagnostics (PN 2469688)
o I/O adapter (PN 2469460)
• Two diskettes for Models 3 and 4
Handling Precautions
The CE should be aware that all diskettes undergo
small reversible dimensional changes as temperature
and humidity changes occur. The CE diskettes
should be allowed to stabilize to the ambient
environment before use. The stabilization period
may vary from a few· minutes to several hours depending on the magnitude of the change.
Storage in sunlight or temperatures exceeding 1100 F
is expressly prohibited. If subject to high temperatures for extended periods of time, small irreversible dimensional changes may occur which would
degrade the precision of the alignment tracks.
The alignment check diskette is intended as a
service aid only. If consistent conflicts between
the mechanical alignment tool and the diskette
occur, the diskette should be replaced.
Alignment Check Diskette \
This is a specially treated diskette designed for
checking head alignment.
The CE diskette has special tracks written on
its disk that can be used by the CE for a fast
service check of a disk drive unit to determine
if the unit has acceptable R/W head-to-track
alignment. This service check can be used to
quickly determine which disk drive unit out
of several needs R/W head adjustment to make it
compatible with the rest of the units.
The special tracks on the CE diskette disk are precision written in a manner that alternately offsets the 10 fields of each track a certain distance
from the track centerline. Special messages to the
CE are written in the 26 record areas of each track
(see Display Data Head Alignment Service
Check). Each record is offset on the opposite
side of a track from its offset ID.
Since the disk drive stepper motor/leadscrew
wheels have four discrete stop positions each revolution, a set of four special tracks is provided so
that all wheel stop positions can be checked. These
tracks are located in track positions 06, 07,08,
and 09. A second set of four special tracks is
aiso provided. The IDs and records are written
more offset than they are for the first set. Track
positions are 12, 13, 14, and 15.
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Diskette
Contained on this diskette are tests to aid in
diagnosing troubles on the I/O adapter. See
the I/O Adapter sections of this chapter.
Note that the phase zero position of the stepper
motor/leadscrew wheels corresponds to tracks
00, 04, 08, 12, etc.
Track 00 through 04 and all tracks beyond track
16 are written with all 26 IDs on the centerline
of each track.
Data set label 09 defines tracks 05 through 16
as HD ALIGN TRACKS. Actually, tracks 05,
10, 11, and 16 are head alignment guard band
tracks.
8-14
Data set label 00009 defines tracks 06 through 09
as HO ALIGN.
Also, data set label 10 defines tracks 12 through
15 as HO ALIGN.
Records and IDs are written off-track centerline
on all 12 tracks, either OUT away from the disk
center hole, or IN toward the disk center hole.
Tracks 11 through 16 are written farther off-track
than are tracks 05 through 10.
A.
An identifier field, called a disk track IO,is
written at the beginning of each record location
in every track when a disk is initialized. There
are 26 10 fi elds per track. Each 10 fiel d has ~
track number 10 and one of the 26 record num~ber IDs for that track.
Model 3/4 Diagnostics Diskettes
These two diskettes are described in the Model
3 and 4 part of this chapter.
PN 1619022
Tracks 06 through 09 (also tracks 12
through 15):
1.
Odd numbered record IDs are written
OUT.
Even numbered record IDs are written
IN.
2.
Odd numbered records are written
IN.
Even numbered' records are written
OUT.
Figure 1 shows the sequential order of the
IDs and records on the disk for anyone of
the above 8 tracks.
B.
C.
Tracks 05 and 11 (Guard Bands):
1.
Even numbered IDs are written
IN (toward track 06 or 12).
Odd numbered records are written
IN (toward track 06 or 12).
2.
No odd numbered IDs are written.
No even numbered records are written.
Tracks 10 and 16 (Guard Bands):
1.
Odd numbered IDs are written
OUT (toward track 09 or 15).
Even numbered records are written
OUT (toward track 09 or 15).
2.
No even numbered IDs are written.
No odd numbered records are written.
Matching record messages refer to each other in
pairs; that is, record 1 refers to record 2, and
record 2 refers to record 1; record 3 refers to
record 4, and record 4 refers to record 3; and
so on.
Any-two record messages of a matching pair (with
their corresponding IDs) are written on the disk
1800 from each other. (See Figure 1.)
The guard band tracks (05, 10, 11, and 16) have
only 13 IDs each. No record messages are displayable from the guard band tracks. IDs have
no corresponding records. (See B and C.)
Typical Example for Successful Display of a Pair
of Matching Record Messages:
As explained above, each odd lOis written OUT
and its corresponding odd record is written IN.
Each even 10 is written IN and its corresponding
even record is written OUT. Therefore, the correct display of a pair of matching record messages
results when the read/write head can read correctly an OUT 10 and its IN record, and then
1800 away on the track can also read an IN
10 and its OUT record. (See Figure 1.)
The total number of pairs of matching record
messages that can be read for anyone of the four
tracks gives an indication of two mechanical
conditions:
1.
Head location in reference tothe track
cente rl ine.
2.
How well the disk is centered while it
is clamped to the disk drive hub.
1.
Display Data Head Alignment Service Check
Note: The machine must be operative enough
to be able to read and display track 00, and also
to seek and to read other tracks on a diskette.
Use the ML to troubleshoot machine malfunctions.
Can a pair of two matching record messages be
read correctly from each of the four tracks?
- Insert CE diskette in a disk drive and close
the drive cover.
Press REC ADV to get to data set label
00009, HDR 1 HD ALIGN. (For second disk,
press FUNCT SEL upper followed by disk 2
REC ADV.)
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Press UPDATE. (For second disk, hold NUM
SHIFT and press SEARCH ADDRESS, enter
the address, press FUNCT SEL upper followed
by disk 2 REC ADV.)"Dependent upon head
alignment, the disk drive mayor may not be
able to read and match up the first 10 of track
06 with the first record of track 06. If successful, the display will look like this:
001
o
A A
2.
3.
Is displayed immediately after R EC ADV
or REC BKSP with no retries.
Has correct data contents.
Has track and record numbers in the record
that agree with the record counter in the
status line.
Y N
Adjust the head. - (231)
Verify the adjustment with the test
diskette.
Head alignment is OK.
U R
06001
IRACK 6,RECORD 1 CK STATUS LINE
06001
HEAD ALlGNMT OK IF RECORD 2 CAN BE READ
If not successful, there will be a pause while the
machine is retrying, then an error will be dispJayed for no record found (2) or read (4).
RESET the error and press REC ADV. (For
second disk, press FUNCT SEL upper followed
by disk 2 REC ADV.) The objective of the alignment check is to find a pair of matching record
messages in each alignment check track that
read and display correctly. The tracks are 06,
07, 08, and 09.
Matching record messages refer to each other in
pairs; that is, record 1 refers to record 2, and
record 2 refers to record 1; record 3 refers to
record 4, and record 4 refers to record 3; and
so on. (See example above.)
A correctly read and displayed record message
is one that:
Figure 1
EC
823146
825853
826065
9/15/74
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619023
3741 ML
8-15
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
3713 PRINTER TEST PROGRAMS
Section 2 - Leading zeros suppression test.
Refer to 3717 M LM for 3717 test procedures.
Section 3 - Substitution of asterisks for leading
zeros test.
The printer test programs are divided into eight
sections:
Section 1 - Print a 132-character line.
The 3741 may have either 128- or
132-character position ROS for the
printer. When the machine has 132
ROS, any characters that are printed
that exceed the print line overprint
the first positions of the line. For example, if 132 characters are printed
on a 120-position printer, positions
121 through 132 overprint 1 through
12.
When the machine has 128 ROS, any
characters that are printed up to 128
characters overprint the first positions
of the line. For example, if 128 characters are printed on a 120-position
printer, positions 121 through 128
overprint positions 1 through 8. When
a 132-character line is printed using
128 ROS, the positions up to 128 overprint; positions 129 through 132 cause
an extra line feed. For example, a 132character line printed with 128 ROS
on a 120-position printer, positions
121 through 128 overprint positions 1
through 8, and positions 129 through
132 cause an extra line feed (blank
line).
PN 1619024
8-16
To run the printer test:
Load programs
1.
Record advance or backspace to the PT
PROG (printer test program) data set
label. This label is at address 00015.
Section 4 - Print signed data fields test.
2.
Select UPDATE.
3.
Load the 10 programs into program levels
1 through A (the program at 34002 into
program level 1, the program at 34003
into program level 2, etc.).
4.
Select RETURN TO INDEX.
Section 5 - Tab test.
Section 6 - Ski p characters and reverse bypass
test.
Section 7 - Read next record test.
Section 8 - Vertical skip test.
Each section begins with a description line which
is formatted by program storage 1.
Print
1.
Record advance or backspace to the PT
DATA (printer test data) data set label. This
label is at address 00016.
Program Level 1
2.
Select PRINT TO EOD.
N3CY127 A3CQ
=
3C
= 3 spaces.
Y
= Skip first character.
127 A
=
3C
No
Note: The % in the first position of program
N
OPe
level A indicates that the printer format program level is defined by the character in column
001 of the data record.
Section Descriptions
Load characters 2 through 128 into the
the print buffer ..
= Print, carriage return, and line feed
Each section will be described by showing:
1.
The Test Data for the section.
2.
The Correct Printed Output for the section.
3.
A description of the Program for that
section.
three times.
Q
= End of program.
Section 1 - Print a 132 Character Line
Test Data
1SECTION 1--132 PRINT TEST. THE PROGRAM IS IN PROG. STORAGE 2.
1111111111111111111111111111
2
1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888888899999999990000000000111111111122222222
21234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567
2/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/
2\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\
2/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/
2_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=~
2=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-~
2_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_~_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=_=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
2- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2IHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHI
2HIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIH
2IHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHI
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 1--132 PRINT TEST. THE PROGRAM IS IN PROG. STORAGE 2.
1111111111111111111111111111
111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889999999999000000000011111111112222222222333
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\
\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/
/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\
-=-=-=-~-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
=-=-=-=-=-~-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-~-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
IHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIH
HIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHI
IHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIHIH
Program Level 2
NY127A100F5Aca
N
= No op.
Y
= Skip first character.
127 A
=
Load characters 2 through 128 into
the print buffer.
100F
Reverse bypass to character 29.
5A
Load 5 characters (29 through 34)
into the print buffer.
C
Print, carriage return, line feed.
Q
End of program.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619025
3741 ML
8-17
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
EC
PN 1619026
Section 2 - Leading Zeros Suppression Test
Test Data
lSECTION 2--LEADING ZEROS SUPPRESSION TEST" THE PROGRAM IS IN PROG" STORAGE 3"
30000000001123456789000000000011234567890
30000000012012345678900000000120123456789
30000000123001234567800000001230012345678
30000001234000123456700000012340001234567
30000012345000012345600000123450000123456
30000123456000001234500001234560000012345
30001234567000000123400012345670000001234
30012345678000000012300123456780000000123
30123456789000000001201234567890000000012
31234567890000000000112345678900000000001
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 2--LEADING ZEROS SUPPRESSION TEST"
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGR STORAGE 3"
:I. 2:·:~4~:if.) 7B90
:I. 2~:~4~:)t> 7B9
:L 234:i6 7B
:1.234567
:I. 2~~4~::i6
:1.2:545
12~~4
:1. 2:5451.) 7B
:I. ~:.~~54~::i6 7B9
:1.2:3
:1.2
:1. 2::~4::i6 7B9
:l.2::)4~567890
:I.
:l.2~54::ib 7 BCtO
:1.
12
:1. ;.~~)
:I. ~:':34
:l2:54~:i
:L 234:i6
:l.234~567
:I.2::)4~567B
Program Level 3
NY10B5X10B5X10B5X10BCQ
N
= No op.
Y
= Skip first character.
10B
= Load 10 characters into the print
buffer and remove zeros to the left
of the significant digit.
5X
= Load 5 blanks to the print buffer.
C
= Print, carrier return, and
Q
= End of program.
line feed.
:I.
12::)4~56 7890
:1. 2~34~:i6 '7Bcy
:1.23
:1.2:345b'7B
:1.2~~4
:1. 234~5
:I. 2:~4~:i6 7
:I. 2:54~:it)
123456
:1. ~:'~34~5
:1. 2:54::i6 7
:1.2:34
:1.2
1
8-18
Section 3 - Substitution of Asterisks For
Leading Zeros Test
Test Data
1SECTION 3--SUBSTITUTION OF ASTERISKS FOR LEADING ZEROS TEST"
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROG"STORAGE 4"
40000000001123456789000000000011234567890
40000000012012345678900000000120123456789
40000000123001234567800000001230012345678
40000001234000123456700000012340001234567
40000012345000012345600000123450000123456
40000123456000001234500001234560000012345
40001234567000000123400012345670000001234
40012345678000000012300123456780000000123
40123456789000000001201234567890000000012
41234567890000000000112345678900000000001
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 3--SUBSTITUTION OF ASTERISKS FOR LEADING ZEROS TESTn
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGHSTORAGE 4"
:I.
1. 2
.j(. ·)f .)(. ·)f .)(..)(..)~ .jf .)~
:I. 2~545t.) "7B(";O
.)~ .)~ .)(..)(..)~ .)(..j(..)(.
·)(·12~34~if.) 78(y
~(.•)(• .j~ ·)f .)~ ·)f .)~
:I. 2:3
·je· .)~ .~ .j(..)~ ·)t :1. 2 ~~ 4
.)(.•)(• .j(• •)~ .j(.
:I. 23 4 ~:i
2 ~5 4 :;i I.)
.)~ ~~ .)~ :1. 2 ::~ 4 ~::i 6 7
.)(. ·)f :I. 234 ~::. t.i '7 {3
.)~ :1. 2:':~4~:i 6 789
1 ::?'34~::i6 '78(iO
.)(. ·)t .)~ .j(. :I.
78
.)~ .)(..j~ :1. 23456 '7
.)(. ·)t ~~ .)t 1 2 3 4 ~:i c)
·)t .)(..)~ .)(. ·)f :I. 2:3 4 ~:i
·)f .)(..)~ .)(..j(••)~ 1 2 3 4
~~ ·)f ~t .)~ ·)f .~ .)~ :I. 2 3
.~.)(.:I. 2~54~i6
·)f .)~ ~~ .)~ ·jf .)C••)(. ~(.
:I. 2
·)f ~••)(.•)~ ·)f .)~ .)(..j(. ~(.
1
.)(•.)(.•)~ ·)e· .)(..)~ .)~ .)~ .)~ 1.
~(
.)~ ·)e· :L 2
.)~ .)~ .)(.•)(••)~ .j(. ·)f :1. 2 ~3
12~S4~:i6 7B
SHOLlI... D BE (vIINUS
SHOULD BE IVIINUS
SHOULD BE i···iINUS
BHDUL.D BE 1"IINUS
SHOULD BE 1"1 I NUS
SHOULD BE I"iI 1-·1UG
500001...
~::i () 0 () 0 i\i
~::iO()OON
~::iOOOOD
~::i 0 0 () 0 P
~::iOOOOC~
~::i 0 0 0 0 I:~
~::iOOO:I.
0000 :1.
00002
o () O()~:S
OO()O4
OOOO~::i
00006
00007
OOOOB
OOO()F
6F
6F
'7G
8H
HH
8H
8H
8H
(;>I
('}I
:i, ?~
~~B
~3C
19
?4
.-411
5E
:I. i~~1
2B
28
~5C
ll~)
lA
:I. i:"1
:L (:"1
9
2B
2B
2B
~:)C
4D
4D
4D
3C
4D
~5C
411
3C
:iE
::iE
::iE
29
7G
i7G
7(3
91
91
<11
Program Level 7
1
0
?O
~O
~O
90
?O
70
NY3XA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YACa
Column
N
No op.
Y
Skip first character.
3X
Load 3 blanks into the print buffer.
A
Load 1 character into the print buffer.
8Y
Skip 8 characters.
9F
Reverse bypass 9 positions.
C
Print, carrier return, and line feed.
a
End of program.
8·22
Section 7 - Read Next Record Test
Test Data
1SECTION 7--READ NEXT RECORD TEST» THE PROGRAM IS IN PROG» STORAGE 8"
THE NEXT LINE SHOULD PRINT A THRU Z IN POSITIONS 1 THRU 26
H(.i
BB
He
BD
BE
DF
BG
HH
HI
B,,J
01\
BI...
Brl
UN
no
or
nt~
BF~
BS
OT
BU
BV
BW
BX
BY
BZ
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 7--READ NEXT RECORD TEST» THE PROGRAM .IS IN PROGH STORAGE 8"
THE NEXT LINE SHOULD PRINT A THRU Z IN POSITIONS 1 THRU 26
ABCDEFGHIJI\LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Program Level 8
Column
10
20
30
40
50,
60
70
80
NYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYARYA~YARYARYACQ
N
No op.
R
Read next record.
Y
Skip first character.
C
Print, carrier return, and line feed.
A
Load 1 character into the print buffer.
Q
End of program.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619031
3741 ML
8-23
1EC 8231461
PN 1619032
Date 9/15174
Section 8 - Vertical Skip Test
Test Data
1SECTION 8--VERTICAL SKIP TEST" THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGn STORAGE 9"
;,. (-.,:: @:: :.J:: :.':: rJ:: 3J:: Q):: ::J:: OJ:: al:: ,.,J:: c-.':: ~:: ~:: ~:: @:: ,; :: ~:: 1':: ']::
~:: ~::
"il:: 2 :: ~::;J :~ ~::.)):~ ~:: @:: : : ~!
~:.' j):~
~?~~~~~~~i~]~2Ji~J~~~~~~~~~~=i=~~2~3~2=i=3~d~2=J~2~j~2~2=~=i~i~~=~=2~2~d~i=i=~=~=a=a=~:i=2n@~@=2=2=2~i~~~a~i=~~~~2=i:in~~i=i=i~~~~~i
:1 :.1 :' :! :: :: ::
~IC
~
:,:
~
~:
~.I
::
::
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
:: '.::, :: :.~ ~: :! :: :: :]
::
r
::
~
:.'
~
::
::
= =
::
~
~:
=
::
~
::
~
::
~
::
~
::
~:
=
:.~
t
~
::
~
::
~:
::
::
== ==n
::
::
~
::
=
::
~
::
::
::
== =
::
~
::
n n
:,1 :: ::
.,
~
~
~
:: :: :: :: :: ::
:~
~
t
~
~
~
~
~~
::
= n =
~:
~
:~
~
:: :: :: :: :: :}
=
~
=~
~
~
::
:~
~
~
:. ::
~~
~ ~
:,1
:: :: :~ ~: :: :: :: :.' :: t,t :,t :: :: til :: :,t :,t :: :~ :,' t.! :.1 t,1 :,1 t,l :: :: :,' :~ :: :~ :.' :: :~ :: :: :: :: :: :: :: ~: :: :: :: :} :: :: :! :: :: :: :: ::
I HIt-" It4 I ~ 1~ ! HI I' I I~ I I- I I' 11-' I HI HI HI'" ! I-' I f-4 I HI HI I' I I-' I HI f' ! I~ I HI .... I" I ~ I HI HII-' ! HI HII-' I I- I h I I- II-' I HI ~ I I- I I-' I HI HI I-' i HI HI .... I HIt-' 1Hr .. I HI H I I-' I HI HI H I HI I-' I '" I .... I I-' I Lj I I-' I h
Ii I f-I I PI H I ~II '1 I p T.... 1 HI HI HI HII~ I HI HI H I II TII n!l HI I-i I HI til ..., I HI HI 1-11 HI rlI H I HI '-l I HI "ill-' I H1 HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI HI ,H f-t} HI HH I HI "ll II I HI HI HI ~tI I-ll ...q ~ I HI fq HI HI
~,I
~
~
~
IHIHIHIHIhIHI"II'I~!HII-'I""!HIHIHlhIHIHII-II-IHIHIH:HII-II-II-'IHII-II-'IHIHII-IHlhIl-'lhIHII-IHII-IHIHIHIt-'IHII-IHIHIHIHIHII-'IHII-IHIHIHIHII-II-'Ihlh!I-'IhII-
Program Level 2
NY127A100F5Aca
N
No op
Y
Skip first character
127 A = Load characters 2 through 128 into
the print buffer
1OOF = Reverse bypass to character 29
5A
Load 5 characters (29 through 34)
into the print buffer
C
Print, carriage return, line feed
a
End of program
EC 825853
Date 11/15/74
PN 1619400
3741 ML
8-26.3
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619401
8-26.4,
811/75
Section 2. Leading Zeros Suppression Test
Substitution of asterisks for leading zero and
print signed data field test.
Test Data
ISECTION 2--LEADING ZERO. SUPPRESSION. SUBSTITUTION OF ASTERI$KS FOR LEADING ZERO. AND PRINT SIGNED DATA FIELDS TESTS.
1THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 4
4000000000112345618900000000001123456189000000000011234561890000000000112345618900000J MINUS AND PLUS 00001
4000000001201234561890000000012012345618900000000120123456189000000001201234561890000K MINUS AND PLUS 00002
4000000012300123456180000000123001234561800000001230012345618000000012300123456180000l MINUS AND PLUS 00003
4000000123400012345670000001234000123456700000012340001234561000000123400012345610000M MINUS AND PLUS 00004.
4000001234500001234560000012345000012345600000123450000123456000001234500001234560000N MINUS AND PLUS 00005
40000123456000001234500001234560000012345000012345600000123450000123456000001234500000 MINUS A~D PLUS 00006
4000123456700000012340001234561000000123400012345610000001234000123456100000012340000P MINUS AND PLUS 00001
4001234567800000001230012345678000000012)001234561800000001230012345618000000012300000 MINUS AND PLUS 00008
4012345678900000000120123456189000000001201234561890000000012012345618900000000120000R MINUS AND PLUS 00009
4123456189000000000011234561890000000000112345618900000000001123456189000000000010001
MINUS AND PLUS 00010
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 2--lEADING ZERO SUPPRESSION.
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 4
1
12
123
1234
12345
123456
1234567
12345618
123456189
1234561890
1234567890
:123456189
12345618
1234567
123456
12345
1234
123
12
1
1
12
123
1234
12345
123456
1234561
12345618
123456189
1234567890
SUBSTITuTION OF ASTERISKS FOR lEADING ZERO. AND PRINT SIGNEJ DATA FIELDS TESTS.
1234567890
123456189
12345618
1234561
123456
12345
1234
123
12
1
:;::**:.":**:;:*:",: 1
:.":****:.":*:;: 12
**:;:::;:::;:** 123
*:;:::::**::: 1234
**:.":**12345
**:;::;:123456
*:::* 1234561
**12345678
*123456789
1234561890
12345618'1_0
*123456189
:::*12345678
*:;:*1234561
*:;:** 12 3456
* :;:::;::** 12345
:::**,,":** 1234
:;::;:**:;::;:* 12 3
********12
:;:,,":****:;:::::;: 1
:.":****:::*** 1
:;: * *:",:* *::: * 12
*:::****~, 123
***:",:*:;: 12 34
:::**** L2345
::::;:** 123456
*:::* 1234561
*:",: 12 345678
:::123456789
1234567890
1234561890
:;:123456189
*:;:12345618
***1234561
**:;::.": L23456
***:;:* 12 345
:;:*';::*** 1234
*:::*:::*:;:*123
:;:**:;:';::* *::: 12
*:;:***:;::;::;::;: 1
00001000020000300004000050000600001000080000900010-
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
MINUS
AND PLUS 00001
AND PLUS 00J02
A~D PLUS aoa03
AND PLUS 00004
AND PLUS 00005
AND PLUS 00006
AND PLUS 00007
ANO PLUS 00Ll08
AND PLUS 00J09
AND PLUS 00010
Program Level 4
Column
10
•
20
:
30
f
40
,
50
t
NY10B2X10B2X10B2X10B2X10Z2X10Z2X10Z2X10Z2X5D16A5Dca
N
Y
lOB
2X
10Z
50
16A
C
Q
No op.
Skip first character.
Load 10 characters into the print
buffer and remove zeros to the left
of the significant digit.
Load 2 blanks into the print buffer.
Load 10 characters into the print
buffer and replace the zeros to the
left of the most significant digit with
asterisks.
Load 5 characters into the print
buffer and load a minus sign. If the
last character has a D zone, load a
blank.
Load 16 characters into the print
buffer.
Print, carrier return, and line feed
End of program.
\
\
\
\
Section 3. Tab Test
Test Data
lSECTION 3--TAB TEST.
THE C SHOULD LINE UP wITH THE
lTHE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 5
+
+
+
+
+.
+
+
5*:::*:::::::::*
+
5:::*~:***~:
5* *¢*::: *:::
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 3--TAB TEST. THE::: SHOULD LINE UP WIJH THE
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 5
+
+
.......
.,.
:.--=
...
+
+
...
...
...
...
:::
...
.,.
:::
...
...
:::
:::
...
.'.
....
...
.'.
...
.......
:;:
','
+
+
+
','
...
+.
.......
.......
Program Level 5
NYATA2TA3TA4TA5TA6TAca
N
Y
A
Noop
Skip first character
Load one character into the print
buffer
Load enough blanks into the print
buffer to get to the indicated tab
stop
Print, carriage return, line feed
End of program
T
C
a
Tab Stops in Program Storage A
End of Forms
6
Col.
%
11
16
19
21
26
31
I
36
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T1
J
2
T3
4T 5 0 7 J8.
I
41
I
9T
46
I
T
51
I
T
I
86
91
96
101
I
I
I
I
111
I
121
I
106
I
116
I
I
I
I
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
66
71
76
I
I
I
I
T
T
TE
T
EC
825853
Date 11/15114
126
81
61
56
826065
811115
PN 1619402
3741 ML
8-26.5
EC 825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619403
8-26.6
Section 4. Skip Characters and Reverse
Bypass Test
Test Data
LSECTION 4--SKIP CHARACTERS AND REVERSE BYPASS TEST.
LTHE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 6.
Col. 4
9
14
I
I
I
19
I
lA
40
2B
3C
6L23456789A8CDEFGHI
b12345b789A8CDEFGHI
b12345b789A8CDEFGHI
6L23456789A8CDEFGHI
6L23456789ABCDEFGHI
24
29
34
39
I
I
I
I
6F
5E
44
I
8H
7G
THE NEXT FIVE LINES SHOULD LOOK LIKE THE FIRST LINE.
91
Correct Printed Output
SECT10N 4--SKIP CHARACTERS AND REVERSE BYPASS TE ST.
THE PROGRAM I S IN PROGRAM STORAGE b.
9
Column 4
I
I
LA
LA
lA
lA
lA
LA
2B
28
2B
28
2B
2B
19
I
14
I
40
40
40
40
40
40
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
24
29
I
6F
6F
bF
of
bF
6F
I
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
34
39
I
I
8H
8H
8H
8H
8H
8H
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
THE NEXT FIVE LINES SHOULD LOOK LIKE THE FIRST LINE.
44
I
91
91
91
91
91
91
Program Level 6
Column
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NY3XA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YA3X9FA8YACQ
N
Y
3X
A
8Y
9F
C
Q
No op
Skip first character
Load 3 blanks into the print buffer
Load 1 character into the print buffer
Skip 8 characters
Reverse bypass 9 positions
Print, carrier return, line feed
End of program
,
I
Section 5. Read Next Record And Print
Disk Address Test
Test Data
1SECTION 5--READ NEXT RECORD AND PRINT DISK ADDRESS TESTS.
1THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 1.
7A
7B
7C
THE NExT LINE SHOULD BE 4622 FOLLOWED BY A THRU l
FOLLOWED BY 4721.
10
7E
7F
7G
7H
71
7J
7K
7L
7M
7N
70
7P
70
7R
7S
7T
7U
7V
7W
7X
7Y
7l
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 5--READ NEXT RECORD AND PRINT DISK ADDRESS TESTS.
T~E '~ROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 7.
THE NEXT LINE SHOULD BE 4b22 FOLLOWED BY A THRU I
FOLLO~ED
8Y 4721.
4622 A8COEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYl 4721
Program Level 7
Column
10
20
30
40
50
60
70 _c"
80
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
NYWXARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVARVAXWCQ
N
V
W
X
A
R
C
Q
=
Noop
Skip first character
Load current disk address into print
buffer
Load 1 blank into the print buffet
Load 1 character
Read next record
Print, carrier return, line feed
End of program
EC
II
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619404
3741 ML
8-26.7
EC 825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619405
8:-26.8
Section 6. Edit Test
Test Data
ISECTION 6--EOIT TEST.
ITHE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 8.
601234561690J23456769012L45616901234N61890123456P690123
645676R01234561690J23456769012L45676901234N67690123456P
600012345676R01234567890J23456769012L45676901234N616901
823456P00012345678R01234561690J23456789012L45618901234N
867890123456P00012345678R01234567690J23456789012L456189
801234N67890123456P00012345618R01234567890J23456789012L
845678901234N61890123456P00012345618R01234567890J234567
889012L45678901234N67890123456P00012345678R01234561890J
823456789012L45618901234N67890123456P00012345678R012345
86789QJ23456789012L45678901234N67890123456P00012345618R
Correct Program Output
SECTION 6--EDIT TEST.
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 8.
$123.45 S6,189.01 $2,345.61 89/ 1/23 +456,169
-12,345 6
76
9 01 CENTS+ 2,345.67CR 8,901.23
456,769 0
12
3 45 CENTS- 6,789.01
$1.23 $4,561.89 $**123.45 67/89/ 1 +234,561 -890,123 4
56
1 89 CENTS+ 0,123.45CR 6,169.01
234,561 8
90
1 23 CENTS- 4,561.89
+12,345 -678,901 2
34
5 67 CENTS+ 8,901.23CR 4,567.69
456,789
12,345 6
16
9 01 CENTS- 2,345.67
+,123 -456,789 0
12
3 45 CENTS+ 6,189.01CR 2,345.61
56
1 69 CENTS- 0,123.45
$4,567.89 $
$2,345.67 $
123.45 $6,789.01 23/45/61
1.23 $4,561.89
1/23/45
$6,189.01 $2,345.67 $****1.23 45/61/89
$123.45 $6,789.01 $2,345.67
$4,567.89 S
0/ 1/23
890,123
618,901
123.45 $6,789.01 23/45/67
$8,901.23 S4,561.89 $**123.45 67/89/ 1
$2,345.67 $8,901.23 $4,567.89
234,567
123 4
1/23/45 +618,901 -234,567
$6,789.01 $2,345.67 $8,901.23 45/67/89
12,345
°
678,901 2
00
34
2,345.6708
0,123.4506
8,901.2308
6,169.0108
23 CENTS+ 4,561.89CR 0,123.45
5 67 CENTS- 0,001.23
4,561.690B
Program Level 8
Y'$$,$$$.99'X'$Z,ZZZ.99'X'$* *** .99'X'Y9/Y9/Y9'X'++++V 999'X'---- 999')('9BB99BB9'X'99" CENTS"S'X'9 999.99CR'X'9 999.99DB'2CQ
col.
I
1
Y
'$$,$$$.99'
X
, '$Z,ZZZ.99'
'$*,***.99'
'Y9/Y9/Y9'
I
10
I
20
=..
'I
30
I','
I
40
Skip first character
Load 6-digit field with floating $ into the print buffer
Load 1 blank into the print
buffer
Load 6-digit field with fixed
$ and leading blanks into the
print buffer
Load 6-digit field with fixed
$ and leading * into the print
buffer
Load 6-digit field with slashes
and blanks into the print
buffer
50
'++++V,999'
,
-- -- ,999'
'98899889'
'99"cents"s'
60
I
70
I
80
'I
100
I
90
Load 6-digit field with leading
+ sign into the print buffer
(see note)
Load 6-digit field with - sign
into the print buffer (see
note)
Load 4-digit field with fixed
blanks into the print buffer
Load 2-digit field with cents
and a + or - sign into the print
buffer (see note)
'9,999.99CR'
'9,999.99D8'
2C
Q
I '
110
I
120
Load 6-digit field with following CR if minus field into the
print buffer (see note)
Load 6-digit field with following D8 if minus field into the
print buffer (see note)
Print, carriage return, and two
line feeds
End of program
Note: For further explanation of the editing capability refer to the IBM 3741 Data Station Reference Manual, GA21-9183-1, or 3715 Printer Programs in Chapter 9 of this manual.
Section 7. Vertical Skip Test
Test Data
1SECTION 7--VERTICAL SKIP TEST.
1THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 9.
9*****
9---------
SKIP
9--------- SKIP
9--------- SKIP
-9===== SKIP
9----- SKIP
9----- SKIP
9--------- SKIP
9--------- SKIP
---------
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
2.
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
SHOULD
3.
4.
5.
b.
1
7.
8.
9.
1/2 INCH FROM .... .,. .... ..,. .....
1 INCH FROM
1 1/2 INCHES FROM ....-,.
2 INCHES FROM
2 1/2 I NCHE S FROM *****.
3 INCHES FROM ...................
3 1/2 INCHES FROM ...... ..........
4 I NCHE S FROM ..... .,...y ....
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
~.JIw""~~.
~.A.~""
~..........
..-.
'W" ......
...........
-.h .......... .A.
... .A. ....
'¥' .... ¥
....
.A,. ....
.........
~.A.~. . . . .
••• JI4. ....... .A. .....
~
~JIw
.... JI4. ...
~.
Correct Printed Output
SECTION 7--VERTICAL SKIP TEST.
THE PROGRAM IS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 9.
~
...............
.... ......... ....
......
=====
SKIP TO
2.
-- ------
SKIP TO 3.
SHOULD BE 1 INCH FROM
-- ---
SKIP TO 4.
SHOULD BE 1 1/2 INCHES FROM
--------
SKIP TO 5.
SHOULD BE 2 INCHES FROM
- - --- ---
SKIP TO b.
SHOULD BE 2 1/2 INCHES
- - - ------
SKIP TO 7.
SHOULD BE
- - - ------
SKIP TO 8.
SHOULD BE 3 1/2 INCHES FROM
---- -----
SKIP TO 9.
SHOULD BE 1/2 INCH FROM
6
11
%
T
Skip stops
used in this
program
T1
I
I
I
-
16
I
19
1
2
J
I
I
,
2
Program Level 9
*****.
*****.
..........................
.
;t"' ............. .
FRO~
*****.
*****.
------
SHOULD BE 4 INCHES FROM
..................
"""-...,JII.. .............
(Jetter)
21
26
28
T3
I
3
4T
I
4
5
I
5
I
I
I
34
31
o
I
I
I
6
7
I
7
End-of-Forms
36
I
J8
I
8
41
I
9T
I
9
46
I
T
51
I
T
56
61
T
T
I
lEe
I
826065
Date 8/1/75
r.w
Column
10
20
30
40
I
I
I
I
NY1 S5ACRY2S60ACRY3S60ACRY4S60ACRY5S60ACRY6S
60ACRY7S60ACRY8S60ACRY9S60ACRY20C66X14ACSQ
I
I
I
50
60
70
80
N
No op.
Y
Skip first character.
1S
Skip to number preceding S.
5A
Load 5 characters into the print
buffer.
C
Print, carriage return, line feed.
R
Read next record.
20C
20 line feeds.
66X
Load 66 blanks into the print
buffer.
14A
Load 14 characters into the print
buffer.
Q
End of program.
*****.
INCHES FROM
:::.-----
Skip Stops in Program Storage A
Col.~1
3
*****.
I
66
I
TE
71
76
81
T
T
T
I
I
I
86
I
T
·91
96
T
T
I
I
101
I
T
PN 1619570
106 111
I
I
T
T
,
116 121
126
T
T
3741 ML
I
T
I
8-26.8.1
826065
8/1/75
This page intentionally left blank.
"\.\\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
PN 1619571
8-26.8.2
3715 PRINTER LINE CONTROL
EXERCISER PROGRAM
The printer control program causes the print carriage assembly to duplicate movements and conditions equivalent to any customer application
program, including Model 3 and 4 operations. It
may be used in problem determination of carriage
control vertical forms movement related symptoms.
- Turn AUTO REC ADV switch to OFF.
Insert any valid diskette. ,
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC (clears current buffer)
Key in N2S128A2L
N
No op. This starts the printer control program.
2S
Skip to number preceding S (vertical skip control). A character 2
preceding the S means that the program will search out, in program
level A, the line to print on. If a
line is to be printed on line 1 (top
of page), substitute a 1S for the 2S.
128A
Load 128 characters into the print
buffer. This can be any number
from 1 to 128.
2L
Link to program level 2.
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
This loads the first section of the printer control program into program buffer
1 and clears the current buffer for further entries.
Key in N128F4A4FC1 L
No op. This starts this program.
N
Reverse bypass to character 1. The
128F
number of characters to be reverse
bypassed (1 - 128) must agree with
the same number keyed in the previous program. Reverse bypass positions or repeats the same characters
over and over by moving back an
output pointer.
4A
Load 4 characters into the print
buffer. (See explanation under 4F.)
Reverse bypass to character 1. 4A4F
4F
tells the program to print 4 more
characters for 132 print positions.
If it were 3A3F, 131 characters
would print; 2A2F, 130 characters;
e!p. Insert this field only if the
number of characters to be printed
is more than 128.
C
Print, carrier return, and line feed.
This prints out the line of data.
1L
Link back to program level 1.
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
2
This loads the second part of the printer control program to program buffer 2 and clears
the current buffer for further entries.
Key in the following:
Position
Data
1
5
14
29
30
31
50
67
2
E
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
A
This loads the vertical forms control program
into program buffer A and clears the current
buffer
for further entries.
I
Key in any data to be printed.
Press: REC BKSP
The num;ber of characters should be equal to
the print line length (in this case, 128 charac- .
ters).
- Press: SEL PROG
1
This indicates which program level to start with
when printing begins.
- Press: FUNCT SEL upper
PRINT REC
This starts printing. If more than one print line
is desired, turn the AUTO REC ADV switch to
ON and press REC ADV. If a pause is desired,
turn the AUTO REC ADV switch to OFF.
2
2
2
2
2
2
E
Printer will use currently selected
program.
Vertical control stop. Each column
in which the 2 is entered corresponds to a line on the printed form.
If a line is to be printed on Jine 1
(top of page), substitute 1 for each
2 above.
End of vertical forms. This character is placed one position beyond
the number of lines per page on each
form.
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619406
3741 M L
8-26.9
EC 823146
9/15/74
RFT PROCEDURES AND TDAT
(BSCA/EBSCA)
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619407
8-26.10
Organizational Flowchart
Please read these instructions carefully before proceeding with the RFTs.
If you are experiencing problems on your machine,
it is very important to use the MAPs prior to running the RFTs. The MAPs will have you run the
RFTs at the proper time. Use MAP 7-7 for both
BSCA and EBSCA.
The procedures in this section allow you to do the
following:
Poi nt-to-poi nt checkout (BSCA/E BSCA)
- Multipoint checkout (EBSCA)
The above checkouts can be done with the following options:
Using existing dial up or modem.
Using 1200 TDAT to replace the line adapter
or 3872.
Using 1200 TDAT as an acoustic coupler to
allow running with your line adapter (under
cover modem) to eliminate the line coupler
and local loop.
Recording a test tape using 1200 TDAT.
Checking offline using a prerecorded test tape
and 1200 TDAT.
Using System/3 LCA (1200 TDAT cannot be
used).
The flowchart shows the organization of the RFT
procedures and options available.
No
No
If you eliminate line
adapter, you will need
cable 2455573
coupler cable
Set up TDAT
RFT procedure 1 BSCAI
EBSCA basic point-topoint page 8-26.12
RFT procedure 2 EBSCA
point-to-point with insert
constants, deblock, print
unattended page 8·26.14
RFT procedure 3 EBSCA
basic multipoint page
8-26.16
RFT procedure 4 EBSCA
multipoint, insert con-,
stants, deblock, print unattended page 8-28
Start of R FT and TDAT Procedures
Locate a CPU with 'request for test' (R FT) responder capability.
Yes
Do you wish to use a 1200 TDAT?
Y N
Go to entry point A on next page.
I-
Do you have a 1200 bps line adapter or a 3872?
Y N
Eliminate the external modem to use the
1200 TDAT.
Run test
-
Disconnect the 3741 modem cable from the
modem and plug it into one of the three EIA
connectors on the TDAT.
- Go to entry point B on this page.
Do you wish to eliminate the 1200 bps line
adapter or the 3872?
Y N
- If using a 3872, it is best to set the mode
switch to 1200 NON/SW.
Do you have non-switched (leased) line operation?
Y N
Check with your local management to see
if it is permissible to disconnect the eight
wires of the modem cable going to the
data coupler.
Is it permissible to disconnect the eight
wires?
Y N
Make up a modified cable using the
procedure on page 8-36.2; then return
here.
- Go to entry point B on this page.
5?
Do you have a line adapter (internal modem)?
Y N
You have a 3872.
- Disconnect the 3741 modem cable at the
modem and plug it into one,of the three EIA
connectors on the TDAT.
- Go to entry point B.
-
}f
Make sure that the jumpers are plugged as follows (16-4): '
4 (BSCA line contro\) jumper to C (upper)
Plug jumper 4 to lower if using a switched
1200 bps line adapter or a switched 3872.
6 (BSCA facility) jumper to F (lower)
-
If the 3741 has the multipoint feature and you
wish to run R FT 1 or R FT 2, make the following changes:
Disconnect the line adapter (internal modem)
cable at socket 1-N on the feature half planar
rJ·
- You will need cable 2455573 to complete this
procedure. (It is available through the branch
office.)
- Connect the SLT connector of cable 2455573
to socket 1-N of the feature half planar. Connect the other end of the cable into one of the
three EIA connectors on the TDAT.
I
ENTRY POI NT B
Remove the multipoint card.
Change jumper 8 to NO (upper) on feature
half planar.
- Set the TDAT switches as follows:
Switch
SD-RD
MonItor
Simulate
Speed
Tape I/O
Clock
I
Are you communicating through a modem?
Y N
'
~ Remove the syncdock card III
.
-
.
Data
Coupler
m.
/BSCAcable
socket 1-N
ONE
Note: Set switch to OFF if
Modem
Mode
Disconnect the eight wires from the data
coupler.
- Use a hemostat to attaqh,!he DA (yellow)
cable lead to the CCT (brown) cable lead.
- Attach one CE meter lead to the DT
(white) cable lead, and plug the other end
of the lead into one of the holes on the
wide side of the 4-prong jack-plug in the
TDAT
Attach another CE meter lead to the DR
(black) cable lead and plug the other end
of the lead into the other hole on the wide
side of the 4-prong jadk-plug in the TDAT
Setting
SO
OFF
DS
1200
RCV
I
communicating through your
modem.
2W
0-1200
Note: Set switch to MODEM
if communicating through
your modem.
NRM
OFF
Connect the TDAT to the power source.
Power up the TDAT.
ENTRY POINT A
I
Now you must select the RFT to be run:
ID·
R FT 1, page 8-26.12
BSCA/E BSCA basic
point-to-point checkout.
Go to entry point B on this page.
RFT 2, page 8-26.14
EBSCA basic point-topoint checkout. It also tests receive data,
insert constants, deblocking, and unattended
printing.
-
Disconnect the 4-prong jack-plug at the wall
and plug it into the jack-plug on the TDAT.
Plug CTS delay to maximum.
Go to entry point B on this page.
R FT 3, page 8-26.16
point checkout.
Ii Terminal ID or
multipoint card
iii
Sync cloc,k card
lEe
826065
8/1/75
EBSCA basic multi\
RFT 4, page 8-28
EBSCA multipoint
checkout with receive data, insert constants,
deblocking, and unattended printing.
PN 1619572
8-26.11
lEe 826065
PN 1619573
8-26.12
8/1/75
RFT (Request for Test) Procedure 1
;>f
This procedure is for BSCA/EBSCA basic pointto-point checkout.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
ENTER
%
XX = Two numeric characters to define
the test. TEST 14 is recommended.
14 Receive text, EBCDIC
01 Transmit/receive
15 Receive all zeros, weak
pattern
16 Receive alternate zeros
and ones
20 Receive transparent text
(80 bytes)
21 Receive transparent text
(120 bytes)
YY = Two numeric characters to
define the number of times the
data is to be received. 50 is
recommended.
Hold down NUM SHI FT and press 0 (number).
CAUTION
. This procedure may alter data on the diskette.
- Check that data set label 00008 is as follows:
1
4
HIDIR 11
13
6·
RJFITJ
I
1 J J
111J1111
Data Set Name
HDR1
27
23
J j1J 21 8
Record
Length
29
33
°1 11 ojo11
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
5J 4J 01 216
End
of Extent
J
- To modify data set label 00008:
Key in the data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
Press: REC ADV.
- Check that data set label 00009 is as follows:
1
4
HIDIR 11
HDRl
13
6
TIElslTI
1 J J
j1111111
Data Set Name
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
Are you transmitting transparent data? (Transparent data allows transmission of all 256 characters.)
Y N
Go to entry paint D, on this page.
I-
-
27
23
1 J 1J218
Record
Length
29
33
515jo1011
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
713101216
End
of Extent
I
Press: HEX
1 (number)
o (number)
ENTRY POINT D
I
I
- Press: HEX
o (number)
2
- To modify data set label 00009:
Key in the data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
- R EC B KSP to data set label 00008.
~e following steps enter the R FT message.
A
Enter //NNN3741
(NNN = Any identifying number expected by
a supporting CPU.)
If the test is 01, enter the alphabet. (Any data
could be entered.)
~
Observe the display; it should show one of the
following RFT messages:
%14500!tIlNNN3741
(for recommended test format)
%01150itIINNN3741ABC ... etc
(01 test, nontransparent)
.
%01150-HitIINNN3741ABC.
etc
(01 test, transparent - data stream may
contain HEX characters)
Press: REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
If you entered this procedure from a MAP,
return to that MAP.
- If you started this procedure from page 8-26.10,
continue this procedure.
- Are you communicating with a System/3 with
LCA?
*l ...
I-
Y N
Go to page 8-30.
Go to page 8-32.
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619574
3741 ML
8-26.13
I
EC 826065
PN 1619575
fl
R FT (Request for Test) Procedure 2
This procedure is only for EBSCA basic point-topoint checkout. It also tests receive data, insert
constants, deblocking, and print unattended.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
-
REC BKSP to data set label 00008.
The following steps insert constants.
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Enter
»»»»>~NUMBER~>~ON-LlNE~TEST~
~t
9>'s
blank
CAUTION
This procedure may alter data on the diskette.
-
8-26.14
8/1/75
Check that data set label 00008 is as follows:
Pad blanks
to end of record
J
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
8
1
4
HIDIR 11
13
6
RiF iTI
HDR1
1 1 1 1
23
I
1 1
11
1 1 1
I
Data Set Name
27
101 2 19
Record
Length
29
33
01 1 jolol1
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
514101 2 16
End
of Extent
J
- To modify data set label 00008:
Key in data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
- Check that data was correctly entered.
- Press: REC ADV.
Check that data set label 00009 is as follows:
1
4
HiDiR11
HDR1
2
13
6
T1EIsiTI
1 1 1
23
1 1 1 1
Data Set Name
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
- The following steps enter the R FT message.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
%
Press: 0 (number)
1 (number)
(01 = transmit/receive test)
Press:
YY = Two numeric characters to define the
number of times the data is to be received. (50 is recommended.)
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press 0 (number).
Press: HEX
o (number)
J
1 1 1
27
1 101219
Record
Length
29
33
515Jol011
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
713101216
End
of Extent
J
Enter //NNN3741 A
(NNN = Any identifying number expected by a
supporting CPU.)
- Press: HEX
1 (number)
E
Enter
TESTING~k'>B
-
Press: HEX
1 (number)
E
Observe the display; it should show the following RFT message:
%01500
it //NNN3741AitTESTINGk'>k'>B~
Press: REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
- To modify data set label 00009:
Key in the data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
A
~
-
If you entered this procedure from a MAP, return to that MAP.
- If you started this procedure from page 8-26.10,
continue this procedure.
- Are you communicating with a System/3 with
LeA?
Y N
- Go to page 8-30.
- Go to page 8-32.
~--.I
--~
'lEe
826065
8/1175
PN 1619576
3741 ML
8-26.15
lEe 826065
PN 1619577
8/1/75
R FT (Request for Test) Procedure 3
~
This procedure is for EBSCA basic multipoint
checkout.
To modify data set label 00009:
Key in the data as shown above.
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
- REC BKSP to data set label 00008.
- The following enters the RFT message:
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
%
Note: If the 3741 has multipoint but you wish to
run without it, remove the multipoint card from
sockets 1-Y and 1-Z on the feature half planar
(504) and move jumper 8 to the NO position (up)
(16-4). Then use R FT 1 (8-26.12) or R FT 2
(8-26.14).
It may be necessary to change the poll i ng address
if the testing is with a different CPU. (For example, you may have to change your polling address
character to EBCDIC upper case A (HEX C1) if
the CPU only polls AA in RFT responder (or
OLT) mode.) See 759.
XX = Two numeric characters to define
the test. TEST 14 is recommended.
14 Receive test, EBCDIC
01 Transmit/receive
15 Receive all zeros, weak
pattern
16 Receive alternate zeros and
ones
20 Receive transparent text
(80 bytes)
21 Receive transparent text
(120 bytes)
YY = Two numeric characters to define
the number of times the data is to
be received. 50 is recommended.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press 2.
Enter the character selection address of the
3741. (H EX 81 is used here as an examplt:.)
Press: HEX
Power up.
Load a diskette.
CAUTION
This procedure may alter data on the diskette.
-
Check that data set label 00008 is as follows:
1
4
H1DIRI1
13
6
RIF1Tl
HDR1
j
1 1 1
23
JJ
j
1 1 1 1
J
Data Set Name
27
1 11 1218
Record
Length
29
33
0\
011 J
011
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
514101216
End
of Extent
J
8
1 (number)
HEX
End of Data
8
1 (number)
- To modify data set label 00008:
Key in the data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
Press: REC ADV.
- Check that data set label 00009 is as follows:
1
4
13
6
TIElslTl 1
HDR1
11
Data Set Name
23
I
8-26.16
I 1 -'
1
27
29
33
35
39
1 1 1
Record
Length
Beginning
of Extent
End
of Extent
End of Data
A
~
Are you transmitting transparent data? (Trans·
parent data allows transmission of all 256
characters.)
Y N
Go·to entry point E on this page.
I-
Press: HEX
1 (number)
o (number)
I
ENTRY POINT E
-
I
Press: HEX
o (number)
2
Enter the following data:
IINNN3741
(NNN = Any identifying number expected
by a supporting CPU.)
If you selected test 01, enter the alphabet.
(Any data may be entered.)
Observe the display, it should show one of
the following RFT messages:
%14502BBtt IINNN3741
(recommended test)
%01502BOO IINNN3741ABC ... etc
(01 test, nontransparent)
%01502flEtt!tIINNN3741ABCJS- ... etc
(01 test, transparent"':' HEX within the data
stream)
Press: REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
If you entered this procedure from a MAP,
return to that MAP.
If you started this procedure from page
8·26.10, continue this procedure.
\
Are you communicating with a System/3 LCA?
Y N
I-
Go to page 8·30.
Go to page 8·32.
EC
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619035
3741 ML
8-27
EC 823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619036
8-28
R FT (Request for Test) Procedure 4
This procedure is for EBSCA multipoint checkout with receive data, insert constants, deblocking, and print unattended.
JP
Check that data set label 00009 is as follows:
1
4
Note: If the 3741 has multipoint, but you wish
to run without it, remove the multipoint card
from socket 1-Y and 1-Z on the featu re half
planar (504) and move jumper 8 to the NO position (up) (16-4). Then use RFT 1 (8-26.12) or
RFT 2 (8-26.14).
13
6
HlolR 11
TIElslTI
HDR1
1 1 1
27
23
1 1 1 1 1 11
1
Data Set Name
1 101311
Record
Length
29
33
5\5101011
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
713101216
End
of Extent
1
End of Data'
It may be necessary to change the machine polling
address if you are testing with a different CPU.
(For example, you may have to change the polling
address toEBCDIC upper case A (HEX C1) if the
CPU polls only AA in RFT responder'(or OL T)
mode.) See 759.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
CAUTION
This procedure may alter data on the diskette.
- To modify data set label 00009:
Key in the data as shown above.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
~
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
- REC BKSP to data set label 00008.
- The following steps insert constants.
Press· FUNCT SEL lower
~
~t
9>'s
blank
. DELETE REC
- Check that data set label 00008 is as follows:
1
4
H\oJ R1 1
13
6
RIFITI
I J
11
23
I
I
\
I 1111
Data Set Name
HDR1
- To modify data set label 00008:
Key in the data as shown above;
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
Check that the data was correctly entered.
- Press REC ADV.
I
27
1013\1
Record
Length
33
1
0
01 1 1011
Beginning
of Extent
29
35
39
514101 2 1 6
End
of Extent
Enter:
»»»»>tbNUMBERI6>160N-LlNEI6TEST~.
J
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
8
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
- The following steps enter the RFT message.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
%
o (number)
1 (number)
(01 = Transmit/receive test)
- Press:
YY = two numeric characters to define the
number of times the data is to be received. 50 is recommended.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press 2.
Enter the 2-character selection address of
your 3741. (HEX 81 is used here as an
example.)
- Press: HEX
8
1 (number)
HEX
8
1 (number)
- Press: HEX
o (number)
2
A
1
Pad blanks
to end of record
~
.
- Enter the following data:
//NNN3741A
(NNN = Any identifying number expected by
a supporting CPU.)
- Press: HEX
1 (number)
E
Enter the following data:
TESTI NGI6~B
- Press: HEX
1 (number)
E
- Observe the display; it should show the
fOliowinijFT message:
%01502
//NNN3741" TESTINGI6~B
- Press: R ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
If you entered this procedure from a MAP,
return to that MAP.
- If you entered this procedure from page
8-26.10, continue with this procedure.
it
#
Are you communicating to a System/3 with LCA?
I-
Y N
Go to page 8·30.
- Go to page 8-32.
EC 823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619037
3741 ML
8-29
EC 823146
9/15/74
Are you using a prerecorded test tape and TDAT?
(offline mode)
Y N
If you want to record a test tape, place the
cassette in the recorder and rewind to the
beginning of the tape.
To place the 3741 in transmit mode:
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
COMM
If you are running R FT 1 or 3:
Press: M (M bids for the line)
Tor P (P if transparent data is to
be transmitted)
If you are running R FT 2 or 4:
With Unattended
Without Printing
Printing
Set AUTO R EC ADV
Press M
SW
Press FUNCT SEL upper
B
PRINTTO EOD
M
B
(M bids for the line)
If the 3741 is in TB or PB mode, press
REC ADVo
Is the 3741 in T, P, or B mode?
Y N
I-
Go to MAP 7-7.
826065
8/1/75
PN
1619038
8-30
- Set the TDAT coupler switch to ON.
- If you have a switched line and are running
through your modem:
I
Momentarily touch the R I (violet) cable
lead to DA (yellow)/CCT (brown) cable
leads (these are shorted by the hemostats);
or, if you have made up your own cable,
momentarily press the microswitch button on the 4-prong jack-plug.
ENTRY POINT C
I
Did the job run to completion?
,(% C displayed)
Y N
- Stop the recorder if making a test tape.
- Remove the handset and tal k with someone at the remote end to define the
problem.
Does the remote end have problems?
Y N
Check your setup instructions.
Retry the procedure. If the problems persists after two tries, use
MAP 7-7.
m
When you go to data, the error logout line
at the bottom of the display will show:
Are you using a 1200 TDAT?
Y N
- Call remote end.
- Go to data after the steady tone (answer
tone) by hanging up the handset
- Go to entry point C on this page.
Mode depends on operation \
\
II
Note: Read through the next four steps to
acquaint yourself with the procedure, you
will have only 20 seconds to complete it.
-
Call the remote end. After you get a steady
tone, go to data by placing the handset
securely on the acoustic coupler cups.
Observe the cord-side orientation by the
cups (i .
If you are recording a test tape, place the
recorder in record mode by pressing and
holding the red R EC button while pushing
the center switch forward.
Data terminal ready
Data set ready
Request to sen d
Clear to send
. *
CRC checks in receive
NAKs received in transmit *
Two second f Ime-outs*
Three second time-outs*
1
1
I
0
0
I
Note: 1 indicates on; 0 indicates off.
* Three-position decimal counter.
The cursor moves from the bottom right corner,
across the screen (one line at a time) to the
upper left corner.
001
004
000
001
- Hang up and wait until the remote end is
ready to communicate again; then retry
the procedure.
- The test has run to completion indicating
the 3741 is OK.
- Stop the recorder if making a test tape.
You should now have a good test tape
to use in a service situation.
- If you are using the TDAT:
• Hang up the telephone handset.
• Power down the 3741.
• Reconnect the 3741 modem cable.
Power down the 3741.
Reinstall the multipoint card, if it was
removed.
Reinstall the sync clock card, if it was
removed.
Return the jumpers to their original positions on the feature half planar.
- The 3741 is OK. If the customer still has
problems, it is probably due to:
• Incorrect setup or procedures.
• Incorrect remote end setup or programming.
• Communications facilities, modems, or
lines.
~d
(%
the iob run to completion?
C displayed)
Y N
- Check your setup instructions and retry
the procedure. If it fails after 2 tries,
make a new test tape and try this procedure again. If it still fails, go to MAP 7-7.
- The test has run to completion indicating the
3741 is OK.
- Stop the tape recorder.
Hold down NUM SHIFT while pressing RESET.
Power down the 3741.
Reconnect the 3741 modem cable.
Reinstall the sync clock card if it was removed.
Return jumpers to original positions on the
feature half planar.
- Reinstall the multipoint card if it was removed.
- The 3741 is OK. If the customer still has
problems, it is probably due to:
• Incorrect setup procedures.
• Incorrect remote setup or programming.
• Communications facilities, modems, or
lines.
Place a recorded test tape in the tape player.
Rewind to start of tape.
- To place the 3741 in communications mode:
- Press: FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
If you are using unattended printing:
• Put AUTO REC ADV switch to ON
• Press: FUNCT SEL lower
PRINTTO EOO
Press: R (receive mode)
Start the tape player in playback mode.
EC
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619039
3741 ML
8-31
EC
- To place the 3741 in transmit mode:
Press: FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
M
T or P (P if transparent data is to be
transmitted)
If the 3741 is in TB or PB mode:
Press: REC ADV.
Is the 3741 in Tor P mode?
Y N
1-
Go to MAP 7-7.
- The 3741 is now readytp communicate.
- Set up the System/3, ref~r to System/3
documentation for diagnostic aDA R FT
procedure. Also refer to 729 in this
manual.
Did the job run to completion?
(% C displayed)
Y N
Check your setup instructions. Retry
the procedure; if it still fails, use
MAP 7-7.
- The test has run to completion indicating
the 3741 is OK.
823146
826065
9/15/74,
8/1/75
PN 1619040
8-32
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS EXPANDED
COMMUNICATIONS (EBSCA) TEST
PROCEDURES
Test
Procedures
Number
Test 1 - Transmit Continuous Character
Test
Test 1 is used to transmit a continuous character
or sequence of characters.
Transmit Continuous Character
To set up the test:
2
Cable wrap
3
Modem wrap (18M 3872
Modem)
-
4
Receive and Display Characters
5
Display Terminal I D or Multipoint Address
Enter 1 followed by 1 to 14 data characters
to be transmitted.
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
After the initial
P P P S S
AAAYY
D D D N N
the adapter sends continuous hex '00' characters.
This is a solid logical 0 level (positive voltage) on
transmit data pin 1-N-B12, and a 2100-Hz frequency on the integrated modem output.
To send an all ones signal (mark):
Enter 1
Press HEX
F
6
Display Transmit Buffers
The machine monitors for 'data set ready'. When
it detects 'data set ready' is on, it raises 'requestto-send' and waits for 'clear-to-send'. After
'clear-to-send' comes on, the adapter sends an
initial
P P P S S
-A A A Y Y
D D D N N
followed by the entered data characters. It repeats the characters without requiring any
response, until the RESET key is pressed. When
setting up the test, the cursor must be past
column 2, or an H error wi" be posted.
F
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
After sending initial PADs and SYNs, the
adapter sends continuous hex 'FF' characters.
This is a solid logical 1 level (negative voltage
on transmit-data pin l-N-B12, and a 1300·Hz
frequency on the integrated modem ou~put.
By entering hex 'AA' or '55' instead of '00' or
'FF', the adapter sends alternating ones-zeros
down the line.
Possible applications include:
- Sending Test Patterns
- Sending Test Sequences
Sending Test Patterns
Test patterns can be set up for probing the transmit data line or integrated modem transmit line
frequencies.
To send an a" zeros signal (space):
Enter 1
Press HEX
o
o
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
EC
Date
823146
9/15174
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619041
3741 ML
8-33
EC
Date
823146
9/15/74
826065
PN 1619042
8/1/75
8-34
Sending Test Sequences
This test can be used to send a continuous line
bid sequence,
P P P SSE P P
AAAYYNAA
DDDNNODD
Enter 1
Press the following three times:
HEX
'A
A
Press the following two times:
HEX
3
2
Press HEX
2
o
Press the following two times:
HEX
F
F
The display should show:
Press FUNCT SEL upper'
COMM
W
The adapter sends this sequence continuously.
A remote device could be checked to see that it
receives the sequence, establishes character
phase, recognizes ENO, and attempts to respond.
If the remote terminal requires terminal 10, that
could be entered between the SYN and ENO
characters.
This test can be used in conjunction with test
4 to display received characters.
Enter 1
Press the following three times:
HEX
A
A
Press the following two times:
HEX
Test 2 - Cable Wrap
The cable wrap test requires that the modem or
BSCA cable be removed from the modem and
the appropriate wrap adapter be installed.
To initiate the test:
Enter 2
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
3
2
Press A
B
C
The adapter generates three tests:
1.
It generates a serial-by-bit test sequence
on transmit data line which is wrapped
back to receive data. This received data
is shifted into the BSCA SERDES and
establishes character sync, character buffering, and CRC generation on receive.
2.
It then loads a sequence of bytes, as in
transmit mode, and monitors the transmit
data line to ensure that the correct serial
bits are transmitted. This checks the
character buffering, CRC generation, and
SERDES in a transmit operation.
3.
If the multipoint feature is installed, it
generates a serial-by-bit selection sequence. When the machine adapter correctly decodes the selection, it causes
the audible alarm to sound.
o
E
F
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
If the remote end '3741 was set up in test 4, the
receiving station shouid be displaying the A, B,
C, 0, E, F characters. '
A successful test results in posting WC and (if
multipoint is installed) sounding the audible
alarm. The audible alarm automatically turns
off after about five seconds.
If WI is posted, or W is still displayed after two
seconds, or WC is posted but the alarm fails to
sound or turn off (if multipoint is installed), a
hardware failure is indicated.
Test 3 - Modem Wrap
This test causes a local wrap on an IBM 3872
modem.
To initiate the test:
Enter 3
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
The adapter raises the '+test' line to the 3872
to make a local loop. The adapter then generates a logic 1 level for one minute and monitors
the output (received data). It then generates
a' logic 0 level and monitors the output. If the
machine posts a WI and returns to index (X R)
mode in less than 1-1/2 minutes, or posts a W
error that remains after 2-1/2 minutes, an error
exists. If the test is completed without error,
it automatically returns to read index (X R)
mode in about 2 minutes. This test checks the
transmit, scrambler, de-scrambler, and receives
functions in the 3872. When the test is in progress, the OPE RATE light comes on in the 3872.
This test can be used to receive and display
data with test 1 being used on the remote
end as described in Test 1.
It can also be used to check IDs or addresses
sent from the remote end. If the remote end
sends
PPSS
EP
A A Y Y ABCO N A
DON N
Q 0,
the test will display ABCO
is the address or 10.
Note: The test generates no responses to this
line bid.
If character sync is first established, this test
displays, with the following exceptions, all
data on the line:
1.
The initial
P P S S
AAYY
DON N
required to establish character phase is
not displayed.
2.
Any characters after an ENQ (hex '20')
are not displayed. An ENQ causes the
adapter to abort character sync so that
another
To initiate this test:
Enter 4
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
P P S S
AAYY
DON N
sequence is required before additional
characters are displayed.
W
After 'data set ready' comes on, the adapter
waits for characters sync to be established.
(received
P P S S
AAYY
DON N)
where ABCO
In this way the 10 or address can be checked.
Test 4 - Receive and Display Characters
This'test provides the capability to display characters received at the communications adapter
interface.
it
3.
A CRe checking sequence is started by receiving
a STX, SOH, or OLE-STX character and is ended
by receiving ETB, ETX, OLE-ETB or OLE-ETX
characters. 'The two bytes following the ending
characters are assumed to be the block check
characters (BCC). The adapter compares its
computed BeC to the two bytes received. If
they compare, it displays a single hex '00' byte
in place of the BCes. If they do not compare,
the adapter displays a single, hex 'F F' character.
Note: The Bees are never displayed and
character phase is aborted after the BCCs.
4.
Once character synchronization is established, all characters received in that transmission will be displayed correctly. If
another transmission is received, it may
not be displayed correctly because the test
does not reset character synchronization
between transmissions. For example, if
a remote station sent an EOT sequence,
stopped transmitting, and then sent a
poll sequence, only the EOT sequence
would be displayed correctlv because the
test did not reset character synchronization
between transmissions. However, if the remote station sent the EDT and poll sequences
as one transmission, it would all be displayed
correctly. In test 4, a continuous sequence
should be sent and received.
Pressing any key, except RESET, during the
test causes the test to pause such that the particular characters being displayed can be
examined. Pressing that key again causes the
test to continue and subsequent received
characters are displayed. Pressing the RESET
key causes the test to terminate and return to
read index mode.
Characters after a CRC checking sequence
are not displayed, character phase is
aborted, and another
P P S S
AAYY
DON N
sequence is required.
After character sync, all subsequent received
characters are displayed. Pressing any key,
except RESET, during the test causes the
test to stop so that particular characters can
be examined. Pressing that key again allows
the test to continue. Pressing the RESET
key causes the test to terminate.
EC
Date
823146
9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619043
3741 ML
8-35
EC
Date
Test 5 - Display Terminal I D or Multipoint
Address Characters
This test allows the machine to display the terminal I D characters jumpered on the terminal
I D feature card or the multipoint address card.
- To perform the test:
Enter 5
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
The characters will be displayed.
If multipoint is installed (multipoint jumper on
installed position and address card installed), the
test displays the poll address character jumpered
on the card, followed by the corresponding
select character. Note that in normal multipoint
addressing, the character (poll or select) must be
sent twice.
If the terminal I D feature is installed, the test
displays the three I D characters jumpered on
the feature card. For example, if lower case
abc were jumpered on the card, the hex chara'eter representation would be displayed. Also,
the complete I D for the machine would be vabc.
The lower cas'e v denotes the terminal as a
3741 with the remaining three characters
identifying the particular 3741.
If neither feature is installed, the test should
display three hex '00' characters denoting no
address characters for the machine.
Pressing the RESET key causes a return to read
index mode.
823146
9/15/74
826065
PN 1619044
8/1/75
8-36
Test 6 - Display Transmit Buffers
Column
This test provides the capability to check the
transmit selected records, transmit selected
fields, and record blocking functions.
63
123456789 1 0
Record 1 AAAAA, .......\AAAAAAAAAAA
Record 2 BBBBBB ....... BBBBBBBBBBBBB
Record 3 AAAAA. ...... AAAAAAAAAAAA
Record 4 BBBBB' ....... BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
Record 5 AAAA ....... l.AAAAAAAAAAAA \
Record 6 BBBBL ....... I3BBBBBBBBBBBBB
Record 7 AAAAI-.........\AAAAAAAAAAA
Record 8 BBBBBBI ....... :BBBBBBBBBBBB
Record 9 AAAAA ....... \AAAAAAAAAAA
(columns 10 through 63 are A's, B's etc.)
The basic operator procedures are:
- Set up a transmit selected records or
transmit selected fields program in
format buffer 8.
Position the diskette at the desired data set
either in read index or update mode.
Enter 6 in column 1 of the current record
buffer.
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETTO INDEX
This data is used for both example 1 and 2.
The machine reads until the first 512-byte
buffer is filled or until all the records in the
data set are read. The format buffers (2, 1, 4,
3) can then be displayed using CE mode (display buffers) or by using select program mode .. Note that
only the first 512-byte buffer is filled whereas
two 512-byte buffers are used in communications. The following examples illustrate the
detailed operation of the test.
Example 1
Using transmit selected records program and
displaying using select program mode:
- Power off, wait 5 seconds, and power on (to
clear buffers).
- Set up a test data set whose record length
is 63 and enter the following 9 records using
the enter function. Refer to page 9-4 to find
how to create or modify data set labels.
-
Perform the following sequence to enter
the transmit selected records program:
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE RECORD
Enter the following mask 1
9 10 11
63
========= A =============1 f=======
where columns 1 through 9 are =, column 10 is
A, and columns 11 through 63 are =.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
8
FUNCT SEL lower
RET TO INDEX
Record backspace or advance to the test
data set.
Enter 6.
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
The machine reads the test records comparing
each to the mask. Those that match are written
to the 512-byte buffer.
After the test goes to completion (returns to read
index mode), use the following sequence to display the data in select program mode.
Press SEL PROG
2
FUNCT SEL lower
DISPLAY PROG
This display shows record 1 followed by an IRS
(hex '1 E') character followed by record 3 and
an I RS in format buffer 2.
Note: Record 2 was not read into buffer and
would not be transmitted because it did not
match the program in buffer 8.
Press SEL PROG
1
This test demonstrates that only those records
that match the mask (contain an A in column 10)
are buffered up to be transmitted.
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press C
(should be in CER mode).
Release NUM SHIFT.
Hold down NUM SH I FT and press I (letter).
Press the space bar six times.
Example 2
Using transmit selected fields program and displaying using CE mode (display buffers).
The machine is now displaying buffer 2.
The display shows the 1 and A's from record
1 followed by an IRS (hex '1 E'), followed by
the 2 and B's from record 2 and an I RS, followed
by the 3 from record 3.
-
Power off, wait 5 seconds, and power on (to
clear buffers).
- Use data set and data previously entered in
example 1.
- Perform the following sequence to enter the
transmit selected fields program:
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Enter the following mask:-
Note: Using this mode only the first 120 of the
128 bytes of the buffer can be displayed.
-
Press the space bar.
The machine is now displaying buffer 1.
The display shows record 5 followed by an IRS,
followed by record 7 and an I RS in format buffer
1.
Press SEL PROG
4
This causes the next 128-byte section of the buffer
(format buffer 4) to be displayed containing record 9, the last record-of the data set. The
remainder i,s empty (contains N's).
Press SELPROG
3
This causes the last 128-byte section (format
buffer 3) to be displayed which is emptY (N's).
Note: Because the buffers are being displayed
as format buffers, certain data such as numerics
cannot be the first character in the buffer.
Attempting to display these will result in an
error.
In this case the alternative method of displaying
the buffers described in the next example should
be used.
'
67
"""
II
63
II 1 , ' , "
where 1 through 6 are apostrophes and 7
through 63 are quotes.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
8
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETTO INDEX
Record advance or record backspace to the
test data set.
Enter 6
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
W
-
Press the space bar.
The machine is now displaying buffer 4.
The display shows the remaining A's from
record 5 followed by an I RS, the 6 and ~'s from
record 6 followed by an I RS, and the 7 and a
portion of the A's from record 7.
-
The machine reads the test records checking
each against the mask. The masked-off positions
are written in the 512-byte buffer.
Press the space bar.
The machine is now displaying buffer 3.
The display shows the remaining A's from
record 7 followed by an I RS, and the 8 and B's
from record 8 followed by an I RS and N's indicating no data. The remaining blank positions
were not sufficient (48 positions) to hold the
portion of record 9 and an IRS (57 characters).
After the test goes to completion (returns to
read index mode), use the following sequence
to display the data using CE mode (dispiay
buffers).
This test demonstrates that only those portions
of the records required by the mask are loaded
to the buffer to be transmitted.
EC
Date
II
The display shows the A's from record 3
followed by an I RS, followed by the 4 and B's
from record 4 and an I RS, followed by the 5
and A's from record 5.
II II
823146
825853
9/15/74 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN
1619408
3741 ML 8-36.1
EC
823146
Date 9/15174
This test may be used on any data, using any valid
transmit selected records or transmit selected fields
program to verify the masking and buffering that
is performed. Keep in mind, however, that not all
data can be displayed using select program mode;
and, if CE mode (display buffers) is used, only the
first 120 bytes of each 128-byte buffer can be
displayed.
825853
826065
11/15/74
811/75
PN 1619409
Cable Wires Used
Color
Data tip (DT)
Data ring (DR)
Data modem ready (DA)
Coupler cut through (CCT)
Ring indicator (R I)
White
Black
Yellow
Brown
Violet
ONLINE 1200 bps LINE ADAPTER
CABLE TEST
The following is a procedure for modifying the
1200 bps line adapter cable to:
1.
Adapt the cable to use the 1200 TDAT
acoustic coupler section.
2.
Run the 3741 Model 2 to a CPU with R FT
capabil ity.
3.
Run the 1200 TDAT, using the modified
cable, to check out the 1200 bps integrated
modem.
Plug
(PN 341200)
Red
Order from local parts the required material to
make up the test cable:
1.
1200 bps line adapter cable (PN 2455894)
2.
Plug (PN 341200)
3.
Switch (PN 2305534)
Connect the cable to the plug and microswitch
as follows:
1.
Cut the spade clips from all eight cable wires.
2.
Connect them as follows:
a. Black and white to the red and green (widespaced pair of pins on the jack plug).
b. Brown and yellow to the microswitch
common.
c. Violet to the microswitch N/O.
d. Red, gray, and blue are spares. Tape them
back along the cable body.
You now have a modified switched line adapter
cable to use in running the 3741 on a switched line
via the 1200 TDAT.
CCT Brown
DA Yellow
8-36.2
7.
1200 bps Line Adapter/TDAT Test
Procedure
Place the 3741 in transmit mode:
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
M
T
See page 8-26.10 for comprehensive test procedu reo
1.
2.
3.
On the feature half planar, change jumper 4 to
up and all other BSCA jumpers to down
m.
Remove the SLT connector from the E2 socket on the switched line adapter board
B.
8.
Call the remote end.
9.
When the re mote end goes to D A T A:
a. Place the handset in the acoustic-coupler.
b. Turn the TDAT coupler switch to ON.
c. Momentarily press the switch button on
the switch.
10.
The test should run to completion and display %C in the upper right corner of the
screen.
Plug the SLT connector on the modified 1200
bps (switched line) adapter cable into the E2
socket of the switched line adapter board
a.
4.
Plug the telephone jack plug on the modified
adapter cable into the TDAT.
A1
D1
E1
2
Cll
...
:c
Q)
U
t.l
«
U
a:
c:c
Q)
3
4
5
6
(tJ
'a;
>
Jumper Selection
.11
.9
.·8
en
-7
.6
A2
82
D2
E2
JI
Q)
...
,~
'~
(tJ
c:c
«
«
«
«
c
E
I-
...
Q)
>
'a;
t.l
Q)
a:
• 4
0..
::::l
o
U
• 5
Q)
,s ~
..JU
Line Adapter Board
5.
Set the TDAT switches as follows:
SD-RD to SD
SIMULATE to DS
TAPE I/O to RCV
MODEM to 2W
DATA to NRM
MONITOR to OFF
SPE ED to 1200
CLOCK to OFF
MODE to MODEM
COUPLER to OFF
Then power on the TDAT.
6.
Insert the modified diskette to head label
" 00008 (request for test). (Page 7 -28 shows
how to make up a request for test data set.)
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619578
3741 ML
8-36.3
lEe
826065
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619579
8-36.4
1200 bps Line Adapter Receive Level Check
Procedures
6.
Jumper C1-J04 ('transmit data') to C1-D13
(CTS) o'n the pin side of the modem board
Wait until the CE at the receive sfation
is finished checking receive level.
Communications Mode (C)
II .
Non-switched Line BSCA
001
To make this check CEs must be at the transmit
station and at the receive station. They also
must be in verbal contact with each other
throughout the procedure. The transmit station
is the station that will send the signal to be
checked; the receive station is the station where
the signal level is to be checked.
Before making this check, verify that the transmit signal level is correct at both the transmit
station and at the receive station (see Nonswitched Line Transmit Level Adjustment
Procedure).
Tools Needed:
Note: These procedures allow checking for
high and low frequency roll-off.
7.
After check is complete, remove jumpers
from pins 4 and 6 on the line adapter
board, and from C1-D13 and C1-J04 on
the modem board.
8.
Press RESET to return machine to XR
mode
9.
Remove diskette.
II.
dB meter, Part 453545
jumper, Part 5159491 *
7
8
01
9
•••
••
••
10 11
* shipped with machine
12 13
Note:
READ THIS ENTIRE PROCEDURE BEFORE
PERFORMING CHECK
Early
boards
might
not have
echo
I
/
14 15
clamp
jumpers,
2·0 2·1
OJ
:g
.~
/
• e
22 2~ /
El
U
'0;
.~
c::
U
~
u
VI
.6
III
.5
22 23
B2
C2
02
E2
.4
24
16
.18
With
Clear to
Send (CTS)
Jumpered
Delay
Jumpered
.'
9
12 13
NDt~:
130 ms
Oms
8
10 11
Use
Echo
Clamp
Delay
7
••
••
••
••
••
••
•
•
17.
•
19
c:
'.::l,
0
'i
.::
>
'iii
~
c::
'c
~
E
0
u
Line Adapter Board
283 B
Plug
17 to 16
Red
Yellow-
m
1m)
CAUTION
The short delay combinations might cause intermittent echo problems.
Black
m
Communication Line Plug
METER
COVER
-7 -5
-3
-2
-1
]
-10
-15
DB
+3
~BATJ1TE:~25
2W-4W
TRANS
TRAO:S
0
o
~
0
REC
REC
BRDG
WRAP
1Y ~IN~
~600 II
324
(Q)
<0
O'<:::::!,) 45
rc:)~
ADD TO RDG MIN
MAX
ATTENU,HOR
0
(5) 10)
MONITOR
(FE 107103)
dB Meter
826065
8/1/75
PrJ 1619582
3741 ML
8-36.7
lEe
B26065
PN 1619583
Da'. B/1nS
7.
Switched Line BSCA
To make this check, CEs must be at the transmit
station and at the receive station. They also
must be in verbal contact with each other throughout the procedure. The transmit station is the
station that will send the signal to be checked;
the receive station is the station where the signal
level is to be checked.
Wait until CE at receive station is
finished checking receive level.
The above procedure checks line loss at 1300 Hz
(mark = 1 = minus EIA level). The next step
checks line loss at 2100 Hz (space = 0 = plus EIA
level) .
8.
dB meter, part 453545
jumper, part 5159491 *
Transmit Mode (T)
Note: These procedures allow checking
for high and low frequency roll-off.
9.
After check is complete, remove jumpers
from pins 4 and 6 on line adapter board,
and from C1-D13 and C1-J04 on the
modem board.
10.
Reset machine (press RESET key).
11.
Remove diskette.
* Shipped with machine
READ THIS ENTIRE PROCEDURE BEFORE
PERFORMING CHECK
001
tiDR1
Jumper C1-J04 ('transmit data') to C1-D 13
(CTS) on the pin side of the modem board
II . Wait until CE at the receive station
is finished checking receive level.
Before making this check, verify that the transmit signal level is c~rrect at both the transmit
station and at the receive station (see Switched
Line Transmit Level Adjustment Procedure).
Tools needed:
Comm Mode (C)
Procedure: Transmit Station
Test Pin Designation
1.
Turn machine power on.
2.
Insert diskette and position disk to any
valid data set label using REC ADV or
REC BKSP.
Bl
Al
Ct
/
/
/
/
u
/
.~
al
/
<{
<{
3.
Press FUNC SEL UPPER and COMM (C
mode
4.
Press T key (T mode,
5.
Wait for call from receive station.
rl).
II ).
'"
u
6.
After the connection has been made
between the rece,ive station and the transmit station (indication on 3741 screen's
status line is DrR and DSR set to 1),
jumper pin 6 to 7 (request-to-send to ground
on the line adapter board
iii.
Note: The entire status line does not dis-
.;u
al
<{
<{
<{
<{
m.
.::
I
/
/
/
Line Adapter Board
/
/
/,B D
o 0
o 0
o
/
0
0
o
o
0
0
0
0
o
o
/
/
/
/
/
/
II
D/
/
/
o
o
o
o
0
0
o
0
/
/
0
~ ~ /
00/
A A
/
d 0
o
a
/
play until data set ready becomes active.
When jumper between pin 6 and 7 is in
place request-to-send is 0 and clear-tosend is 1 on the status line
~
c:
/
/
Data terminal ready--------'
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send ------------1
-------.....1
-------.....1
000
8-36.8
This page intentionally left blank.
l
I I I
826065
D:-a-te-8::-:/~1I:-75.....,_r----1I--_..J
Ee
r:.
PN 1619584
3741 M L
8-36.9
g
Procedure: Receive Station
12.·
READ THIS ENTI RE PROCEDURE BEFORE
PERFORMING CHECK
1.
Turn machine power off.
2.
Remove jumper 6 on half planar board
from position E and install jumper in the
F position (ref
-5 on dial
-5
-10 on meter +2
-15dBm
1m ).
PN 1619585
Signal level can now be observed on the
dB meter. To interpret the dB level, algebraically add the value of the dB meter
needle indication to the numeric value
indicated by the setting of the add dial:
Example:
3.
826065
-3dBm
A good operating level is between -15 dBm
and -27 dBm. Check both mark (1300 Hz)
and space (2100 Hz) for receive level.
Set the dB meter bridge, 600, 324 switch
to the bridge position and turn dB meter
power on
m.
Note: The receive sensitivity of the 1200
4.
Connect meter leads from the line terto the DT and
minals on the dB meter
DR spade clips on the coupler (do not connect leads to the locki ng screws for the
_spade clips).
5.
Turn machine power on.
6.
Insert diskette and position disk to any
valid data set label using REC ADV or
REC BKSP.
7.
Press FUNC SEL UPPER and COMM (C
mode
8.
Press R key
9.
Raise exclusion key and dial transmit
station.
10.
After answertone has stopped, place handset in cradle. ('Data set ready' becomes
active DJ).
11.
bps switched modem is -43 dBm. Receive
sensitivity is defined as the lowest possible
signal level received on a communication
line before circuits in the modem reject
it as noise. On the 1200 bps switched
modem, a receive signal level below -43
dBm is considered unacceptable.
II
13.
If the transmit level at. the transmit station
is correct and the receive level at the receive station is not correct, the common
carrier must be called to correct the
problem.
14.
After the check is complete, press RESET
to return to XR mode
15.
Remove diskette.
16.
Turn machine power off.
17.
Remove jumper 6 on the featue half
planar from position F and install jumper
in the E position
II).
II .
Transmit station CE will jumper request-tosend on causing carrier to be transmitted to
the receive station. At an agreed-upon time,
the transmit station CE will transmit a space
frequency (2100 Hz).
II
m.
18.
Remove dB meter leads from the DT and
DR spade clips on the coupler.
, 8·36.10
Note: Depending on features installed all
jumper positions may not be present.
3713 Printer/2nd Disk/BSCA
3713 Printer/2nd Disk
2
3
4
5
6Pl
0
0
0
0
0
0
NO
A
YES C
0
0
0
0
0
NO
D
NO
0
0
YES
0
YES E
0
F
0
N
o
-.. --
Note: Refer to 16-4 for a description
of 3715 printer jumper locations.
METER
COVER
-5
-3
-2
-1
-7
-10
-15
DB
Receive Mode (R)
~fT~r:~25
A A
2W-4W
TRANS
TRAO:S
0
o
~
0
000
REC
REC
WRAP
~ ~INC?
BRDG
~600 III
324
(Q)(Q)
t(Y
O'<:::::!) 45
ADD TO RDG MIN
MAX
ATTENUATOR
0
MONITOR
00
~E__________________~~~
-----.:I
826065
8/1/75
PrJ 1619586
(FE 107103)
3741 ML
8-36.11
lEe
826065
Date 8/1/75
Service Aids - 3741 With 1200 bps Line
Adapter/CBS Coupler
Connection of the 3741 or 3747 with 1200 bps
line adapter to the switched telephone network
requires a data access arrangement (DAA) type
CBS, usually referred to as a "coupler". The
coupler is provided and installed by the telephone company. Most commonly used coupler
types are the GDC 1001A, or Western Electric
1001 A (series 5 or later, or equivalent).
Two options are available on the coupler. They
must be specified by the customer when ordering and strapped by the telephone company
when installing:
1.
Line controlled by coupler. This allows
the transfer of data when the handset of
the attached telephone is cradled.
2.
Ringer connected on the line side of the
exclusion key. This causes the telephone
to ring on an incoming call.
Special Considerations:
1.
The couplers must be mounted vertically
on a flat vertical surface because of mercury relays in the coupler. (This may
change with newer models of couplers.)
2.
The telephone company must strap the
coupler for a predetermined transmit level
for each installation and indicate this level
on the cover of the coupler. The attaching 1200 bps line adapter must be adjusted to this indicated dB level (transmit card and autoanswer card). If the
level is not indicated on the coupler's
cover, advise the customer to contact the
telephone company for this information.
3.
CBS type couplers have their own power
supply (standard). The customer provides
a suitably located AC outlet.
4.
Do not remove the coupler covers. The
points of demarcation are the terminal
lugs attached to the interface cable from
the 1200 bps line adapter.
5.
The cable from the 1200 bps line adapter
to the coupler is supplied by I BM with the
line adapter.
When defining CBS coupler interface problems,
the points of demarcation are the terminal lugs
attached to the cable end at the CBS coupler.
Under no conditions should the coupler's
cover be removed, or any attempt be made to
meter or scope signals within the coupler.
When a problem is defined to the coupler, it
is the customer's responsibility to contact the
telephone company for corrective action.
The following procedures will be helpful in
defining a problem on the coupler interface.
Note: Valid voltages for an EIA interface are:
+3 to +25 volts range for up level
-3 to -25 volts range for down level
The voltage swing usually found on coupler
interface leads is +8 volts up level to -8 volts
down level with a small amount of AC ripple
except on data tip and data ring.
PN 1619587
8-36.12.
CBS Coupler
Switch Hook
SHe1,,----------,CVI~.-
---0
Handset
Contact
Ring Indicate
RI
CV
RI
J..-.---l"T----*-------
V
A
1-3
SG~
CCT
Rly
Sec
Off Hook
OH
Rly
CV
~"
Supply
Data Modem Ready
110 VAC
A
CV
RING
Det
RI
Rly
Coupler C-ufThrough
C~~
Data Tip
Dli
CV
CCT
I·
*
V
@T
Auto
Level
Control
CCT
@R
To
Exchange
Through
Phone
OH
lEe
826065
PN 1619588
3741 ML
8-36.13
lEe
826065
PN 1619589
8-36.14
Date 8/1nS
Operation Sequences
A.
1.
2.
4.
Answer the coupler phone by
lifting handset, raise exclusion
key
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
4.
Set up 3741/3747 for
communicate mode
No change from 3 above
5.
Replace handset on coupler
phone
SH
OH
Manual Call Sequence
Action
Interface Results
3741: Place in communicate
mode (transmit or receive)
3747: Ready with a control
diskette to 0406 state
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
down
down
down
up (tied to +12 volts)
down
Lift handset
SH
OH
CCT
up
up
up within 10 ms of
OH going up (normal)
but not more than
200 ms
up
down
DA
RI
3.
3.
Raise exclusion key
Replace handset
No change from 2 above. Listen
for dial tone.
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
down
down when 3741/3747
times out
down after OH goes
down
up
down
CCT
DA
RI
c.
Action
I nterface Results
1.
3741: Set up for communicate
mode
3747: Set up for autoanswer
(0407 state)
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
down
down
down
up (tied to +12 volts)
down
2.
Dial the coupler phone from
a convenient local phone
SH
OH
down
up when R I pulsed
up
up after OH goes up,
delayed a minimum of
200 ms (2 seconds
normal)
up
up level pulse(s),
until OH goes up
1.
2.
Manual Answer Sequence
Action
I nterface Results
3741/3747 power on but
not set up for communicate
mode
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
Call the coupler from the
nearest phone
Phone rings
SH
down
OH
down
CCT
down
DA
up
up-level pulses
RI
down
down when 3741/
3747 times out
down after OH goes
down
up
down
Autoanswer Sequence
CCT
B.
up
up
up
up
down
DA
RI
down
down
down
up (tied to +12 volts)
down
Listen for approximately 3
seconds of answertone (slightly
rising in volume) at the calling
phone.*
3.
Wait for 3741/3747 to timeout
SH
OH
CCT
DA
RI
down
down after time-out (20
seconds)
down following OH
up
down
* Also listen for short burst (DLE EOT) just prior to the 20-second
time-out.
Problems With the Interface to Coupler
D.
Symptom:
Dial in on autoanswer, go 'off
hook', short answertone, a
delay, then answertone.
Check:
CCT in transition region,
has very large glitch.
How:
Same as for previous symptom. CCT output on the
AA card should be only one
pulse going from down to
up level.
Coupler Cut Through
A.
B.
C.
Symptom:
3741 or 3747 set up for
autoanswer. Dial in, modem
(line adapter) goes 'off hook',
no answertone heard.
Check:
CCT delay, should be approximately 2 seconds but
not exceed 5 seconds.
How:
Use a scope. Trigger scope
on 'off hook' going plus,
look at CCT going plus. Set
scope for 1 sec/div.
Symptom:
3741 or 3747 set up for
autoanswer. Dial in, get
answertone back immediately.
Check:
CCT delay. Probably has no
delay at all.
How:
Use a scope. Same as previous
symptom.
Symptom:
Dial in autoanswer. Auto~
answer answers; nothing
happens.
Check:
Glitching of coupler cut
through in transition region
(-3 to +3 volts)
How:
Use a scope. Set scope for
5v/div, .5 ms/div.
Channel 1 - CCT interface lead
Channel 2 - CCT output on
autoanswer card
Scope CCT on AA card and
look for double pulse."
Switch Hook
A.
Symptom:
Dial in on autoanswer, phone
is busy.
Check:
Switch hook. The 1200 bps
line adapter requires that
'switch hook' be off (down
level) when phone is cradled,
on (up level) when handset
is lifted from cradle.
How:
Scope or meter 'switch hook'
lead, pick up handset. Lead
should go from approximately
-8 volts to +8 volts.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PI\! 1619045
I
3741 ML
8-37
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
This page intentionally left blank ..
PN 1619046
8-38
CE TOOLS
,1---__ *
Terminal Assembly Probe
PN 2594238
TECHNOLOGY
~
MULTI
MST 2/4 MST 1
Cable Extender
PN 5998763
LATCH
UP~
NONE DOWN
P?
/~~c
,
GATE REF
~
+1.4V
GND -
de
CE Head Adjusting Tool
PN 2200698
"DC
VOlts(@
G,J--+--
(6 vdel
-1,3V
CE Voltmeter
(15 Vdc range) (PN 452796)
GATING
+@
-©
~~Fll
Voltmeter leads with
SMS connectors
PN 2124599
GENERAL LOGIC PROBE
Diagnostic Diskettes:
CE General Logic Probe
PN 453212
* (long probe lead)
PN 453605
Alignment Check
I/O Adapter
CE Diagnostic (Card I/O)
Function Control RPQ
With Proof Keyboard
Without Proof Keyboard
Model 3/4
ACL Diagnostic 1
ACL Diagnostic 2
EC
PN 2455026
PN 2469460
PN 2469688
PN 2446068
PN 2446067
374'1 I/O Adapter Wrap Card (PN 2469139)
PN 2455484
PN 5566089
825853
Date 11/15/74
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1619410
I
3741
ML
8-39
EC 825853
11/15/74
DATA RECORDER DIAGNOSTIC
DISKETTE PROGRAMS
826065
8-40
PN 1619411
8/1/75
Data Recorder Attachment Diagnostic Procedure
The data recorder part of the CE diagnostic diskette
checks data transfer to and from the data recorder.
Areas checked during data transfer are: attachment
half planar ROS, interface and control lines on the
attachment half planar, MPU interface lines, and
storage. Also, the normal diskette read/write areas
and CRT display areas are checked.
Power down the 3741 and the data recorder.
I
Place a deck of at least 26 blank cards in the hopper.
I
,
Do you have a 129 or a 5496?
,
129
5496
I
I
Set the SPL FEAT switch to OFF.
Power up the 3741 and the 5496.
I
I
Power up the 3741 and the 129.
Set the 5496 switches as follows:
I
Operate the 129 CLEAR switch to clear the
transport.
TE RM INAL/MANUAL
PUNCH VERIFY
REC ADV
PROGRAM
PRINT
I
Set the 129 switches as follows:
SPL FEAT
PROG MODE
REC ADV
CHAR MODE
PRINT
,
ON
DATA READ
AUTO
64
ON or OFF
TERMINAL
PUNCH
AUTO
OFF
ON or OFF
Note: All other switch settings are optional; they
have no function when the 5496 is online.
I
Load the diagnostic diskette in drive 1.
I
I
Press the FEED key twice to feed two cards.
Record advance to data set label 00009.,
I
Load the diagnostic diskette into drive 1.
I
Keep diskette at data set label 00008.
Set the 3741 AUTO R EC ADV switch to ON.
I
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
S
FUNCT SEL upper
PUNCH TO EOD (PR will be displayed)
I
I
Were exactly 26 cards punched?
•
,
No
Yes
Use MAP 5-32.
Are the cards punched as shown on page 8-41
(129) or 8-42 (5496)?
•
I
r
,
i
Yes
No
Place the 26 cards just punched in the hopper.
Use MAP 5-36.
I
1
I
\.
I
/
T
Do you have a 129 or 5496?
,
,
I
129
5493
•,
I
Press FEED twice to feed two cards.
i
.
,
Record advance to data set label
00017, WORK SPACE.
Press: FUNCT SEL upper
READ TO EOF (RR will be displayed)
I
Did all 26 cards read and did the 3741
return to index with no error code?
,
I
•
•,
•
Yes
Is an error code displayed?
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
•
I
•
No
Yes
Use MAP 5-34.
Is the error code A3?
•
•
No
•
•
,
I
Record advance through
the data set.
,
Ii
Are the records in the data
set the same as the cards read?
Yes
I
Were all 26 cards read
and an A2 error code
displayed because the
hopper was empty?
•
•
No
Use MAP 5-35.
•
I
•
Yes
No
I
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
RETTO INDEX
•
No
Yes
Use the Symptom
Index to locate the
correct MAP.
Use MAP 5-34.
•
Use MAP 5-36.
I
•
The machine is OK .
/
82_6_06_5~________~_______P_____~11619590
E_C__
8/1/75
.I
.....
I
3741 ML
8-40.1
IEC
826065
PN 1619591
8/1/75
Basic Hex Display
-------
-------
Total Value of BitSl
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
8
4
2
1
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
8
4
2
1
l
l
Active
First Character
Bits
2 4 8
15 - F
2 4 8
14 - E
4 8
13- D
4 8
12 - C
2
8
11 - B
2
8
10-A
8
9-9
8
8-8
Second Character
r-- ----
-------
r-
8-40.2
Hex
Character
Symbol
---
----2 4
7-7
2 4
6-6
4
5-5
4
4-4
r-----r-----
---r-- -
--
Hexadecimal Display
of a Hex 'AA'
Hex '55'
2
3-3
2
2-2
1- 1
0-0
Sample Printout
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY10123456789?~/*
ALL
ALL.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY10123456789?y/*
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?,I*
f~LL
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY10123456789?~/*
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
AL.L.
M.L
ALI...
ALL
()L.L.
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?,I*
?*
THIS IS THE END OF FILE CARD AND WILL BE PUNCHED BUT NOT READ (129)26
HDRl 5496 DATA
128 02001 02026
P
03001
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!!!! ! I! I!! I!! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!! I I!!! II
! I!! "! I I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!! I
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !-!!!!!!!!!
I. .
I.
I.
I.
I .I .I .I .I .I •
I I. I. I. .
I.
I.
I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I .I I·,~1I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I·I·I·I·I·I·I·I· I· I· I· ·
I·
I·
I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I·I·I·I·I·I·I·I· I· I· I· I· ·
I·
I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I ·I
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!!! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!!! I! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I! III!! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! I ! I I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! I I ! !~ ! ! ! ! ! I ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!!!!! I!!!!! II!! I I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I! I ! II!! I! I!!! I! II
!!!!!!! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!!!!! I! IIIII II I!!!! I! II II IIII! I!!!! II! I III I! I I!!! I I I!
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!! I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! III! I I I ! ! ! ! ! I!! IIII i i ! II!! I!! II II I! III!! I II III III I I I I I!! IIIII
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I!! I!!!! I I ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! I! I I I! I ! I I ! ! ! ! ! ! I I I I I I II!!!! I!! IIII I! I!! I I! III II! III! I II II I IIII
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUIIVVVVVVVVVuuu
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVvuvVVVVVVVVVVVVI}VVVVVVVVVVVVVuvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVvuvVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVUVVVVUVVUVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVUUVVVUVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVUVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VUVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?,I*
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?,I*
{iLL
? I?
I~LL
' I'
' I'
' I'
I~LL
ALL
AL.L '1'1
l~d.• L ' I'
('il.. L. Y I'
(.1 i... L ' I'
(:~! i... I...
' IY
t~" ... .. ' I'
(~I... L 'v'
l~oI... i... 'V'
'
~·i 1.. 1...
(.~"... L
AI... !...
Y\) y
Yl) ,
'~p
u'
t~ILL
~
AL.I...
' V~
' V~
ALL
f~I...L
AL.L
'v'
'u'
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?~/*
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY10123456789?,I*
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ01234S6789?~/*
/
The data in these
records is not printable. It is used to
check the 'data bus
in' lines with an
alternate bit pattern.
THIS IS THE END OF FILE CARD AND IT WILL BE PUNCHED BUT NOT READ(5496)
26
HDRI-PROGRAMS
128 05001 05026
P
05004
OOOTHEll1ATTACHMENT222CHECK333129444/54965555550UTOPROCEDURE777IS8888NOW9999COMPLETE.*******************************************
7*
N&6B24Y1X3A3Y5A32F1X10A3Y1X5A2QY3Al0B3Y1X2A4Y1X3A4YlX9~3Y3AC30Y3A3Y5AC9Yl0AC22Y5A20Y3AC51Y9AC63Y2A1X4Y3A4Y1X9AQ
::1.
HEX 'AA'
HEX 'AAY
HEX 'AA'
HEX ' ()A'
HEX 'I<:tA'
HEX 'AA'
HEX 'AA'
HEX , (")A'
HEX 'AA'
HEX 'AA'
HEX )' ~5:i ~
HEX '5~i'
HEX ,. ~5 ~:i ,.
HEX ' 5~:i'
HEX y ~) ~::i 'I
HEX "~i~5 '
HEX ' ~:i~:i 'I
HEX '~:i5 '
HEX !I ~5~5 '
!-lEX ':i~i '
, I
a4
IBM 129 Cards Punched from Data Set-129 Data
I 1 7 • • It 1112 111415 i. n 18 lU02l U j3 24 25 21 27 21 213111 II 3h4J53U7 is at
1111111111111111111111"11111111111111111
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
'Z34517 ••
Cards 1·10 should have all eighty columns punched
as shown on left.
~n12U1415U11l1n2021n~~25212721213031U333435.37UU
1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (1. 11 f tIl t 1 '
1111111111111111111111"1111111111111
1 2, 3 • 5 8 7 • 110 11 12 U 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 n:3 2425 %8 27 2129 30 31 32 33 3435
Hex 'AA'
(1010·1010)
3333333333333~33333333333333331r333
4444444f4444444444444444444444444444
, 2 3 • 5 I, 7 • • 10 11 12 13 M 1~ 16 17 18 1. 20 21 22232425 2G 27 212930 31 32 33 34 353S 37
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5'5 5 5, 5 5 5 5 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5,5 55 5 5 5 5,5,5 5'
11111111111111)
66666666666666666666666666666666'666666666'
11111I111111111I11111111111111111111111111
1 2 3 • 5 1 7 • • 1D 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 2D 21 22 2324 25 26 27 2129 3D 31 32 33 3. 3531 37 3139 40 414
777777777717171777777777777777~77777777~77
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII~IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
000000000000-000·(1'0·00'000000000000' 0 Q 00 Of DO 0
12 3 4 5 1 7 1 • 10 11 12 13 14 15 11 11111.20 21 n 23 24 25 26 27 212130 31322334 35 38 37 31 ~I
ll11111 r 1111111 U111111111111 t {( 1111111
999999999999999999999999999999999999999
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 :! 2 2 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.2 2 2 2
1 2 3 4 5 8 7 • • 10 11 12 13 M 15 I. 17 I. II 20 21 2223 24 25 26 27 2129 30 31 3233 34 353& 37 313940
1 2 3 4 5 1 7 I • 10 1112 13 14 15 11 17 ",. 20 21 2223242526 27 212130 31 323334 35 31
33333333333333,3 :1'3 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 3 33333' 3:3'333
4444444f444f{{4ij44444444444444444444
1 2 3 4 5 S, 7 • • 10 1112 13 14 15 Ii
Cards 11·20 should have'all eighty columns punched
as shown on right.
11111~
20 21 222324 %5 28212. 2130 313233 34 3H8
1111111111_111111111111111111111111111,
I.
6666666666666,6 61i 66 6 6666666666666'6'66666'666
1 2
3 4 5 • 7 • • 10 11 12 13 14 15 11 17 11 II 20 21 2223242528 27 212130 31 3233 34 353131 383140 414
Hex '55'
777777777777777177777771777717777777777777
(0101-0101)
8 8 8 a 8 a8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 t1 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 8 1'18' 8 8 8 8 1 I 8'1 8
I 2 3 4 5 I 7 • 110 11 12 13 14 15 11 111119 20 21 22232425 2127 212130 31323334 353137 313140
111111111111111111111111111011111111111
Cards 21·25 should be as below.
BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYl0123456789?,I*
1""""'1.
11121314 15 1. 17 II 11212122 2J Jt 25 21 Z7 2121. 31 JZ 33 Jt • 31 J1 • • "4142 a 44 45.41.' • • 5112 II 14 S5. 57 sa •• N IZ II 14 • • 17 • • 71 JI 72
THIS IS THE END OF FILE (EOF) CARD.
I
I
I
I
I I
n 74 75 II 71 71 11_1
IT CAN BE PUNCHED BUT NOT READ. (129)
I
II I
I I
I
\
I
10DOOOIODIODIDIDDOODODDDDDDDOODDOODDDDODODOOIoDODOOPOOIODOODDDIIDDDIDDDDDDDODO~O
, 2 3 4 5 • 1 • • 1D 11 12 13 M 15 IS '11 " I~ 20 21 222324 Z'l 26 21 2. 2t 3D 31 32 II 34 3536 37 13 ~l40 4142 43 44 4541 47 4.4150 51 5253 54 55 5& 51 5HS 60 616Hl6H5 " 17 &8 69 iO 71 12 n 14 15 lii n 79 1910
1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 tIl 1 1 1 1 1II 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 111 1 1
Z22222222122122222222222222222222222222~222Z22222212222222222122222222~222222a22
1 2 3 ,
~
6 1 i
a 1D
Ii 1:' 13 I~ 15 Iii i7 It
l'
~Q
11 22 2lZ4 r:
2~ 211J2~ ~u
"
12 Sll4
3~
3S :131 3HO
~I
42 4144 45 "i (i 4a -nO)1 s, :;1 :>4
~s
r.t: !: :s ! J C~ 'I. li2 6H4
~~ ~ ~7 ~, t~ ,,:' "
.. n :~ ;~ ;.: " ;nJ .~J
33 3 3 3,313 3 3 3 3 3 313 3 3 3 3 3 3 3,3 3 3 313 3 3 3 l 3 3 3'13 3 313 3 31313 3 J 3 3 3 3 3 313 3 3 l 3 313 3 313 3 J 3 ~ 13 3 3,3 3 3
.
.
"
-
L
414 ~; ,; ? .; 4 1r 4 .~ " 4 4 4 ,~ 4 4 4 414 4 4.1,< 4 4 .. 4 4 -i ,4, 4 4 44 4 ~ 14 4 4 4 4 ~ 4 4 .!
.
,; j & 1
.
\
" ~ 4,4' ~:'I ,~
,. !~ :~ 14 .; I ~. {4 ~ .; 'i
:,~,~
14 4 t, .~ ': ~. 4
a t: 4H9 "'~: ~2 ,;.: ;;~:~::~)!:'.;, .~ ~~ (~~.;.~;, i.:~";. :,~ " -: ill;', i: :' :-; i~ ~ii
55555555555~55~5151155555555151155155555555555551551~5515515'555'551~5551555515551
I 2
~
a v ;3
1! I! 1J '4
I~
'," :i l11J
JO:ii~}.'J ~4 ~~,
l;!1:1;0 !: 'J!::::'1 :'" Jii
~7 ~~ l~ ~~
.1-.)
~l\1
':i
6 5, ~ fi 6 6 6 6 6 i G,6 6 S 6 E6 £ ti 6 6 61161'6 G6 S6 6116 6 E S ~-f, 6 5~ 6 S 6 66 US 6 C J GG6 5 Gfi 6 & ii G6 6 E16-6 6 GGG6 6 G6 & G5
~;;;;;i;;;;~;;;;~~;;;~~~~~i;;~;;;;;;;;~~~~;;;;;;;;;~;i~;~~~;;;;;;;;;;;;;~;;;;;;;
'\~
1188868188111111881118818188881811188888188881888.8888888188111 •• 11.111181018181
I 2 3 4 5 • 7 • • I D 11 12 13 14 15 I. 17 18 " 2D ZI 222324 25 2127 21 29 30 31 322214 35 36 31 31 3. 40 41 42 4J 44 45 4S 41 4141 51 51 ~25354 55 51 57 5H9 'H1I2 13 14 • • IHUI 71 71 72 7114 75 11 n 71 7110
9999999'1111911199999999"19'999'119'11"991"9999111999~99"1'11111'1119999'919
... e•• 3
•• INTO 1M U.S,A.
EC
826863
Date 11/15174
826065
8/1/75
t)N 1619412
I
3741
ML
8-41
825853
EC
826065
Date 11/15/74
PN 1619413
8/1/75
IBM 5496 Cards Punched from Data Set-5496 Data
VVVVVVVVVVvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
11111111111111111111111111111111
I
.::
3
3
.4
,
7
Ii
I)
~('
li
11 lJ 14 l!t l(' 1'"
I~
19 ::' ?i 22
~j
2' 2', 26 :7 28
2~
10 ;; j !
11111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111 111,11111
91 ':IS 3"'1 I",C ~I'l~ lCO: !r.' j.;, :!",r lee. t~; lN' 1C'9 ~,' J1l I!:! :n :Jt, 11'" ~I:': H7 W] n::J 120 ;~: .:~ :1:' 12~ :;0::'126 :':1'11
9 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• B
- ................................
f,
/\
<1
1
2 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• • ••
•••• '.~~.~, •• ~,,~~~~.~~~~~~~.~•
.................................
~.i'
"
~'
:
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A
<1
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • tl
2
................................
................................
r:
~
~
;;
1
B
;,
'"
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2
1
1
G~~~~~iii~~~~i~~~i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A
t,
1
p.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~!~~~~~~~~a~~~'~!'
~
................................ "
1 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1
f'
I"" 1r,.' !"
~~-4
I'" lrr:-
·..·1 I'''', ';.,
l:~ I!:' i
1
,~1 :l~'
11" : . : .. 4 II" I.'.' ::1 P- !'" 1:'" ,:" :"'614':' ']'
.. ...... •• .... • ....••
•••
•••••
.. ••
•••••••••
••
'
~~
'I • •
~
':
.,
,.
'".
.'
;f.
•-
'.
..,
0:;'"
~:
r" J,I:'
~ 1
,~
,,:0 .,
I:~
?") ",..
"I! .., .. 9" ". "", .... r,
THIS IS THE END OF FILE (E
OF) CARD. IT CAN BE PUNCHED BUT
NOT READ. (549~)' "
~i ')_~ '1) !I",
~3
.,.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345
~..................
;::
I" 1
Second 10 Cards
11 through 20
(XX01-0101)
?*
6789?,1*
r:
r' •. (.
First 10 Cards
1 through 10
(XX10-1010)
,.........
• •
•
• • • "
••
~, :; ~ " ~
••
1
•
,.,
••
..~
~, " ~ '" ~ ': ~ ~1 ~ 2' ~ " ~ " ~ " ~ r~
•
6!1 66 67 68 ,9 10 71 72 7J 7.
n
1Co 71 H
n
A
••
It.! 110 el I!" !J II' s:t 86 17 88 8') 90 ~1 9l o:""! , . ~5 !'~
E. . ' . "......
" . ' • • - ..
•••••• A
•••••••••••
•• •
• •••••••
:.:
••••
• • •
, ... " .... " .... -, ...... i •• it " • -, " "
• • • •••
•• •
•••• • •• • ...,
• • • • •
• ••
r: ,. iii i " ~ i i • : ., ,. ~ ~ .. ~ ~ i
~ ~ ~~ ~
~ ,~
• • •••••
••
•••• •• ••
• ••••
•
• • ••• • •• • • •
. .
.. .. .. ...... ..
...
. ..
t\ •
r, • •
1\
1
•
Cards 21 through 25
•
•
••
•
•
•
•
••••
R
•• 4
• •••• 1
1:' • • • ' • • • • •
f,
,~
:> . . .
f. ... F!> "
6.11 .....
, ... 71
,"
1'" "
.,
1~
:,'
~~
1('1 ["I
;'1
'0 .,
"
'2 Ii'! "
~")
!,",
:.~
"
Tp· ::'70!1
It'" 3'70n
/"
"
f . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • '\
" • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • f,
2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ············~
2
""!~"'~~~~~'~~~~~~~~~'~~~~~~'1B
26 Card - Last Card
,.
n ,'"
e',
F
~·l
. ' '.' ....
'):' ~~ !,.1 r;~ !;60
'\
8-42,'
DATA RECORDER ATTACHMENT TESTPROGRAM
The 3741 takes one record and punches 7 cards
from it. The numbers between the words are
skipped or deleted testing all the program format
functions. See Data Recorder Programs on page
9-1.
IBM 5496 Cards
IBM 129 Cards
],'29/5496 ATTACHMENT CHECKOUT PROCEDURE IS NOW COMPLETE.
4111" .. tlI2" .. tSII11.".IIDI252127I • • • arDIU•• :u ••••• a .... I • • • I1I1I1 • • • P • • • l l a l l . . P • • JUI72 n M Ju.n» '11.1-
THE
It
J I
HE
It .14 ••
J • • 11 till Q M 1I1117l1ttllJ122D2UUU1.II.St UDM • • JJI' • • 41 00 . . . . a • • • I1I1DM • • " • • • 'Uialll! . " • • • 71
JlnM'II1IJJn'lllll
A29/S496
II
J I 411 J • • 1I111213M1SII171.1.1IJ122IU.2II.27.a.St.DM • • :u ••• aoa .... CJ • • • l1l1aM • • " . . . . . . l2aM • • I7 • • • nnnMJlJln»".1
ATTACHMENT
I
••• 111'1' .... UIIM .. U l l d I I U " " .. u ... u .. n ........,
;;:;KOUT
'
v:
""""
"""
"'
'
.
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
r"
1111111111.".11 ...................... "... . .,, , · , · ,.. ,," """ .....""".~"" .""... "."." ". i!:!J
111I
,\11
V-~~~~~~~~·~;o
V'p'~9Y~~Y~~IO'1I
II I, "141510:' ,. '):0:122 2J 24 25
~.OOOIOOOOOOOIOOOOOOOODDOOODOOOOOoooooot
\ I 2 3.~ I • 7 • • lD 11 12 13 14 15 t6 11 " 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 H 27 H %130 3112 3334 :n 3& 37 38 31.
\ \1 11·1 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.1 1
.\\ '\' \
, ~~1!'22222222222222222222222222222122222
\
fl.
~
~
~ I:::' ~::;::;::""lIu .. u n u ..... u n n ... :!!:~:~:~ti':'"''
/.. I... ,I .... nl ..
;
~
I'THE.
, ••••• , •. """"""""" .... ,,",, .................
~ROCEDURE
.
~
~~T..~~g£~~~~~ .. !~ .. ~~~"S9~~~~!'~:"..
.
"'"
"'"
, •• T~~. ~~~(,~~?~" ~!:.~~~~~~! "S~~~~
IIJ"3t1UUMlIIIU."IIJ122DN25.2721a.StU~M • • :U • • ~
II
'-
"
1% ,: ,4 1'1" l' ,.
n
272'
n n
J1:U
'
10
,,>0 2':2" 24 25:6;':. Zt Z" II '1
)110.
!X ~,~9~ ,~9~~~~~~~......... """ "~"""H''''
\1 2,.~~ 567 •• 1011 Ul31415161111112Ul1223242HS7JHnlO1l3231l4l5l&3nl39
: ' .4 "~, ". -1 .~":: .. :- ,-. 011' Y'~ 4I~ iff ,", .~. 4:-
eli: '" '" ".,
~.:
:.' .... !to-.
~6 ~.:,
: .• "
'0 n
..... 1 1
22
I'lsa
,'- ttl Ie
33
·3 3'3 3 3 3.13 3 3131313 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 33 3 3 1 3·3 3 3 3 3 3
~~~~~ron~~"nNn~~~"~~"euu""~n~"~~_
\
4i~14144414~44444444444414444444444414il
1 !
~
4 :..~ 7 •
~
H I' 12l; H
I~
:&
P U 1"1) ~l"
~J
:0... Z'l
~1'.:>t)0
313.: jl J4 )') J'
~:
:'; .iH
5551~~555555151~5555555555~55555555555~.
6 6 GRlis 616 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 G,6 6' 6 6,6 e6 6,6 6 6 6 6 6 6 S f, e 6 G6
I 2 ~ ~ 5 G 7 a § 10111213 I. 1~ 1£ Ii lal9 211"122 Z3 2H5 2S ~7 28:5 olDil 3! 3)j43~;. ~738~; I
111 7 1 7 11 7 717 7 1 ?1 7 7 1 7 17 1117·111111 7 7 1 1 7 7 7'
18881111181111118111181181181'111181188
'-
0, .. 91
til
W'-'~ !!' H" '.u: 1: 7 11' I!:J 12": !.': &:2 12' lZo\ L~ ~ 1:7 J:' "
r.~
• • \ ••••• \
-55
.
.
1
.
•••
•
•
z •
liS
•• •• • • • •
~'13'5.7,,"~~~t~t~~"~n"»~nnvn~~~q~
4
In'~
A
"e
8
4
2
4'
2
~ ~3
1999999IS9!ltS9S9911,!g,g.t"9991199t9t!
".
3'1
n
31
~7
!I II
'i)
'I "2 4,:! 44
n " " ..
'9
~I) ~l ~2
!-J ,. "
$I 57
sa
H 10 51 U •
It
~
t-
e
~
4
"2
(J
2
'0HV""~nrin"nn"n~un~nun"V""~fl»n""~1
IU4::<7DO
EC
825853
o.te11/16n4
II
'&4
/\
S
4
2
8.
, I 3 4 5 I 7 •• II 11 12 13 14 15 18 11 It 11212112232425 2127 21 %130 31 32 JU4 353131313,.
..... n
to, ~ i' It: 1,,"'.f .~ . . . . i~ ~ !"
A ••
11
II
71.
.1
~
'.
826065
8/1/76
Pf
3741
ML
.8-43.
825853
lEe
Da.. 11/15/74
1
\\' \
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619415
8-44
I/O ADAPTER DIAGNOSTIC DISKETTE
(P/N 2469460)
This diskette aids the CE in diagnosing troubles in
the I/O adapter. The diskette contains:
Three programs to permit checkout of the I/O
adapter circuits and cable by connecting the
output lines to the input lines using a wrap
connector. The programs are identical except
for ending sequences.
For the 3741 Mod 3/4, an ACL program
(ACLT20) for loading the wrap test. (On
Models 1 and 2, the test is loaded manually.)
Scratch space for use by the System/3
diagnostics.
- ACL tests for Mod 3/4
i
I
I/O Adapter Wrap Test Load and Run Procedure
foi: Model 1 and 2 Program
i
-f
i
Load the I/O adapter diagnostic diskette in
drive 1.
T Record advance_ to sector 10.
Press fUNCTSgl,. lower
I
Options
Wrap Test Program Instructions
In addition to the single-pass operation described
previously, a stop-and-go operation or a loop operation can be selected by starting in sector 11 or
sector 12, respectively. The three wrap tests on
the diskette differ only in the ending sequence.
(This provides a backup program if the program
starting in sector 10 is damaged.)
Single-pass operation (normal) is selected by
starting in sector 10.
Stop-and-go operation is selected by starting
in sector 11. If the test runs without error,
the program stops with a G4 displayed. Pressing RESET causes the program to make another
pass. Holding ALPHA SHI FT and N UM SHI FT
while pressing RESET, ends the test.
Loop operation is selected by starting in sector 12. After loading, the test loops until
stopped by an error or by holding ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM SHIFT while pressing
RESET.
The 10110wing character transfer instructions apply
to th:l wrap test contained on the I/O adapter diagnostic diskette.
Notes:
1.
To re-execute the program, start at this
point but select program A rather than
program 1.
To enter trace mode, which allows you to
single-step through the remaining program,
hold ALPHA SHI FT and NUM SHI FT while
pressing FUNCT SEL lower. This must be
done before pressing RESET. Each time
RESET is pressed, one instruction is executed.
A J5 code with XX 0000 14 indicates that
the wrap connector might not be installed.
A J5 code with XX 01 00 14 ind icates that
the cables are still connected to the attachment.
·UPDAT~-::~_'
/
I
FUNCT-SEC-Iower
PROG LOAD
1 (number)
REC ADV
The fi rst format buffer is now loaded. The
instructions in buffer 1 will load the other format buffers from the diskette. To continue
the loading sequence:
Press SEL PROG
(See note 1)
1 (number)
FUNCT SEL upper
H
RESET
(See note 2)
A G6 error code is displayed when the program
loads properly. If anything else is displayed in
,the error code position (such as a 6 or nothing),
r~load the program to rule out possible errors
in entry. Continue the Itelst.
Press RESET
'\(See note 2)
If the test runs without error, a G4 error code
and 006301 3A register contents are displayed on a flashing screen. Any other display
(including a blank) is an error.
(See notes 3 and 4)
Return to the MAP that sent you here.
If you did not enter this procedure from a
MAP, end the test by pressing RESET.
2.
3.
4.
Buffer Number
001
x
01011
Legend:
n
x
yy
zzz
register number
hex character with which register
is loaded and tested (mask)
buffer nu mber
buffer position (1 through 128)
InstrlJctions:
Anxyyzzz
Bnxyyzzz
Hnxyyzzz
Qyy
Unx
Wny)'zzz
Xnx
Jump on unequal
Jump on equal
Jump if any mask bits are on
Read record from diskette (in
update mode), put it in the format buffer indicated, and advance
to the next record
Load the hex character into the
register specified
Load the contents of the specified
register into the specified buffer.
(Used only in Mod 3/4 diagnostic
program.)
Add the specified hex character
into the specified register.
Valid Error Codes for the Wrap Test
Invalid instructions are used for error codes (for
example, a U5 is an invalid instruction because U
should be followed only by 0,1,2, or 3). Whenever a test fails, the program jumps to an invalid
instruction (error code). The invalid instructions
cause the 3741 to sto p with a flashi ng screen and
display the instruction that caused the error along
with the contents of registers 0 through 3. Valid
error codes are:
HU R
6
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
\
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
\
'
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
I
xxxxxxxx
XXX G4
0063013A
C~!
J4
K4
LLf
M4
U4
G4
GG
Z2
and C3
through J9
through K9
through L9
through M9
through U9
(program ran error free)
(program loaded OK)
through Z9
Error Code
1~:-~-te-:-~2-5:_~-:-I~----~------~I· PN 1607993
I
3741 ML
8-45
1EC
825958
-I
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1607994
8-46
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Wrap Error Code
Chart
These error codes and register contents indicate
board or cable problems. No other codes can
result from a solid open or ground in the cable.
- Use the error code and register contents to
find the wire reference number.
- Use this reference number to locate the failing
wire on the cable wrap diagram on the following
pages.
- If the error code and register contents cannot
be found in the chart, replace the cable (712).
Register
Contents
0
1
2
3
XX
00
00
14
14
14
Wrap connector might not
be installed.
XX
00
00
54
17
XX
01
00
14
Cables are still connected to
the attached device.
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
EF
F7
FB
FD
FE
FF
00
7F
BF
DF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
9
1
16
2A,2C
3
4
1
16
2A-2C
3
4
J6
00
20
00
18
12
12
K4
00
BA
AA
A3
10E,10H
10A-l0H
K5
00
10
10
A9
10F
K6
00
00
71
33
AA
AA
Al
Al
13
15
13
15
L4
00
00
63
6A
08
08
5E
5E
11
10D
11
Z5
00
7A
10
Bl
2B
L9
00
B4
30
71
10C
M9
00
7A
80
5E
lOA
U5
00
6A
40
5E
lOB
U8
00
6A
01
5E
lOG
Error
Codes
J5
Z9
EC
825958
Date 3/21/75
Wire Reference
Numbers
Open
Grounded
17
pr
3741 ML
8-47
lEe
8259581
PN 1607996
8-48
Date 3/21115
I/O Adapter Cable Wrap Diagram
B 0
13 0 0
OJ
00
00
00
00
1-J
DDDDDDDDDDDD
DO
00
00
00
00
00
2 0 0
13
DDDDDDDDDDDD
DO
DO
00
00
N
00
I
00
I
co
C!)
0
0
A2
N
DDDDDDDDDDDD
DO
DO
2
Reference
Number
DO
Cable INrap
3741 1/0 Adaptm Half
I/O Cable
PiJfhH'
Connector
+-BUS OUT BIT P I - K · B 0 2 ~>-K-D13 -----------A2-G13~>- J-\2-G13 ~-----------------.
+BUS IN BIT P --'---'----"-'-- I·J·S02 -<~J-D13
A2-B12 -<~ A2-H12 _. __ .. __ .---1
2A
2B
2C
+8US OUT BIT 0 --·----·---1-1<·803 -)->-K-D12 - - - - - - - - - - - A2-G12
+!\TT!\CHfvlENT RESET
IK<)04 '7,?-K-B11
A2-D10
+-BUS iN BIT
_..
j·J·803 --<~J-D12
A2-B02
-::>>-
-7>- 1\2·GI2 . - . _ - _......,
7>- /\2010 -.-...-
--«-7>-
. ----{
A2-802 ... _ . . . _ ....__ .--1
3
+BUS OUTBIT 1 ..- - - - . - -..- - l-K-B04
K-D11 - - - - - - - - - - - A2-G11
+8US IN BIT 1 - - - - - . - . - - 1·J·B04 --<~J-D11
A2-B04
4
4
+8US OUT 81T2 ---.--.-.--1·K·8m)·~>- K-D10 - " " " " ' " " " - - - - - - - - - - A2-G10
l\2C10 _ .........._ .... _-............,
+8US IN 811" 2
1-,1·805 ··-<~J-D10
A2-B05 -(~ Ai·BOE, _ .......-..-.......--_.....--'
3
-«-
A2·Gll - .... --..----.---,
1\2·804 _ .... __ ..... _._....---J
-7>-
(continued be!ovJ!
A1
DDDDDDDDDDDD
0
~0
~
DDDDDDDDDDDD
0
..,
DDDDDDDDDDDD
DO
0N
Q
DDDDDDDDDDDD
DO
DO
1-K
DDDDDDDDDDDD
0
~0
N
(continued
r)l;I()'/)!
-1>-
-j)-
5
5
+BUS OUT BIT 3 - - - - - - - - 1-K-80G
K-D09 - - - - - - - - - - - - - A2-G09
+BUT IN BIT 3
1·J-806-<~J-D09
- A2-B06
6
6
+BUS OUT BIT
+8US IN BIT 4
7
7
+BUS OUT BIT 5 - - - - - - - - 1-K-BOS
K-D07 - - - - - - - - - - - - - A2-G06
+8US IN BIT 5
l-J-BOS -<~J-D07
- A2-B09
8
8
·-i··BUS OUT BIT 6
1··K·B09
K-D06
+BUS IN BIT 6 - - - - - - - 1·J·B09 -<~J-D06·
- A2-G05 ~>-l-\2.G.05
~
- A2-Bl0 -<~ A2-81O _ _-----1
9
9
+BUS OUT BIT 7
+BUS IN BIT 7
- - - - - 1-K-Bi0 -7>-K-D05
1-J·BH) -<.~J-D05
- A2-G04
/\2·G04 . - - - - - .
- A2-Bl1 -<~ /\2-811 _ _ _--1
lOA
lOB
10C
10D
10E
10F
lOG
10H
tBUS IN PARITY ER ROR
1-I(-B11
K-D04 - - - - - - - - - - - - +END OF DATA SET our
1-K-D02-7>- K-B13
+3"141 ATTENTION REo.U!RED - - J.I(-D03
K-B12
+END OF JOB OUT
1··K-D050)- K-Bl0
+END OF RECORD
1-K-D06
K-B09
·-f.·WRITE: TO ATTACHMENT'
1-K-OOl
K-B08
+READ FROM ATTf\CHMENT - - ·1··K·DOB
K-B07
+ATTACHMENT ONLINE:l··J·D02 --- i\2··G07 - - - - ,
1-J·B07 -<~J-D08
- A2-B07 -<~ A2-807 _ _ _
....J
7>-
7)-
-7)- A2·G06
-(f-
-----.
i\2-[309 - - -.....
--7)--
.-7>-
-7>--;:.>-
-7>-
0>-
A2-D08 ~>A2-D09 --7)A2-D04 --7>A2-D05 -7>A2-D07 --7)A2-D13 ~>A2-D12 ~>A1-D12-{~'
A2·008 - - - - - ,
A2-[)09 ---~
A2·.o04
----I
/\2-005 - - - - - 1
A2·007 - - - - I
A2-013 - - - - I
/\2-012 - - - - I
A1·012 - - - - - '
/
-«(-
. +SERVICE: REQUEST --.. - - - - - 1-K-DOD -7>- K-B06 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Al-G05
--7>- AI·G05
- A2-J09 --(~A2-JOD
-
---....I
12
-+·ATTACHMENTBUSY
13
13
+ADDRESS BIT4 ·---·---···-1·K-D10~>- K-B05 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Al-J05
+ATTACHMEI\JT ERROR
1·J·D03 -<(-J-B12
- Al-Gl1
14
14
+'ADDRESS BIT 5 .
+SENSE RESPONSE
15
15
··I·-END OF JOB IN
-{-<-
16
16
+ADDRESS BIT} -------1·I<·D137>-K-B02 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Al-J02
+RESPONSE
1·.J-D08 -<~ J-B07
. Al-D13
-- A1-,105 - - -......
--«(- A1G11
- - 1·1(·011 -)>- K-B04 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Al-J04 --7)- /\1-J04 ---~
---1·J·D09 --A1-J03 - - -......
l-J·f.)OG ---K-D03
---GROUND - - - - - I
lJ-813 7)-J-D02--- Fr~mTwisted
.
Pairs
-----1·J·B12 -"7)-J-D03
SPARE~ - - - - - - - - - 1 J - D 1 1 0)-J-B04
.
SPARE ~
1·J D-IO --7>-J-B05
SPAHE*
l-J ..o07-7>-J-B08
.
f
--7>- /\1·J02 ---.....,
------'
--7>- /\2·B13 - - - - ,
--I
A1-G08~>-J\1-(308
-7>- A1·808
A2-G08-7)-A2.G08
A1-B08
----....,
---~
-----1
A2-B08 -7)-A2·B08 - - - - I
A1-J07 -7>-Al·J07 - - - - - 1
A 1-J08
1·J07 - - - - I
Al-J09
A'IJ09 - - - - '
--7)- ,:;
-7>-
*Spare wires are shown because they are useful in cable repair.
IEC
8259581
Oat. 3/21n5
PI\! 1607997
3741 ML
8-49
lEe
825958
PN 1607998
I/O Adapter Diagnostic Wrap
Program Flowchart
Add HEX 04 to
Ir,yist.n 0
NUM SHIFT
Press RESET
REC ADV to
data set label 10
FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
Buffer
1
Do similar tests
4
on buffers 3
through 9
6
5
A
Add
02
04
06
08
OA
OC
OE
10
16
lA
}
Jump to
b~ffer A
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
1 (number)
REC ADV
Add HEX lA
to register 0
SEL PROG
1 (numbed
Display of G6
means that buffers loaded OK
shown
above
8-50
Yes
Example (first
U200 = put
U3 86 = put
U3 OA = put
Set up test
conditions for
current test
test)
00 in register 2
86 in register 3
OA in register 3
I
I
I
A30A10026 = test register 3
for OA; if not
equal, go to
10026
(buffer A,
position 26)
Execute the
current test
Enter trace mode
(single step)
I1._ _ _ _ _ _ _
Execute the next
instruction
-------j
I
No
I
I
I
Yes
Jump to
current test
error code
Load next record
into next format
buffer
fc;o to 10026
-Lbuffer A, position 26)
:
1
I
Execute one
instruction
-
{
J4 displayed on a
flashing screen
Yes
Place HEX 02
in register 0
Return to
index track
No
Yes
Test ran
OK
Test ran
Jump to
buffer 2
- {
._OK
Yes
* HoldALPHASHIFTandNUM
SHIFT while pressing FUNCT
SELlower
"Hold ALPHA SHI FT and NUM
SHIFT while pressing RESET
6
page 8-50
lEe
825958
Date 3/21/75
PN 1607999
3741 ML
8-51
825958
3/21/75
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619487
8-52
OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLOWCHARTING CONVENTIONS
OPERATING PROCEDURES INDEX
BSCA to 3872 modem & 3747
BSCA Display Mode Indicators
BSCA Error Logouts
BSCA Feature (Operational Flowchart) .
Copy Data Set (to EOD) . .
Copy Image (to EOE) . . . . .
Copy to Specified Address
Data Recorder Attachment Table of
Contents . . . .
Data Set Label. . .
Delete Data Set Label
Delete Record. . .
Disk Record Sequences.
Enter. . . . . . .
EXl?anded Communications
I/O Adapter Table of Contents
Initialization, Disk
Modify Index. .
Offline Field Totals
Online Field Totals
Operator Display.
Operator Guidance
Power On and Read Index.
Print a Data Set (to EO D) .
Print a Displayed Record .
Print Continued Data Sets .
Print Part of a Data Set (to EOD)
Print Records by Using Search Address or
Search Sequential Content ... . .
Print Records by Using Search Content
Production Statistics (Enter Mode). .
Production Statistics (Read Index Mode)
Program, How to Make.
Program Load . .
Read Index Mode
Record Insert .
Search Address
Search Content
Search EOD
.
Search Masks .
Search Sequential Content
Self-Check. . . . . .
Update . . . . . . .
Verify (with Field Correct)
3713 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
(ERP) . . . . . . . . . . .
3715 Printer Error Recovery Procedures
(ERP) . . . . .
. ...
3713 Printer Programs. . . . . .
3715 Printer Programs . . . . . .
Note: See 3717 MLM for 3717 procedures.
9-49
· 9-45
· 9-43
. 9-42
· 9-26
· 9-31
.9-28
.9-73
· 9-2
· 9-5
· 9-15
· 9-53
· 9-6
· 9-57
· 9-91
· 9-50
· 9-4
· 9-18
· 9-22
· 9-2
· 9-54
· 9-3
· 9-37
.9-37
9-40.1
.9-38
.9-40
.9-39
.9-14
· 9-14
.9-32
.9-33
· 9-3
.9-56
· 9-12
.9-16
. 9-13
. 9-16
.9-16
. 9-24
· 9-8
.9-10
The flowcharting symbols used in the operating
procedures flowcharts are:
D
(--)
Entry/Exit
Decision
Processing
o
Keying
Document
Display
•
Manual Operation
CJ
On-Page
Comment
Off-Page
Connectors
Most of the symbols are self-explanatory, but the
following symbols deserve comment:
Identifies specific keys to prE!SS
on the keyboard, or refers to
keyed data .
Identifies information displayed .
9-40.2
.9-41
. 9-34
9-34.2
Refers to a specific MAP .
EC 825853
825958
826065
11/15114
3/21115
8/1115
PN 1619047
I
3741 ML
9-1
EC 825853
825958
826~65
11/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1619048
9-2
OPERATOR DISPLAY
Codes Displayed
37 3S
Begin
Field
Cursor
Program
Shift
Second
Disk
Disk
L6
l}
Status
0
40
L6
2
3
4
5
6
1 ---------------------------41 --------------------------,
81 --------------------------,
121-DATA--128 ----.
161 ------------------------
0 AT A LIN E
0 ATAL IN E
DATA LIN E
OPERATOR
OPE RATO R
R
W
t
l}
Not Ready
(disk not loaded)
Ready
Wait
N
------------------------- 40
------------------------- 80
------------------------ 120
GUIDANCE ----160
GU IDANCE --- 200
H U
R
P
C
E
F
I
M
N
P
S
U
V
A dash between mode and status means
that the alternate method of record advance was selected. (The 3741 bypasses
all fields past the cursor when REC ADV
is pressed in enter mode.)
The display unit displays six lines of information.
Data Set Label
Fields in heavy lines are required by the 3740 data
entry system.
4
HDR1
13
6
23
27
29
35
33
X
Beginning
of Extent
Data Set Name
Communications
Transmit
Transmit-transparent
Receive
Transmit-receive
Transmit-transparent/receive
Transmit buffered
Transmit buffered/receive
Inquiry
Request for test (R FT)
E test mode
C E
R
P
of Extent
File Protect
Data Set Accessibility
Bypass Data Set
BSCA/EBSCA Mode
39
Mode of Operation
Input to 3741
Record Mode
File Modes
Output from 3741
Record Mode
File Modes
Character Mode
Single Read
Single Punch
Field Correct
Enter
Field Totals
Initialize
Modify
Record Insert
Print
Search
Update
Verify
Read Index
Customer Engineer
Read
Punch
End of Data
Col 37
Mode
Col3S
P
P
P
C
T
P
R
B
0
J
P
K
P
%
W
Status Indicators
Col 39
Status Legend
Col 39
"-
r
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
B
C
"
B
B
C
C
C
J
J
J
C
C
C
C
J
J
J
B
B
B
B
B
J
P
T
Read 10 card
Reception complete
Transmission incomplete
Reception incomplete
Print unattended
Transmission complete
POWER ON AND READ INDEX
Read Index Mode
START
1.
~
23-second delay
for power on
diagnostics
Any operation can be selected from read
index mode.
2.
Press REC ADV or REC BKSP to read and
display any record on the index track (00).
3.
Data set records on the index track are 08
through 26.
4.
To select a data set, record advance or
record backspace to the record (00008
through 00026) containing the desired
data set.
5.
Yes
No
Yes
All operations must be performed within the
limits of the selected data set.
NUM SHIFT/RESET)
Read index mode
Yes
Bad:!
No
setl'~
Disk drive power
on reset (resets
drives to index
track)
'----I
No
Yes
Use MAP 2-1
Yes
No
No
KeYindata3
Yes
Use MAP 5-1
Wait 5 seconds
~UNCT SEL lower)
REC ADV
lEe
823146
Oa'. 9/15174
I
PN 1619049
3741 ML
9-3
lEe 823146
I
PN 1619050
9-4
Date 9/15/74
MODIFY INDEX
START
Key in label
modifications
REC ADV
Yes
Yes
FUNCT SEL lower
No
~erform error recovery (see Data
Set Label ERP
Procedures), then
continue
Buzz to indicate
end of data set
label modification
M
to required data set
label
STOP
No
Yes
The selected data
set label is deleted.
Label data can be
written after reset
No
Yes
RESET·
~,
DELETE DATA SET LABEL
[)ELETE REC
REC ADV or REC
BKSP to required
data set label
uzz to indicate
end-of-data set
Itlbel deletion
Index data set
label is deleted
D
C
STOP
RESET
lEe
823146
Date 9/15174
II
I
PN 1619051
3741 ML
9-5
lEe
I'
ENTER
823146
I
PN 1619052
9-6
\
,
I
When enter mode is selected', both the current
record buffer and the preceding record buffer
are filled with blanks. Keyed characters are then
accumulated in the current record buffer until an
entire record is entered. The record can be changed or corrected if record advancing hasn't occurred.
At the time record advancing occurs, the current
record is moved to the preceding record buffer,
and written to disk. The image of the last record
entered remains in the preceding reCOrd\'buffer
until record advancing occurs again.
Data set label
deleted. Go to
good label
RESET
Go to unprotected
data set
~,
\
Page
9-7
Page
9-6
REC BKSP
Enter data
T errors will not
r- - -- occur if AUTO REC
I
ADV switch is on
Cursor returns to
first character"
position of record
I
-Allotted number of
records within data
set have been used.
Machine enters
----I
read index mode,
program zero
~1:_:_t:_2_~_::_~_4~1______~____~__P_N____1619053 I
3741 ML
9-7
lEe 823146
0.,.9/15174
UPDATE
I
PN 1619054
)
START
Bad data
set label
EOD
= BOE No
data on selected
data set
RESET
---
Page
9-9
--
9-8
RECADV
RESET
See Enter
procedure
(
REC ADV to first
unwritten record
to required record
Yes·
Yes
See correct
operating
procedures
STOP
lEe
823146
Date 911Sn4
/
I
PN 1619055
3741 ML
9-9
I
I
EC823146
PN 1619056
Date 9115n4
VERIFY (With Field Correct)
START
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
VERIFY
Bad data
set label
EOD = BOE
No data on selected data set
REC ADV
or REC BKSP
to written data
set
RESET
REC ADV or REC
BKSP to unprotected
data set label
Page
'9-11
9-10
Page
9-10
Complete
r~
ord wi.t~ cursor)
at position
causing erro:.J
Field correct
RESET ]
Yes
Machine enters
read index mode
and writes a verify
mark on -data set·
label
Cursor moves to
. first position of
current field.
DUP
Character being.
displayed
Field data
No
-Character c a u : \
mismatch
~
Cursor returns to
first position of
current field,
machine returns to
verify mode
STOP
lEe 823146
Da'. 9115174
I
F'N 1619057
3741 ML
9-11
lEe 823146 I
PN 1619058
9-12
Do.09/15n4
SEARCH ADDRESS
START
No
Yes
A deleted record
has been addressed
FUNCT SEL lower
Yes
Search address
Bad data
set label
EOD = BOE no
data on selected
data set.
Select a valid address between
BOE-l and EOD-l
that is not on the
index cylinder
Yes
No
Enter address
RECADV
Correct
label
See UPDATE
operating procedure to continue
SEARCH EOD
START
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH EOD
EOD
= BOE no
data on selected
data set
~'::'::""-r---;
Machine returns to
index. Try a different data set
See UPDATE operating procedure
to continue
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PI
3741 ML
9-13
I
EC 823146
I
PN 1619060 ]
Date 9115/74
Enter Mode
PRODUCTION STATISTICS
START
Read Index Mode
START
~...;...----...,
Not program zero
or data has been
keyed.
Record length
less than 21
RECADV
Machine returns to
index track and displays data set label
Statistics written
in first 21 positions
of current record.
See enter operating
procedures to continue.
STOP
/
\
9-14
DELETE RECORD
START
[:LETEREC
uzz
~
to indicate
end-of -record
deletion
FUNCT SEL lower
Record is deleted
UPDATE
REC ADV to
required record
FUNCT SEL lower
C
RESET
STOP
~1:_:_t:_2_:_:-~-7-4+1------;------'1 P~11619061
IJ--
I
3741 ML
9-15
I
EC 823146
~ate
SEARCH CONTENT ANP SEARCH
SEQUENTIAL CONTENT
I
PN 1619062
9/15174
START
Search Masks
l
Search content and search sequential content
both require a search mask.
Page
9-17
Search Content Mask
A search content mask contains part or all of
the data contained in the record being located.
Data selected for a search mask must appear in
identical positions in the mask and the corresponding record.
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH SEa
CONTENT
Search Sequential Content Mask
A search sequential content mask is the same as
a search content mask, but the records oeing
searched must be in ascending alpha numeric
order by search field. That is, the search field of
each succeeding record must have a higher value
than the search field of the preceding record.
FUNCT SEL Lower
SEARCH CONTENT
Yes
No
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
I
I
I
I
I
RECADV
Page
9-17
9-16
Page
9-16
Yes
No
No
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH SEQ
CONTENT
The record has
not been found
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH CONTENT
New search mask
Empty data set
REC ADV
Page
9-16
lEe
823146
Date 9/1Sn4
I
PN 1619063
3741 ML
9-17
lEe 823146
Date
OFFLINE FIELD TOTALS
The offline field totals feature is used to obtain
totals from records that have already been entered,
updated, or verified. The offline field totals
feature uses the three 19-digit accumulators to add,
under program control, data in specific fields into
the assigned accumulator. A field total may include any number 0-9 and any of the 256 EBDCIC
codes. All codes with low order 4 bits equalling
0-9 are added with a value 0-9. All other codes
have the value of zero. All fields in which the
units position codes have the high order bits equal
to A, B, or D, are negative fields.
The offline field totals feature allows the user to
read field totals from an accumulator into a
record with or without resetting the accumulator.
Selecting Offline Field Totals
9/1sn4:
I
PN 1619064
If AUTO REC ADV is turned off, the field totals
operation stops and the record following the last
record processed is displayed. Press REC ADV
to process the record displayed and advance to
the next record. Pressing RESET during a field
totals operation changes the mode to update mode.
At the end of a field total operation, the accumulators retain the field totals. If the end-of-data
address is reached, the data set label is displayed
and the mode changed to read index mode.
Load field totals
program and mask
progra m (masks
are described on
page 9-16)
. Offline field totals feature can be selected from the
read index or update mode. When this feature is
selected, the mode changes to field totals and an
, F is displayed on the status line. To perform offline field totals:
: 1.
Insert diskette and close cover.
, 2.
Load .the program and mask statements needed to obtain the field totals.
3.
If in the update mode, position the disk to
the first record to be used in the field
totals operation.
4.
Turn AUTO R EC ADV switch on for automatic record advancing.
5.
Press FUNCT SEL upper and COMPUTE
FIELD TOTALS.
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
The accumulators are reset to zero, and the field
totals operation begins. Records are processed
under control of the program specified in the mask.
statements. Field definition characters are ignored,
except those followed by a number. Field totals
fields are identified by following a field definition
character with a 1, 2, or 3 which specifies which of
the three accumulators is to be used. The second
and third positions after the field definition character can be used to cause the field to be accumulated into two or three accumulators.
The low order 14 digits of a field totals field are
added into the specified accumulators. Overflow
beyond 19 digits in an accumulator is not indicated. Deleted records are bypassed. Disk errors
and invalid mask statement errors stop the field
totals operations.
Page
9-19
Page
9-19
9-18
Machine automatically field computes
records; when EOO
reached, goes to
read index mode
RESET
R
R
*Negative Totals
The field totals are negative if the units position
contains one of the following characters:
-ft means
means
means
means
means
means
o means
P means
Q means
R means
J
K
L
M
N
STOP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lEe
823146
PN 1619065
3741 ML
9-19
Writing Field Totals Into Records on Disks
After field totals are accumulated in the accumulators, the contents of the accumulators can be
written into a field in the record on disk. This
is done by programming the field in the record
into which the total is to be read with the field
definition character S followed by 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
or 9. If 4, 5, or 6 is specified, the contents of the
accumulator does not change. If 7, 8, or 9 is
specified, the accumulator is reset to zero. (4
and 7 specify accumulator 1, 5 and 8 specify accumulator 2, and 6 and 9 specify accumulator 3.)
If the field in the record that the accumulated
total is to be read into is shorter than the accumulated total, only the low order digits of the accumulator are read into the field in the current
record buffer. If the field in the record is larger
than the accumulated total (19 digits), the total
is right-adjusted in the field and the remainder of
the field is filled with zeroes.
Sample Field Totals Procedure
(Online and Offline)
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press RETURN TO INDEX
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS
Press R
Set AUTO R EC ADV switch on.
Enter the following N
Press NUM SHIFT and U
Press E
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press PROG LOAD
Press U
Enter the following < 1. (include period)
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press PROG LOAD
Press I
Press SEL PROG
Press U
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press ENTER
Hold REP and press U key to enter 32
records. (32 records in this example)
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press RETURN TO INDEX
Press FUNCT SEL upper
Press DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS (If 32
records were entered and accumulated
online, display should be 352 )
Press R
- Press FUNCT SEL upper
-
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1/75
Press COMPUTE FIELD TOTALS
Press FUNCTSEL upper
Press DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS (If 32
records were accumulated offline, display
should be 352 )
Press R
Mask Statements
A mask statement can be used to cause a specific
program to be selected to process a specific type
of record. The mask statement has the following
formats:
m disk 2. If the first data set is received
on di:ik 1, operation is the same as in the previous s()ctions Disk 1 Only and Disk 1 and Disk 2.
Characters
Meaning
HT (TAB)
Tab to the next tab stop in
program A
Execute a carriage return/
line feed function
Skip to code 1 in program A
Skip to code 2 in program A
Skip to code 3 in program A
Skip to code 4 in program A
Skip to code 5 in program A
Skip to code 6 in program A
Skip to code 7 in program A
Ski p to code 8 in program A
Skip to code 9 in program A
Skip to line 1
Skip to line 2
Skip to line 3
Skip to line 4
Skip to line 5
Skip to line 6
Skip to line 7
Skip to line 8
Skip to line 9
Insert "h" blanks in a print
line. "h" can be from 2 to 63
spaces. If more spaces
are needed, two compression
sequences can be strung together.
N L (Newline) or
LF (Line Feed)
ESC A
ESC B
ESC C
ESC 0
ESC E
ESC F
ESC G
ESC H
ESC I
ESC /
ESC S
ESC T
ESC U
ESC V
ESC W
ESC X
ESC Y
ESC Z
(lGS) h
The last ESC function is executed by the next new
line or line feed control character.
If the print buffer is filled with 128 characters and
the next character is not a new line/line feed, or
ESC sequence, a carriage return/line feed function and a pending escape function is performed.
The 3715 can print to EOD from disk 1 if the
entire data set is contained as one diskette. If
the data set is contained as multiple diskettes
and continuous printing is desired, then there
must be a C in position 45 of the data set label.
In this case when the end of the disk is reached,
the printer will stop, and the 3741 will post a J
error and a status of PI. The operator then keys
RESET which causes the error to be reset and
cause a return to index. Next, the disk is removed
and the next disk inserted, then key:
FUNCT SEL upper
NUM SHIFT (hold down when keying next
key)
PRINTTO EOD
This will cause the printer to continue (AUTO
REC ADV switch must be on). This procedure
can be repeated regardless of how many disks
the data set occupies.
Disk 1 and Disk 2
Continuous printing can be done as mentioned
in the last section Disk 1 Only, but in this case
a disk must not be present in drive 2. If a disk
is present in drive 2, the control automatically
passes to drive 2, reads the first valid header
label of the index track, and prints the data
set indicated by that label. Further continuation is then via drive 1 or drive 2 at the operator
option.
All print operations must start on drive 1 and
can be continued on drive 2. No operator print
function can begin on drive 2. If both drives
have a disk present and an operation is started,
the two disks are treated as one disk of double
size. All operations will continue to the second
disk and terminate the same as a system with
only 1 drive.
A null character is a hex 00. A blank character is
a hex 40.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619422
I
3741 ML
9-34.7
lEe
825853
Oat. 11/15/74
I
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619423
9-34.8
Sample Printer Program
Do steps 1-3.
1.
Enter on disk the following data records:
Record 1:
5 * * ** * * ** * * * * * * * * * * ** * ** * * ** * * * * * * ** * * * *
Record 2:
6 * * ***
Record 3:
*****
5 * **** ****** ** ** ******* **** **** *** ******
i
*
PRINTER FORMATING EXAMPLE
*
Record 4:
7THE TYPE OF FORMAT CONTROL IS DETERMINE
D BY THE FIRST CHARACTER IN PROGRAM
Record 5:
8LEVEL A. IF THE CHARACTER IS A COLON, P
RINTING WILL BE CONTROLLED BY
Record 6:
8THE CURRENTLY SELECTED PROGRAM.
CHARACTER IS A PERCENT SIGN,
Record 7:
8THE FIRST CHARACTER OF EACH INDIVIDUAL
RECORD WILL SELECT THE PRINTER
Record 8:
8PROGRAM FOR THAT RECORD. IF THE CHARACT
ER IS A PLUS SIGN, DATA STREAM
Record 9:
8CONTROL CHARACTERS WILL BE USED TO CONT
IF THE
ROL PRINTER FORMATING.
IF THE
Record 10: 8CHARACTER IS ANYTHING ELSE, DATA WILL B
E PRINTED WITH ONE RELOAD PER
Record 11: 8LINE AND NO FORMATING.
Record 12: 7PRINTER CONTROL PROGRAMS ARE MADE IN TH
E FORM NUMBER FORMAT CODE, NUMBER
Record 13: 8FORMAT CODE, ••• Q. THE FORMAT CODE DETE
RMINES THE FIELD TYPE OR
Record 14: 8FUNCTION AND THE NUMBER DETERMINES FIEL
D LENGTH OR NUMBER OF TIMES THE
Record 15: 8FUNCTION IS TO BE EXECUTED. ALL PRINTER
CONTROL PROGRAMS MUST END WITH
Record 16: 8Q CO DE •
lEe
823146
Date 9l1Sn4
I
PN 1619081
3741 ML
9-35
lEe
2.
823146
I
PN 1619082
Enter into the program buffers the following
programs:
Program 5: NY 2 S 3T 40 ACQ
Program 6: NY3TATAC3TATAC3T40AC3TATAC3TATACQ
Program 7: NY3CT75ACQ
Program 8: NY2T70ACQ
I
I
Program A: % T2 T 2
Tab 5
Tab 1 0 Tab 20
±
Chara~r J l,t t11
position
3.
E
1
59
67
Press FUNCT SEL upper and press PRINT
TO EOO to print the following page:
skip to line 6 -**************.**************************
*
*
*
PRINTER FORMATING EXAMPLE
*
*
-i
*
skip to line 12
*
*
*
*
* * ** ** * ** ** ** ** ** * * ** ** * ** * * * ** * * * * * * * *
THE TYPE OF FORMAT CONTROL IS DETERMINED BY THE FIRST CHARACTER IN PROGRAM
LEVEL A. IF THE CHARACTER IS A COLON, PRINTING WILL BE CONTROLLED BY
THE CURRENTLY SELECTED PROGRAM. IF THE CHARACTER IS A PERCENT SIGN,
THE FIRST CHARACTER OF EACH INDIVIDUAL RECORD WILL SELECT THE PRINTER
PROGRAM FOR THAT RECORD. IF THE CHARACTER IS A PLUS SIGN, DATA STREAM
CONTROL CHARACTERS WILL BE USED TO CONTROL PRINTER FORMATING. IF THE
CHARACTER IS ANYTHING ELSE, DATA WILL BE PRINTED WITH ONE RELOAD PER
LINE AND NO FORMATING.
t
PRINTER CONTROL PROGRAMS ARE MADE IN THE FORM NUMBER FORMAT CODE, NUMBER
FORMAT CODE, ... Q. THE FORMAT CODE DETERMINES THE FIELD TYPE OR
FUNCTION AND THE NUMBER DETERMINES FIELD LENGTH OR NUMBER OF TIMES THE
FUNCTION IS TO BE EXECUTED. ALL PRINTER CONTROL PROGRAMS MUST END WITH
I
Tab 5
Edge of
form
CODE.
Tab 10
1
Tab 20
9-36
PRINT A DISPLAYED RECORD
PRINT A DATA SET (To EOO)
START
START
Load and select
printer programs
(See Printer Programs and Program Load operating procedures)
No
Load and select
printer programs
(See Printer Programs and Program Load operat
ing procedures)
Select printer
programs if
necessary
-FUNCT SEL upper
PRINT REC
REC AOVor REC
BKSP to the required
data set label
/
PR
~intmode)
Yes
Reset and correct
the source of the
error (See Printer
ERP operating
procedure).
No
FUNCT SEL upper
PRINTTO EOO
After printing the
record displayed,
machine returns to
the mode it was in
before printing.
Yes
Reset and correct
the source of the
error (See Printer
ERP operating
After printing the
data set, machine
returns to read index mode and displays the data set
label
STOP
proc(~dure).
STOP
EC 823146
Date 9/15n4
825853
11/15/74
PN 1619083
I
3741 ML
9-37
EC 823146
Date 9115n4
825853
PN 1619084
11/15/74
PRINT PART OF A DATA SET (To EOD)
Lo~d and select
printer programs.(See Printer Program and Program
Load operating
procedures)
REC ADV or REC
BKSP to the required
data set label.
FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
Yes
Reset and correct
the source of the
error (See Printer
- ERP operating
procedure).
No
After printing the
data set, machine
returns to read index mode and displays the data set
label.
\
9-38
PRINT RECORDS BY USING SEARCH CONTENT
START
Load printer programs (See Printer
Programs and
Program Load operating procedures)
Correct the source
of the error, (see
Printer ERP operating procedures).
After printing records or if record
not found, machine returns to read
index mode and
displays data set
label.
cb
Select printer program if necessary.
(see Program Load
operating procedure.)
FUNCT SEL upper
PRINTTO EOO
lEe
823146
PN 1619085
3741 ML
9-39
EC 823146
Date 9/15n4
825853
11/15n4
PN 1619086
9-40
-
PRINT A RECORD BY USING SEARCH ADDRESS
OR SEARCH SEQUENTIAL
CONTENT
START
Load printer programs (see Printer
Programs and Program Load operating procedures).
Search Sequential
Content operating
procedures) .
Select printer programs if necessary.
(See Program Load
operating procedures.)
Correct the source
of the error (See
Printer E RP operating procedures)
After printing records, machine displays record and
returns to update
mode. If record
not found, return
to read index
mode.
/'
PRINT CONTINUED DATA SETS
START
No
No
After printing the
last record on drive
1 disk, the first
valid data set on the
second disk is printed
After printing the
last record on a
disk, the machine
displays the record
and a J error
After printing the
last record on drive
2 disk, the machine
displays the record
and a J error
Printer printJa
data set.
Printer continues
to print the data
set
STOP
EC
825853
Date 11115174
PN 1619424
I
3741 ML
9-40.1
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
PN 1619425
11/15/74
3713 PRINTER ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES (ERP)
START
See Print Continued Data Sets
RESET
~------~
Correct the printer
programs.
See Symptom
Index (page
1-1 ).
RESET
RESET
No power on cycle
(see Power On operating procedures)
and try to print.
Yes
~----~
9-40.2
3715 PRINTER ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES (ERP)
START
Yes
See 'Print Continued Data Sets'
operating proced-
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
;'
See Symptom Index (page 1-1)
Correct the printer
programs
Status = 3 correct
illegal character
in data
STOP
EC
825853
Date 11/15174
PI'I 1619087
I
3741 ML
9-41
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4.
8/1n5
BSCA FEATURE (Operational Flowchart)
PN 1619088
9-42
Page 9-44
9-45
T
Machine is not in
read index or
update mode
Put machine in
update or XR
mode
B
Invalid index.
Correct
CPU 10 more
than 15 characters or key
locked
P
Enter shorter 10
or unlock key
o
Ikl
V
Vol label 1 on
disk 2 is
protected
~...;..;..._ _ _....
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
checkout
Page
9-43
R
Page
9-43
Disk 2
Initialization error 1 - - - - - - - - . \
or read error on
disk 1
Select one of
the following
keys
I
I
I
--1
STOP
Page
9-42
Page 9-48
~....;;..;;..---~
Transmit portion
of transmit/receive
is complete
Check error
logout display
RFT message
sent. Waiting
for responses
Yes
Page 9-44
No
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
checkout
Check for RC, %C,
BC, DC, TT, and
PT modes
(
------
mBSCA Error Logout
. Mode determined by operation.
When in R, T, P, B, or D mode, the bottom
line on the ~isplay shows the following:
Position
End-of-job
*
*
*
*
1
4
7
10
**14-16
** 19 - 21
** 24 - 26
** 29 - 31
STOP
o
001
A
A
01001
Meaning
Data terminal ready. - - - + 0 o 001 004 000 001
Data set ready. _____+-_--.J
Request to send.-----+-------'
Clear to send.----CRC checks in receive. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
I
~------~~r__+-_+-_+---~
....J
NAKs received in transmit.----------.....J
Two second time-outs. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
Three second time-outs. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
.......J
* Note: 1 indicates on; .0 indicates off.
** Note: Three position decimal counter.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
fiN 1619089
3741 ML
9-43
EC 823146
....
I Date
BSCA FEATURE
9115n4
826065
8/1n5
-
PN 1619090
9-44
-0
U:~ntinued)
Make note of error
and press RESET. r - - - - - - 1
See Symptom
Index
/
.r------!
No response to line
bid or line idle for
20 seconds, or rem?te I D compare
faIled
Call remote end
to determine
Remote end
terminated job
prematurely
~ Page 9-46
No
Use D or P mode
Enter data again
Page 9-42
Page 9-47
BSCA Display Mode Indicators
Page 9-43, 9-46
A mode indicator is displayed in positions 37 and
38 of the status line. The following shows the key
required to select the mode, the mode displayed,
and the meaning:
Key Display Meaning
Yes
Check error
logout display
No
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
checkout
Place call or wait
for call from
remote end
Press data button
(except for 1200
bps integrated and
IBM 3872 modems)
C
T
T
T
P
P
P
R
R
R
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
D
Press autoanswer
button, terminal
may be unattended
C
T
TI
TT
P
PI
PT
R
RC
RJ
B
BT
BI
BJ
BC
D
DI
DT
DJ
DC
%
%C
%T
W
WI
BB
DB
PB
TB
%J
%1
Communication
Transmit
Transmit incomplete
Transmit completl~
Transmit transpanmt text
Transmit transpamnt incomplete
Transmit transpamnt complete
Receive mode
Receive complete
Receive incomplete
Transmit/receive (T/R)
Transmit portion of T /R complete
Transmit portion of T /R incomplete
Receive portion of T/R incomplete
T /R complete
Transmit transpar~nt/receive (TT /R)
Transmit portion of TT/R incomplete
Transmit portion of TT /R complete
Receive portion of TT /R incomplete
TT /R complete
Online test mode
Online test complete
Online test complete (transmit)
Wrap test
Wrap test incomplete
Read operator ID (T/R)
Read operator ID (TT/R)
Read operator ID (transmit transparent)
R.ead operator ID (transmit)
Online test incomplete (receive portion)
Online test incomplete (transmit portion)
If the mode indicates an incomplete operation, check the error indicator in position 7.
See Symptom Index; Erroj~ Indicators, 1-2.
No
Page 9-43
Correct
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
checkout
Page 9-42
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1/75
PN 1619091
3741 ML
9-45
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619092
9-46
.BSCA FEATURE (Continued)
Page
9-47
Page 9-44
Remote end sent 4
~_Y_e_s_ _ _~ consecutive NAKs t-----~
to transmitted record
Yes
Yes
/""""----~
Received line bid
from remote end
when in a complete mode or
with an error
waiting
Communications
can be reestablished without returning to XR
mode, but called
end must be on
hook for the ring.
Call remote end to
determine cause
of error and retry
job
Call remote end to
determine if there
was more data to
be transmitted; if
some, retry job
Page
9-45
Two consecutive
records of different length received,
or if in update
mode, fi rst record
didn't match data
set record length
Call remote end to
determine reason
for wrong length;
retry job
Remote end
responded NAK
to local line bid
No
Call remote end to
find why remote
end i~ sendi ng
NAK. Retry job
No
accept status message. Disk error is t------~ Make note of error
and press RESET
the significant
error
Yes
No
'--_..J
Page
9-47
Yes
D-error. Continued data set found
on disk 1 but disk
2 not available or
no good indexes
found on disk 2,
or continued data
set found on disk
2.
See Symptom
t-----..J
Index
D-error in receive
mode. Not enough
Set up disk(s) to
space on disk to
r-------+l
receive rest of data
receive all data, or
Rerun job
not enough good
labels to receive all
data sets
Correct disk configuration. Retry
whole job or send
last part of data
set
r-------....L----I~JI------
Page
9-47
Page
9-46
Both ends in transmit mode. Call re> - - - - - - , mote end to determine transmitting
station
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
No
Data set ready
Invalid index found
,in transmit mode.
Correct and retry
OFF detected
during communications
job
Secure index
found (disk 1 or
2) Replace and
start communications again
Page 9-44,9-46
Yes
Call remote end
and indicate call
was terminated.
See MAP 7-6
for BSCA
checkout
Page
9-46
EC 823146
Date 9/15174
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619093
3741 ML
9-47
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
811n5
PN 1619094
9-48
BSCA FEATURE (Continued)
See MAP 7-7
REC ADV
Leading 1's
error
Leading D's
error
See MAP 5-10
Diagnostic
badge read.
Page 9-43
BSCA TO 3872 MODEM AND 3747
3741 Places the Call and Will R:!ceive From the 3747
The following examples all use the 3872 modem.
3741
1.
2.
3.
4.
3741 # 1 Places the Call and Will Transmit
3741 #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
-
Press FUNCT SEL upper
Press COMM
Press the M key
Press the T key
5.
6.
10.
11.
12.
9.
10.
- Place the call
Receive the call-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
11.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10.
11.
12.
3741#2
7.
9.
-10.
11.
5.
- Place the call
9.
Press FUNCT SEL upper
Press COMM
Press the R key
Receive the ca"-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
3747 Places the Call and Will
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
RI~ceive
From the 3741
3747
3747
. - Press FUNCT SEL upper
Press COMM
Press the M key
Press the T key
1.
2.
3.
4.
Display at 406
5.
- Place the call
3741
- Press FUNCT SEL upper
- Press COMM
- Press the T key
6.
- Receive the call-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
7.
8.
Display at 406
Press the C key
9.
- Place the call
8.
Display at 406
3741
7.
Receive the call-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.
- Place the call
3741
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
6.
3741 Places the Call and Will Transmit to the 3747
1.
2.
3.
4.
- Receive the call-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
3747
Press FUNCT SE L upper
Press COMM
Press the T key
7.
8.
9.
- Place the call
3747 Places the Call and Will Transmit to the 3741
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
3741 #1
- Press FUNCT,SEL upper
- Press COMM
Press the M key
- Press the R key
Display at 406
- Press the C key
8.
3741 # 1 Places the Call and Will Receive
1.
- Press FUNCT SE L upper
- Press COMM
Press the M key
- Press the R key
5.
6.
7.
Press FUNCT SEL upper
Press COMM
Press the R key
7.
8.
9.
3741 #2
3747
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
Receive the ca"-autoanswer or manual
- Go to data
- Wait for answer tone to finish
(line goes dead)
- Go to data
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
11/15114
PN
3741 ML
9-49
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
11/15174
PN 1619096
DISK INITIALIZATION (Disk Check Portion)
START
Disk Check
If disk check
is not desired
prior to disk
initialization
-go to (9-52).
Page 9-51
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
9-50
NNA
-
L-
First bad track will ,Ippear
in positi ons 41-42, its error
in position 43. Second bad
track will appear in positions
44-45, its error in position
46, etc.
1C-CRC
I-missing 10
error
First 10 tracks with errors
will be displayed. Only first
error in track will bE~ shown.
\
S-deleted rec
track number
Page 9-50
Page
9-52
First bad track
in positions 9-10.
Second bad track
in positions 11-12.
~--
No
Disk is good
EC 823146
Date 9/15n4
_
825~53
11/15/74
PN 1619097
3741 ML
9-51
DISK INITIALIZATION
Page
9-53
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1175
PN 1619098
9-52
START
Disk Initialization
Page
9-51 (3)
No
Yes
The XW mode with
error condition migh
remain on the display
for several minutes
before changing to
XR mode
Wait for ready tone
XR mode
NUM SHIFT and RESET
Enter H D R 1. Each of the following
fields is optional and can be left blank.
•
Volume ID in positions 1-6
• Sector sequence code in positions 7-8
(normally left blank). Valid entries, in
addition to the positions being left
blank, are shown in the Disk Record
Sequences chart. Most commonly
used are 01 (same as being left blank)
and 02. Entering 01 causes the sector
arrangement to be 1, 2, 3, 4, .... 25,
26. Entering 02 causes the sector arrangement to be 1, 3, 5, .... 25, 2, 4
.... 24,26.
•
First bad track in positions 9-10
•
Second bad track in positions 11-12.
•
Blank in positions 13-14
•
Blank for record length of 80 or L for
record length of 128 in position 15
/
/
I
j
/
DISK INITIALIZATION (Continued)
Record 00007
Positions 77 & 78
DISK RECOI~D SEQUENCES
blank
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FUNCT SEL lower
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Yes
01
02
03
1
1
234
3
5
7
4
7
10
13
5
9
6
11
16
7
13
19
8
15
22
9
17
25
10
19
2
11
21
5
12
23
8
13
25
11
14
2
14
15
4
17
16
6
20
17
8
23
18
10
26
19
12
3
20
14
6
21
16
9
22
18
12
23
20
15
24
22
18
25
24
21
26
26
24
04
05
06
1
1
56'7
9
11
13
13
16
19
17
21
~~5
21
26
2
25
2
,g
2
7
14
6
12
~~O
10
17
~!6
14
22
3
18
3
9
22
8
15
26
13
~~1
3
18
4
7
23
'lO
11
4
'16
15
9
:~2
19
14
5
23
19
'11
24
'17
4
8
5
23
12
10
6
15
'12
16
20
20
'18
24
25
24
07
08
1
1
8
9
15
22
17
25
2
9
09
10
11
10
19
11
12
23
1
21
2
2
2
11
12
10
18
26
20
16
23
3
22
3
3
3
12
21
13
23
10
17
24
11
19
·4
4
11
12
20
18
25
5
12
19
26
6
13
20
5
13
21
6
14
22
7
15
23
7
8
14
21
16
24
12
4
4
13
14
24
5
15
25
6
16
26
22
5
14
23
6
15
24
7
7
16
25
8
17
26
17
9
18
8
18
9
19
10
20
13
1
13
25
14
2
2
2
15
13
14
3
24
26
16
334
14
15
17
25
4
5
4
16
18
5
6
15
26
17
19
567
16
18
20
678
17
19
21
789
18
20
22
8
9
10
19
21
23
10
9
11
22 24
20
11
10
12
21
23
25
12
11
13
22 24 26
Tracks listed on
data line 2 have
one or more bad
records.
Disk is good
Try again. But list 77 as
first bad track (position
9-10 of 00008) after
FUNCT SEL lower and
DELETE REC.
Listing 77, as the first
bad track, allows the
machine to attempt an
initialization ingoring
all other bad tracks.
Yes
Notify customer
EC 823146
Date 9/15174
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619099
I
Page
9-52
3741 ML
9-53
I
EC 823146
I
PN 1619100
Oat. 9/15/74
OPERATOR GUIDANCE
9-54
Page
9-55
START
Display
Make sure switches
are:
AUTO DUP/SKIP-OFF
AUTO REC ADV-OFF
SEL PROG
1 - - - - - - + 1 Alter
SEL PROG
Program number
2, 4, 6, 8, or A
(no shift required.)
Always enter an
asterisk (*)
FU NCT SE L lower
DISPLAY PROG
Character in:
1. Position 1
2. Between fields
3. For fields with
no prompting
4. Last position
of program
No
Make sure cursor
is in position 1
Yes
Page
9-55
Program number
2, 4, 6, 8, or A
(no shift required.)
Page
9-54
lEe
823146
PI\) 1619101
3741 ML
9-55
I1-:--·:-te-8:-~-~:-~-4-t-1----t-I·------t·1
9-56
PN 1619102
RECORD INSERT
START
Record insert
will start at the
displayed address
Key in #of
records to be
inserted (2 digits)
00 or
only one digit
or
data set
too small
Yes
Puts machine in
NUMSH I FT and
clears screen
Yes
STOP
EXPANDED COMMUNICATIONS (EBSCA) FEATURE OPERATIONS FLOWCHARTS
/
Entering
Communications
Page 9·60
/
START
/
/
/
~
For CE test modes, refer to 8·33
Load masks (programs) into buffers. Programs are required for
transmit selected records or fields and receive data and insert
constants operations and may be used with print unatt:mded.
For theory, refer to Expanded Communications (EBSCA)
Feature (page 14-68) or 3741 Reference Manual, GA2'1-9183.
/
/
Page 9·58
9·60
9·64
9·65
9·70
Yes
Load diskettes
and, position at
first data set
label or record.
Load masks
(programs)
in buffers.
May enter communications from XR (read'
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ index) mode on data set label or from UR
(update) mode on a particular record in a
data set.
Yes
Yes
Turn on keylock.
Keylock is located beneath tabletop and to the
- - - - - right of the keyboard. Insert key and turn to
the right for ON position.
Enter 1 to 15 10
characters expected from remote
terminal.
No
FUNCT SEL
upper COMM
Page 9-65
Page 9-66
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1175
Pf
3741 ML
9·57
~
E_C__8_23_14_6_f______~____-~1 PN1619104
Date 911517~
.
9-58
Set-Up Communications
Available on Model 4 only.
Sector 3 of track 0 must be set up as follows:
Columns 2-15 contain the object data set name, drive
number and object program name
Column 21 contains an E for execute or an A for
compress
Page 9-57
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
I
/
I
/
/
/
E
Page
9-66
>--~
Selected link to
ACL program
after selecting
print unattended.
Cannot use both
features simultaneously. Press
RESET.
Page 9-57
I
/
/
Is this station
placing the call to
the remote end?
/
This tells the
_ 3741 that it is the
calling station. The
3741 then sends
the initial line bids
(ENQ).
Page 9-59
Select
Communications
Mode
WT only
Page 9-58
For 1200 bps Line Adapter with WT PSN (Public
Switched Network), manual dial or manual answer
must be performed before selecting Mode.
Page 9-64
R
Page 9-60
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Transmit/
receive mode.
No
Yes
Yes
K
Page 9-60
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PI\I 1619105
I
3741 ML
9-59
lEe
823146
PN 1619106
9-60
Select Communications
Mode (Continued)
Page 9-59
Yes
H error indicates
transmit mode
after selecting
print unattended.
Print unattended
can only be used
with R, B, D or
K modes. Reset
and try job again.
Yes
No
No
File-protect
error. First data
set for receive was
file protected. Use
another data set
or change label.
Reset and try
communications
job again.
Page 9-57
Page 9-57
Yes
No
The record length
of the data set
selected from update mode is not
equal to the
length of the receive data and insert constants
mask. Correct
mask and retry
communications.
9-57
Page 9-59
Page 9-61
Yes
Yes
Page 9-71
Page 9-61
Refer to EBSCA
checkout procedure, MAP
7-9.
Refer to E BSCA
checkout procedure, MAP
7-9.
Refer to symptom
index.
Establish Connection
To Remote Device
Page 9-70
Page 9-60
9-64
9-71
No
No
No
Yes
When phone rings
lift handset; converse with remote
end if necessary
Lift handset; place
call to remote
end. Have remote
end go to data.
Wait for the end
of answertone.
,
Place modem in
autoanswer mode.
I
I
,
I
",
I
""
I
I
""'"
I
,I
I
I
1200 bps Line Adapter and IBM 3872 modem
using CBS Data Coupler might require slightly
different procedure. For 1200 bps Line
Adapter refer to page 14-50. For IBM 3872,
refer to IBM 3872 Modem User's Guide,
GA27-3058.
\
\
\
\
\
Wait for call from
remote end. When
modem autoanswers, proceed
Place modem in
data mode.
Page 9-62
EC
Date
II
823146
9/15174
826065
8/1175
PN 1619107
I
3741 ML
9-61
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
PN 1619108
9-62
8/1n5
Communications
Link-Up
I
I
EBSCA Error Logout
'Data terminal ready' (DTR) and 'data
set ready' (DSR) both being ON indicate
·that both the 3741 and the modem are
ready to begin communicating
I
Page 9-61,
,,
,
* 1
* 4
I
*
I
I
7
* 10
** 14 - 16
** 19 - 21
** 24 - 26
**29-31
I
,,
Mode determined by operation.
When in R, T, P, B, D, J, K, % mode or I mode
after pressing FUNCT SEL upper and S, or
when in W mode in tests 1, 2, 3, or 4, the
bottom line on the display shows the following:
Check the following:
001
Data terminal ready_ ------1~1
Data set ready_----+--
0
1 0
0
A
No
Yes
Request to send. ---t==~~f---+--~---+-_I-_---.J
Clear to s e n d . - . - - - - - - - - - - - - '
CRG checks in receive. _ _ _ _ _ _ _....1
NAKs received in t r a n s m i t . - - - - - - - - - 1
Two second time-outs. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...J
Three second time-outs. - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.....J
* Note: 1 indicates on; 0 indicates off.
** Note: Three position decimal counter.
2. Modem cable connected.
3. Feature half planar jumper
4 jumpered correctly (refer
to Installation 16-4).
U~e EBSCA
checkout procedure, MAP
7-9.
Remote device links
." up and disk address
.,,'" begins incrementing.
;/"
;/"
Failure to link-up could indicate:
Yes
Yes
Page 9-63
1.
Incorrect use of M key to indicate calling station on
switched lines. (For use of M key, refer to Expanded
Communications (EBSCA) Feature, page 14-68).
2.
Incorrect operation of remote device.
3.
Communication line or modem problem.
4.
Incorrect ID used for terminal ID or wrong address
used if multipoint.
No
No
Page 9-67
01001
001 004 000 001
1. Modem power.
>-----~
A
Refer to EBSCA
checkout procedure, MAP
7-9.
Terminate Communications
Page 9-62
BT, DT, KT, %T, IT indicate
that the transmit portion of
transmit/receive mode is
complete. Wait for receive
portion to begin and terminate to complete job.
Monitor progress
of job. Wait for
Termination.
TT, PT, RC, DC, IC, BC, JT, KC, %C, WC modes are
complete.
If print unattended was selected and communications were
'" completed without error, the machine will pass through the
.", .",
complete mode noted above into PR or PW mode.
If link to ACL program (Model 4) was selected and communications were completed without error, the machine will
pass through the complete mode noted above and into control of the ACL program.
No
Yes
RefN to EBSCA
checkout
Page 9-67
lEe
823146
Date 9/74
PN 1619109
3741 ML
9-63
EC
823146
Date 9/74
826065
PN 1619110
9-64
8/1/75
Inquiry
Page 9-59
~----+1
Yes
No
Page 9-7
Record length of
data set is not 128
or print unattended or link to ACL
program (Model 4)
was selected before
selecting inquiry.
Correct and try
again.
First response
record received is
displayed.
REC ADV
or
REC BKSP.
Page 9-57
/
/
/
FUNCT SEL lower
RET TO INDEX.
Page 9-71
No
STOP
Yes
Enter inquiry
message or R EC
ADV or REC
BKSP to desired
record.
FUNCT SEL upper
S
Page 9-61
FUNC SEL upper
I (Jetter)
I
Errors Entering
Communications
Page 9-57
Mode Selection Error
~-----t
Yes
Communications mode was selected from some
mode other than read index (XR) or update (UR).
Use correct procedure.
Invalid Data Set Label on Disk 1
~_ _ _~
Yes
This is same error that occurs in the base machine
operation. Refer to Symptom Index (page 1-2).
Correct the label.
Set-Up Error
Remote I D entered was too long or keylock was
not unlocked. Correct and try again.
Yes
Secure Disk Error
>----~
Yes
Vol label on disk 2 is secure; therefore this disk
cannot be used. Replace the diskette.
Disk Error
Yes
Refer to Symptom Index (page 1-2) and use appropriatE'
error recovery or replace diskette.
Feature Not Installed
Machine indicates that communications
PI
>Y-es--- feature is not installed. Machine failure
if the feature is installed.
]
Press RESET and
retry communications Job.
' - - - - - - , - - - -
Not going into C
mode with none
of the above errors
indicates machine
failure.
Page 9-57
Use EBSCA
Checkout MAP
7-9.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/74
8/1/75
PN 1619111
I
3741 ML
9-65
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
Print
Unattended
825853
PN 1619112
11/15174
Page 9-57
Set AUTO REC
ADV switch ON.
No answer
indicates 3713
printer.
/
/
/
/
H error indicates
AUTO REC ADV
switch not ON or
unattended print
was selected after
link to ACL program was selected.
Correct and try
again.
Set AUTO
DUP/SKIP
switch ON
(double spacing).
Set AUTO
DUP/SKIP
switch OFF
(single spacing)
Page 9-57
No
Set PROG
NUM SHIFT
switch to
ALL CHAR.
switch to
NUMBERS
ONLY.
FUNCT SEL upper
PRINT TO EOD.
Page 9-58
9-66
Error Codes
Note: If execute program mode
Page 9-62
9-63
_
]
was selected (Model 4), the
flashing CRT might be the result
of the program execution.
.".,
~-
Yes
Make note of
error and press
RESET.
~----+-f
No response to
line bid or line
">------M
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Page 9-68
Reterto
Index.
sv:m I
Call remote end
to determine
cause of E!rror.
Try job a~ain.
idle for 20
seconds, or remote ID compare failed.
Page
9-70
Remote end terminated job prematurely.
Remote end sent
4 consecutive
NAKs to transmitted record.
Call remotE! end
to determine
cause of error and
retry job.
Received line bid
from remote end'
when in a complete mode or with
'an error pending.
Call remotE! end to
determine :t there
was more (lata to
be transmitted; if
'some, retry job.
Two consecutive
Call remotE~ end to
records of differdetermine reason
ent length refor wrong length,
ceived; or, if in upor correct data or
date mode, first
mask.
record didn't
match data set record length
or
length of first received record is not equal
to the number of greater than signs (» in
the receive data and insert constants program (mask)
or
continuation of data set on disk 2 does not
have the same record length as the initial por·
tion of the data on disk 1 (transmit).
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
I'N 1619113
Page 9-70
I
3741 ML
9-67
lEe
823146
Date 9/15n4
Error Codes
(Continued)
I
PN 1619114
SOH ('01 '), STX ('02'), NAK ('3D')
ETB ('26'), ETX ('03'), SYN ('32')
IUS ('1 F'), DLE ('10'), ENQ ('2D')
IRS ('1 E'), I FS ('1 C'), EDT ('37')
Page 9-67
\
Line control char>-_ _ _~ acter found in datal_ _ _ _~
record sent in nonYes
transparent mode.
Use D or P mode
Yes'
No
RESET
Key data again.
Both ends in transmit
mode. Call re>-----.
mote end to determine transmitting
station.
Yes
Received SCH or
STX from remote
device when in
transmit mode.
Data set ready off
detected during
communications.
Page 9-70
Yes
Yes
Page 9-69
I nvalid index found
in transmit mode.
Correct and try job
again.
Secure index
found (disk 1 or
2). Replace and
start communica'tions again.
Page 9-70
9-68
Error Codes
(Continued)
Page 9-68
No
No
Yes
Yes
D error. Data received on disk 2,
or on disk 1 at
73026.
D error. Continued data
set found on disk 1 but
disk 2 not available or no
good indexes found on
disk 2, or continued
data set found on disk 2.
D error in Receive mode.
Not ene,ugh space on disk
to recei'/e all data, or not
enough good labels to
receive all data sets.
Correct disk configuration. Retry whole job
or send last part of data
set.
Set up disk(s) to receive
rest of data. Run job
again.
Page 9-14
Yes
Remote end
responded NAK
to local line bid.
No
No
Call remote end
to find why remot£! end is sending I\IAK. Retry
job.
t------,
Yes
Remove end did not
accept status message.
Disk error is the significant error. Make
note of error and
press RESET.
Page 9-70
Befer to
Symptom
Index.
Refer to
Symptom
Index.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
II
826065
8/1/75
I;>N 1619115
I
3741 ML
9-69
EC
Date
823146
826065
gn4
8/1n5
PN 1619116
Termination With Error
Page 9-67
9-68
9-69
If on switched lines, communications can be
reestablished without returning to read index
mode (XR).
If on nonswitched (leased) lines, all errors
must be reset and communications restarted
from read index.
Page 9-68
9-69
No
Page 9-61
Yes
RESET
"
Try communications job again.
Page 9-57
""
"
Note: If inquiry mode, all recoverable
errors return to inquiry keyloop and
not XR mode. Disk errors, A errors,
and D errors will cause return to read
index mode.
9-70
ID Reader
Page 9-60
9-64
Use EBSCA
Checkout
REC ADV
Leading 1's
error.
Page 9-64
Leading O's
error.
Diagnostic badge
read. Now use
customer badge.
Use EBSCA
Checkout
Yes
lEe
823146
PN 1619117
3741 ML
9-71
lEe
823146
I
Date 9/15n4
This page intentionally left blank.
I
PN 1619118
9-72
Format Control Characters
DATA RECORDER ATTACHMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Format Control Characters
Data Recorder Programs
Construction
Loading. . .
Selecting
Sample Programs
Punching
Reading. . .
Operation Flowcharts
Punch a Record . . . . . . .
Punch a Data Set (all or in part). .
Punch a Record Using Search Address
Punch a Record (or records) Using
Search Content. . . . .
Read a Card . . . . . . .
Read a Data Set (or Data Sets)
Set Up for Card I/O (ONLINE) Mode
9-73
9-74
9-74
9-74
Control
Character
Meaning
xA
Format data field: Loads the buffer from the record with the number of characters
specified by the number preceding the A format control character.
N&
Identifies card read/punch format programs: All card read/punch format programs
must have an N& (ampersand) in positions 001 and 002.
9-78
9-82
9-86
xB
Format data field with suppression of leading zeros: Loads the buffer from the record with the number of characters specified by the number preceding the B format
control character, but loads blanks instead of leading zeros.
9-88
. 9-80
9-84
9-90
xX
Insert blanks: Loads the buffer with the number of blanks preceding the X format
control character.
xY
Skips characters from the record: Skips over, with no action, the number of characters in the record specified by the number preceding the Y format control character.
9-76
. 9-77
Note: It is not permissible to skip beyond the record boundaries.
xF
Reverse skips characters from the record: Skips over, in reverse direction (towards
position 001) with no action, the number of characters in the record specified by
the number preceding the F format control character.
Note: It is not permissible to skip beyond the record boundaries.
N or ~
No-op: No operation is performed.
Note: Position 001 of the card read/punch programs must contain an N.
Q
Terminates format program: This format control character must be used at the end
of every format program.
xl
Insert characters: Loads the characters following the I into the buffer. The number
preceding the I format control character indicates the number of characters to be
loaded to the buffer.
C
Read or punch a card: A card is read or punched before the format control program
is terminated.
Note: The pointers in program buffer 9 and the current record buffer are reset to
position 001 each time a C is encountered in the format control program. That is,
when the format control program contai ns the format control character C, the format control defined after the C must start from position one of the buffer.
Note: The x represents a variable value (from 1 to 128) that is the multi"ple of the control characters to be
executed. If a control character is preceded by a blank, N, or another control character, the multiple is assumed to be one.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
I?N
1619426
I
3741 ML
9-73
EC
825853
Date 11115/74
Data Recorder Programs
b.
Construction
1.
N& (ampersand) must be in positions 001 and
002 of the program level.
2.
Any of the format control characters may
follow (9-1).
3.
A Q must be the last character in the program
level.
826065
PN 1619427
8/1n5
When indirect selection of the Data Recorder program is desired, do the following:
1)
Program level A must be loaded
in a manner that when a certain
keying program is sel ected the
Data Recorder program level
number is in the position of program level A corresponding to
the keying format level.
2)
With program level A coded as
above (where YYY is a number
from 1 to 128) the YYY character in the record determines the
program level to be selected.
For example, if program level A
is coded as follows:
%07L6L6
Then the seventh character
(counting blanks) will be used
to select the program level. If
the seventh character is a number from 1 through 8, then that
level number will be selected. 11
the seventh character is not a
number from 1 through 8, then
program level 1 is selected.
3)
Note: This allows the operator to select a
program level for entering or updating data.
Then when the operator initiates a card read
or punch operation, the card read or punch
format control program assigned in program
level A is automatically used. After the Data
Recorder operation is completed, the selected
key entry program level is again active.
Note: For punch operations, if a format control
program positions the data beyond column 80 (on
the IBM 129) or 96 (on the IBM 5496) in the buffer, that data is not punched and no error code is
displayed.
9-74
Loading
See page 9-33 for flowchart.
1.
This Data Recorder format control program
level would be automatically selected for all
Data Recorder operations if program level 5
was being used for keying format control.
Loading is accomplished the same as for
printer programs:
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
a.
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE RECORD
Key in the Data Recorder
program
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
b.
PROG LOAD
Any number from 1 through 8
Cursor position
001
Program level A
:
Corresponding manually selected keying format program level number
Selecting
1.
Manual selection a.
When the direct selection of the storage
program level of the Data Recorder program is wanted, do the following:
1)
Program level A must be loaded
with the following in positions
001-009:
:12345678
2)
With the program level A coded
as above then if the Data Recorder program is to be selected;
simply select the program level
where it was stored.
3)
For example: If you loaded your
Data Recorder program into program level 5, then press SEL
PROG and the 5 key to obtain
your Data Recorder program.
2.
Automatic selection a.
When automatic selection of a Data
Recorder program level is desired to do
the following:
1)
Load program level A as follows:
Cursor position
001
002
003
004
005
Program level A
%
Y
Y
Y
L6
Note: The % sign must be in position 001 of program level A, followed by any number from 1
through 128 and position 005 must be blank. The
number can be written as a 1-,2-, or 3-digit number (1,01, or 001). If positions 002, 003, and
004 are blank the default value is 1.
002 003
\
004
005\ ~06
007
008 009
X
X
X
X
~
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Example: Refer to Selecting, step 1 b, on page 9-74.
If program level A is coded as follows:
Cursor position
001
002
Program level A
Corresponding manually selected keying format program level number
003
004
005
006
2
1
2
007
008 009
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
The following conditions exist for the above example:
1.
If program level 5 is manually selected, program level 1 will automatically be used for
all Data Recorder operations and program
level 5 will be used for all key entry operations.
2.
If program level 2 is manually selected, program level 2 will be used for all Data Recorder operations and program level 0 will be used
for all key entry programs.
3.
If program level 1 is manually selected, no
Data Recorder formatting will occur (even if
program level 1 is a Data Recorder program).
There must be a value coded in the appropriate position of program level A before Data
Recorder programs can be selected.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
811/75
PN
1619428
I
3741 ML
9-75
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
Sample Programs Section for Data Recorder
-
Put the Data Recorder online.
Load diskette.
Load deck of blank cards in the Data Recorder
hopper. (The IBM 129 needs two cards fed.)
IL
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
N
FIELD COR
This section does not alter any data on the disk.
To punch the same record again press:
FIELD COR
FUNCTION SELECT lower
S
Press:
FIELD CORR
To get out of a single punch mode do the following:·
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT lower
S
- Sample 3: To punch a reocrd with format control do the following:
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT lower
DELETE REC
--
Key in: N&5A5X5Y10F26A4X8IALPHABETO
L -Identifies the program as a
Data Recorder program
Press:
FIELD CORR
The. record punched will be:
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ
To get out of single punch mode and to program
level 0, do the following:
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT lower
S
FUNCTION SELECT lower
N
Key in: I PUNCH EXACTLY WHAT IS
WRITTEN ON THE CRT
WITHOUT CHANGING THE
DATA ON DISK.
Press:
RECORD BKSP
SEL PROG
ABCDE
- Sample 2: To punch a card with some data that
is not on the disk and is not wanted on the disk
do the following:
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
A
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SE L lower
N
FUNCT SELECT lower
ENTER
Key in: ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ
To get out of single punch mode do the following:
Press:
Use Data Recorder program 1
if program level 1 is selected.
Means program will be manually selected.
Sample 1: To punch the record displayed on
the CRT do the following:
Press:
I
Key in: :1
Punching
-
PN 1619429
SEL PROG
o
- Sample 4: To punch a record or records under
search content with format control:
Load program level 3 with the following:
N&10A5Xl0A5X6A3XAO
Load program level A with the following:
:11ti1ti51ti1ti31ti
The "3" here means that program level 7
must be manually selected if Data Recorder program in program level 3 is to be used.
Load program level 7 with the following:
U .... (26 periods) ...... NE
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCTION SELECT lower
ENTER
Key in: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ
ALPHABET
9-76
Press:
REC ADV
SEL PROG
7 Key
Press the following keys in order:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reading
Put the Data Recorder online (9-80). Load the
diskette to be written on. Load the deck of data
cards into the Data Recorder hopper. (The IBM
129 needs two cards fed.)
-
Sample 1: To read a card without entering or
changing the data on the diskette, do the following:
Press:
9
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCTION SELECT lower
SEARCH CONTENT
Key in: l6l6l6l6 (26 blanks) l6l6l6l65
Press:
-
REC BKSP
SEL PROG
7
FUNCTION SELECT upper
PUNCH TO EOD
FUNCTION SELECT lower
V
FIELD CORR
This causes a card to be read and its contents
displayed on the screen. If this data is to be
entered onto the disk at the location the disk
is at simply:
Press:
REC ADV
If you want to read another card:
Press:
Press:
Create a deck of 10 cards all with the alphabet
in the first 26 columns.
Create or use an existing data set on the diskette.
Start at the data set label and then:
Load program level 5 with the following:
Ensure that the AUTO REC ADV switch is on.
Load program level A with the following:
Sample 6: To punch part of a data set do the
following:
Create or use an existing data set on the diskette.
Ensure the AUTO REC ADV switch is on. Then
advance to the record that is the first to be
punched.
After the first record to be punched is displayed:
Press:
FUNCTION SELECT upper
PUNCH TO EOD
Display the Data Set label of the first data set
to be filled.
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
READ TO EOF
This will read the cards up to the EOD card into
the first data set. Then the 3741 will search for
the next unprotected data set and will read all
the cards up to the EOF card into it.
FUNCTION SELECT lower
Sample 5: To punch an entire data set do the
following:
This punches all the records from the disk onto
cards. Then returns to index and displays the
data set label of data just punched.
Create or use two or more data set labels with
adequate space for entry of data records. Ensure the AUTO REC ADV switch is on. Obtain
thl~ deck of data to be entered in the first data
sei:. Follow it with an EOD card (?j in the first
two columns). Next put the deck of data to be
entered into the second data set followed by an
EOF card. Place all cards in the Data Recorder
hcpper. (The IBM 129 needs two cards fed.)
To get out of single read mode:
Sample 2: To read in a deck of cards under format control.
FUNCTION SELECT upper
PUNCH TO EOD
Sample 3: To read in multiple data sets do the
following:
FIELD CORR
The 3741 searches until finding a record that
fits the search mask and then punches it out
under format control. Then it returns to index.
Press:
-
-
S
N&A1 OX1 OAX15A3X9ICOSTI;D$26F2AI.2AQ
:l65
The 5 means that if program level 2 is
selected all Data Recorder operations
will use program level "5".
Place the deck of 10 cards followed by an EO F
card (?* in the first two columns) into the data
recorder hopper. (The 129 needs two cards fed.)
Locate the data set label of the data set to be
written into or create space for a data set of 10
records or more. Ensure that the AUTO R EC
ADV switch is on.
Press:
SEL PROG
2
FUNCT SEL upper
READ TO EOF
This will read all the cards into the disk with format control. Then when it sees the EOF card it
will return to index.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
Pi~
1619430
I
3741 ML
9-77
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619431
8/1/75
Operation Flowcharts
Punch a Record
Yes
Data Recorder
programs are
on page 9-74
Allocate space for
program choose a
number from 1
through A
For Data Recorder
programs there must
be storage in level A
and one other level 1-8
A
9-78
No
Single punch
mode (704)
Yes
This sets a single
punch mode (704)
Locate the record
using any normal
operation
Yes
No
The record on the
disk is not altered
only the CRT data
is
Correct the source
of the error
No
No
Yes
r
Hold ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM
SHIFT while pressing RESET
Reset (th is retrys
the operation)
Yes
FIELD COR*
This clears the
3741 of single
punch mode
This punches card
with the data displayed on the CRT
Yes
No
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IL.. __
This cancels the
Data Recorder
job
Returns the 3741 to
the same mode it
was in just before
punching the record
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1175
PN 1619432
I
3741 ML
9-79
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619433
8/1/75
Read a Card
Yes
~
o
0:
C>
c:
~
o
...J
Data Recorder
programs are on
page 9-74
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program choose a
number from 1
through A
For Data Recorder
programs there must
be storage in level A
and one other level
1-8
A
9-80
Single read mode
(704)
__Lr-:
sets a single
mOde (7041
Locate the address using normal operations
No
Causes the card
to be read
Yes
This clears the
3741 from a
single read mode
Data is displayed
on CRT but not
yet written on
the disk
Yes
No
The 3741 goes to
same mode as just
before the read
FUNCT SEL lower
M key
REC ADV
STOP
lEe
825853
Date 11/15/74
I
F'N 1619434
3741 ML
9-81
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619435
811/75
Punch a Data Set (all or in part)
Yes
FUNCTION SEL
Data Recorder
programs are
on page 9-74
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program choose a
number from 1
through A
For Data Recorder
programs there must
be storage in level A
and one other level
1-8
A
9-82
No
Use update mode
or a search to find
the record
Record advance to
backspace to locate
the first record to
be punched
No
Yes
Insure that the
program selected
is still displayed
on CRT
This will cause all
of the data set to
be punched
Th is starts the
punching operation
FUNCT SEL upper
PUNCH TO EOD
This cancels
the Data
Recorder job
No
Correct the source
of the error
Displays the data
set label of data
set just punched
Reset
Yes
Returns to X R
mode
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619436
I
3741 ML
9-83
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619437
811/75
Read a Data Set (or Data Sets)
Disk could already
be in unit. If so,
ignore this step
An EOD card has a "U" in columns 1 and 2. It must be placed
between card decks to be read
into different data sets
You can read data
into any number
of data sets by use
of an EOD card
Yes
[o
£t
C>
r::
~o
..J
Data Recorder
programs are
on page 9-74
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program choose a
number from 1
through A
For Data Recorder
programs, there must
be storage in level A
and one other level
1-8
9-84
After displaying starting
location or data set label
check program level if
formatting
Correct the source
of the error
An EOF card has a"?"'''
in columns 1 and 2 and
must follow the card
deck being read
Yes
No
Hold ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM
No
Returns to the
X R mode
EC
825853
Date 11115/74
pr
3741 ML
9-85
'Ec
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619439
8/1/75
Punch a Record Using Search Address
Yes
FUNCTION SEL
Data Recorder
programs are
on page 9-74
Search on record
address (see page
9-' for help)
Allocate space for.
program choose a
number from'
through A
For Data Recorder
programs, there must
be storage in level A
and one other level
1-8
9-86
Yes
No
No
Yes
REC ADV or REC
FUNCT SEL
upper)
PUNCH TO EDD
PR
mOd':-:-\
diSPlayecl~
Yes
Correct the sou rce
of the error
Machine displays
If the record is
record just punched
not found machand returns te, U R i n e returns to
mode
X R mode
STOP~
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
PI'
3741 ML
9-87
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619441
8/1/75
Punch a Record (or Records) Using Search Content
Yes
FUNCTION SEL
§
CI
o
c':
CI
C
ij
..9'"
Data Recorder
programs are
on page 9-74
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program choose a
number from 1
through A
For Data Recorder
programs, there must
be storage in level A
and one other level
1-8
9-88
Yes
No
No
Yes
FUNCT SEL upper
PUNCH TO EOD
REC BKSP returns
cursor to position
001 to allow selection of a program
This initiates the
search and punching of all records
matching the mask
Yes
No
REC ADVor REC
Yes
BKSP to the starting point of the
search
No
Correct the source
of the error
Or SEARCH SE~
QUENTIAL CONTE~T if desired
Yes
No
If no record is
found it returns
to index
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
After punching the
record(s) stays in R
X mode and displays
the data set label
826065
8/1/75
Hold ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM
PI\I 1619442
I
This cancels
the Data
Recorder job
3741 ML
9·89
IEC
825853 ·1
Date 11/15/74
PN 1619443
Set Up for Card I/O (ONLINE) Mode
IBM 5496
IBM 3741
IBM 129.
1.
Switches
1.
Set the SPL FEAT switch OFF, and power
up.
2.
Run all cards out of the transport using the
CLEAR switch.
3.
4.
5.
Set the:
SPL FEAT switch ON.
PROGRAM MODE dial to DATA
READ.
REC ADV switch to AUTO.
CHARACTE R MODE switch to 64.
The PRINT switch can be either ON or OFF.
Press the FEED key twice, and the VER RES
to feed two cards into the read station.
The 129 must have two cards fed into the
read station to operate.
- To power up with the SPL FEAT switch
ON causes an 8A jam error.
- To power up with cards in the transport
causes an 88 jam error.
A switch not correctly set, wh ile attempting to operate in Data Recorder
(ON LINE) mode, causes an error.
key~
Set the:
TERMINAL switch to TERMINAl.
PUNCH/VERIFY switch to PUNCH.
REC ADV switch to AUTO.
PROGRAM switch to OFF.
2.
The PRINT switch can be either ON or OFF.
3.
All other switch settings are optional; they
have no function in the Data Recorder
(ON LI N E) mode.
A switch incorrectly set, while attempting to operate in Data Recorder
(ON LINE) mode, causes an A 1 error.
Error Recovery
To clear a F D CH K error, clear the transport, set the TERM INAL switch to MANUAL, and press REl. Then set the TERMINAL switch to TERMINAl.
- To take the 5496 OFFLINE, set the TERMINAL switch to MANUAl.
9-90
1.
AUTO DUP switch and CHARACTER switch
can be either ON or OFF.
2.
The AUTO REC ADV switch must be ON
for a PUNCH to EOD or a READ to EOF.
If the switch is OFF during a PUNCH to
EOD or READ to EOF, one record will be
punched or read. Then the REC ADV key
will punch or read a card each time it is
pressed.
3.
The keyboard has the same function as nor-
mal.
4.
- To take the 129 OFFLINE, set the SPL
FEAT switch OFF.
RESET:
a.
Pressing just RESET will reset the error
and if the error is retriable, will retry
the operation.
b.
Pressing and holding NUM SH 1FT
while pressing RESET (Models 3 and
4 only) will skip the Data Recorder
operation.
c.
Pressing and holding ALPHA SH I FT
while pressing RESET (Models 3 and
4 only) will cancel all Data Recorder op
eration to the end of the job.
d.
Pressing and holding both ALPHA
SHIFTand NUM SHIFTwhile pressing RESET (double shifted reset) will
cancel the entire job. For PUNCH to
EOD or READ to EOF, the display
returns to X R mode. For single read
or punch mode, the display does not
change.
Clearing
1.
Clear single punch mode or single read mode
by pressing FUNCT SEL lower and S.
I/O ADAPTER TABLE OF CONTENTS
Format Control Characters
I/O Adapter Programs
Construction
Loading. . .
Selecting
Sample Programs
Writing a Record
Reading a Record
Operation Flowcharts
Write a Record
Read a Record
Write a Data Set (all or in part)
Read a Data Set (or Data Sets)
Write a Record Using Search Address
Write a Record (or Records) Using
Search Content .
File Transfer . . . . . . . .
Character Transfer . . . . .
Summary of File Transfer Operations
(Read or Write). . . . ' . . . .
Setting Up Record Transfer Operations .
Set Up for I/O Adapter (ONLINE) Mode
9-91
9-92
9-92
9-92
9-94
9-95
9-96
9-98
9-100
9-102
9-104
9-106
9-108
9-108
Format Control Characters
Control
Character
Meaning
xA
Format data field: Loads the buffer from the record with the number of characters
specified by the number preceding the A format control character.
N&
Identifies read/write format programs: All read/write format programs must have
an N& (ampersand) in positions 001 and 002.
xB
Format data field with suppression of leading zeros: Loads the buffer from the record with the number of characters specifi 3d by the number preceding the B format
control character, but loads blanks instead of leading zeros.
xX
Insert blanks: Loads the buffer with the number of blanks preceding the X format
control character.
xY
Skips characters from the record: Skips over, with no action, the number of characters in the record specified by the number preceding the Y format control character.
9-109
9-110
9-110
Note: It is not permissible to skip beyond the record boundaries.
xF
Reverse skips characters from the record: Skips over, in reverse direction (towards
position 001) with no action, the number of characters in the record specified by
the number preceding the F format control character.
Note: It is not permissible to skip beyond the record boundaries.
Nor
l1S
No-op: No operation is performed.
Note: Position 001 of the read/write programs must contain an N.
Q
Terminates format program: This format control character must be used at the end
of every format program.
xl
Insert characters: Loads the characters following the I into the buffer. The number
preceding the I format control character indicates the number of characters to be
loaded to the buffer.
C
Read or write: A record is read or written before the format control program is
terminated.
Note: The pointers in program buffer 9 Hnd the current record buffer are reset to
position 001 each time a C is encountered in the format control program. That is,
when the format control program contains the format control character C, the format control defined after the C must start from position one of the buffer.
Note: The x represents'! variable value (from 1 to 128) that hi the multiple of the control characters to be
executed. If a control character is preceded by a blank, N, or 3nother control character, the multiple is assumed to be one.
EC
825958
Date 3/21 t/5
PI\! 1619488
-
I
3741 ML
9-91
EC
825958
826065
Date 3/21/75
I/O Adapter Programs
b.
Construction
1.
N& (ampersand) must be in positions 001 and
002 of the program level.
2.
Any of the format control characters may
follow (9-91).
3.
A Q must be the last character in the program
level.
When indirect selection of the I/O
Adapter program is desired, do the
following:
1)
Program level A must be loaded
in a manner that when a certain
keying program is selected the
program level number is in the
position of program level A
corresponding to the keying
format level.
2)
See page 9-33 for flowchart.
Loading is accomplished the same as for
printer programs:
a.
Press:
FUNCT SEL lovver
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE RECORD
Key in the I/O Adapter
program
b.
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
Any number from 1 through 8
3)
This I/O Adapter format control program
level would be automatically selected for
all I/O Adapter operations if program level
5 was b'
' f ormat contro I.
elng use df or k
eYing
Selecting
Cursor position
001
Program level A
:
\
\
002 003 004 005
X
X
9-92
With program level A coded as
above (where YYY is a number
from 1 to 128) the YYY character in the record determines the
program level to be selected.
For example, if program level A
is coded as follows:
%07L:SL:S
Then the seventh character
(counting blanks) will be used
to select the program level. If
the seventh character is a number from 1 through 8, then that
level number will be selected. If
the seventh character is not a
number from 1 through 8, then
program level 1 is selected.
Note: This allows the operator to select a
program level for entering or updating data.
Then when the operator initiates a read or
write operation, the read or write format
control program assigned in program level
A is automatically used. After the operation is completed, the selected key entry
program level is again active.
Loading
1.
PN 1619489
8/1/75
X
X(
~
X
007 008 009
~
X
X
X
6
7
8
~
1.
Manual selection When the direct selection of the storage
program level of the I/O Adapter program is wanted, do the following:
1)
Program level A must be loaded
with the following in positions
001-009:
:12345678
2)
With program level A coded as
above, then if the I/O Adapter
program is to be selected, simply
select the program level where
it was stored.
3)
For example: If you loaded your
I/O Adapter program into program level 5, press SE L PROG
and the 5 key to obta in your
program.
Corresponding manually selected keying format progra~ level number
a.
2.
1
Automatic selection a.
When automatic selection of an I/O
Adapter program level is desired to
do the following:
1)
Load program level A as follows:
Cursor position
001
Program level A
%
002 003 004 005
Y
Y
Y
L:S
Note: The % sign must be in position 001 of program level A, followed by any number from 1 \
through 128 and position 005 must be blank. "The
number. can be written as a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit number (1,01, or 001). If positions 002,003, and !
004 are blank the default value is 1.
2
3
4
5
Example: Refer to Selecting, step 1b, on page 9-92.
Example: (Refer to Manual indirect selection of
the I/O Adapter program.)
If program level A is coded as follows:
Cursor position
001
Program level A
:
Corresponding manually selected keying format program level number
002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The following conditions exist for the above example:
1.
If program level 5 is manually selected, program level 1 will automatically be used for
all I/O Adapter operations and program
level 5 will be used for all key entry operations.
2.
If program level 2 is manually selected, program level 2 will be used for all I/O Adapter
operations and program level 0 wi II be used
for all key entry programs.
3.
If program level 1 is manually selected, no
I/O Adapter formatting will occur (even if
program level 1 is an I/O Adapter program).
There must be a value coded in the appropriate position of program level A before I/O
Adapter programs can be selected.
EC 825958
826065
Date 3/21/75
8/1/75
PI\! 1619490
I
3741 ML
9·93
EC
Sample Programs
Press:
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
PN 1619491
Load program level 7 with the following:
Writing a Record
- Make the attachment ready
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE RECORD
Enter device address
Enter mode (3 or 4)
Enter record length, if less than that on data
set label (columns 6, 7, and 8)
- Press FUNCT SEL lower and X
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Key in: : 1
II
Press:
N
FIELD COR
N
To get out of single write mode do the following:
FUNCT SEL lower
N
Key in: I WRITE EXACTLY WHAT IS
WR ITTEN ON TH E CRT
WITHOUT CHANGI NG THE
DATA ON DISK.
Press:
FIELD COR
To get out of a single write mode do the following:
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
T
- Sample 3: To write a record with format control do the following:
Press:
Key in: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Press:
RECORD BKSP
SEL PROG
1
FIELD COR
The record written will be:
- Sample 2: To write a record with some data
that is not on the disk and is not wanted on the
disk do the following:
Press:
Key in: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
FUNCT SEL upper
T
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
FUNCT SEL lower
RETU RN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
FUNCT SEL lower
FIELD COR
Press:
A
This section does not alter any data on the disk.
To write the same record again press:
Press:
Use I/O Adapter program 1
if program level 1 is selected.
U .... (26 periods) ...... NE
Means program will be manually selected.
- Sample 1: To write the record displayed on
the CRT do the following:
Press:
9-94
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Key in: N&5A5X5Y10F26A4X8IALPHABETQ
~Identifies the program as an
I/O Adapter program
ABCDE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
To get out of single write mode and to program
level 0, do the following:
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
T
SEL PROG
o
- Sample 4: To write a record or records under
search content with format control:
Load program level 3 with the following:
N& 1OA5X 1OA5X6A3XAQ
Load program level A with the following:
: 1111151111311
The "3" here means that program level 7
must be manually selected if the I/O
Adapter program in program level 3 is to
be used.
ALPHABET
Press:
REC ADV
SEL PROG
Reading a Record from Attachment
7
Put the I/O Adapter online (9-98), Load the
diskette to be written on. Make the attachment
ready.
Press: FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE RECORD
Enter device address
Enter mode 3 or 4
Press the following keys in order:
2
3
4
5
6
7
- Sample 1: To read a record without entering or
changing the data on the diskette, do the following:
8
9
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH CONTENT
Key in: llllllll (26 blanks) 111l1l1l5
Press:
REC BKSP
SEL PROG
7
FUNCT SEL upper
N (write to EOD)
The 3741 searches until finding a record that
fits the search mask and then sends it out under
format control. Then it returns to index.
- Sample 5: To write an entire data set do the
following:
Press:
FUNCT SEL lower
V
FIELD COR
REC ADV
If you want to read another record:
Press:
FI ELD COR
To get out of single read mode:
Press:
N&A10X10AX15A3X9ICOSTtD$26F2AI.2AQ
Load program level A with the following:
After the first record to be sent is displayed:
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
N (write to EOD)
This will read the records up to the EOD record if in mode 4 or EOJ-in if in mode 3 into
the first data set. Then, the 3741 searches for
the next unprotected data set and reads into
it all records up to the EOF record if in mode
4 or EOJ-in if in mode 3.
:})5
The 5 means that if program level 2 is
selected all I/O Adapter operations will
use program level "5".
This sends all the records from the disk to the
attachment. Then returns to index and displays
the data set label of data just written.
Create or use an existing data set on the diskette.
Ensure the AUTO REC ADV switch is on. Then
advance to the record that is the first to be sent.
FUNCT SEL upper
V (read to EOF)
- Sample 2: To read in a group of records under
format control.
Ensure that the AUTO REC ADV switch is on.
- Sample 6: To send part of a data set do the
following:
Press:
FUNCT SEL upper
Load program level 5 with the following:
FUNCT SEL upper
N (write to EOD)
Create or use two or more data set labels with
adequate space for entry of data records. Ensure the AUTO REC ADV switch is on. Receive the data to be entered in the first data
set. Follow it with an EOD record if in mode
4 or an EOJ-in if in mode 3.
T
Create or use an existing data set on the diskette.
Start at the data set label and then:
Press:
- Sample 3: To read in mUltiple data sets do the
following:
Display the Data Set label of the first data set
to be filled.
This causes a record to be read and its contents
displayed on the screen. If this data is to be
entered onto the disk at the location the disk is:
Press:
This will read all the records into the disk with
format control. When the 3741 sees the EOF
record if in mode 4, or the EOJ-in if in mode 3,
it returns to index.
Locate the data set label of the data set to be
written into or create space for a data set for
the number of records to be read. Ensure that
the AUTO REC ADV switch is on.
Press:
SEL PROG
2
FUNCT SEL upper
V (read to EOF)
EC
825958
Date 3/21/75
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619492
I
3741 ML
9-95
lEe
825958
PN 1619493
Operation Flowcharts
Write a Record to Attachment
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations',
Page 9-110
Yes
I/O Adapter programs are on page
.9-92
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program_ Choose
a number from 1
throu9h A
For I/O Adapter
programs there must
be storage in level A and
one other level 1-8
9-96
Locate the record
using any normal
operation
Yes
No
The record on the
disk is not altered;
only the CRT data
is altered
Correct the source
of the error
No
No
Yes
r
I
I
Hold ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM
SH I FT while press·
ing RESET
Yes
3741 issues EOJ
out and goes
offline
This writes a record to
the attachment with the
data displayed on the
CRT (see Page 14-118
:hroughO)
Reset (this retries
the operation)
a
I
I
I
Yes
I
I
I
I
I
I
No
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IL. __
Returns the 3741 to
the mode it was in .
just before writing
the record
This cancels the
I/O Adapter job
lEe
825958
Date 3i21n5
I
I
PN 1619494
3741 ML
9-97
lEe
825958
Date 3/21/75
I
PN 1619495
Read a Record from Attachment
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations',
Page 9-110
Yes
1/0 Adapter programs
are on page 9·92
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program_ Choose
a number from 1
through A
For 110 Adapter programs,
there must be storage
in level A and one
other level 1·8
9·98
Locate the ad·
dress using nor·
mal operations
This reads the record
from the attachment
(see 'File Transfer
Read Theory'
throughBin
Chapter 14)
No
a
This clears the
3741 from a
single read mode
Data is displayed
on CRT but not
yet written on
the disk
Yes
No
The 3741 goes to
some mode as just
before the read
FUNCT SEL lower
STOP
M
lEe
825958
Oat. 3/21/75
I
I
PN 1619496
I
3741 ML
9-99
~EC
825958
PN 1619497
Date 3/21/75
Write a Data Set (All or in Part) to Attachment
B
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations'.
Page 9·110
Yes
I/O Adapter pro·
grams are on page
9-92
Search on record
address (see page
9·1 for help)
Allocate space for
program. Choose
a number from 1
through A
For I{O Adapter
programs there must
be storage in level A
and one other level 1·8
A
9·100
Use update mode
or a search to find
the record
Record advance or
backspace to locate
the first record to
be sent
Insure that the
program selected
is still displayed
on CRT
This will cause all
of the data set to
be sent
This starts the
sending oper·
ation
This cancels
the I/O Adapter
job.
Correct the source
of the error
Reset
Displays the data
set label of data
set just sent
Position to next
data set
Page
9·100
lEe
825958
I
prj
161949~
3741 ML
9-101
lEe
825958
toN 1619499
Date 3/21/75
Read a Data Set (or Data Sets) from Attachment
Disk could already
be in unit. If so,
ignore this step
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations',
Page 9·110
You can read data
into any number
of data sets by use
of an EOD record if
in mode 4 or EOJ·in
if in mode 3
Yes
I/O Adapter pro·
grams are on page
g.92
Search on record
address (see page
9·1 for help)
Allocate space for
program. Choose a
number from 1
through A
For I/O Adapter programs,
there must be storage in
level A and one other
level 1·8
A
9-102
This starts the reading
operation from the
attachment
Correct the source
of the error
Use REC A[)V or
AUTO REC ADV to
continue
Yes
No
Hold ALPHA
SHIFT and NUM
No
Return to
X R mode
lEe
825958
Date 3/21/75
I
PiN
16195(~
3741 ML
9-103
lEe
825958
Oat. 3/21175
I
PN 1619501
Write a Record to Attachment Using Search Address
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations',
Page 9-110
Yes
I/O Adapter programs are on page
9-92
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program_ Choose a
number from 1
through A
For I/O Adapter
programs, there must
be storage in level A
and one other level 1-8
A
9-104
REC AOV or REC
FUNCT S·EL upper
N (write to EOO)
Machine displays
record just sent
and returns to
U R mode
Correct the source
of the error
Yes
If the record is not
found machine
returns to
X R mode
No
Page
9·104
FUNCT SEL lower
N
FUNCT SEL upper
T
STOP
fEe 825958
Date 3/21/75
PN
161950~
3741 ML
9-105
lEe
825958
PN 1619503
Write a Record (or Records) to Attachment Using Search Content
See 'Setting Up
Record Transfer
Operations',
Page 9-110
Yes
I/O Adapter
programs are
on page 9-92
Search on record
address (see page
9-1 for help)
Allocate space for
program. Choose a
number from 1
through A
For I/O Adapter programs, there must be
storage in level A and
one other level 1-8
A
9-106
Yes
No
No
This initiates ":he
search and ser,ding
of all records
matching the mask
No
Yes
REC ADV or REC
BKSP to the start·
ing point of the
search
No
Correct the
of the error
Or SEARCH SE·
QUENTIAL CON·
TENT if desired
Retry
so~
~
>~:!..Y~es~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1
~~:~;;:~:;J;M -- ~
SHIFT while
pressing RESET
This cancels the
1/0 Adapter job
_ _ _ _ __
RESET
After sending the
record(s), stays in
UR mode and
displays the data
set label
If no record is
found it returns
to index
Page
9·106
lEe
825958
Da.e 3121175
I
PN
16195C~
3741 ML
9-107
lEe
3/21n~ I
825958
Date
PN 1619505
9-108
Character Transfer
File Transfer
START
E R mode can be
used only in input
to 3741 mode
Address = Key 4 in position 1
for System/3
Modes:
1
Single data set, single
volume
2
Multiple data sets for
read operation (operator
controlled)
3
Multiple data sets, automatic move to next diskette
4
Multiple data sets, user
assigned ending sequence
5
Multiple data sets,
multiple volumes
No
Yes
Trace mode
(Execute one
instruction each
time RESET is
pressed)
Yes
Program
execution
Yes
*A/N FSL = Hold ALPHA SHIFT and
NUM SHIFT while pressing
FUNCT SEL lower
END
**A/N RESET
= Hold ALPHA SHIFT
and NUM SHIFT while
pressing RESET
END
Summary of File Transfer Operations (Read or Write)
Mode
Drive
Termination
Writing (3741 to Attachment)
Reading (Attachment to 3741)
1
1
Automatic
Single data set only
Single data set only .
2
1
Manual: FUNCT SEL
upper, T
Multiple data sets with operator intervention between data
sets. Operator can position
disk to next data set and continue.
Multiple data sets with operator intervention
between data sets. Each data set is automatically closed. Operator can position to ne:ther
label.
Use mode 1 on last data
set for automatic termination
Automatic at EOJ when
reading
3
1 or 2
Manual: FUNCT SEL
upper, T
Automatic at EOJ when
reading
4
1 or 2
Manual: FUNCT SEL
upper, T
Automatic at Xl
message when reading
5
1 or 2
Manual: FUNCT SEL
upper, T
Automatic at EOJ when
reading
825958
826065
Date 3/21n5
8/1/75
EC
PN 16195(
3741 ML
9-109
825958
PN 1619507
3121/75
Setup for I/O Adapter (ONLINE) Mode
Setting Up Record Transfer Operations
Enter device address in position 1.
Enter mode (3 or 4) in position 2.
For mode 4, enter XYZ ending sequence
characters in positions 3, 4, and 5.
- If record length is less than that on data set
label, enter record length in positions 6, 7,
and 8.
- Press: FUNCT SEL lower
Attached Device
Refer to the operator guide of the attached device
for setup procedures.
IBM 3741
Switches
X
~'-v--'
Device
Address
AUTO DUP switch and CHARACTER switch
can be either ON or OFF.
2.
The AUTO REC ADV switch must be ON
for a WRITE to EOD or a READ to EOF.
If the switch if OFF during a WRITE to
EOD or READ to EOF, one record will be
sent or read. Then one record will be sent
or read each time REC AOV is pressed.
3.
The keyboard has the same function as normal.
4.
RESET:
a. Pressing just RESET will reset the error
and if the error is retriable, will retry the
operation.
b. Pressing and holding NUM SHI FT while
pressing RESET (Models 3and 4 only)
will skip the I/O Adapter operation.
c. Pressing and holding ALPHA SHIFT
while pressing RESET (Models 3 and 4
only) will cancel all I/O Adapter operation to the end of the job.
d. Pressing and holding both ALPHA SHI FT
and NUM SHIFT while pressing RESET
(double shifted reset) will cancel the entire job. For WRITE to EOO or READ
to EOF, the display returns to X R mode.
For single read or write mode, the display
does not change.
Record Length (if less than
that on data set label)
XYZ Ending Sequence Characters (operator
selected)
XY = EOD Indicator*
XZ = EOJ Indicator*
Mode
Writing
3
3741 sends EOD-OUT when EOD on
data set label is reached.
Attachment sends EOD-I N when attachment EOD
is reached.
3741 sends EOJ-OUT when
operator enters device address and
presses:
FUNCT SEL upper
T
Attachment sends EOJ-I N when attachment endof-job is reached.
3741 sends EOD indicator characters
when EOD on data set label is
reached.
Attachment sends EOD indicator characters when
EOD on data set label is reached.
3741 sends EOJ indicator characters
when operator presses:
FUNCT SEL lower
Attachment sends EOJ indicator characters when
EOO on last data set label is reached.
4
1.
r
,
9-110
Reading
N
FUNCT SEL upper
T
* The EOD or EOJ indicator characters are sent as
the first two characters of an extra record
following the last data record.
Clearing
1.
Clear single write mode or single read mode
by pressing FUNCT SEL upper and T.
INTRODUCTION - How to use
The IBM 3740 Data Entry System is a family of
devices that provides a key-to-disk-to-tape data
handling capability. This is performed in two
stages. During the first stage, the data is keyed
onto a small flexible magnetic disk via one of the
data stations. During the second stage, the data
on the disk is transferred to 1/2-inch computer
tape by the data converter.
The two data entry stations are the IBM 3741
and the IBM 3742. The IBM 3742 Dual Data'
Station has two keying stations in one machine
frame. The IBM 3741 Data Station has one
keying station. The 3742 provides basic functions similar to the IBM 029, 059, and 129. The
3741 provides these basic functions along with
additional features such as a printer and a
BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter) unit.
The IBM 3747 Data Converter feeds, reads and
stacks the diskettes. The data it reads is transferred to 9-track computer compatible magnetic
tape. The 3747 can also be equipped with a
BSCA unit.
The BSCA unit installed on a 3741 or 3747
allows data transfer between these units or between these units and a CPU equipped with
BSCA. A BSCA equipped 3741 or 3747 can
communicate with another BSCA equipped
3741 or 3747.
..3740 Data Entry System
1
t
I
I
IBM 3742
Dual Data Station
IBM 3741
Data Station
~{;?
Teleprocessing
(BSCA)
Diskette
[E
D
v------------v>@<=>
Magnetic Tape
Data Converter
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
PI\! 161911
~
3741 ML
10-1
3741 ML
IBM 3741 FUNCTIONAL UNITS
Diskette
10-2
mer
Recording me d'um
I
for the d'IS k drive (custo
purchased),
Display
' al display 0 f machine status, data,
Provides a VISU, nce information.
and operator gUida
.
Disk Drive 1
Disk Drive 2
d writes data a nd control
Reads an,
on the disk.
information
K Yboard
.
e 'des the operator an interface to the machme.
Provi
MPU
Provides control and monitcring
circuitry for the keyboard,
display, BSCA, printer, and
disk drive.
Provides the required voltages for the 3741 and
attached printer.
F4
-4Vdc
(3.7 to 4.4)
. .~.:
6.3 Vdc.
::
[6==dJ 24 Vdc
F5
~8.5Vdc
: :
::
(5.7 to 6.9) ::
•-5 Vdc
(4.7 to 5.5)
IBM 3741 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
AND FEATURES
Functional Characteristics
Function
Model 1
Model 2
Ten program storage areas
Standard
Standard
Enter
Standard
Standard
Program chaining
Standard
Standard
Update
Standard
Standard
Record length (1 to 128 characters)
Standard
Standard
Search EOD
Standard
Standard
Search data address
Standard
Standard
Search content
Standard
Standard
Search sequential content
Standard
Standard
Operator guidance
Standard
Standard
BSCA
Not available
Standard
Features
ROS Feature Card
Feature Group A
Production statistics
Verify
Self-check (moduli 10 and 11)
Field totals (online)
Field totals (offline)
Disk initialization
Expansion feature (Feature E)
Printer adapter
Second disk adapter
Record insert
Second disk hardware
Printer hardware
Proof key board
Expanded communications (EBSCA)
Expanded communications (EBSCA)
with Multipoint
Synchronous clock
Terminal identification
Keylock
10 Reader card
1200 BPS line adapter (leased)
1200 BPS line adapter (switched)
Katakana (five additional program
storage areas)
Data Recorder Attachment
I/O Adapter
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
825958
11/15/74
3/21/75
Optional
Optional
Optiomil
Optional
Optioml
Optioned
Optioned
Optional
Not ava: lable
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Not avai lable
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
~
PN 161912:
3741 ML
10-3
lEe
823146
Oat. 9115174
I
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619122
3741 ML
10-4
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The manual contains all documents necessary
to maintain the 3741 Data Station. The material
is arranged as shown.
Page 1-1 (start of call) leads you into a failureanalysis procedure based on the guideline: Start
with the highest-order symptom that appears after
power on. Begin every repair action at start of call.
Answering the questions asked, following the paths
indicated by Yes and No answers, and performing
the actions required, leads you, in most cases, to
the cause of machine failure.
Start of Call guides you to the correct Maintainance Analysis Procedure (MAP) via the Symptom
Index, or to the Machine Checkout procedure.
o
Symptom Index
A list of machine-failure symptoms is divided
into four categories:
1.
Error codes
2.
Symptoms observed on the display
3.
Failure of keyboard-initiated operations
4.
Other
START OF CALL
Is there an RPO Special Feature installed? - - - - - Y
N
o
0
A check mark in'"the Y or tj box
indicates the MAP path to foil )w.
If neither box is check markee,
I
Note 1: - 128 Featured Machine Only
Ignore displayed information until
30 seconds after power up. (The
----------==~
I
(use last one)
N
Error Code?
(use last one)
N
~
Do you have any other symptom?
Y
N
_ Use Machine Checkout.
The order of listing the categories indicates the
importance level of symptoms. The iildexindeed the whole maintainance philosophy- is
based on this arrangement of symptoms.
600 POWER
700 MACHINE CHEC:WUT
I~·-II09
,eo,
--:----------------'
~~~
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
11115/74
PN 161912
3741 ML
10-5
EC
823146
Date 9115n4
1.
826065
PN 1619124
3741 ML
/8/1n5
Error Codes are displayed as shown along the left edge of the
index pages. In the space to the right of each code you find
MAP-page reference, failure description, probable cause, and
how-to-fix information. If multiple codes are displayed, use
the most consistent and stable one, or the last one displayed.
Some disk drive failures are due to automatic retry procedures,
changeable and slow to stabilize.
SYMPTOM INDEX
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
2.
Code
Display Position
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
A
2-1
Data set non-accessible
- The data set accessibility code field in the data set label or in the
volume label has a non-blank character_
- Remove the dis,kette_
B
2-1
Bad data set label
- One of the following conditions existed when you attempted to
select a mode from track 00:
1. The last record read and currently displayed is from track 00.
records 01 through 07.
2. Position 4 of the header field in the data set label does not
contain a 1.
3. The data set label is flagged with a control address mark (such
as is required for a deleted record).
- Press RESET and enter a 1 in position 4. press
FUNCT SEL lower. M. and REC ADV.
- Enter H in position 1. press FUNCT SEL lower. M.
and RECADV.
-
-
7
BOE
IS
less than track 01. record 01.
~~.
Symptoms observed on the display are shown as pictures of the display.
~:~:. ~..'Ii
Each symptom has an associated MAP reference and descriptive informa- ~~;:f.
tiona
~~,
- Press RESET and REC ADV.
Press RESET and enter the correct BOE. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower. M. and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct EOE. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower. M. and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Then press
FUNCT SEL lower. M. and REC ADV.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entries. Th .. -'I~I(~T SEL lower. M. anti nc:" .-
~.~....~
~tb
~" ~~
~O(
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT
SYMPTOMS
Symptom: Blank CRT or brightness fades
to blank.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
"
,
v'
3' ·'Symptom: Vertical bar -'Call be in any
5
location on display.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: Multiple vertical bars.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
•t
MAP 3-2
MAP 3-5
MAP 3-5
2
4
6
Symptom: Spot - can be in any location
on display.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: Multiple vertical spots.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
Brightness control: Normal
10·6
Page 1-13 contains information vital to the correct use of the display
unit symptom index.
HOW TO USE THE DISPLAY UNIT
SYMPTOMS
DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
If you are aware of the display unit symptom
terms and the directions on this page, continue
with the next command. Otherwise, review the
information contained in the adjacent columns
and then continue here.
The diskette can be either unloaded or loaded ..
(Loaded is preferred.)
•"" viewer.
-- ft"ntrol {observe th~
The following 7 pages contain descriptions and
pictures of symptoms to direct you to the correct
MAP to use for diagnosis.
CRT:
Cathode ray tube (display).
Blank CRT:
The display looks like power is off.
Blooms:
The entire display appears to glow
or the raster is excessively bright.
Brightness:
The amount of light emitted from
the raster.
The symptoms are numbered to indicate the prior
ity sequence and to allow referencing .
Read the symptom description with each picture
to understand the illustrllt;~/
3.
DISPLAY UNIT GLOSSARY
/
.L.. ....
""'.111"1 h", ---
.
411 lettArc:
Symptoms of keyboard-initiated operational failures are listed alphabetically by the names of all the keys and switches. Each index entry
has failure-descriptive matter and associated MAP-page reference.
KEYBOARD AND OPERATIONAL SYMPTOMS
Communication.
DisployDll1
4-4
Alphlbotlc Shitc
7-7
7-7
7-7
Fa~ls to receive.
Falls to transmit
7-9
7-9
7-9
Communication terminates
#Xpanded
Communications set-up prob~ .~~ BSCA only
Fails to establish commun~~
4-2
4-2
4-2
Fails to override program control
Program fails
Does not alpha shift from keyboard
4-6
4-6
Alway. I tone
No ludio feedback from Iny key
No tone It end of function
Toni or click at Incorrect time
Fails communication mode
pre~tl¥el~
Auto RocAdv
Copy
4-3
4-'
4-5
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-4
it~,
4-2
4-4
Fail#mpN,\~ldtotils
cf-
Always display. field totll.
Display. incorrect field totals
Fills to display field totals
DispilY Fie d Noml
computN,Id t4,correct
~ ~
Comput. Field Total.
4-5
4-2
s.'+'
B~~nly
remote end.
Audio Flldblck D.vlce
4-6
4-6
4-2
~(t>
Display. Incorrect field name
Fail. to display field name
O(t>
c~nUaICOPY
Disploy Fi.d Program
Copies incorrect data
Fails to copy
Missing/extra record.
4-4
Display. incorrect field program
4-2
MISCELLANEOUS SYMPTOMS
Koyboord
4-1
Communications
4.
nll"'~---
Other (miscellaneous) symptoms include any that do not conform to
categories 1, 2, and 3.
7-7
7-9
Notice how Start of Call (page 1-1) guides you to the correct symptom
category, and the Symptom Index directs you to a MAP.
7-7
7-9
7-5
7-9
7-7
7-9
4-2
4-6
4-6
Communication terminates
prematurely
BSCA
EBSCA
F ail. in print-unattended mode
EBSCA only
Flils to go into commllnications
mode
BSCA
EBSCA
Multipoint alarm fail. to sound
EBSCA
Set-up problems
BSCA
EBSCA
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-2
4-4
4-2
Audio feedback device works with
.nerror
Binding key
Click only from reset
Dead keyboard
Incorrect data entered with or
without ludio response
Incorrect functions performed
with or without audio response
Multiple characters entered for
1 keystroke
No click from any key
No data entered Ind no click
from 1 or more keys
No data entered with or without
an ludio response
.... function performed and no
• tlr more keys
",,"ed with or
Disk Dri •• Unit
4-12
Altered/missing data
• '>p screw must
be loosened through grillwork of fan guard
assembly.
- Loosen screw, mark, and removE' fan blade
(217L) (note blade curvature).
- Remove drive belt (217K).
- Loosen setscrew (217G) and remove pulley.
Replacement
- Align setscrew with flat surface of shaft and
tighten.
- Replace belt.
- Check belt tracking (215).
- Replace fan belt and guard (note blade
curvature) .
215
Idler Assembly
Removal
- Remove belt (217K).
- Remove idler assembly (217E).
- To replace, reverse procedure and check belt
tracking.
Belt Tracking
Belt must be riding in center of drive pulley and
hub pUlley.
224
Disk Cover Locations
Legend
LED assembly mounting screws
Collet assembly mounting screw
LED essembly
Head load actuator
Cover pivot
II
a----
II
D----
Graphic identification - This is the pivot
screw (224E) referred to in the explanation
of MAPs, page 10-8.
ID----+--I+
Service page identification - This pair of
numbers reflects the range of service information on facing' pages.
3741 ML
220-224
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
11/15/74
p;~
161912
3741 ML
10·11
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
&
Machine Checkout
ID
The basic checkout procedure is used when:
- No symptom is clearly indicated,
During installation,
- MAPs fail.
l~l:I
826065
PN 1619130
8/1n5
Index
4.
Alphabetical list of items contained in this manual.
5.
01 RPQ
Diagnostic Aids
CE display mode
Display disk speed
- Display track IDs
- Display registers
CE universal logic probe (PN 453212)
CRT jumper for raster display
Track alignment test diskette (PN 2455026)
CE meter (PN 452796) test
6.
The manual includes this section only if an RPQ
is installed on the machine.
7.
Parts Catalog
The parts catalog is a separate manual from this
one, but should be stored with this manual.
8.
9.
10.
MAP RULES SUMMARY
11.
m
(See How To Use, page 10-5 for other information)
Operating Procedures
Complete instructions on machine operating
procedures.
1m
Introduction
A.
B.
C.
The introduction tells you about the 3740 system
configuration, and how to use this manual.
m
D.
Theory
E.
I&!I
These sections contain the theory for the machine.
There is one section for each major functional
unit. The sections are: disk, display, keyboard,
MPU and power supply.
IIJ
I nstallation Procedure
G.
I"n
F.
Start of Call page 1-1) insures that the highest priority symptom index group is used.
Use the most consistent symptom after
power on. Use the last error code to be
displayed.
MAP are designed to locate a F RU that has
a single mechanical or electrical failure. If
the symptom changes after an adjustment
or F R U replacement, use Start of Call with
the new symptom.
If you cannot decide which MAP to use,
the Machine Checkout Procedure (page 7-1 )
will guide you to the right MAP.
When asked to probe or measure mUltiple
points in a table - probe or measure only
until a failure is indicated.
The probe UP and DOWN lights will momentarily flash on during power on if the probe
is connected to its machine power source.
Please ignore.
DEFINITIONS:
DISCONNECT - Physically/electrically
take apart.
LOAD a diskette - Close the disk
2.
drive cover (with a diskette in the
drive). Usually at the faulty station .
MEASURE - Use IBM CE multimeter,
3.
PN 452796.
1.
This section contains the installation procedure
for the base machine and the features.
.111 Glossary
The glossary gives definitions of terms used in this
manual.
12.
13.
14.
3741 ML
10-12
ORIGINAL keyboard or disk drive the keyboard or disk drive located at
station with reported fault.
OTHER keyboard or disk drive - oppo·
site of original keyboard or disk drive.
POWER DOWN - turn power switch
OFF.
POWE R UP - turn power switch ON.
Always wait at least 5 seconds after a
power down before powering up to
allow for proper power on reset
(POR).
PROBE - use IBM Universal Logic
Probe, PN 453212.
RECONNECT - Physically/electrically
put back together.
REINSTALL - Put original pa:t back
in place of new part.
REMOVE a diskette - take the diskette
out of the disk drive.
REPLACE - Put new part in place of
original part.
RESEAT - Unplug and replug into
same location.
UNLOAD a diskette - open the disk
drive cover. (Does not mean remove.)
DISK THEORY
Diskette. . . . . . .
Disk format description.
Data set label . . . .
Disk unit field replaceable units .
Operating sequence . .
Diskette characteristics.
Disk test points . . .
. 11-2
. 11-2
. 11-3
. 11-4
. 11-8
11-13
11-14
lEe 823146 I
Date 9/15/74
III
PI~ 161913J
3741 ML
11-1
DISKETTE
Disk Format Description
EC 823146
826065
Date 9115n4
8/1/75
PN 1619132
11-2
Disks that contain prerecorded record addresses
are known as initialized disks. Initialized disks
actually contain the following information at
each record location:
Track 00 is the index track and is reserved for
descriptive information about the data on the
disk. The assignment of the records on the index
track is:
•
Record 1-2
Record 3
Records 4-6
Record 7
Records 8-26
D
The IBM diskette is a packaged Mylar* disk.
Information is stored magnetically on the disk
surface which is coated with magnetic oxide. The
disk is free to rotate inside the package. The
package has access holes for rotating the disk, for
read/write head contact, and for index hole
sensing.
Information is arranged on the disk in tracks.
A track is a circular path on the disk surface. Information is magnetically written or read on a
track by a read/write head as the disk rotates.
Each disk has 77 tracks (tracks 00 through 76).11
Track 00 (the index track) is always physically the
outermost track from the center of the disk. A
maximum of two tracks may be identified as
unusable (bad) tracks. Usable tracks are numbered
00 through 73 in sequence, skipping over any bad
tracks. Tracks 01 through 73 are used for data
entry.
10 field - contains track and record number
and record length of the following data
field.
m
•
Gap 1 - Gap between 10 field and data
field.
m
•
Data field - contains data record specified
by preceding 10 field.
•
Gap 2 - Gap between data field and ID field
of the next record.
Data set labels are used to reserve a block of
records for a particular use. They also contain
controls and status information about that
block of records.
II
m
The first byte of all 10 and data fields is a special
8-bit code referred to as an address mark (AM).
m
The last two bytes of all 10 and data fields are
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) bytes used to
verify read operations.
II
There are 26 records, numbered 01 through 26,
on each track
Therefore, each record on the
disk has a definite address consisting of a track
and record number. This address is recorded at
the record's physical location on the disk.
The 3741 requires an initialized disk for all
operations except the initialize (optional feature)
operation. This feature allows the operator to
prepare an initialized disk on the 3741. All
disks are initialized prior to shipping to customers.
Displayed record address
00008
Track number -----~y y
Record number _ _ _ _ _ _----IJ
*Trademark of E.!. dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc.
m.
oA
,/
A
Not used on 3741
Reserved for write gate check
Not used on 3741
Check for accessibility
Data set labels
On the 3741 after power up and inserting a
disk, record 00008, the first data set label,
is automatically read and displayed.
The
operator then can select the data set label to
be used by pressing REC ADV to the location
of that data set label (00008 to 00026). Any
machine operation performed must occur within
the selected data set.
00008
X R
80
01001 73026
V
01001
II
\
/
\
//
I
/
ID Field
G_ap_1_ _ _ _--jJ
/
/
\
/
\ I
m
K
D
\
I
\
\
~ ~\\
\
I
I
(~
\
\
\
\
128 8y",,0, Dol,
m
II
ID Fitld
\
I
\
(~ ~
11:11
10:.1
I~ IH----:::JlL------
Dol,
I
\
/
~I
\I
/
\
/
/
L:I
~~IL\_____
~I~
II
Data Field
r.:II
--------i\ g\~\1
D
Data Set Label
Fields in heavy lines are required by the 3740
data entry system:
1
4
13
6
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HDR1
Data Set Name
23
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
27
29
1 1 1 1
Record
Length
33
35
1 1 1 1
Beginning
of Extent
39
1 1 1 1
End
of Extent
1411421431
I I 1I
1451
1 1
End of Data
LM"'H"
Jlume Indicator
File Pn Hect
Accessi bility
Bypass Data Set
~Verify
Mark
The following is a position by position representation of data on the index track in anyone record
of records 8-26:
Field Name
Position
Purpo~e
Field Name
Position
Purposll
Header 1
1-4
5
Label identifier, must be HDR 1.
Reserved.
Accessibility
42
Data set name
6-13
14-22
User optional field.
Reserved.
This field must contain a blank for processing to take place. If a character is in
th is fiel d, the data set cannot be processed and an A error is posted.
File protect
43
If this field contains a P, the disk is read
only. It must be blank to allow reading
and writing.
Reservnd.
Record length
Beginning of
extent (BOE)
23-27
28
Logical record length.
Reserved.
29-33
Identifies the address of the first record of
a data set.
Reserved.
34
End of extent
(EOE)
35-39
40
44
Multivolume
indicator
Identifies the address of the last record
space reserved for this data set.
Reserved.
Verify mark
Bypass data set
41
The IBM 3747 Data Converter requires
that this field contain a B or a blank. If a
B is present, the data set is ignored. If a
blank is present, a data set is processed.
The 3741 will not transmit a data set if
this field contains a B.
End of data
(EOD)
EC
m
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
46-72
A blank in this field indicates the data set
is not continued from or on another disk.
C means the data set is continued on
another disk. L indicates this is the last
disk on which a continued data set is
located.
Reserved.
73
74
This finld must contain a V or a blank.
Reserved.
75-79
Identifies the address of the next unused
record space on the disk.
80
Reservl~d.
45
PN
16191:
3741 ML
11-3
DISK UNIT FIELD REPLACEABLE
UNITS (FRUs)
EC 823146
825853
Date 9/15n4
11/15n4
Head Load Actuator Assembly
PN 1619134
m
The head load actuator presses the disk against
the read/write head.
Disk Drive
The disk drive provides the 3741 with the ability
to read and write on the disk.
To accomplish this, the disk drive has the following major components:
Disk D.rive Cover
IZ1
The disk drive cover permits insertion and removal of the disk and clamps the disk to the disk
drive.
Light Emitting Diode (LED) Assembly
Phototransistor
II
mand
When the disk cover is closed, the continuous infrared light emitted from the LED is directed towards
the phototransistor assembly. Once every revolution, the index hole in the disk allows light
from the LED to reach the phototransistor. The
phototransistor sends index pulses to the MPU.
The index pulses signal the MPU that the disk
is rotating.
Disk Collet Assembly
m
When the disk cover is closed, the spring
loaded collet centers and clamps the disk to
the disk drive hub.
File Control (FC) Card Assembly
II
The disk drive file control card provides circuits
for the stepper motor, head load actuator, and
write and erase heads. It also provides the
amplifiers for the phototransistor and read head.
These are all under control of the MPU.
The head load actuator assembly consists of
a magnet and armature. During a read or write
operation, the head load actuator is energized
and allows the pressure pad arm to push the
disk against the read/write head. At the same
time, the head load actuator armature forces
the disk package against the disk to clean the
disk. While not reading or writing, the head load
actuator is de-energized and holds the pressure
pad assembly away from the disk to reduce wear
to the disk surface or the read/write head.
Variable Frequency Oscillator (VFO) Card
m
The VFO is used at all times while reading.
The VFO is used while reading the ID field
during the write operation. The VFO card
separates data signals from the clock signals
received from the Fe card. The data signals
from the V FO card are sent to the disk controller and transferred to the data buffer. Both
drives use the same VFO card.
11-4
I'~ ~~.
'
f
"'''t/
I
I
Cable an d Connectors:
LED Cable
Cable
d Load Actuator
Hea
.
Cable
Phototransistor
Disk 1 Signal Cable
3741 ML
m
11-5
Motor and Drive
III
The motor and drive rotate the disk.
Stepper Motor Assembly
D
The stepper motor moves the read/write head
from track to track. The stepper motor wheel
is permanently mounted on the end of the stepper
motor shaft. The stepper motor shaft turns in
increments of 900 in either direction under the
control of access pulses. The stepper motor
wheel engages the leadscrew wheel. When the
stepper motor rotates 900 , it causes the leadscrew
to rotate 900 • The head carriage assembly then
moves up or down one track on. the disk.
Preload Spring
13
The preload spring loads the leadscrew to ensure
head alignment with the disk.
Limit Stops
II
The upper limit stop prevents the head from being
driven more than 1/2 track beyond track 76. The
lower limit stop prevents the head from being
driven more than 1 track lower than track 00.
Head and Carriage Assembly
III
The head and carriage assembly provides read,
write, and erase functions.
Leadscrew Nut and Spring
III
The leadscrew nut and spring loads the head and
carriage assembly to ensure head alignment with
the disk.
Cover Interlock SwitchED
The normally closed points of the cover interlock
switch are in parallel with the phototransistor (see
schematic on page 11-9).
This switch prevents index pulses until a diskette
is fully loaded in the disk drive. (Diskette installed and the cover latched closed,)
EC 823146
825853
Date 9/15n4
11/15/74
PN 1619136
11-6
Disk Drive
--If-f#Pulley
Drives
. Disk
Disk D...;.,r_iv_e--4'
Belt
Disk Drive _ _----"./rJ...
Idler
mat
360
RPM
Disk Drive Shaft
Bearings (and Spacer)
Drive
Motor-.--------~~+--.,,...::::;-.---::~~~·
Disk Drive Hub Shaft Assembly
B------------------
~~(~~~_ _ _
Leadscrew Wheel
13
Upper II
Upper Leadscrew Bearings
~.........,--(
(
__ J
m
Pressure Pad Arm
m-====m:~~1J
LowerD
-4+------- Leadscrew
11~'~nz;~-- Lower
I
EC 823146
m
Date 9/15174
I
PN
16191<~
Leadscrew Bearings
3741 ML
11-7
lEe
OPERATING SEQUENCE
5.
1.
Ac and dc power comes on under control
of the 3741 power on/off switch. A
diskette can be inserted or removed with
power up or down.
2.
Load a diskette and close the cover.
Closing of the cover presses the collet
into the drive hub l!1 thus clamping the
disk in place. With power up, the disk turns
counterclockwise as viewed at the head
side (back) of the disk drive.
3.
4.
m
823146
PN 1619138
For each access command, the stepper
motor mrotates the leadscrew 11900 •
This moves the read head one track position. Clockwise rotation (looking down on
the disk drive unit) moves the head up,
counterclockwise rotation moves it down.
Two adjacent access lines must be energized for an overlapping period of 50
ms to rotate the motor 90 0 . After accessing to a track and prior to a read or
write operation, the two lines must be
energized for an additional 100 ms. Access
codes to cause rotation to a given track
are shown below
II .
After a 10-second delay from power on,
index pulses
are read once every disk
revolution (nominally, every 166.7 ms).
6.
To initiate a read or write operation, the
'+ head engage' line
is activated. This
allows the pressure pad assembly 131 to
push the disk against the head
After
80 ms delay, data can be gated into the
system.
If any read or write command does not
execute within two index pulses after it
is issued, the command is automatically
reset.
7.
The pressure pad"is lifted two index pulses
after completion of the last read, write or
access operation to reduce disk wear unless
another read or write command is issued.
m
III
II.
Typical Timing Sequence
o
Index Pulses
50 100 150 200 250
'==166.7 ms=-:J
Nominal
300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750
I
I
I
m
Access 0 through access 3 are the stepper motor pulses.
Access 1 and 2 move the head from track 00 to track 01.
Access 0
Access 1
Access 2
Access 3
50
I ms
Track
o
80-ms delay overlaps with 100-ms stepper motor delay.
It is required only when a read/write command is not
preceded by an access. These delays are required to
allow for disk/head stabilization.
g100 ms-l
---------------------5
/
----------------------------~
iii
'
Track
l, Access 0
"
L mes
Energi zed "I~ Access 1
Access 2
, Access 3
o
x
X
2
4
x
X
X
X
X
X
1
3
x
X
5
X
X
6
74
X
X
X
X
75
X
76
X
X
X
t
Stepper mo tor is at phase 0 when read head is at track 00 or any track
divisi ble by 4.
t
I
11-8
D02~+-----~----~------~
D03~~----------r---~--4
D04
---,
~.f-----------+_--_t_--_1
I
I1_ _ _ _ _ _[llJ
____
,0
D05~+-----------~--~r_~
MPU
2·J
Phototransistor
or
2·K
D13
-------------------------~
+ Index Pulse TP 2
Interlock Switch
B04
B02
B06
B05
D07
l·B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TP 9
- Write Data
+ Low Current
TP 11
+ Write Gate
TP 12
+ File Data TP 3
Write
Select
D12 Black
CE Test Points TP 13 and TP 14
20·400 mV (all D's)
10·300 mV (all l's)
Bll B13 B12 D03 B02 B05 B03 B08
I
+ Std Data _.J
r-------------------------
I
+ Erase Gate
I
Erase (Tunnel)
I I
The edges of the data track are erased to prevent adjacent track interference or crosstalk.
+ Std Clock- - ..J
I I I I I I
+4F Clock-----.J
I I I I I
+4F Phase 2 - - - - - - J
I I I I
+ VFO Data Sync - - - - __ .J
I I I
+ Ignore Window High Gain---- J
I I
+ File Data (Disk Drive 1 ) - - - - - - - . . . I
I
+ File Data (Disk Drive 2 ) - - - - - - - __ J
Head ......
Disk
Motio;;---
VFO Card
Write Data
For each transition in the 'write data' line,
current is switched in the read/write head,
causing a flux change on the disk.
Read Amplifier
Low Current
Limit Amplifier and VFO Card
Detects magnetic flux changes from the read/
write head and generates file data Ii ne. File
data is the FM (frequency modulated) encoded
data which is sent to the VFO card to be
separated into data and clock signals.
m
The '+Iow current' line is active when data is
being written on tracks 42 through 76. The
line is inactive when data is being written on
tracks 0 through 41. Lower current is needed
for writing at greater density on the higher
numbered tracks.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
Highe( voltage is present at the outer track
becau5e of higher disk speed and lower bit
density .
All 0':; pattern gives a higher voltage amplitude
than ,III 1's pattern.
PN 16191:
3741 ML
11-9
lEe
823146
Dat. 911sn4
I
PN 1619140
11-10
Chart 1
Power on reset for disk drive.
POWER ON
Since the read/write head could be
on any track at power' on, the MPU
must synchronize with the read/write
- head location. This is accomplished
by stepping the read/write head to
track 00.
Seek low 79
tracks and set
track register to
00
Read track 00
record 03
Write gate check error.
Operation will not stop
at this point.
No
Start 100-ms
delay and energize head load
actuator
r
Diskette could have been inserted
at any time but the rest of the
operation requires a disk in the
drive.
I
L ___ - No
Insert diskette 80-ms delay
Yes
--l
I
----1
Read track 00
record'08
Read track 00
record 07
Read volume label to check for
accessibility.
Yes
'>--------;
Yes
Yes
Invert data just
read.
Write inverted
data on track 00
record 03
-
Diskette must be
removed to reset
error.
Diskette cannot
be used on 3741/
3742
'>--------1
Read track 00
record 03
This data set label
cannot be used on
the 3741/3742
Preparing for write gate test. Data
is read from record 03, inverted and
written back into record 03. It is
then read back and checked to see
if it was inverted.
This data set can
be read only
Read record 08
into the current
record buffer
Set BOE in track
and record register
Any operation may be
selected. REC ADV to
the desired data set label.
Operation can
continue in read
mode only.
Chart 2
The following flowchart continues from Chart 1
and shows a write operation using enter mode.
Assume data set label 1 has a BOE of 05004.
START
.
Write Operation, Enter Mode
80 ms delay
FUNCT SEL
lower and ENTER
Operator may start
keying in data.
Locate record
05004
Step read/write
head to track 05
Write data from
previous buffer
in record 05004
At the same time
develop and write
the C RC for record
05004
100 ms delay energize head load
actuator
Locate and read
record 05004
Read track 05 then
drop head load actuator after 2
index pulses
At the same time
develop CRC and
compare it to the
CRC read from
record 05004
After data is
entered, press
REC ADV
No
Add 1 to retry
counter
I
Transfer current
record buffer to
previous buffer
Drop head load
actuator after 2
index pulses
No
Energize head
load actuator
END OF
OPERATION
m
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PI~
161914
~
3741 Ml
11-11
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
PN 1619142
8/1n5
11-12
Chart 3
Assume data was entered in record 05004. The
following chart shows an update operation updating
record 05004.
START
Key in the desired
corrections and
record advance
Update
Yes
Record backspace
to record 04.
Puts machine in
update mode.
Transfer record 04
from current record
buffer to previ ous
record buffer
Set record counter
into track and
record register.
No
Energize head
load actuator
END OF
OPERATION
Energize head
load actuator
80-ms delay
80-ms delay
Read record 05
(current record
buffer)
Read track 05 record 04 into current record buffer
Yes
Develop C RC as
record is read and
compare it to
CRC on record 04
Add 1 to retry
counter
Ad d 1 to retry
counter
No
No
No
Yes
Write record 04
from previous
record buffer
Yes
Add 1 to
retry counter
DISKETTE CHARACTERISTICS
Handling
Diskette
Disk
-......-~-"""'I
Hole for index pulse
Hole in disk for
disk clamping cone
- Do not touch or attempt to clean the disk
surface.
Damaged diskettes should not be inserted into
the disk drive. Diskettes which are physically
damaged (torn, creased, warped) or contaminated
with foreign materials (eraser dust, fingerprints,
cleaning fluid, etc.) may cause the disk to fail
to contact the read/write head resulting in read/
write errors.
Placing heavy objects on the diskettes may damage
the disk.
R'ead head aperture
Return diskette to envelope whenever it is
removed from the disk unit.
- Keep diskette away from magnetic fields and
from ferromagnetic materials which might be
magnetized. Any diskette exposed to a magnetic field may lose information.
Disk
Track 00
Track
76-----r-Reverse side is
recorded side
Do not use clips. Never write on a diskette
with an erasable pencil. (Erasures may cause
disk failures.)
Long Term Storage
Place diskettes in their envelopes and store in the
following environment:
500
1250
(10.00
to
F
to
- Temperature:
Relative humidity: 8% ~ 80%
- Maximum wet bulb: 85 0 F (29.4°C)
Do not expose diskette to heat or sunlight.
51.50 C)
If a diskette has been exposed to temperatures
outside the range, allow five minutes acclimation time 'before use. The diskette should be
removed from its plastic shipping container
during this time.
Shipping and Receiving
Use shipping cartons only for shipping disks.
Additional shipping cartons are available at
IBM branch offices. With the diskette in place,
the package weighs 10 ounces (280 g). Be sure to
label the package: DO NOT EXPOSE TO HEAT
OR SUN LIGHT.
Save the carton for diskette storage and/or later,
shipment.
EC
m
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PI\I
161914~
~
3741ML
11-13
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15114
8/1115
PN 1619144
11-14
DISKTEST POINTS
Output of separated data and clock
signals from the VFO card.
TP 18
003
TP 21
B02
Red
White
~ Stepper Motor
c
VVUU
IUVU
"-----\.0
~
TP 20
Yellow
TP 19
'+4F clock'
'+4F, phase 2'
002 Black
B05 Blue
H-_....;.:.:..:.=_ _-:--_ _ _ _ _-'T;...Pl'---_'-+l!:.'::B04:::........:.Ye::.:;;llo~w__,Head Load Magn.t
010
.:6~ f- -
MPU
-5V - - TP 23
.:.:...=:=-----1I--"D:Q,5'-'B::!.::a~k_ _';j·
~- - - - - +~r~;:~=::::::TITP±16t=::::ltiyelli!~0E:wEBOi7~='8:J".1 ~E~ - - _
+ Index Pulse. TP2
Index
+ Hea dE ngage TP
TP.510
HMeaagdneLtOad,.-_ _ TP 22
'+ Std clock'
Int (+) dc sync
o13~-~~':-':';"----IAmplifier
Black
+ Low Current
TP 11
I
,I r
Write
~
I
::;
Hea.d~~
009
r
::~~+~w~rit~eG~.t~e~TP~1~21~~~0~ri:verJr----~1
007
+ File Data
~
~P13
T~ 3 ;:~~ifier IDifferentiato
Preamp
::~t~1
TP 14
Select
o13White
012 Black
'----'
Continuous - free running
I I 1 1 I j
'+ Std clock' and '+ std data' signals are not always
present at all locations shown due to the scope sync.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
012 Black
ReadNirite
Int (+) dc
1-8-813
1 p.s/div
See above
0.5 V/div
1.B
11
CE Test Points TP 13 and TP 14
20·400 mV (all O'sl
~ 0·300 mV (all l's)
Bll 813 B12 003 B02 B05 B03 B08
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i I i
+ Std Oat. _.J
I I I I I
+Std Clock--.J
I I I
I I
+4FClock----...J
I I
I I
+4F Phase 2 - - - - - - J
I I I I
+VFO DatI Sync------.J
I I I
+ Ignore Window High Glin---- J
I I
+ File olt. (Disk orivol)---- - __ J
I
+ File Data (Disk Drive 2 ) - - - - - - - --~
VFO Card
CE Test Points TP 13 and TP 14
20-400 mV (all O's)
10-300 mV (all 1's)
Full Track Differential Read Signal at CE Test
Points
E
(.)
-
>
E
(.)
E
a
>
E
LO
a
LO
'+ Std data'
All O's
All 1's
'+4F clock'
v
Portion of 1 Record
I n socket 1-8
cross connector for
VFO card.
20 ms/cm
10 Iots/cm
NOTE: Use X10 probe for all displays.
t
----~
? t
r- _____
Interlock Switch
B021--4-cc:-:....:;W"",rit""eD""'.t:::..,..--=TP'o-'9~
2
B09....c:::.... Phototransistor I""'::'\.
V
I - - _...T.:.:.P",-B_-I-,-,Yecc:llo-,,-w+--,-IDO,-,"W-,'
TP 24
'+ Std data'
cb
--cb
T
2·J
or
2·K
-
I
TP 2 - '+ Index pulse' .
Individual pulse is approximately 5 ms.
The signal is always present with the diskette in
the drive, the cover closed,
and the power on.
I
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 2
1 ms/div
FC card TP 2
O.2V/di"
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 2
20 ms/div
FC card TP 2
O.2V/di'/
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 3
0.5 ~s/div
FC card TP 3
O.2V/div
TP 2 -'+ Index pulse'
The two pulses show the
disk speed time period;
should be approximately
167 ms.
II
II
=
:
The signal is always
present with the diskette
in the drive, the cover
closed, and the power on.
,
I
TP 3 - '+ File data'
Clock pulses are always
present when the machine
has power on.
()
IiI
Data pulses are present
when the disk drive is
reading a track on the
disk.
=
:::
..
-
t
Clock pulse.
Flickering data pulse
indication due to
scope triggering
I
10 0:0
I
11
II
II
1
I
:
II
I
I
I
II
II
II
II
II
I I
I
I
I
CIII
.
CE mode and display IDs
were used for this picture
(see Chapter 8).
-
File Control Card
TP
tTP 23
o 0
I
I
:0:
1
: [:::::J
1[::::J
A longer time base will
show a '+ file data'
envelope but no
individual clock
or data pulses.
TPl40
I
Tu~2
~10 I
T~ 9
J'
TP 6 TP
I
TF 3 \.- ...
(TP5
-~p 4
TP
I
~
:
10
:
J'TP 21
19',=~:0
I
TP
I
I
7,
1
I
I
I V
I
I
:
IrTP17
I
I
TP. 14 1
\
\
I
,
I
:
TP 8;
I
I
I
Dq :
TP
J ..
1
I[ D 6
\
TP}2
00:
,
rl'
b
TpJ,S-- - -~p
18
0
0
16
~------------4~s----------~
NOTE: Use X10 Probe for all displays.
EC
m
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PI\! 161914
3741 ML
11-15
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PI\! 1619146
11-16
TP 8 - Phototransistor
TP 2 - '+ Index pulse'
•
The signal is always
present with the diskette
in the drive, the cover
closed, and the power on.
:;
=
[1i1
.
-
~,
.
"
~~
~
~
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 2
20 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.2V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
Fe card TP 2
5 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.2V/div
The two pulses show the disk
speed time period; should
be approximately 167 ms.
..,
L.!..!. ~
:
~
,~
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Sync scope Int (+) on TP 2
('+ index pulse') to look at
the complete phototransister.
,.,
~
Chopped sweeps
TP 8 - Phototransistor
TP 2 - '+ Index puls~'
Individual pulse at each
TP (test point).
'+ Index pulse' is approximately
5 ms.
Sync scope Int (+) on TP 2
('+ Index pulse') to look at
the complete phototransistor
TP8.
Chopped sweeps
TP 13 - Preamp TP 2
TP 14 - Preamp TP1
The small data signal rides
+1.35V above ground.
r"'l!
TP 13
TP.14
~
!"'17"1"'1
"'"
-
...........
...
,
The small data signal rides
+l.4V above ground.
The power is on and the diskette
is in the machine. Put in CE mode
and display lOs (see Chapter 8) .
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed,
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 14
500 ns/div
FC card TP 13
20 mV/div
TP ·12 - '+ Write gate'
TP 9 - 'Write data'
TP 24 ..;.. '+ Erase current'
2-J-B04 - Erase gate
+ Write gate
=
TP12
I
I
TP9
I
II
II
~
1-
,...,
,...
.
,...
..... "I'I'!'I
rI
TP 24
I
I
I
I
I
1'1'
.....
.,rf1 n
II
II
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 12
.5 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.2V/div
Sync i:rig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 12
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.2V/div
Pictures taken in enter mode
(diskette in the machine) while
holding down REP with
REC ADV.
Particularly note that the 'write
data' signal can end either plus
or ground, depending on the
transition in progress at the end
of 'write gate'.
This picture is a different time
scale to show more clearly the
turn-on and turn-off lag of '+
erase gate' and 'erase current' with
respect to '+ write gate' and 'write
data.'
TP9
File ('antral Card
-r::l
002
+ Access a
TP 15
Phase a
D031-1_ _+-",A.:..:.cce.;.;.;ss,-,I-t--,-"TP...;.7-.-_-O-(-W-hit-e)--·>--'-'-~----t'7.7.'-':--------
2-J-B04
LDPhasel
..,.,
n
TP12
u
....
I.lol
2-J-B04
Sync for these pictures in Int (+)
with rise of '+ write gate':
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert Gmp
...
"1"'1
"'U
D04I-f_~+..:..;A::.;:cc.:..:.ess:..:2-+-..:..:.TP....;:4-+-_~"-(-R-ed-)--.>--'-'--=-----t~7__" 0 0 '00 "'to( 00 0 0 t-
~
nn
I1n
n
L'B
Phase2
(Yellow)
~--:---.,.....:..;...-=---t~::::::--~
+ Access 3
TP 6
D051--f--;"';":":'--'--+-""'-"--L
TP 24
D
Phase3
"--Df--(B-Iac-k)--·--'-'-----tf--~-'-'----jr---'
Bl0~~-+~24~V:..:d~C-----------.~~-~~~~~~
+ Head Engage TP 10
Head Load
010 t--lf-------'-'-...::....::.-,T=P-::5----i ~~~~~t
File C'ontrol Card
'!
!O!l::Oi:::
0
0:I
II
I 1
TPl40
TP23
•
~P1 1
TP....
13- - 1 - 1 1
1 ~
.J TP 12
:
TPll.:.......
1
l
" D.
c::::::J
~P2
[D
'00 6.
\
\
1
Tq~9
"
I
hp
I
hp20
I
I
\
\
TP 3
(TP5
~""1-P 4
'
I
J
Yellow B07,------,
LE~
___
--0
BOi""'~ Phototr~n~s~r_?,
Yellow 1 DOW - \Y
Black
cvl
TP 24
I
I
I
21
007
012 Black
ReadiWrite
,
l
~TPI3~~ead/l
"
+ File Data TP 3 LimIt,. 0 Iferentilto
Amplifier
Preamp
TP 14
~
___~H_e_ad.~~~~~~D09
Dl0~eVdV"v'"'!n
~
-:
013 White
~
D13White
Write:
Select
J
012 Black
"
t', b~
1
TP 6-4'TP 7 1.
V
TP. 14 I . 1
I
TP 16
TP 9
-Write Dati
t -_ _-1==~
B02
+ Low Current
B06 Hf---'-..!:.>:.:.:....=::-=,-,,+-;T;:-P:::;II---lJ Wrte
TP
12 J Dr ver t - - - - - - - ,
+ Write Gate
B05
Hf---'-"':":":':'=:":':""""':";"";':;.-t...
, __ ---l
'
I,
Vdc~
+ Erase Gate
Era;e
804 ~~---'''''::':''::':':'''::::'':'':''''----l Dri"er
TP 18
I
+5
.~
r- - - - - - 5
Interlock Switch I
1 TP 19 I .. .. _,
1
TP 8;
I
1
10
TP 23
+ Index Pulse TP 2
Index
TP 8
DI3H~--------4~_iAmplifiert--- ....~---t---t-1,rJ-r'
'01
l .:
•: 1
TP i2
1
00:
;'W ' '1
:'c::::J
1
.
t - - -5V -
I
2·K
1
-
or
0 0f,
I
.:~j
MPU
2·J
I
I
:
I
0
0
I·B
1 I I 1I I I I
Bll B13 B12 Db3 B02 B05 B03 BOB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CE Test Points TP 13 and TP 14
20·400 mV (1110's
10·300 mV (alil'si
I I
rTP17
+ SId Data-oJ
I I I I I
+StdClock--...J
I I I I I I
+4FClock----..J
I I I I I
+4F Phue2------ J
I I I I
+VFODltaSync------.J
I I I
+ Ignore Window High Glin---- J
I I
+ Fil. DIU (Dilk Drive
I
+ Fill DIU (Dilk DrivI2)---------J
VFO Card
Tp 1S-- - -Jp 16
1)-------..1
NOTE: Use X10 Probe for all displays.
m
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
pr~
161914'
3741 ML
11-17
1EC
823146
'I
PN 1619148
Da.. 9/1sn4
TP 15 - '+ Access 0' TP 7 - '+ Access l'
TP 4 - '+ Access 2'
TP 6 - '+ Access 3'
TP 18 - MC-O
TP 21 - MC-l
TP 20 - MC-2
TP 19 - MC-3
iif
II .-
I
I
Pictures taken after
power on while disk
drive seeking 78 low
(or seeking low to/at
track 0). Timing sequence down as related to head location.
II
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
FC card TP 15
50 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.2V/div
TP 19 on 2 will look
similar to TP 18,21,
and 20 and have reference timing to TP 6
as TP 18 has to TP 15.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
FC card TP 15
50 ms/div
See trace drawing
5V Idiv for sync
2V /div for other traces
For added detail of
TP 18 -MC-O
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
II
iiiii
.......
I_
..... .....-
-
....
liiii _
-=
-
II
~
=
.....
-
Ir-
1=
II
:;;;
iiiiiiiiiiii
iiiiiiiiii
- ~~
-
......
II
-
Ikl~~
....
!I
;....
II
II
n
--
=
=
~
=
U
III
..
Chopper sweeps. No disk required.
TP 15
TP 18
TP 21
TP 20
-
TP21
TP 20
TP19
Have the same detail.
TP15
~I ~
I~
a:.
~
I!I
~
11";Ir"'1
L!II m
ill MI!!!! ~~
~
\] TP 18
Int (-) dc
FC card TP 16
50 ms/div
FE card TP 18
0.2V/div for sync
1V/div for TP-18
11·18
TP 10 - '+ Head engage'
TP 22 - '- Head load'
•
Sync scope Int(+) on
TP 10 '+ head engage'.
.:
•
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
No disk in drive needed.
!II
I
::II
I
.
TP 10
I
1111-II1II
••-1 TP 22
I
Int (+) dc
FC card TP 10
200 ms/div
FC card TP 22
0.2V/div for sync
1V/div for TP-22
Picture taken at power
on when head load magnet is picked and dropped
(3742).
The approximate time
energized is 1.35
seconds (1350 ms).
TP 16 - 'LED currel}t' -(no pictures)
TP 11 - '+ Low current' -(no pictures)
This point is called out in
the MAPs section of the
manual to be measured as a
voltage with reference to
ground with the CE meter.
TP 11 is at 0 volts during
writing of tracks 00
through 43, at which time
it switches to a +3V level
for each '+ write gate'
time while writing on tracks
44 through 76.
NOTE: Use X10 Probe for all displays.
Disk
Drive
File Control Cal d
...---------"--·-------,Cable
Using the oscilloscope,
@500 mV/div (0.5V/div)
the voltage level was
observed to be about
+1.2V above ground.
002
003
004
005
+ Access 0
TP 15
+ Access 1
TP 7
+ Access 2
+ Access 3
IA I
PJ-ase 0
(llhitel
TP 18
B02
Red
TP 21
TP4~(Red)
TP 6
~
White
~prasel
A
003
~
~C
vvuv
Stepper Motor
"""'"
~l"
'YV
___"---
--\.0
~~~~~---+~~~~IIO=W---~C
(Yellow)
Ptase 2
TP 20
~Ptase3
002 Black
TP 19
(S:ack)
B05 Blue
TP 1
1
TP 22
File Control Card
TP 16
MPU
2-J
TP740
10!lOi: : :l
O : ::
1
II
II
I
•
... - -
" Dq
[J
T~ 9
\
I
\
I[]D 6. . 4'
I
I
TP 8)
\
\
TP 3 \.. - -
-tp
4
TP
I
I
:
I
1
I
I
I
D13White
fTP21
J
007
I
TP 20
I TP 19/..
.....
TP18
'
1
I,
I
I 1
TP 7 t
TP.14
I
(TP 5
I
TP 6
I
0 0:
'10
~P 2 ,
I
•
~2:
TP
TP8
101
1
~
- 1
TP 13
I I
I [:::=J
.JTP 12 :
:
TP 11~......
J
I[:::=J
... 1
I
I
TP 10
1
I [:::=J
2-K
B04
I
~PI 1
or
23
0ITP
,
0
D'
I
,../
b
1-B
J
J V
0
I
I
J
0
I
:
I
I J I 11 1 1 1
I I I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I
I
Bll B13 B12 003 B02 B05 B03 B08
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
CE 1 est Points TP 13 and TP 14
20-4)0 mV (all 0',)
10-3JOmV (aliI',)
I
+ SId Data· J
+StdClock--.J
+4F Clock-:----...J
I I
+4FPha'e2------ J
I I I I
+VFO Data Svnc------.J
I I
+ Ignor. Window High Gain-----'
I I
+File Data (Di,k Drive 1 ) - - - - - - - - '
I
+ File Data (Di,k Drive 2 ) - - - - - - - --~
rTp 17
J;s - - - - ~p 16
VFO Card
III
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1/75
PI\)
16191~
3741 ML
11-19
I~.te
EC 823146
I
9/15174
This page intentionally ieft blank.
PN 1619150
11-20
DISPLAY THEORY
"iewer Assembly
Ir!iI
. . . 12-1
Introduction . . . . . .
Formation of characters
· 12-3
Display unit functional circuits
· 12-4
. . . . . 12-4
Functional sequence. .
Circuit description
· 12-4
. . . . . . 12-6
Display test points .
Display Unit
INTRODUCTION-
II
The display unit
gives the operator visual
communications with th9 3741 Data Station. The
display is mounted vertically in the machine and
can display six lines of data. II
When the vi~wer assembly is installed, the information is displayed to the operator via a polished
metal mirror.
a
When the viewer assembly is removed, the information on the CRT looks like this. iii
Details of information displayed are shown in
Section 9 Operating Procedures.
The cursor is a line under the display position
being operated upon.
II
Cursor
Error
Position Code
Begin
Field
Code
Program
Shift
Code
Disk
Address
Second
Disk
Adclress
Machine
Mode
Machine
Status
~-I--r------;r
The display unit
displays six lines
of information.i
1
m
Program
Number
001
K 0
A
A 01 008 02005
E
R
II 1----------------------- DATA LI NE------ ----------------------- 40
2
3
4
5
6
41---------------------81---------------------121-DATA--128161--------------------
DATA LI NE------·---------------------- 80
DATA LIN E------ ·----------------------120
OPERATOR GUIDANCE---·----160
OPERATOR GU IDANCE --------200
II~--------------------------------------~
6
5
4
3
2
J e J -------------------JSJ-D'v'.L'v'--JS88 J ----:----------------vJ ----------------------
II T-----------------------OOJ
lEe 823146
Oat. 9/15/74
K 0
I
'v'
0 bEl:{ 'v'.LO I:{ en I0 'v' ltl CE -------- SOO
ObEI:{'v'.LOI:{ enID'v'ltlCE--------Jeo
0 'v'.L 'v' n ltl E------------------------------ J SO
D'v'.L'v' n ltl E------------------------------- 80
D'v'.L 'v' r Iltl E------------------------------- VO
'v' OJ 008 0:5002
E
PI~ 161915~
3741 ML
·12-1
lEe 823146
Date 9/15n4
I
This page Intentionally left blank.
PN 1619152
12-2
FORMATION OF CHARACTERS
Display
The CRT printed circuit board BI contains the
amplifiers and drivers required to "generate,
accelerate, deflect, and intensify the beam in
the CRT
VieWi~r
Assembly
D.
The MPU synchronizes the amplifiers and drivers
so that intelligent data is displayed on the CRT
screen.
The electron beam, created by"the cathode and
high voltage converter
is deflected by a
yoke II . The yoke contains four separate
coils. The function of each coil is:
m,
1.
The vertical coil positions the beam to the
line to be displayed (one of six lines).
2.
The horizontal coils (master and slave) deflect the beam across the CRT screen on
the line selected by the vertical yoke.
3.
The character coil deflects the beam up
and down over the height of the character
as the beam moves across the screen.
Characters appear on the CRT screen as a result
of the MPU sending the display unit video dot
pulses synchronized with the movement of the
electron beam. These pulses are applied to the
cathode and result in intensification of spots or
dots on the screen to form characters.
Brightness Control
Cable
to MPU
---W/Or
Blu-------,
~
W/or
W/Or
r.=~-----------------,~~~~
B ~A
\.:....0
Plant--
1"
Date--
lI
PN--EC--(Back side)
IBR
~
GRAY
------------------~
.. I U U U U U ~C\
QB'\
Display PC board
~:....o
ABC D E F
.g-C=}-~PROE;E POINT
BLK
~W/BR
BR
2
BLU
I
I
I
I
I
.I
13
0.....-----41
Chmacter Yoke
£rt\
~--------~
®
Brigh1 ness Control
Converter
L..:;..;;..;~~
lEe 823146
________________
PI\I 1619153]
3741 ML
IA\
~
12-3
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
DISPLAY UNIT FUNCTIONAL CIRCUITS
Circuit Description
Circuits packaged on the display unit printed circuit board accelerate, deflect, and intensify the
electron beam. These circuits are:
The high voltage oscillator ~ is free running.
The purpose of the oscillator and the high voltage
converter ~ is to generate the 400 and 12,000volt levels from the 12-volt supply. A time delay
circuit on the CRT circuit card prevents the high
voltage oscillator from starting for approximately
15 seconds after machine is turned on, to prevent
damage to the CRT during filament warm-up. A
current detecting circuit on the CRT circuit
board monitors the high voltage oscillator current at all times. If the oscillator current exceeds
the maximum limits, the oscillator is turned off
for approximately 15 seconds. The high voltage
converter has two outputs. One output is labeled
12,000 volts, the other is labeled 400 volts dc.
The 12,000 volts is used to accelerate the electron
beam. The 400 volts is used for brightness control. ~
1.
High voltage supply (oscillator). ~
2.
Brightness control circuit.!IDI
3.
Video
4.
Character wiggle sweep circuit. ~
5.
Horizontal deflection circuit.
6.
Vertical deflection (line control) circuit.
d~t amplifier. ~
Kf]
lEI
Functional Sequence
All functions except the high voltage oscillator
and brightness control are directly synchronized
by the MPU.
MPU signals to the CRT circuit board occur in
the following sequence for each of the six displayable lines.
1.
MPU activates one or more of the input lines
to the vertical line control function~ The
electron beam is defl,ected vertically to the
selected line location on the CRT screen
m.
2.
MPU then activates the horizontal deflection amplifier. This starts the beam moving
across the CRT screen (left to right)
Ill.
3.
MPU issued repetitive pulses to the character (wiggle sweep) control. This function
causes the electron beam to be rapidly defiected up and down as it is moved across
the CRT screen. The distance of deflection is equal to the height of a character
m.
4.
The brightness control is part of a voltage divider
for the 400 volts dc from the converter. The
center tap voltage of brightness control pin 10
is fed to the video dot amplifier.
It controls
the bias voltage on the cathode of the CRT on
pin 17. ~he bias voltage can be varied from approximately +30 volts to approximately +120
volts by turning the brightness control potentiometer.
The lower the voltage is on pin 17,
the greater the light intensity will be on the face of
the CRT.
PN 1619154
12-4
A wiggle sweep circuit His used to control the
height of the characters displayed on the CRT.
The MPU controls the duration of each wiggle
sweep cycle. The electron beam is deflected (by
the character yoke) upward and downward 10
times for each character displayed on the CRT.
Wiggle sweep pulses and video dot pulses are
synchronized by the control unit to formed characters on the face on the CRT. The dot pattern for
an H is shown in the following diagram. Also, show
in the diagram is the dot pattern for a cursor in
the position immediately following the H character. There are 64 characters which can be displayed on the CRT. On Katakana machines
there are an additional 64 Katakana characters.
Additional characters are used within the
machine, such as characters that are entered
from the keyboard in hexadecimal code. These
characters are displayed as a cross hatch pattern.
m
!WI
m
The video dot amplifier
is used to amplify the
video pulses sent by the MPU. When a dot is to
be indicated on a face of the CRT, the MPU issues a negative going signal for 444 nanoseconds
to the video dot amplifier. The negative pulse
is amplified and sent to the cathode of the CRT.
The negative pulse-forces the positive bias on the
cathode down to a negative level, allowing the
electron beam to be sent to the face of the CRT.
The MPU holds the video line at a (+) level during horizontal retrace to block out video during
retracing.
~ 1 Character Position--.j
II
Horizontal deflection
ryf the electron beam is
accomplished with two horizontal coils (master
and slave
coil). These deflection coils
work together in a push/pull fashion as follows:
D
II
Assume the initial location of the electron beam
is at the extreme left side of the CRT screen.
1.
The MPU sends a (-) horizontal sweep
pulse to the CRT circuit board on pin
B10.
2.
The horizontal deflection amplifier applies
an increasing current to the master coil
and a decreasing current to the slave coil.
When the current in the two coils are approximately equal, the electron beam will
be in the center of the CRT screen. When
the master coil is maximum, the slave coil
current will be minimum and the electron
beam will be on the extreme right side of
the CRT screen.
3.
The MPU now sends a (+) horizontal
sweep pulse to the CRT circuit board on
pin B10 (retrace command).
The MPU issues dot pulses to the video dot
amplifier. The pulses combined with the
motion of the electron beam "wiggling"across the CRT screen form characters on
the CRT screen ltij.
4.
The horizontal deflection amplifier changes the current through the coils as follows: The master coil current decreases
and the slave coil current increases. The
electron beam will be at the extreme left
side of the CRT screen when the slave
coil current is maximum and the master
coil current is minimum.
MPU
Circuit Board
High
Voltage
Oscillator
High Voltage
Ground
D12
-
1
5
6
2
3
4
+
+
-
+
+
+
+
-
Maximum Deflection
I
-l
-------D13---+~-----;-----------------------~
Brightness
+12 volts dc
9
Controlr.H1--_ _ _ _-,1
7
I
..:.u
- - - - - - B08 809
8
400 volts (c
10
·It
..---lrnI
Horizontal
Brightness
:: Control
Master
II
'11
~5~
CRT
I
. ,.- ; ;. . . . ;~_(
_1_1__
__p_o_te_n_tio_m_e_:._er__
character 12
+12 volts (c
1(wiggle
Character Yoke
sweep)
13
Wiggle Sweep Pulses
_+-Ch-a-r-a~cjtl-\er_Y_O-.ke~YJl~~::ontal
KSI
Wiggle Control
-----805-
~rn.r~
_
rl
14
,1
~~1
~~
I
:
:
I----+-::-----------_~*-~I~ ~
V'd
I eo_---_ B07 _
~
Yoke
- - - Dot....Il'!S:.:J--l
- 7
Video
___
V_i_de_o___________ .J---'
13
I- ~m..Elii!e~
6.3voltsdc
812
18
Heater +6.3 volts dc
_-+----~--------------J
Vertical Inputs B13
r- ____ _
1 2
B02:::: Vertical L~J--A____v_e_rt_ic_a_1D_~_f_le_ct_io_n___ ._______'
_----_
~~! -
3
Horizontal Input
r-
C~~~nt!fLJ--B___H_o_ri_zo_n_ta_I_D_e_fle_c_ti_on_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
Deflection
C
Horizontal Deflection
Control r.f1 J - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - _ _ + _ '
+12 volts de
D09
ILl
- - - - Dl0·-1- - - - - D
+12 volts dc
-12 volts dc
I---------.--------------+-......J
-----D02E
+12 volts dc
Connector
Bl0 -
2-N
F
-
+12 volts dc
M&for
Blu
+
+
W/Or
W/Or
-
-
+
Date-PN---
EC--(Back side)
1
I
I----...J
..J....
'12. __:-:r
Circuit Ground
------- D06 D07
D08
Plant--
Note: The polarity is (-) for an
active signal.
T
'rI!:>-~
------
II which moves the elec-
Vertical Input Lines
(Signal Polarity)
Pin B03 . Pin B04
Pin B02
2
~~
r----- --<
C( <:>
~I
4
I
I
f - - -~
:__L"':-.J __tt-_~Its dc
5
g Feed B lck
I
~
f--6 - - I (oscillator)
L __ -
II
CRT Line
Number and
Sequence
High Voltage Anode Lead
(12,000 volts)
~; - - , - -l rT - ~~
.L
,t,
('.)( ~>
r----- --
(."11
The vertical step circuit
controls the vertical
location of the data line on the CRT. Three
vertical inputs control the location of this line.
The vertical inputs from the MPU are added by
the vertical control circuitry on the CRT printed
circuit board. The resulting output current is
tron beam to the appropriate location on the face
of the CRT. Below is a chart which identifies the
status of the three signal lines from the MPU to
the CRT circuit board for each of the six video
lines displayed on the face of the CRT. The
chart also shows the sequence in which the lines
are traced. A negative input causes current to
increase through the vertical yoke.
1
Converter
3
'-'1
f----'
The total time to trace one horizontal line and
return the electron beam to the left is 4 milliseconds. Therefore, the time required to trace or
display six lines is 24 milliseconds and each line
is retraced or refreshed every 24 milliseconds.
The line refresh rate divided into 1 second gives
a frame (pi.cture) refreshment rate of approximately 42 times per second.
sent to the vertical coil
Pins
.,
I
~
I
~
II
ABCDEF
~~
-§:.c=r~ PROBE
- c::J W/BR
IBR
lI
II II II II II
rresponding field or positions of
the previous record into the current record. When the switch is off, it signals the
MPU all fields are manual fields.
Signals the MPU that, when a complete record is entered, the MPU can automatically
store the record on the disk, and prepare for the next record entry.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU.
Developes keyboard scan pulses and keyboard timing pulses.
Down level for 550ms. Wait 5 seconds between power down and power up. This 5
seconds allows the capacitor in the power on circuit to discharge.
Used with REP key.
Inhibits audio feedback device (clichr).
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU.
Data line to MPU.
MPU is busy, therefore, cannot accept a character from the keyboard.
Indicates to operator the MPU is bus".
011 +Keyboard data
Gates data which is on the data lines to the MPU.
gate out
012 -Katakana Shift Bit Data line to MPU.
013 -Bit 5
Data line to MPU.
Cable to keyboard
lEe 823146
Dat. 9/15/74
I
PN161916~
3741 ML
13-5
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
13-6
PN 1619164
KEYBOARD OPERATION
Page
13-7
7 llS osc pulses
4 x 16 decode
Probe
Point
KBD clock (250 Jls
character time)
\
Matrix drive pulse
Probe
Point
Key pads (four
at a time)
Advance scan
counter
Reset the scan
counter to 00
Reset alpha and
numeric bit
latches
Sense amp
Reset alpha and
numeric bit latches
when scan counter
goes to zero.
Indicates a key
is pressed
Reset the repeat
key FL
Repeat the threecharacter compare
to blank
No
Erase this character
from the threecharacter compare
register
Page
13-6
Store the character
in the three character compare
register
Select the key that
produced the sense
amp closed pulse
Set alpha shift
or num shift
bit latches.
Keyboard sends
'data gate' signal
to MPU and gates
the contents of the
character buffer to
the MPU-keyboard
register
Reset the character
buffer full F L.
Transfer the scan
counter to the
character buffer.
Energize the
clicker.
Reset the character
buffer full latch
other than
ALPHA SHIFT
NUM SHIFT
REP
Set the repeat
key FL
Activate the KBD
error line to the
MPU(KBD
overrun) .
Set buffer full FL
Scan for Process
next key character
pressed to MPU
MPU processes and
clears contents of
the MPU-keyboard
register
Bus to MPU is now
empty
Yes
No
,
Block the character
from entering the
character buffer
Block the gating of
the charact~r bufferi------<
to the MPU
Yes
Page
13-6
~at.
lEe
823146
9/15/74
I
fiN
16191E~
3741 ML
13-7
EC 823146
825853
PN 1619166
13-8
11/15175
Date 9/15174
KEYBOARD INTERFACE DECODE
Objective: Decode the character M and transfer
it across the data lines to the MPU.
Alternate layout used with
proof keyboard.
Key Codes
NoShift~ 02
NumShift_ 42
Alpha S h i f t _ 82
01
41
81
NoShift_2E
Num S h i f t _ 6E
Alpha S h i f t _ AE
38
78
B8
OE
4E
8E
03
43
83
'lA
6A
AA
30
70
BO
07
06
46
86
05
45
85
10
50
90
08
48
88
47
87
11
51
91
3E
7E
BE
09
49
89
12
52
92
20
60
AO
20
60
AO
22
21
61
Al
13
53
93
OA
4A
8A
AC
14
54
23
63
A3
62
A2
00
40
80
OC
4C
8C
2C
6C
35
75
B5
10
5D
90
94
20
60
dJ
21
61
A1
23
63
A3
22
62
A2
[!(J[t]
U
No Shift ------~. 36
Num Shift
I
76
Alpha Shift
II B6
I
24
64
19
59
99
lA
5A
9A
3C
7C
BC
3B
7B
BB
lB
5B
9B
28
68
A8
27
67
A7
IE
29
69
A9
27
67
5E
9E
1---"-"--I
26
66
rtrbrb
[~;]
N o S h i f t - - - - - - - l..~ 18
Num Shift
II<
58
Alpha Shift
II< 98
0
25
65
~==~~~~~~~~C=~~~~~~~~C=~~==~
-I
IF
I
I
5F
.9F
I
29
69
dIf:Ib
M
I
28
68
•
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
Alternate Layout for Katakana
ENTER
DISK 2
REC
ADV
DISK 2
RETTO
INOEX
VERIFY SEARCH
CONTEN
SEARCH
SEO
CONTEN
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
COPY
COMM
UPOATE
READ
TO
EOF
PUNCH
TO
EOD
SEARCH SEARCH
ADORESS
EOD
PRINT
REC
PRINT
TO
EOD
RETURN
TO
INDEX
PROG
LOAD
DELETE
REC
20
60
AO
EO
OA
4A
8A
CA
OISPLAY OISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
DISPLAY
DATA
~
The M key is pressed.
No Shift/Kana Shift ..
Num Shift _
Alpha S h i f t _
Kana S y m b _
I
I
I
02
42
82
C2
01
41
81
Cl
No Shift/Kana Shift . . 2E
NumShift_6E
Alpha S h i f t _ AE
Kana S y m b _ EE
38
78
B8
F8
No Shift/Kana S h i f t _
Num Shift
I
Alpha Shift
I
KanaSymb
36
76
86
F6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
30
70
80
FO
2A
6A
AA
EA
No Shift/Kana S h i f t _
Num Shift
I
Alpha Shift
I
Kana Symb
I
L----- r
OE
' 4E
8E
CE
03
43
83
C3
05
45
85
C5
10
50
90
DO
07
47
87
C7
06
46
86
C6
3E
7E
BE
FE
11
51
91
01
08
48
a8
C8
12
52
92
02
20 .
60
AD
09
49
89
C9
13
53
93
03
£0
21
61
Al
El
22
62
A2
E2
23
63
A3
E3
2C
6C
AC
EC
14
54
94
04
00
40
80
CD
OC
4C
ac
CC
10
50
90
00
There is a scan number associated with each
key. The scan number for the M key is 39
(hex 271.
31
71
81
Fl
At M key scan time, the scan counter contains the binary value 39 (bits 32, 4, 2, and 1).
The character seen on the display during CE
mode is the hex representation of the key
address. To convert to hex, the character
buffer code is divided into two segments;
the upper four bits (128, 64, 32, and 16)
are considered one binary number (with
weight of 8. 4, 2, and 1). The lower four
bits are considered a second number.
18
58
98
08
-
BinaryV.lue
:::~.~~,.;.:va:':~~i~s--i--=-+-"'-t-7-+-'+'-+-;-!r.-t-..--11 ..
I
I
I
I
I
A
B
I
'--_---'~_.....L._ __"'"__
I
C 0
Scan number 39
__'. Hex 27
A
B
I
I
I
r - The~;;-c~nter tran-;te;:;data bit;-l
32, 4, 2, and 1 to the character buffer I
I for the M key.
I
I
I
_=== ==-1I
Alpha
Shift
Bit
Latch
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
C
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-f-
-- -
Character
Buffer
A
Numeric
Shift
Bit
Latch
Bit Lines
o
128
-.-1
B2
(D02)
(D04)
64
2 (B06)
16
8
Load
Input--k--~
A
16
3 (DOS)
A
8
4 (B07)
A
A
A
r
Katakana
shift bit
I
latch
A
Load Character
Kana.
I
A
5 (D13)
6 (B08)
7 (D07)
These test points are connected to
this connector.
-Katakana Shift Bit (D12)
(Not) R Time
~----------------
Special Keys
Key
Scan Number
Hex Value
ALPHA
SHIFT
0
00
NUM
SHIFT
4
04
RESET
50
32
REP
(left)
11
PB
REP
(right)
15
OF
KANA
SHIFT
51
33
KANA
SYMB
43
28
For the M key, bit lines 2, 5, 6, and 7
(pins B06, D 13, B08, and D07 respectively) should be down (-). Bit lines 0,
1,3, and 4 (pins D02, D04, DOS, and
B07 respectively) should be up (+).
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
11/15/74
PN 16191£
3741 ML
13-9
EC 823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
PN 1619168
13-10
11/15/74
KEYBOARD TEST POINTS
- - 32 ('Scan counter')
-
I
""
I11II
~~
· lIJ
- - - 'Matrix drive'
IJJ
"
.11111
'Sense amp c1ose~'
Load Input
Scan Counter
Time
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down
0
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
Int (-) dc
32 ('Scan counter')
50ps/div
See above
O.5V/div
32 (Scan Counter)
,',
- - - 32 ('Scan counter')
I
IJ
IIJ
- - - 'Matrix drive'
I
~
11111
11111
- - - 'SA closed'
=
FUNCT SEL
lower key held
down
Scan Cou nter
Time
1
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
Int (-) dc
32 ('Scan counter')
50ps/div
See above
O.5V/div
Ii
.
i
,
32 ('Scan counter') - -
,
'Matrix drive' - -
.......
. ..
. .. .
,
-
mm IIJ m ~
'Load input' - -
III·
II
1
•
III
l~ rn lIJlIJ m
,III
III
fll
~
II
Scan Ctr
Time
0
~II l~
11m
.'
111
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down.
•
J
I:
II
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
Int (-) dc
32 ('Scan counter')
200J,Ls/div
See above
0.5V/div
Same as to the right
except that sweep
speed = 50 J,LS.
Transitions at 0, 32, 48
and O. 0 transition used
for int sync (-):
- - 32 ('Scan counter')
- - 'Matrix drive'
- - 'Sense amp closed'
F key held down.
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down.
Scan
Counter Time
63
0
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
Int (-) dc
'Scan counter'
2 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
Note: Use Xl0 Probe for all displays
I 9/15/7~ I
EC 823146
Oat.
PN
161916~
3741 ML
13-11
EC
823146
Date 9/15174
825853
PN 1619170
13-12
11/15/74
Free running signals
(-) sync on either one
(not synchronized)
- - 009, '-R time' from MPU
Bl0, 'Data Key Drive'
7.1 J,lS osc from display
..•
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
None
5J,ls/div
See above
0.5V/div
Load Input
-
!III
•
32 (Scan Counter)
II
_ l:!!:! •
.•
.:x:::
I
..
.. /
•
••
II
III!;i
111.1
II
II
===
• ••n
IlTYY1 rYY:::"!
- - . 007, '-Bit 7', (-) int sync
(could be any bit line)
......
• ••
-. •
-:
'-- ..
·1
· 1- •
•
Hold down F key and
REP key
nn I"'rW"'1
r~ IL
r_
~
~
-,1 II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Oil, 'Keyboard data
gate out'
009, '-R time'
Int (-) dc
007 ('-Bit 7')
10 Ils/div
See above
0.5V/div
D 10, '+ Busy tone' - - (+) int sync
~:t
~~
~
:"""-1
I-IJ IIII II
II
-
~
-
With diskette in disk drive
and read/write head not in
track 00, open disk drive
cover.
B11, '-Power on reset'
At power supply PC board,
POR (+power on reset).
'(+) int sync on PORe
Turn POWE R ON switch 'on'.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Prob~ point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
D10 '+ Busy tone'
10 ms/div
D 10 '+ Busy tone
0.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Prob~ point
Vert amp
Int (+) de
POR power supply PC board
200 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Ext (+) de
Load input
50ps/div
See trace drawing
0.5V /div
'Load input'
'Matrix drive'
0.2V/div
'1 nput oscillator' ,
Ii
II
II
l
. .1
II
-
•
(
~
rJrln/l~ rJ.~III"~ 11111!J~ W"/~ ~'1III!J '111/~
'!iJ
'
Bl0 'Input oscillator'--
'Load input' - - - - ~Matrix
drive'
.
~ ~•.iOU.J
::u:: = ' I
I!J
~~
rtlm:l '11111/~
1oI~
~
i
=
11111IJ
II.I 'IUII~
•
fi·
~
~
Note: Use Xl 0 Probe for all displays.
I-E_C_82_31_46_"+!_ _-t-_ _-;! PN1619171l
.
-1
! Date 9/15n4
3741 ML
13-13
EC
823146
Date 9115n4
825853
PN1619172
13-14
11/15n4
- - 32 (scan counter)
- - - 'Matrix drive'
- - - 'Threshold' control'
I--'~
_ _";"''';'''_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'''';';';';;;'';;;;;;';;;;;';';;;;'';;;;;;';;;;;';';;;;'';;;;;;';~ - - - 'Sense amp closed'
Scan Counter
T_im_e__
FUNCT SEL _ _
I
1
lower held down.
Int (-) dc
32 ('Scan counter')
200tls/dlv
See above
0.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
II
II
-
32 (Scan Counter)
B12, '10.8 Hz osc',
(+) int sync
'Matrix drive'
-,
- - 'Threshold control'
ru
- - 007 '-Bit 7'
II!I
cThe N key held down
with REP
;
/
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Load Input
Int (+) dc
B12 ('10.8 Hz osc')
10 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
The L key held down.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
... ==
==
'Matrix drive'
Int (-) dc
'Threshold control'
20/ls/div
See trace drawing
0.5V/div - 'Threshold control'
0.2V/div - 'Matrix drive'
0
..
.
1111
~
..J
••
The U key held down
with REP
'10.8 Hz osc', B12
(+) int sync
--
002 '-Bit 0' (not present) - 0
SynG trig
SynG point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) de
B12 test point
10 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
SweE!p speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
B12 test point
5 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5V/div
B06 '-Bit 2' - -
~
=
~
=
007 '-Bit 7' - -
The U, B, N, and
REP keys held
down simultaneously.
(+) int sync on B12 test point
'10.8 Hz osc' (repeat key gate)
II
'Matrix drive' Shown being started - and stopped by repeat key gate.
'Threshold control' - -
~ UJ ~ J' U
U
007, 'Bit 7' - -
:"""
::::
Note: Use Xl0 Probe for all displays.
lEe
823146
PN
161917'~
3741 ML
13-15
lEe
823146
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619174
13-16
MPU Theory
Keyboard Attachment
Display Attachment.
Disk Attachment.
BSCA Controller .
Operations .
ROS Microprogram Logic Flow
3741 Functional Characteristics
3741 Special Features
Feature Group A .
Expansion Feature
Second Disk
3713 Printer Controller.
3715 Printer Controller.
Proof Keyboard Feature
Katakana Feature.
BSCA Theory Table of Contents.
Data Recorder Attachment Table of
Contents .
I/O Adapter Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
..
Data Flow.
Keyboard to Current Buffer
Current Buffer to Disk .
Disk Unit to Buffer .
Buffer to Display Unit
3741 System Data Flow
Functional Units .
Microcontroller
ROS (Read Only Storage)
IXR (Instruction Decode Register)
Storage Registers .
IAR (Instruction Address Register)
ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) .
Read/Write Memory Card .
ReadIWrite Storage/MPU Interface
and Cycle Steal .
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-2.1
14-2.1
14-2.2
14-2.6
14-2.6
14-2.7
14-2.7
14-2.7
14-2.7
14-2.9
14-2.10
14-2.13
14-2.13
14-2.13
14-2.16
14-2.16
14-2.16
14-6
14-7
14-7
14-8
14-8
14-8
14-12
14-12.6
14-12.6
14-13
Logic Gate
Containing
MPU Plus
Features
'"
I
'"
I
'"
I
" "
I
I
I
I
I
I
14-101
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14-2.10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'" '"
•• / / , / / /
/'
""",,,,
• •
"
""
" '"
I
"
'" '"
I
I
I
I
I
/I:,-rl':U_~P:d"'l;a:_ter-_d i~ :;,;~; :~,;~ Z
I
I
I
I
I
-------1
'"
I
I
I
-_
line field totals, offline field
totals, and production
statistics
I
ROS Bits Out
t- -,
I
MPU Planar
I
I
I
:
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_______ L _____ ~
l
--------ii
:
I
'-------4---.....
I
I
I
I
I
I
ROS
Microprogram controlling
all base machine functions
such as enter, update, search,
etc., and all lID except
printer and second disk.
1
BSCA
Adapter
Print
Adapter
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ROSAddress
I
I _____________
Lines
L
-+-_ _....
MPU
I
I
I
I
:
L---------------L-----------------------L-__________________________________________11
Data Path
:~-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------~-~
I
Logic Packaging
I
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
P,I\!
16191~
3741 ML
14-1
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
PN 2469064
INTRODUCTION
The MPU (microprocessing unit) is the control center of the 3741. The MPU receives data from the
I keyboard, controls the displaying of the data, and
manages the flow of information to and from the
disk units.
14-2
8/1/75
Memory card
.--.--Buffers
Data _____
flow
MPU Planar
R/W storage/
MPU interface
r--I
Current
I
Previous
...J.-
Clock
control
The keyboard,' display unit, disk unit, and the
power supply are external to the MPU. The MPU
consists of the following functional units:
Microcontroller (sometimes called MPU)
R/W (read/write) storage/MPU interface
Keyboard attachment
Disk unit controller and VFO card
Display unit controller
R/W memory card
Keyboard
attachment
Disk unit
controller
These units are on the MPU planar (a full planar).
When special features are added, the MPU becomes
larger. An attachment half planar, feature half
planar, and Model 3/4 half planar may be included
in the MPU depending on the featur~s supplied.
The addition of the feature half planar adds two
functional units:
Printer controller
- BSCA controller and associated cards
Display
unit
controller
Clock
Microcontroller
The attachment half planar adds logic for either a
data recorder attachment or an I/O adapter.
The Model 3/4 half planar supplies the logic for
the IBM 3741 Programmable Work Station.
Feature
ROS
RDS
I
Keylock
The diagram at the right-shows the units and a
simplified data flow. A detailed data flow diagram
is on the following pages.
DATA FLOW
----,
Feature half
planar
Feature
ROS
(printer,
BSCA,
second
disk)
Sync
clock
card
Keyboard to Current Buffer
Keyboard to keyboard attachment
Keyboard attachment to microcontroller
Microcontroller to current buffer (under control of the R/W storage/MPU interface)
Printer
controller
BSCA
controller
Terminal
ID card
ID
reader
card
Modem
Printer
ID
reader
Current Buffer to Disk*
- Current buffer to disk unit controller under
control of R/W storage/MPU interface.
- Disk unit controller to disk unit. All records
written on the diskette are write-checked under control of the microcontroller. The check
consists of reading the record and checking the
CRC that was written by the disk unit against
the CRC calculated by the microcontroller as
the record was read. The buffer is not involved
in the check.
For check operation, data flow is from the disk
unit into the disk unit controller where the
CRC is verified. This occurs one revolution
after the write operation.
Disk Unit to Buffer*
-
Disk unit to disk unit controller.
Disk unit controller to buffer under control or
the R/W storage/MPU interface.
Buffer to Display Unit
Buffer to display Wlitcontroller.
Display unit controller to character generator.
Character generator to display unit controller.
Display unit controller to display unit.
* Ail data flow between the disk unit and the buffer occurs in blocks of one record at a time. The
actual transfer is done 1 byte at a time.
EC 825853
11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
~
F'N 24690f
3741 ML
14-2.1
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 2469066
14-2.2
3741 System Data Flow (Part 1 of 3)
MPU Planar
RIW
Storage
(See R/W
Storage
1---I
section
for detail)
r- -
r F-;t;;-ROS-
-
I
Feature Group A
I BSCA
I Printer
I Model 3/4
I etc.
I These ROS
I modules are
I mounted on the
I correspondi ng
I feature card or
I half planar
--
--,-----
A
1___ -
P Bit Out
3741 System Data Flow (Part 2 of 3)
. - -_ _..J
Clock R (gate add
to R/W storage)
CRT
Control
output
and voltage lines)
Horiz.
Control
-
-
- -
-
- I
:
(See Model 3/4
Section 14)
Disk
~9~R~ ~PieICt~
(See Disk, Section 11,
for detail)
,~~~~~:~~~ij
U
es •
Model 3/4 Half
Planar
Disk
Drive 1
File
Control
Cards
~~(2)
Note: ROS for
these functions
is mounted on
this half planar.
ROS instruction I
path is shown
I
~o~. _ _ _ _ I
L...,..-.....--I
Cable
File
Data
Disk
Drive 2
VFO
Card
Even Parity
(error)
-Enable Parity
~ Drive Status
A
Keyboard
Set Bit 0
ii1.tR1 KBDATA
~~~~~4~
(See Keyboard, Section 13 for detail)
Reg 5
KBD
'III~
Continued on
next page
KBCTRL
Gate Data Out
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/is
PI~
24690£
3741 ML
14-2.3
EC 825853
·826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 2469068
14-2.4
3741 System Data Flow (Part 3 of 3)
MPU Planar
Feature Half Planar
(See Printer Theory, Section 14)
3713/3715 only
Printer
Terminators
(See 3717 MLM
for 3717)
~
~----t Control
Logic
Print
Reg
'--_--tGenera
(See BSCA
Section 14)
BSCA
EIA
Drivers
(BSCA)
Modem
Cable
Keylock
ID
Reader
Card
ID
Reader
Terminal
10
Sync
Clock
Card
This page intentionally left blank.
---
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
m
fiN 24690
14-2.5
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
FUNCTIONAL UNITS
PN 2469070
14-2.6
Note: Keyboard data goes directly into register
MPU Planar
5 and the condition of Prog Num shift, Auto
Skip!Dup, Auto Rec Ad. and speed select (WT)
switches is monitored using register 6.
M icrocontroller
The microcontroller in the MPU is central in nearly all 3741 operations. It is a computer that is program controlled and performs internal machine
operations such as testing and comparing data,
checking for machine errors, operating the input
and output devices, and storing and retrieving
data from R/W storage.
The programs that control the microcontroller are
permanently wired into read only storage (ROS)
hardware modules on the planar(s). When features are added to the basic 3741, ROS that contains the microprogram routines to support the
added features is added. Also, on features such as
BSCA, printer, and Models 3 and 4, registers are
connected to the data path for data transfer between the microcontroller and these features.
pCode
IXR
Read!
From
Feature
ROS
Clock
R
0
S
To
Feature
ROS
IAR
1Module 0 I
Both ROS and the microcontroller are needed to
perform machine operations. One is useless without the other. Please remember that when the
microcontroller is said to perform an operation, the
microcontroller is controlled by a ROS on the MPU
planar or one of the feature cards or half planars.
The microcontroller is controlled by only one ROS
program at a time as determined by the operation
being performed.
The microcontroller, under control of the ROS
controls all machine functions. It moves data
from the keyboard into a buffer. It moves data
into the display buffer and controls the display
attachment. It controls the printer and BSCA
operations, monitors machine and operator errors,
and posts error messages on the CRT when needed.
When features are added to the 3741, hardware is
usually added. For instance, feature A adds, to
the logic gate, a card containing ROS programs
that enable the microcontroller to perform operations such as verify, field totals, and production
statistics. The counters and buffers used for these
operations are storage areas within the R/W memory card already installed.
To
Feature
Registers
(Regs 16 thru 19)
tiOiiti .. iifu:"::::;'::::':'
Microcontroller
1Module 41
MPU
Register
4
5
6
7
Name
Function
GP
General purpose ..
KBDATA Contains the last key code
entered.
KBCTRL Stores 3741 control information example:
Bit 0 on = AUTO DUP/
SKIP
SDR
Used to interface data to
and from data buffer~
Register
20
21
22
23
Name
Sense/CMD Disk sense and command
2nd register.
CYLDR
Disk cylinder address
register (track number).
SCTR
Disk sector address register.
LENGTH Holds binary length count
of disk record size.
2425
26
27
GP
GP
CRTCTL
GP
General purpose.
General purpose.
CRT lines register.
General purpose.
28
DAR1H
1st display register-high bits
(CRT lines 1,5, and 6).
1st display register-low bits
(CRT lines 1, 5, and 6).
2nd display register-high bits
(CRT lines 2, 3, arid 4).
2nd display register-low bits
(CRT lines 2, 3, and 4).
S
9
10
11
SARH
SARL
DKARH
DKARL
Storage address register high.
Storage address register low.
Disk address register high.
Disk address register low.
12
GP
General purpose.
29
DAR1L
I I
I
30
DAR2H
General purpose.
31
DAR2L
19
GP
Function
The microcontroller receives data from the keyboard through the keyboard attachment on the
MPU planar .. The microcontroller analyzes the
data to find what is to be done with it. Control
information, such as the code for the record advance key, causes the microcontroller to perform
the desired function if all conditions are met.
(For example, the microcontroller would record
advance only if a diskette was loaded and ready.)
Data information is first checked. If the data is
DK for the operation, it is stored in the current
record buffer of R/W storage. If the data is not
DK, a keying error is displayed.
The RDS program that controls the MPU can be
located on anyone of several field replaceable
units (FRUs). For example, when a line is to be
printed, the operation starts in base machine
(Model 1 or 2) mode. The base machine RDS (on
the MPU planar) passes control of the MPU to the
printer RDS, in the feature half planar, to print
the line. When the operation is complete, the
printer Rds returns control of the MPU to the
base machine RDS, where the next step is started.
Units within the microcontroller in addition to
RDS are:
IXR (instruction decqde register)
- Storage registers
- IAR (instruction address register)
- ALU (arithmetic logic unit)
IXR accepts the 16-bit instruction from RDS, decodes it, and sets up the operation to be done. It
does this by selecting the registers to be used in
the instruction and then informing the arithmetic
logic unit (ALU) of the type operation to be done.
The register selection is done by first selecting the
module that contains the register and then selecting the register within the module. The ALU is informed of the type of operation (add, subtract,
etc) by the op code lines from the IXR.
ROS (Read Only Storage)
RDS is the area in the microcontroller where the
controlling program routines for machine functions
are permanently stored. Where extra features such
as printer, second disk, BSCA, etc, are added to the
basic 3741, additional RDS containing feature
functions is installed. The 3741 RDS program is
started every time the machine is powered-on.
The first part of the program is a basic diagnostic
routine (see Power-On Sequence and Diagnostic
Routine flowchart on page 14-2.18). The power
up RDS routine moves the disk head to track 00,
and checks the general purpose registers and the
first 2K bytes of R/W storage. The program then
goes into a loop waiting for disk insertion. The
instructions in the program are 16 bits long and
the lines used to carry the instructions are '-RDS
bits a thru 15'. The accessing and gating-out of
the instructions is achieved by '-address bits a
thru 14' (bit 5 not used) together with '+charge
array degate address' and '+flush array'. The
array pulses are originated in the clock module
and should be continuously pulsing. The 'address'
lines are controlled by the IAR, and their condition
is dependent on the address being accessed.
the input/output devices and have specific functions. Dthers are general purpose registers used in
internal microcontroller operations. Register selection is done by the IXR after it decodes the RDS
instruGtion. The module is selected first and then
the re!~ister within the module is selected by the
signal lines '+reg sel dec 0' and '+ reg sel dec l'
in binary combination. Gating to the module is
controlled by '-reg gate ctrl 0' and gating from the
module is controlled by '-reg gate ctrl 1 '. These
two continuously running signals originate in the
clock module.
IXR (Instruction Decode Register)
Storage Registers
These are 8-bit temporary storage devices. Additional registers are used when feature half planars
are installed. Some of the registers are used with
IAR (Instruction Address Register)
The IAR sets up the accessing of RDS to be either
self-incrementing or controlled by the microcontroller. Registers 1, 2, and 3 are within the IAR
module and are used for this purpose. If, for
example, the mac;hine is in enter mode and CE
mode is to be selEJcted, the request is made from
the kE!yboard. The microcontroller interprets the
FUNCT SEL and data key and loads the IAR registers with a value that will give the address lines to
access the CE-mode program-routine in RDS. Once
in the routine, thl~ IAR self-increments through the
instructions. The address lines are common to all
RDS in the machine. Feature RDS is accessed by
the same IAR, and all RDS instructions are decoded by the same IXR.
......-----Sel M o d - - -
- + Reg Sel Dec a -----fl~__1
Rllgister
-
+ Reg Sel Dec 1-0---+---1
Rllgister
Register
Selection
Rllgister
The RDS on the MPU planar is contained in four
separate modules and the signal '+charge array
degate address' is fed to each one of these modules.
-Reg Gate Ctrl a
(gates data into registers)
-Reg Gate Ctrl 1
--(gates data out of registers)-
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
m
PI,\! 246907
14-2.1
EC 825853
11/15/74
Test Points
826065
. Planar Socket
: ~
- -
ti
- -
-
~J
~
':i
-
-I
Ij
PN 2469072
8/1/75
14-2.8
D
r.
~
- lo~ rj
. 2-L-003 - 'Reg gate ctrl l'
n
~
r.iii 2-L-006 - 'Reg gate ctrl 0'
int sync (-)
r~
n
r~
"
B
" C
.
Clock pulses
continuous while power is on.
Sync Trig
Sync Point
Sweep Speed
Probe Point
Vert Amp
Int (+) dc
2-L-006 ('-Reg gate ctrl 0')
5 J1.s/div
See above,
0.5V/div
.=
Ii
~=
,~
.r~
....r~
- .......
~
7
;;;;;;;;;
II -
'+Charge array' - l-C-DOB
(+) Int sync
'-Reset RDS' - l-C-B07
---
'+ Flush array' - 1-0-013
-
Free running while power is on.
Sync Trig
Sync Point
Sweep Speed
Probe Point
Vert Amp
Int (+) dc
'+Charge array"
2 J1.s/div
See above
0.5V/div
In Planar Socket II
Cross Connector
In Planar Socket
Cross Connector
m
'-Reset RDS'
(t-C-B07)
'+ Charge array'
(l-C-OOB)
' " '+ Flush array'
(l-D-O 13)
fD1D 2
2-
Ifr1 ''-\::E LIU
13
/[)
",
I.L - -
:
~ 13
ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit)
The ALU sequer.ce of events and their timings is
as follows:
The ALU performs most of the operations done
within the MPU. It contains two registers, register
o and the B register, plus circuitry to perform all
logical functions - add, exclusive or, etc. The two
registers make up the A and B sides of the ALU.
In an add instruction one value is set into the A
side and the other value into the B side, the two
values are added, and the result appears as ~he
output of the ALU.
R-Time (previolJs instruction)
. . . . The add instruction is read out
of RDS and latched up in the
IXR. Registers 12 and 13 are s_elected, and the ALU is informed
that the operation will be an
add.
B-Time.
.
.
The contents of register 13 are
gated to the MPU data path and
into the B side of the ALU.
A-Time.
.
.
The contents of register 12 are
gated into the A side of the ALU
and the result is formed.
R-Time.
.
.
The result is gated out of the
ALU to the MPU data path and
into register 12. The instruction
for the reset operation is gated
out of RDS and latched up in the
IXR.
PN 24704·
14-2.9
Machine Cycle and a Typical ALU Operation
The machine cycle is divided into three main segments (8, A, and R times).
~~--B----~1_6P_S________I~
__
~
~
A
R
L
A
A
I---___~
~
B__ __________ __B
__ _______
R
----'r
a..-_ _ _
Instruction: Add to the value in register 12
the value in register 13.
Reg 12
xxx xxx
t
+
Reg 13
xxxxx
=
Result to
Reg 12
J
EC 825853
11/15/74
826065
811/75
Read/Write Memory Card
This card provides storage for the 3741. The basic
machine (Models 1 and 2) has 2K of storage; Models 3 and 4 can have up to 8K. Location of the
memory card is dependent on the features installed.
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 2470448
in the 128-byte field in storage. The microcontroller just sets up the starting address of the
record to be transferred and then can do operations in other areas of the machine. An example
of this is the way the display cycle-steals from the
current buffer while the operator enters data into
the current buffer during enter mode.
The storage (contained on the memory card) is
divided into buffers. Some are assigned to specific
uses, such as the current buffer for which data is
displayed, or the previous buffer from which the
data is written. Refer to the storage map in Chapter 8 for details of buffer assignment within storage.
The data flow to and from R/W storage is on the
'-data bit in' and '-data bit out' lines. These
lines should pulse continuously as the display is
alwa~'') cycle-stealing. Data flow to and from the
R/W storage/MPU interface is along the buffer
path to the disk and display controllers plus the
microcontroller storage data register (register 7),
w'1ich is used for data transfer.
CSY Clock
CSX Clock
1~;z::m;;IEEJElilIEEIEE.
High Bit 0
~
Reg 8
SARH
II
High Bits 3-6
1 t---'-I III
- O t I I [I
1~#iEE;:;;;;gEEElGlZllllEZzi ::~~ ~ s
B Time
I
Read/Write Storage/MPU Interface and
Cycle Steal
The R/W storage/MPU interface controls data
transfer between storage and the microcontroller,
disk unit, or display unit. Data is transferred at
the request of any of these devices.
R/W storage accessing is done by means of 18
address lines controlled from registers in the microcontroller. The microcontroller, disk unit, and display unit each have their own storage address registers-a high-order bit register and a low-order bit
register. See the diagram for register names. Lines
1, 5, and 6 and lines 2, 3, and 4 in the display are
treated, for storage accessing purposes, as two
separate devices. The outputs of these register
parts are dotted together. Each device has a time
allotted in which to access storage. A-time is for
the disk, B-time is for the microcontroller, and
R-time is for the display (the display controller
controls line usage). The bits used in each register
to produce '-SAR l' through '-SAR 9' are high
bit 7 and the low register bits 0 through 7. Bits 3
through 6 in the high register are gated with CSY
clock, CSX clock, and the storage plugging pins
to produce '-SAR 10', '+CSX l' through '+CSX 4',
'+CSY 1', '+CSY 2', '+4K CS', and '+card sel'.
I
I
Storage
b
b""""'+'!l """""="""""'=,i1
Microc~ntro"er CIS
(Gate adr to RIW)
M
P
U
D
p
ifil
14-2.10
.
+Card Sel
Memory Pins
1_2
3_4
5_6
7..-.8
9....--10
11....--12
13....--14
+CSX4
+CSX3
+CSX2
+CSXl
+CSY2
+CSYl
Gating Clocks
R
D i s k L____
Reg 10 1;$
i
InlElilllIEEEEElllEfEEE_OKARH
=t
rr1
I
l:jEIEEEl52lEEl5llEE.~ f
(G"~~~~~:
RtN)
~ '·:.ElEilll:$EE::z::::::;;.
0
1\
1
f
tp;;::lltZE.!lElEEElillsd~ 1
Reg;; a
DAR1H 7
DAR1L 7
R:
a
d
I
:---SAR10_
_-SAR 9 _
I_-SAR 8 _
_-SAR 7 _
:m:::l.E:E:lIZ:EHEii9iEhz:BEitE7lE+ELEowEEllBiEtsz:o-E7El5EEllE.z:.!iEl
. . . . _-SAR 6 _
_-SAR 5 _
-SAR 4 _
=-SAR 3 _
( _-SAR 2 _
-SAR 1
n
6;,. c~.p
~
_---1~R~T.:;.im:.:.::e~---~
11 Display CIS (lines 1, 5 & 6)
CIS Req 1
e
!
"
,.~
f
From
+Data Strobe
7
r--r-C;..../S_R_eq-=--2_ _ _....JI
Display CIS (lines 2, 3 & 4)
S
o
r
a
g
V
i
a
P
brr,,\l
~ 1 -L1
I
1·.#l.E•••• DAR2L
w
e
DisPla~ lll~I.!-----4·I~______C'....oc_k~~~~~~~~~~~~~.:..:+..;;w:r:it.::..:.e..;:;/.:..:_.;.;.R:e::::.:a::;:'d:~:
1:.lllllJE.2ill!lillEiEIlEIi Reg 30
T
o
I
1- -
-
-
-
-
-
-.,
I
I
I
I
Parity
Check
Model 3/4
Only
I
I
Data Out Data Ifl
I
I
n
L_~'..:' --r~
I
I
I
S
o
I
c
I
I
k
-:
H
A
Bits 1-8 -
n
d
G
Bit 0 in the high register produces '+write/-read'.
If the microcontroller sets bit 0 on, data will be
read from storage. If the bit is set off, the operation will be a write. Bit 1 is set on when the request to access R/W storage is made by the microcontroller. Bit 2 in the high register controls the
self-in.crementing of the register pair. The selfincrementing is used in a way that frees the microcontroller from the task of setting up each address
Bits 1-8
Accessing Storage
Accessing 2K Storage
+Card Sel
1.
.2
Accessing 4K Storage
+Card Sel
e--e
3 _____ 4 t---+--1cL~
5 ______ 6r--t--+"( :sx~.(.
7,_____ 8 t--+--i'L;:::iiXL~------"""
9..--.10 r--"'T"""-+I
,. .12 t--+--,f-C~;Y? -_-+_~_-+_..,
3.-..14 r---t--.f-r: ..;v 1 ---r-t---t-...,
Memory
Pins
• •
• •
• •
• •
.--.
e----.
Memory
Pins
+CSX4-l Not Used
+csx3-5
+CSX2 - - - - - . ,
+CSX1
+CSY2----r-1--~~
+CSY1 -~'+--+-..,
Accessing 8K Storage
.-.....
+Card Sel
• - r+CSX4
•
+CSX3
• -- t-+CSX2
•
+CSX1• • t-t-- +CSY2
•
•
Memory
•
•
•
•
Pins
I - HCSY1
0 0 0 0
-SAR lines can
be equated to
a binary counter.
For example
512
-SAR
256 --SAR
128--SAR
64 --SAR
32 --SAR
16 --SAR
8--SAR
4 --SAR
2 --SAR
1--SAR
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1024
1024 1024 1024
Bytes
Of
Storage
1K 2K 3K 4K
-SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
--SAR
10-
98761024
5- Bytes
Of
4- Storage
t-321- 1K 21< 3K 4K 5K 6K 7K 8K
+Data Strobe
Read/-Write
Planar
Board
-Data In Bits 1-9'
- Dtta In Bits
- Data In Bits
- Data Out Bits
- Data In Bits
I,':':"~::"~':':'::
II
Note: Bit 9 not used.
EC "825853
"11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 247044
14-2.11
EC 825853
11/15/74
826065
8/1/75
R!W Memory Card (Input, Output, Address Control, and Voltage Lines)
Line Function
Test Pin
Active
Level
(+ or -)
Line
Name
1-G-D02
1-H-D04
1-G-D13
1-G-D05
1-H-D09
2-H-B02
2-G-B03
1-H-D10
1-G-D09
2-H-B06
-
SAR 1
SAR 2
SAR 3
SAR 4
SAR 5
SAR 6
SAR 7
SAR 8
SAR 9
SAR10
2-G-B07
+
CSY 1
2-G-B 13
+
CSY2
2-H-B07
1-H-B08
2-H-B 10
1-H-D13
+
+
+
+
CSX 1
CSX 2
CSX3
CSX4
Selects the
Selects the
Selects the
Selects the
2-H-B11
+
Data strobe
A timing pulse from the MPU which allows reading or writing
in storage.
A line from the MPU which selects either a read or write function in storage.
A line from the MPU which activates the memory card.
,
I
(
)
}
2-H-B13
+
Card select
2-G-B04
2-G-B09
1-H-D12
2-H-B04
1-H-D07
1-G-D07
2-G-B06
2-G-B05
2-G-B10
2-G-B08
2-G-B12
2-G-B11
2-H-B05
2-H-B03
2-H-B08
1-G-D04
1-G-D03
1-G-D08
1-G-D06
1-G-D11
1-G-D10
1-H-D03
1-H-D02
1-H-D06
+
8.5 volts
5 volts
5 volts
8.5 volts
Ground
Ground
I~
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
I
}
Bit 5
Bit 6
I
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9 (parity) ,
Bit 1
\
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
)
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9 (parity)
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
These lines select one buffer (128 bytes) within
a 1 K block of storage. (1 K of storage contains
8 buffers.)
Selects the first,third, fifth, seventh, and ninth 1 K blocks
of storage.
Selects the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth 1 K blocks of
storage.
+Write/-read
1-H-D11
These lines form a single byte address to select
one byte within a 128-byte buffer.
I~
first 2K byte block of storage (bytes 0000-2047)~
second 2K byte block of storage (bytes 2048-4095).
third 2K byte bloc~ of storage (bytes 4096-6143).
fourth 2K byte block of storage (bytes 6144-8191).
Input voltages
1\
)
Data bits to R/W storage. (Data bus in)
t
)
(
)
Data bits from RIW storage. (Data bus out)
PN 2470450
14-2.12
Keyboard Attachment
Reg 28
DAR2H
The keyboard attachment, located on the MPU
planar, is the interface between the keyboard
and the microcontroller. It stores decoded keystrokes information for use by the microcontroller.
The MPU keyboard registers (KBD DATA - register 5, and KBDCTRL - register 6) receive input
from the keyboard as described under Keyboard
Character Transfer Control in Chapter 13. Data
is sent via the SD R (register 7) to the current
buff~r in R/W storage. The buffer contents are
dispiayed and, if the data is OK, it can be stored
by operator action.
Addressing to RM Storage
REG 29
DAR2L
t--RTimel
Reg 30
DAR1H
Reg 31
DAR1L
M
P
U
Buffer Data Path
i<:·
II
~
P
a
t
h
""------Cycle Steal Req 1-
I
The character generator is a ROS module containing all the character display patterns and having
9-bit output. For a single character, seven ROS
addresses are accessed to give the 7x9 matrix pattern. This pattern is serialized in the shift register
to give '-CRT dot input' as its output, and at the
appropriate time the cursor, whose position is being tracked by register 13, is gated out with the
data. The lines '+CRT line ctrl l' through '+CRT
line ctrl 4' control line~ 1 through 6 on the display.
The signals '+wiggle return' and '+horizontal return' used in the display unit originate in the
display controller and run continuously. The
entire display is refreshed every 23 ms.
..:.....
:.~:::::
•..::...:.:.
-
D
Cycle Steal Req 2-
Characters are formed in a 7x9 matrix. Each character is moved from R/W storage by cycle-stealing. The data for the character is gated into the
'next character' register, where it is checked for
validity. If the character is valid, address lines
to the character generator are activated for the
character. If the character is invalid (unprintable),
the hex representation of the character is displayed.
Data Bits Out
-
RTime
Next
Character
Present
Character
Cycle 'Steal
Address
2.25 MHz
il~i
(from
clock)
-
CRT
Line
Control
Validity
Check
ftl
Display Attachment
The display attachment controls the displaying of
data. The display unit holds six lines of data, each
40 characters long.
Data
Latches
;.
Rerest
The CRT displays characters sent to it from R/W
storage by the microcontroller. The characters
are decoded by the display attachment, and the
voltage levels to the display circuit board are
varied (wiggled) to make the CRT electron beam
form the desired images on the screen.
To RNJ
Storage
,--
-
Character
Generator
(ROS)
;-
r-
.1M.
CRT
L
Clockin[
~s
F'W;!l9"
R,,"m
+H~rizontal
Return
Cursor
Reg 13
1
I
Shift
Register
-CRT Dot Input
To Display
Via
Socket N
I
+CRT Line Ctrl 1
+CRT Line Ctrl 2
+CRT Line Ctrl 4
I
Display Attachment
MPU Planar
Disk Attachment
Disk Multiplexor
The disk attachment interfaces between the MPU
and the disk drives. Data flow is from R/W storage to disk on a write operation and from disk to
R/W storage on a read, both via the attachment.
The components of the disk attachment are
shown in the diagram.
Swit:hes the input lines to eiti)er disk drive 1
or disk drive 2 under control of 'select drive l' or
'seleGt drive 2'.
Writo Trigger
Serdes (Serializer/Deserializer)
This device uses a 500 kHz clock to gate data to
the diskette for storage.
This unit changes the 8-bit characters into a serial
format (1 bit at a time) for sending to the diskette.
The unit also works in ·reverse: it changes serial
data into 8-bit characters when receiving from the
diskette.
EC
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
VFCt Card
The V FO card i!i used by the attachment to decode
the frequency-modulated output from the diskette
into serial data.
PN 24704
1
3741 ML 14-2.13
EC 825853
11/15/74
826065
PN 2470452
14-2.14
8/1/75
Disk Controller
The disk controller is a type of microcontroller. It
accepts commands from the microcontroller and
executes them as independently as possible. This
capability permits the microcontroller to perform
operations in other areas of the machine with
minimum time loss.
The disk controller is given commands such as seek
higher (move the head toward the center of the
diskette), seek lower, read ID (record address),
read data, and write data. When.the disk attachment begins to execute a command it activates a
busy signal. After busy drops, the microcontroller
checks drive status (sense data) to be sure that no
errors occurred, and then uses the data just read
(if it was a read command), issues another write
or access command, or commands whatever is to
be done next.
When it detects an error, the disk controller indicates the error through the drive status information.
The microcontroller reissues the command in an
attempt to recover. Error recovery is tried a set
number of times. If a retry succeeds, the operation
goes on. If not, an error code is displayed and the
operation stops. On some disk errors, multiple retries occur that might take up to one minute.
The disk controller contains the track, record,
length, sense/command, and next character registers. It also contains the logic for track compare, record compare, length compare, and the
logic to control the erase and write gates. The
track, record, and length registers are loaded
by the microcontroller from the control data in
the program buffer.
Track, Record, Length and Sense/Command
Registers
The track and record registers contain the track and
record numbers of the diskette record being addressed. The length register contains the length of
the record to be processed. For seek operations,
the length register contains the number of tracks
that the program wishes to cross.
The seven bits in the sense/command register are:
index, bad track, control address mark (CAM),
length error, CRC error, ID-match, and busy. The
sense/command register also indicates ready.
, . - - - - - - - - - Addressing to R/W Storage
r----
---------i
"A" Time _ _ _
RNI
i
~. To RNI "".~
Buffer Data Path
Disk
Controller
1----
Serialized
Data
+Sundard Data
+Standard Clock
+4F Clock
+Ignore Window
+VFO Data Sync
VFO
Card
Select Drive 1
Sense/Command
Select Drive 2
I - - - t - - - t - - +File Data
.
o
~
.
o
~
Disk
Attachment
+Index Pulse 1
' - - - - - + I n d e x Pulse 2
The index sense bit is the index output of the disk
drive. It is used by the ROS to mark the start of a
track for initializing diskettes.
The bad track sense bit is set if the first byte of
data in an I D field is hex F F.
The control address mark (CAM) sense bit is set if
the address mark of the selected data record is hex
F8.
The length error sense bit is set if the record read
is not padded to 1,28 with hex 00.
The I D-match sense bit is set when the ID specified by the track and record registers is found.
If the correct ID is not found, the microcontroller
assumes an addressing error and executes the proper error recovery procedure. For seek operations
the ID-match bit indicates that the correct track
was found.
The busy bit of the sense register is set when the
command register is loaded. It stays set until the
---+--1-------------'
command issued is completed. When the command
is completed, the busy latch is reset.
The ready condition is indicated in the sense register by not having all bits in the register turned on.
Thus, if the selected drive is not ready, all bits in
the sense/command register are forced on.
Next Character Register
The next character register is temporary storage
for 1 byte of data. Data being transferred from
R/W storage to diskette (write record) passes
through the next character register to the serdes.
Serdes serializes the byte and presents 1 bit at a
time to the disk controller for transfer to the disk
unit. The data being transferred (read record) from
the diskette to·R/W storage travels in the reverse
direction of the write record. In this caseserdes
. deserializes data and presents a byte at a time to the
ne:---handler
No
Lo 3d data set
label address
int::> track
record from DCB
Search to
track 0
[
<
~Error
handler
No
[
G"ECD
from DCB
[
Wdt,ECD
to data set
label
[
S,,'~'"'
to index
mode (X)
Page 14-2.16
825853
EC
11/15/74
m
826065
8/1/75
PN 24704
3741 ML
14-2.17
EC
825853
11/15/74
826065
PN 2470456
14-2.18
8/1/75
Power-On Sequence and Diagnostic Routine
START
Power On Switch and 2.5 Second Delay
When power is ,turned on, a PO R pulse is generated
followed by a 2.5 second delay in which power
supplies, motors, and circuits reach operating
levels.
power_on]
reset
Access Disk Drive 1 and Check Out MPU and
R/W Storage
The head for disk drive 1 moves to track 00 when
the ROS causes it to seek 79 times to a lower track.
(This can be seen and heard.) The disk accessing
is controlled by the disk controller while the MPU
co'ntinues with part of the power-on sequence.
Some of the basic machine hardware is checked
when the ROS shifts test characters through various
registers within the MPU and then writes them into R/W storage. The MPU then checks the last
register tosee if each test character is 0 K and
also checks that the test characters written into
R/W storage can be read out correctly. For a
failure in either case, the MPU makes the clicker
buzz and the cursor flash in position 40 on the
CRT. If an error occurs, eliminate feature hardwa,re as a cause by removing F RUs. If no error
occurs, the R/W storage area (buffer) is incremented and the sequence is repeated until all 2,048
positions of storage have been checked.
The test characters used are in hex, each different from the one before. If the machine stops
with a display of all Hs (hex 00), the MPU planar,
a cross connector, or a memory card is probably
the cause. The hex 00 me¥ls that either no data
was written into storage or no data can be read
from storage.
A power-on sequence error display of many hex
character patterns would probably indicate a
problem with the MPU planar or memory card.
Most addressing and data paths from the MPU to
R/W storage are shared. The combinations selected
by the MPU for each storage position differ.
Start:
MPU clock
ROS/loop
2.5 second
delay
14-2.19
Access disk
drive 1 (move
head to track 00)
Issue disk
set ready
J
Issue reset
access control
to disk drive
Advance buffer
address counter
14-2.19
SeekloweJ
track 79
times
Chain load a : } 1
gen.eral purpose
registers,
-
-
'~,
Char~
Load test
acter to a buffer
character position
-
Registers tested:
12 through 15
2
4,5
24,25
7
27
\
\
No
Turn on buzzer.
cursor at 40.
flash CRT.
Loop tests all
buffer positions 8 times
Yes
.Move R!W head to
track 00 if no microcontroller or storage
errors are detected
Access disk
drive 2 (move
head to
track 00)
Yes
r---I
I
If no fea1 ures are
installed, this
ROS routine
is bypassnd
I
I
Initialize
R/W storage
Display
status
I
Initialize storage pos-
1--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-1 itions for production 1 - - - - - - 1 Initialize program
buffers 1 through
14-2.20
14-4
14-5
Blank buffers:
current, I/O,
previous, and
display
statistics and control
totals to zeros
Program levels
B through F not
initialized
A with Ns
Initialize first
90 bytes of
programming buffer
to hex 00
Initialize display
address registers
to the current and
the display buffer
Data displayed
to this point
is random
----
Initialize
programming
constants in
buffer
Load keyboard
register with
he,< FF
Initialize
status line to
Initializ, BSCA
feature
000000 XN
f-----
Group select
bit 6 of register
6 is turned on,
then off
14-2.20
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
·8/1/75
PN 24704Ei
3741 ML
14-2.19
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 2470458
14-2.20
Disk Load Sequence
14-2.19
Objectives:
Make sure that the access is on track 00 and
that read and write commands to the disk
adapter can be executed.
Check the disk accessibility byte in record
7 of track 00.
Check that the HDR1 label in sector 8 is
formatted properly, display the label, and
post index mode.
Locate Track 00
Wait for
disk load
MPU disk attachment senses index
pu Ises to determine when disk
unit is ready
Disk unit produces index
pulses when
diskette is loaded
Begin
disk load
sequence
Yes
No
END
The display shows X W mode, and a hexFF is
displayed in position 1 on line 2.
Disk Load Sequence
A read 10 command is issued. If a record 10
on track 00 is read on the first try, the hex
forma~ record 10 overlays the F F so quickly
that you might not see it. The first character
in the record is then examined by the MPU to
make sure that the lOis from track 00. An
error detected by the disk adapter or MPU
results in up to 11 retries of the operation. If
the retries fail, an error code is posted. If
the read is successful, the record lOis seen
for a short time as hex characters in positions
1 through 4 of line 2.
00000
00000
XW
•
START
HI=IH
I
'\
I
\
Locate
track 00
Read the first
record address
found into positions 1-4 of the
current buffer
Put hex FF
into current
buffer column
1 of line 2
Display XW
mode. Load
disk 1 head
No
No
)
Get track
number from
column 1 of
current buffer
XW
r-:5P1av disk
L:0r2.3.or4
Yes
Write Gate Test
Record 3 of track 00 is reserved for write gate testing during the disk load sequence. The test reads
record 3 into the previous buffer, inverts the bits
in position 1 of the previous buffer, and writes the
previous buffer into sector 3. Then it reads the
contents of sector 3 back into the previous buffer.
The first character in the previous buffer is checked
to make sure that the write circuits wrote data onto the diskette. The first character in record 3 is
inverted each time the diskette is loaded.
~
Yes
Issue reset
access control
disk comm3nd
Issue seek
lower to track
00 with 7 track
retry option
The usual checks for disk errors are made and retries attempted if errors are found. Hard (nonrecoverable) errors result in an error message on the
status line.
Issue seek
lower 1
track
IssueseekJ
lower 79
(recalibrate)
No
Issuese£:]
upper 1 to
track 00
14-2.14
Retry read command until success~--..I
Turn buzzer
on; then
turn it off
Post an N
error
Post X mode
in mode/status
Put up 001
in column
indicator
Wait for a
keystroke
(main key loop,
see 14'·2.16)
Update field
definition
format
character A
Reset
keyboard
register
Update shift
character A
]
Post operator
guidance /
]
END
EC
823146
9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
F'N 16191j'
3741 ML
14-5
3741 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Program Storage Area
The 3741 contains ten program buffers. Programs
to control record format, similar to those used in
the IBM 029 Card Punch, can be written and loaded
into those buffers from the current record buffer.
These programs can be entered from the keyboard
or from a disk. An additional program (program
level 0) is provided which has a fixed program of
128, single character alpha fields. When operating
under manual control, this program is selected.
Any program can be selected from the keyboard by
way of the program select routine and the program level number will be displayed on the status
line.
For details about programming, see How to Load
a Program in Chapter 9.
Enter
Enter mode is used for writing records on a disk.
As an operator keys a record, the data is stored in
the current record buffer. In this mode, this buffer is displayed. When a record advance occurs,
the MPU transfers the data from the current
record buffer to the previous record buffer. The
record in the previous record buffer is then written
o,n the disk.
Program Chaining
Program chaining provides automatic selection of
the program to be used with the next record. The
program to be selected when record advancing is
designated by the program number in position 128
of the current program. The program to be selected when record backspacing is designated by the
program number in position 127 of the current
program.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
MPU moves the contents of the current record buffer to the previous record buffer and reads the
next record from the disk into the current record
buffer. Then only if a change has been made to
the record now in the previous record buffer, the
contents of the previous record buffer wi II be
written onto disk. When a record is written in
update mode, it is always written at the disk address at which the record was located before it
was changed.
14-6
the contents of the hold buffer into the current
record buffer. Here it can be reviewed and if necessary, modified before use as a mask. When the
search operation is completed, the mask will be
stored in the hold buffer; and the record found
will be in both the current record buffer and the
previous record buffer. The current record buffer
is displayed. The search can be continued with the
same mask since the mask will be recalled from the
hold buffer when the search content function is
again selected.
Record Length
Search Sequential Content
The length of records written on disk is variable
from 1 to 128 characters but is fixed from record
to record within the data set. The record length
for a data set is identified in the data set label positions 23 through 27. If record lengths are entered
into the data set which are shorter than the designated record length, the 3741 wili automatically
write blank characters in all positions from the end
of the record out to and including the specified record length position. Beyond the specified record
length position, the 3741 wi II enter hex 00 in all
positions out to and including position 128.
Search EOD
The search EOD (end of data) function causes the
machine to search the disk for the last record of a
data set. When this function is completed, the last
record of the data set will be displayed, and stored
in both the current record and previous record
buffers.
Search Data Address
The search data address function allows searching
for a record in a data set by specifying its disk address. When this function is completed, the record
at the specified address will be displayed, and stored
in both the current and previous record buffers.
Search Content
Update
The update mode is used to read records from the
disk for review, modification or use as program records. In this mode, the record located at the current disk address is displayed from the current
record buffer. Any changes will be keyed into this
buffer. When a record advance is performed, the
PN 1619180
The search content function provides a search for
the record in a data set which contains specific
data. The data being searched for is called a mask.
The mask can be part or all of the record. A blank
in any position means that position will not be
compared during a search operation. When the
search content function is selected, the MPU moves
Search sequential content is a faster form of search
content. To find the record with the selected
mask, the records in the data set must be arranged
so that the search fields of each succeeding record
have a higher value than in the preceding record.
If one or more records do not meet this requirement, the search may fail.
Operator Guidance
Operator guidance on the 3741 assists the operator
by displaying information on the last 30 positions
of lines 5 and 6 of the display. Line 5 displays the
current program field or a prompting message related to that field. Line 6 displays the data entered
into the current field up to the cursor position.
The remaining positions are indicated by a slash.
Prompting messages, up to 30 characters long can
be stored in even numbered program buffers.
Each prompting record is associated with the program in the next lower numbered program buffer.
The first character of the prompting record mustbe an asterisk (*). Each prompting message within
a prompting record must be followed by an asterisk. Every program field must have a corresponding prompting message in the prompting record.
3741 SPECIAL FEATURES
Feature Group A
Production Statistics
The production statistics feature provides statistics
on data production for use in measurement of
work load, analysis of error, and job accounting.
Three counters (located in buffer 4 of R/W storage) are used to count:
1.
Number of key strokes.
2.
Number of records processed.
3.
Number of characters corrected during
verify mode, including all characters keyed
in field correct mode.
These counters are reset by the microcode when
power is turned on or when the R key is pressed
while production statistics are being displayed.
Verify
Verify mode is used to check the accuracy of records already on disk and to make corrections to
records when errors are found. As data for a record is rekeyed from the source document, each
character is compared with the corresponding
character in the record in the current record buffer.
If characters do not compare, a V error occurs.
After the error is reset, the first character keyed
is accepted if it agrees with either the character in
the current record buffer or the character which
caused the error. The next record to be verified is
stored in the hold buffer. When record advancing
occurs in verify mode, the MPU moves the contents of the current record buffer to the previous
record buffer and the contents of the hold buffer
to the current record buffer. The contents of the
previous record buffer will then be written on
disk only if a change had been made to the record.
After the last record of the data set has been verified, a verify mark (V) will be automatically inserted in the data set label.
Self-Check (Modulus 10 and Modulus 11)
The self-check feature provides a method for checking the entry of the numeric fields that contain a
precomputed self-check digit. The self-check digit
is the last digit in the field and is precomputed
using a modulus 10 or 11 algorithm. (The digit
is stored in buffer 4 of R/W storage.) The 3741
recomputes the self-check digit according to the
algorithm, and when the last digit is entered or
verified, it is compared for identity with the computer value.
field totals are displayed and the R key is pressed.
Detailed programming information is contained in
section 9 of this manual.
Disk Initializaticln
The purpose of the disk initialization feature is:
Field Totals (Online)
This field totals feature provides the ability to add
fields within a record or within several records and
to enter that total into the same or following records. All additions and entering of totals into a
record are under program control.
The online feature allows for field totals operation
while the machine is in enter mode, update mode,
or verify mode. Three 19-digit accumulators (located in buffer 5 of R/W storage) are provided with
this feature. Data can be algebraically added into
one or more of these accumulators from a specified
field or fields in any or all records of a data set.
During online field totals operation, data in these
accumulators will be reset to 0 whenever that data
is entered into a record. All accumulators are reset
by the microcode when power is turned on, when
offline field totals is initiated or when field t()tals
are displayed and the R key is pressed.
Detailed programming information is contained in
section 9 of this manual.
Field Totals (Offline)
The offline field totals feature provides the ability
to add fields within a record or within several records and to enter that total into the same or the
following records. All addition and enter operations are under program control. The feature is
used to obtain totals from records already written
on the disk.
Three 19-digit accumulators (located in buffer 5 of
R/W stqrage) are provided with this feature. Data
can be algebraically added into one or more of
these accumulators from a specified field or fields
in any or all records of a data set. Data in thes~
accumulators can be entered into a field of a record with or without resetting the accumulator, depending on the control program. All accumulators
are reset by the microcode when power is turned
on, when offline field totals is initiated or when
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
In
1.
To write identification fields in each sector
of all active tracks on the disk.
2.
To write tile bad track code in all defective
tracks.
3.
To write a record in each sector of each
active track (blank characters are written in
all tracks E!XCept track 00).
4.
To write SO-character records in track 00 as
described in the Disk Theory section of this
manual.
5.
To check iI disk for tracks marked with the
bad track t:ode and for tracks exhibiting
errors.
~
All disks are initialized before they are shipped to
a customer. They should be reinitialized only if:
1.
The disk was exposed to a strong magnetic
field.
2.
A defect occurred in one or more tracks.
3.
A sector SE!quence other than the existing
sequence i!; needed.
Record Insert
Record insertion provides the capability of opening a space within an existing data set into which
records may be c.dded. Tbis is achieved by moving
all records starting with the record at the currently
displayed disk address through the EOD minus one
record. The new disk address of the records is determined by the previous disk address of the record,
plus the number of records to be inserted. The
SpaCE! that is opened, from 01 to 99 sectors, is
filled with deleted records which then can be
modified. Buffer 4 of R/W storage is used during
this process.
PN 16191S'
3741 ML
14-7
EC
823146
825853
826065
9/15/74
11/15/74
8/1/75
Expansion Feature
3713 Printer Controller
This feature provides the IBM 3741 Data Station
with the necessary circuits for installing a second
disk unit and/or an IBM 3713,3715, or 3717
Printer.
The printer attachment feature allows the attachment of an IBM printer. The printing can be performed with the printer format controlled by a
program in a program buffer or printer control
characters in the data stream. Records can also be
printed with no format control with 1 record
printed per line and with single or double spacing (determined by a lever in the printer). In
all of the printer operations, turning AUTO REC
ADV off causes printing to stop at the end of the
print line with the machine staying in a printer
mode. From this point, pressing REC ADV prints
the next line. Pressing RESET returns the machine
to its previous mode of operation if this operation
did not start from the read index mode. Pressing
REC ADV with AUTO REC ADV on starts the
printing and allows the print function selected
to be completed.
Second Disk
The second disk feature is provided on the 3741 to
permit:
1.
Duplication of a disk to save more than one
copy or recover data from a disk that has
developed a defect.
2.
Merging of records from a disk with records
from the keyboard.
3.
Putting data from several disks onto one
disk.
4.
5.
Extended storage for programs si nce programs can be loaded into program buffers
from the secondary disk without removing
the primary disk.
Extended storage for use with communications feature.
The print feature has four different modes. They
are:
1.
2.
Print data set-the current data set is printed.
3.
Print search content-the record found after
search content is printed.
4.
Print search address-the record found after
search address is printed.
I
During dual disk operations, write functions can
not be performed on the secondary disk. Record
lengths for both disks are maintained separately.
Therefore, records read from the secondary disk
are extended with blank characters or shortened as
required when written on the primary disk. A
5-diglt secondary disk address is displayed on
the display status line after completing any second
disk operation, indicating the address of the last
record read from the secondary disk.
When a disk is being duplicated, seven records are
read from disk 2 in one revolution. These records
are temporarily stored in the buffer, from where
they are written on disk 1. All seven records are
written in one disk revolution. Program buffers
are used for this operation.
3717 Printer Controller
The 3717 Printer Controller is in the 3717 Printer.
For further information, see the manual contained
in the 3717 Printer.
Print record-the data in the current record
buffer is printed.
Data to be printed is always transferred from the
previous record buffer to the printer attachment.
The transfer is serial by byte.
If format control is used, data is read from the
disk into the current record buffer. It is then formatted in the previous record buffer, one print
line at a time. From the previous record buffer
it is transferred 1 byte at a time to the printer
register in the printer controller.
".-
PN 1619182
14-8
the right margin is reached. In the case of a new
line, the print head carrier stops and returns to the
left margin while indexing to a new line. In the
case of a stop at the right margin, the paper is not
indexed.
Printing is accomplished by the printer adapter
selecting the vertical columns of the dot matrix
in the character generator. When the last column
of dots has been printed, the printer adapter generates a reset to the printer register. The microcontroller monitors the printer register, and a
cleared register signals the need for the next
character.
When format control is used, the character in
column 1 of program level A defines the method
of selecting the printer format program, as shown
in the following chart:
Character
in
Column 1
Meaning
:
Printer format program
manually selected.
%
Printer format program level
defined by character in column 001 of data record.
: with program level 0
selected
Print one record per line
with no format control.
% with a zero
or non-numeric in column
001 of data
record
Print record with no format
control.
+
Print control characters are
contained within data
stream.
..
When the microcontroller puts a character into the
printer register, the printer adapter starts the print
head carrier moving to the right. It will continue
moving to the right until the microcontroller puts
a new line character in the printer register or until
All other
characters
Print one record per line with
no format control.
When power is turned on '+POR' is raised (0 to
8.5 volts) and '+reset R' (clock line) is held
up (+8.5 volts).
When '+POR' drops, '+reset R' becomes active and
the printer does a power-up sequence to ensure
that the print head carrier is at the left margin,
as follows:
1.
Moves the print head carrier to the right.
2.
Stops the print head carrier after 'right margin N-O' is sensed.
3.
Moves the print head carrier to the left at
high speed.
4.
5.
Slows the print head carrier to normal speed
after 'left margin slow switch N-O' is sensed.
Stops the print head carrier after 'left margin stop switch N-O' is sensed.
When in print m9de, '-printer select' should be
negative. '+reset R' is the clock on which all
timings in the printer adapter are based. Data is
transferred to the printer register on the data path
bit lines in sockets Q and F, one character at a
time.
signals the need for the next character. The timing
for printing of the vertical columns comes from
the print magnetic emitter transducer in the
printer, 'print right emit amplified'.
Paper is indexed by the printer adapter when the
microcontroller puts a new line command into the
printer register. (It is possible that index N-O
switch failures might intermittently cause the
character N to be printed.)
Printing is p~evented, but '-index' trips printer
index magnet driver until '-index N-O' is closed in
the printer.
Feature Half Planar - Socket 1-P (for 3713)
Pin
013
012
011
010
006
005
B 13
B10
B09
Head carrier motion is maintained by pulses from
the printer magnetic emitter transducer, '-forward
feedback emit amplified' and '-reverse feedback
emit amplified'. 'Left margin stop switch N-O' and
'right margin switch N-O' stop the print head
carrier motion at the margins. 'Left margin slow
switch N-O' drops the carrier out of high speed as
it approaches the left margin.
Left margin slow switch N-O
Print right emit amplified
Left margin stop switch N-O
Right margin switch N-O
Index N-O
PR I end of forms N-C
Reverse feedback emit amplified
Forward feedback emit amplified
Cover interlock N-O
Feature Half Planar - Socket 1-R (for 3713)
Pin
When the microcontroller puts a character into the
printer register, the printer adapter starts the print
head carrier moving to the right. It will continue
moving to the right until the microcontroller puts
a new line character in the printer register or until
the right margin is reached. In the case of a new
line, the print head carrier stops and returns to the
left margin while indexing to a new line. In the
case of a stop at the right margin, the paper is not
indexed.
Signal
013
011
010
007
006
005
003
B13
B10
B09
B08
B07
B04
B03
B02
Signal
Print wire drive No.1
Print wire drive No.2
Print wire drive No.3
Print wire drive No.4
Print wire drive No.5
Print wire drive No.6
Print wire drive No.7
Stepper motor drive not A
Stepper motor drive not B
Index
Stepper motor drive A
Ground
Stepper motor drive B
+5 Vdc
-5 Vdc
Printing is accomplished by the printer adapter
selecting the vertical columns of the dot matrix in
the chara'cter generator. When the last column of
dots has been printed, the printer adapter generates
a reset to the printer register. The microcontroller
monitors the printer register and a cleared register
EC 823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 161918
~
3741 ML
14-9
MPU planar
+ POR
1-Q-B12
+ Reset R ---1-F-D10
Printer
adapter
Date 9/15n4
8/1/75
1-Q-B07
1-Q-BOG
1-Q-B05
1-Q-B04
1-Q-D04
1-Q-D02
1-Q-B03
1-F-B10
Terminators
0
1
Printer 4
register
5
,
6
Drivers
7
111 -
r--tfir
2
13
1-P-B10 - - -Forward feedback emit amplified ___+5V
1-P-B13 - - -Reverse feedback emit amplified-+5V
1-P-D12 - - -Print right emit amplified---+5V
1-P-D 11 - 1-P-D 13 - 1-P-D10 - 1-P-B09 - 1-P-D05 - 1-P-DOS - -
-Left margin stop switch N-O - - OV
-Left margin slow switch N-O-- OV
-Right margin switch N-O _ _ _ +8V
-Cover interlock N-O
OV
-Pri end of forms N-C
+8V
-Index N·O
+8V
r
-- '!
13
,'
'
;
~ 13
,'
Character
generator
1-R-B08 - - -Stepper motor drive A
+5V
1-R-B13 - - -Stepper motor drive not A - - OV
1-R-B04 - - -Stepper motor drive B
+5V
1-R-B10 - - -Stepper motor drive not 8 - - OV
1-R-B09 - - -Index
+5V
Select lines
~
--
14-10
Name
2
3
-Printer select - - 1-O-B09
2
PN 1619184
Pin
Integrators
Data Path
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
826065
3713 Printer Controller
Feature Half Planar
Pin
Name
EC 823146
Drivers
1-R-D13
1-R-D 11
1-R-D10
1-R-D07
1-R-DOS
1-R-D05
1-R-D03
- - -Print wire drive no. 1----+5V
- - -Print wire drive no. 2
+5V
- - -Print wire drive no. 3
±§.Y..
- - -Print wire drive no. 4
+5V
- - -Print wire drive no. 5
+5V
- - -Print wire drive no. 6
+5V
- - -Print wire drive no. 7
+5V
P
-----
....
V I
f
p~~age ~ tar
.s~atlc
condition
Stepper Motor Driv3 Lines Head Moving
Left to I.=light
Test Points
n
40
III IIII
-
to ms_
80
.~
Index
II
U
II
II
Sync trig
Sync;: point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
1-R-B09
10 ms/div
1-R-B09
0.5 V/div
I
....
I
I
I
••
I
~
I
.
Left Margin Stop Switch N-O
Ii
Approx 100
I:~
II
ms*lil
lb
.
~
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
..
•
Int (+) dc
1-P-D11
20 ms/div
1-P-D11
0.5 V/div
.t.
. I
I
Int (+) dc
1-R-B08
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
,
II
II
II
II
• : 1:.4
II
II
I
· : I:
II
·111
•
:
I
*Continuously running. Duration
controlled by programming.
Steppnr Motor Drive Lines Head Moving
.Right to Left
+Reset R
rii
'I
,.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
'1-F-D10
2J.ls/div
1-F-D10
0.5 V/div
Int (+) dc
1-R-B08
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
.f
Print Right Emit Amplified
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
1-P-D12
2 ms/div
1-P-D12
0.5 V/div
7 pulses per character
EC 823146
9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PrJ 161918
~
3741 ML
14-11
EC 823146
9/15n4
II
1111
1.::.1
::.I
1111
•
1111
a;;;,j
a=.I
II
II
Int (-) dc
1-R-D07
2 ms/div
1-R-D07
0.5 V/div
Feedback Emitter Amp Head Moving
Left to Right
II
II
Sync point
-P-B 13Sweep speed
Probe point
-:- Vert amp
Int (+) dc
l-P-B 10
500/1s/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
Upper: Forward feedback emitter amp
Lower: Reverse feedback emitter amp
2 ms ±80 /1s period
i1 i1 il
-- -
Feedback Emitter Amp Head Moving
Right to Left
l-P-B 10
I) ~ ~ ~ ~
Sync trig
Int (+) dc
ync
1-P-.B10
-P-B 1
point
500/1s/div
j11:i1
__.[j"I.I~fll'''IIL·
_ Sweep speed
ill ri1
iii ii1 riil Iii1
.
Probe point
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
- Vert amp
-
14-12
When the 3741 mainline power is turned on,
'+POR' is raised (0 to +8.5 volts) and '+reset R'
(clock line) is held up (+8.5 volts). '+POR'is
active for approximately 550 ms.
II
!!IIII!
~ l-P-Bl0
Sync trig
II
IIII II
PN 1619186
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
-=-
II
8/1/75
When '+POR' drops, '+reset R' becomes active.
'+reset R' is the clock on which all timings in
the printer adapter are based. Following the
3741 power-up sequence, the printer adapter
holds the printer reset ('-printer reset') until
a printer operation is selected.
II
II
11/15/74
3715 PRINTER CONTROLLER
Printing an asterisk
II
826065
Print Wire Drive No.4
0
~
825853
.....
...
t
Upper: Forward feedback emitter amp
Lower: Reverse feedback emitter amp
Whim the printer is first selected and if the print
head is not at the left margin position, the printer
adapter causes the print head to be returned to
the left margin position prior to printing.
When in print mode, '-printer select' should be
negative. Data is transferred to the printer register
from the microcontroller (MPU) on the data path
bit lines in sockets Q and F, one character at a
time.
Whnn the microcontroller puts a character to be
printed into the print register, the printer adapter
detects the presence of the character and starts
the print head carrier moving to the right. The
head will continue moving to the right until the
microcontroller puts a stop command character in
the printer register. If the microcontroller does
not issue a stop command, the print head will
crash into the right margin stop and a printer hardwar,e error will be posted (there is no right margin
switch).·
The head carrier motion is maintained by internal
timings in the adapter (derived from '+reset R')
whkh causes the print head stepper motor drive
lines to sequence.
Index N-O
-
I'.';i"""
~
Note: All scope probing should be done using
the lOX probe.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
l-P-D06
10 ms/div
l-P-D06
0.5 V/div
Printing is bi-directional and is accomplished by
the printer adapter selecting the vertical columns of
the dot matrix in the character generator. Each
character printed is maintained at the output of the
print register and the inputs to the printer adapter
and the character generator for the time required
to print the character. The timings req.uired. to
sele,ct the vertical columns from the character generator come from the printer adapter. These timings are derived from the print emitter feedback
(EM1, EM2 and EM3) from the printer. When the
last column of dots has been printed for the char-
acter, the printer adapter generates a reset to the
printer register. The microcontroller monitors the
printer register and a cleared register signals the
need for the next character.
Print overrun - indicates that the microcontroller
did not service or pass a character to the printer
adapter at print time while the adapter was in
print mode.
Featuru Half Planar - Socket 1-R (for 3715)
Paper is indexed when a line feed command in the
printer register is decoded by the printer adapter.
Printing and head motion are prevented during indexing. Indexing is accomplished by adapter
timings and the printer forms emitters, 'F EA and
FEB'.
Index failure - indicates that the index was not
completed or that a 'forms emitter A or B' is
not present from the printer.
Pin
~iignal
B02
B09
B10
B11
B13
+End of form (EOF)
-·Print wire drive 6
-·Print wire drive 4
-·Print wire drive 2
+Ready
003
005
006
007
008
010
011
012
-·Printer resElt
-·Print emitter 1 (EM1)
-·Print emitter 2 (EM2)
--Print emitter 3 (EM3)
--Print wire drive 7
--Print wire drive 5
--Print wire drive 3
--Print wire drive 1
A carriage return command from the microcontroller causes the printer adapter to terminate the
print (if printing) and the head to be returned to
the left margin. If the printer is already in the
left margin area, the command is immediately
reset by the adapter with no printer motion.
A carriage home command causes the printer
adapter to return the head to the hOl'J1e or park
position. Head movement is the same as for the
carriage return command except that the head
movement continues past left margin to the home
position. When in the home position, the head is
withdrawn from the platen. If the head is already
in the left margin area, the printer head will move
to the right until away from the left margin and
then return to the home or park position.
The following failures or error conditions are
detected by the printer adapter. When an error
condition is .detected, the printer adapter inhibits
the reset to the printer register and the microcontroller displays a printer hardware error (U error
code upper left corner and 15 status lower left
corner of display).
A printer hardware error is also displayed for a
printer adapter hardware failure. In addition to
these hardware failures, the microcontroller may
display an invalid character error (U error and 3
status) if it detects an unprintable character in the
printer register whenever the PROG NUM SHIFT
switch on the keyboard is not in the ALL CHAR
position.
Multiple device errors may occur while in print
mode. These are displayed in. the upper right hand
corner of the screen such as U4, etc. U4 error denotes a disk error and a printer error both occurred.
Such errors should be resolved on an individual
basis.
Note: The microcontroller initiates one retry for a
printer error prior to setting the error code except
for an error condition during an index and the illegal character check on Model 1 and 2 only. In
other words, if a wire check occurs during the
printing of a line, the printer stops and retries
printing the entire line. Any portion of the line
that was printed is reprinted with the remainder of
the line being printed assuming the retry was successful.
Feature Half Planar - Socket 1-P (for 3715)
Printer not ready - can be caused by a printer
wire check, no printer power.
End-of-forms - indicates the end of forms has
arrived or that there is no paper in the printer
when printing in continuous forms mode (when
feeding individual forms, the end-of-forms switch
is inactive). A carriage home is always performed
prior to displaying this error.
Pin
Signal
-Forms emitter A (FEA)
-Stepper motor drive B
-Forms drive A
-Forms drive B
-Forms emitter B (FEB)
-Left margin (LM)
-Stepper motor drive A
-Stepper motor drive
notA
010 -Stepper motor drive
notB
011 -Forms drive not A
012 -Forms drive not B
B08
B09
B10
B11
003
005
Print head not moving - indicates that there is no
007
emitter feedback from the printer when the adapter
008
is attempting to move the head.
Print head moving too fast - indicates that the
emitter feedback pulses are too close together or
that the print head is moving too fast.
EC 825853
11/15/74
826065
811/75
pr~ 161944~
3741ML
14-12.1
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
MPU planar
Name
3715
Printer Controller
Feature Half Planar
Pin
+ POR ---1·Q·B12
+ Reset R --1·F·Dl0
826065
PN 1619445
Pin
Printer
adapter
14-12.2
8/1175
Normal Level at
Power· Up {before
selecting printer)
Name
Integrator
1-R·B02 - - + End·of·forms (EOF) - - Note 3
Terminators
1·P·D06 - - -Wire check
l-R·B13 - - +Ready
+5 Vdc
1·R·D07 - - -Print emitter 3 (EM3)--- Note 4
1·R·D06 - - -Print emitter 2 (EM2) - - - Note 4
1·R·D05 - - -Print emitter 1 {EM1)---Note4
1·P·D05 - - -Left margin (LM)
Note 2
l-p·BOa - - -Forms emitter A (FE A)-- Note 1
1·P·D03 - - -Forms emitter B (FE B)-- Note 1
40 char/sec
:~
•
BO char/sec
Data Path
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Printer
register
l·Q·B07
1·Q·B06
1·Q·B05
l·Q·B04
l·Q·D04
1·Q·D02
1·Q·B03
1·F·Bl0
Drivers
1·P·D07 - - -Stepper motor drive A--+5 Vdc
l-p·DOa - - -Stepper motor drive not A-+5 Vdc
1·P·B09 - - -Stepper motor drive B--+5 Vdc
1-P-DlO - - -Stepper motor drive not B-+5 Vdc
1·R·D03 - - -Printer reset
Gnd
l-P-Bl0 - - -Forms drive A
+5 Vdc
l·P·Dll - - -Forms drive not A - - - + 5 Vdc
l-P·Bll - - -Forms drive B
+5 Vdc
1·P·D12 - .-Forms drive not B----+5 Vdc
Drivers
l-R-D12 - - -Print wire
l·R·Bll ---Print wire
l·R·Dll - - -Print wire
1·R·Bl0 - - -Print wire
l-R·Dl0 - - -Print wire
l·R·BOB - - -Print wire
l·R·DOa - - -Print wire
-Printer select -1·Q·B09
111
-
"--'----
Character
generator
(assuming
printer
position)
Select lines
drive no.
drive no.
drive no.
drive no.
drive no.
drive no.
drive no.
1---+5 Vdc
2---+5 Vdc
3 - - - +5 Vdc
4---+5 Vdc
5---+5 Vdc
6---+5 Vdc
7---+5 Vdc
Note 1: One or both signals may be at either
+5 Vdc or Gnd depending on the position of
the printer platen. Lines will switch if the
platen is turned.
Note 2: The signal will be at either +5 Vdc
or Gnd depending on the position of the
printer's head. If head is all the way to the
left, the signal will be Gnd. If head is anywhere to the right, the signal will be +5 Vdc.
J
Note 3: The signal will be at +5 Vdc is there
are no forms in the printer and the paper release lever is in the forward position on the
printer. Otherwise, the signal will be at Gnd.
L
~
rrn
E
Ll1.l
__ tp1D 2
2,
,
..
:
'13
'~~
13
...
Note 4: These signals are dependent upon
the position of the printer head. All may be
at +5 Vdc or one and only one may be at
Gnd. Signal levels vary with head positions
and from printer to printer.
p
Q
~~~~_~
~~-D
B
2
13
Test Points
+Reset R
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
II,
I
tI
tii
IJ
It
II
Int (+) dc
1-F-D10
2/lS/div
1-F-D10
0.5 V/div
Left Margin
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
I
II
-I
Continuously running in CE-4
diagnostic mode.
·I.
~,
II
U~
~
IIII
II
·I.
II
II
III1
I
I':
- .....-_
1
~='I
IJ
•
I ••
. I.
1111
U~
lIJ
•
II II
II
~
Int (+) dc
1-P-D05
20 ms/div
1-P-D05
0.5 V/div
II
•
I ••
·I.
Print Emitters
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe points
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
1-R-D05
2 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
Continuously running in forward print
or CE-3 at 40 char/sec.
Print Emitters
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
1-R-D05
2 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
Continuously running in reverse print
on CE-3 at 40 char/sec.
EC 825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
811/75
m
~
PI\! 161944·
3741 ML
14-12.3
EC
825853
Date 11/15174
826065
8/1175
Print Emitters
Sync trig
,Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
1-R-D05
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.S V/div
Continuously running in forward print
or CE-3 at 80 char/sec.
Print Emitters
III
II
III
III
1-R-D05
•
III
I
I
~~
ri
..
I
II
II
II
II
· I.:
• I
II
"I
II
·I.
·:
II
- II
·I.
II
II
I ••
...
II
-
•
• I I
II
II
C1
II
• : I·
II
II
U~~
• I
• I
Int (+) dc
1-R-DOS
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.S V/div
Continuously running in reverse print
or CE-3 at 80 char/sec.
Stepper Motor Drive Lines
Head moving left to right
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
1-P-D07
2 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.S V/div
Up to speed - varies during start and
stop ramp.
Stepper Motor Drive Lines
Head moving right to left
I
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep s~eed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) dc
1-P-D07
2 ms/div
See trace drawing
O.S V/div
I:
I
Up to speed - varies during start and
stop ramp.
I?N 1619447
14-12.4
Print Wire Drive 4
II
III
II
• :
III
I
Int (+) dc
1-R-B10
2 ms/div
1-R-B10
0.5 V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
:
"
=
~
II
II
II
II
II
Ir
Print Wire Drive 4
ii
II
i=:
!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!
-
=
I
II
~I II
II
II
01111
.!!!!III
•
:
I
~
Printing an H at 80 char/sec.
=
1=
!!!!!!!!
I
II
II
E:
I
Int (+) dc
1-R-B10
1 ms/div
1-R-B10
0.5 V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
==11
;;;;;;
'===!!!"!
!'!
Printing an H at 40 char/sec.
II
I
=
='= II
Forms Emitter Feedback
II
• : I :
• I I
II
II
II
II
II
II
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
1-P-B08
1 ms/div
See trace drawi ng
0.5 V/div
Continuously running in CE-5
diagnostic mode.
=
Forms Emitter Drive Lines
iiii--
II
II
II
II
II
• :
II
II
II
II
IL-. I
• I
II
II
,--
I
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
1-P-B10
1 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.5 V/div
Continuously running in CE-5
diagnostic mode.
• I
. EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
pr~
161944
~
3741 ML
14-12.5
Proof Keyboard Feature
The proof keyboard feature which can be installed
on a 3741 differs from a standard data entry keyboard by a rearrangement of the numeric keys.
Under alpha shift, there is no change in keyboard
function. Under numeric shift, the slash key functions as the space bar, and the space bar functions
as the 0 (zero) key. Also, the 1,2;· and 3 keys on
the data entry keyboard are interchanged with
the 7, 8, and 9 keys on the proDf keyboard, respectively. The 4, 5, and 6 keys remain unchanged.
The outputs of these keys in numeric sh ift mode
are translated by the MPU under ROS feature control. If a machine with this feature is operated with
the ROS Feature card removed from sockets, the
keyboard function will revert to that of the standard data entry configuration.
Katakana Feature
The Katakana feature provides the ability of
entering the Katakana EBCDIC code onto the
disk. The keyboard provides input of 64
Katakana characters plus 63 domestic characters.
The Katakana characters are generated by the
Katakana shift and the Katakana symbol functions.
Any time the station is in Katakana shift
(programmed for Katakana shift, the KATAKANA SHIFT switch ON, or the KANA SHIFT
key pressed) the Katakana shift can be overridden
with the ALPHA SHIFT, NUM SHIFT, or KANA
SYMB shift key. The overriding shift key will
define the character or function that will be
entered into the station when a character key or
function key is pressed.
When the station is in Katakana shift, the following function keys require that the ALPHA SHI FT
or N UM SH IFT key be used with that key to .
activate the function; otherwise the corresponding
Katakana character will be entered into the station:
HEX, FLO COR, DlW, CHAR ADV, REC
ADV, FLO ADV, SEL PRG, SKIP, RT ADJ,
and CHR BKS.
EC 825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
I'N 1619449
14-12.6
BSCA THEORY
Table of Contents
Introduction . . .
BSCA Controller Operation'
Transmit Mode (T or P)
Transmit/Receive (B or D)
Receive Mode (R)
Communications Display Mode
Indicators . . . . .
Communications Errors
BSCA Error Logout. • •
Data Flow. . . . . . . .
BSCA Line Control Characters .
14-20
14·21
14-23
14·24
14·26
Line Control Sequence
Operations. . . .
Status Message
Communications Procedure •
Packaging
Modem . . • . • • • •
14-32
14-39
14·42
14-43
14·43
•
Communications Features
Synchronous Clock • • . . • • .
Terminal Identification
Keylock
• • • . . . •
Operator I D Reader. . .
EIA Interface Standard
•••••
Modem and LCA Interface
1200 bps Line Adapter. . .
General. . . . . .
Interface - Non-switched Line
Interface - Switched Line
Interface from 3741 BSCA to 1200
bps Line Adapter
Interface from 1200 bps Line
Adapter to Coupler. . •
Operation ~nd Configuration •
Non·switched Line . .
... .
Switched Li ne
Call Sequence. . . . .
WT Public Switched Network (PSN)
Expanded Communications (EBSCA)
Feature. . . . . . . • •
Operation . . . . . . . •
Transmit Mode (T or P) (Unblocked
Data)
. . . . . . .
Blocked Transmit Mode
14·14
14-14
14-15
14-16
14-19
Transmit/Receive Mode
Receive Mode. • •
Inquiry Mode. • .
Reset Key • • . . • . .
EBSCA CE Test Mode . • • • .
EBSCA Error Logout •
EBSCA Line Control Sequences.
Data Flow . • .
Modem Cable. . . • . • • • .
EBSCA Packaging • • • . • . .
3741 Model 2 Features with EBSCA .
Synchronous Clock. . • • • •
Terminal Identification
• . . • .
•
Keylock
Operator ID Card Reader
Multipoint Feature • . •
14·71
14-71
14-72
14-72
14-72
14-73
14-74
14-75
14-75
14-78
14-79
14-79
14-79
14-79
14-79
14-80
14-44
14·44
14-44
14-44
14·46
14-48
14·50
14·50
14·52
14·54
14-56
14·57
14·58
14-58
14·62
14·66
14·67
14·68
14-68
r
14-70
14-71
EC '823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15174
11/15174
8/1175
PN
16191(~
3741 ML
14-13
INTRODUCTION
The Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter
(BSCA) allows the machine to function as a point
to point terminal. The basic BSCA function allows data transmission using EBCDIC directly as
the communications line code. Operation is halfduplex over private line, common carrier leased
line, or a common carrier switched network. The
mode of transmission is synchronous, serial-bY-bit,
and serial-by-character.
BSCA Controller Operation
Perform all disk functions such as read or
write, write checking or checking, or updating information on the index track.
2.
Transfer data between the disk unit and the
BSCA controller. The transfer in transmit
mode is from the disk unit to the buffer, to
the BSCA controller data register, to the modem. In receive modp the flow is reversed.
3.
Display status, error codes and CPU 10 information for review by the operator. The
five communication modes are:
T
P
R
B
0
to transmit only
to transmit hex data
to receive data only
to transmit data, auto-turn around
and receive data
to transmit hex data, auto-turn
around and receive
The BSCA controller also performs the serializing/deserializing function on the data
transmitted or received.
An operator can select communications mode from
update or index modes only. Upon selection of the
communications mode from index mode, the data
set label will be checked for valid extents (BOE,
EOE, EOD) and for HOR1. If these conditions
are met, the BSCA controller will perform the
wrap test. This test verifies that data can be passed
826065
Date 9115174
,8/1/75
through the BSCA controller from the data register
up to the modem cable drivers and back to the
BSCA data register. If this test fails, a W or WI will
be posted on the display in the mode indicator positions.
If no error exists, the BSCA controller will then
check several features in the following order:
1.
If the key lock is present, it must be unlocked.
2.
If terminal 10 is present, the terminal 10 is
read and stored in the program 9 buffer.
3.
If terminal lOis present, the cursor must be
at position 16 or less._ All positions below
the cursor are assumed to be the CPU 10 and
are transferred to the buffer. The CPU 10
must be entered before communications
mode is selected and must be 15 characters
or less. If no CPU lOis entered, the BSCA
controller.will accept any 10 from the Remote end.
When in communications mode the BSCA controller makes use of the MPUmicrocontroller, the
disk unit controll~r, and the microcontroller/
buffer interface and the display unit controller to:
1.
EC 823146
4.
The second disk feature will be set to record
00007 on the index track.
If a failure occurs in steps one or three, an H error
is posted. Step 4 could result in posting disk
errors.
The record at the current address position of disk
one is reread and a C for communications is posted
as the mode indicator in the status line of the
display (position 38).
On switched lines and if the operator will be dialing the call, the M key must then be pressed. The
T, P, R, B or 0 key must then be pressed to select
the function desired. Pressing the M key must be
omitted if the 3741 will be answering a call, or if
on leased lines.
On switched lines, pressing the M key indicates to
the BSCA controller that it is calling and therefore will transmit a line bid first, regardless of the
mode. Not pressing the M key tells the BSCA controller to wait for a line bid. On non-switched
(leased) lines the M key is not required because
the station in transmit mode will transmit a line
bid first.
14-14
PN 1619188
The letter key pressed will replace the C in the
status line. If the 10 reader is installed, a B
will be posted on the status line in position 39.
The badge can then be inserted and read into the
buffer or the R EC ADV key can be pressed to
skip the 10 reader functions as in 3741 to 3741
communications.
The BSCA controller then checks the mode strap.
It can be in DTR (data terminal ready) or CDSTL
(connect data set to line) mode. The DTR mode is
generally used for switch lines and the CDSTL
generally for leased line communications.
In CDSTL mode, the BSCA controller then looks
for DSR (data set ready) or the ring indicator (RI)
to come up.
The controller then will look for
a line bid (ENQ), send a line bid if the M key has
been pressed, or send line bid if in transmit mode
on a leased line. If the BSCA controller detects
that the send answertone strap is on, the first transmission is three seconds of space (logical 0). The
terminal 10 and CPU 10 codes are exchanged with
the original line bids and responses.
II
In DTR mode the BSCA controller will check for
data set ready(DSR) being off, then it will bring
data terminal ready' (DTR) up.
The operator
will then place the call if this is the call ing station.
After the data set button on the modem is pressed
causing DSR to come on, the controller will make
or wait for a line bid and exchange 10 codes. From
this point on, CDSTL and OTR operation is identical and is dependent on the operator selected
mode, transmit or receive.
D
In the T, B, 0 or P transmit modes, the 10 reader
code will be transmitted followed by data records.
If communications mode was selected from update
mode, the record at the current address and all records from this one to the end of the data set will
be transmitted. If this mode was selected from index mode, the current'label wiil be checked to see
that the bypass data set position (position 41) does
not contain a B, before the data set is transmitted.
If a B is found, the BSCA controller causes a search
for another data set to be transmitted.
Transmit Mode (T or P)
Transmit Mod~ (T) - - ' - - - - - - - _
The records to be sent are read from the disk into
the previous record or hold buffers. A record is
read into one of these buffers, the read of the next
record into the other buffer is then initiated.
Transmit of the first record then starts. Reading of
records is controlled by the disk unit controller and
the microcontroller/buffer interface while the transmitting of records is under control of the BSCA
controller and the microcontroller/buffer inter-·
face. Therefore, the reading and transmitting of
records takes place simultaneously. Data is transmitted one record at a time, serial by bit, serial by
byte. A positive response from the receiving end
will initiate the transmitting of the next record
and the reading of the following record.
o Transmit Transparent Mode (P) - - - - - - I
Transmission Incomplete (TI)---------1
~
~
Transm_it----------__
Transmit Transparent Incomplete (PI )-----1
Transmission Completed (TT)------...........
Transmit Transparent Completed (PT)-----f
001
A A
!;!DR1
Data is transferred from the previous or hold buf.fer one byte at a time to the data register on the
BSCA controller and from the data register it is
transferred serially by bit to the transmit line.
Transmitting continues until the last record of the
data set is sent. At this time, the disk is returned
to the index track to look for another data set to
,transmit. All data sets which contain an HDR1
and do not contain a B in the bypass data set position of the label and which have a label record
number higher than the one just transmitted, will
be transmitted. When the second disk feature is
installed, any HDR1 data set on that disk which
does not contain the B in the bypass position of
the label will also be transmitted.
Transmit mode was selected from update mode.
Operator positions drive
to desired record.
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
If an invalid label is found, which is not a bypass
data set, communications will be terminated with
the appropriate error code displayed.
When there are no more data sets to be transmitted, the BSCA controller will send the end of
transmissions sequence (EDT) and post a T in
position 39 of the status line.
A null record is always transmitted between data
sets and before the EDT sequence. If a data set is
continued on disk 2, the first valid data set on disk
2 is sent as a continuation of this data set, and
then transmits any other valid data sets on disk 2.
If position 45 of the data set label contains a C
and the second disk feature is not installed, or the
second disk is not ready, transmission wi II terminate
and a D error is posted.
Ye:;
When a data set is continued
from disk 1 to disk 2. there
will be a C in position 45 of
the data set label on disk 1
and an L in position 45 of
the first data set label used
on disk 2
Machine goes to clisk 2 and
finishes transmitting data
set. Then transmits any
other val id data s Jts on
disk 2.
Machine goes to disk 2
and transmits all valid
data sets.
If position 45 of data set
label contains a C and the
second disk feature is not
installed. or the second
disk is not ready. transmission will terminate and
a 0 error is posted.
Transmission complete
Machine will display T
status and mode it transmitted in T or P.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
pr~
·161918!
~
3741 ML
·14-15
EC 823146
826065
Date 9115n4
8/1/75
PN 1619190
~
I
14-16
Transmit/Receive (B or D)
(D)
Transmit Transparent/Receive Mode
If the mode had been B or D, the transmit sequence is identical to the T or P mode. However,
when a" data sets have been transmitted, the
BSCA controller causes the disk to be positioned
on the index track at the first valid data set label
after the label corresponding to the last data set
transmitted. This wi" become the label of the
first data set received. The controller wi" wait 20
seconds for a line bid. If none is received, a C error
wi" be posted on the display and a line disconnect
will be made. The controller wi" then wait for a
call, which will put the controller into a received
Transmit/Receive
mode.
Transmit/receive (T/R)
mode, or transmit·
transparent/receive
(TT/R) mode selected
D
Transmit/Receive Mode
(B)
f)
Transmit Incomplete
(BI)
(01)
~
Transmit Completed
(BT)
(OT)
9
Reception Incomplete
(BJ)
(OJ)
~
Reception Completed
(BC)
DC
~
D
001
A A
!::!.DRl
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
T /R mode was sel·
lected from update mode.
Operator positions drive
to desired record.
Yes
When a data set is continued
from disk 1 to disk 2, there
will be a C in position 45 of
the data set label on disk 1
and an L in position 45 of
the first data set label used
on disk 2.
If position 45 of data set
label contains a C and the
second disk feature is not
installed, or the second
disk is not ready, trans·
mission will terminate and
a 0 error is posted.
Yes
Go to disk 2 and
finish transmitting
that data set•
~________
N_o<
.,/
.,/
./
./'
Reception incomplete.
Machine will display J
status, 0 error, and
mode it was in; R, T/R,
orTT/R.
~
~_Y_es______~
This page intentionally left blank.
EC 823146
9/15/74
825853
826065
'11/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619191~
14-17
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
'PN 1619192
8/1175
I
14-18
~. Receive Mode (R)--------.
6
Reception Incomplete (RJ) - - - . 0 4
(3
Reception Completed (RC) --..........j
No
Receive mode was selected from update mode_
Operator positions drive
to desired record.
Machine will select first
valid data set label. Then
drive will be positioned
to BOE of that data set.
Update data set label by
putting an L in position
45. (data from another
diskette ended on this
diskette).
001
tiDR1
Update data set label:
EOD=CDA(current disk
address).
EOE-EOD - 1
Character length = the
length of first record
received. Update BOE
by number of records
received.
Reception complete.
Machine will display:
C status and reception
mode itwas in;R,T/R,
or TT/R.
Update data set label by
putting C in position 45
(data set is continued
on another diskette)
No
Start receiving on
drive 2 at 01001
Reception incomplete
Machine will display J
status, 0 error, and
mode it was in;R,T/R,
or TT/R.
Locate next valid data
set label. Update its BOE
to the EOE + 1 of the
data set previously received.(The data received will be written in
the first record following the EOE of the last
data set received).
A A
00008
80 01001
Receive Mode (R)
On switched line, in receive mode, the controller
will wait 20 seconds for data. If none is received,
a C error is posted on the display and a line disconnect will be made. If a call is then received,
the BSCA controller goes back into the receive
mode.
On non-switched line, the BSCA controller will
continuously monitor the line. Data is received
serial by bit, serial by character in one-record
blocks. It is assembled in the BSCA controller
data register and transferred one byte at a time
to the previous record or hold buffers. When a
complete record is assembled in one of these
buffers, the fo'llowing sequence takes place:
1.
Start to write the record on disk.
2.
Bring up RTS and wait for clear to send
signal, to send response.
3.
Send sync characters until write operation is
completed.
4.
Start write check operation.
5.
Send acknowledgment on the line.
6.
Wait for or receive the next record into the
other buffer (hold or previous).
In this way the write operation overlaps the clear
to send delay and the write check operation overlaps receive of the next record. At the end of a
data set, a null record will be received, if a second
data set is to be received. The 3741 will terminate
the receive mode if a null data set is followed by
EOT sequence or if an EOT sequence follows the
data set immediately (no null record received).
After a complete data set has been received, the
controller will cause the data set label to be updated in several positions. These are record length,
end of extent, end of data, and beginning of extent. The record length will equal the length of the
records received. EOE will be the address of the
last record written. EOD is one greater than EOE.
BOE is the location of the first record in the data
'set. BOE is unchanged on the first data set received if the operator selected receive mode. If any
of the transmit modes had been utilized or more
than one data set is received, BOE is set to one
record address greater than the EOE of the last
data set transmitted or received.
If another data set is to be received, the BSCA
controller searches for the next valid data set label.
It will internally establish a BOE which is equal
to EOE plus one (or EOD) of the data set just received and then position the disk to receive the
next data set. Disk 2, if installed, appears as an
extension of disk 1. If a data set overflows from
disk 1 to disk 2, a C is placed in position 45
(multivolume indicator) of the data set label on
disk 1. The rest of the data set will be received on
disk 2 and an L will be placed·in position 45 of
the first label used on disk 2. If a record is written
in position 73026 on disk 1, and this is not the
last record of the data set, the next record will be
written on disk 2 record 01001. If in this case the
second disk feature is not installed or the second
disk is not ina ready state (no diskette inserted,
etc.), a D error is posted, communications will be
terminated, and a J will be posted in position 39 of
the status line.
Any error or operator intervention will cause the
3741 BSCA controller to go to a disconnect sequence in which the error code is posted on the
display and is sent to the other station as part of
the error message.
The RESET key can be used to terminate communications mode at any time. If data has transferred, an S error will be posted. The controller
will then. proceed with the normal error disconnect
sequence and take the machine out of communications mode. If the RESET key is pressed twice or
is pressed following an error, the 3741 will leave
communications mode immediately.
EC
823146
626065
PI\I
161919::~
3741 ML
14-19
EC 823146
9/15/74
Communications Display Mode Indicators
Key
A mode indicator is displayed in positions 37 and
38 of the status line. The following shows the key
required to select the mode, the mode displayed,
and the meaning:
Key
K
K
KB
KT
KJ
COMM
T
P
C
T
TB
TI
IT
P
PB
PI
R
B
\
PT
R
RC
RJ
B
BB
BT
BI
\
BJ
"'\
D
BC
D
DB
DI
DT
DJ
J
DC
J
JB
JI
JT
Communication
Transmit
Read Operator ID (Transmit)
Transmit Incomplete
Transmit Complete
Transmit Transparent Text
Read Operator ID (Transmit
Transparent)
Transmit Transparent Incomplete
Transmit Transpar.ent Complete
Receive Mode
Receive Complete
Receive Incomplete
Transmit/Receive (T/R)
Read Operator ID (T/R)
Transmit Portion of T/R
Complete
Transmit Portion of T/R
Incomplete
Receive Portion of T/R
Incomplete
T/R Complete
Transmit Transparent/Receive (TTfR)
Read Operator ID (TTfR)
Transmit Portion of TTfR
Incomplete
Transmit Portion of TTfR
Complete
Receive Portion of TTfR
Incomplete
IT/R Complete
Transmit Blocked Records
(TBR)
Read Operator ID (TBR)
Transmit Blocked Records
Incomplete
Transmit Blocked Records
Complete
KC
I
IB
IT
II
IC
IJ
%
%C
%T
0/0.1
%1
W
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
Mode
Displayed Meaning
KI
Mode.
Displayed Meaning
825853
W
WI
WC
TBR/Receive (TBR/R)
Read Operator ID (TBR/R)
Transmit Portion of TBR/R
Complete
Transmit Portion of TB R/R
Incomplete
Receive Portion of TBR/R
Incomplete
Receive Portion of TBR/R
Complete
Inquiry (I)
Read Operator ID-(I)
Transmission of Inquiry
Message-Complete
Transmission of Inquiry
Message-Incomplete
Receive Inquiry Response
Complete.
Receive Inquiry Responses
Incomplete
Online Test Mode
Online Test Complete
Online Test Complete
(Transmit)
Online Test Incomplete
(Receive Portion)
Online Test Incomplete
(Transmit Portion)
Wrap Test
Wrap Test Incomplete
Wrap Test Complete
If the mode indicates an incompiete operation,
check the error indicator in position 7. See
Symptom Index, Error Indicators, 1-2. J, K,
and I modes will occur only in Expanded
Communications.
PN 1619194
14-20
Communications Errors
Code
Description
Cause
Operating Procedu:re
C
BSCA line check
- There is no activity on the communications line
for 20 seconds.
-
o
BSCA disk fu II
Notu the displaved address. Call remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point
on diskette. Enter communications mode.
Pre~;s RESET. Load a new diskette. Enter C
mode. Call remote end to re-establish linkup.
H
BSCA setup error
-
Pre:;s RESET. Use correct setup procedure.
-
Note the displayed address. Call remote end
to r:l-establish linkup. Establish start point
on diskette. Enter communications mode.
-
Note the displaye~ address. Call remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point
on diskette. Enter communications mode.
Disk overflows in receive mode.
Disk index track overflows.
No valid index.
No disk 2.
Machine not in X or U mode before C mode.
Cursor is past position 16 when entering C mode.
Machine at bad index when entering C mode.
Key lock not turned on.
The modem 'data set ready' line is down.
BSCA data set not ready
Q
BSCA message aborted
R
BSCA remote abort
Remote end terminates communications
prematurely by sending EOT or disconnect.
Note the displayed address. Call remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point
on diskette. Enter communications mode.
Operator initiated
termination - BSCA
Pressed RESET while the machine was transmitting a status message.
Preis RESET. Continue.
T
BSCA transparency error
Detected a data link control character in the
data to transmit.
Note the displayed address. Press RESET.
Correct the data on the diskette. Establish
the start point on the diskette. Enter communications mode. Call remote end to establish
linkup.
u
BSCA received data block
-
Received a data block when in transmit mode.
Press RESET. Place the machine in receive
mcde if remote end intents to transmit data.
v
BSCA received line bid
-
Remote end re-established communications
when local end posts complete or incomplete
status.
Note the displayed address. Call remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point
on diskette. Enter communications mode.
w
BSCA length error
Remote end sends record length with zero
characters or greater than 128 characters or a
length different from the previous record sent.
Nc,te the displayed address. Call remote end
to re-establish linkup. Establish start point on
diskette. EntE!r communications mode.
x
BSCA negative bid response
Received a negative response or disconnect
sequence as a response to a transmitted line bid.
s
-
Received four consecutive negative responses
to the same data record.
EC 823146
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
-
Note the displayed address. Call remote end to
re·establish lir.kup. Establish start point on
di!;kette. Enter communications mode.
PN
16191!~
3741 ML
14-21
EC
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
Error Code
The right position shows disk errors only; the left
position shows all other errors~
Co munications mode
CRa
DSR CTS
NAK
3SEC
PN 1619196
14-22
BSCA Error Logout
Mode depends on operation
.............
When in T, P, B,D, or R mqde, the bottom
line on the display shows the follow ing:
Position
001
A
0
A
01~
Timing Sequence - DTR Mode
DTR ____m.. .m·. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
DSR
I'
RTS ___________. . . . . . . . . . . .
Meaning
~
* 1
* 4
* 7
*10
**14' 16
**19' 21
**24' 26
**29' 31
* Note:
** Note:
Data terminal ready.
Data set ready
Request to sen d.
Clear to send.
CRC checks in receive.
NAKs received in transmit.
Two-second ti me-outs.
Three-second tim e-outs.
1
1
J
0
o
001
004 000 001
I
J
__
CTS __________~. . . . . . . . . . . .___
TO
Timing Sequence - CDSTL Mode
DSR1 .____
____~
J __--------------------DTH . ___---1•• 1. . . . ._ _ _ _ _ _ __
1 indicates on; a indicates off.
three-position decimal counts.
RTS
The logout is displayed on the bottom line of the
display during BSCA operation.
Whenever the BSCA controller turns on the data
terminal ready interface line (1-N-D07), a 1 is
displayed in position 1. When it turns the line
off, a 0 is displayed. Likewise, when it turns on
request to send (1-N-B 13) a 1 displays in position
7. When it turns the line off, a 0 is displayed.
When the BSCA controller detects the data set
ready (1-N-D12) interface line is on from the
modem, a 1 displays in position 4. When data
set ready is off, a 0 displays. Likewise, if clear
to send (1-N-B1 0) is on, a 1 is displayed in
position 10. Whenever the line goes off, a 0
is displayed.
During receive operations, a running count is
maintained of all eRC checks, where transmitted
block check characters (BCC) do not match those
calculated by the BSCA controller. This count is
displayed in positions 14, 15, and 16. This is
an indication of the number of transmission blocks
received with errors that required retransmission.
During communications, a count is maintained of
2-second time-outs in positions 24, 25, and 26.
These time-outs may occur during unusually long
disk operations such as a long seek. During receive
operations, this would indicate the number of
WACKs (wait acknowledgment) sent. In transmit
mode, it would indicate the number of TTDs sent.
CTS
TO
1 - DSR may be permanently on
(typi,:al of non-switched line modems)
OR
RI
Also during communications a count of 3-second
time-outs is displayed in positions 29,30, and 31.
These time-outs occur whenever there is a 3second period of inactivity on the communication
line. During a 20-second disconnect time-out
on switched lines, this counter is incremented
seven times.
DTR ___~. .m·. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
DSR ___~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RTS
CTS
TO
All four counters are initialized to 000 when communications mode is entered.
*When the user complains of excessive time to
receive or transmit, the 2-second time-out count
can be observed to verify the complaint. If there
are excessive 2-second time-outs, this may be an
indication of a problem in the disk unit or planar.
During a transmit mode, a count of NAKs (negative acknowledgments) that are received is
displayed in positions 19,20, and 21. These NAKs
have been received from the remote station as a
result of data blocks received in error or TTDs
(temporary text delays).
EC
823146
826065
9/15/74
8/1/75
PN
16191!~
3741 ML
14-23
EC
'823146
826065
Date ,9/15n4
811n5
PN 1619198
Socket 2-0
DATA FLOW
The data path and register control lines extend
from the MPU planar to the feature half planar via
crossover connectors and are terminated at a register. All data transfer between the BSCA controller and MPU planar is via this data path and register. The BSCA adapter interfaces to the register
and also re"'quires clOCk signals from the MPU
planar. The BSCA adapter performs the serializedeserialize function, timing, and control functions
necessary to interface to the modem. The EIA
drivers and receivers convert BSCA adapter logic
levels to the required E IA levels.,
Detail Cross Connectors to MPU Planar
Most data path and register control lines are
routed via socket Q with a few in socket F.
When in communications mode, '-BSCA select'
should be negative (down leve!), and '-printer
select' should be positive. Data is transferred via
the data path bits.
m
'-Select 4', 'reg select decode 0' and '1', and '-reg
gate control 0' and '1' control gating into the data
register. '-Reg gate control 0'11 and '1' II are
clocks from the MPU.
The BSCA controller us.es '-gate out' &J , '-gate
B'm and '+reset A'
to generate timings in
sync with the microcontroller.
I
The BSCA controller also uses '-1 ms clock' and
'+reset CS counter' to generate timings. '-1 ms
clock' is a square wave with a 1-millisecond
period. '+ Reset CS counter' is a 60-millisecond
positive pulse that repeats every 24 milliseconds
(approximately) .
'+Speed select switch' will always be positive for
high baud rate unless:
1.
Speed select jumper is at low speed, or;
2.
BAUD SELECT switch is set at 600 bps
(World Trade Only).
Modem Cable
Pin
Signal
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
-12 volts
I
II
Socket 1-N
D
Pin
011
009
007
B13
B11
B10
B08
B07
B06
B05
+Reset CS counter
+5 volts
Ground
+24 volts
-Reg gate control 1.11
-Bit 7 data path II
-5 volts
+8.5 volts
-5 volts
+Reset R
Signal
B07
B08
B09
810
811
812
813
002
003
004
005
006
Signal ground (SG) . . . (From 3741)
+ Serial clock receive (SCR) . (To 3741)
+ Seria I clock transmit (SCT) . (To 3741 )
+ Clear to send (CTS) . . . (To 3741)
- Receive data (RO). . . . (To 3741)
- Transmit data (TO) . . (From 3741)
+ Request to send (RTS) . (From 3741)
+12 Vdc. . . . . . . (From 3741)
+12 Vdc.
. (From 3741)
-12 Vdc. .
. . (From 3741)
-12Vdc. . . . . . . (From 3741)
+ .Transmit signal element
(SCTE) . . . . . . . (From 3741)
007 + Data terminal ready
(OTR) . . . . . . . (From 3741)
008 , + Data signal rate select
(OSRS) . . . . . . . (From 3741)
010 +Carrierdetect(CO)
. (To 3741)
011 + Ring Indic;:ator (R I)
. (To 3741 )
012 + Data set ready (OSR). . . (To 3741)
Socket 2-F
Signal
Ii
This modem cable interfaces to the BSCA at 1-N.
This interface conforms to EIA-RS-232. For signal
Ii~es, '-trans~it data' and '-receive data', a negative voltage IS a logic 1 or mark condition. A positive voltage is a logic 0 or space. For all other lines
p~sitive voltage indicates on, negative voltage in- '
dlcates off. Positive levels may be +3 to +25 volts.
Negative levels may be -3 to -25 volts.
-Bit 6 data path
-Bit 3 data path
-Bit 2 data path
-Bit 1 data path
-Bit 0 data path
-Gate B
-Printer select
+Speed select switch
-BSCA select
+System reset (PO R
-Reg gate control 0
-Bit 5 data path II
+12 volts
-Bit 4 data path II
-Gate out
-1 ms clock
-Ground
None
+Reg select decode 0
None
+Reg select decode 1
+Reset A
-Select 4
Pin
14-24
ID Reader Cable Position------Keylock Cable Position - - - _
I
I
I
L---
I 0000 0
100
N
I
_-...I
E
P
F
Q
G
R
All logic levels in sockets Q and F, are +8.5 volts
except '+speed select switch' which is +5 volts.
H
Feature Half Planar Socket Location
B!;CA Contro lIer
,'".
~:~:to~t
Clocks
Gate B
1 ms clock
Reset CS cntr
1
m
To
MPU
Planar
.
EIA
drivers
Modem
Register
Data path bits 0-7
BSCA select
Register
control
lines
~~:~:~e
EIA
ld:U:li1[~~~:mIIID-=""receivers
control 0
Reg gate control 1 1-11-..
1-11--..
Reg sel decode 0
Reg sel decode 1
1
Jumpers
ID
Sync
clock
card
reader
BSCA
features
Keylock
~ard
IDJ
reader
--- ---
_______________________1_6P
__S______________________~11
Machine cycle
I···
m-Gate out
:
.1 BIt.
• J
i
ID -Gate B
II
II
II
+Reset A
-Reg gate
control 0
-Reg gate
cantrall
•
1.1
•
•
EC
823146
Date 9/15/.74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619H~
3741 ML
14-25
EC
BSCA LINE CONTROL CHARACTERS
Dr: 3cription
Mnemonic
Hex
Start of heading!
Start of text
Intermediate block
character
End of transmission
block
End of text
Enquiry
Negative acknowledge
End of transmission
Synchronous Idle
Data link escape
Even acknowledge
Odd acknowledge
Wait before transmit
Disconnect
Reverse interrupt2
Temporary text delay
Leading pad
Trailing pad
SOH
STX
ITB
01
02
1F
ETB
26
ETX
ENO
NAK
EOT
SYN
DLE
ACKO
ACK 1
WACK
DISC
RVI
TTD
PAD
PAD
03
20
3D
37
32
10
10, 70
10,61
10,6B
10,37
10,7C
02,2D
AA
FF
~,
! 3741 treats SOH the same as STX.
2
RVI is recognized as a positive acknowledgement by the 3741, however it wi II not
relinquish the line.
3
In,transparent mode, STX, ITB, ETX, ETB,
SYN, ENO, TTD, and DLE are preceded by
DLE.
Leading PAD (Hex AA)
I
-rhree PAD characters are sent preceding an initial
bit sync pattern to ensure that the receiving
station is ready to receive by the time the first
SYN character is sent.
Trailing PAD (Hex FF)
In order to ensure that the last meaningful bits in a
transmission are sent properly by the data set,
one trailing PAD character will be sent as the last
character in the transmission. The 3741 will not
turn request-to-send off until the entire PAD
character has been transferred to the modem.
This provides one character time for the modem·
to complete sending the preceding meaningful
characters before its transmitter can turn off.
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619200
14-26
SYN-Synchronous Idle (Hex 32)
SOH-Start of Heading (Hex 01)
This character is used to establish and maintain
synchronization between the stations on the data
link when using'synchronous transmission. Two
continuous SYNs are used to establish character
synchronism (character phase pattern=SYN
SYN=O). In BSCA, two SYN characters are sent
in the data stream every 64 characters to maintain
synchronization throughout the transmission. In
EBSCA, two SYNs characters are sent every 82
characters to maintain synchronization.
In general, this character precedes a block of
heading characters and a heading consists of
auxiliary information (such as routing and
priority) necessary for the receiving station to
process the text portion of the message. However,
it is only sent by the 3741 preced ing operator 10
data and status message. It is treated as an STX
by a receiving 3741. _
STX-Start of Text (Hex 02)
A secondary use for the SYN character is as a
time fill in the transmitted data stream when
other data or control characters are not available.
The message stream must be continuous per
transmission in synchronous transmission method.
Sync Pattern
SYN SYN
" , ,,
The STX is also used to terminate a block of
heading data (see example below).
Heading
SOH (Heading Data)
I
,
This character precedes a block of text data.
I
I
,I
S
0 .0
H
Heading
data
S
T
X
Text
data
Text
STX (Text Data)
NAK-Negative Acknowledgement (Hex 3D)
ETX-End of Text (He:< 03)
The NAK reply from a receiving station indicates
that the previous message block was received in
error (BCCs did not check) and the receiver is
ready to accept a retransmission of the erroneous
message block.
The ETX is identical to the ETB, in that it
terminates a block of characters started with STX
or SOH. ETX requires the receiving station to
reply to the transmitted data and is followed in
the transmission data stream by the BGC just as
the ETB was. ETX is normally used, v/hen
multiple blocks of data are to be transmitted, to
identify the last block of data. (See e,~amples
below.)
NAK is also used as a negative (not ready) reply
to station selection on a multipoint data link or to
a line bid on a point-to-point data link.
A NAK is a normal response to TTD (temporary
text delay).
ETB-End of Transmission Block (Hex 26)
In general, the ETB character identifies the end of
a block of heading or text data characters started
with SOH or STX. ETB forces the receiving
station to reply to the transmitting station with
its response (for example, ACK 0 or ACK 1)message received okay; NAK-message received in
error, retransmit; etc.). The ETB is immediately
followed by a block check character (s) BCC in
the transmission so that the receiving station can
perform its error checking function (see example
below).
3741 Transmits (multiple data sets)
E B B
S
S
S E B B
Text
3741
0 T
T C C
0 T T C C
0 T
data
X
B C C
X X C C
X
A
A
C
Receiving
o. CK
0
K
station
1
0
""'-""'--
""'--
I.--
Heading
Text
S·OH (Heading data) ETB BCC
STX ETB BCe
/' /
/
/
/
/
/
/
//////
/
\
/
/
/
/
/
/
\
/
/
/
/ / // / / //
/
/
\, /
/ /
/
/ /
/
/
/ /
//
-e- B B
E B B
S
S
Transmitting
Text
Text
0 T
T C C
T C C
0 T
station
data
data
B .C C
B C C
X
X
A
Receiving
oC
station
K
0
~
EB B
T CC
B C C
A
oC
.K
0
---
3741 Transmits (last data set-end
E B B
S
Text
0
0 T
T C C
3741
data
B C C
X
A
C
Receiving
0
K
station
0
"--
SYNC
·SYN SYN
Text
data
--""'--
of job)
S E B B
TT C C
XX C C
r-r-
E
0 0
T
A
C
0
K
.1
--- -
3741 Receives (can receive either of above or the following)
E B B
S
E B B
S
Text
Text
3741
T C C
o T data
0 T
T. C C
data
B C C
X
X C C
X
A
A
Transmitt ing
oC
oC
K
K
station
1
0
,"--'"-
--E
o0
T
--
~
Reply
The receiving station must transmit·
its status back before transmission
can continue.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PN 161920
3741 ML
14-27
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1/75
PN 1619202
14-28
ENQ-Inquiry (Hex 20)
BCC-Block Check Character
EOT-End of Transmission (Hex 37)
ENQ is used to bid for the line when using a
point-to-point network (data link). See example
below.
The BCC is cyclic redundancy checking (CRC).
The transmitting station builds a CRC character
(2 bytes) which is representative of all bits of all
characters transmitted in the message block. It
transmits this character as a BCC to the receiving
station. This BCC character is checked against the
CRC accumulation at the receiving station for an
equal compare. A running count is maintained of
all CRC checks where transmitted block check
characters (BCC) do not match those calculated
by the BSCA controller. This count is displayed
in positions 14, 15, 16 of the error logout line at
the bottom of the display.
This control character signals the end of a
message transmission, which may have contained
one or more blocks, including text and associated
headings. In a multipoint line, it causes a reset
of all stations on the transmission line.
~
E P
0 N A
Q 0
0
A
0
C
K
0
--
Another use of the ENQ control character is to
indicate the end of a poll or selection sequence
which solicits a response from the polled or
selected station. See example below.
1.
An abort signal to indicate a system malfunction or situation where continuation of
message transmission is impossible.
2.
A response to a poll when the station being
polled (invited to send) has nothing to
transmit (BSCA multipoint only).
The example below is for a transmitting station
ending its transmission with a normal ending.
E P
0 A A N A
Q 0
S
0 T
X
E P
0 a A
T D
i
EaT is also used as:
Text
data
E B B
T C C
B C C
S E B B
0 T T C C
X X C C
0
If the original reply was garbled or was not
received by the transmitting station, the ENQ
control character is also used by a transmitting
station to request a repeat transmission of the
reply from a receiving station to a message block.
See example below.
Transmitting station
requests that reply
S
0 T
X
Text
data
E B
T C
B C
E P
0 N A
Q 0
0
A
C
K
1
This reply was not
received by transmitting
station.
0
0
A
C
K
A
C
E P
0 a A
T 0
A
C
0
K
0
K
1
-----,
-"---
/
/
/
/
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
/
r
The transmitting station
has finished transmission.
\
\
OLE-Data Link Escape (Hex 10)
The DLE is a control character used exclusively to
provide supplementary line control characters,
such as WACK, ACK 0, ACK 1, RVI, and transparent mode control characters.
The DLE, when added to a normal non-control
character, can be used for a two-character control
sequence. This greatly expands the range of
control characters in the BSC procedure.
RVI-Reverse Interrupt (Hex 10, 7C)
In general the RVI control character is a positive
response used in place of the ACK 0 and ACK 1.
RVI is transmitted by the receiving station to
request termination of the current transmission
because of a high priority message which it must
transmit. Also, in the case of a multipoint network,
the control station, acting as a receiver, will use
this reply to gain control of the data link.
The sending station treats the RVI as a positive
acknowledgment and responds by transmitting
all data that prevents it from becoming a
receiving station. The 3741 must finish a complete
job; therefore, RVI is treated as a positive response
and continues.
The RVI is a two-character control sequence
consisting of the DLE as the first character in
conjunction with @ in EBCDIC (DLE@). The
3741 can receive RVI and treats it as positive
response. Tire 3741 does not transmit an RVI.
ACK 0/ ACK 1-Positive Acknowledgment
ACK 0 (Hex 10, 70)
ACK 1 (Hex 10,61)
The ACK 0 or ACK 1 reply, when used on the
proper sequence, indicates the. previous message
block was accepted without error and the
receiver is ready to accept the next block of the
transm issi on.
The ACK 0 and ACK 1 responses are a twocharacter sequence where the D LE character is
used with a second character which varies depending on the transmission code being used. See
chart below.
Data Link
Character
EBCDIC
ACKO
ACK 1
DLE '70'*
DLE /
*'70' indicates the hexadecimal value, it has no
graphic character assigned.
The use of the proper sequences with the
acknowledgments is as important as the acknowledgment. The ACKs must be used in an alternating mode, that is ACK 1 to message 1, ACK 0
to message 2, ACK 1 to message 3, etc. This
alternating positive acknowledgment is used to
maintain a check on the reception of all replies
by the transmitting station.
ACK 0 is also used as a positive response to a
selection in the multipoint or to a line bid in
point-to-point data link.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
In
PI\I 161920
3741 ML
14-29
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619204
14-30
TTD-Temporary Text Delay (Hex 02 2D)
WACK-Wait Before Transmit-Positive
Acknowledgment (Hex 10-, 6B)
The WACK control character is used by a receiving
station to indicate a temporarily not ready to
receive condition to the transmitting station. It
can be sent as a response to a block of text or
heading data indicating positive acknowledgment
but does not send the next message. It can also
be used to respond to a selection sequence on a
multipoint network or a line bid on the point-topoint network.
The normal transmitting stations response to a
WACK reply is to transmit the ENQ control
character. When the ENQ is received, the
receiving station will continue to respond (reply)
with WACK until it is ready to continue. See
example below.
The TTD control character sequence is sent by a
sending station, which has control of the transmission, when it wishes to retain the line but is
not ready to transmit. The TTD control sequence
(STX ENQ) is normally sent after approximately
two seconds if the sending station is not capable
of transmitting the next text block or initial text
block or initial text block within that time. This
2-second time-out avoids the normal 3-second
receive time-out at the receiving station which
would end the operation. See example below.
Transmitting
Station
<
TTD (Point-To-Poind
EP
.
Less Than
or Equals
2 sec
0 N A
Q D
\ TTD\
A
C
0
K
Receivi ng
Statio n
- -0
Transmitting
S E P
N A
X Q D
Less Than
or Equals
2 sec
oT
0 N
A
K
-
'-
0 T N A
S
0 T
X Q D
X
S E P
\
TTD
o
-
~Station
E P
S
0 N A
0 T
1 Q D
X
A
Receiving
C
0
Statron
K
0
-'-
TEXT
E 8 8
T C C
B C C
W
A
0
C
K
"-'-
In the preceding example, the WACK/ENQ
exchange can continue until the receiving station
is ready to receive the next data block. If the
transmitting station does not wish to continue
the exchange (wait for the receiving station), it
can transmit the EOT control character instead
of the ENQ and thus end the operation.
Wack is a two-character sequence consisting of
the DLE control character in conjunction with'
the comma (,). The 3741 will send WACKs in
the receive mode if a 2-second time-out occurs
(for example, waiting for a long disk operation to
complete).
E P
0 N A
oT
Q D
X
S
A
oC
K
1
~"-
TEXT
/
The receiving station responds NAK to the TID
sequence and waits for transmission to begin.
If the sending station is still not ready, the TTD
sequence can be repeated one or more times. This
delay can occur when the sending station's input
device has not completely filled the buffer due to
inherent machine timings.
N
A
K
'----
TEXT
Forward Abort
Another use of the TTD control sequence is to
signal the receiving station that the sending station
is aborting the current transmission. After
receiving NAK to this TTD sequence, the sending
station sends EOT, resetting the receiving station
to control mode (forward abort). See example
below.
ITB-End of Intermediate Transmission
Transmitting
Station
Receiving
Station
Block (Hex ~J F)
E P
0 N A
Q D
S
0 T
X
TEXT
A
e
0
K
0
·0
------
Transmitting
Station
S
0 0
H
Heading
Data
E P
0 OA
T D
S E P
0 T N A
XQ D
E B B
T e e
B e e
A
e
N
TID
0 A
K
K
1
--.--..
----..
I B B
T e e
B e e
In genera!, the ITB is used to divide a message
(heading or text) into blocks for error checking
purpO:ies without causing a line turnaround
(revenial of transmitting station). The block check
character (Bee) immediately follows the ITB in
the trilnsmission stream and allows the receiving
station to perform error checking on the block of
data. After the first intermediate block, the
successive intermlldiate blocks do not have to be
preceded by STX or SOH, unless there is a
chan9'~ in types of data transmitted (heading to
text). See example below.
~
Heading
Data
I B B S
T e e T
B e e X
TEXT
I B B
T e C
TEXT
B e C
E B B
T e e
0
B e e
A
e
0
K
/'
,,
,
/
/
-
0
'--
... ...
/
... ,
Reply
' ... "-
"-,
"-
The receiving station now
transmits its reply to all
blocks of data received
(heading and text).
If any of the blocks of data/heading were received
in ernJr, the tramimitting station must retransmit
all blocks.
Note: The 3741 has the ability to receive the ITB
control character and its associated Bee check
character. The 3741 does not transmit the ITB
character. When the 3741 receives ITB, it performs
the bl.ock check and continue receiving data. It
treatE!S all data received in a transmission as one
record.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
II
826065
8/1n5
PN
1619~
3741 ML
14-31
LINE CONTROL SEQUENCE
Operations
Let's see what has to take place in order to
communicate using the 3741. In the following
examples we will be communicating between two
3741 s (station A and station B) on a switched
point-to-point line. Station A will be transmitting
two records of information to station B at the
following disk locations.
BOE - 01001
EOE - 01026
EOD - 01003
The operator sets up station A as follows:
- Positions disk to correct data set label.
- Selects communicate.
Presses M key (for originating station only).
Presses T key (puts station A in transmit mode).
Presses the talk button on the modem and
calls station B.
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1175
PN 1619206
14-32
Verbal agreement is reached as to when data is to
be sent. Then the station B operator sets up as
follows.
- Positions disk to the correct data set label.
- Selects communicate.
Presses R key (places station B in receive mode).
- Presses data key on modem.
The originating station (station A) operator listens
for a high-pitched tone. When the operator hears
the tone change from a high-pitch to a low-pitch,
the data key on the modem must be pressed. A
data link has now been established and communications can begin.
Records are transmitted sequentially as they
appear in a data set. Each record on the disk is
transmitted as one transmission block.
The message formats are as follows:
Note: When station A transmits, read the message
format from right to left. When station A receives,
read from left to right (against the arrow).
Station A sends an inquiry to station B.
Station A
001
A A
Station B
00008
!:!DRl
001
80 01001 01026
01003
1 1 1 1
000
000
000
000
PESSPPP
ANYYAAA
DQNNDDD
(Inquiry)
A A
00008
!:!DRl
80 01001 01026
01001
1 1 0
a
000
000
000
000
If no valid response is received within 1 second
(3 seconds for EBSCA), station A retransmits the
above sequence. If station A receives a NAI< response to any inquiry, it will then send an EDT
to relinquish line control.
Station B will send a positive acknowledgment if
it is ready to receive.
Station B
Station A
001
A A
00008
A A
80 01001 01026
tiDRl
00008
80 01001 01026
!:iDRl
P P P S S 0
01003
P
01001
AAAYYLO
1 1 0 0
000
000
000
000
1 1, 1 1
000
000
000
000
Positive Acknowledgement
(ACKO)
Upon reception of a positive acknowledgment from
station B, station A will now send record 1 (01001)
Station B
Station A
~
001
A A
A
01001
01001
80 01001 01026
!:iDRl
80 01001 01026
tiDRl
01001
01003
1 1 1 1
000
000
000
000
P B B E RECO R0
ACCT
S SSP P P
TYYAAA
o
X N NOD 0
C C B
1,
1 0 0
)00
000
000
000
(Data)
If station B receives the first record okay, it
responds with an ACK 1.
Station A
001
A A
Station B
01001
001
!:iDRl
A A
01001
tiDRl
80 01001 01026
01001
PPPSSO
AAAYYL
1 1, 0 0
000
000
000
000
o
DON N E
1 1 1 1
000
000
000
000
Positive Acknowledgement
(ACK 1)
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PN 16192
3741 ML
14-33
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
c,
PN 1619208
14-34
Station A now sends record 2.
Station A
001
A A
Station B
01002
001
80 01001 01026
A A
01002
tiDRl
80 01001 01026
01003
1 1 1 1
000
000
000
01001
P B B E RECORD S SSP P P
ACCT
TYYAAA
D C C B
2
XNNDDD
000
1 1 0
a
000
000
000
000
(Data)
Station B received the message incorrectly (BCC
sent by station A does not match BCC developed
at station B) and answers with a negative acknowledgment (NAK).
Station B
Station A
001
001
A A
A A
01002
01002
I::!.DRl
80 01001 01026
80 01001 01026
tiDRl
01001
01003
P P P S S NP
AAAYYAA
1 1 a 0
000
001
000
000
1 1 1 1
001
000
000
000
DDDNNKD
(NAK)
Station A will send record 2 again. A record can
be retransmitted up to three times if succeeding
NAK responses are received. If a NAK is received
after the third retransmission, an EOT will be sent
and the line will disconnect.
Station A
001
A A
Station B
001
01002
tiDRl
A A
01002
I::!.DRl
80 01001 01026
80 01001 01026
01001
01003
1 1 1 1
000
001
000
000
P B B E RECORD S SSP P P
ACCT
TYYAAA
DCCB
2
XNNDDD
(Data)
1 1 a 0
001
000
000
000
Station B received the record correctly this time
and responds with an ACKO.
Station B
Station A
001
A A
A A
01002
01.002
80 01001 01026
80 01001 01.026
tiDRl
01001
01003
PPPSSO
P
AAAYYLOA
1 1 0 0
000
001
000
o 0 0 NNE
000
1 1 1 1
0
001
000
000
000
(ACKO)
Whenever the end of data is reached (in this case
01003) on the disk and the data set label does not
indicate a continued data set, the 3741 transmits
a null record as follows.
Station A
001
A A
::;tation B
01003
001
80 01001 01026
tiDRl
01003
A A
01003
80 01001 01026
tiDR1
01001
P B B E S SSP P P
ACCTTYYAAA
1 1 1 1
000
001
000
000
o C C X X N N 000
1 1 0 0
001
000
000
000
(Null)
Receiving a null record causes the last recorded
record address to be stored in the EOE field of the
data set label and the address following the EOE
to be stored in the EOO field .
•
If station B received the null record with no errors,
it would respond with an ACK1.
Station A
001
A A
Station B
00008
01003
1 1 0 0
000
001
000
00008
A A
80 01001 01026
tiDRl
80 01001 01002
!:!DR1
P P P S S 0
P
A A A YY L
o0 oN N E
A
01003
0
000
1 1 1 1
(01.
000
000
000
(ACK 1)
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
pr~
16192(1
3741 ML
14-35
EC 823146
826065
Date g/15n4
8/1/75
PN 1619210
14-36
After station A transmits all data transmitted, it
sends an EDT and posts a TT in positions 37 and
38 of the status line signifying transmission
complete.
Station A
001.
A A
Station B
00008
001.
TT
80 01.001 01.026
!:!DR1.
A A
00008
!:!DR1.
RC
80 01.001 01.002
01.003
1. 1. 1. 1.
000
001.
000
000
01003
PESSPPP
ADVVAAA
DTNNDDD
1. 1. 0 0
001.
000
000
000
(EOT)
After sending an EDT, station.A goes into control
mode for 20 seconds and then disconnects from
the line. If station A was in a transmit/receive
mode and communicating with a CPU, it could
transmit and then receive before disconnecting
from the line.
When station B receives an EDT after receiving a
disk with no errors, a'RC is posted on the display
status line, signifying to the operator that the
data was received complete. Station B then goes
into control mode for 20 seconds and disconnects
from the line.
The following is an example of what takes place
when' noise occurs during transmission of STX or
ETB.
Station A sends record 1; station B receives
'record 1 correctly.
Station A
001.
A A
Station B
01.001
001.
80 01.001. 01.026
!:!DR1.
A A
01.001
!:!DR1.
80 01.001. 01.026
01.003
1. 1. 1. 1.
000
000
000
01.001.
000
1,1. 0 0
B E RECORD
P B B E RECO RD S SSP P P
P B
ACCT
TVVAAA
A C C T
DC C 8
XNNDDD
DC C 8
(Data)
000
000
000
000
S S S P P P
T V VA A A
1
(Data)
X N N
DDD
Station 8 responds with an ACK 1.
Station
00],
A
0],00],
A A
tiDR ],
], ], 0 0
000
Station B
000
00],
I. A
01001
80 0],00], 0],026
80 01001 01026
0],003
01001
000
], 1 ], 1
000
p p p S S D
P
AA A VV L 1 A
DD D N N E
D
(100
000
000
000
P P P S S DmJ
AAAVVL1A
DDDNNE
D
/
ACK 1
ACK 1
Station A sends record 2; station B fails to
, recognize STX and data because of noise during
transmission.
Station B
Station A
00],
A A
01002
tiDRl
1 1 1],
000
000
A A
01002
80 01001 01026
80 01001 01026
01003
01001
000
000
P B B E RECORD
A C C T
D C C B
2
1 1 0 0
S SSP P P
000
000
000
000
B B E NOISE S S P P P
AC C T
VV A A A
DC C B
NNDDD
[ffi]
TVVAAA
X N ND D D
(Data)
(NoLie)
No response from station B.
Station A
Station B
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
In
826065
8/1/75
PN
16192'
3741 NiL
14-37
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PN 1619212
14-38
After a 3-second time-out, station A sends an inquiry.
Station A
DO]'
Station B
0],002
A A
DO],
80 0],00], 0],026
t:!.DR]'
A A
0],002
t:!.DR]'
01003
], ], ],],
000
000
000
DO],
1 ], 0 0
PESSPPP
ANYYAAA
D Q N N D
DD
(Inquiry)
000
000
000
000
P E S S P P P
A N YY A A A
D Q N ND D D
(Inquiry)
Station B responds with an ACK of the last good
transmission that it received. In this example
station B received record 1 correctly, but not
record 2; therefore, station B responds with an
ACK 1.
Station A
DO],
A A
Station B
01002
DO],
80 0],00], 0],026
t:!.DRl
A A
0:L002
t:!.DR]'
80 0],001 01026
0],003
], 1 0 0
000
000
000
0],00],
001
], 1. 1.],
P P P S S D
P
YY
L
1
A
A A A
D
D D D N N E
PPSSD
AAAYYL
D D D NNE
000
P
A
D
Station B
DO],
01002
A A
000
ACK 1
Station A retransmits record 2; this time station B
receives record 2 correctly.
Station A
001
000
I
1
ACK 1
80 0],001 0],026
t:!.DR]'
000
0],002
A A
80 0100], 0],026
!::!.DRl
0],00],
0],003
], ], ], 1
000
000
000
P B B E RECORD
ACCT
D C C B
1 ], 0 0
DO],
2
(Data)
S SSP P P
TYYAAA
XNNDDD
000
P B B E RECORD
A C C T
2
D C C B
(Data)
000
000
000
S S S P P P
T Y Y A A A
X N N D D D
Station B responds with an ACK O.
Station B
Station.A
001
A A
01002
liDRl
1 1 0 0
000
000
A A
01002
80 01001 01026
80 01001 01026
01003
01001
000
001
000
000
000
PPl:lSSD~
P
P P P S S D
A AA Y Y L 0 A
D
D D D N N E
I
000
AAAYYLOA
DDDNNE
D
/
ACKO
ACKO
The previous sequence will also occur if station B
(the receiving station) failed to recognize ETB.
If station B (the receiving station) received record
2 correctly but station A did not receive the
response, after a 3-second time-out station A sends
ENQ; station B responds with the ACK of the last
good transmission (ACK 0 in the example above);
then station A sends record 3 and normal transmission continues.
Status Message
A status message is a message sent to a remote
station from the 3741 indicating what type of
an error has been encountered. A status
message is sent under the following conditions:
In a transmit mode (T, B, P, or D) after a:
- Transparency check
Disk error
Line check
Message aborted
In
-..:.
-
a receive mode (B, BT, or DT) after a:
Wrong length count
F'ull disk(s)
Line check
Disk error
Other conditions for sending a status message
are:
After a 3741 has responded NAK to a
remote station's line bid request.
After the 3741 has prematurely terminated a
transmission or reception of a message.
- When the RESET key is used to abort the
transmission or reception of data.
The following message formatting is used to
illustrate the sending of a status message after
an errlJr condition has been encountered.
A 3741 will transmit a status message, but will
ignore the reception of one. If two 3741s were
communicating with each other, the status
message would have no significance. If a 3741
was communicating with a CPU, the CPU could
handle the received status message in several
different ways, depending on system programming. One example might be to have the status
message printout on the operator's console
printer.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
'=.:
826065
8/1n5
PI\I 16192'
3741 ML
14-39
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
PN 1619214
811n5
The sequence is started when one of the above
error conditions exist. Let's say that we encountered a transparency check during transmission.
- The CRT would flash.
- A T would be displayed in position 7 of the
CRT.
The 3741 will send an EOT.
After a 3-second time-out the following
sequence will take place.
A A
001.
01.001.
t:[DR1.
80 01.001. 01.026
01.003
PES S P P P
1. 1. 1. 1.
000
000
000
ANYYAAA
DONNDDD
001.
The remote station would respond with a positive
acknowledgment.
001.
T 0
A A
01.001.
t:[DR1.
80 01.001. 01.026
01.003
PPPSSD
1. 1. 0 0
000
000
000
P
AAAYYLOA
D D D NNE
D
001.
(ACK 0)
Upon the reception of an ACK 0, the 3741 will
send the status message containing the error code
displayed in position 7 of the CRT.
001.
T 0
A A
01.001.
80 01.001. 01.026
t:[DR1.
01.003
P B B E
ERROR
1. 1. 1. 1.
000
000
000
001.
S
T V%
D C C X INDICATOR X
A C C T
t
(T ERROR)
S S S P P P
OY Y A A A
HNN
D D D
>
I
14-40
If the remote station receives the status message
correctly, it responds with another positive
acknowledgment.
001.
T
a
01.001.
A A
80 01.001. 01.026
tiDR1.
01.003
1. 1.
a a
000
000
000
001.
P P P S S D
P
A A A Y Y L
A
DDDNNE
D
(ACK 1)
The 3741 will then send an EDT and terminate
the line.
01.001.
A A
01.003
PES S P P P
AOYYAAA
000
000
000
001.
DT NND DD
(EOT)
EC
823146
Date,9/15n4
825853
826065
11/15n4'
8/.1n5
PN 161921
3741 ML
14-41
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
Communications Procedure
8.
The following procedure can be applied to all
communications modes. However, if you don't
have the keylock, terminallD, and operator ID
reader features, ignore the boxed steps.
It is assumed that you have your data set labels
properly identified, when doing this procedure.
For more information, see the IBM 3741 Data
Station Reference Manual, GA21-9183.
1.
9.
3.
No
3741 - Use of the M Key (BSCA)
Insert your ID card
in the top slot.
Press REC ADV
When the 3741 is set up to operate on switched
lines, the M key determines whether or not the
3741 will send the initial line bid. The M key has
no 'function on non-switched line.
Do you have a non-switched line?
Yes
No
End of procedure.
Continue to step 10.
Press AUTO-ANSWER Continue to step 11.
on the modem.
End of procedure.
No
No
Are you answering a call or dialing a location?
Continue to step 4.
Answering
Dialing
Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMM
M
T, P, B, D, or R
The M key tells the 3741 to bid the line, independent of the mode selected or.the.following
key strikes. If a CPU is the remote end .re~eivirig
the call, it should be programmed to do a
read initial.
Is remote ID being used?
Yes
No
Key in the remote
ID characters.
Continue to step 5.
5.
Press FUNCT SEL upper and COMM
6.
If you have a switched network and are
dialing the remote location, press M. rl
If you have a non-switched network, or are
answering in a switched network, continue
to step 7.
7.
According to convention, the station placing the
call (calling station) should bid the line. If the
3741 is the station placing the call, the operator
setup should be:
Do you want auto-answer?
Do you have the keylock feature installed?
Turn the keylock on.
14-42
Yes
Yes
11.
PN 1619216
Are you using the operator ID card reader?
Position the disk to the data set label or
record where you want to start communicating
Yes
4.
8/1/75
Load the diskette.
10.
2.
826065
Press the appropriate mode key:
Transmit- Press T
Transmit transparent - Press P
Transmit/Receive - Press B
Transmit Transparent/Receive - Press D.
Receive - Press R
12.
Answer the phone and a. Press TALK on
the modem.
when the person at
b. Dial the locathe calling station
indicated she is
tion you wish to
ready, press DATA
communicate
on the modem.
with.
c. Continue to
End of procedure.
step 12.
Also, according to convention, the station
receiving the call (called station) should wait for
a line bid. If the 3741 is the station receiving.
the call, the operator setup should be:
Is the location you dialed in an autoanswer
or manual answer mode?
The absence of the M key indicates to the 3741
that it should wait for a line bid for 20 seconds.
If the CPU is the remote station placing the call,
it should be programmed to do a write initial.
Auto
Manual
When you hear a
high pitched tone,
press DATA on the
modem. End of
procedure.
When the person you
are communicating
with makes her
station ready, you'll
hear a high-pitched
tone. Then press
DATA on the modem.
End of procedure.
Press FUNC SEL upper
COMM
T, P, B, D, or R
Packaging
10 Reader Cable POSiti(~n
The BSGA controller is packaged on the feature
half planar board.
Keylock Cable Position
Jumper Field
I
Level 1
The socket positions are assigned as follows:
I
I
Socket
1.----
E
1-N
1-P
1-0
1-R
1-E
1-F
1-G
Modem cable
Printer signal cable (from printer)
Cross connector to MPU planar board
Printer signal ,cable (to printer)
Cross connector to MPU planar board
Cross connector to MPU planar board
Cross connector to MPU planar board memory
Cross connector to MPU planar board 1-H
memory
1-S
Card socket - memory
1-T
Card socket - memory
1-U - Test socket
1-V
Card socket - sync clock card
1-W
Card socket - ID reader card
1-X
Card socket - ID reader card
J-Y
Card socket - terminal ID card
1-Z
Card socket - terminal ID card
a a 00 0
N
100
I
_.J
P
F
Q
G
----
H
R
Feature Half Planar Socket Locations
Sockets 1-P and 1-R are used only if a printer
adapter is packaged on the same feature board.
Sockets 1-G, 1-H, l-S, and 1-T are used only to
provide connections for the memory card to the
MPU planar. There is no direct connection between
the memory card and the BSCA even though the
memory card is mounted on the half planar.
r--flfiD
. .2
2
•
....
.;.
~
13
J
~ 13
L
Modem Cable
The modem cable interfaces to the BSCA at
socket 1-N. This interface conforms to EIA-RS232. For signal lines, '-transmit data' and
'-receive data', a negative voltage is a logic 1 or
mark condition. A positive voltage is a logic 0
or space. For all other lines, positive voltage indicates on, negative voltage indicates off. Positive
levels may be +3 to +25 volts. Negative levels
may be -3 to -25 volts.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
m
826065
8/1/75
PN 16192
3741 ML
14-43
EC
826065
823146
PN 1619218
8/1175
Date 9/15174,
14-44
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
Synchronous Clock with BSCA
(see page 14-79 for EBSCA)
When modems are attached that do not have their
own clocking, the synchronous clock feature provides a clock to BSCA controller. The synchronous clock feature is mounted in l-V and provides a 153.6-kHz oscillator. pulse to the BSCA.
From this oscillator, the BSCA generates a 1200Hz clock for 1200 bps operation or a 600-Hz clock
for 600 bps (baud rate).
"A5" is hex representation for EBCDIC lower
case V. x x x are the 3 ID characters programmed
on the terminal ID feature card.
Each Bit Position
0"'1.-- "0"
~
0$ I + - - " 1"
o",J
When the synchronous clock card is installed in
socket l-V, the 153.6 kHz oscillator may be probed
at l-L, pin B07. The 1200 or 600 Hz clock is
at l-L, pin B1L
Bit---+ 0
2
3
4
5
Speed, 6lJu or 1200 bps is determined by speed
select jumper or speed select switch (WT) if
installed.
'0
Byte ~ 0
1 10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
Byte \'0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-Jc:r~
0
0
0
0
The BSCA includes self-correction logic to
synchronize clock, l-L-B 11, with received
data, l-N-B 11, in receive mode.
Byte ~O
3 )0
,0
Terminal Identification
This feature has two functions. One is to transmit
a four-character terminal identification sequence.
The first character of the 3741 sequence is always
an EBCDIC lower case, alpha v (hex A5). The last
three characters are unique to each 3741 terminal
and are programmed on the feature card. The
unique ID characters are pre-assigned at the
factory.
O~
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
~~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DO
c::J
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
c::::::J
~~
~
The second function is to compare a received
identification sequence of up to 15 characters
to a sequence keyed by the operator.
This function compares the terminal ID sent by
the remote station to the one keyed in by the
operator. The operator keys this before entering
communications mode. The BSCA controller
detects the keyed sequence by the position of
the cursor. The cursor must be positioned after
the last keyed in character (15 or less). To bypass this feature, the cursor must be in position
1 when entering communications.
KE!ylock
B
The keylock is an electrical switch that controls
the selection of communications mode. This
feature provides a keylock which controls selection of communications mode. With the key lock
in the locked position, communications mode can
not be selected. In the unlocked position, the
3741 can be placed in communications mode.
Once the mode is selected, the keylock can be
placed in the locked position and the terminal
remains in this mode.
Operator I D Reader
II
This feature is used to read an operator identification card and transmit the information to a
CPU, which is programmed to accept only valid
sequences.
Terminal ID Card
10 Character Jumper Placement
The last three characters of the 3741 terminal ID
sequence are programmed on this card which is
installed in sockets Y and Z.
The 3741 will transmit its terminal I D during initial handshaking preceding the first ENQ or ACK 0
depending on the mode.
Row Hex
a
81
b
82
c
83
d
84
e
85
f
86
P P P S S "A"
E P
AAAYY 5 xxxNA
DDDNN
QD
9
87
h
88
i
89
j
91
P P P S S "A"
A
P
AAAYY' xxx COA
DDDNN 5
K
D
k
I
or
m
o
1 2
345
6 7
o• Q••Q ~ ~ ~
o• 0••e ~ 2 ~
o• 0••0 ~ ~ ~
o• 0••0 o• 0• 0•
0 •
o• 0••0 o
• • 0
o
o• 0••0 • 0• 0•
o• 0••Q o 0 •
o•
o• 0••0 o• 0•
o•
• • 0
o• Q••0 o• 0• 0•
0
• 0
o• 0•
95
96
1 2
345
o
0•
c• 0••Q o • 0
o• 0••0 o• 0• 0•
6 7
o•
• 0
• 0•
Q
p
97
CI• CI• •0
Q •
• 0e
•
~ ~
22
q
98
Cl• 0 0
e• Cl• 0•
o0
o•
•0
o• 0•
o0
~ ~
o• 0•
92
o• 0••0
o•
93
o• 0••0
• 0••0
Q
"o 8.
94
• Q
o
••0
o• 0 0•
~ ~
0
n
0
o
~ ~
•
o• 0••Q o• 0••0
• CI Q
0
Hex
• 0
• 0
r
99
s
A2
t
A3
0
•
o• 0••0 o• 0• 0• o• 0•
o• 0• 0• ~ ~ ~ o• 0•
o• Q• 0• 2 2 ~ o 0
o• 0• 0• o• 0• 0• ~ ~
u
A4
v
A5
w
A6
x
A7
y
A8
o• 0• 0•
z
A9
• 0 •
o
•0
o• 0• 0• o• 0• e• e• 0•
o• 0• 0• o· 0. • o• 0•
• CI •
Q
• 0
"
o0 • ~ ~
• • 0
o•0 . ~ ~
• 0 •
o 0• 0 o •
o
0
• 0
The operator I D reader feature consists of two
parts: the ID reader, which sets on the 3741
table top, and the ID reader card, which is
mounted in feature half planar stockets U and X.
The ID reader is read'f when TB, BB, DB, or PB is
displayed. As the card is inserted, the magnetically encoded data is read and the data signal
is sent to the BSCA controller. The data signal
is sent to the I D reader card where it is decoded.
Decoded information is then transferred serially
to the BSCA controller where the ID characters
are assembled. Aft,er the complete I D is read,
the controller will send it to a CPU.
The format of the 10 reader card is:
PPPSSS
LEBB
A A A Y Y O : (lOR Chazrs)" R T C C F
OOO'NN
CBCCF
1 2
L
010
Keylock
EOR
IrJ
~
010 - Operator identification character
EOR - End of record character
The 10 reader card also provides regulated voltage
to the 10 reader via the feature half planar.
Program buffer 9 is used with this feature. This
feature can be bypassed if the 3741 is transmitting
to another 3741.
10 Reader Cable Position-------,
Jumper Field - - -___
Level 1
I
I
1.----
E
I
000
10 0
.--.--,---
Memory card
buffer
Keylock Cable Position - - - - . . . ,
00
N
Data
flow
MPU Planar
buffer
interface
I
II I
I
Current
I
Previous
Hold
_.J
Clock
control
P
F
Q
G
R
H
Clock
Feature Half Planar Socket Locations
I
Planar Connection
1-F
1-G
1-H
B08
B08
B08
1-S
1-T
1-V
B08
B08
013
008
008
007
008
l-W
1-X
l-Y
l-Z
I
Signal Ground
:
Feature half
planar
,,---
I
Keylock
I I
I
I
I
I
Sync
clock
card
Feature
ROS
I---
1
Printer
controller
1
I--<
m
.....
BSCA
controller
iI
t
Terminal
ID card
r--10
reader
card
~
10
reader
'----
Modem
Printer
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN
16192.
3741 ML
14-45
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1175
PN 1619220
14-46
EIA Interface Standard
Carrier Detected (CD)
Receive Data (RD)
Request to Send (RTS)
This line is keyed by the BSCA. It controls the
turn on and turn off of the modulator (which of
the two frequencies is emitted is controlled by the
send-data line as above).
This line indicates the presence of carrier on the
receive input. An up level will be present when
carrier has been present on the 'receive input'
for between 10 and 20 milliseconds. This line
will drop between 5 and 15 milliseconds after
carrier has dropped. The BSCA does not use this
line.
This line is AN Ded with 'data set ready'. Hence,
when 'request to send' and data set ready' are up,
the carrier is immediately put on the transmission
line. When 'request to send' or 'data set ready' is
down, no carrier is emitted.
Ring Indicator (RI) - Switched Line Only
This line is keyed by the demodulator section.
When space frequency is being received over the
transmission line, the receive data line is at its up
level. When mark frequency is being received, the
receive data line is at its down level. When the
received signal (mark or space) is below the threshold setting of the carrier-detect circuitry, the
receive data line will be clamped to its down
level. For 2-wire operation, a clamp is provided
to hold the receive data line to a down level while
the modem is transmitting.
Clear to Send (CTS)
This line is keyed by the modem. Its up level
tells the BSCA that the BSCA may key the 'send
data' line. Its down level merely signifies that
the 'request to send' line or 'data set .ready' is
at the down level and, hence, the transmitter
has been turned off.
There are three delay options on a non-switched line,
selectable by strapping associated with the 'clear
to send' line. Each delay is defined as the time
between up level being put on the'request to send'
line and an up level appearing on the 'clear to
send' line.
Data Set Ready (DSR) - Non-switched Line Only
This line is driven by the modem and is a
power on indication for the line adapter.
Data Set Ready (DSR) - Switched Line Only
The on condition indicates that the modem
is connected to the line and ready to exchange
further control signals with the BSCA equipment
to initiate the exchange of data.
The off condition indicates that the associated
modem is not ready to operate. The off condition of this circuit does not impair the operation
of ring indicator.
Signal Ground (SG)
This circuit provides a common ground reference
for all circuits in .the interface.
Signals on this circuit indicate whether a calling
signal is being received by the AA feature. The
on condition indicates that a calling signal is being
received. The off condition indicates that no calling signal is being received.
BSCA to Modem Interface
The EIA interface is used
EIA:
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Signals on this circuit control switching of the AA
feature and the associated modem to or from the
line.
The on condition (indicating that the data terminal
equipment is ready to operate) prepares the AA
feature to connect the associated modem to the
iine and maintains this connection.
When the AA feature is conditioned for automatic
answering of calls, connection to the line occurs
only in response to a combination of the ON condition data terminal ready and calling indicator.
The off condition causes the AA feature to drop
the line (go to hook), when the transmission of
data has been complete. The OFF condition of
'data terminal ready' does not inhibit the operation
of calling indicator.
When data terminal ready is turned off, it is not
turned on again until 'data set ready' is turned off.
Max allowable
+25 V
Maximum
+15 V
Minimum
+3 V
-3V
Minimum
-15V -
Maximum
-25 V -
Max allowable
(Modem)
- - - Data Communication Equip. ----.... ~
Pin
Number
Line Code
Name
I
AA
Protective Ground
CD
0
AB
Signal Ground
0
0
BA
•
(Business Mach)
Data Terminal Equip. - - .
BB
CA
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
4
CB
Clear to Send
5
~
Q)
c
CC
:J
c
o
.~
co
(.)
'c::J
Modem
Additional
Optional Circuits
~
Data Set Ready
0
Reserved for Testing
I
E
E
CD
CE
DO
Female
<-0
I
I
::J
CD
Data Carrier Detector
~
e
e
DB
c
'iii
Ring Indicator
8
DA
..c
(.)
co
Data Terminal Ready
22
CF
.!:
~
en
en
Q)
Reserved for Testing
C0
®
8
Q)
~
Trans, Signal Element Timing
Trans. Signal Element Timing
~
Rec. Signal Element Timing
~
Male
I
I
•
External I'ilodem Cable
13121110987 6 5 4 3 2
0
1
,\000000000000)
000000000000
0
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1 5 14
EC 823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15n4
11/15n4
8/1/75
F'N 1619'!21
I
3741 ML
1447
EC 823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15/74
11/15174
8/1175
Modem and LeA Interface
BSCA to Modem Interfa&e
The EIA interface is used
EIA:
Max allowable
+25 V
Maximum
+15 V
Minimum
+3V
- 3V
Minimum
-15 V
Maximum
-25 V
Maximum allowable
Feature Half Planar Socket Locations
PN 1619222
14-48
Modem Cable / BSCA Cable (all modems
except 1200 bps Line Adapter)
m
MPU BSCA
1-N End
Lane Name
To or
from
3741
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
012
011
010
008
007
006
FRAME
002
004
Request to Send
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Clear To Send
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Receive
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Ring Indicator
Carrier Detect
Rate Selector
Data Terminal Ready
SCTE
Frame Ground
+12 Volts dc
-12 Volts dc
From
From
To
To
To
To
From
To
To
To
From
From
From
From
From
From
Modem End
4
2
3
5
15
17
7
6
22
8
23
20
24
1
13 12 11 10 9
D--
Feature
Half Planar
1-1
3
2
1\0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
OJ
0000<)0000000
Note:
0
a
III
notations refer
to cable connecto:s.
Modem Cable
I
b
54
25 24 2322 :!1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
3741 Model 2
I
0
8 7 6
System/3
LCA
r"-
II
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
Modem Cable
Modem
EC
823146
825853
826065
Date
9/15n4
11/15/74
8/1/75
III
PI\! 16192:!31
3741 ML
14'49
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15174
811175
1200 bps Line Adapter
Location
General
The line adapter board housing the pluggable
cards making up the 1200 bps line adapter is
located against the right front cover of the
machine as viewed from the rear. It is easily
detached from the cover to allow servicing
accessibility.
The 1200 bps line adapter is an under-the-cover
modem designed to operate at up to 1200 bps
on World Trade or domestic non-switched lines
and U.S. switched facilities.
The line adapter converts a two-level business
machine signal into a signal suitable for transmission over a voice grade telephone channel.
At the receiver, the line signal is converted
back into a two-level business machine signal.
Information is handled serially bv bit and by
character. Synchronism is not maintained
between information on the send data interface
lead and the line signal.
Therefore, synchronous clock feature is a prerequisite for the line adapter feature.
Input Requirements
Communications Line (receiver input)
For four-wire operation, the receive and transmit lines are separate. For two-wire operation,
the receive and transmit lines are jumpered
together.
Receiver Sensitivity
This modem will operate properly with signals,
at the receive line terminals, between -43 dBm
and -8 dBm.
Receiver Input Impedance
ZIN
= 600n ± 10%
Frequency Limitations
The receive frequencies are:
Mark
1300 Hz ± 10 Hz
Space
2100 Hz ± 10 Hz
There is no modem WRAP feature.
Line Adapter Board
PN 1619224
14·50
This page intentionally left blank.
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PI~ 161922~
3741 ML
14-51
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
825853
826065
11/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619226
14-52
Interface - Non-switched Line (1200 bps)
Feature
Half Planar
Socket
Locations
Use
Echo
Clamp
Jumpered
With
Clear to
Send (CTS)
Jumpered
Delay
130 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 23
200 ms
17 to 19
50 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 24
75 ms
17 to 18
22 to 23
25 ms
0
J
L
--- --17 to 16
CAUTION
The short delay combinations might cause intermittent
echo problems.
7
8
E1
9
•••
••
••
••
II
10 11
12 13
2 Wire - 4 Wire
For 2 Wire
8 to 9
12 to 13
'14 to 15
For 4 Wire
7 to 8
10 to 11
Note:
Early
boards
might
not have
echo
clamp
jumpers•.
'"
:is
14 15
.~
20 21
~
••
••
•
•
•
'">
.~
II:
U
«
u
III
.6
co
.5
22 23
B2
C2
02
E2
[i
24
16
17 •
The line adapter board housing the pluggable
cards making up the 1200 bps line adapter is
located against the right front cover of the
machine as .viewed from the rear. It is easily
detached from the cover to allow servicing
accessibility .
.4
c:
.g
.~
• 18
:E
~u
E ~
19
8:.::i
Line Adapter Board
Line Adapter Board
The most commonly used delay combination is 200 ms CTS with 130 ms echo clamp.
Shorter delays can be used on short lines, or lines without echo suppressors. Intermittent echo problems occurring while jumpered for short delays may have to be corrected by jumpering for longer delays.
BSCA Cable
MPU BSCA
1-N End
II
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
012
011
D10
008
D07
006
FRAME
002
004
1200 bps
Line Adapter
Line Name
Request to Send
Transm it Data
Receive Data
Clear To Send
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Receive
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Ring Indicator
Carrier Detect
Rate Selector
Data Terminal Ready
SCTE
Frame Ground
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
002
003
004
005
Note:
008
B03
B04
B05
a, iii, mand II notations refer to cHble connectors.
II
B08
B13
B11
3741 Model 2
I
Feature
Half Planar
I
BSCA Cable
1-,
i1
r
1200 bps
Line Adapter
Communication Line Cable
It
Ii
"'"
h
II Non-switched Lines
""-
"
Non-switched
283 B
PLUG
Communication Line Cable (non-switched)
Red
E2-D05
E2-B12
4W-Transmit / 2W
4W-Transmit / 2W
E2-B09
E2-D13
4W-Receive
4W-Receive
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
II
Red
. Green/
or White
Black
Yellow
Yellow-Black-
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
J
PI\! 161922'
3741 ML
14-53
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
EC
PN 1619228
Interface - Switched Line (1200 bps)
The line adapter board housing the pluggable
cards making up the 1200 bps line adapter is
located against the right front cover of the
machine as viewed from the rear. It is easily
detached from the cover to allow servicing
accessibility .
• 11
Al
u
';;
'~
a!
~
,~
a!
~
.~
'~
t3
<
a:
~
CIl
.9
.8
.7
.6
II
.5
..
>
:0
.
~:l
'~
~
~
.:
II
.
.10
.4
0.
i
~ .
~s
Line Adapter Board
Line Adapter Board
14-54
3741 Model 2
Feature
Half Planar
1209 bps
,......------, Switch 3d
Line
Lines
Line Coupler Coupler
Modem Cable/BSCA Cable
MPU BSCA
1·N End
a
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
D12
011
010
008
007
006
FRAME
002
004
1200 bps
Line Adapter
Line Name
Request to Send
Transmit Data
Receive Data
Clear To Send
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Receive
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Ring Indicator
Carrier Detect
Rate Selector
Data Terminal Ready
SCTE
Frame Ground
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
002
003
004
005
Note:
m,
II,
m m
and
notations refer to cable connectors.
008
803
B04
B05
Line Adaptor Cable
(plovided with 113M machine)
B08
DA
B13
B11
SH
SG
DT
OH
CCT
DR
R~yeIiOW
Line Coupler Cable
Line
Adapter
Coupler
Cable
I
I
l
t
\
005
007
009
B05
B07
B08
B12
B13
Data Tip
Coupler Cut
Through
Signal Ground
Ring Indicate
Switch Hook
Data Modem Ready
Data Ring
Off Hook
(OT)
White
(CCT)
(SG)
(RI)
(SH)
(OA)
(DR)
(OH)
Brown
Gray
Violet
Red
Yellow
Black
Blue
,
\
(
Connection of spade clips to line coupler is
)
strictly the customer's responsibility.
1/
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 161922~
~
3741 ML
14-55
EC 823146
826065
9/15114
8/1115
Interface from 3741 BSCA to 1200 bps Line
Adapter
Data Set Ready (DSR) - Non-switched Line Only
- To 3741
Request to Send·(RTS) - From 3741
This line is driven by the line adapter and is a
power on indication for the line adapter.
This line is keyed by the BSCA. It controls the
turn on and turn off of the modulator (which of
the two frequencies is emitted is controlled by
the send-data line as above).
This line is ANDed with 'data set ready'. Hence,
when 'request to send' and 'data set ready' are up,
the carrier is immediately put on the transmission
line. When 'request to send' or 'data set ready' is
down, no carrier is emitted.
Data Set Ready (DSR) - Switched Line Only To 3741
The on condition indicates that the line adapter
is connected to the line and ready to exchange
further control signals with the BSCA equipment
to initiate the exchange of data.
The off condition indicates that the associated
modem is not ready to operate. The off condition
of this circuit does not impair the operation of
ring indicator.
Clear To Send (CTS) - To 3741
The line is keyed by the line adapter. Its up
level tells the BSCA that the BSCA may key the
'send data' line.
Its down level merely signifies that the 'request to
send' line or 'data set ready' is at the down level
and, hence, the transmitter has been turned off.
There are three delay options on non-switched
line, selectable by strapping, associated with the
'clear to send' line. Each delay is defined as the
time between up level being put on the 'request
to send' line and an up level appearing on the
'clear to send' line.
25 ms - delay between 20 and 40 ms
75 ms - delay between 75 and 115 ms
200 ms - delay between 200 and 300 ms
On very short lines or on lines without echo suppressors, the shorter 'clear to send' delays may
be used.
'Clear to send' delay can be jumpered on the
non-switched line line-adapter board. It is fixed
at 200 ms on the .switched card.
Echo-clamp delay associated with 'clear to send',
is fixed at 130 ms on adapter boards for switched
lines (on early machines it is fixed at zero delay) ..
On boards for non-switched lines, three echoclamp delay options are available: 0 ms, 50 ms,
and 130 ms, used with 'clear to send' delays of
25 ms, 75 ms, and 200 ms respectively.
PN 1619230
14-56
The on condition (indicating that the data terminal equipment is ready to operate) prepares
the AA feature to connect the associated modem
to the line and maintains this connection.
When the AA feature is conditioned for automatic
answering of calls, connection to the line occurs
onl" in response to a combination of the on condition 'data terminal ready' and calling indicator.
The off condition causes the AA feature to drop
the line (go to hook), when the transmission of
data has been complete. The off condition of
'data terminal ready' does not inhibit the operation of calling indicator.
When 'data terminal ready' is turned off, it is not
turned on again until 'data set ready' is turned
off.
Signal Ground (SG) - From 3741
ReGeive Data (RD) - To 3741
This circuit provides a common ground reference
for all circuits in the interface.
Carrier Detected (CD) - To 3741
This line indicates the presence of carrier on the
receive input. An up level will be present when
carrier has been present on the 'receive input'
for between 10 and 20 milliseconds. This line
will drop between 5 and 15 milliseconds after
carrier has dropped. The BSCA does not use
this line.
Ring Indicator (RI) - Switched Line OnlyTo 3741
Signals on this circuit indicate whether a calling
signal is being received by the AA feature. The
on condition indicates that a calling signal is being
.received. The off condition indicates that no
calling signal is being received.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) - From 3741 Switched Line Only
Signals on this circuit control switching of the
AA feature and the associated modem to or
from the line.
The line is keyed by the demodulator section.
When space frequency (2100 Hz) is being received over the transmission line, the receive
data line is at its up level. When mark frequency
(1300 Hz) is being received, the receive data
line is at its down level. When the received signal
(mark or space) is below the threshold setting of
the carrier-detect circuitry, the receive data line
will be clamped to its down level. For two wire
operation, a clamp is provided to hold the receive data line to a down level while the modem
is transmitting.
Transmit Data (TO) - From 3741
This line is keyed by the BSCA when data is to
be transmitted. The data is presented serial-bycharacter and serial-by-bit. An up level on this
lim! causes the modulator to put the space
frequency (2100 Hz) on the transmission line .
The down level causes the mark frequency
(1300 Hz) to be put on the transmission line.
Interface from 1200 bps Line Adapter to
Coupler
There are two analog interface leads to the
coupler; 'data tip' and 'data ring'. The digital
interface to the coupler is compatible in levels
and sense to EIA RS232C/CCITT recommendation V.24.
Coupler Cut Through (CCT) - To Adapter
Signals on this lead indicate whether the coupling
unit.is ready for data or dialing. The up level indicates that the coupling unit is ready. The down
level is present at all other times.
Off Hook (OH) - To Adapter
The signals on this lead provide 'off hook' and
'on hook' signals to the line adapter. An up level
(on condition) on the OH lead causes a relay to
operate which completes a DC path to indicate
'off hook' to the serving central office and trip
any incoming ringing signal.
Data Tip (DT) and Data Ring (DR) - To/From
Adapter
These lines provide an analog signal path between
the line adapter and the coupler.
BSCA to Modem Interface
Switch Hook (SH) - To Adapter
The EIA interface is used
Signals on this lead indicate whether an associated
handset is 'off hook'. The up level is present if
the handset is in use (off hook). The down
level is present at all other times.
EIA:
- - - +25 V
Max allowable
+15 V
Maximum
Ring Indicator (RI) - To Adapter
Minimum
Signals on this lead provide an indication of
ringing signals on the line. The up level indicates
that a ringing voltage is present on the telephone
line. The down level indicates that no calling
signal is being received.
t----
+3 V
- 3 V -------1
Minimum
-15 V- - - - -----
Maximum
-25 V----------
Maximum allowable
Data Modem Ready (DA) - From Adapter
Signals on this lead are used to indicate that
the line adapter is ready to transmit or receive
data.
Common Signal Ground - From Adapter
This lead provides a signal ground path between
the line adapter and the data access arrangement.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1/75
PI\!
16192
3741 ML
14-57
EC
\ Operation and Configuration
Non-switched Line Operation
The non-switched line adapter consists of two
cards; transmit and receive.
The transmit card takes serial binary data and
converts it to frequency-shift-modulated analog
data. On the board assembly, the 'echo clamp'
delay is adjustable, by jumpering, to correspond
with Iclear to send ' delay jumpering as follows:
CTS Delay
Echo Clamp Delay
25 ms
Oms
75 ms
50 ms
200 ms
130 ms
The receive card takes analog frequency-shift-key
(FSK) data from the line and converts it to
serial binary data. The threshold control is permanently wired for -33 dBm. Signals, whose
level are less than -33 dBm, will cause 'carrier
detect' to go off and clamp received data.
Jumpering is provided on the board assembly
to jumper the transmitter output transformer and
the receiver input transformer for two wire operation. Also for two wire operation, transmit
clamp clamps the Ireceive data' line while data is
being transmitted.
In the non-switched line adapter, 'data set ready'
is always on.
823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1175
PN 1619232
14-58
Non-switched Line
r
12V
E2-B091 Pin 121 01-G09
+ Data set ready
o
01-B03
I Pin 10 1 01-G08
01-G02
n------r--
I
Receive
amplifier
Receive
filter
01-B02
Limiter
Discriminator
+ Receive data
01-J02
-0
E1-004
+ Carrier detect
~
Delay
Threshold
-
f----o;0:[)~-0-5---'
01-002
E1-B05
b01.S091 Pin :!]
01·0070
I Pin 131
~IPing
0
E1-B03
I Pin 7 1-4:-
01-G12
)---0---,
01·004
01-G13
I Pin 1510---0
Transmit
clamp
Receive card
----- - - - -
Transmit card
E2-005
I Pin ~D
+ Echo Glamp
C1-G08
C1-005
r----Q 0-1P-in-20"""
C1~09
..... '-1P-i-n-21""',
Echo
clamp
Lo-
C1-011
l
C1-G05
I Pin 22'
C'
C1-J05
r-P-in-2-3-"
-01
C1-G07
() I Pin 241
II~
+ Transmit data
Transmit
filter
Modulator
~
C1 ::104
-
(~~~
t
Cinar to
send
delay
C1-G12 25 ms
o
I Pin 161 of: 1-J12
I
I
rn7:"101 75 ms
C 1-G 10
C1-B02
.()
I Pin 17' .....
Lf!!l.!!!.J
o C1-G13
I Pin 191
Note: JPin
-0
E1-003
+ Request to send
t-v
~
C1-004
-0
E1-002
+ Clear to send
...,
-0
C1-013
E1-005
3741 ML
14-59
200m!i
xxi refers to pin numbers on modem board.
EC
823146
Date 9/15174
826065
8/1/75
PN 16192331
EC823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619234
14-60
Non-switched Line Configuration
7
The non-switched line configuration consists of
the basic modem.
8
B1
9
•••
••
••
••
10 11
12 13
In the US it requires 3002 unconditioned lines
or equivalent or better.
The non-switched configuration is built on the
non-switched line adapter board assembly, which
provides socket positions for:
Note:
Early
boards
might
not have
echo
clamp
jumpers.
Socket
Socket
Socket
Socket
'~
20 21
~
••
••
•
•
•
2-wire or 4-wire line
25, 75, or 200 ms 'clear to send delay'
0, 50, or 130 ms 'echo clamp delay'
On very short lines, or lines without echo
suppressors, the shorter clear to send delays may
be used.
u
c:
!/l
4W-Transmit 12W
4W-Transmit 12W
Greenl
E2-B09
E2-D13
4W-Receive
4W-Receive
or White
Black
Yellow
«
C,)
.6
00
.5
B2
E2
C2
16
.4
c:
0
• 18
19
';::;
~
C1>
:c
'~
.,>
"c
'0;
~
lil
c:
8::;
2 Wire - 4 Wire
For 2 Wire
For 4 Wire
8 to 9
12 to 13
14 to 15
7 to 8
10 to 11
Echo
Clamp
Delay
Jumpered
With
Clear to
Send (CTS)
Delay
Jumpered
130 ms 20 to 21 and
22 to 23
200 ms
17 to 19
50ms 20 to 21 and
22 to 24
75 ms
17 to 18
25 ms
17 to 16
Oms 22 to 23
ryan-switched Line Transmit Level Adjustment
Procedure
:::l '"
EC,)
E ~
Line Adapter Board
Use
Jumpers are provided for selection of:
.,
>
.~
Red
E2-D05
E2-B12
24
Options
Half-duplex operation
o ms echo clamp
-33 dBm receiver sensitivity
:0
22 23
01, 02
C1, C2
E1
E2
The following are fixed in the non-switched line
confi gu rati on:
C1>
14 15
17 •
Receive card
Transmit card
BSCA cable
Line cable
Non-switched Line Cable
E1
01
C1
CAUTION
The short delay combinations may cause intermittent echo problems.
Direct attachment to a non-switched line usually
required a zero dBm transmit level. If a coupler
is required, the transmit level should be adjusted
to that specified on the coupler.
, (Use dB meter PIN 453545)
Adjust the transmitter output:
1.
Turn OFF the 3741 main line power.
2.
Disconnect the communication line plug
and insert it into the TRANS/R EC jack in
the dB meter cover.
3.
On the dB meter:
a. Set the 2W-4W TRANS/REC switch to
TRANS.
b. Set the BRIDGING, 600, 324 switch to
600.
c. Jumper the line terminals on the cover
to the line terminals on the meter.
4.
Jumper line adapter board pins 4, 5, and
6 together to unci amp the transmitter and
turn on 'request to send'.
5.
Turn power on the 3741 and the dB meter.
6.
Adjust R3 on the transmitter card to
attain the correct dB level (zero dB if
direct attach, or to level specified on the
coupler if a coupler is used).
7.
Power down.
8.
Remove the jumpers from the line adapter
board pins.
9~
Reconnect the communication line plug.
283 B
Plug
Red
YellowBlack
This page intentionally left blank.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PN 1619235
3741 ML
14-61
Switched Line Operation
The switched line configuration consists of four
c~rds; transmit, receive, AA basic, and AA
interface.
The function of the transmitter and receiver
cards is the same as in the non-switched configurations except:
1.
Switched line is permanently wired for
two-wire operation including line transformers and transmit clamp.
2.
'Clear-to-send' delay is permanently wired
for 200 ms. 'Echo clamp' delay is permanently wired for 130 ms (in early machines
it is wired for 0 ms).
3.
Threshold control is permanently wired
for -43 dBm minimum level.
4.
'Data set ready' is controlled by the AA
cards.
The AA cards monitor control lines from the
CBS data coupler and generate signals to the
BSCA and coupler. 'Data modem ready' is
permanently on. 'Data terminal ready' being on
from the BSCA permits AA to detect ringing
signal from the coupler. AA signals 'off hook'
to the coupler, answering the phone. The AA
then generates a 3.5-second 2100-Hz answertone to the remote end and turns on
'Data set ready'. After the answertone is sent,
the line is under control of the transmitter.
receiver cards.
In order to do manual answer with a CBS data
coupler handset, 'data terminal ready' must be
held off by not being in communications mode.
EC 823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15n4
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619236
14·62
Switched Line
01·G09
Receive
~
f--
01~().G~0_2____- r _ ~~_am__PI_if_ie_r~
111
Receive
~_f_il_te_r__
-i..
~ ~
+ Receive data
Limiter
-
Discriminator -
______~
Shaping
~__~__~
<>
E1·004
+ Carrier detect
01·G10
-
0--
Threshold
"""
Delay
-
01·002
""
E1·805
"""
6
01·J11
,--....Q---l-~..r--'----------'
01·005
~
I:::::
01·011 01·012
01·G12
0--
Transmit
clamp
01·G13
L--o
Receive card
--- - ---------Transmit card
C1.J02
-
--- -
-
Il
E C h 0 : j C1-G08
clamp
130 ms
C1·G09
r-
t\
clgo7lll~
C--
Transmit
filter
.•
C1~G07
Modulator
1
C1·G12 25 ms
- 61 Pin 6 I
C1·G10
~r
(
C1·G13
C1·802
1 Pin 11 I
+ Request to send
C1·004
I
75 msl
0
C1·J12
J
,)-----c
send
delay
o
+ Transmit data
......
0
C1·J04
E1·003
CW05
Clear to
nlpin101
C1·803 •
----
+ Echo clamp
r-=-=-=cC1.011
C1·005
r-=
01 :J02
E1·002
+ Clear to send
200 ms
...
<>
C1·013
E1·005
-=- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --- -- --AA-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -
Data tip
00--+---[ )40--------'-------1-_-<>01 Pin 8
E2·005 A 1.GOi 82·802
T
()
......
Data ri ng
I
u~~------a-----.......=----------~....,
E2·812
I
82:006
,...
Data modem ready
o
E2·808
I
82·012
O_----C0)4I-----0- f-f _h_oo_k____~
E2·813
82·812
Switch hook
o
...
E2·807
82·813
......
...,
82-807
E2·805
o
E2-007
82·011
c
E2-009
Ring indicator
Coupler cut through
Signal ground
Data terminal ready
_ --,
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
~
82·808
I
I
I
I
-TI
Control logic
I
I
Pin 4
Ring indicator
...
.()
I
Data set ready
"""
82-809
"""
I
82-007
t 1
Analog
Commu·
nications
switch
t-----i
Answertone
2100 Hz
<>
E1·808
<>
E1-803
E1-804
3.5 sec
timer
82-008
Note: Pin xx refers to pin numbers on modem board.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619237
3741 M L
14-63
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
PN 1619238
Switched Line Configuration
14-64
Switched Line Transmit Level Adjustment
Procedure
The switched line configuration consists of the
basic modem and autoanswer.
It is used only in U.S. and requires a common
carrier type CBS automatic data coupler (series
5 or later) or equivalent. The local loop from
the serving central office must be a type II loop
for DATA-PHONE* or Data Access Arrangement (DAA).
Bl
Al
01
Cl
El
CD
u
";
The CBS coupler should be wired such that the
line adapter is connected to the line when the
associated telephone's handset is in its cradle
(exclusion key not operated). Conversely, the
exclusion key must be operated to use the handset for voice communication. The telephone
set ringer should be connected on the line side
of the exclusion key.
>
CD
"~
'i
Gi
"!
U
a::
...JU
CD
j!:
'"
~
0
u
.~
:g'"
Line Adapter Board
Transmit level
is continuously
adjustable, from
o dB to - 15 dB.
uu U
R1
The automatic answer is designed to recognize
the ringing signal from the data access arrangement, and signal 'off-hook' to the DAA if the
3741 is ready. It provides an answertone, and
transfers the line to the associated line adapter.
Turn off the 3741 main line power.
.8
.7
en
The following are fixed on the switched line
configuration:
There are no jumper options.
1.
• 6
The coupler must be mounted vertically~ TEST
and ANS switches must be off.
Half-duplex operation
2-wire operation
200 ms 'clear to send delay'
130 ms 'echo clamp delay' (early machines are 0 ms)
-43 dBm receiver sensitivity
.11
.10
The transmit level must be adjusted at the transmit card to match the level specified for the data
coupler. Also, the autoanswer basic card must
be jumpered for that same transmit level.
(Use dB meter PIN 453545)
Adjust the transmitter output:
R2
~
\
R3/
Space frequency (sealed)
Mark frequency (sealed)
Switched Line Adapter Board
The switched line configuration is built on the
switched line adapter board assembly which
provides socket positi ons for:
Receive card
Transmit card
AA interface card
AA basic card
BSCA cable
Line coupler cable
Socket 01,02
Socket C 1, C2
Socket B2
Socket A 1, A2
Socket El
Socket E2
* American Telephone and Telegraph
Transmit Card
-dB level
A
0 ·1
·2 ·3 ·4 ·5 ·6 ·7 ·8 ·9 ·10 ·11 ·12 ·13 ·14 ·15
X
X
B
C
0
X
X
X
X
E
F
G
7)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
X
X
X
x"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
J
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
K
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Jumper/the attenuator pins in accord with this chart,
to match level requirements of the line coupler.
~D
o
:DDD
,Autoanswer B"asic Card.
Jumper as shown.
Autoanswer interface card.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
PN 1619239
3741 ML
14-65
EC
823146
Date 9115n4
826065
PN 1619240
14-66
8/1n5
Call Sequence
Manual Answer Sequence
Autoanswer Sequence
Manual Call Sequence
In order to perform manual answer operation,
the 3741 should not be in communications mode.
(If the 3741 is set up for communications before
a call is received, autoanswer sequence will take
place.) Lifting the handset causes the SH, OH,
and CCT to turn on. After answering the phone,
the operator sets up the 3741 for the appropriate
communications mode T, P, B, R, or 0 causing
DTR to turn on. To go to data mode the handset is replaced causing DSR to come on and
data transmission takes place. If there is no
operator intervention, automatic disconne~ion
will occur at the completion of communications.
To perform autoanswer function, the 3741
is set up in appropriate communications mode.
This causes 'data terminal ready' to come on
and enables the autoanswer. The autoanswer
detects signals on 'ring indicator' and turns on
'off hook' to the coupler. This causes 'coupler
cut through' to come on when the line adapter
is connected to the line. AA then sends the
answertone and turns on 'data set ready'.
After data communications, the BSCA disconnects by dropping 'data terminal ready'
which turns off 'off hook'.
To make a manual call, the operator sets up the
machine for the appropriate communications
mode, T, P, R, B, or 0 causing the BSCA to turn
on DTR. At this point the operator lifts the
handset, raises the exclusion key, and places the
call to the remote end. This causes SH, OH, and
CCT to turn on. To go to data mode, the handset is replaced causing DSR to turn on and data
transmission to take place. If there is no operator
intervention, the BSCA will drop DTR causing
disconnection at the completion of communication.
At Feature
Half Planar
Replace
handset
Lift
handset
Auto
disconne ct
Raise
key
T Mode
L
DTR (1-N-D07)
(BSCA to modem )
J
DSR (1-N-D12)
(modem to BSCA)
At Feature
Half Planar
Replace
Answer phone
(Lift Handset)
handset
Phone
Auto
Set-up
ings
disconnec
modeT
DTR (1-N-D07)
(BSCA to modem )
II
DSR (1-N-D12)
(modem to BSCA)
Set up Communication
Mode (Phone Rings)
At '=eature
Half Planar
....
DTR (1-N-D07)
(BSCA to modem )
L
DSR (1-N-D12)
(modem to BSCA )
At data coupler
At data coupler
At c:Dupler
DA (modem
to coupler)
DA (modem
to coupler)
DA (modem
to coupler)
RI (coupler
to modem)
SH (coupler
. to modem)
OH (modem
to coupler)
CCT (coupler
·to modem)
:L
II
J
OH (modem
to coupler)
CCT (coupler
to modem)
SH (coupler
to modem)
.n
L
I
I
.n
OH (modem
to coupler)
.LJ
SH (coupler
to modem)
Answertone
...
I
RI (coupler
to modem)
CCT (coupler
to modem)
Auto
Discon nect
l
L
1
I
//
V~
WT PUBLIC SWITCHED NETWORK (PSN)
This feature consists of a 1200 bps line adapter
(modem) and a line plate assembly (coupler).
The 3.5-second answertone is sent by the feature
half planar before binary communications starts.
Line Adapter Description
This modem is permanently wired for 2-wire
operations.
The modem consists of four cards: transmit,
receive, equalizer, and PSN cards.
Line Plate Assembly Description
The transmit card takes serial binary data and
converts it to frequency-shift modulated analog
data. Binary zeros are sent as a mark frequency
of 1300 Hz and binary ones are sent as a space
frequency of2100 Hz. On the transmit card,
'echo clamp' is permanently wired for 130 milliseconds (early boards are wired for zero delay).
'Clear to send delay' is permanently wired for 200
milliseconds. The maximum output transmit
level is -1.8 dBm. Since the dB drop of the line
plate is typically 3 dB (maximum of 5 dB), the
maximum output of the line plate to the telephone lines is typically -5 dBm.
The line plate assembly monitors the telephone
lines and couples the modem to the telephone
lines.
.
With 'CDSTL' at a down level ('transfer relay'
off), lifting the handset (if so equipped) causes
the telephone line current to flow through a
optical isolation diode. If the telephone rings,
alternating current flows through both optical
isolation diodes. The current through these
diodes causes the 'current detect' lines to go to
a down level (logical one).
The receive card takes analog frequency-shiftkey (FSK) data from the telephone lines and
converts it to serial binary data. The threshold
control is permanently wired for -43 dBm. Signals whose levels are less than -43 dBm will cause
the received data to go to all zeros.
With CDSTL on ('transfer relay' on) the telephone lines are connected through a full-wave
diode bridge.and a dc isolation transformer to
the modem's transmitter and receiver. The dc
current through the transformer's primary and
secondary should be approximately balanced for
linear ac operation. This is done by adjusting
the dc resistance with jumpers U4-U 11 (see 533).
The equalizer card amplifies the space frequency
and attenuates the mark frequency. Therefore,
all evaluations of the received telephone signal
should be made at the space frequency of 2100
Hz.
If no handset is used, a handset can be electrically simulated by the R-C network at
U2-U3 (see 533).
The PSN card monitors the 'current detect' lines
from the line plate and generates 'data set ready'
(DSR) and 'ring indicate' (RI) to the feature
half planar. DSR comes on with 'connect
data set to line' (CDSTL) or if one 'current detect' line stays on (down level) for 40 milliseconds. If both 'current detect' lines are
changing state at a rate faster than 15 Hz, the
RI line comes on (up level). CDSTL is buffered
on the PSN card and its up level causes the line
plate's relay to couple the modem's data line to
the telephone lines.
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1/75
EC
PN 1619241
3741 ML
14·67
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1115
EC
EXPANDED COMMUNICATIONS
(EBSCA) FEATURE
The Expanded Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (EBSCA) feature allows the
machine to function as a point to point, or multipoi ... tributary terminal. The basic BSCA function allows data transmission using EBCDIC
directly as the communications line code. Operation is half duplex over private line, common
carrier non-sw~tched line, or a common carrier
switched network. The mode of transmission
is synchronous, serial-by-bit, and serial-bycharacter.
Operation
When in communications mode the EBSCA controller makes use of the MPU microcontroller,
the disk unit controller, and the microcontroller
buffer interface and the display unit controller
to:
1.
Perform all disk functions such as read
or write, write checking or checking, or .
updating information on the index track.
2.
Transfer~ data
3.
between the disk unit and
the EBSCA controller. The transfer in
transmit mode is from the disk unit to
the buffer, to the E BSCA controller data
register, to the modem. In receive mode
the flow is reversed.
Display status, error codes and CPU ID
information for review by the operator.
The communications modes are:
T To transmit unblocked data
P -~·o "lransmit unblocked hex data
R To receive data only (blocked or unblocked)
B To transmit unblocked data, auto-turn
around, and receive data
D To transmit unblocked hex data, autoturn around, and receive
J Transmit blocked data
K Transmit blocked data, auto-turn around
and receive
Inquiry
W Execute CE Test Modes
PN 1619242
The EBSCA controller also performs the serializing/deserializing function on the data transmitted or received.
Transmit
Selected
Records
If execute program mode is to be used (model 4)
Sector 3 of track 0 must be set up as follows:
Columns 2 through 15 should contain the
object data set name, drive number and
object program name.
Column 21 should contain an E for execute or an A for compress.
If print unattended operation is to be done and
format A points to another format buffer, that
format must be selected before entering
communications.
I
14-68
Place equal sign (=) wherever
character in that corresponding position in data
record is not to be compared.
Place 'compare' characters
in all other positions.
Unlike formats, there is no 'E' (ending) character
in these marks (programs). The transmit masks
are compared to the record length being transmitted; any other positions in the buffer are
ignored. For the receive mask, the number of
first character (» must equal the number of
characters being received on the line. The
duplicate data ends at the first non-blank character
in the mask. The last duplicate character cannot
be a blank. The record length is the sum of the
characters plus the dupiicate data characters.
If blocked records are to be transmitted (J or
Examples of masks (programs) are given in the
K modes) and a transmit selected fields or trans-
3741 Data Station Reference Manual, GA21-
mit se'lected records mask (program) is needed,
or if blocked records are to be received and a
receive data mask (program) is needed, the
operator must create the mask (program) before
entering communications.
9183.
The procedure for generating one of these
masks (program) is similar to the procedure for
creating formats. The masks can be created
in format buffers 8, 9, and/or A. The first character is the definition character.
1st
Char
Mask
(Program) Other Positions in the buffer
>
Receive
data and
insert
constants
Place first character (»
wherever character from line
is to be inserted. Place duplicate data at all other
locations.
Transmit
Selected
Fields
(1st char
transmitted)
Place quote (") wherever
character in that corresponding position in a data
record is to be transmitted.
Transmit
Selected
Fields
(1st character not
transmitted)
Place quote (") wherever
character in that corresponding position in a data
record is to be transmitted.
An operator can select communications mode
from update or read index modes only. Upon
selection of the communications mode from
index mode or update mode, the data set label
will be checked for valid extents (BOE, EOE,
EOD) and for HDR1. If the extents are not
valid a B error is posted. If the extents are
valid the following steps occur:
1.
If the key lock is present, it must be
unlocked.
2.
If terminal 10 is present, the terminal 10
is read and stored in the previous buffer.
Terminal 10 and multipoint features are
mutually exclusive.
3.
If terminal 10 is present, the cursor must
be at position 16 or less. All positions
below the cursor are assumed to be the
CPU 10, or input for wrap test 1, and are
transferred to the buffer. The CPU 10
must be entered before communications
mode is selected and must be 15 characters
or less. If no CPU lOis entered, the
BSCA controller will accept any 10 from
the Remote end.
4.
The second disk feature will be set to
record 00007 on the index track.
If a failure occurs in steps 1 or 3, an H error is
posted. Step 4 could result in posting disk
errors.
The record at the current address position of
disk 1 is read and a C for communications is
posted as the mode indicator in the status line of
the display (positions 38). If print unattended
mode is desired, the FUNCT SEL upper
followed by print EOO keys must be pressed.
In this case, the AUTO REC AOV switch must
be on or an H error will be posted.
If execute program mode is desired, the E key
must be pressed.
Note: Unattended printing and execute program mode are mutually exclusive and attempting to select both will result in an H error.
On switched lines and if the operator will be
dialing the call, the M key must then be pressed.
The I, J, K, T, P, R, B, or 0 key must then be
pressed to select the function desired. Pressing
the M key must be omitted if the 3741 will be
answering a call, or if on leased lines, or if
using inquiry mode.
On switched lines, pressing the M key indicates
to the EBSCA controller that it is calling and
therefore will transmit a line bid first, regardless
of the mode. Not pressing the M key tells the
EBSCA controller to wait for a line bid. On
non-switched line the M key is not required because the station in transmit mode will transmit a line bid first. On non-switched multipoint lines the M key is not required because
the station always looks for its address first.
If inquiry mode is selected, the record length
of the data set from which communications was
entered must be 128. If not an H error is posted.
An H error is also posted if the operator has
first pressed FUNCT SEL upper and PRINT
TO EOO, and then attempts to strike one of
the transmit keys (T, P, or J), the inquiry key
( I), or the test mode key (W).
The letter key pressed will replace the C in the
status line. If the 10 reader is installed, a B will
be posted on the status line in position 39. The
badge can then be inserted and read into the
buffer or the REC AOV key can be pressed to
skip the 10 reader functions as in 3741 to 3741
communications.
If the R key is pressed and if a receive data and
insert constants mask is being used for the first
data set and communications was entered from
update mode, a check is made of the mask
length (the number of dup characters plus>
(greater than) signs). This length must match
the record length of the current data set or
an H error is posted.
The EBSCA controller then checks jumper 4.
It can be in OTR (data terminal ready) or
COSTL (connect data set to line) mOde. The
OTR mode is generally used for switched lines
and the COSTL generally for non-switched line
communications.
EC
823146
Date 9/1Sn4
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619243
3741 ML
14-69
823146
826065
Date 9/15174
8/1175
EC
In CDSTL mode, the EBSCA controller then
looks for 'data set ready' (DSR), or the 'ring
indicator' (RI) to come up 1m. When either
is detected, communications will proceed. If
the EBSCA controller detects that the send
answertone strap is on, the first transmission
is three seconds of space (logical 0).
In DTR mode the EBSCA controller will check
for 'data set ready' (DSR) being off, then it
will bring 'data terminal ready' (DTR) up
The operator will then place the call if this is
the calling station. After the data set button
on the modem is pressed causing DSR to come
on, the controller will make or wait for a line
bid and exchange ID codes. From this point
on, CDSTL and DTR operation is identical
and is dependent on the operator selected
mode, transmit, receive.
E1 .
Data terminal ready (DTR)
Data set ready (DS R)
Request to send (RTS)
Clear to send (CTS)
Transmitted data (TD)
In the T, B, D,P, K, or J transmit modes, the
ID reader code will be transmitted followed by
data records.
If communications mode was selected from update mode, the record at the current address and
all records from this one to the end of the data
set will be transmitted. If this mode was selected
from index mode, the current label will be checked
to see that the bypass data set position (position
41) does not contain a B, before the data set
is transmitted. If a B is found, the EBSCA controller causes a search for another data set to be
transmitted.
a
DTR
•
DSR
RTS
CTS
Timing Sequence - DTR Mode
-
-
TD
III Timing Sequence -
Data set ready (DS R)
Data terminal ready (DTR)
Request to send (RTS)
Clear to send (CTS)
Transmitted data (TD)
tawa
CDSTL Mode
____~----------------------J
DSR1 ____
DTR ____
. ._ . ._ . . . . . . . . . .
--
~_._
RTS
•
CTS
TD
1 - DSR may be permanently on
(typical of non-switched line modems)
OR
Ring indicator (RI)
Data terminal ready (DTR)
Data set ready (DS R)
Request to send (RTS)
Clear to send (CTS)
Transmitted data (TD)
RI
•
DTR __~""_""""""""
DSR ____~. ._. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
RTS
CTS
TD
PN
1619244
14-70
Transmit Mode (T or P) (Unblocked Data)
The records (1 to 128 characters) to be sent are
read from the disk into the field totals or hold
buffers. Reading records is controlled by the
disk unit controller and the microcontroller/
buffer interface. The transmitting of records is
under control of the EBSCA controller and the
microcontroller/buffer interface. Therefore, the
reading and transmitting of records takes place
simultaneously. As a record is being read into
one buffer, the previous record is being transmitted from the other buffer. Data is transmitted
one record at a time, serial-by-bit, serial-by-byte.
A positive response from the receive end will
initiate the transmitting of the next record and
the reading of the following record ..
Data is transferred from the field totals or hold
buffer one byte at a ti me to the data register
on the EBSCA controller. From the data
register it is transferred serially by bit to the
transmit line.
Transmitting continues until the last record
of the data set is sent. At this time, the disk is
returned to the index track to look for another
data set to transmit. All data sets which contain
an HDR1 and do not contain a B in the bypass
data set position of the label and which have
a label record number higher than the one just
transmitted, will be transmitted. When the
second disk feature is installed, any H D R1 data
set on that disk which does not contain the B
in the bypass position of the label will also be
transmitted.
If an invalid label is found, which is not a bypass
data set, communications will be terminated
with the appropriate error code displayed.
When there are no more data sets to be transmittE!d, the EBSCA controller will send the end of
transmissions sequence (EOT) and post a T in
position 39 of the status line, reSUlting in TT or
PT mode.
A null record is always transmitted between
data sets and before the EOT sequence. If a data
set is continued on disk 2, the first valid data set
on disk 2 is sent as a continuation of this data
set. If position 45 of the data set label contains
a C and the second disk is not ready, transmission
will terminate and a 0 error is posted.
Note: P mode must be used if hex data is to
be transmitted.
Blocked Transmit Mode (J)
In this mode records are read into the hold
buffer and transferred into one of two 512-byte
buffers. (One 512-byte buffer consists of format
buffers 1, 2, 3, and 4; the other consists of format buffers 5, 6, 7, and 8).
Transmit/Receive Mode (B, 0, or K)
If the mode is B, 0, or K, the transmit sequence
is identical to the T, P, or J mode respectively.
However, when all data sets have been transmitted, the EBSCA controller causes the disk
to be positioned at EOE + 1 of the last transmitted data set. The first received data set
label is the first valid data set label after the
last data set transmitted. On switched lines,
the controller will wait 20 seconds for a line
bid. If none is received, a C error will be posted
on the display and a line disconnect will be made.
The controller will then wait for a call, which
will put the controller into a receive mode. On
leased lines there is no time out, "C" error, or
disconnect.
Receive Mode (R)
The mask (program) that was entered into format buffer 6 will be moved internally to another
location while format buffer 8 is used for data.
The mask (program) that is currently being used
is loaded in the field totals buffer. If a mask is
used, the records being transferred from the
hold buffer are compared character for character
against the mask before using transferred to a
512-byte buffer.
After each record is inserted into the 512-bvte
buffer, an I RS (inter-record separator) character
is inserted. Only an integer number of records
are stored, that is, three 128-byte records. As
with T or P modes, these 512-byte buffers are
transmitted alternately one being 'filled' while
the other is being transmitted. After communications is complete, the masks (programs) are
restored to format buffers 8,9, and A and the
field totals buffer. Except for the above, this
mode is similar to T or P mode.
In this mode, in addition to data-link control
characters, the I RS and I FS (inter field separator)
characters can not appear in the data stream
(data records).
Data is received serially by bit, serially by character in blocks. It is assembled in the EBSCA
controller data register and transferred one byte
at a time to one of two 512-byte buffers as used
to transmit mode (J).
Receive mode can receive blocked or non-blocked
data. The non-blocked data (1-128 character /
block) will alternately be put in the format
buffers 2 and 6.
In the blocked mode (1-512 characters/block),
data will be alternately put into the two 512-byte
buffers (defined in blocked transmit mode (J)).
The I RS character sent after each record is not
put into the buffer. A 512-byte buffer does not
have to be full to overlap to the other buffer.
Therefore, any block length from 1-512 can be
received.
While data is being received into one 512-byte
buffer, the data in the other 512-byte buffer is
being moved to the disk (hold) buffer a record
at a time. When the disk buffer is full, the write,
write check, and increment are started. If a
buffer of data is received before the previous
buffer has been written to disk, WACKs will be
sent at two-second intervals. This is to keep
the line up until the response to the block of
data can be sent. In this way all forming of
records and disk operations are overlapped with
the receiving of data.
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
826065
8/1n5
After a complete data set has been received, the
controller will cause the data set label to be updated in several positions. These are record
length, end of extent, end of data and beginning
of extent. The record length will equal the
length of the records received. EOE will be the
address of the last record written. EOO is one
greater than EOE. BOE is the location of the
first record in the data set. BOE is the location
of the first record in the data set. BOE is unchanged on the first data set received if the
operator selected receive mode. If any of the
transmit modes has been utilized or more than
one data set is received, BOE is set to one
record address greater than the EOE of the last
data set transmitted or received. The multivolume indicator is also updated.
If another data set is to be received, the EBSCA
controller searches for the next valid data set
label. It will internally establish a BOE which is
equal to EOE plus one (or EOO) of the data set
just received and then position the disk to receive the next data set. Disk 2, if installed,
appears as an extension to disk 1. If a data set
overflows from disk 1 to disk 2, a C is placed
in position 45 (multivolume indicator) of the
data set label on disk 1. The rest of the data set
will be received on disk 2 and an L will be
placed in position 45 of the first label used on
disk 2. If a record is written in position 73026
on disk 1, and this is not the last record of the
data set, the next record will be written on disk
2 record 01001. If in this case the second disk
feature is not installed or the second disk is not
in a ready state, (no diskette inserted, etc.), a
o error is posted, communications are terminated,
and a J is posted in position 39 of the status line.
Any error or operator intervention will cause
the EBSCA controller to go to a disconnect
sequence in which the error code is posted on
the display and is sent to the other station as
part of the status message.
PN 1619245
3741 ML
14-71
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1175
Inquiry Mode
RESET Key
Inquiry mode is basically an attended transmitreceive mode. It can be selected from the index
track, in which case a seek to BOE will occur,
the screen will be blanked, and the internal
EODwili be set equal to BOE. It can also be
selected from update mode, in which case only
the screen will be blanked.
The RESET key can be used to terminate
communications mode at any time. If data has
transferred, an S error will be posted. The controller will then proceed with the normal error
disconnect sequence and take the machine out
of communications mode. If the RESET
key is pressed twice or is pressed following an
error, the 3741 will leave communications mode
immediately. (See inquiry mode for exceptions.)
The operator enters a message of length 1-128
characters, and presses FUNCT SEL upper and
S. The record will be written to disk at the internal EOD. When the 3741 is polled by the
CPU, it will send the inquiry message. Then
after the CPU selects the 3741, or immediately
the CPU will send the responses to the inquiry
message. The responses may be a different
length than the inquiry message, but they will
all be written on the disk at length 128.
All responses are combined into the one data
set. Therefore, a null data set is ignored in
inquiry mode, and the update to the data set
label is down when an EOT is received. After
the update, the code is returned to the inquiry
. key loop with the disk positioned at the first
response received. The operator may key in
another message, or look at the responses
received.
The transmission of the inquiry message is done
in unblocked mode. The receiving of the
responses can be blocked or unblocked. However, there isn't any masking in inquiry mode.
Inquiry is supported for operation on a multipoint line using multipoint line control. However, it is still possible to select inquiry mode on
point-to-point lines and not have an error posted.
The RESET key during the transmitting or
receiving of data under inquiry mode will not
exit EBSCA, but will return the code to the
inquiry key loop, except when a D error is
posted.
EBSCA CE Test Mode (W)
This mode is used if any of the six CE tests are
to be executed. The test number to be executed
must be entered in column 1 of the CRT before
entering communications. If test 1 is selected,
columns 2 through 15 contain the data to be
transmitted.
See Diagnostic Aids Expanded Communications
(EBSCA) Test Procedures in Section 8, for details
about the test modes.
PN 1619246
14-72
EBSCA Error Logout
When in R, T, P, B, D, j, K, % mode or I mode
after FUNCT SEL upper and S are pressed, or
when in W mode in tests 1, 2, 3, or 4, the bottom line on the display shows the following:
Mode depends on operation.
............
001
Position
* 1
* 4
* 7
*10
**14' 16
**19' 21
**24' 26
**29' 31
* Note:
** Note:
0
01~
A
A
001
004 000 001
Meaning
Data terminal ready.
Data set ready
Request to sen d.
Clear to send.
CRC checks in receive.
NAKs received in transmit.
Two-secon'd ti meouts.
Three-second timeouts
1
1
I
0
II
o
1 indicates on; 0 indicates off.
Three-position decimal counts.
The logout is displayed on the bottom line of
the display during EBSCA operation.
Whenever the EBSCA controller turns on the
data terminal ready interface line (1-N-D07), it
displays a 1 in position 1. When it turns off,
it displays a O. Likewise, when it turns on
request 1·N-B13 to send it displays a 1 in position 7. When it turns it off, it displays a O.
When the EBSCA controller detects the 'data set
ready' (1-N-D12) interface line is on from the
modem, it displays a 1 in position 4. Wh,en 'data
set ready' is off it displays a O. Likewise, if
'clear to send' (1-N-B10) is on, it displays a 1 in
position 10. Whenever it goes off, it displays
During receive operations, a running count is
maintained of all CRC checks, where transmitted
block check characters (BCC) do not match
those calculated by the EBSCA controller. This
count is displayed in positions 14, 15, and 16.
This is an indication of the number of transmission blocks received with errors that required
retransmission.
During communications, a count is maintained
of two-second time-outs in positions 24, 25, and
26. These time-outs may occur during unusually
long disk operations such as a long seek. During
receive operations, this would indicate the
number of WACKs (wait acknowledgment)
sent. In transmit mode, it would indicate the
number of TTDs sent.
During a transmit mode, a count of NAKs (negative acknowledgments) that are received is displayed in positions 19,20, and 21. These NAKs
have been received from the remote station as
a result of data blocks received in error, TTDs
(temporary text delays), or remote NAKs to a
line bid.
Also during communications, a count of threesecond time-outs is displayed in positions 29, 30,
and 31. These time-outs occur whenever there
is a three-second period of inactivity on the
communication line. During a 20-second disconnect time-out on switched lines, this counter
is incremented seven times.
a O.
All four counters are initialized to 000 when
communications mode is entered or on any subsequent call after an error has occurred.
Note: When short records are transmitted in
blocked (J or K) mode, 'clear to send' may not
be logged on or may be on only a short time.
This is because the controller is busy reading and
buffering records. The actual operation of 'clear
to send' may be checked at the modem cable
interface (1-N-B10).
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619247
3741 ML
14-73
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
EBSCA Line Control Sequences
Transmitted Blocked Record
Line Bid
3741 Transmits
3741 Transmits
P P P SSE P
AAAYYNA
DDDNNOD
P P P S S S (Record
AAAYYT 1 to 128
DDDNNX Chars)
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
(Record
R'1 to 128
S Chars)
R
S
Response to Line Bid
Status Message
3741 Transmits .p P P S S A P
AAAYYCOA
DDDNNK
0
Whenever the 3741 terminates communications
on an error (except remote abort, negative line
bid response and modem not ready) it will
attempt to send a status message to the remote
end:
PN1619248
14-74
E b b P
T c c A
B c c 0
Transmitted Unblocked Record
P P P SSE P
AAAYYNA
DDDNNOD
3741 Transmits
3741
P P P S S S (Record Ebb P
A A A Y Y T 1 to 128 T c c A
o DON N X Chars) B c c 0
Remote
End
P P P S S S
AAAYYO
o DON N H
PPPSSA
P
AAAYYCOA
DDDNNK
0
P P P S SSE b b P
AAAYYTTccA
DDDNNXXc cD
X char)
Ebb P
T c c A
X c c 0
P P P SSE P
AAAYYOA
DDDNNTD
,P P P S S A P
AAAYYC 1 A
DDDNNK
0
Transmitted Null Record
After the 3741 transmits the last record of a
data set, it will send a null record to the remote
end to signify the end of the data set:
S
% V T (error
BSCA Line Control Characters
Description
Mnemonic
Hex
Start of heading!
Start of text
Inter-record separator
Intermediate block character
End of transmission block
End of text
Enquiry
Negative acknowledge
End of transmission
Synchronous idle
Data link escape
Even acknowledge
Odd acknowledge
Wait before transmit
Disconnect
Reverse interrupt2
Temporary text delay
Leading pad
Trailing pad
SOH
STX
IRS
ITB
ETB
ETX
ENQ
NAK
EOT
SYN
DLE
ACKO
ACK 1
WACK
DISC
RVI
TTD
PAD
PAD
01
02
lE
IF
26
03
20
3D
37
32
10
10,70
10,61
10,6B
10,37
10,7C
02,2D
AA
FF
In transparent mode, STX, ITB, ETX, ETB, SYN,
ENQ, TID, and OLE are preceded by OLE.
1
3741 treats SOH the same as STX.
2
RVI is recognized as a positive acknowledgment
by the 3741, however it will not relinquish the
line.
Data Flow
The data path and register control lines extend
from the MPU planar to the feature half planar
via cross connectors and are terminated at a
register. All data transfer between the EBSCA
controller and MPU planar is via this data path
and register. The EBSCA adapter performs the
serialize-deserialize function, timing, and control
functions necessary to interface to the modem.
The EIA drivers and receivers convert EBSCA
adapter logic levels to the required EIA levels.
The microprogram to drive the EBSCA controller
is contained in Read Only Storage (ROS)
mounted on the EBSCA ROS card and interfaces to the MPU planar and feature half planar
ROS at 1-E and 1-F.
Modem Cable
The modem cable interfaces to the BSCA at l-N.
This interface conforms to EIA-RS-232 in the
US, and CCITTv.24 in WT. For signal lines,
'-transmit data' and 'receive data', a negative
voltage is a logic 1 or mark. For all other lines,
positive voltage indicates on, negative voltage
indicates off. Positive levels may be +3 to +25
volts. Negative levels may be -3 to -25 volts.
Socket 1-N
Line Name
Request to send
Transmit data
Receive data
Clear to send
Serial clock transmit
Serial clock receive
Signal ground
Data set ready
Ring indicator
Carrier detect
Rate selector
Data terminal ready
SCTE
Frame ground
+12 Vdc
-12 Vdc
Test mode
Test clock
B13
B12
B11
Bl0
B09
B08
B07
012
011
010
008
007
006
002
004
013
009
Modem Cable
Half Planar End
Modem End
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
B03
B04
B05
B07
B08
B09
FRAME
B13
Bll
B02
B06
4
2
3
5
15
17
7
6
22
8
23
20
24
18
25
'+ Test mode' and '+ test clock' are held negative during normal communications. '+ Test
mode will go positive during test modes 2 and
3. '+ Test clock' is allowed to run when '+ test
mode' is positive. '+Test clock' has a 1-millisecond period.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
PN 1619249
3741 ML
14-75
EC
823146
Date 9115/74
826065
8/1/75
Detail Cross Connectors to MPU Planar
Socket 2-0 - MPU Planar Cross Connector
Most data patch and register control lines are
routed via socket Q with a few in socket F.
Pin
Signal
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
-12 volts
-Bit 6 data path
-Bit 3 data path
-Bit 2 data path
-Bit 1 data path
-Bit 0 data path
-Gate Bm
-Printer select
+Speed select switch
-BSCA select
+System reset (POR)
-Reg gate control 0
-Bit 5 data path
+12 volts
-Bit 4 data path
-Gate out
-1 ms clock
-Ground
- Reset gate B
+Reg select decode 0
-Gate A
+Reg select decode 1
+Reset A III
-Select 4
When in communications mode, '-BSCA select'
should be negative (down leve!), and '-printer
select' should be positive. Data is transferred
via the data path bits
m.
'-Select 4', 'reg select decode 0' and '1', '-reg
gate control 0' and '1' control gating into the
data register. '-Reg gate control 0'
and '1'
are clocks from the MPU.
D
II
II '
The EBSCA controller uses '-gate out'
'-gate B'
'+reset A' II , and '-reset-gate
B' to generate timings in sync with the microcontroller.
m'
The EBSCA controller also uses '-1 ms clock' and
'+reset CS counter' to generate timings. '1 ms
clock' is a square wave with a 1-millisecond period.
'+Reset CS counter' is a 60-millisecond positive
pulse that repeats every 24 milliseconds (approximately).
EBSCA controller uses '-10.8 Hz' to generate
time-outs.
'+Speed select switch' will always be positive
for high baud rate unless:
1.
2.
All logic levels in sockets Q and F, are +8.5
volts except '+speed select switch', which is
+5 volts.
'-EBSCA ROS reset' is generated on the feature
half planar from '-BSCA select' and '-ROS reset'
and is the reset to the EBSCA ROS card. When
'-BSCA select' is off, the '-EBSCA ROS reset'
holds the ROS card reset (inactive). When
communications mode is selected, the '-EBSCA
ROS reset' is allowed to toggle.
14-76
II
m
II
II
II
Socket 2-E - MPU Planar Cross Connector Signal
Pin
Signal
B02
ROS reset pin
Speed select jumper is at low speed, or
BAUD SELECT switch is set at 600 bps
(WT Only).
PN 1619250
Socket 2-F - MPU Planar Cross Connector
Pin
Signal
011
009
007
B13
B12
Bl1
Bl0
B08
B07
B06
B05
B03
+Reset CS counter
+5 volts
Ground
+24 volts
-10.8 Hz
-Reg gate control 1 II
-Bit / data patch
-5 volts
+8.5 volts
-5 volts
+Reset R
-EBSCA ROS reset
II
2
13
EBSCA Controller
Reset Gate B
Reset A
Gate out
Gate B
1 ms clock
Reset CS cntr
Clocks
1
II
To
Full
Planar
EIA
drivers
Register
Data path bits 0-7
Register
control
lines
BSCA select
Select 4
Reg gate control 0
Reg gate control 1
Reg sel decode 0
Reg sel decode 1
EIA
receivers
1
Jumpers
erminal
ID
BSCA
features
10 or
reader
card
Keylock
multipoint
card
Sync
clock
card
Multipoint
Audible
Alarm
10
reader
16 J1s
Machine cycle 1_
m
-Gate out
ID
-Gate B
II
+Reset A
[I
-Reg gate
control 0
.
I
•
-Reg gate
control 1
EC 823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN
1619251
3741 ML
14·77
EC 823146
9/15/74
EBSCA Packaging
826065
PN 1619252
8/1/75
I
14-78
. ID Reader Cable P o s i t i o n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
Keylock Cable Position--------------,
The EBSCA controller is packaged on the feature
half planar and EBSCA ROS card.
Multipoint Audible Alarm Cable Position-----.
The socket positions are assigned as follows:
Jumper F i e l d - - - - - - - - - - - ,
aa
Socket
00 0
N
000 00
1-N
1-P
1-0
1-R
1-E
-
1-F
-
1-G
1-H
1-S
1-T
1-U
1-V
1-W
1-X
1-Y
-
1-Z
-
Modem cable
Printer signal cable
Cross connector to MPU planar
Printer signal cable
Cross connector to MPU planar and
EBSCA ROS card
Cross connector to MPU planar and
EBSCA ROS card
Cross connector to MPU planar (memory)
Cross connectorto MPU planar (memory)
Card socket (memory)
Card socket (memory)
Test socket
Card socket (sync clock card)
Card socket (I D reader card)
Card socket (lD reader card)
Card socket (terminal ID or multipoint
card)
Card socket (terminal ID or multipoint
card)
Sockets 1-P and 1- R are used only if a printer
adapter is packaged on the same feature board.
Sockets 1-G, 1-H, 1-S, and 1-T are used only to
provide connections for the memory card to the
.MPU planar. There is no direct connection
:between the memorY card and the EBSCA even
though the memory card is mounted on the
feature half planar.
E
--
F
p
Q
G
R
H
Feature Half Planar Socket Location
3741 Model 2 Features with EBSCA
Synchronous Clock
When modems are attached that do not have their
own clocking, the synchronous clock feature
provides a clock to EBSCA controller. The synchronous clock feature is mounted in 1-V and provides a 153.6-kHz oscillator pulse to the EBSCA.
From this oscillator, the EBSCA generates a
1200-Hz clock for 1200-bps operation or a
600-Hz clock for 600-bps (baud rate) operation.
When the synchronous clock card is installed in
1-V, the 153.6-kHz oscillator may be probed
at 1-U-B07. The 1200- or 600-Hz cI ock is at
1-U-B02.
Speed, 600 or 1200 bps, is determined by speed
select jumper or speed select switch (WTC) if
installed.
The BSCA includes self-correction logic to
synchronize clock (1-U-B02) with received data,
(1-N-B11) in receive mode.
P P P S S
AAAVV
o DON N
OR
P P P S S
AAAVV
o DON N
Operator 10 Card Reader
A
5
E
xxxN
0
P
A
0
A
5
P
A
x x xC OA
0
K
This feature is used to read an operator identification card and transmit the information to a
CPU, which is programmed to accept only valid
sequences.
The operator 10 card reader feature consists of
two parts: the I0 reader, which sets on the
3741 table top, and the 10 reader card, which is
mounted in 1-W and 1-X. The 10 reader is
ready when TB, JB, KB, IB, BB, DB, or PB is
displayed. As the card is inserted, the mpgnetically encoded data is read, and the data signal
is sent to the EBSCA controller. The data
signal is sent to the 10 reader card where it is
decoded. Decoded information is then transferred serially to the EBSCA controller where
the 10 characters are assembled. After the
complete lOis read, and the line connection
made with the CPU, the controller transmits
the 10.
A5 is hex representation for EBCDIC lower
case V.' x x x are th,e 3 10 characters programed on the terminal 10 feature card.
The second function is to compare a received
identification sequence of up to 15 characters
to a sequence keyed by the operator.
This function compare the terminal 10 sent by
the remote station to the one keyed in by the
operator. The operator keys this before entering
communications mode. The BSCA controller
detects the keyed sequence by the position of
the cursor. The cursor must be positioned after
the last keyed in character (15 or less). To bypass this feature, the cursor must be in position
1 when entering communications. Terminal
identification and multipoint features are
I D Reader Cable Position----------,
mutually exclusive on EBSCA.
Keylock Cable Position
Terminal Identification
Multipoint Audible Alarm Cable Position
This feature has two functions. One is to transmit a four-character terminal identification
sequence. The first character of the 3741
sequence is always an EBCDIC lower case,
alpha v (hex A5). The last three characters are
unique to each 3741 terminal and are programmed on the feature card. The unique 10 characters
are pre-assigned at the factory.
The last three characters of the 3741 terminal
10 sequence are programmed on this card, which
is installed at 1-V and 1-Z on the feature half
planar.
Keylock,
Jumper Field---------,
The keylock is an electrical switch that controls
the selection of communication mode. This
feature provides a keylock which controls selection of communications mode. With the keylock in the locked position, communications
mode can not be selected. In the unlocked position, the 3741 can be placed in communications
mode. Once the mode is selected, the keylock
can be placed in the locked position and the
terminal remains in this mode.
The 3741 will transmit its terminal 10 during
initial handshaking preceding the first ENO or
ACK 0 depending on the mode.
00 000
N
000 00
E
p
F
Q
G
R
H
Feature Half Planar Socket Location
EC 823146
9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619253
3741 ML
14-79
EC 823146
9/15174
826065
The format of the transmitted ID reader card
is:
L EBB
P P P S S S
A A A Y YO: (I D R CharLS) " R T C C
DDDNNH \
CBCC
n~
OlD
EaR
1 2
01 D - Operator Identification Character
EaR - End of Record Character
The I D reader card also provides regulated
voltage to the I D reader via the feature half
planar.
This feature can be bypassed, if the 3741 is
transmitting to another 3741, by pressing the
REC ADV key.
Multipoint Feature
The multipoint feature allows the EBSCA controller to function as a tributary station on a
multipoint or multidrop line.
The multipoint feature assumes one of two
states: message transfer state or control state.
In message transfer state,the feature continuously monitors the line for EaT. When it sees
EaT, it changes to control state and monitors
for its polling or selection address. When the
feature is in control state, seeing STX, SOH, or
DLE-STX on the line or a three-second time-out
without seeing SYN-SYN (character sync)
causes the feature to go back to message transfer
state, another EaT must be seen before the
feature will respond to its polling or selection
address. The feature assumes the message transfer state when powering up.
The multipoint address card provides jumpers
for the multipoint poll address and driver circuits for the audible alarm. The desired poll
address character (hex CO to hex FF) is chosen
from the chart. The corresponding selection
address characters is given next to the poll
address character. Note that they differ by
a hex 40. The polling address for the terminal
is the poll character repeated twice and the
polling sequence that must be sent to 3741 is:
P P SSE P
A A Y Y 'Cl' 'Cl' N A
D D N N
aD
The selection sequence for the same terminal
is:
'81'
14-80
The multipoint feature monitors the line
differently depending on whether the 3741 is
in communications mode or not. If the
machine is in communications mone, the microprogram in RDS exercises the EBSCA controller
and monitors the line. If the machine is not in
communications mode, (if it is in enter, verify,
or uodate, for instance), the EBSC':" controller
still monitors the line. If the controller receives
a valid selection sequence while in con ttol state,
it responds:
P P P S S
AAAYY
D D D N N
N
A
K
P
A
D
If the controller receives a polling sequence, it
resPil nds :
P P P S S
AAAYY
D D D N N
E
D
T
P
A
D
If the controller receives a polling sequence
after having responded NAK to a selection
sequence, it responds with status:
'Cl' used as example.
PPSS
A A Y Y '81'
DDNN
PN 1619254
8/1175
EP
N A
aD
If the 3741 is polled (polling sequence), the control station is looking for data and the 3741
must be in a transmit mode (T, P, D, B, J, or K)
to respond positively. If the 3741 is selected
(selection sequence), the control station wants
to transmit data and the 3741 must be in a
receive mode (R or receive portion of B, D, or
K modes) to respond positively.
P P P S S SSE B B P
AAAYYO%VTI TCCA
DDDNNH
X
XCCD
The slash (/) as the error indicator indicates that
the machine is offline and cannot respond affirm·
atively.
At the time the controller detects the selection
sequence it sounds the audible alarm for about
fivl~ seconds. This is to indicate that the master
station has data to send (selection) and that the
opl~rator should put the terminal into receive
mcde. The alarm is not sounded on the polling
sequence. In this case, it is assumed that if there
is data to send, the operator has set the machine
up in the appropriate transmit mode and is waiting for the poll.
Multipoint Alarm
Multipoint Addressing
For a given polling character, the corresponding select character is defined.
Multipoint
Alarm
Poll
Char
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Poll
Hex
Sel
Hex
Binary
CO
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
1100 0000
1100 0001
1100 0010
1100 0011
1100 0100
1100 0101
11000110
1100 0111
1100 1000
1100 1001
1100 1010
1100 1011
1100 1100
1100 1101
1100 1110
1100 1111
1101 0000
1101 0001
1101 0010
1101 0011
1101 0100
1101 0101
1101 0110
1101 0111
1101 1000
1101 1001
11011010
11011011
1101 1100
11011101
11011110
11011111
DO
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
~~
Poll
Char
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Poll
Hex
Sel
Hex
EO
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
AO
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
FO
BO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
2456765
Cable
- -......
Binary
1110 0000
1110 0001
1110 0010
1110 0011
1110 0100
11100101
11100110
1110 0111
1110 1000
1110 1001
1110 1010
11101011
1110 1100
11101101
11101110
11101111
1111 0000
1111 0001
1111 0010
1111 0011
1111 0100
1111 0101
1111 0110
11110111
1111 1000
1111 1001
1111 1010
11111011
1111 1100
11111101
1111 1110
1111 1111
2197244
1611353
Bracket
2596291
Clamp
~
jumpered on card
Select character in HEX
Poll character in HEX
Poll character
EC 823146
9/15/74
826065
811n5
PN 1619255
3741 ML
14-81
EC 823146
9/15/74
826065
8/1/75
Pages 14-83 through 14-100 are not used.
PN 1619256
14-82
DATA RECORDER ATTACHMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Data Recorder Attachment Theory.
Read Operation . • . . . .
Punch Operation. • . . . .
Control Nomenclature (Interface
Lines) • . . . • . .
IBM 129 Cable/Connector/Pin
Chart
. • . . . . . .
IBM 5496 Cable/Connector/Pin
Chart
Read Data Translation and
Compare . . . . . . .
Punch Data Translation
3741 Data Recorder Attachment
Data Flow. . . . . . .
.
.
.
. 14-101
. 14-101
. 14-103
DATA RECORDER ATTACHMENT THEORY
Refer to the IBM 129 Theory-Maintenance Manual,
SY09-1005, or to the IBM 5496 Theory-Maintenance Manual, SY31-0220.
• 14-105
Read Operation
.
. 14-106
1.
Operator keys the 3741 to perform either
a read to EOF or a single card read.
.
. 14-107
2.
The MPU (microprocessing unit of the 3741
base machine) then:
a. Resets the data recorder attachment and
the data recorder by setting 'I/O POR'.
b. Signals the data recorder attachment to
send a 'read command' signal to the data
recorder.
.
. 14-108
. 14-109
.
. 14-110
3.
4.
I
Service Note: If 'read data ready' never comes up,
or is not detected by the data recorder attachment,
the MPU remains in a loop. The 3741 display shows
no error code, and both machines will be locked up.
To recover from this problem, turn the data recorder
offline. (Set the IBM 5496 TERMINAL switch to
the MANUAL position, or the IBM 129 SPL FEAT
switch 0 F F.) This sets an A 1 error on the 3741
and takes the MPU out of its loop.
5.
The data recorder attachment then captures
the data (1 byte) in latches by:
a. Setting the gate read FL (Figure 1). This
loads the data to register 2 of the data
recorder attachment.
b. As the data byte is latched up by the
3741, the data is sent back to the data
recorder, via 'data bus in' for comparison
with what the data recorder actually sent.
If a data byte does not match, 'read non
compare' is set by the data recorder and
this causes an A3 error to be set on the
. 3741.
c. Setting the 'gate register 2' (Figure 1).
This is the actual data load into register
2 of the data recorder attachment.
d. Setting 'request read cycle'. 'Request
read cycle' resets 'read data ready' to
request another byte of data from the
data recorder.
6.
The data recorder then:
a. Puts the second byte (next byte) of data
on 'data bus out'.
b. Sets 'read data ready' for the second time.
The second 'read data ready' comes up in
56/ls for the IBM 5496 and in 72/ls for the
IBM 129 after the first.
c. Searches for the third (next) byte of data.
The data recorder attachment sends 'read
command' (Figure 1) to the data recorder.
This signal accomplishes the same result as
the pressing of the READ key on the data
recorder.
The data recorder then:
a. Reads an entire card, storing the data in
its buffer.
b. While reading the card, checks for jams
and raises 'transport jam' if one is detected (Figure 1). The data recorder
(129) displays an 88 or 8A, or (5496)
sets the F D CH K light to indicate a
hopper or transport jam.
c. After the reading is complete the data
recorder places the first byte* of data
on 'data bus out'.
d. Sets 'read data ready'. This tells the data
recorder attachment that a byte of data
is on the lines ready to be taken.
*One byte of data is either an 8-bit EBCDIC
code (I BM 129) or a 6-bit BCD code (I BM
5496). (Refer to the translation table, Figure
2).
EC 825853
826065
Date 11/15/74
811/75
,
PN 1619450
3741 ML
14-101
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619451
14-102
8/1175
Character
Character
Description
S/3
BCD
R-time
S
T
U
V
Blank
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Colon
Number
Commercial A
Apostrophe
Equal
Quotation
Zero
Slash
S
T
U
V
W
W
1
S-time
II Read Command
'~~L...;._re_a_d_s
---J'( (~------------------------------------------------\
_a_ca_rd_ _ _ _ _ _ _
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
#
@
I
=
"
iii Jam ** __
--1
sets when
data recorder
It Read Data Ready **
is ready
II Gate Read FL -----------------~
II Gate Reg 2
0
checked while card is read*
comes up
every byte
~
I
__~)
~l
_____~
( (
loads data
to reg 2
X
Y
Y
Z
&
Z
Ampersand
Comma
Percent
Underscore
Greater than
Question mark
Dash
J
K
L
M
N
I
-
>
__a_c_tu_a_l_d_at_a_l_o_ad_in_t_o_r_eg__
2_~
?
J
K
L
M
N
asks the data recorder
II Req Read Cyc * *____fo_r_t_h_e_n_ex_t_b_y_t_e____
X
%
loads even byte into reg 2
after odd byte has been
taken by the MPU
--1
0
0
P
Q
R
]
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
Exclamation
Dollar
Asterisk
Parenthesis (right)
Semi-colon
Logical not
Right brace
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
G
H
I
¢
I
Cent
Period
Less than
Parenthesis (left)
Plus
Vertical bar
!
$
In:
sets once every card,
iii Op Complete ** _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~! y
l~---o-n-la-s-t-b-y-t-e------..J! L
)
Data Valid
----------------It
*The IBM 5496 reads a card in 2500 ms and the
IBM 129 reads a card in 921 ms.
**Interface line.
Figure 1. Timing Chart (Two-Byte Read)
nI
:
.....
~----
L
sets on even bytes
resets on odd bytes
may be either a 56 ps delay (5496)
or a 72 ps delay (129).
,
*
)
I
I
<
(
+
I
Figure 2. Translation Table
None
1
2
12
4
1 4
24
124
8
1 8
2 8
12 8
48
1 48
248
1248
A
1
A
2 A
12 A
4A
1 4 A
24 A
124 A
8A
1 8A
2 8A
128A
48A
1 48A
248A
1248A
B
B
2
B
12
B
4
B
1 4
B
24 B
124 B
8 B
1 8 B
2 8 B
12 8 B
48 B
1 48 B
248 B
1248 B
AB
1
AB
2 AB
12 AB
4 AB
1 4 AB
24 AB
124 AB
8AB
1 8AB
28AB
128AB
48AB
1 48AB
248AB
1248AB
1
EBCDIC
40
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
FO
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
50
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
60
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
DO
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
7.
8.
9.
While the data recorder is searching for the
next data byte, the data recorder attachment:
a .. Places the first data byte into register 2
of the attachment.
b. Latches up the second data byte by repeating steps 5a and 5b.
c. Waits for the signal from the MPU that
the MPU is ready for the next data byte
to be sent.
The MPU then:
a. Checks the '129 attached' Iine to see which
data recorder is attached. If the 129 is
attached, the data sent is in EBCD IC code.
The 3741 also operates in EBCDIC code
and, thus, no translation is required. If
the 5496 is attached, the data sent is in
BCD code and must be translated to
EBCDIC (Figure 2) by the MPU.
b. Places the data byte into the 3741 current
record buffer, after translation if required.
c. Signals the data recorder attachment that
the MPU is ready for the next byte to be
sent to it.
The data recorder attachment then sends
the second (next) data byte to the MPU.
10.
The MPU repeats step 8.
11.
The data recorder then:
a. Puts the next data byte on 'data bus out'.
b. Sets the 'read data ready' line again.
12.
The data recorder attachment now waits
approximately 3 ms while the MPU services
the other devices (such as the diskette).
Notes:
1. The data recorder attachment effectively reads
2 bytes of data every 5.3 or 5.7 ms, depending
on the data recorder attached.
2. During the read operation on a Model 3 or 4,
The MPU leaves the read operation after every
6 bytes of data to check whether other devices,
such as the diskette or printer, need immediate
action. This is how the data recorder attachment time-shares with the Model 3/4 devices.
Refer to Read Instruction in the IBM 3741
Data Station Programming Reference Manual, GA21-9194.
13.
Steps 5 through 12 are repeated until the
data recorder:
a. Senses the last data byte entering the data
recorder I/O buffer.
b. Sets 'op complete'. This signals that the
transmission of data has ended.
c. If the 3741 is a Model 3 or 4, see note 2
below.
Punch Operation
1.
The operator keys the 3741 to perform
either a punch to EOD or a single card
punch.
2.
The MPU then:
a. Resets the data recorder attachment and
the data recorder by setting 'I/O POR'.
b. Signals the data recorder attachment
that a punch operation is to follow.
c. Checks the '129 attached' line (page 14105) to see which data recorder is attached. If the 129 is attached, the
EBCDIC data byte needs no translation.
If the 5496 is attached, the EBCDIC
data byte must be translated to BCD
(Figure 2).
d. Translates the data byte if necessary.
e. Places the data into register 2 of the
data recorder attachment.
f. Signals the data recorder attachment
that the data byte is ready to be sent to
the data recorder.
3.
The data recorder attachment then:
a. Loads the data byte onto 'data bus in'
lines.
b. Compares the data byte on 'data bus
in' to the data byte in register 2. If a
data byte does not match, the data recorder attachment sets an A3 error code.
c. Sets 'punch data ready'.
Service Note: If 'op complete' never
comes up or is not detected by the data
recorder attachment for some reason,
the MPU will remain in a loop. For recovery, see the service note at step 4 on
page 14-101.
14.
If doing a read-to-EOF operation, skip step
15.
15.
This step is for single card read operation.
At this point the data just read is in the
3741 current record buffer and displayed
on the 3741 CRT. The operator must press
REC ADV to write the data onto the diskette.
16.
As soon as 'op complete' is activated, the
3741 data recorder attachment sends another
read command to the data recorder. While
the next card is being read, the 3741 executes an AUTO R EC ADV which writes the
data onto the diskette in the data set displayed when the read to EOF was initiated.
17.
Then the data recorder attachment, the data
recorder, and the MPU repeat steps 4 through
16 until an EOF or EOD card is read (notes
3 and 4).
Service Note: If 'punch data ready'
never comes up, or is not detected by
the data recorder, the MPU remains in a
loop. The 3741 display shows no error
code, and both machines will be locked
up. To recover from this problem, turn
the data recorder offline. (Set the IBM
5496 TERMINAL switch to MANUAL, or
the IBM 129 SPL FEAT switch to OFF.)
This sets an A 1 error on the 3741 and
takes the MPU out of its loop.
Notes (continued):
3. An EOF (end of file) card is any card with ?*
in the first two columns. This card signals the
3741 that the last card has been read and the
job is ended.
4. An EOD (end of data set) card is any card with
?/ in the first two columns. This card signals
the 3741 to end the data set now being used
and to start a new data set with the next card
read.
EC
825853
825958
826065
11/15/74
3121/75
8/1/75
PN 1619452
3741 ML
14-103
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
4.
The data recorder then:
a. Latches up the data byte into its buffer.
b. Sets 'punch busy', which resets
'punch data ready'.
c. Holds 'punch busy' up until the data recorder is ready to receive another byte
of data.
5.
The MPU gates the next data byte into register 2 (steps 2c through 2f).
6.
The data recorder attachment then waits for
'punch busy' to reset.
7.
Now steps 3 through 6 repeat until the data
recorder obtains enough data to punch a
card (for a 3741 Model 3 or 4, see note
below). The data recorder then:
a. Sets 'op complete'. This tells the data
recorder attachment to stop operations
until the card is punched.
b. Punches the card.
c. As long as 'op complete' is activated, the
MPU is checking for card jams and datarecorder-not-readY errors.
d. Activates 'command reset' after the card is
completely punched. This resets 'op
complete' and signals the data recorder
attachment that another card can be
punched.
If you are doing a punch to EOD, continue; if you
are doing a single card punch, the operation is
complete.
8.
When 'op complete' falls (step 7d), the MPU
can initiate another transfer of data to the data
recorder (steps 2 through 7). This is continued until the EOD is reached for the data
set the cards are being punched from.
Note: During the punch operation on the
Model 3 or 4, the MPU leaves the punch
operation every 3 bytes of data to check
the other Model 3/4 devices. This allows
time-sharing during a punch operation.
Refer to Punch Instruction in the IBM
3741 Data Station Programming Reference Manual, GA21-9194.
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
pl\i 1619453
14-104
S-time _ _..J
Punch FL
Set for every byte and reset after each byte is taken by the data recorder
Set in the attachment to load
data from register 2 to 'data bus in'
Punch Valid F L - - - - - - - - - - I l
Gate Data
Loads byte onto 'data bus in'
nL.-________________
Indicates. data byte is ready
l
t
Time elapsed could be 26 IlS to 5.7 ms
Punch Data Ready * _ _ _As_k_s_d_a_ta_r_e_c_or_d_e_r_to_ta_k_e_d_a_ta---,
Punch Busy* _ _ _ _ _ _ln_d_i_ca_t_e_s_d_at_a_t_a_ke_n_-_r_e_
se_t_s~'p_u_n_c_h_d_a_ta_re_a_d~y_'_~
--Il
Operation Complete* _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
*Interface lines between 3741 and data recorder.
See 14-106 or 14-107 for pins
Stays up until
is punched
J--_ _ _ _ _---J card
Control Nomenclature (I nterface Lines)
Online and Ready
129 Attached
Data Bus In
By activating this line, the data recorder indicates
that all switches are set correctly for online operation of the data recorder.
The IBM 129 ties this line active to allow the
3741 to differentiate between an IBM 129
and an IBM 5496.
Hopper Jam
Punch Busy
The data recorder activates this line if a card fails
to feed or register. The failure may be caused by
a jam, an empty hopper, or a full stacker.
The data recorder activates this line when it has
received the byte of data from the 3741 on a
punch operation. When the line is deactivated,
the 3741 can send another byte of data.
These eight lines are the data input to the data
recorder. The IBM 129 uses all eight lines for
EBCDIC characters. The IBM 5496 uses six lines
(bits 1, 2, 4, 8, A and B) for System/3 BCD
characters.
Punch Data Ready
By activating this line, the data recorder attachment indicates that it has put data on 'data bus
in' for the data recorder.
Read Command
The data recorder attachment activates this line
to start a reading operation. This simulates the
pressing of the READ key or button on the data
recorder.
Request Read Cycle
When the data recorder attachment senses the
'read data ready' signal, it activates this line,
which allows the data recorder to search its
storage for the next data byte.
I/O Compare Command
This signal tells the data recorder to allocate time
for comparison of data read to data returned
from the data recorder attachment.
I/O POR
Transport Jam
Register Gate Control 0
This line indicates that a card failed to exit the
read/punch station at the proper time. The IBM
129 also activates this signal when it is powered
up when in online mode. If this signal is not
functioning, the 3741 will not know a jam occurred and multiple cards may be fed.
The register gate control lines from planar socket
1-L are used as clocks for the data recorder attachment. 'Reg gate control 0' is R-ti me
a.
Register Gate Control 1
This is S-time for the data recorder attachment
Operation Complete
The data recorder activates this line for both
read and punch operations after the last byte
of data was sent or received.
II.
Reg Select Decode 1 and Reg Select Decode 0
These lines select the register that is to be used by
the MPU for data recorder operations.
Read Non Compare
Select Module 3A
During a read operation, the 3741 wraps each
byte of read data back to the data recorder for
compare. If the data fails to match the sent data,
this line is activated.
This line selects the module containing the registers that facilitate the data recorder attachment.
Reg Group Select Other
This line, along with the four previously mentioned
register control lines, enables the MPU to control
the data recorder attachment register module.
Read Data Ready
This signal indicates that a byte of data is on 'data
bus i~' and the 3741 can take the byte at any time.
By activating this line, the data recorder is reset.
Data Bus Out
Thses eight lines are data output from the data recorder. The IBM 129 sends an eight-bit EBCDIC
byte on these lines and the IBM 5496 sends a sixbit System/3 BCD byte.
Data Recorder Attachment Clocks
. . . - - - - - - - 1 6 JlS
cycle---------1~
Command Reset
The 5496 sends this 1-ps signal to the 3741 after
the card leaves the read/punch station. The 129
sends this 1-JlS signal to the 3741 after the 80-byte
data transfer from or to the 129 and after the card
leaves the read/punch station.
R
B
A
R
1m R-time
II S-time
825853
825958
Date 11/15/74
3121/75
EC
PN 1619454
3741 ML
14-105
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
826065
PN 1619455
8/1/75
14-106
IBM 129 CABLE/CONNECTOR/PIN CHART
B
0
~2~
~
§
B
= =
=
=
~ ~
~
0
~
~13~
"-
129/5496 Data Recorder**
-~1-1-K-D02
I
IBM 129
IBM 5496
A1-A2
A1-B2
A1-C2
A1-D2
A1-A4
A1-B4
A1-C4
A1-D4
A1-Z2*
A1-Z4*
A1-T2
A1-U2
A1-H2
A1-V2*
A1-V3*
/
"
1-K-D05
--------~1-K-B10
--~1~1-K-D03
1-K-B13
I
--~-1-1-K-B11
Controls
---+1-1-K-B09
I
Data Recorder I/O Attachment
Feature Cards and Cables*
I
I
I
--~:"-l-K-BOS
1-M-BOS-+System Reset Power Supply---~-----------......
1-L-B10-+Reg Decode 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
1-L-B11- -Sel Module 3A_ _ _ _ _ _ _-l-_________
r....l.----L---,
1-L-B12- +Reg Decode O--------:---------~
1-L-D03- -Reg Gate Control 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - 4 "
1-L-D06--Reg Gate Control 0 - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - 1
1-L-D13--Reg Grp Sel O t h e r - - - - - - f - - - - - - - - - - - I
I
Bit 7--+-1-J-D13
Bit6±1-J-D12
Bit 5
1-J-D11
Bit 4-!-1-J-D1 0
Bit 3-r1-J-DOS
Bit2X1-J-D07
Bit 1
1-J-D06
Bit 0-t-1-J-D05
....
~....
Data Bus In
3741 MPU
Planar
Latch Out
3741 Data Bus Out
I
Register
+
Bit 7
1-K-D12
Bit6--r-1-K-D11
Bit 5-+-1-K-D10
~
Data Bus Out
-
>
...
** Refer to FEALD in IBM 129 or IBM 5496 for
circuits of the cards in t~e data recorder_
1-L-B09
+
Bit 7
3741 Data Bus In
II
________________
I
I
Bit 4-r1-K-DOS
Bit3-r1-K-D07
Bit 2-+-1-K-D06
Bit 1-f--1-K-B06
Bit 0-4-1-K-B05
IL
I Bit 2
1-L-B02+
1-L-B031 Bit 0
1-L-B04
Bit 3
1-L-B05iBit 1
1-L-B06
Bit 4
1-L-B07+Bit5
1-L-BOS-Bit 6
Latch In
I
~
3741 I/O ADAPTER TABLE OF
CONTENTS
Introduction . .
General Descri ption
. .
Operation . . .
Data Flow. .
Input Lines
Output Lines . .
.
Theory of Operations
Record Transfer ReadlWrite Theory
File Transfer Read from Attachment
Theory
. . . . . . . .
File Transfer Write to Attachment
Theory
. . . . . . . .
Character Transfer ReadlWrite Theory.
14-111
14-111
14-111
14-112
14-113
14-113
14-115
14-115
14-116
14-118
14-120
Introduction
Operation
This feature permits operator-attended exchange
of data between the diskette in an IBM 3741, and
any of a group of I/O devices, or a System/3.
The input to 3741 and output from 3741
operations are called read from attachment
and write to attachment respectively .
General Description
The 3741 I/O adapter is on a half planar, mounted
in the upper level-one position on the logic gate.
It is mutually exclusive with the data recorder feature. It uses the microprogrammed control unit to
provide the timing and controls needed to attach
the 3741 Data Station to an attachment. On models
3 and 4, the I/O adapter extends the instruction set.
The I/O adapter is connected to the attachment by
a cable that is available in 20- or 40-foot (6100 or
12200 mm) lengths.
Logical elements include ROS modules, a register
module (unique group-select registers, numbers
16-19*), receivers/drivers, and logic necessary to
communicate with the attachment.
Three modes of data transfer are available: by
character, by record, or by file. These modes of
transfer can be used when moving data in either
direction between the 3741 and the attachment.
Character transfer: Allows the user to control read/
write operations character by character. The instructions are loaded into any of the Model 1 or
2 format buffers to control character transfers.
Record transfer: Allows processing one record at
a time with formatting. Records can be up to 128
characters long.
File transfer: Processes strings of one or more
records that may be on one disk or on several
disks. No formatting is done in this mode.
Attached Device
3741
*Registers 16-19 are numbered
0-3 in the I/O adapter.
EC
.-
825958
826065
Date 3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1619508
3741 ML
14-111
lEe
825958
PN 1619509
14-112
Data Flow
Bits 5 and 6 of register 6 (the keyboard-control
register) are set to 00 to select registers 0, 1, 2,
and 3. These group-select registers are used to
transfer sense information, control information,
and data back and forth across the interface.
Transfer is serial-by-byte. When transferring files,
13 format buffers of the basic 3741 buffered
storage are used to maintain the full data rates.
Because the format buffers are used for this
operation, they must be reloaded before resuming jobs that require formatting on the basic
3741.
Work
Reg
r----
I
I I/O Cable to the
I Attachment
I/O Adapter Half Planar
0
I
'----- Bus In
Reg
roo--1
<
I
I
Bus In (to 3741)
---...,
-
~
_______-Ir
.......--End of Job In
Microprogramming for the I/O adapter directs
the data flow. For output from the 3741, data
moves from the diskette to the storage buffers, to
the bus-out register (2), and on to the I/O cables.
For input to the 3741, data moves from the attachment to the bus-in register (1), to storage
buffers, and then to the diskette.
Sense and control use register 3 and the bus-in
and bus-out registers.
When the I/O adapter is used with model 1 or 2,
the I/O adapter ROS is usually selected as follows:
1
I
Parity
Check
1
.......--End of Data Set In
-
-=
.......--Attachment Busy
.......--Bus Out Parity Error
.......--Attachment Error
'----Attachment Online
-
Parity
Gen.
8-Bit Data Path
To/From the MPU
-
Decoding ROS addresses does the initial selection. Later instructions in the I/O adapter code
enter an XA into register 3. This sets a latch
that holds the I/O adapter selected. When the
microprogram exits the I/O adapter ROS, an
XO is entered into register 3 to reset the latch.
Bus Out (from 3741)
I----Bus In Parity Error
t----End of Data Set Out
I----Attention Required
t----Attachment Reset
t---"End of Job Out
When the I/O adapter is used on a model 3 or
4, the I/O adapter ROS is selected by a signal
called '-group select 4' from the model 3/4
half planar.
t---"End of Record
t---"Write to Attachment
. - -.. Read from Attachment
1 - - - . Interrupt
1------------------- Response
"'"--Control
Reg
Sense Response
Service Request
3
4 Address Bits
lr
16 ROS Bits
To/From the MPU ROS
~
ROS
14 Address Lines
1--------1
I
~-~
Gate ROS
11----------3741 Online
Decode
I
I
I
Input Lines
Attachment Error
This line is used by the attachment to notify the
3741 of a device program that requires a record
to be restarted or re-sent. The line causes the 3741
to display an 86 error in columns 9 and 10 of
the status line and wait.
The operator can either:
1.
Press RESET (to cause the 3741 to
activate 'attachment reset') and (if sending
data to attachment) NUM SHIFT with
RESET, ALPHA SHI FT with RESET, or
RES ET to cause the 3741 to retransmit
the record on which the attachment error
occurred.
If receiving data from the attach ment, the
3741 treats the next record received as a
retransmission and places it in the next
sequential location on the disk.
2, the 3741 returns the read/write head to the
index track, updates the EOD of the data set,
but stays online expecting the operation to continue on another data set or diskette. In filetransfer modes 3 and 5, the 3741 returns the
read/write head to the index track, updates the
EOD of the data set, and positions the read/
write head to the next valid HDR1 label to continue the processing. In file-transfer mode 4, if
'end of data set in' is detected, and 87 error is
displayed in columns 9 and 10. The job must
be cancelled.
Hold ALPHA SHI FT and NUM SHI FT,
and press RES ET to take the 3741 offl ine
and return the read/write head to the index
track.
Attachment Busy
This line from the attachment notifies the 3741
that the attachment is temporarily unable to exchange data. The line is active in response to the
3741 'read from attachment', 'write to attachment',
'EOJ out', 'EOD out', and '3741 attention requi red' lines. The 3741 waits fbr 'attachment
busy' to drop before activating 'read from attachment', 'write to attachment', 'EOJ out', 'EOD
out', or '3741 attention required' lines again.
End of Data Set In
This line is a response to 'read from attachment'.
In file-transfer mode 1, the 3741 returns the read/
write head to the index track, updates the EOD of
the data set, and goes offline. In file-transfer mode
Attachment Reset
This line is activated when a new operation is
initiated but the attachment is offline. The
3741 does not check for either 'response' or
'sense response' if this line is active. After the
line is deactivated, the 3741 waits until the attachment comes online before 'read from attachment' or 'write to attachment' is activated. 'Attachment reset' is not activated if the attachment
is online when a new data transfer is to start.
End of Job In
This line is a response to a 3741 'read from attachment'. The 3741 updates the EOD of the data set
and goes offline. If 'end of job in' is detected
when in file-transfer mode 4, an 88 error is displayed in columns 9 and 10. The job must be
cancelled.
Bus Out Parity Error
2.
Output Lines
This line is a response to 'service request' or 'end
of record'. The 3741 responds with 'write to
attachment' and retransmits the record. If the
parity error occurs on the third try, the 3741
displays an 81 error. The job must be cancelled.
Response
During a read operation, 'response' notifies the
3741 that there is data on bus in, ready for
sampling. During a write operation, 'response'
notifies the 3741 that the data on bus out has
been sampled and can be replaced.
Note: 'Response' is the expected answer to all
'Attachment reset' is activated if the 'attachment
error' line is active during data processing. (See
Attachment Error for details.)
Read from Attachment
The 'read from attachment' line is activated at
the start of each record to be received by the
3741. The line is active until'response' or 'sense
response' is received from the attachment. If
'response' is received, the 3741 activates 'service
request'. If 'sense response' is received, the 3741
checks the status lines from the attachment.
Valid status lines in addition to 'attachment online'
are:
'attachment error'
'attachment busy'
'end of data set in'
'end of job in'
If none of these lines are active after 'sense
response' comes up following 'read from attachment', the 3741 displays the contents of registers
1, 2, and 3 in hex. The register contents show
what occurred. The job must be cancelled.
I/O adapter commands. ' Response' always takes
precedence over 'sense response'.
Sense Response
'Sense response' indicates to the 3741 that,
because of conditions within the attachment:'
operator and/or automatic recovery procedures
are needed at the 3741.
Bus-in Bits
Bus in bits 0 through 7 and parity carry data if
'read from attachment' is active.
lEe
825958
PN 1619510
3741 ML
14-113
lEe
825958
PN 1619511
14-114
Write to Attachment
End of Record
End of Data Set Out
Write to attachment' is activated at the start of
each record to be sent to the attachment. The
line is active until 'response' or 'sense response' is
received from the attachment. If 'response' is
received, the 3741 activates 'service request'. If
'sense response' is received, the 3741 checks the
status lines from the attachment. Valid status
lines, in addition to 'attachment online', are:
'attachment error'
'attachment busy'
'End of record' is activated after all characters of
a record have been received or transmitted. The
line is active until 'response' or 'sense response' is
activated by the attachment. When 'response' is
received, the 3741 activates 'read from attachment'
or 'write to attachment' if more records are to be
received or transmitted. If all records have been
sent, the 3741 activ~tes 'end of data set out', 'end
of job out', or'3741 attention required' as the next
command. If 'sense response' is received, the
3741 checks the status lines from the attachment.
This line can be activated after either 'end of
record' or '3741 attention required'. It is used
in file-transfer modes 3 and 5 only during a write
operation. The line stays active until 'response' or
'sense response' is received from the attachment.
If 'response' is received, the 3741 u,;tivates any of
the following lines:
While 'end of record' is active, valid status lines
from the attachment are:
'attachment online' only (indicates recordlength error), or
If 'sense response' is received, the 3741 checks the
status lines from the attachment. The only valid
status line, in addition to 'attachment online', is
'attachment busy'.
If none of these lines are active after 'sense
response' is activated, the 3741 displays the
contents of registers 1, 2, and 3 in hex. The
job must be cancelled.
'write to attachment'
'end of job out'
'3741 attention required'
Service Request
'attachment online' plus any of the following:
This line is activated when the 3741 is ready to
receive or transmit a character. The line is active
until 'response' or 'sense response' is received
from the attachment. If 'response' is received,
the 3741 activates 'service request' or, if the
last character of a record has been received or
sent, EOR (end of record). If 'sense response'
is received, the 3741 checks the status lines
from the attachment.
'attachment error'
'bus out parity check' (occurs only if
'write to attachment' is active).
End of Job Out
If any other status lines are act~ve, the 3741 displays the contents of registers 1, 2, and 3 in hex.
The job must be cancelled.
Bus In Parity Error
When 'service request' is active, valid status lines
are:
'attachment online' only (indicates recordlength error), or
'attachment online' plus any of the following:
'attachment error'
'bus in parity error' (forces 'sense response')
'bus out parity check' (occurs only if
'write to attachment' is active).
If any other status lines are active, the 3741 displays the contents of registers 1, 2, and 3 in hex.
The job must be cancelled.
If any other status lines are active after 'sense
response' is received, the 3741 displays the contents of registers 1,2, and 3 in hex. The job must
be cancelled.
This line is activated after 'service request' if a
data byte with bad parity is received during a
read operation. The line stays active until
'response' or 'sense response' is received from
the attachment. If 'response' is received, the
3741 tries to receive the record two more times.
If the error occurs after the third try, an 82 error
is displayed, and the job must be cancelled. If
'sense response' is received, the 3741 checks the
status lines from the attachment.
'Attachment online' only status means a recordlength error. If any other status lines are active,
the 3741 displays the contents of registers 1,2,
and 3 in hex. The job must be cancelled.
This line can be activated after 'end of record',
'end of data set out', or '3741.attention required'
during a write operation. The line is active until
'response' or 'sense response' is received from the
attachment. If 'response' is received, the 3741
goes offline and returns the read/write head to the
index track. If 'sense response' is received, the
3741 checks the status lines from the attachment.
The only valid status from the attachment, in addition to 'attachment online', is 'attachment busy'.
When other lines are active after 'sense response',
the 3741 displays the contents of registers 1, 2,
and 3 in hex. The job must be cancelled.
3741 Attention Required
The '3741 attention required' line can be
activated after 'end of record' or 'end of data set
out'. The line is active until 'response' or 'sense
response' is received from the attachment. If
<----:response' is received, the 3741 can activate:
'read from attachment'
'write to attachment'
'end of data set out'
'end of job out' or
'3741 attention required'
If 'sense response' is received, the 3741 checks
the status lines from the attachment. The only
valid status line, in addition to 'attachment online', is 'attachment busy'.
If other lines are active, the 3741 displays the
contents of registers 1, 2, and 3 in hex. The job
must be cancelled.
Interrupt
This line, never active by itself, becomes active
with any of the following:
'bus in parity error'
'end of data set out'
'3741 attention required'
'end of job out'
'end of record'
'write to attachment'
'read from attachment'
Bus-out Bits
Bus-out bits 0 through 7 and parity carry data on
'bus out' when 'write to attachment' is active.
Address
Address bits 4, 5, 6, and 7 identify the device
(card reader, paper tape reader, System/3, etc.)
that is to receive or transmit data.
THEORY OF OPERATION
Data exchange between the attachment and 3741
is possible in three modes: character transfer,
record transfer, and file transfer. As the names
imply, the transfers occur character-by-character,
record-by-record, or file-by-file, respectively.
Record Transfer Read/Write Theory
The details of operations for character transfer
and file transfer, while exchanging data, are
shown in the following flowcharts. Record
transfer internal operations are the same as
those for file transfer. However, the setup
procedures are different. The setup is included
in the record transfer flowcharts (see I/O
Adapter Operating Procedures, page 9-91).
The internal operations are described between
pointsgandlof the file transfer flowcharts.
3741 Online
This line is the output of a latch that, is set by
XA in register 3, and reset by XB in register 3.
3741 Ready/Busy
The '3741 ready/busy' line is a condition derived
from the presence of a valid address; when an attachment address goes active, the 3741 is assumed ready.
The transition to not ready constitutes the busy
signal.
825958
826065
Date 3/21175
8/1175
EC
III
PN 1619512
3741 ML
14-115
825958
826065
Date 3/21175
8/1175
EC
PN 1619513
14-116.
File Transfer Read from Attachment Theory
Select the I/O Adapter
by pressing INPUT
TO 3741
See setup procedures on pages
9-10B and 9-110
Activate '3741 online'
and attachment address
lines
If on index track,
scan HDR's, volume,
etc
For modes 3 and
5, go to next data
set or another
diskette
Note: '3741 attention
required' might be issued if another diskette is to be loaded
Write a byte to
buffer
Yes
Yes
Hold ALPHA SHIFT
and NUM SHIFT and
press RESET.
A
B
c
3741 goes offline and returns
to index track
Activate 'end
of record'
Yes
No
Write buffers
to disk
Yes
Activate '3741
attention required'
Yes
No
Yes
**
3741 goes offline and returns
to index track
Bypass bad
sector
** Must receive response to continue.
lEe
825958
3741 goes offline and returns
to index track
PN 1619514
3741 ML
14-117
lEe
8259581
Date 3/21175
File Transfer Write to Attachment Theory
•• Must receive response to continue
••• See setup procedures on
pages 9-108
and 9·110
Ves
~
~
:
HOld ALPHA SHIFT and NUM SHIFT.
and press RESET.
PN 1619515
14·118
D
c
G
tl
Act ivate 'end
of I ecord'
No
Yes
3741 goes offline
and returns to
Index tl ack
Activate 'end
of job out'
Yes
Yes
3741 goe, offline
and letulns to
index tlack
Yes
In mode 4, an added
record containing
EOD characters is sent
Activate 'end of
data set out'
No
Yes
'3741 attention required'
may be activated if in
mode 3, 4, or 5
lEe
8259581
Oat. 3/21/75
.PN 1619516
3741 ML
14-119
~
lEe
8259581
·PN 1619517
... 3/21175
C'haracter Transfer Read/Write Theory
See setup procedures on iJages
9-108 and 9-110
Hold ALPHA SHI FT
and NUM SHI FT and
press RESET
Execute
command
Overflow, disk, or format
error causes the 3741 to return to X R or U R mode
Return to
X R mode
If in trace mode. change
to normal mode; if in
normal mode, change to
trace mode
Switch
modes
14-120
POWER THEORY
Power Supply Field Replaceable
Units (FRU~)
. . . . . . .
Ac Voltage Distribution for Original
Power Supply with Diode Board .
Power On . . . . . . . .
Ac Voltage Distribution for Revised
Power Supply with No Diode Board
Printed Circuit Board for Original
Power Supply with Diode Board . .
Printed Circuit Board for Revised
Power Supply with No Diode Board
Dc Voltage Distribution . . . .
Line Filter (ac)
Power Supply (dc) Cable
Feed-through capacitors filter line noise to
frame ground.
15-2
15-2
Connects the power supply PC board dc voltages
to the MPU.
ID Reader (ac) Cable
m
Power Supply PC Board
Distributes input ac from TB-1 to the ID reader.
Develops and distributes dc voltage to the machine.
.
15-6
Primary Fuse Holder (ac)
15-7
15-8
Disk (ac) Cable
II
Distributes input ac from TB·1 to disk 2.
Printer (ac) Cable
Disk Drive Motor
13
Printer (dc) Cable
m
Fuses (dc)
Switches ac input from the attachment cord
to the primary of the transformer.
0
Turns the disk within the disk drive unit. The disk
turns in order to read or write on the disk.
Distributes ac voltage to the printer.
D
II
Holds fuse to protect transformer.
II
Circuit Breaker CB1
II *
If installed, protects the +5 Vdc output from
overloads.
Distributes dc voltage to the printer.
Attachment Cord
II
15-4
Keeps ac output from the transformer at a
constant level.
Power On Switch
II
15-1
POWER SUPPLY FIELD REPLACEABLE
UNITS (FRUs)
Capacitor (ac) (C-1)
&J
m
*Not installed on all machines.
Protects +24 Vdc, +8.5 Vdc, +12 Vdc, and
-12 Vdc output from an overload.
ri,
Supplies customer ac input voltage to the
power on switch.
Transformer
m
Transforms high voltage input ac to low voltage
output, which supplies the input to the dc
voltage supply.
Power Supply (ac) Cable
II
Distributes input ac voltage from the power on
switch to TB-1 and disk 1. Also con nects
frame ground to the power on switch.
-D
EC
823146
Date 9/15n4
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619275
3741 ML
15-1
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619276
15-2
AC VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION FOR
ORIGINAL POWER SUPPLY WITH
DIODE BOARD
This distribution is for the original power supply
having a diode board
See pages 15-4 and
15-5 for the revised power supply.
m.
Power On
- Plug the attachment cord into the properly
rated ac outlet
m.
Ac Voltage
Range
Frequency
115
10%
60 Hz
204/230
100/110/123.5
12%
60 Hz
200/220/235
100/110/123.5
10%
50 Hz
100/110/123.5
200/220/235
10%
60 Hz
11*
- Close the power on switch. II
- Alternating current is sent through the primary
fuseto the transformer.
TB-1
distributes ac power through cables to
the 10 reader, printer, and disks 1 and 2.
- The capacitor Cl II makes the transformer
provide regulated ac input voltage to the de
supplies.
- Tne power supply PC board
along with
capacitors 2-7 and the rectifier board, develops
all dc voltages.
II
m
mil
8&1
m
II '
*Not installed on all machines
Pol See notes 1 and 2
U TB 1-1 Common
TB1·2 (100) 115/208
TB1·3 (115) 230
TB1·4 (200)
TB1·5 (208)
TB1·6 (230)
iii Ac Line Filter
10
Reader
rn
Ac
Capacitor
r-----------,
I WTCOnly
,
lOR I ~TB1.~9 TB1·2 for 115/200/208/
I
I 230V 60 Hz Japan
:
TB1-12 I TB1·3 for all 50 Hz
B1 9
.
TB1~
mL _________ J
TB1·12
II
Disk 1
Drive
Motor
TB1·l0
TB1·ll
TB1·8
-..Disk2
~Drive
Motor
TB1·l1
3713
'Power on reset' is at down level for 550 ms.
Note: Wait 5 seconds between power down
and power up. This 5 seconds allows the capacitor in the power on circuit to discharge. If
the capacitor is not allowed to discharge, the
'power on reset' may not complete.
Disk
Drive
Fan 2
TB1·7 for l00V 60
TB1-1 Common
TB1·21.10
TB1·3123.5
T81·10
TB1·8
Gi
Gi
Dc
B1 9
. I
TB1·7 I
TB1.12:
+24
GND
TB1·4220
+24
GND
TB1·5235
TB1·13100
TB1·14200
I
I
B1 9
. I
TB1.7 :
TB1.12 1
I
L ____________
HZ~::
. .
TB1·9
r,-----------.
WTCOnly
I
Disk
Drive
Fan 1
15
16
·12
~f--~7
J
Load Line
CB1
+5
GND
+5
~I~~st
k\
Points
The -5 Vdc supply is the source for the -4 Vdc
supply. The -5 Vdc drops 1 Vdc across a silicone
diode which provides the -4 Vdc.
The 6.3 Vdc provides CRT heater voltage. 8.5
Vdc is dropped through resistors to provide the
6.3 Vdc . The 6.3Vdc is a cQnstant current after
a power on surge. Power is on about 23 seconds
before the CRT heater warms up.
The -12 Vdc supply is the input for the -5 Vdc
closed loop series supply. A -5 Vdc overvoltage
blows the F2 fuse. A -5 Vdc undervoltage blows
the 8.5 Vdc fuse. A differential amplifier detects
an overvoltage between -5.6 Vdc to 6.0 Vdc, or
an undervoltage of -3 Vdc.
EC P/N DATE PLANT
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses apply to WTC 60 H.z
only.
2. Various transformers are used; check part
numbers (601) before changing taps.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
*Not installed on all machines
PN 1619277
3741 ML
15-3
EC
823146
826065
Date 9115n4
8/1n5
PN 1619278
AC VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION FOR
REVISED POWER SUPPLY WITH NO
DIODE BOARD
This distribution is for the revised power supply
having no diode board. See pages 15-2 and 15-3
for the original power supply.
Power On
Plug the attachment cord into the properly
rated ac outlet
m
Ac Voltage
Range
Frequency
115
10%
60 Hz
204/230
100/110/123.5
12%
60 Hz
200/220/235
100/110/1 23.5
10%
50 Hz
100/110/123.5
200/220/235
10%
60 Hz
1m
- Close the power on switch.
- Alternating current is sent through the primary
fuse to the transformer.
TB-l
distributes ac power through cables to
the 10 reader, printer, and disks 1 and 2.
- The capacitor C1
makes the transformer
provide regulated ac input voltage to the dc
supplies.
- The power supply PC board
along with
capacitors 2-7 and the rectifier board, develops
all dc voltages.
m
III
m
mEt
ml!1
iii
II '
*Not installed on all machines
15-4
P.J
1:1
4 amp (PRTR)
II
rn
TBl-7
TBl-12
Note 2
Disk 1
Drive
Motor
.63
TB1-l0
TB1-ll
TB1-S
3715
Ac
~48 Vac, PC Board G
2
.4 1
.5 2
·6
3
B
Ac
Capacitor
-II
TB1-l0
TB1-ll
m:
:
3713
1 2
TBl-9
Transformer
3
TBl-3123_5
4
+5
TBl-4220
Dc
+24
Fan 1
-- - - - ,
~Sl-9:
TB1~
Tal-1 Common
TBl-21.10
r WTC Onl;- Disk
Drive
-50-
L _________ .J
GND, Frame
3715
TB1-S
I WTCOnly
I
lOR I ~TB1-~9 TBl-2 for 115/200/208/
l
I 230V 60 Hz Japan
I
TB1-12 I TB1·3forall50Hz
TB1·7 for l00V 60 Hz. Japan
Neutral, PC Board J
Power
mDiSk2
Drive
Motor
J
!Bl- 2
r-----------,
Bl 9
ID
Reader
15
TBl-2 (100) 115/208
TBl-3 (115) 230
TBl-4 (200)
TBl-5 (20S)
TBl-6 (230)
TB1-l1
iii Ac Line Filter
Notes 1 and 3
TB1-l Common
TBl-5235
GND
11
TBl-13100
I
Japan
TB1·14200
TBl-12l
I
I
Disk
Drive
Fan 2
~Bl-91
TBl-7 :
TBl-121
I
'- ____________ J
Dc
Test
Points
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses apply to WTC 60 Hz only.
2. See 3717 M LM for ac and dc power pin assignments
on 3717 cables.
3. Various transformers are used; check part numbers
(601) before changing taps.
The 6.3 Vdc provides CRT heater voltage. 8.5
Vdc is dropped through resistors to provide the
6.3 Vdc. The 6.3 Vdc is a constant current after
a power on surge. Power is on about 23 seconds
before the CRT heater warms up.
The -12 Vdc supply is the input for the -5 Vdc
closed loop series supply. A -5 Vdc undervoltage
blows the 8.5 Vdc fuse. A differential amplifier
detects an undervoltage of -3 Vdc. A clamp limits
overvoltage to 6.5V.
'Power on reset' is at down level for 550 ms.
Ac
Line
Test
Points
IT]
[!J
Meter Test
(+)
TP1
-=TP12
-5 Vdc
.+5 Vdc
••
••
•
•••
••
·
•
•••
•
••
•
••
[
·
13
CD
[]]
J] 24 Vdc
m
m
~
T~ T,p_F_1
_9
b~ +12Vdc
TP5
IT]
m
[TI
m
F3
[C,.---J +8.5 Vdc
Note: Wait 5 seconds between power down and
power up. This 5 seconds allows the capacitor in
the power on circuit to discharge. If the capacitor
is not allowed to discharge, the 'power on reset'
may not complete.
F4
TP10
ITpgl IT:
F2
]-12 Vdc
IT]
• Gnd
*Not installed on all machines
EC 823146
825853
826065
Date 9/15/74
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619279
,--~------------~
3741 ML
15-5
EC
823146
Date 9115/74
825853
826065
11/15114
8/1/75
PN 1619280
15-6
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR THE
ORIGINAL POWER SUPPLY WITH DIODE
BOARD
Transformer
Diode Board
Printed Circuit Board
B
0
Voltage Dc
Fl
8
A
+12 Vdc
.-----------------------.-~B12
11.4-14.0
B13
-LC2
-=-
F2
10
11.4-14.0
-12 Vdc
0
6
IC3
-
I
-------~t---___-+-. .
-5
----------Over voltage
r--
C
~
8.0-10.5
D
F3
5
0.50
B 10
t- 4.6-5.4
0.03
8.0-9.4
0.35
+6.3 TP- - - 5.7-9.4
0.35
-4 CE Probe
CE Probe
I
I
4
11.0-13.2
-5TP
I
(Ac)
Voltages
0.50
3713 Printer
'------t-- B11
Under voltage
L_
----- 11.0-13.2
Ripple Voltage
(peak to peak)
+8.5 Vdc
.-----------------~~805
D06
~------------~r_B09
8.0-10.5
IE
F4
D
22.5-26.5
-=-
__ - -
L o -_ _
C5I~L~C6
22.5-26.5
2
--+-_ 005
• .1...
'7
22.0-26.5
1.00
3713
only
D
10
J
+5 Vdc
m
IE]
4.75-6.5
4.75-6.5
+24 Vdc
. - - - - - - - - - -......~ >-+-- 3i13 Printer
0
4
t-------~.._~ .>--+-~ 3713
-L
-
Printer
.----t-- B06 -~- - - - 1-4.7-5.5
.----t-- 807 I
C7
...----+-- D07
m
.------f-- 008
0.30
I
:
------t-<--D09_J
.----+-- D 10
...----1-- D 11
3
6
11
.----+--D 12
.----+--D 13
.----+--D02
.----+--D03
,r-----=»>-----7 >-----7 .::--~~--t--- 004
-.L
.----+--802
.-----+-- 803
...----t-- 804
Ripple Measurement
Ripple voltage can be measured most accurately
with an oscilloscope.
An alternate way to get an indication of ripple
voltage is with a CE meter.
1.
2.
Connect a capacitor (.22 mF or larger,
50 Vdc or higher) in series with one of the
meter leads. (Capacitor not furnished.)
Set the meter range to 15V ac.
3.
Connect one meter lead to the dc voltage in
question, the other lead to frame ground.
(Remember, a capacitor is in series with one
of the leads.)
4.
The meter needle should not leave zero
on the meter scale if ripple voltage.is
within limits.
dc
----i~
VOltage~
PIN 452796
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD FOR THE
REVISED POWER SUPPLY WITH NO
DIODE BOARD
Printed Circuit Board
_8
I
">--..:...-......-
....-
Voltage Dc
Fl
+12 Vdc
.-----------------------~~B12
Lr-- B13 - - - - -
...L
.LC2
_
l
I
L -r-
Under voltage
1----------
r--
D
h----f-~'_7 >--, CR6A (see note)
/., -L
~
-
l·~
CR6
~
-
L~-5TP
5 F3
j: C4
+6.3
0.03
L -- D06
~----------~~B09
L -. +6.3 TP -
8.0-9.4
0.35
5.7-9.4
0.35
22.0-26.5
1.00
.=... ::.:.
r -=- 1 ~ _~_ --.J~~
::...
1>--:L
*
~
K
L
4.6-5.4
+8.5 Vdc
.-----------------------~~B05
----t-t-~>
\(-y----f-~~)
~
~ -- -4 CE Probe
11
J
0.50
Bl0
r
- C6
3713
F
r -.,.- --, C5 *;~~ only
+24 Vdc
2
---~~'~'>_--_......:..--~...f______...:-.---......
J...,J.:..... .---------~._.,. . ,
3713 Printer
P1
I
1 F4
., >---+-G
,...
D05 - - - ""'>---t--t-~~
I
..... : '
}
,...
- >---.
, -L
48 Vac
~
3715 Printer
./"
11.0-13.2
-....c ..... CE Probe
I
I
~
1c~~-
O~ervoitage----
I
CR5A (see note)
B11
~
-5
E ----~~~)~
0.50
10ruF2.._____-_1_2_V_d_c____....-~
9
>>-:3713 Printer
-
----~~~/.~
11.0-13.2
___- - - t J - . . .
:c C3
,~
Ripple Voltage
(peak to peak)
.. ,>--+.....
~
I
-
------f--I-~>'>----+---t....
"'--'
...
C7
5V
CBl
4/7
3713/3715
t--+--d-c---.--~~~>-r_Printer
B06 -'1- - - - 1-4.7-5.5
B07 I
D07 I
. -_ _-+_ D08 :
"'
Before EC 825737, this
heat sink was present
only on machines with
a printer. After EC
825737, the heat sink
is on all machines.
3
.lr---~)>-------7
6
0.30
.-.----+-_
11
e-.----t---D09_J
.----+--Dl0
..----+--D 11
. - - - - + - - D 12
.----+--D 13
..----+-.. D02
..----+--D03
>-7' .>-----4~--~D04
.
------+--B02
..----+-- B03
..-----+- B04
Note: CR5A and CR6A are present only on power
supplies at EC level 825737 or later.
Note: for 3717 printer, see 3717 MLM.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
811/75
PN 1619281
3741 ML
15·7
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
PN 1619282
11/15/74
DC VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Power Supply DC Cable
B
The power supply dc cable
carries dc voltages
to the connector 2-M on the MPU.
The MPU sends signals and dc voltages from:
Connector 2-J to disk 1.
Connector 2-K to disk 2.
Connector 2-N to display unit.
Connector l-N to BSCA.
Connectors l-P and l-R to printer.
Connector 2-P to keyboard.
Connector on MPU planar to ID reader.
Grou nd---+-++-....
(S.O to 9.4) +S.5 Vdc---+-+-....
\
(4.7 to 5.5) +5 Vdc---t-t-1
PO R ---+-+-....
(5.7 to 9.4) +6.3 Vdc---t-___
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc ---+--+---e
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc---+--+--....
......-t+-Ground
-- -
e..-.+-++-+5 Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
Ground
Voltages and Pin Numbers To and From MPU
--- --BSCA
-5
+5
3713
3715
Printer* Printer
DC7
DC4
DC7
DC4
Disk 1 & 2
+24
Keyboard 10 Reader
2-P-D06
2-P-B09
2-J or 2-K-811
2-J or 2-K-803
2-N-812
2-N-B13
+6.3
+6.8
-7.5
+8.5
':"12
+12
CRT
Pin 4
Pin 5
2-P-D03
l-N-D13
l-N-B12
2-N-D02
2-N-D09
2-N-Dl0
2-N-808
2-N-B09
DC9
DCl
DC2
*See 3717 MLM for 3717 pin assignments.
2-J or 2-K-Bl 0
./
---++-+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
.---t+-+S.5 Vdc (S.O to 9.4)
(11.0 to 13.2) +12 VdC.---t-H
Voltages
../
15-8
CRT
~
I PN 1619283 I
3741 ML
15-9
lEe
823146
This page intentionally left blank.
PN 1619284
15-10
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Note: If changes are made, DP Orders and
Movements must submit a Records Purpose
Only MES for the machine to update MLC
records. It is essential that you inform DP
Orders and Movements of this change. Excessive installation time can occur on sales
features and ECS if MLC records are incorrect.
3741 INSTALLATION
CRT Safety
See the CRT Safety notice on the inside of the
front cover of the maintenance library (page 0-3).
Power On Check
Completion of Installation
The machine serial number is inside the cover, on
the frame, below the disk unit.
Pl
-
Be sure that all safety shields are installed that
are removed during this installation.
-
Place the ML in the storage area of the machine.
-
Fill out the I R and report the installation
according to local procedures.
Mirror Installation
1.
Unpack the mirror assembly (part no. 2456420)
from its container and install as follows:
-
Install the seal (part no. 2456427) making sure
that the seal does not obstruct the area being
displayed on the CRT face.
2.
3.
lnstall the filter (part no. 2456424) on top of
the seal.
Align the mirror assembly (part no. 2456420)
with the holes in the tabletop and push down
until the assembly is latched.
4.
5.
Mirror Assembly
(PN 2456420) - - - -
6.
7.
Filter (PN 2456424):Seal (PN
2456427)~-
8.
9.
Pre-Power Check
-
Check that all cable connectors and crossconnectors are plugged and seated properly.
- Check the customer's power system for proper
grounding.
Use the Machine Checkout to check the machine
operation and performance (per machine record
card):
MAPs 7-1 and 7-2
Base machine
Data recorder
MAP 7-20
attachment
MAP 7-3
Feature Group A
MAP 7-4
Feature Group E
MAP 7-21
I/O adapter
MAP 7-5
Printer
10. Power down.
Make sure the customer's voltage matches the
voltage specified on the machine voltage tag.
This tag is inside the cover, on the frame, below the disk unit.
11.
If the line voltage and tag do not agree, consult
ani BM Installation Planning Representative.
13.
a
Make sure the MAINLINE switch is OFF.
Check the machine record card to find if an
RPQ is to be installed. (If so, go to Section
31 and learn the purpose of the RPQ. Do not
install now.)
If a printer is to be installed:
a. For a 3713 printer, go to page 16-2 and
perform steps 1-12.
b. For a 3715 printer, use the installation
instructions shipped with the 3715.
c. For a 3717 printer, use the installation
instructions in the 3717 M LM.
If the data recorder attachment or the I/O
adapter is to be installed, go to page 16-10
and perform all appropriate procedures.
Connect the mainline cord to the customer's
outlet.
Turn on the MAINLINE switch.
Observe the machine for signs of overheating
or smoke. Turn off the MAIN LI NE switch
immediately if any abnormal conditions are
noted.
Check that the disk drive hub and drive belt
are turning.
12.
If BSCA, Expanded Communications Feature,
or 1200 bps Line Adapter is to be installed,
go to page 16-3.
Go to page 0-4 in this manual and enter the
required information about the machine.
If RPQ is to be installed, go to Section 31.
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
811/75
- The feature diagnostic diskette(s), IS a CE tool.
The other diskette and operations manuals belong to the customer.
Packing Instructions
Note: For packing instructions and supplies, see
BM 7360738.
(Continued on next page.)
PN 1619285
3741 ML
16-1
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
Packing Instructions (Continued)
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
- Install the disk drive shipping blocks.
- Tape the following with nylon filament tape:
Disk file covers in closed position.
Display unit mirror to the table top.
Keyboard covers in closed position.
Rear cover to legs.
Power cord to table top.
If a ID reader is installed on the 3741,
tape it to the table top.
If a keylock is installed, place the key in
an envelope and tape the envelope to the
top of the mirror assembly.
Place the 3741 on the shipping pallet and
locate the 3741 glides in the shipping pallet
recesses.
Using the corner protectors, tape the 3741 to
the shipping pallet with six wraps of nylon
filament tape.
Note: If your printer is a 3713, use this pro·
cedure; if it's a 3717, use the procedure in the
3717 MLM.
If removed in step 3, reconnect the dc dis·
tribution cable connector to power supply
connector PS1 and the frame ground wire.
8.
Connect the connector end of the printer ac
cable (2456479) to the printer attachment
cable connector (six positions).1:t
Safety
9.
Connect the connector end of the printer dc
cable (2456483) into the twelve position
connector of the printer power attachment
cable.
Remove all electrical power from the machine by
unplugging the mainline cord.
Cable Installation (Refer to page 15-8 for
helpful graphics.)
2.
Loosen the screws and remove the power
supply as far as the cables permit.
Specifications
3.
Route the printer attachment cables (part
of the printer) through the hole in the
bottom of the machine, (hole farthermost
from the rear of the machine).
Dimensions:
H
34
87
II
10.
Mount the safety shield (from step 1) in
front of the power supply.
11.
Place the jumper, for the feature half planar
position 1, on yes.
12.
Close the logic gate and replace the back
cover.
After the printer has been installed and located, return
to page 16-1, step 4 under "power on check."
If necessary to move the power supply to
allow more working space, remove the de
distribution cable connector (2456461)
from the power supply PS1 connector
and the frame ground wire.
Weight: 240 Ib (109 kg)
II
Heat Output: 850 Btu/hr (215 kcal/hr)
Power Requirements:
0.4
kVA
1
Phases
115,208, or 230 (±1 0%)
Voltage
Environment Operating:
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
Refasten the power supply in its original
location.
Be sure to read and perform the printer unpaGking
instructions.
- Cover the 3741 with the polyethylene bag
and apply the labels.
Inches
Centimeters
7.
Installing the printer attachment circuitry and
associated hardware allows a printer to function
with the 3741 Data Station.
Remove safety shield from the power
supply.
S
25-114
64
16-2
1-P and cablE! connector 01CO or 1-R to socket
01CO or 1-R.
1.
F
42
107
PN 1619286
-3713 PRINTER INSTALLATION
CAUTION
The 3741 weighs 240 pounds (109 kg).
-
825853
Excess cable length should not be stored in the
pri nter cabi net.
4.
60 0 to 90 0 F (160 to 32 0 C)
8to 80%
73 0 F (23 0 C)
5.
3741 Cleaning
For cleaning, use only a mild soap and water
solution. Do not use IBM cleaning fluid.
6.
Assemble cable clamp (2456397) to the
printer attachment cables and the machine
frame using screw (19944), and nut
(257189). Attach the ground straps.
Route the printer signal cable (two cable
arms with connectors 01 CB or 1-P and
01 CD or 1-R) to the logic gate. Use the
existing clamps.
Plug the printer signal cable connector
01 CB or 1-P to feature PC board socket 01 CB or
Test Procedure
1.
Use the featUire half planar checkout
procedure MAP 7-4 of the 3741 MLM.
2.
Use the print(!r, checkout procedure MAP 7-5
of the 3741 MLM.
COMMUNICA~rIONS INSTALLATION
BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter), 1200 bps Line Adapter, Expanded
Communications (EBSCA) Feature, and Multipoint Feature.
BEGIN
Power off
If 1200 bps Line Adapter (non-switched) is installed, adjust transmit level (page 16-7), place adapter board
and
jumpering on autoanswer cards (page 16-8
connect cable to line. If 1200 bps Line Adapter (switched)
is installed, adjust transmit level (page 16-6) check jumpering on autoanswer cards (page 16-8 [I), and have the
>---------t customer arrange for connecting cable II to coupler. If
Yes
WTC PSN feature is installed, have customer connect to
telephone lines and then use the adjustment procedure
on MAP 5-23.
B),
No
Line Adapter Cable
(provided with IBM machine)
Connect modem
cable to modem
DA
OH
DT
Place feature half planar
jumpers in proper location for
modems, communications
facilities, and features installed
(page 16-4).
>-Y-e-s- - - - I
Yes
No
Go to
checkout 7-6
Jumper desired polling address
for this station on multipoint
card (page 16-9
Note
polling address on page 0-4.
13.
No
Go to
checkout 7-9
EC
823146
Date 9/15/74
825853
826065
11/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619287
3741 ML
16-3
EC 823146
826065
16192a~
PN
8/1/75
9/15/74
16-4
Feature Half Planar Jumpers
Key items for correct jumpering:
o All pin rows might not be present. Missing rows
are labeled none in the chart.
o Machines with BSCA or EBSCA (Models 2 and
4) are the only ones having pins 2 through 8.
o Because row numbering does not always start
at row 1, it is best to start counting from row
7, which always has 2 pins (BSCA and EBSCA
machines).
o Record the jumpering for the machine on the
chart for future reference.
-_ _CI
The chart shows the jumpering for each 3741
model and printer combination. To use the chart,
select the printer number (or no printer) in the
first column. Then follow the row across the
chart to the 3741 model number of this machine.
For Models 2 and 4, select BSCA or EBSCA.
.........
...
----0
rJ
A
Ves C
No
No
Printer
IBM modem cross referencing is shown on the
facing page.
·
·
Ves E
No
F
C
Ves
E
0
No
F
Ves C
Ves
E
No
0
No
F
N
··
0
EBSCA
1
N
2
· ·
N
A
0
··
No
Ves
BSCA
1
2
No
A
Ves
B
N
·
3713
3715 (jumper horizontally)
40 characters per second (cps)
80 cps = 3715 - 2
N = Printer is not installed.
Y = Printer is installed.
EBSCA
= 3715 -
2
1
.
.
No
Ves
No
A
Ves
B
N
3717 Jumpering is not needed.
40
BO
cps •
cps
No
3715
0
·
Ves E
No
No
Ves
F
• Ves
··
2
·· ·
A
Ves C
No
0
·
N
Ves
E
No
F
EBSCA
2
40
•
BSCA speed select
A = Low speed (600 bps).
B = High speed (1200 bps) or baud select
switch (WT) or modem clocking (1200,
2000,2400 bps).
cps
• No
. .
.
80
cps
• Ves
· ··
·
·
N
N
40
BO
• cps •
• No
cps
• Ves
C
Ves
E
0
No
F
Ves C
Ves
E
No
0
No
F
•
N
•
•
A
0
C
·
A
0
·
No
Ves
BSCA
2
N
··
A
3717
Keylock
Yes = Keylock is installed.
No = Keylock is not installed.
C
BSCA
1
3713
No = Printer is no .. installed.
Yes = Printer is installed.
0
Jumper plugging is not needed on the
3717 beca'use the jumpers are within
the printer cables,
·
N
EBSCA
N
o
Ves
E
No
F
··
No
Ves
ready' and communication proceeds (3872
switched, WE202C9, WE201 A3).
• Controller will send DISC (OLE EaT)
sequence before disconnecting.
BSCA line control determines in what order
the data terminal ready interface line and
the data set ready interface line are monitored
at the EIA interface.
Do not confuse the 'data terminal ready'
position (down position) of the jumper with
the 'data terminal ready' interface line. They
are not physically connected. The jumper
position merely determines in what sequence
the interface lines are manipulated by the
BSCA controller.
• Controller can be called to restart
communications on a recoverable
error that has caused communications
to terminate.
If jumper 4 is in position C (COSTL), it will
hold the 'data terminal ready' interface line
in the off condition until it detects that
either 'data set ready' or 'ring indicator' is
on. The BSCA controller will then turn on
the 'data terminal ready' interface line.
Send answertone
Yes = Data terminal must send answertone
(WT only: where data terminal is required
to send answertone).
No = Data terminal does not send answertone (modem generates answertone).
Connect data set to line philosophy is used
on some WTC switched line modems. Turning
on the 'data terminal ready' interface line
after seeing 'ring indicator' come on causes
the phone to be answered (autoanswer).
If manual call or manual answer is used,
pushing the data button causes 'data set
ready' to come on. The BSCA controller
then must turn on the 'data terminal ready'
interface line to hold the connection. Turning on the 'data terminal ready' interface
line before the call is made or answered
causes the modem to seize the line connection thereby disabling the hand set~
BSCA line facility
E (up position) = Switched
F (down position) = Non-switched
• Controller does not send 0 ISC.
The BSCA controller makes the following
changes based on this jumper:
• Operator 'intervention is required on error
condition that has terminated communications.
BSCA Iine control
C (up position) = Connect data set to line
(COSTL). Normal for non-switched lines.
o (down position) = Data terminal ready
(OTR). Normal for switched lines.
The 3741 also uses this position for nonswitched Iine modems where 'data set
ready' is ON all the time. This will bypass
the check for 'data set ready' being OFF
before proceeding in communications
(3872 non-switched, WE 20203, WE 201 B3).
Non-switched (down position)
• Controller sends line bids (ENO) if in T, P,
B or 0 mode. Waits for line bids if R mode.
• Controller will retry infinitely to send line
bids.
• Controller will wait forever to receive line
bids.
Switched (up position)
ID reader test pins
No jumper required.
• Controller sends line bids (ENO) if
the M key was used in the setup. Waits
for line bid if M key was not used.,
Multipoint installed
No = Multipoint feature not installed.
Yes = Multipoint feature is installed.
• Controller will retry 15 times when
sending line bids.
Note: All jumper positions might not be
present.
• Controller will wait only 20 seconds
to receive line bids.
IBM Modem Cross-Reference
If jumper 4 is in position 0 (OTR), the
BSCA controller uses a different sequence.
It first checks 'data set ready' to see if it
is OFF before it will turn the "data terminal
ready' line on. If data set ready is on when
data terminal ready is OFF, an error condition is assumed and the operation ceases.
(This is why position C must be used if
data set ready is always ON.) If data set
ready is OFF, the BSCA controller will
turn the 'data terminal ready' line ON. In
this case, the 'data terminal ready' interface
line conditions the modem for autoanswer
or data mode. After the modem does
autoanswer or the operator pushes the data
button on, the modem turns on 'data set
Send
Answertone
Speed
Select
CDSTLI
Jumper
2
4
5
6
-
IBM 3976-111
IBM 3976-111
IBM 3872
IBM 3872
1200 bps
Line Adapter
1200 bps
Line Adapter
WTC PSN
Line Adapter
System/3
LCA
System/3
Local EIA
RPQ
B
B
B
B
D
C
D
C
No
No
No
No
E
F
Yes
Yes
No
No
B
C
No
F
Yes
B
D
No
E
Yes
B
C
Yes
E
Yes
B
C
No
F
No
B
C
Yes
F
No
Modem
DTR
Non-switchedl
Switched
Sync Clock
Required
F
E
Note: DTR - Date Terminal ready
CDSTL - Connect data set to line
EC
823146
826065
9/15/74-
8/1/75
PN 1619289
3741 ML
16-5
EC 823146
826065
Switched Line Transmit Level Adjustment
Procedure
12.
The transmit level must be adjusted at the transmit
card
to match the level specified for the data
coupler. Also, the autoanswer basic card must be
jumpered for that same transm,it level (page 16-8
13.
m
II ).
(Place Iine adapter in service position, page 16-8
11)·
1.
Turn off the 3741 mainline power.
2.
Disconnect the line coupler cable from line
adapter board E2
3.
On the dB meter:
a) Set the 2W-4W TRANS/REC switch to
TRANS.
b) Set the BRIDGING 600,324 switch to
600.
5.
6.
1m.
Remove the autoanswer interface card from
line adapter board B2.
Jumper line-adapter-board pins 6, 7, 8, and
9 together
This causes 'data tip' to
be grounded, 'request to send' to be on, and
the transmitter to be unclamped.
1m.
Jumper line-adapter-board pins 4 and 5 together to turn on 'data set ready'
II .
7.
Connect the dB meter's black line terminal
to pin 10, and red line terminal to pin 111m .
8.
Turn power on the 3741 and the dB meter.
9.
Adjust R3 on the transmit card to attain
the correct transmit level reading on the
dB meter scale
Ill.
A1
.11
.10
Reconnect the line coupler cable to line
adapter board E2
u
II.
'j
Power down.
11.
Remove the jumpers from the line-adapterboard pins
m1 .
~
'~
II)
~
~
'§
a:
~
c3
.9
~
.8
«
Return to installation flowchart 16-3.
82
D05
007
§
009
B05
B07
B08
B12
B13
II
Q.
't:
,!.I
l
~
'~
~
~
~
a:
..:
~
(DT)
White
(CCT)
(SG)
(RI)
(SH)
(OA)
(DR)
(OH)
Brown
Gray
Violet
Red
Yellow
Black
Blue
'~
Transmit level
iS continously
adjustable, from
OdB to -15dB.
DO D
R3/
R1
R2
\ - Space frequency (sealed)
\
Mark frequency (sealed)
• •
L Transmit card
jumper position
(card PN 5863763 only).
Transmit Card
3741 Model 2
Feature Half
Planar
~
!:S
:Jc3
Switched Line Adapter Board
Coupler
Data Tip
Coupler Cut
Through
Signal Ground
Ring Indicate
Switch Hook
Data Modem Ready
Data Ring
Off Hook
.4
III
Line Coupler Cable
Cable
C2
.5
iii.
Line
Adapter
.7
.6
If transmit card 5863763 is used and transmit
level must be kept below -1.8 dBm (most WT
applications), do not use any jumper on the
transmit card
If transmit level above -'1.8
dBm is desired, two program pins on card should
be jumpered together before adjusting pot for
transmit level. This note applies only to card I
5863763 not card 5862858. (Leave jumper
installed.)
m.
10.
1Q-6_
II
Reinstall the autoanswer interface card in
line adapter board B2
A2
Adjust the transmit output:
4.
14.
161929~
PN
8/1/75
9/15/74
1200 BPS
Line Adapter
Lim! Coupler
Line Coupler
Cable
Lines
Switched
I
m Non-switched (Leased) Line Transmit Level
On the line adapter board
jumpers:
Adjustment Procedure
13 place the following
7
8
9
•••
••
••
••
10 11
2 Wire - 4 Wire
Direct attachment to a leased line usually requires
a zero dB transmit level.
For 2 Wire
Note:
For 4 Wire
Early
boards
might
not have
echo
clamp
jumpers.
Place line adapter in service position (page 16-8
B).
8 to 9
12 to 13
14 to 15
Adjust the transmit output:
1.
2.
9.
Turn off the 3741 mainline power.
Disconnect the communication line plug
and insert it into the TRANS/REC jack in
the dB meter cover.EJ
On the dB meter:
a) Set the 2W-4W TRANS/R EC switch to
TRANS.
b) Set the BRIDGING 600, 324 switch to 600.
c) Jumper the line terminals on the cover to
the line terminals on the meter.
Jumper line-adapter-board pins 4, 5, and 6
together to unclamp the transmitter and
turn on 'request to send.'
Turn power on the 3741 and the dB meter.
Adjust R3 on the transmit card to attain the
zero dB output level on the meter scale.
Power down.
Remove the jumpers from the line-adapterboard pins.
Reconnect the communication line plug.
10.
Return to installation flowchart 16-3.
3.
4.
I!I
5.
6.
m
7.
8.
.,
12 13
7 to 8
10 to 11
14 15
o~
20 21
~
••
••
24
~
0<;
~
U
III
cr:
.6
aJ
.5
C2
82
04
0
16
•
17 •
c
0
3 .,
• ,8
·c
.,
.~
19
~
:0
"EU'"
>
.~
E ~
8:J
cr:
With
Use
Jumpered
Clear to
Send (CTS)
Delay
Jumpered
Non-switched (Leased) Line Adapter Board
130 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 23
200 ms
17 to 19
50 ms
20 to 21 and
22 to 24
75 ms
17 to 18
22 to 23
25 ms
17 to 16
0
cJ
22 23
•
Echo
Camp
Delay
:E
.,>
CAUTION
The short delay combinations might cause
intermittent echo problems.
1m
A
A
A
~~i~:~~:~;~m
uUU
m
II
OdBto-15dB.
Rl
R2
~
If transmit card 5863763 is used and transmit level
must be kept below -1.8 dBm {most WT applicationsl', do not use any jumper on the transmit card
If transmit level above -1.8 dBm is desired,
two program pins on card should be jumpered together before adjusting pot for transmit level. This
note applies only to card 5863763 not card
5862858. (Leave jumper installed.)
\
III.
R3
~
Space frequency (sealed)
Mark frequency (sealed)
• •
~ransmit card
jumper position
(card PN 5863763 only)
m
Non-switched Line Adapter Board Jumpering
Jumpers are provided for selection of:
Transmit Card
2-wire or 4-wire line
25, 75, or 200 ms clear to send delay
3741 Model 2
I
On very short lines, or lines without echo suppressors, the shorter clear to send delays may be used.
Feature
Half
Planar
1200 BPS
Line Adapter
BSCA Cable
II
f-'
r
....
I
Communication Line Cable
EI
..........
h
f-'
Non-switched Lines
"-
Non-switched
823146
826065
Date 9/15n4
8/1n5
EC
PN 1619291
3741ML
16-7
EC 823146
826065
8/1/75
9/15/74
~--------~--------
f!
1200 bps Line Adapter Service Position
t .i
_
_
PN
J
161929:~
16-8 -
KSJ
Autoanswer basic card must be jumpered to
same level as transmit card was set.
Autoanswer interface card must be jumpered as
shown.
-db level
0
-,
A X
-?
B
X
c
o
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
F
G
H
X
-6
X
X
X
X
-4 -5
y
E
X
-3
X
X
X
-8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
K
L
X
X
X
-9 -'0 -1' -12 -13 -14 -15
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Jumper the attenuator pins in accord with this chart,
to match level requirements of the linl~ coupler.
~D
---;;::::=:::.==; I
Service Position
o
:DDD
Autoanswer Basic Card.
Jumper as shown.
•
o ~I------'
Line Adapter Board
Autoanswer interface card.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1:1 Multipoint Addressing
. For a given polling character, the corresponding
select character is defined.
Poll Poll Sel
Char Hex Hex
Binary
Poll
Char
Poll Sel
Binary
Hex Hex
J
A
B
C
0
E
F
L
M
p
G
H
Q
ID reader W & X
I
R
I
I
s
I
u
W
J
y
K
I
L
L__ _
M
N
0
P
T
Bit-O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BYteU
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V
x z
0
R
Each Bit Position
..... "1
.
o 1"'--"0"
o ~~1~"1"
0 ...... )
C3
80
81
82
83
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CO
CE
CF
DO
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
DB
DC
00
OE
OF
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
80
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
90
9E
9F
CO
C1
C2
84
I I
1100 0000
1100 0001
1100 0010
1100 0011
1100 0100
11000101
1100 0110
1100 0111
1100 1000
11001001
1100 1010
1100 1011
1100 1100
1100 1101
1100 1110
1100 1111
1101 0000
1101 0001
1101 0010
1101 0011
1101 01 00
1101 01 01
1101 0110
1101 0111
1101 1000
1101 1001
11011010
1101 1011
1101 1100
1101 1101
1101 1110
11011111
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EO
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
Fa
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FO
FE
FF
AO
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
BO
B1
B2
83
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BO
BO
BE
BF
1110 0000
1110 0001
1110 0010
1110 0011
11100100
11100101
11100110
1110 0111
11101000
1110 1001
11101010
1110 1011
1110 1100
11101101
11101110
1110 1111
1111 0000
1111 0001
1111 0010
1111 0011
1111 011D0
1111 01 01
1111 0110
1111 0111
1111 1000
1111 1001
11111010
11111011
1111 1100
1111 1101
11111110
11111111
T . : a l u e jumpered on card
1-------
Select character in HEX
Poll character in HEX
Poll character
Select a unique poll character for your 3741 and
jumper the binary 'representation on the multipoint card. The poll sequence will then be that
character sent twice followed by ENO. The
select sequence will be the corresponding select
character sent twice followed by ENO.
Multipoint Card
EC
823146
826065
Date 9/15/74
8/1/75
PN 1619293
3741 ML
16-9
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825979
826065
12/20/74-
811/75'
DATA RECORDER OR I/O ADAPTER
ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION
4.
If a printer has not been attached, skip
to step 7.
Install ing the data recorder or I/O adapter attachment circuitry and associated hard'.'Vare allows a
data recorder or I/O adapter to function with the
3741 Data Station. Normally, only the cable at
the remote end must be installed.
5.
Remove the screw and nut from the cCible
clamp and remove the printer attachment
cable ground straps.
6.
Pull all of the gray covered portion of the
printer attachment cables out of the machine.
Safety
,7.
1.
2.
3.
11.
Route the data recorder or I/O adapter
attachment cable, one paddle at a time,
through the hole
and to the right of
the printer cables
if there. Th is is a
tight fit with the printer cables inserted.
13.
Pull the data recorder or I/O adapter
attachment cable through the hole until
the gray portion is about a foot inside the
machine.
If a printer has not been attached, skip to
step 11.
10.
Pull the gray portion of the printer cables
about a foot inside the machine.
Loosen the two screws holding the power
supply and disconnect the power supply
ground strap. Then move the power supply as far as the cables will allow.
Pull the cables back out of the machine
until the cable clamp rests on the flanged
bracket
Slide the cable clamp over the flanged
bracket and secure it by tightening the
two screws
Itt .
9.
Remove the safety shield from the power
supply.
a
Loosely assemble the ca~le clamp
to
the cable or cables, just get the two screws
started. The data recorder or I/O
adapter cable goes to the right of the
printer cablEls. See 50 Hz note
II .
m
Remove the back cover of the 3741 and
open the gate.
1
II .
iii
8.
16-10
161929
m
12.
Remove all electrical power from the machine
by unplugging the mainline cord.
Cable Installation at 3741 (Normally Installed
at the Factory)
PN
14.
Screw the ground straps to the machine
base.
15.
Route the cclble or cables behind the power
supply (toward the machine front).
16.
Refasten the power supply in its original
position.
17.
Screw the power supply ground strap on
the base.
18.
Mount the power supply safety shield
removed in step 2.
~_ _- - - -..- - - - Flanged bracket II
~::----------- Hole for printer and
attachment cablesliJ
Hole for BSCA or
modem cables
Power
Supply
Holes for ground strap
hold-down screws
m
, . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - Flanged bracket
iii
~ Data
Recorder or I/O Adapter
Attachment Cable
~
~---------
Point in cables where
gray portion ends, and
where ground straps
are attached
~
~---~
~
Printer cables
Data Recorder or I/O Adapter
Attachment Cable
Cable clamp
B
50Hz only
Assemble the ground
straps as follows:
Cable clamp
PN 2469135
PN 2469136
m
Clamp
Attachment Half Planar Installation (Normally
Installed at the Factory)
1.
Remove the bar and card cover from the
gate.
2.
Remove the VFO and ROS feature cards.
Do this by removing the cross connectors
from planar sockets 1-A, 1-B, 1-C, and
1-0. Then remove all canoe paddle clips.
3.
If the feature half planar is installed, remove
the canoe paddle clips from along its top
edge.
4.
Attach the cable interface connectors
(2731011) to the attachment half planar
sockets A and B. This is where the 1-J and
1- K positions wi II be when the 1/2 planar
is installed.
5.
6.
7.
Install the new cross connectors (1809903)
at planar sockets 1-M and 1-L. The power
cable going to socket 2-M will have to be
unplugged and replugged after the 1-M
cross connector is installed.
8.
Attach the attachment cable at 1-J and
1-K.
9.
Put the card guides on the VFO and ROS
feature cards and install the VFO card
(504). Then install, if used, the ROS
feature _~~504). These cards for the data
recorders are backward from the SLD
usual card positions.
10.
Install the bar on the gate; then install the
card covers.
11.
Close the gate and install the machine
back cover.
Cable Installation at Data Recorders
1.
Remove the 129 back cover or the 5496
front cover.
2.
Remove the screen covering the hole in the
machine bottom that covers the data recorder cable entrance.
3.
Install the cable into the data recorder and
screw it into place (see the theory-maintenance manual for the data recorder to find
the feature plug location).
4.
Attach the data recorder cable ground strap
to the data recorder frame and reinstall the
screen covering cable entrance.
5.
Reinstall the covers.
Cable Installation at System/3
Install the attachment half planar in the
gate. It goes in the top half of level 1
(504Q).
Refer to the I/O adapter part of the System/3
installation procedures.
Reconnect the cross connectors at planar
sockets 1-A, 1-B, 1-C and 1-0.
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825979
826065
12/20/74
8/1/75
m
PN
1619460
3741 ML
16-11
EC 825853
Date 11/15/74
This page is intentionally left blank.
·PN
16194611
16-12
GLOSSARY
BSCA-Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter: A feature that allows the 3741 to communicate with other machines via telephone
equipment.
AC, ac-Alternating current.
All Keys Mechanical Assembly-A keyboard
frame, which includes all the data and function
key modules, and fastens to the keyboard printed
circuit board.
Byte-A byte is composed of 8 binary bits that
define a character.
Data Set-A block or group of records assigned
for a particular use.
Data Set Label-Any record (disk address 00008
through 00026) which contains stored information defining a data set.
DC, dc-Direct current.
Cathode-The emitter element in an electronic
tube.
AM-Address Mark: A byte of data on the disk,
used to identify the ID field and data field in the
record on the disk.
Clicker-A mechanical and electrical device producing an audible signal to the operator that a key
entry was accepted by the machine.
Amplifier-A device to expand something, or
make it greater, or more intense; as sound, power,
or force.
Collet-A device which centers and clamps the
disk to the disk drive hub when the disk drive
cover is closed.
Analysis-A study of the content of, or reason
for, something.
Contaminate-To make less useful by introducing
undesirable elements.
Anode-The collector element in an electronic
tube.
Contamination-That which contaminates.
Deleted Record-A diskette sector from which
data has been deleted. This area is indicated by
a control address mark and a D in the first
position of the data field.
Desensitize-Make less able to sense.
.Deserialized-Signals received one after another
are made into characters.
Disconnect-Take apart physically or electrically.
Disk-A flat circular object.
Assume-To accept as correct.
Diskette-A soft disk in a paper cover.
Control Address Mark-An indicator (to the hardware) that precedes the data field of a record on
the diskette.
Display Viewer-The display viewer reflects the
display unit information to the operator.
Assumption-The act of assuming.
Audio Response-The sound produced by the
clicker.
Converter-Converts 12 vdc to 12,000 vdc to accelerate the electron beam to the face of the CRT.
It also provides the 400 vdc for the brightness
control.
Auto Feedback Device-A mechanical and electrical device producing an audible signal to the
operator that a key entry was accepted by the
machine.
CRC-Cyclic Redundancy Check: An error check.
Counting of the bits on a record.
DTR-Data Terminal Ready.
DS R-Data Set Ready.
EBCDIC-Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
EBSCA-Expanded Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter.
Create-Make.
Autoanswer-Automatic answer.
Bad Spot-(l/O Adapter only) A diskette sector
on which data cannot be recorded (the area is
damaged or defective). This area is indicated by
a control address mark and an F in the first
position of the data field.
Crossfoot Total-Add a group of numbers in
several different orders to make sure the total is
correct.
EC-Engineering Change.
ECA-Engineering Change Announcement.
CRT-Cathode Ray Tube.
EOD-End of Data: A 5-character field (positions
75 through 79) which is the adoress of the last
record of the data set plus 1, or next available
record on the disk. If a data set is defined by EOE
but no data is entered, then EOD equals BOE.
CPU-Central Processing Unit.
BOE-Beginning of Extent: A 5-character field
(positions 29 through 33) which identifies the
position of the first record of the data set.
Dampen-Make moist.
Data-I nformation; records.
Boundary-Something that indicates, or fixes, a
limit or extent.
BPS-Bits per Second: Communication line
transmission rate.
Data Link Control Characters-A transmission
control character used by the BSCA feature. This
character is for control only, not to be transmitted.
823146
825958
826065
Date 9/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
EC
EOE-End of Extent: A 5-character field (positions 35 through 39) for the address of the last
record of a data set.
EOF-End of File: A code which signals that the
last record of a file has been read.
PN
1619295
3741 ML
17-1
EC
823146
825958
826065
Date 9/15/74
3/21/75
8/1/75
Extent-The limit, one end or the other of a data
set.
Load (a diskette}-Close a disk drive cover (with
a diskette in the drive).
FE-Field Engineering.
Log Out-Additional status information, displayed
on the bottom line of the CRT, during BSCA
communications.
FET -Field Effect Transistor logic.
Flyplate-The pad on the bottom of a keyboard
key module. When a key is pressed, the flyplate
raises and the capacitive change indicates to the
keyboard printed circuit that the key is pressed.
MAP-Maintenance Analysis Procedure: Provides
the step by step procedure which locates a failing part.
PN 161929(
17-2
Power Up-Turn the power switch on. Always
wait at least 5 seconds after a power down before
powering up to allow for proper power on reset
(POR).
Premature-Too soon; before the proper time.
Probe-Use IBM Universal Logic Probe, PN 453212.
Prong-A thin projection.
FRU-Field Replaceable Unit.
Master Coil-A horizontal deflection coil in the
display unit.
Fuzzy-Not clearly readable.
Measure-Use IBM CE multimeter, PN 4527B6.
Gross-Large, immediately seen.
Medium-The disk.
Hash Total-A sum of fields used only for checking of one or more other fields. The 3741 field
totals feature provides the ability to, create a
'Hash Total' for a group of records.
Memory-A high density field effect transistor
(FET) memory, used by the microprocessor
unit (MPU).
Protected Data Set-A protected data set cannot
be written to, and an attempt to go into enter or
verify mode will msult in a file protect error. If
you are in update mode and attempt to modify
a record, you will also get the file protect error.
Raster-The path IJf the electron beam which
produces the image on the display unit.
Mismatch-Not alike, different.
Reconnect-Put back together physically or
electrically.
MPU-A microprocessing unit which receives,
controls, and manages the flow of information
for the machine.
Record-A consecutive string of 128 or less bytes
(characters) on th(~ disk. Some or all of the
characters may be blank.
Recover-Bring back, or get back.
lOR-Identification Reader.
Original (keyboard or disk drive)-The unit
located at the station with the reported fault.
Initialize-Make a blank disk useful by writing on
it certain data out of ROS.
Other (keyboard or disk drive)-The opposite
of the original keyboard or disk drive.
Hex-Hexidecimal Code.
History-A record of.
ID-Identification.
Remove (a diskette)-Take the diskette out of
the disk drive.
Replace-Put a new part in place of original part.
Intermittent-Coming and going at intervals.
Overheated-Too hot.
Reinstall-Put original part in place of a new part.
IR-Incident Report.
Jittery-The display unit information is hard to
read because it moves up and down and side to
side.
PC Board-A printed circuit board is an electrical
circuit mounted on a board to distribute signals
and voltages.
Periodically-At the end of each regulated equal
length of time.
Reseat-To remOVE!, unplug, unfasten, or detach
an object from its position or mounting and put
the same object back in place again. Example:
to remove a cable ifrom its connector, and put
it back again.
Keying-Entering data through a keyboard.
KBD-Keyboard.
Planar Board-The microprocessing unit electronic
board.
RFT -Request for Test.
Ripple-Unsteady, irregular, wavy.
Liibel-A descriptive word or phrase.
PN-Part number.
LED-Light Emitting Diode: Activates the photot'ransistor which detects index pulses on the disk
unit.
PaR-Power On Reset: A signal occurring during power on, used to reset all circuits to an
operational starting point.
Linkup-Connection.
Power Down-Turn the power switch off.
Lint-Short cloth fibers.
ROS-Read-Only Storage: A storage whose contents are not chan£led by computer instructions.
RPQ-( Request for Price Quotation} Used by
IBM to answer spe<:ific needs of customers for
equipment and special features not available in
the Sales Manual.
R/W -Read/Write.
Search-The act of locating a desired record on
the disk. Search functions can be performed by:
Search EOD
Search data address
Search content
Search sequential content
Seek-The movement of the read/write head from
one track to another one on the disk.
Wiggle Sweep-Deflects the electron beam in the
display unit in an oscillating motion, to produce
character height.
Write Protected Data Set-A write protected data,
set cannot be written to, and an attempt to go
into enter or verify mode will result in a write
protect error. If you are in update mode and
attempt to modify a record, you will also get
the write protect error.
Self-Check-A method for checking the entry of
numeric fields that contain a precomputed selfcheck digit, which is the last digit in the field.
Slave Coil-A horizontal deflection coil in the
display unit.
Swap-To exchange one for another.
Sweep-To deflect, or produce vertical, horizontal, and oscillating motion to the CRT electron
beam, in order to exhibit a constant image.
Symptom- An indication.
Sync-Synchronous, 'or synchronize.
TTL-Transistor-Transistor Logic.
TP-Test Point.
Unload (a diskette)-Open the disk drive cover
(does not mean remove).
Unprotected Data Sets-An unprotected data set
can be written to or read from. The data set
label for an unprotected data set conta ins a
blank in position 43.
Update-To bring up to date; to make current.
Vac-Volts ac.
Vdc-Volts dc.
VFO-Video Frequency Oscillator.
Vibrate-To rapidly change from one form, or
position, or state, to another, as a bell vibrates
when struck.
Video-Information relating to or used in receiving the image on the face of the display unit.
823146
825958
826065
Date 9/15/74
3i21/75
8/1/75
EC
m
PN
1619297
3741 ML
17-3
EC
823146
Date 9/15114
PN
161929~
3741 ML
This page intentionally left blank .
.
.
/
/\
17-4
INDEX
m
ac voltage distribution (no diode board) 15-4
ac voltage distribution (with diode board) 15-2
access disk drive 1 and checkout MPU
and R/W storage 14-2.18
accessing, storage 14-2.11
accessing, track 8-7
ACK O/ACK 1-positive acknowledgement 14-29
adapter, 1200 bps line 14-50
addressing, multipoint 14-81
adjustment
disk cover interlock 220
disk door (lateral) 238
disk top cover (vertical) 237
head (for track 00) 231
head load actuator 207
idler assembly 215
lower limit stop 232·
non-switched line transmit level 16-7
phototransistor assembly 243
stepper motor 230
switched line transmit level 16-6
transmit level
non-switched line 16-7,527
switched line 16-6
upper limit stop 234
WT switched lines (BSCA) 540
yoke 311
alignment check diskette 8-14
alignment, data head, service check 8-15
alignment, head, service check 8-14
ALU (arithmetic logic unit) 14-2.9
answer sequence (WTPSN)
auto 539
manual 537
attachment
disk 14-2.13
display 14-2.13
keyboard 14-2.13
attachment half planar removal and
replacement 508
audio feedback control 13-1
AUTO DUP/SKIP 13-1
. AUTO REC ADV 13-1
BSCA (continued)
modem cable 14-24, 14-43
modem cable/BSCA cable chart 718
NAK-negative acknowledgement 14-27
operating procedures flowchart 723
operation (throughput and data set labels) 720
operational flowchart 9-42
packaging 14-43
receive mode 14-19
R FT procedures and TDAT 8-26.10
R FT (request for test) procedure 1 8-26.12
RFT (request for test) procedure 2 8-26.14
R FT (request for test) procedure 3 8-26.16
R FT (request for test) procedure 4 8-28
RVI-reverse interrupt 14-29
service aids for modem and line problems 732
service hints 726
SOH-start of heading 14-26
status message 14-39
STX-start of text 14-26
SYN-synchronous idle 14-26
System/3 LCA (service hints) 729
TDAT and RFT procedures 8-26.10
terminal ID jumper chart 562
test mode 2 procedure 550
throughput 720
transmission speeds 720
transmit mode 14-15
transmit/receive mode 14-16
TID-temporary text delay 14-30
WACK-wait before transmit-positive
acknowledgement 14-30
wrap adapter 551
WT switched lines adjustment ·540
1200 bps line adapter cable chart 521
1200 bps line adapter receive level check
procedures 8-36.5
1200 bps line adapter switched line transmit
level adjustment 520
3741-use of the M key 14-42
BSCA checkout 8-26.10
BSCA controller
description 14-2.16
interface lines 14-24
operation 14-14
autoanswer card jumpers 16-8
autoanswer sequence 14-66, 539
m
belt tracking, idler assembly 215
BCC-block check character, BSCA 14-28
blocked transmit mode (J), EBSCA 14-71
BSCA
ACK O/ACK 1-positive
acknowledgement 14-29
BCC-block check character 14-28
cable/modem chart 552
common communications error codes and
causes 730
communications configurations 714
communications modes 755, 757
communications procedure 14-42
controller 14-14
data flow 14-24
data set labels 720
display mode indicators 711
DLE-data link escape 14-29
ENQ-enquiry 14-28
EOT-end of transmission 14-28
error logout 14-23
errors 14-21
ETB-end of ~ransmission block 14-27
ETX-end of text 14-27
facilities (service hints) 727
feature jumpers 16-4
feature mix (service hints) 728
forward abort 14-31
introduction 14-14
ITB-intermediate transmission block 14-31
line control characters 14-26
line control sequence, operations 14-32
line coupler cable chart 522
M key use (service hints) 731
machine characteristics (service hints) 726
manual answer sequence 537
manual call sequence 538
mode indicators 14-20
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
PN 1619299
3741 ML
18-1
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
BSCA features
BSCA-to-modem interface 14-46
EIA interface 14-46
IBM modem cross reference 16-5
keylock 14-44
modem and LCA interface 14-48
operator ID reader 14-44
synchronous clock 14-44
terminal ID 14-44
1200 bps line adapter 14-50
BSCA theory
BSCA controller operation 14-14
receive mode (R) 14-19
table of contents 14-13
transmit mode (T or P) 14-15
transmit/receive mode (B or D) 14-16
BSCA to modem interface
line levels 14-46
1200 bps line adapter 14-57
BSCA to 3872 modem and 3747 9-49
BSCA/EBSCA, RFT procedures and
TDAT 8-26.10
cable
data recorder attachment 712
extender 8-39
I/O adapter 712
modem/BSCA (except 1200 bps line
adapter) 14-49
printers 712
test, online 1200 bps line adapter 8-36.2
call sequence, manual 538
card I/O (see data recorder attachment)
cards, planars, and half planars 502
carrier detected (CD)
EIA interface standard 14-46
1200 bps line adapter interface 14-56
CE diagnostic diskette 8-14
CE diskettes 8-14
alignment check 8-14
CE diagnostics 8-14
handling precautions 8-14
I/O adapter 8-14
CE display mode
diagnostic programs 8-1
sele!=ting 8-1
terminating 8-1
CE general logic probe 8-13
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
CE head-adjusting tool 8-12
CE mode
keyboard bit line levels 415
track accessing 8-7
CE pins for raster display 8-12
·CE probe 8-13
CE safety practices 0-3
CE test mode (W), EBSCA 14-72
CE tools 8-39
CE voltmeter 8-12
chaining, program 14-6
character formation, display 12-3
character repeat function 13-3
character storage control, keyboard 13-4
character transfer control 13-4
character transfer read/write theory, I/O
adapter 14-120
cleaning procedure
covers 0-2
head and pressure pad 209
clear to send (CTS)
EIA standard interface 14-46
1200 bps line adapter 14-56
clicker
description 13-2
service check 410
clock, synchronous
BSCA 14-44
EBSCA 14-79
codes chart, key 13-8
collating sequence, EBCDIC 418
collet assembly removal and replacement 222
common signal ground, 1200 bps line
adapter 14-57
communications
attachment configurations 554
autoanswer card jumpers 16-8
BSCA
checkout 8-26.10
operational flowchart 9-42
theory 14-14
configurations, BSCA 714
display mode indicators 14-20
EBSCA
(see also communications (EBSCA) feature)
checkout 8-26.10
diagnostic aids 8-33
theory 14-68
error codes, EBSCA (flowchart) 9-67
error logout, BSCA 14-23
error logout, EBSCA 14-73
errors 14-21
PN 1619300
]
3741 ML
18-2
communications (continued)
features
keylock '14-44
operational flowchart 9-42
operator ID reader 14-44
synchronous clock with BSCA 14-44
synchronous clock with-EBSCA 14-79
terminal idlmtification 14-44
installation '16-3
jumpers, feature half planar 16-4
modes
EBSCA 755
hex display 757
non-switched line transmit lever
adjustment 16-7
procedures, BSCA 14-42
receive functional flowchart 724
switched line transmit level adjustment 16-6
throughput rates (EBSCA) 740, 741
transmit flowc:hart 724
wrap adapters, BSCA 766
communications checkout
BSCA/EBSCA, RFT and TOAT 8-26.10
EBSCA diagnc1stic aids, test
procedures 8-33
offline checkout 8-26.10
online checkout 8-26.10
online 1200 bps line adapter cable
test 8-36.2
recording a test tape 8-26.10
3872 TOAT 8-26.10
continuous read 8-5
control nomenclature (interface lines) 14-105
copy data set (to EOO) flowchart 9-26
copy image (to EOE) flowchart 9-31
copy to a specified address flowchart 9-28
coupler cut through, 1200. bps line
adapter 14-57
cover alignment check, disk 237
cover interlock switch, disk drive 11-6
covers, cleaning 0-2
cross connectors ito MPU planar, BSCA 14-24
CRT
(see also displalY)
locations 304
safety 0-3
III
data flow
BSCA 14-24
data recorder attachment 14-110
EBSCA 14-75
I/O adapter 14-112
MPU (simplified) 14-2
3741 system 14-2.2
data head alignment service check 8-15
data modem ready, 1200 bps line
adapter 14-57
data recorder attach ment
cable removal and replacement 712
card plugging in data recorder 713
data flow 14-110
diagnostic diskette programs 8-40
diagnostic procedure 8-40
format control characters 9-73
~ BM 129 cable/connector/pin chart 14-106
IBM 5496 cable/connector/pin chart 14-107
installation 16-10
interface line names 14-105
operational flowcharts 9-78
punch a data set (all or in part) 9-82
punch a record 9-78
punch a record using search address 9-86
punch a record(s) using search
content 9-88
read a card 9-80
read a data set (or data sets) 9-84
programs 9-74
punch data translation 14-109
punch operation 14-103
read operation 14-101
read translation and compare 14-108
sample programs 9-76
setup for online mode 9-90
table of contents 9-73
test program 8-43
theory 14-101
data ring, 1200 bps line adapter 14-57
data set label format 239
data set label, deJete 9-5
data set ready (DSR)
EIA standard interface 14-46
1200 bps line adapter 4-56
data terminal ready (DTR)
EIA standard interface 14-46
1200 bps line adapter 14-56
disk drive (continued)
head cleaning procedure 209
head load actuator 11-4
head service check 208
hub and shaft assembly removal and
replacement 216
idler assembly adjustment 215
idler assembly removal and
replacement 215
introduction 10-2
leadscrew nut and spring 11-6
leadscrew service check 242
LED assembly removal and replacement
light emitting,diode (LED) and
phototransistor 11-4
limit amplifier and VFO card 11-9
limit stops 11-6
locations 217
low current 11-9
lower limit stop adjustment 232
motor and drive 11-6
motor removal and replacement 214
operating sequence 11-8
preload spring 11-6
pulley and belt removal and
replacement 213
read amplifier 11-9
service position 206
stepper motor
adjustment 230
assembly 11-6
removal and replacement 229
test points, oscilloscope 11-14
update (flowchart) 11-12
upper limit stop adjustment 234
variable frequency oscillator (VFO)
card 11-4
write data 11-9
write operation, enter mode
(flowchart) 11-11
disk file control (FC) card 416
disk initialization
description 14-7
flowchart
with disk check 9-50
without disk check 9-52
disk load sequence
flowchart 14-2.20
locate track 00 14-2.20
volume label test 14-4
write gate test 14-3
data tip, 1200 b,ps line adapter 14-57
dc voltage distribution 613, 15-8
delete data set label (flowchart) 9-5
delete record (flowchart) 9-15
diagnostic aids contents 8-1
diagnostic diskettes, tools 8-39
diagnostic procedure, data recorder
attachment 8-40
diagnostic programs
data recorder 8-40
disk speed, display 8-2
disk track IDs, display 8-3
display disk speed 8-2
display disk track IDs 8-3
selecting 8-1
terminating 8-1
3715 printer 8-26
disassembly/assembly, keyboard 407
disk attachment 14-2.13
controller 14-2.14
multiplexor 14-2.13
operations 14-2.15
serdes 14-2.13
VFO card 14-2.13
write trigger 14-2.13
disk collet assembly 11-4
disk controller 14-2.14
disk cover
interlock adjustment 220
locations 224
disk door lateral adjustment 238
disk drive
attachment, troubleshooting intermittent
problems 8-6
belt tracking 215
collet assembly removal and
replacement 222cover description 11-4
cover interlock switch 11-6
cover removal and replacement 221
disk collet assembly 11-4
erase (tunnel) 11-9
field replaceable units (F RUs) 11-4
file control (FC) card 11-4
head actuator service check 207
head adjustment service check 231
head and carriage assembly 11-6
head assembly removal and replacement 225
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
825958
826065
3/21n5
8/1/75
••
PN
1619301
3741 ML
223
18-3
EC
825853
Date 11/15/74
disk multiplexor, disk attachment 14-2.13
disk operations
theory 14-2.15
timings 245
disk problems, locating 8·7
disk record sequence 9-53
disk, second (special feature) 14-8
disk speed, display (see display disk speed)
disk theory 11-1
disk top cover vertical alignment checks 237
disk track IDs, display (see display disk track
IDs)
disk track record order 8-5
disk unit field replaceable units (FRUs) 11-4
diskette
characteristics 11·13
format description 11·2
handling 11-13
handling precautions 8-14
introduction 10-2
diskettes, CE 8-14
display
attachment 14-2.13
circuit diagram 305
format 704
general MAP 1-20
hex basic 8-40.2
introduction 10-2
operator 9-2
pair of matching record messages 8-15
raster 8-12
test points, oscilloscope 12-6
theory 12-1
yoke adjustment 311
display and display unit symptoms 1-14
display data head alignment, service check 8-15
display disk speed
service .applications 8-3
display to cursor operation 8-3
locate failing machine 8-3
repetitious read 8-3
speed too high 8-3
speed too low 8-3
display disk track IDs
service applications
checking track accessing 8-7
continuous read 8-5
disk drive attachment intermittent
problems 8-6
disk track record order 8-5
faulty tracks 8-5
825958
826065
3/21/75
8/1/75
display disk track IDs (continued)
service applications (continued)
head location 8-5
locate disk problems 8- 7
missing IDs 8-5
sense/command register operation 8-5
display registers 8-9
display theory
formation of characters 12-3
introduction 12-1
display unit
functional circuits 12-4
glossary 1-13
symptoms 1-13
DLE-data link escape, BSCA 14-29
drive motor removal and replacement 214
EBCDIC collating sequence 418
EBSCA 14-68
blocked transmit mode (J) 14-70
cable locations forlD reader, keylock, and
multipoint audible alarm 556
CE test mode 14·72
communication modes
hex display 757
normal display 775
data flow 14-75
diagnostic aids test procedures 8-33
cable wrap (test 2) 8-34
display terminal ID or multipoint address
characters (test 5) 8·36
display transmit buffers (test 6) 8-36
modem wrap (test 3) 8-35
receive and display characters (test 4) 8-35
test 1, transmit continuous character 8-33
test 2, cable wrap 8-34
test 3, modem wrap 8-35
test 4, receive and display
characters 8·35
test 5, display terminal ID or multipoint
address characters 8-36
test 6, display transmit buffers 8-36
transmit continuous character (test 1) 8-33
error codes (flowchart) 9-67
error logout 14-73, 762
errors (see communications errors)
feature cable connectors 558, 559
J
PN 1619302:
3741 ML
18-4
EBSCA (continued)
feature card IClcations 557
feature half planar cable connectors 558, 559
feature half planar socket locations 555
ID reader cable location 556
inquiry mode 14-72
keylock 14;.'79
line control sequences 14-74
mode indicators 14-20
modem cable 14-75
multipoint addressing 561
multipoint feature 14-80
operations flowcharts 9-57
operator t D card reader 14-79
packaging 14-78
receive mode fR) 14-71
reset key 14-72
RDS card 5()0
synchronous c:lock 14-79
terminal identification 14-79
throughput rates 740, 741
transmit modE~ (T or P) (unblocked
data) 14-70
transmit/receive mode (~, D, or K) 14-71
EtA standard intl~rface 14-46
ENQ-enquiry, BSCA 14-28
enter data flowchart (basic machine loop from
power on sequence) 14-2.16
enter flowchart 9-6
enter mode 14-6
EDD, search 14-6
EDT-end of transmission, BSCA 14-28
erase (tunnel), disk drive 11-9
ERP (see error recovery procedures)
error code
description 1-2.1
index 1-2
error indication test, system 8-10
error logout
BSCA 14-2~1
EBSCA 14·~'3
error recovery procedures (ERP) flowchart
3713
3715
9-40.2
9-41
ETB-end of transmission block,
BSCA 14-27
ETX-end of text, BSCA 14-27
exerciser program, 3715 line control 8-26.9
expanded communications (see EBSCA)
expansion feature 14-8
(see also half planar)
3713 printer attachment 14-8
3715 printer attachment 14-12
3717 printer (:ontroller (see 3717 MLM)
II
fau Ity tracks 8-5
feature
BSCA 14-13
data recorder attachment 14-101
EBSCA 14-68
expansion feature 14-8
group A 14-7
I/O adapter 14-111
10 reader 14-44
Katakana (Japan only) 14-12.6
key lock 14-44
printer
3713 14-8
3715 14-12
proof keyboard 14-12.6
record insert 14-7
second disk 14-8
synchronous clock 14-44
terminal 10 14-44
1200 bps line adapter 14-50
feature group E (see expansion feature)
feature half planar
cable socket locations for 10 reader, key lock,
and mUltipoint audible alarm 556
jumpers 16-4
removal and replacement 512
sockets, EBSCA 555
field totals
displaying 9-22
mask statements 9-20
offline, theory 14-7
online, theory 14-7
sample procedure 9-20
writing into records on disks 9-20
file control (FC) card 11-4,204
file transfer
flowchart (I/O adapter) 9-108
operations summary (read or write)
read from attachment theory (I/O
adapter) 14-116
write to attachment theory (I/O
adapter) 14-118
9-109
flowchart
BSCA feature 9-42
copy data set (to EOO) 9-26
copy image (to EOE) 9-31
copy to a specified address 9-28
data recorder attachment diagnostic 8-40
data set label delete 9-5
delete data set label 9-5
delete record 9-15
disk drive power on reset 11-10
disk initialization 9-52
disk initialization, disk check portion 9-50
disk load sequence 14-2.20
EBSCA feature 9-57
enter 9-6
enter data (basic machine loop from power on
sequence) 14-2.16
field totals, offline 9-18
field totals, online 9-23
I/O adapter
file transfer 9-108
read a data set (or data sets) from
attachment 9-102
read a record from attachment 9-98
write a data set (all or in part) to
attach me nt 9-1 00
write a record to attachment using search
address 9-104
write a record to attachment using
search content 9-106
10 reader 9-71
keyboard operation 13-6
modify index 9-4
offline field totals 9-18
online field totals 9-23
operator guidance 9-54
power on and read index 9-3
power on reset for disk drive 11-10
power on sequence and diagnostic
routine 14-2.18
EC 825853
825958
826065
Date 11/15/74
;3/21n5
8/1/75
flowchart (continued)
print a data set (to EOO) 9-37
print a displayed record 9-37
print a record using search address or search
sequential content 9-40
print continued data sets 9-40.1
print part of a data set (to EOO) 9-38
print records by using search content 9-39
production statistics 9-14
program load 9-33
punch a card 9-78
punch a data set (all or in part) 9-82
punch a record (or records) using search
content 9-88
punch a record using search address 9-86
read a card 9-80
read a data set (or data sets), data
recorder 9-84
read index and power on 9-3
record insert 9-56
RFT procedures and TOAT
(BSCA/EBSCA) 8-26.10
search address 9-12
search content and search sequential
content 9-16
search EOO 9-13
self check 9-25
transmit mode (T or P), BSCA 14-15
transmit transparent/receive (IT/R),
BSCA 14-16
transmit/receive (T /R), BSCA 14-16
update 9-8
update, disk drive 11-12
verify (with field correct) 9-10
write operation, enter mode disk drive 11-11
3713 printer error recovery procedures 9-40.2
flowcharting conventions 9-1
flyplate replacement 412
format control characters
data recorder attachment 9-73
I/O adapter 9-91
format description, diskette 11-2
format, data set label 239
forward abort, BSCA 14-31
functional characteristics and features,
IBM 3741 10-3, 14-6
functional units, introduction IBM 3741 10-2
functional units, MPU 14-2.6
fuse chart, secondary 601
PN 1619462
3741 ML
18·5
glossary
complete 17-1
display unit 1-13
m
half planar feature jumpering 16-4
half planar reassembly procedure 506
half planar remove/replace procedure
attachment 508
feature 512
head adjusting tool, CE 8-12,8-39
head adjustment
for track 00 231
service check 208
head alignment service check tracks 8-14
head and carriage assembly 11-6
head and pressure pad cleaning
procedure 209
head load actuator
adjustment 207
description 11-4
service check 207
head locations 226
hex display characters 757
hex display, basic 8-40.2
how to make a program 9-32
how to use the display unit symptom 1-13
how to use this manual 10-5
hub shaft assembly removal and replacement
D
I/O adapter
cable removal and replacement 712
cable wrap diagram 8-48
character transfer flowchart 9-108
character transfer read/write theory
flowchart 14-120
contents 14·111
data flow 14-112
diagnostic diskette 8-45, 8-14
diagnostic wrap program flowchart 8-50
fi Ie transfer
read from attachment theory
flowchart 14-116
summary 9-109
216
EC 825853
825958
826065
Date 11/15/74
3/21/75
811n5
I/O adapter (continued)
file transfer (continued)
write to attachment theory
flowchart 14-118
format control characters 9-91
general description 14-111
input lines 14-113
installation 16-10
interface lines 14-113
introduction 14-111
introduction to errors 1-12
operation 14-111
operations flowcharts
read data set from attachment 9-102
read record from attachment 9-98
write data set to attach ment 9-100
write record to attachment 9-96
output lines 14-113
programs 9-92
record transfer operations, setting up 9-110
record transfer read/write theory 14-115
sample programs 9-94
setting up file transfer 9-110
setting up record transfer operations 9-110
setup for I/O adapter (online) mode 9-'110
summary of file transfer operation (read or
write) 9-109
symptom index 1-12
table of contents 9-91
theory of operation 14-115
theory of operation flowcharts
character transfer read/write
theory 14-120
file transfer read theory 4-116
file transfer write theory 4-118
wrap card 8-39
wrap test
cable wrap diagram 8-48
error code chart 8-47
load and run procedure 8-45
program instruction 8-45
valid error codes 8-45
I/O adapter, operations flowcharts
file transfer 9-108
read a data set (or data sets) from
attachment 9-102
read a record from attachment 9-98
write a data set (all or in part) to
attachment 9-100
write a record to attachment 9-96
write a record to attachment using
search address 9-104
]
PN 1619463
18-6
I/O adapter, operation flowcharts (continued)
write a record to attachment using search
conte nt 9-106
IAR (instruction address register) 14-2.7
IBM modem, cross reference 16-5
IBM 129 cable/connector/pin
chart 14-106
IBM 3741
functional characteristics and features.l
introduction 10-3
functional units, introduction 10-2
IBM 5496 cable/connector/pin chart 14-107
10 card reader, 3741 model 2 14-79
10 reader
cable location, EBSCA 556
flowchart 9-71
locations 51'1
operator 14-44
idler assembly ~
belt tracking 215
removal and replacement 215
index
operating procedures 9-1
val id error codes 1-2
IDs
display disk track 8-3
missing 8-5
indicators, communication display
mode 14-20
input lines
data recorder attachment 14-105
I/O adapter '14-113
inquiry 9-64
inquiry mode, E8SCA 14-72
installation procedure
communications 16-3
data recorder attachment 16-10
I/O adapter 16-10
key module 407
mirror 16-1
space bar 407
3713 printer 16-2
3741
16-1
instruction addre!;s register (lAR) 14-2.7
instruction decode register (lXR) 14-2.7
integrated modem (see 1200 bps line adapter)
interface and cyclle steal,
read/write storage/MPU 14-2.10
interface lines
BSCA 14-24
data recorder attachment 14-105
interface lines (continued)
EIA 14-46
I/O adapter 14-113
modem and LCA 14-48
1200 bps line adapter to coupler 14-57
3713 printer 14-9
37150rinter 14-12.1
3741 BSCA to 1200 bps line adapter 14-56
interlock adjustment, disk cover 220
intermittent disk problems 8-6
introduction 10-1
introduction to I/O adapter errors 1-12
introduction-how to use 10-1
ITS-intermediate transmission block,
BSCA 14-31
IXR (instruction decode register) 14-2.7
D
jumpers
autoanswer card 16-8
BSCA/EBSCA 16-4
feature half planar 16-4
memory 507
multipoint address, EBSCA 16-9
terminal ID, BSCA 562
terminallD, EBSCA 758
1200 bps line adapter board 528
Katakana
feature 14-12.6
keyboard layout 13-8
shift 13-1
switch test 8-9
key codes chart 8-10.1
key detection and decode control 13-2
key modules 13-1
key test
keyboard 8-10
repeat 8-10
shift 8-10
keyboard
assembly/disassembly procedure 407
attachment - 14-2.13
audio feedback control (clicker) 13-2
AUTO DUP/SKIP (ADS) 13-1
AUTO REC ADV (ARA) 13-1
II
LED assembly removal and replacement 223
light emitting diode (LED) assembly and
phototransistor 11-4
limit amplifier and VFO card, disk drive 11-9
limit stop adjustment
lower 232
upper 234
limit stops, disk drive 11-6
line adapter
WT public switched network 14-67
1200 bps
online cable test 8-36.2
receive level check procedures 8-36.5
theory 14-50
line adpater cable test, 1200 bps 8-36.2
line control characters, BSCA 14-26
line control exerciser program, 3715 8-26.9
line control sequences, EBSCA 14-74
line control sequence operations, BSCA 14-32
line coupler cable chart (BSCA) 522
line plate
assembly 14-67
cable and jumpers 530
cable connections, WT PSN 534
cables 531
coupler (WT PSN) 533
WT public switched network 14-67
load program flowchart 9-33
locations
CRT 304
disk cover 224
disk drive 217
EBSCA ROS card 560
feature half planar sockets, EBSCA 555
head 226
ID reader 511
keyboard 407
MPU 504
power supply 604
VFO card 211
1200 bps line adapter 515
logic probe, CE general 8-13
low current, disk drive 11-9
lower limit stop adjustment 232
LCA and modem interface (line levels) 14-48
leadscrew
nut and spring 11-6
service check 242
leadscrew and head carriage assembly removal
and replacement 225
machine characteristics, service hints
machine operations timing 245
keyboard (continued)
cable chart 407
cable pin definitions 13-5
CE mode bit line levels 415
character repeat 13-3
character storage control 13-4
character transfer control 13-4
clicker (audio feedback control)
description 13-2
service check 410
disassembly/assembly and locations 407
flyplate replacement 412
interface decode 13-8
introduction 10-2
Katakana 13-8
Katakana shift 13-1
key detection and decode control 13-2
key module installation and
removal 407
key modules 13-1
key test 8-1 0
layout 13-8
operation flowchart 13-6
printed circuit board 13-1
proof (see proof keyboard feature)
PROG NUM SHIFT 13-1
repeat character 13-3
shift key functions 13-2
space bar removal and installation 407
speed select 13-1
switch circuits (toggle) 411
switch test 8-9
switches 13-1
test points, oscilloscope 13-10
theory 13-1
. toggle switches 13~ 1
keyboard and operational symptoms 1-21
key lock 14-44
cable location, EBSCA 556
EBSCA 14-79
....~_c_8_2b_.O_65--+_ _ _+-__-t1
_
1_Date 8/1 n5
PN 1619592
726
3741 ML
18-7
~E_C
__
82_6_06_5-+_________
~_______~1 PN1619593]
Date 8/1nS
manual answer sequence, 1200 bps line
adapter 537, 14-66
. manual call sequence, 1200 bps line
adapter 538, 14-66
MAP rules summary 10-12,0-6
MAP, general display 1-20
MAPs, how to use 10-8 .
mask statements, field totals 9-20
masks
search 9-16
search content 9-16
search sequential content 9-16
matching record messages, display 8-15
memory card
(see also storage)
Input, output, address control, and voltage
levels 8-10.2
input, output, address control, and voltage
lines 14-2.12
read/write 14-2.10
memory jumpers 507
microcontroller
ALU 14-2.9
buffer interface 14-2.10
IAR 14-2.7
IXR 14-2.7
ROS 14-2.7
storage registers 14-2.7
test points, oscilloscope 14-2.8
theory 14-2.6
microcontroller registers
IAR 14-2.7
IXR 14-2.7
storage 14-2.7
microprocessing unit (see MPU)
mini-12 (see 1200 bps line adapter)
mirror installation 16-1
miscellaneous symptoms 1-24
missing lOs 8-5
MLM, normal service flow 0-3
mode indicators, communications display 14-20
modem and LCA interface (line levels) 14-48
modem cable
BSCA 14-24
ESSCA 14-75
modem cable/BSCA cable (except 1200 bps
line adapter) 14-49
modem cable/BSCA cable chart 552, 718
modem interface to BSCA (line levels) 14-46
modem, line adapter jumpers 16-5
modify index flowchart 9-4
motor and drive 11-6
MPU
ALU (arithmetic logic unit) 14-2.9
basic 212
BSCA controller 14-2.16
cycle steal and read/write storage
interface 14-2.10
data flow 14-2.2
disk attachment 14-2.13
display attachment 14-2.13
feature half planar jumpers 16-4
feature half planar reassembly 506
IAR (instruction address register) 14-2.7
10 reader locations 511
introduction 10-3
IXR (instruction decode register) 14-2.7
keyboard attachment 14-2.13
locations 504
memory jumpers 507
planar removal and replacement 505
power on sequence 14-2.18
read/write storage and cycle steal 14-2.10
registers 14-2.7
ROS (read only storage) 14-2.7
ROS microprogram logic flow 14-2.16
terminal 10 jumpers 510
test patterns 514
theory 14-1
BSCA controller 14-2.16
data flow (simplified) 14-2
functional units 14-2.6
introduction 14-2
operations 14-2.16
3713 printer controller 14-8
3715 printer controller 14-12
3741 system data flow 14-2.2
multipoint
addressing 561, 14-81
alarm 14-81, 556
feature 14-80
multipoint address in feature half planar sockets
Y and Z 561
NAK-negative acknowledgement, BSCA 14-27
non-switched line
transmit level adjustment 16-7
1200 bps line adapter configuration 14-60
1200 bps line adapter operation 14-58
_
3741 ML
normal service flow in use of the MLM
18-8
8-5
m
off hook, 1200 bps line adapter 14-57
offline field totals 9-18, 14-7
mask statements 9-20
sample procedure 9-20
selecting 9-18
writing to records 9-20
online field total!; 9-22, 14-7
online setup for data recorder attachment 9-90
online 1200 bps line adapter cable test 8-36.2
operating procedures (index) 9-1
operating procedlJres flowchart, BSCA 723
operation flowcharts, data recorder
punch a data set 9-82
punch a record 9-78
punch a record using search address 9-86
punch a record using search content 9-88
read a card EI-80
read a data set 9-84
operational and keyboard symptoms 1-21
operational flowcharts
(see also specific features and operations)
BSCA 9-42
data recorder attachment 9-78
EBSCA 9--57
I/O adapter B-96
operator display
codes display 9-2
data set label 9-2
mode of operation 9-2
operator guidance
flowchart 9-54
theory of operation 14-6
operator 10 reader
BSCA 14-44
EBSCA 14-7B
operation sequences, 1200 bps line
adapter/CBS coupler 8-36.14
packaging, BSCA 14-43
PAD
leading (BSCA) 14-26
trailing (BSCA) 14-26
phototransistor assembly
adjustment 243
removal and replacement 243
power on and read index (flowchart) 9-3
power on reset for disk drive (flowchart) 11-10
power on sequence and diagnostic
routine (flowchart) 14-2.18
power supply
ac voltage distribution (with diode
board) 15-2
ac voltage distribution (without diode
board) 15-4
dc voltage distribution 15-8, 613
field replaceable un its (F R Us) 15-1
introduction 10-3
locations 604
printed circuit board (with diode board) 15-6
printed circuit board (without diode
board) 15-7
theory 15-1
wiring diagram 604
preload spring, disk drive 11-6
print
continued data sets 9-40.1
data set (to EOD) 9-37
displayed record (flowchart) 9-37
part of a data set (to EOD) (flowchart) 9-38
record using search add ress or search
sequential content (flowchart) 9-40
records -by using search content
(flowchart) 9-39
unattended 9-66
printer
jumpers, feature half planar 16-4
3715 featur~ half planar jumpers 16-4
3715 power cables 503
printer (3715) operations with 3741
features 9-34.7
printer controller
test points
3713 (oscilloscope) 14-11
3715 (oscilloscope) 14-12.3
3713, theory 14-8
3715, theory 14-12
3717, theory (see 3717 MLM)
printer diagnostic programs, 3715 8-26
printer error recovery procedures
3713 9-40.2
3715 9-41
printer formatting example 9-35
printer line control exerciser program,
3715 8-26.9
printer operations with 3741 features 9-34.7
printer programs, 3713
considerations 9-34
control characters 9-34
data stream formatting 9-34.1
loading 9-34
sample 9-35
printer programs, 3715
control characters 9-34.2
data stream formatting 9-34.7
expanded communications 9-34.7
loading 9-34.2
operations with 3741 features 9-34.7
sample 9~35
printer test programs
3713 8-16
3715 8-26.2
probe, logic 8-13
production statistics 14-7
enter mode 9-14
read index mode 9-14
theory 14-7
PROG NUM SHIFT (PNS)'switch 13-1
program
chaining 14-6
code chart 9-32
data recorder attachment test 8-43
how to make 9-32
load 9-33
preparation 9-32
record length 9-32
sample 9-32
sample for data recorder 9-76
storage area 14-6
3715 printer line control exerciser 8-26.9
programs
data recorder 9-74
diagnostic 8-,40
sample 9-76
I/O adapter 9-92
3i'3 printer 9-34
371~':lrinter test 8-16
3715 printer 9-34.2
3715 printer diagnostic 8-26
3715 printer test 8-26.2
proof keyboard special feature 14-12.6
descripticn 14-12.6
layout 'j 3-8
public switched network, WT 14-67
pulley and belt, disk drive, removal and
replacement 213
punch
data set 9-82
data translation 14-109
operation 14-103
record 9-78
using search address 9-86
using search content 9-88
punch a record 9-78
punch a record (or records) using search
content 9-88
punch a record using search address 9-86
punch operation, data recorder
attach ment 14-103
R/W memory card (input, output, address
control, and voltage levels) 14-2.12, 8-10.2
R/W storage diagram 1 8-11
raster display, CE pins 8-12
read
card 9-80
data set (or data sets), data recorder 9-84
data set (or data sets) from attachment,
I/O adapter 9-102
from attachment, file transfer 14-116
index 9-3
operation, data recorder attachment 14-101
translation and compare, data recorder
attachment 14-108
read a card operational flowchart, data
recorder attachment 9-80
read a data set (or data sets) flowchart, data
recorder attachment 9-84
read a data set (or data sets) from attachment
(I/O adapter) 9-102
read from attachment, file transfer 14-116
read index and power on flowchart 9-3
read only storage (ROS) 14-2.7
read operation, data recorder attachment 14-101
read translation and compare, data recorder
attachment 14-108
read/write
memory card 14-2.10
storage test for models 1 and 2 8-10.2
storage/MPU interface and cycle steal 14-2.10
theory, character transfer 14-120
E_C_8_26_0_6S_t_ _~_ _
Date ,811 ns
t
---I1
_
PN 2772660
3741 ML
18-9
lEe 826065
Oat. 8/1/75
receive data (R D)
E;IA standard interface 14·46
1200 bps line adapter 14·56
receive functional flowchart,
communications 725
receive level check procedures, 1200 bps line
adapter 8·36.5
receive mode (R)
BSCA 14·19
eBSCA 14·71
record
delete 9·15
insert
flowchart 9·56
theory 14-7
length 14·6
order, disk track 8-5
sequences, disk 9·53
transfer read/write theory, I/O adapter 14-115
registers
display 8-9
MPU 14·2.7
removal and replacement
attachment half planar 508
cable, data recorder/I/O adapter/printer 712
collet assembly 222
data recorder attachment cable 712
disk drive cover 221
disk drive pulley and belt 213
drive motor 214
feature half planar 512'
head carriage and leadscrew 225
hub and shaft assembly 216
I/O adapter 'cable 712
idler assembly 216
leadscrew and head carriage assembly 225
LED assembly 223
MPU planar 606
phototransistor 'assembly 243
stepper motor 229
removal procedures
key module 407
space bar 407
repeat (REP) key
description 13·3
test 8·10
replacement, flyplate 412
request for test (see RFT)
request to send (RTS)
EIA standard interface 14·46
1200 bps line adapter 14-56
I
reset key, EBSCA 14·72
RFT (request for test) procedure 1 8·26.12.
RFT (request for test) procedure 2 8·26.14
RFT (request for test) procedure 3 8·26.16
RFT (request for test) procedure 4 8·28
RFT procedures and TDAT
(BSCA/EBSCA) 8·26.10
procedure 1 8·26.12
procedure 2 8·26.14
procedure 3 8-26.16
procedure 4 8·28
ring indicator (switched line only), RI
EIA standard interface 14·46
1200 bps line adapter-to coupler 14·57
3741 to 1200 bps line adapter 14·56
ROS (read only storage)
base machine 14·2.7
EBSCA 560
microprogram logic flow 14-2.16
rules, MAP summary 0-6
RVI-reverse interrupt, BSCA 14-29
m
safety
CRT 0-3
practices 0·3
scope points
3713 printer 14-11
3715 printer 14·12.3
search
address 9-12, 14·6
content 9·16, 14·6
data address 14·6
EOD 9·13, 14·6
sequential content 9·16, 14·6
second disk 14·8
select communications mode 9·69
selecting CE display mode 8·1
self check (modulus 10 and modulus 11)
flowchart 9·26
theory 14· 7, 9·24
sense bit definitions 8·6
sense/command register operation 8·5
serdes, disk attachment 14·2.13
service aids, 3741 with 1200 bps line adapter/CBS
coupler 8-36.12
PN 2772661
3741 ML
18-10
service check
clicker 410
data head alignment 8·15
disk top cover 237
display data head alignment 8-16
head adjustment 208
head alignment 8·14
head load actuator 207
leadscrew 242
service hints, machine characteristics 726
service pages, how to use 10·10
set·up, communications 9·58
set-up, data recorder attachment mode 9-90
setup for card I/O (online) mode 9-90
setup for I/O adapter (online) mode 9·110
shift key
functions 13·2
test 8..;10
signal ground (SG)
14-46
EIA standard interface 14·46
1200 bps line adapter 14-56
SOH-start of heading, BSCA 14-26
space bar removal and installation 407
special features, 3741
expansion feature 14-8
second disk 14·8
3713 printer controller 14-8
3715 printer controller 14-12
3717 printer controller 14-8
feature group A 14-7
disk initialization 14-7
field totals (offline) 14-7
field totals (onl ine) 14·7
production statistics 14·7
record insert 14·7
self check (modulus 10 and modulus
11) 14·7
verify 14·7
Katakana 14-12.6
proof keyboard 14·12.6
speed select (SS) switch 13·1
start of call 1·1
status message, BSCA 14·39
stepper motor
adjustment 230 .
description 11·6
removal and replacement 229
storage
(see also memory)
accessing 14-2.11
card (see memory card)
storage (continued)
diagram, R/W 8-11
registers 14-2.7
test for models 1 and 2 8-10.2
STX-start of text, BSCA 14-26
summary of file transfer operations (read or
write) 9-109
switch hook, 1200 bps line adapter 14-57
switch test, keyboard 8-9
switched line
adjustment (WTC) 540
configuration, 1200 bps line adapter 14-64
operation, 1200 bps line adapter 14-62
transmit level adjustment 16-6
symptom index
data recorder errors 1-11
error code description 1-2.1
how to use 10-5
I/O adapter errors 1-12
index of valid error codes 1-2
symptoms
display unit 1-13
keyboard and operational 1-21
miscellaneous 1-24
operational and keyboard 1-21
SYN-synchronous idle, BSCA 14-26
synchronous clock
BSCA 14-44
EBSCA 14-79
system error indication test 8-10
II
table of contents
BSCA theory 14-13
I/O adapter 9-91
TDAT and R FT procedures
(BSCA/EBSCA) 8-26.10
TDAT, 1200 bps line adapter test
procedure 8-36.3
teleprocessing diagnostic analyzer tester (see
TDAT)
terminal assembly probe 8-39
terminal identification (J D)
BSCA 14-44
EBSCA 14-79
terminate communications 9-63
termination with error (communications) 9-70
test
keyboard key 8-10
read/write storage for models 1 and 2 8-10.2
test (continued)
repeat key 8-10
shift key 8-10
system error indication 8-10
test mode 2 procedure, BSCA 550
test point, file control card 204
test points, oscilloscope
disk drive 11-14
display 12-6
keyboard 13-10
microcontroller 14-2.8
3713 printer controller 14-11
3715 printer controller 14-12.3
test procedure
diagnostic aids (EBSCA) 8-33
1200 bps line adapter TDAT 8-36.3
test programs
data recorder attachment 8-43
3713 printer 8-16
3715 printer 8-26.2
3717 printer (see 3717 MLM)
theory
BSCA 14-13
disk 11-1
display 12-1
EBSCA 14-68
I/O adapter 14-111
data flow 14-112
input lines 14-113
operation 14-115
output lines 14-113
keyboard 13-1
MPU 14-1
power 15-1
timings, disk operations 245
tools, CE 8-12, 8-39
track
accessing check 8-7
IDs, display disk 8-3
tracks, faulty 8-5
transmit data, 1200 bps line adapter 14-56
transmit level
adjustment
non-switched line 16-7
switched line 16-6
1200 bps line adapter 520
transmit mode
BSCA 14-15
EBSCA
blocked data 14-71
unblocked data 14-70
transmit/receive mode
BSCA 14-16
EBSCA 14-71
transmit, functional flowchart 724
TID-temporary text delay, BSCA 14-30
III
update
description 14-6
flowchart 9-8
flowchart, disk drive 11-12
upper limit stop adjustment 234
variable frequency oscillator (VFO) card 11-4
verify 14-7
verify with field correct (flowchart) 9-10
VFO card, disk attachment
location 211
theory 14-2.13
voltage checkout procedures 750
voltage distribution
ac with diode board 15-2
ac without diode board 15-4
dc 15-8
voltmeter accuracy check, CE 8-12
volume label test, disk load sequence 14-4
WACK-wait before transmit positive
acknowledgement 14-30
wrap adapter
BSCA cable 766, 551
modem cable 766
write a data set (all or in part) to attachment
(I/O adapter) 9-100
write a record to attachment (llO adapter) 9-96
using search address 9-104
using search content 9~106
write data, disk drive 11-9
write gate test, disk load sequence 14-3
write operation, enter mode flowchart 11-11
write trigger, disk attachment 14-2.13
write to attach ment, 'file transfer 14-118
writing field totals .into records on disks 9-20
E_C__8_2_60_6_S~I______+-____
r
Date
8/1 ns
_
-11 ~N
_
2772662
3741 ML
18-11
lEe
WT PSN (public switched network) 14-67
autoanswer sequence 539
line plate and cable connections 534
line plate cable and jumpers 530
line plate coupler 533
line plate functional schematic 536
manual answer sequence 537
manual call sequence 538
switched lines adjustment 540
1200 bps line adapter 535
yoke adjustment
311
129 data recorder
(see also data recorder attachment)
attachment card plugging 713
cable/connector/pin chart 14-106
installation procedure 16-10
1200 bps integrated modem (see 1200 bps
line adapter)
1200 bps line adapter
autoanswer cards jumpers 523, 524
board jumpering 528
board locations 528
BSCA cable 14-53
cable chart (BSCA) 521
call sequence 14-66
equalizer card and line adapter board
jumpers 532
input requirements 14-50
interface from 3741 BSCA 14-56
interface to coupler 14-57
'interface - non-switched 14-52
interface - switched line 14-54
line cQupler cable 14-55
line plate cable and jumpers 530
line plate cables 531
location 14-50,515
modem cable/BSCA cable - switched 14-55
non-switched
configuration 14-60
operation 14-58
transmit level adjustment 527
online cable test 8-36.2
receive level check procedures 8-36.5
/
8260651
1200 bps line adapter (continued)
service position 16-8
switched line
configuration 14-64
operation 14-62
transmit level adjustment 520
TDAT test procedure 8-36.3
WT PSN (schematic) 535
1200 bps line adapter/CBS coupler
operating sequences 8-36.14
problems with interface to coupler 8-37
service aids 8-36.12
3713 printer
controller 14-8
error recovery procedures (ERP)
flowchart 9-40.2
feature half planar 14-10
installation 16-2
interface data flow 14-10
jumpers 16-4
programs 9-34
test points (oscilloscope) 14-11
test programs 8-16
3715 printer
cables and jumpers feature half planar 583
controller 14-12
diagnostic programs 8-26
error recovery procedures (ERP)
flowchart 9-41
jumpers 16-4
'line control exerciser program 8-26.9
operation with 3741 feature 9-34.7
programs 9-34.2
test points (oscilloscope) 14-12.3
test programs 8-26.2
3717 printer (see 3717 MLM)
3740 data entry system, introduction 10-1
3741 features
expansion (E) 14-8
group A 14-7
3741 functional characteristics 14-6
3741 I/O adapter wrap card, tools 8-39
3741 installation procedure 16-1
3741 model 2 features with EBSCA
I D card reader 14-79
keylock 14-79
synchronous clock 14-79
terminal identification 14-79
3741 special features 14-7
3741 system data flow 14-2.2
3741 - use of the M key (BSCA) 14-42
3872 modem, BSCA 9-49
5496 data recorder
attachment card plugging 713
cable/connector/pin chart 14-107
PN 2772663
3741 ML
18·12
RPQ (SPECIAL FEATURE)
There are no RPQs installed on this machine. Return
to p~ge ,-, and check the N box.
~t.
lEe
8231461
9115n4
PN 1619303
3741 ML
31-1
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2011:10:06 16:26:51-08:00 Modify Date : 2011:10:06 17:40:23-07:00 Metadata Date : 2011:10:06 17:40:23-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.46 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:0574f002-d6a2-4aa8-9c0d-d6acc4fd06e4 Instance ID : uuid:c1681879-b29c-497b-8f1e-57da3464cb24 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 599EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools